Contents

Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual PDF

1 of 1740
1 of 1740

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual PDF

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that failure to observe CAUTION may lead to a serious accident depending on the circumstances. Make sure to observe both warnings and cautions to ensure personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled. [GT2105-Q] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. [GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, GS21] The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an unintended operation of the touch switch. For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated. The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, and GS21.)

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27] Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. [GT25, GT23, GT21, GS21] Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause a touch switch near the touched points to operate unexpectedly, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. (1) For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU again to reestablish communication. (2) For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the system configuration. [GT27, GT25, GT23] When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. [GT21, GS21] Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is 192.168.3.18. The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.

When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different network.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or

removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27, GT25 Only)

3

4

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque

range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W] Specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) [GT2505-V, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm) Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)] When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 1. When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom. To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands. [GT25-W] When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. [GT2103-P] When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)] Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W] Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2105-Q] Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover to the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly.

For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section. Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet. Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a failure or malfunction.

When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm). Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings. The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature, dust, humidity, or vibrations.

Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and vibrations, its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments. Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen. The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature. Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

5

6

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following

points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, cross-sectional area of the ground cable: 2.0 mm2 or more). (GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, and GS21 do not have the LG terminal.) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm) [GS21] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring.Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and

tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing

the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the operating procedure. During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

7

8

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result. Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power. Before cleaning, check the following items. Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel. Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable). If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately. In such a case, do not use the GOT.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

WARNING Do not remove the SD card from drive A while the SD card is being accessed by the GOT, or the GOT

may stop processing for about 20 seconds. During this stop, you cannot operate the GOT, and the functions running in the background, including the screen refresh, alarm, logging, and script, also stop. This stop may affect the system operation, causing an accident. Before removing the SD card, check the following items. [GT27, GT25, GT23 (Except for GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] Before removing the SD card, check that the SD card access LED is off. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card.Not doing so may damage the SD card and files. [GT21, GS21] Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or the system operation may be affected. Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

CAUTION Do not remove the data storage from the GOT while the data storage is being accessed by the GOT,

or the data storage and files may be damaged. Before removing the data storage, check the SD card access LED, relevant system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

[GT27, GT25, GT23 (Except for GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT21, GS21] After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

9

10

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

CAUTION When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop

out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly. Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. (GT27, GT25, and GT2107-W)

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

CAUTION Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly.

Doing so may result in a failure. Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card.

Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative. The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection

function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT Mobile function. If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the remote operation, leading to an accident. In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases. Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety.

When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand. Not doing so may cause an accident.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple

pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function. You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.) Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the control by screen. A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be

exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

11

12

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

CHAPTER 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 34 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 GOT Ethernet Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 I/F communication setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Checking the package data writing on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Option unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Conversion cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Serial multi-drop connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Field network adapter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Precautions when installing units on top of one another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 GOT connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Coaxial cable connector connection method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Terminating resistors of GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Check on the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Check on GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Check on GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Check on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

PART 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 92 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

C O

N TE

N TS

2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 2.7 Connection to the Head Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

CHAPTER 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 117 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Connection to Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 When connecting via the serial communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 When connecting via the extension base unit for the redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

3.2 MELSEC Q Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 CC-Link connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (Network systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 CC-Link IE controller network connection (Network system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Connection to the redundant type extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

3.3 MELSEC Redundant Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CHAPTER 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 217 4.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

4.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Connection to Ethernet module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Connection to Display I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Connection to Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Connection through a servo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

4.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 GOT Ethernet Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

4.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

13

14

Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Connection to MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Connection to Ethernet module (Q/L Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Connection to C Controller module (Q Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Connection to Ethernet module (QnA Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Connection to Ethernet module (A Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Connection to Ethernet module (FX Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Connection to Display I/F (CNC C70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Connection to built-in Ethernet port of Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Connection to Motion module through Built-in Ethernet port of PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

4.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

CHAPTER 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 375 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Connection to QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Connection to QnACPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Connection to ACPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Connection to FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Connection to WSCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Connection to the Motion CPU (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

5.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

5.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

5.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GX Works2 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

5.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

CHAPTER 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 435 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Serial communication module/Computer link module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Connection to QCPU (Q mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Connection to QCPU (A mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

C O

N TE

N TS

Connection to QnACPU (QnACPU type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Connection to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Connection to ACPU (AnCPU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

6.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

6.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Connecting to MELSEC-A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

6.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

CHAPTER 7 BUS CONNECTION 487 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Connection to QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Connection to QnACPU or AnCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Connection to A0J2HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Connection to Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

7.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

7.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Turning the GOT ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Reset switch on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Position of the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When designing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 When assigning GOT I/O signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Connection to a QCPU (Q mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Connection to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Connection to multiple GOTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Connection to a Q4ARCPU redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 When monitoring Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

CHAPTER 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 535

8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

15

16

MELSECNET/H network module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Connection to optical loop system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Connection to the coaxial bus system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

8.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Connection to MELSECNET/H network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

8.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

CHAPTER 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 589 9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Motion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

9.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 [Parameter] in GX Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Firmware versions and supported functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 How to check the firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Precautions for firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

9.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

CHAPTER 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 619 10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Connection to optical loop system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

10.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

C O

N TE

N TS

Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

CHAPTER 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 659 11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Routing parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

CHAPTER 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 689 12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 CC-Link module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

12.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

12.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Connection to MELSEC-A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F and MELSEC-FX Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

17

18

CHAPTER 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 777 13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

PLC/Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 CC-Link module/peripheral module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Connection to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

13.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

13.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

13.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Connection AJ65BT-G4-S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Connection AJ65BT-R2N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 [Network parameter] of GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

13.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

PART 3 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 808 14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 14.2 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 MELIPC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 MELIPC Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

14.4 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

CHAPTER 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 833 15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 15.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Connection to FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), or FR-V500(L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838 Connection to FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J, FR-D700, or FR-F700PJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 Connection to FR-E700 or sensorless servo (FR-E70EX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 Connection to FR-A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 Connection to FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 Connection to MELIPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 FREQROL series inverter side settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

C O

N TE

N TS

Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

15.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 Connection to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 GOT Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 PLC side settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916

15.5 Connection through a PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 Inverter side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

15.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Direct connection to inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Connection to inverter through PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

CHAPTER 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 923 16.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 16.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

Connection to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 Connection to the MELSERVO-J2M Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Connection to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-A Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Servo amplifier side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944

16.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-J5 or JET series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Servo amplifier side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

16.4 Connection through a PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Connection to MELSERVO-J4 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Connection to MELSERVO-JE-B series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

16.5 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Direct connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Connection through Motion controller or PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

16.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

19

20

CHAPTER 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 975 17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 17.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

Connection to robot controller (CR800-D, CRnD-700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 17.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 GOT Ethernet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Connection to robot controller (CR800-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Connection to robot controller (CRnD-700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

17.5 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

CHAPTER 18 CNC CONNECTION 991 18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

18.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

18.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 GOT Ethernet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Connected Ethernet controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 MELSECNET/10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 CC-Link(ID) connection to MELDAS C6/C64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 CC-Link(ID) connection to M800/M80, M700VS/M70V series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

18.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 MELSECNET/10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 CC-Link (ID) connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

CHAPTER 19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 1019 19.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 19.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

Connection to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 19.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 19.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Setting the communication interface (Controller setting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

C O

N TE

N TS

19.5 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Connection to laser displacement sensor MH11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

19.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

PART 4 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 1026 20.1 CPU that can be Monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 20.2 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

Direct CPU connection (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Serial communication connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

20.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

20.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045

20.5 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Write the OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Setting switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

20.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

CHAPTER 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 1063 21.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 21.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Connection to PLC via RS-232 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Connection to PLC via RS-422 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

21.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

21.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078

21.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082

PART 5 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

CHAPTER 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1086 22.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 22.2 System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088

Example of bus connection or serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 Example of multi-channel Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090

22.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Basics of interface selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 General flow from system selection to drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093

21

22

Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 Setting for communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 Items to be checked before starting drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110

22.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

PART 6 FA TRANSPARENT

CHAPTER 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1118 23.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 23.2 Compatible Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 23.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

GX Series, MX Series, for C Controller module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 PX Developer, GX Configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 MT Developer, MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 FR Configurator, FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN-L, FX Configurator-EN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 RT ToolBox2, RT ToolBox3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 NC Configurator2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

23.5 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

23.6 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Setting communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 Accessing by GX Works3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 Accessing by CW Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 Accessing the PLC by the PX Developer, GX Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 Accessing by GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 Accessing by GX LogViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299 Accessing by the MT Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301 Accessing by the MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Accessing by RT ToolBox3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 Accessing by NC Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Accessing by MX Component (MX Sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

C O

N TE

N TS

Accessing by MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353 23.8 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Precautions common to each software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360 When using GX Works3, GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 When using MT Developer, MT Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 When using FR Configurator, FR Configurator2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366

APPENDIX 1367 Appendix 1 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367

Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 [MELSEC iQ-F] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] . . . . . 1480 [MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498 [MELSEC-L]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 [MELSEC-A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 [MELSEC-FX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 [MELSEC-WS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527 [MELIPC] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 [MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 [MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 [MELSERVO-J2S-*A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 [MELSERVO-J3-*A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 [MELSERVO-J3-*T]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586 [MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 [MELSERVO-JE-*C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639 [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657 [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692 [FREQROL 800] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701 [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1731 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1735 Intellectual Property Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1736

23

24

INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT). Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT for correct use. Manuals for GT Works3 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons

Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software. If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to the engineering tool.

Screen design software-related manuals

Connection manuals

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Installation Instructions - PDF

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG (1D7ML9)

PDF e-Manual

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG (1D7MJ8)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081200ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG (1D7MS9)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF e-Manual

GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 series user's manuals

GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals

Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF e-Manual

MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG (1D7MJ5)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG (1D7MJ6)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG (1D7MJ7)

PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number Format GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF

e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Fundamentals)

SH-082072ENG (1D7MV1)

PDF e-Manual

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Screen Details)

SH-082074ENG (1D7MV3)

PDF e-Manual

25

26

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.

GOT GOT2000 series Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD -

GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA GT2712-STWA GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWD

GT2710-S GT2710-STBA GT2710-STBD

GT2708-S GT2708-STBA GT2708-STBD

GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTWA GT2710-VTBD GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD

GT25 All GT25 models -

GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

-

GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA GT2512F-STND

GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTWA GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD

GT25HS-V Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD -

GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD -

GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA GT2310-VTBD

-

GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA GT2308-VTBD

GOT SIMPLE series

GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series

GT21 All GT21 models -

GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

-

GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS

-

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD -

GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD -

GT2104-PMBDS -

GT2104-PMBDS2 -

GT2104-PMBLS -

GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD -

GT2103-PMBDS -

GT2103-PMBDS2 -

GT2103-PMBLS -

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N

GS2107-WTBD-N -

GS21-W GS2110-WTBD GS2107-WTBD

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series GOT-F900 Series

-

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable

27

28

Communication unit

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD

Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD

Battery GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC GT25-12WPSGC GT25-12PSGC GT25-10WPSGC GT25-10PSGC GT25-08PSGC GT21-07WPSGC GT25T-07WPSVC GT25-05PSGC GT25-05PSGC-2 GT21-05PSGC GT21-04RPSGC-UC GT21-03PSGC-UC GT21-04PSGC-UC GT27-15PSCC GT25-12WPSCC GT25-12PSCC GT25-10WPSCC GT25-10PSCC GT25-08PSCC GT25-05PSCC GT25-05PSCC-2 GT25-12PSCC-UC GT25-10PSCC-UC GT25-08PSCC-UC GT21-07WPSCC GT21-05PSCC GT21-04RPSCC-UC GT21-04PSCC-UC GT21-03PSCC-UC GT16H-60PSC GT14H-50PSC

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC GT25-10PSAC GT25-08PSAC

Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS GT25F-10ESGS GT25F-08ESGS

Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO GT20-12PCO GT20-10PCO GT20-08PCO GT21-12WPCO GT21-10WPCO GT21-07WPCO GT25T-07WPCO GT25-05PCO GT25-05PCO-2 GT05-50PCO GT21-04RPCO GT10-30PCO GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV GT25-05UCOV GT21-WUCOV

29

30

Software Software related to GOT

Software related to iQ Works

Stand GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT05-50STAND GT25-10WSTAND GT21-07WSTAND GT25T-07WSTAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98 GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-77 GT21-04RATT-40

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV GT14H-50ESCOV

Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series

GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)

Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND-GTSV-MZ)

GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)

GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)

GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA

GOT Mobile function license for GT SoftGOT2000 License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K- WEBSKEY-)

GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000

GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)

GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SW DND-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) ( represents a version.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software ( represents a version.)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Other software

License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GX Works3 SW DND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software

( represents a version.)

GX Works2 SW DNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software ( represents a version.)

Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3

GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

GX Simulator SW D5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions) ( represents a version.)

GX Developer SW D5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW (-V) type software package ( represents a version.)

GX LogViewer SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package ( represents a version.)

MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M) ( represents a version.)

PX Developer SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control ( represents a version.)

MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNDMTW2-E) ( represents a version.)

MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series ( represents a version.)

CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU (SWDND-RCCPU-E) ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator2 SW DNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SW DND-FRC2-E) ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE) ( represents a version.)

NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool

FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software package for FX3U-20SSCH (SW D5CFXSSCE) ( represents a version.)

FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)

MX Component MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA) ( represents a version.)

MX Sheet MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA) ( represents a version.)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key GT27-SGTKEY-U

31

32

Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation

AZBIL Azbil Corporation

OMRON OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION

SHARP Sharp Corporation

SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION

SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO., LTD.

PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.

HIRATA Hirata Corporation

FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.

YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CLPA CC-Link Partner Association

GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS HMS Industrial Networks

LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA

SICK SICK AG

SIEMENS Siemens AG

SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.

PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company

Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company

Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company

Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company

Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company

TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Generic term for the following CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules and CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

33

34

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface Page 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Page 59 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 64 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Page 74 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Page 76 Checking for Normal Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.

1. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings

2. Writing the package data Write the project data, system application onto the GOT. Page 57 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

3. Verifying the package data Verify the project data, system application are properly written onto the GOT. Page 58 Checking the package data writing on GOT

4. Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the connection cable according to the connection type. Page 59 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 64 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Each chapter System Configuration Each chapter Connection Diagram

5. Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Page 74 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

6. Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, etc. Page 76 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 35

36

When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator can be reflected to the project of GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator. For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator, refer to the following. Help of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes

to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT Designer3, refer to the following (3).

When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set [Set by GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Configuration detailed information input] in MELSOFT Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works Interaction] tab.

However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator. Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of MELSOFT Navigator.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.

Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Page 1086 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 37

38

Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].

Setting [Driver] The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. For the settings, refer to the following. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Item Description Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 39 Setting [Controller Type]

I/F Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 49 Setting [I/F]

Driver Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 38 Setting [Driver] When multiple communication drivers can be selected, this item is displayed. When only one communication driver can be selected, the driver name is displayed under [Detail Setting].

Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [Controller Type] The type differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following.

Type Model name [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT,CR800-D] [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT,CR800-D]

R00CPU R01CPU R02CPU R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU

R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU

R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU R16PSFCPU R32PSFCPU R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU

R12CCPU-V

R102WCPU-W

CNC C80 *2

(R16NCCPU-S1)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CR800-D

MR-J5-B*1

MR-J5-B-RJ*1

MR-J5W2-B*1

MR-J5W3-B*1

MR-J5-G*6

MR-J5-G-RJ*6

MR-J5W2-G*6

MR-J5W3-G*6

MR-J4-B*1

MR-J4-B-RJ*1

MR-J4W2-B*1

MR-J4W3-B*1

MR-J4-GF*1

MR-J4-GF-RJ*1

MR-JE-*B *1

MR-JE-*BF *1

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 39

40

[MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT,CR800-D] [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT,CR800-D]

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4*5

FR-A82 *4*5

FR-A86 *4*5

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4*5

FR-A82-GN *4*5

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4*5

FR-F82 *4*5

FR-F86 *4*5

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4*5

[MELSEC iQ-F] FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

MR-J4-*B *1

MR-JE-*B *1

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q04UDPVCPU

Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1

MR-MQ100

CNC C70 *2

(Q173NCCPU)

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 41

42

[MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

Q00JCPU

Q00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU

QS001CPU

MR-J5-B*1

MR-J5-B-RJ*1

MR-J5W2-B*1

MR-J5W3-B*1

MR-J4-B*1

MR-J4-B-RJ*1

MR-J4W2-B*1

MR-J4W3-B*1

MR-J4-GF*1

MR-J4-GF-RJ*1

MR-JE-*B *1

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4

FR-A82 *4

FR-A86 *4

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4

FR-A82-GN *4

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4

FR-F82 *4

FR-F86 *4

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6*] Q2ACPU

Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

Q4ARCPU

Q2ASCPU

Q2ASCPU-S1

Q2ASHCPU

Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELDAS C6 (FCA C6) MELDAS C64 (FCA C64)

M700VS/M70V

M800/M80

[MELSEC-L] L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P NZ2GF-ETB

MR-J4-*B *1

MR-JE-*B *1

MR-JE-*BF *1

FR-E70-NE *4

FR-A80 *4

FR-A82 *4

FR-A86 *4

FR-A80-E *4

FR-A82-E *4

FR-A86-E *4

FR-A80-GF *4

FR-A82-GF *4

FR-A80-GN *4

FR-A82-GN *4

FR-A80-CRN *4

FR-A82-CRN *4

FR-A80-R2R *4

FR-A82-R2R *4

FR-A80-AWH*4

FR-A80-LC*4

FR-A80-E-CRN *4

FR-A82-E-CRN *4

FR-A80-E-R2R *4

FR-A82-E-R2R *4

FR-A80-E-AWH*4

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR-F80 *4

FR-F82 *4

FR-F86 *4

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4

FR-E80-E *4

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 43

44

[MELSEC-A] A2UCPU

A2UCPU-S1

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU

A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUR21

A2ACPU-S1

A2ACPUP21-S1

A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU

A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU

A1NCPUP21

A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU

A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

A2USCPU

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SHCPU

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

A0J2HCPU

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

A273UCPU

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[MELSEC-A] A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

[MELSEC-FX] FX0

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

[MELSEC-WS] WS0-CPU0

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

[MELIPC] MI5122-VW

[MELSERVO-J2M-P8A] MR-J2M-P8A

[MELSERVO-J2M-*DU] MR-J2M-*DU

[MELSERVO-J2S-*A] MR-J2S-*A

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] MR-J2S-*CP

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] MR-J2S-*CL

[MELSERVO-J3-*A] MR-J3-*A

[MELSERVO-J3-*T] MR-J3-*T

[MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] MR-J4-*A MR-JE-*A

[MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] MR-J4-*A-RJ

[MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] MR-J5-G(-RJ) MR-J5W2-G MR-J5W3-G MR-J5D-*G4 MR-JET-G

[MELSERVO-JE-*C] MR-JE-*C

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 45

46

[FREQROL 500/700/800 Series, SENSORLESS SERVO] FR-A50(L)

FR-F50(L)

FR-V50(L)

FR-E50(C)

FR-E50S

FR-E50W

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C)

FR-S50S(E)(-R)

FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F50J(F)

FR-D70

FR-D70S

FR-D70W

FR-F70PJ(F)

FR-E70

FR-E70S

FR-E70W

FR-A70 *3

FR-F70

FR-F70P

FR-A80 *3

FR-A82 *3

FR-A86 *3

FR-A80-E *3

FR-A82-E *3

FR-A86-E *3

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FR-E70EX

MD-CX522-K(-A0)

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[FREQROL 800] FR-A80 *3

FR-A82 *3

FR-A86 *3

FR-A80-E *3

FR-A82-E *3

FR-A86-E *3

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FRE80-E

[FREQROL 800/E700NE (Batch monitor)] FR-E70-NE

FR-A80

FR-A82

FR-A86

FR-A80-GF

FR-A82-GF

FR-A80-E

FR-A82-E

FR-A86-E

FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN

FR-A80-R2R

FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-AWH

FR-A80-LC

FR-A80-E-CRN

FR-A82-E-CRN

FR-A80-E-R2R

FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-A80-E-AWH

FR-A80-E-LC

FR-F80

FR-F82

FR-F86

FR-F80-E

FR-F82-E

FR-E80

FRE80-E

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 47

48

*1 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion controller or Simple Motion module. *2 The models cannot be connected with GT21 and GS21. *3 The GOT supports the FR-B/B3 series which is the explosion proof type of FR-A700 series and FR-A800 series. *4 The models are connected to the GOT through a PLC. *5 The models can be connected as a remote station of CC-Link IE TSN. *6 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion module.

[Laser Displacement Sensor MH11] MH11CTMF-N

MH11CTMF-NNA

MH11CTMF-P

MH11CTMF-PNA

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: In the case of the GT27)

Extension interface

Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 49

50

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by using the following network. 1) GOT IP Address Setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the standard port with a built-in GOT, or port 1. Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the extended port (the Ethernet interface for the Ethernet communication module), or port 2 with a built-in GOT. When using the GOT other than GT25-W, BootOS Version Z or later is required to use the extended port. For details on writing the BootOS, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Wireless LAN Set [GOT IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.], and [Transparent Port No.] for the wireless LAN interface. 2) GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.] 3) IP Filter Setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off.

GOT IP Address Setting Set the GOT IP address.

[Standard Port] or [Port 1] The following shows an example for [Standard Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Standard Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet standard port setting The GOT Ethernet standard port settings are applied on GOT. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.3.18)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[Extended Port], or [Port 2] The following shows an example for [Extended Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Extended Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet extended port setting The GOT Ethernet extended port settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Ethernet extended port Enable the ethernet extended port. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.5.22)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 51

52

[Wireless LAN] 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet

Setting] window.

2. On the [Wireless LAN] tab, configure the following settings.

GOT IP address For GOT IP address of each Ethernet setting, set a value that network system is different from each other. (When the subnet mask is [255.255.255.0])

Item Description Range Update GOT Wireless LAN I/F setting The wireless LAN interface settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Wireless LAN I/F Enable the wireless LAN. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the wireless LAN I/F. (Default:192.168.4.20)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

Specify port No. for Wireless LAN Enable the port number setting for the wireless LAN separately from GOT Ethernet common setting.

-

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Driver setting Display [Detail Settings] dialog, GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

192.168.4.20

Set a value that network system is different from each other.

GOT wireless LAN I/F setting

192.168.3.18

GOT standard Ethernet setting

192.168.5.22

GOT extension Ethernet setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2.

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT Ethernet Common Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. Configure the following settings.

IP Filter Setting 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [IP Filter Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting]

window.

2. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected.

(Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 53

54

I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.

2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator. When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit Setting].

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. For the detailed explanations, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Standard I/F Setting Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 5 to 8: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation function (serial) A: Used for the report function (with a serial printer), hard copy function (with a serial printer).

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

I/F-1,I/F-2,I/F-3 The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.

RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox. The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9]. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

Ethernet Connection Setting Set the channel number and the communication driver to the Ethernet interface with a built-in GOT.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Ethernet download A: Used for the remote personal computer operation function (Ethernet), VNC server function, gateway function, and MES interface function. Multi: Used for multi-channel Ethernet connection

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

When GT2104-P or GT2103-P is selected in the GOT type setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 55

56

Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Page 1086 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Precautions

When using the multiple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations, select [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] for the type, regardless of the host PLC CPU type (QCPU, QnACPU, or ACPU). When other models are selected, the setting of the CPU No. becomes unavailable.

Precautions for changing model When devices that cannot be converted are included. When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges) as [??]. In this case, set the device again.

When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network. The network will be set to the host station.

When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None] The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again. Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List].

Extend I/F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for the controllers of channel numbers 1 to 4 set in controller setting (channel setting). 5 to 8: Used for the barcode function, the RFID function, and the remote personal computer operation function (Serial). A: Used for the video/RGB display function, multimedia function, external I/O function, operation panel function, video output function, report function, hard copy function (with a printer), and sound output function.

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Item Description

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Write the package data onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following help. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

1. Select [Package Data] for [Write Data]. The capacity of the transfer data is displayed in [Data Size]. Check that the destination drive has the sufficient available space.

2. Select [Destination Drive].

3. When the system application or the special data is required to be added to the package data or deleted, click the [Write Option] button and configure the setting in the [Write Option] dialog.

4. Click the [GOT Write] button.

5. The package data is written to the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT 57

58

Checking the package data writing on GOT Confirm if the package data is properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following help. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

1. Set [GOT Side] as follows. Select [Project Data] or [Package Data] for [Read Data]. Select the drive where the project data or the package data is stored for [Source Drive].

2. Set [PC Side]. Set the reading destination of the project for [Destination]. To read the project data to GT Designer3, select [GT Designer3]. (When [Read Data] is [Package Data], the project data cannot be read to GT Designer3.) To read the project data as a file, click the [...] button to set the saving format and the saving destination of the file.

3. Click the [GOT Read] button.

4. The project is read.

5. Confirm that the project data is written correctly onto the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT

1

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.

Communication module Product name Model Specifications Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series)

Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2 For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS2 For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUS2L For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))

GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))

GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2 Local station (device station)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

Wireless LAN communication unit*1*2 GT25-WLAN Used for the connection to the IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant, built-in antenna, access point (master unit), station (slave unit), personal computers, tablets, and smartphones.

Compliance with Japan Radio Law*3, FCC*4, RE*6 (R&TTE*4), SRRC*5, KC*5, Radio Equipment Regulations (UKCA)*7

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 59

60

*1 Data transfer in wireless LAN communication may not be as stable as that in cable communication. A packet loss may occur depending on the surrounding environment and the installation location. Be sure to perform a confirmation of operation before using this product.

*2 When [Operation Mode] is set to [Access Point] in [Wireless LAN Setting] of GT Designer3, up to five stations are connectable to the wireless LAN access point (base station).

*3 The product with hardware version A or later (manufactured in December 2013) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*4 The product with hardware version B or later (manufactured from October 2014) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*5 The product with hardware version D or later (manufactured from May 2016) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version D or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*6 The product complies with the RE Directive from March 31, 2017. *7 The product with hardware version G or later (manufactured from October 2021) complies with the regulation.

The product with hardware version G or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Option unit

Conversion cables

Serial multi-drop connection unit

Field network adapter unit

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z

For analog RGB input signal 2 ch

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z

For analog RGB output signal 1 ch

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT For digital video output, 1 channel

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output)

GT15-DIO For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common Input/Sink Type Output)

Product name Model Specifications RS-485 terminal block conversion modules

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block) Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unitFA-LTBGT2R4CBL10

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

Product name Model Specifications Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M GOT multi-drop connection module

Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

Product name Model Specifications Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by using the Anybus

CompactCom M40 network communication module manufactured by HMS (hereinafter referred to as the communication module). Field networks: PROFIBUS DP-V1 DeviceNet How to incorporate the communication module to the field network adapter unit, and the details of the product name of the communication module, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Field Network Adapter Unit User's Manual

Product name Model Specifications RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 61

62

Precautions when installing units on top of one another When units are installed on top of one another, the installation positions are determined by the combination of units.

How to install a communication unit and option unit For how to install a communication unit and option unit, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) When the multi-channel function is used When the multi-channel function is used, the connection type combinations are determined. For the connection type combinations, refer to the following. Page 1094 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

*1 Only one of the units can be installed on the GOT. *2 The unit requires two stages. *3 A slim model bus connection unit (GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, or GT15-75ABUS2L) cannot be installed on

another unit. *4 The unit cannot be installed on a group B unit.

Product Model Number of occupied slots

Installation position

Group A *1 Video input unit GT27-V4-Z *2 2 1st stage

RGB input unit GT27-R2

GT27-R2-Z *2

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z *2

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT

GT27-ROUT-Z *2

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z *2

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Group B *1 Bus connection unit (2 channels) *3 GT15-QBUS2 2 When a group A unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

When no group A unit is installed: 1st stage When a group C unit is installed: Lower stage of

the unit

GT15-ABUS2

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Group C Bus connection unit (1 channel) *3*4 GT15-QBUS 1 When a group A unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

When a group B unit is installed: Upper stage of the unit

GT15-ABUS

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR

GT15-DIO

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP 1 Uppermost stage

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Example) When installing a video/RGB input unit, MELSECNET/H communication unit, and serial communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

Serial communication unit

Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 63

64

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. For the dimensions of connection cables and connector shapes, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side. Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.

RS-232 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-232 interface of the GOT and the RS-232 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector specifications

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103- PMBDS2.

*2 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.). When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT15-RS2-9P 9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9P-2A3A J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin terminal block *1*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105- QMBDS, GS21, GT15-RS2-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin D-sub (male)

GOT main part connector see from the front

1 5

6 9

See from the back of a GOT main part

9-pin terminal block

S D

R D

E R

D R

S G

C S

R S

N C

N C

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

RS-422/485 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-422/485 interface of the GOT and the RS-422/485 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector model

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/5-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2103-PMBD. *2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-

PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS. *3 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.).

When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT2104-PMBD GT2103-PMBD

5-pin terminal block *1*3 MC1.5/5-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin terminal block *2*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9S-2A3B14 J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT15-RS4-TE - SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmller Interface GmbH & Co. KG

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105- QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21, GT15- RS4-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin D-sub (female)

GOT main part connector see from the front

5 1

9 6

GOT main unit see from the back

5-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

GOT main unit see from the back

9-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

R S

B R

S A

C S

A C

S B

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 65

66

Coaxial cable connector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.

1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below.

2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.

3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal conductor with the dimensions as shown below. Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp.

4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.

Cable in use A 3C-2V 15 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10 mm

Cable in use B C 3C-2V 6 mm 3 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7 mm 5 mm

CAUTION

Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.

Nut Washer Gasket

Clamp Contact

Components of the BNC connector

Plug shell

Outer sheath External conductor

Insulating material

Internal conductor

Structure of the coaxial cable

A

Cut this portion of the outer sheath

Clamp

Gasket Washer

Nut

Internal conductor Insulating material

C B Clamp and external

conductor

Solder here

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

5. Insert the contact assembly shown in step 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.

Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other. Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 67

68

Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.

RS-422/485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For RS422/485 communication unit

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

SW 1O N

1 2

O N SW1

ON 1

2

Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.

Terminating resistor setting switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2710-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 69

70

GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V) Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2510-V

GT25-W Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GT2510-WX

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Terminating resistor selector switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector.

GT23 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2310-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

Terminating resistor selector switch

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 71

72

GT21 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GT2103-PMBD

GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GS2110-WTBD-N

Position of the terminating resistor selector switch The position of the terminating resistor selector switch depends on the GOT type. For the details, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) Terminating resistor of GS21-W The terminating resistor of GS21-W is fixed to 330 . For the details, refer to the following. GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual

USB

Terminating resistor selector switch

Terminating resistor selector switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.

Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. Page 54 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual. GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

Setting item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 2-wire/4-wire 2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF

Terminating resistor 110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF

OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF

330 - - OFF ON ON OFF

2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

1 O

2 N

3 4 5 6

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 73

74

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. After powering up the GOT, touch [GOT basic set] [Controller] from the Utility.

2. The [Communication Settings] appears.

3. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used.

4. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. Page 35 Setting the Communication Interface

1.

2. 3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

1

Utility How to display Utility (at default)

Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds. For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner Utility display

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 75

76

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Check on the GOT

Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Alarm popup display With the alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen). Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all. For details of the alarm popup display, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Error code Communication Channel No.

Error message Time of occurrence (Displayed only for errors)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu. Display the I/O check screen by [Maintenance] [I/O check]. For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen. Touching [CPU] executes the communication check with the connected PLC.

2. When the communication screen ends successfully, the screen on the left is displayed.

1.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 77

78

Communication monitoring function The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor]. For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (Operation of communication monitoring function screen)

Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT When the GOT with any of the following units mounted is connected, the communication status of the communication unit can be checked on the GOT.

The communication status of the communication unit can be checked in the [Network Status Display] in utility of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) For details on the [Network Status Display], refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Communication unit Connection type MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 connection

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2 CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

Comm. SettingMain Menu

Comm. Monitor

Touch [Comm. Setting].

Touch [Comm. Monitor].

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection)

Confirming the communication state on Windows, GT Designer3 When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Reply from 192.168.3.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Request timed out.

When using the [Test] of GT Designer3 Select [Communication] [Communication settings] from the menu to display [TEST].

1. Set the [PC side I/F] to the [Ethernet].

2. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [Communication Configuration] and click the [Test] button.

3. Check if GT Designer3 has been connected to the GOT.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command or [Test] again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of [Communication Settings] IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

2.

1.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 79

80

Confirming the communication state on the GOT [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT. When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS).

No. of faulty stations Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.

Ethernet multiple connection Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.

When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following. For the data operation, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)

Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8 to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 81

82

Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.

Ethernet connection

The following shows the Ethernet setting numbers corresponding to each devices in the multi-channel Ethernet connection.

Device Ethernet setting No.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

Device Ethernet setting No.

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3

Ethernet setting No.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

CC-Link IE TSN connection

Temperature controller (AZBIL temperature controller (DMC50)) connection

Other connection types The corresponding devices differ depending on the communication driver to be used. Communication drivers that monitor the host station only

The host station uses bit 0. Ch1: GS281.b0 Ch2: GS301.b0 Ch3: GS321.b0 Ch4: GS341.b0

Device Station number

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS1281 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

GS1282 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS1283 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS1284 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS1285 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS1286 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS1287 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS1288 - - - - - - - 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Station number-Sub Station

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 1-15 1-14 1-13 1-12 1-11 1-10 1-9 1-8 1-7 1-6 1-5 1-4 1-3 1-2 1-1 1-0

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 2-15 2-14 2-13 2-12 2-11 2-10 2-9 2-8 2-7 2-6 2-5 2-4 2-3 2-2 2-1 2-0

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 3-15 3-14 3-13 3-12 3-11 3-10 3-9 3-8 3-7 3-6 3-5 3-4 3-3 3-2 3-1 3-0

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 4-15 4-14 4-13 4-12 4-11 4-10 4-9 4-8 4-7 4-6 4-5 4-4 4-3 4-2 4-1 4-0

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 5-15 5-14 5-13 5-12 5-11 5-10 5-9 5-8 5-7 5-6 5-5 5-4 5-3 5-2 5-1 5-0

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 6-15 6-14 6-13 6-12 6-11 6-10 6-9 6-8 6-7 6-6 6-5 6-4 6-3 6-2 6-1 6-0

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 7-15 7-14 7-13 7-12 7-11 7-10 7-9 7-8 7-7 7-6 7-5 7-4 7-3 7-2 7-1 7-0

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 8-15 8-14 8-13 8-12 8-11 8-10 8-9 8-8 8-7 8-6 8-5 8-4 8-3 8-2 8-1 8-0

Communication driver list Bus Q Bus A/QnA Serial(MELSEC)

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 CC-Link(G4)

MELSEC-FX MELSEC-WS OMRON SYSMAC

YASKAWA GL YASKAWA CP9200 (H) YASKAWA CP9300MS (MC compatible)

YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH AB Control/CompactLogix SHARP JW

TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V HITACHI IES HIDIC H HITACHI IES HIDIC H(Protocol2)

PANASONIC MEWNET-FP PANASONIC MEWTOCOL-7 SIEMENS S7-200

YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM Serial(KEYENCE) HITACHI S10mini/S10V

FUJI MICREX-SX SPH SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini SICK Flexi Soft

IAI X-SEL PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 83

84

Communication drivers that monitor other stations as well as the host station

The following shows the corresponding devices.

*1 When CC-Link IE controller network connection is not used. *2 When CC-Link IE field network connection is not used.

For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Network No., station No. notification The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup. If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.

When using the station monitoring function in the CC-Link IE Field Network connection When a submaster station is on the network, use the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2) with the software version C or later. The software version is the 10th digit of the serial number described on the rating plate of the unit.

Communication driver list CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Field Network MEI Nexgenie

AB SLC500 AB 1:N connection AB MicroLogix AB MicroLogix(Extended)

SIEMENS S7-300/400 JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC FUJI MICREX-F

GE(SNP-X) KOYO KOSTAC/DL LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K

Hirata HNC IAI robocylinder Panasonic MINAS A4

Panasonic MINAS A5 Muratec MPC MELSERVO-J4,J3,J2S/M,JE

FREQROL 500/700/800,SENSORLESS SERVO FREQROL 800 FREQROL(Batch monitor)

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO OMRON Digital Temperature Controller AZBIL SDC/DMC

AZBIL DMC50 RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS) FUJI Temperature Controller/Digital Controller

YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000/ UTAdvanced

SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER CHINO MODBUS device

MODBUS/RTU Master

Device Station number

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0*1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 127 *1*2

126 *1*2

125 *1*2

124 *1*2

123 *1*2

122 *1*2

121 *1*2

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Description

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)

GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Detectable faulty stations using the station monitoring function (CC-Link IE TSN connection) Detectable faulty stations depend on the communication mode of the cyclic transmission.

When the communication mode is multicast mode Data link faulty stations are all detected from the data link status of each station. For details of the data link status, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)

When the communication mode is unicast mode Only the errors in the master station are detected. Stations other than the master station are always recognized as faulty stations.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 85

86

Check on GX Developer

Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version Operating Manual

Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX Developer Version 8)

Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]

No error displayed

at all times

Not displayed

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only) Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics]

Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information]. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station] (The display example on GX

Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics]

Loop test

Other station info.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 87

88

For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Control diagnostics] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics]

For CC-Link system Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] Monitoring other station

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Check on GX Works2

For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual Startup procedure: GX Works2 [diagnostics] [CC IE Field diagnostics]

Check on the PLC

Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only) Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the fiber-optic cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only) Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system. Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable. For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11 CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 89

90

MEMO

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

PART 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

7 BUS CONNECTION

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

91

92

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Page 92 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Page 105 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection Page 107 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring Page 109 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System Page 110 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU Page 111 Connection to Remote I/O Station Page 114 Connection to the Head Module

2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

This section shows the access range for monitoring the stations on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network.

Bus connection When connecting to multiple CPU system The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network.

The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-Link IE controller network.

When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Control station

Normal station

Normal station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.

Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) *1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively.

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network.

The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-Link IE controller network.

When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included, the master station and local stations can be monitored.

When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the parameter is ignored)

Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.

Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1 to 2) *1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

M station

L station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

L station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 93

94

When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned for the network parameter.

The GOT cannot monitor normal stations on the network. The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

Normal station

Normal station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Direct CPU connection (serial)/serial communication connection When connecting to multiple CPU system Corresponding to the access range described in Page 92 When connecting to multiple CPU system. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to RCPU For the serial communication connection, refer to the following. Page 96 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection The GOT cannot access a CPU via MELSECNET (II), computer link, or CC-Link network. When monitoring an RCPU, if a PLC CPU other than the RCPU is used in the route from the connected station to the

RCPU to be monitored, the RCPU cannot be accessed.

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU Corresponding to the access range described in Page 93 When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. For monitoring devices (other than B and W assigned for the network parameter) of other stations, the GOT cannot monitor the devices of the PLC CPU that is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU.

If connected to a relay station, use data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] to designate the unit number that is connected to the network to be monitored.

RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU Corresponding to the access range described in Page 94 When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU. RCPU cannot be monitored.

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

Normal station

Control station

*1

*1

GOT

Normal station

Normal station

M station

L station

Control station

Normal station

Control station

L station

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 95

96

When connecting to Motion CPU (Q series), CNC C70, or robot controller (Q series) using the direct CPU connection (serial)

Monitor the motion CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.

*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network respectively. RCPU cannot be monitored.

When connecting to LCPU Refer to the following. Page 96 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection RCPU cannot be monitored.

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), CC-Link connection (via G4) Only the station connected to the GOT can be monitored. Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 6: When using CC- Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) When the station connected to the GOT is in the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to No.4. The GOT cannot monitor other stations. The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks.

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE TSN connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection

Precautions for cyclic transmission Devices that can be accessed by cyclic transmission differ according to connection type.

The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No. When monitoring the CPU of the multiple CPU system via CC-Link IE TSN, the CPU may not be monitored depending on its firmware version. For the firmware version of the CPU that can be monitored, refer to the following. Page 616 Precautions When monitoring a cyclic device of other stations via CC-Link IE TSN, the following conditions must be satisfied. GX Works3: Set [Communication Mode] of the master station to [Multicast]. CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25J71GN13-T2): Firmware version 02 or later CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2): Firmware version 04 or later

Controller Relay CPU Motion CPU (Q Series) Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU QCPU (Q mode)

Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU QnUCPU

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU

Robot controller (Q series) CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

Connection type Device that can be accessed

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,BH/TENCESLEM

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,B01/TENCESLEM

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,rW ,wW ,YR ,XRNST EI kniL-CC

WS ,BS ,WL ,BL ,W ,BkrowteN rellortnoC EI kniL-CC

WS ,BS ,rW ,wW ,YR ,XR ,Y ,XkrowteN dleiF EI kniL-CC

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC- Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network is accessible via the PLC CPU. (When monitoring other networks via the R motion, only a CPU on another Ethernet network is accessible.)

However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. On the Ethernet network, only QCPU (Q mode) and QnACPU can be accessed. When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication unit on the

GOT. To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. For the routing parameter setting for the GOT, refer to the following. Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION For the routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU, refer to the following. MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 connection Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) CC-Link IE TSN connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual CC-Link IE Field Network connection MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are monitored,

monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. Page 98 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection In the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network

connection, the data link status can be checked by monitoring the device status of link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) of the communication unit (host) mounted to the GOT.

For the details, refer to the following manual. Reference manual of the relevant network

When using the redundant system (QCPU) as a relay station For monitoring other networks by using the redundant system (QCPU) as a relay station, configure the MELSEC redundant settings. When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection, the station of the control system can be monitored through a tracking cable, but the station of other networks cannot be monitored through the redundant system.

Monitoring devices of other stations on the network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore, monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network parameter.

Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection) Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station. If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 97

98

Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1: When using bus connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4) AnU (1-1)

Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

QnA (1-2)

Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

AnA (1-3)

Other (0-0) Host

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

Other (1-1) Host Host Other (2-4)

QnA (2-1)

Other (1-1) Other (1-2) Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnN (2-3)

Host

AnU (2-4)

Other (1-1) Other (1-4) Other (2-2) Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station Control station

AnU (1-1)

QnA (2-1)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

AnA (1-3)

Network No.1 Network No.2QnA (1-2) (2-4)

AnU

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Example 2: When using bus connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

Control station

Network No.2Network No.1

Data link system

Control station

QnA (1-1)

AnA (1-2)

QnA (L1)

AnA (L2)

AnU (2-1)

AnU (2-3)

AnU (2-4)QnA

(1-3) (2-2) (M)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 99

10

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system

QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) QnA (1-1)

Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2)

AnA (1-2)

Host

QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M)

Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host Other (0-2)*1

AnU (2-1)

Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnU (2-3)

Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host

QnA (L1)

Host

AnA (L2)

Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

0 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Example 3: When using direct CPU connection (serial) or serial communication connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)

AnU (1-1)

Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

AnA (1-3)

Other (0-0) Host

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

Other (1-1) Host Host

QnA (2-1)

Other (1-1) Other (1-2) Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnN (2-3)

Host

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-2) Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station Control station

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1)

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (2-4)

QnA (2-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 101

10

Example 4: When using direct CPU connection (serial) or serial communication connection

Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.

To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host station.

To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.).

*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system

QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2) Q (Q mode) (1- 1)

Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Other (1-3) or Other (2-2)

AnA (1-2)

Host

QnA (1-3) (2-2) (M)

Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host *1 Other (0-2)

AnU (2-1)

Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnU (2-3)

Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)

AnU (2-4)

Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host

QnA (L1)

Host

AnA (L2)

Host

How to read the table Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible : Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings Host Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station

AnU (2-4)QnA

(1-3) (2-2) (M)

Network No.2

AnU (2-1)

Network No.1

AnA (1-2)

QnA (L1)

AnA (L2)

Data link system

Control station

Q(Q mode) (1-1)

AnU (2-3)

2 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection

Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)

: Accessible : Not accessible Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device

Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter NW No.: 1, Station number: Host

For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)

Station connected to GOT

Station to be accessed

Network No.1 Network No.2

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

GOT (1-3)

AnU (1-4)

Q (Q mode) (2-1)

QnA (2-2)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (2-4)

GOT (1-3)

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

GOT (1-3)

AnU (1-4)

GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) 1, Other (4)

QnA (1-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-4)

GOT (1-3)

Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 (1-2)

Q (Q mode) (2-1)

QnA (2-2)

AnN (2-3)

How to read the table 1, Other (2)

NW No. Station number

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 103

10

Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)

: Accessible : Not accessible

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

QnA (1-1)

Q (Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (1-4)

QnA (1-1)

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (1-4)

Network module (1-2)

CC-Link Master module (0 station)

Network System

CC-Link System

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

QnA (1-1)

AnN (1-4) GOTGOT

GOT

GOT

Image of CC-Link Connection

4 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

2

2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection

Access range MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC The GOT can monitor the PLC via the Ethernet module set in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3. The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet network, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network via an RCPU, R motion (Ver.03 or later), QCPU, QnACPU, or LCPU. (Monitoring other networks via an R motion (earlier than Ver.03) is available only by Ethernet.) However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks. (The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and MELSECNET/10 networks) When monitoring the RCPU on CC-Link IE TSN, it can be accessed only when all stations from the connected station to the station to be monitored are RCPUs. For MELSEC iQ-F series, the GOT can access CPUs on other networks (CC-Link IE TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network) via the PLC CPUs. To monitor CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network, set the routing parameter. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals. Routing parameter setting of the GOT Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10 network

system Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual Routing parameter settings for accessing CPUs on CC-Link IE TSN MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application) Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed.

GOT

Relay station

Connected stationEthernet

Network 1 (Ethernet)

Network 2

Relay station

Network 3 (CC-Link IE Field Network)MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10,

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Relay station

Network 4 (CC-Link IE TSN)

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 105

10

Host in the Ethernet connection For the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or CC-Link connection, the GOT is handled as the host station. For the Ethernet connection, the station (Ethernet module) set as the host in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 is handled as the host station. When using the redundant system as a relay station For monitoring other networks by using the redundant system as a relay station, configure the MELSEC redundant settings. When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection When path switching occurs due to cable disconnection, the station of the control system can be monitored through a tracking cable, but the station of other networks cannot be monitored through the redundant system. When monitoring the RCPU on a different network Use one of the following paths for monitoring. Connection via an RCPU Ethernet connection between the GOT and built-in Ethernet port QCPU, and Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network connection between the GOT and QCPU and the RCPU to be monitored

Various settings For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

6 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection

2

2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

When using bus connection/direct CPU connection (serial)/serial communication connection Only connected stations can be monitored.

When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Access range The master station and local station can be monitored. : Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored

*1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13. *2 The MELSEC iQ-F series (FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ) and MELSEC-FX (FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) do not support the transient

transmission. All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can be monitored. When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored. The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied. For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected

Setting device name and device number Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting Use the following device names. For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station number setting. In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)

In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)

Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations Set the device name and device No. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission Monitoring by transient transmission *2

Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode)

Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible)

Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible) *1

Device name on PLC CPU Automatic refresh

Device name on master station Link scan

GT Designer3 settings

Device name Set device range Input X Remote input RX X X0 to X1FFF

Output Y Remote output RY Y Y0 to Y1FFF

Register (write area) D Remote register (write area) RWw Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF

Register (read area) D Remote register (read area) RWr Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF

Device name on PLC CPU Automatic refresh

Device name on master station Link scan

GT Designer3 settings

Device name Set device range Input X Remote input RX X X0 to X7FF

Output Y Remote output RY Y Y0 to Y7FF

Register (write area) D Remote register (write area) RWw Ww Ww0 to WwFF

Register (read area) D Remote register (read area) RWr Wr Wr0 to WrFF

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 107

10

Setting NW No. and station number When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n) (n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station))

For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only) Access range GT27 can monitor the master station and local stations.

Setting NW No. and station number When monitoring master station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0) When monitoring local station NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)

Setting device name and device number Set the device name and device No. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

Monitoring overview The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit.

*1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the following conditions. Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC CPU of the master station. Use GX Developer or SW2-GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link setting on the package. For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual . User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected

*2 For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic transmission, refer to the following. Page 107 When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed. To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.

Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2

Contents Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and local station are specified and monitored.

All remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are specified and monitored.

Advantage The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is required. However, the GOT communication sequence program is not needed.*1

The data communication processing speed is high.

Disadvantage The data communication processing speed is lower than that of cyclic transmission.

Writing from the GOT (read command from the master station) can be performed only to remote outputs and remote registers assigned to the GOT of the master station and to the GOT internal registers.

GOT communication sequence program is required.*1

8 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

2

2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System

The following shows the access range for monitoring the stations on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system.

Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), computer link connection When connecting to the master station Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.

When connecting to the local station The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. Other local stations cannot be monitored.

When connecting to the master station on the third layer The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.

Monitoring devices of other stations If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.

L3

M

L1

L2

GOT

L1

L2

M

L3

GOT

GOT

L3

M

L1

L2 m

2

1 3

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.4 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on the Data Link System 109

11

Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices .

Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station.

Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table. Setting of the station No.

Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU

The GOT can access only the connected CPU when the direct CPU connection (serial) is used. (The GOT cannot monitor other stations.) The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others. The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.

Station connected to GOT Station to be accessed

M L1 L2 m

L3 1 2 3

M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L1 Other 0 Host

L2 m

Other 0 Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L3 Other 0 Host

1 Other 0 Host

2 Other 0 Host

3 Other 0 Host

L3

M

L1

GOT

L2 m

2

1 3

0 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU

2

2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station

When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.

Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10 The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.

Monitor target

Network No.1 Station No.0 (master station)

Q J71LP

21-25

Q33B

MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network

Network No.1 Station No.1 (remote I/O station)

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q33B

Q J71E

71-100 E

m pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule P

LC C

P U

Hub

GOT

(3) Ethernet connection

GOT

(2) Serial communication

GOT

(1) Direct CPU connection (serial)

connection

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station 111

11

Direct CPU connection (serial) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Serial communication connection Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-

R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the remote I/O station. For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or modem interface module and other details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter settings of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

2 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station

2

Ethernet connection Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/

O station. For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then,

specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15 only)

The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the remote I/O station. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter

settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station 113

11

2.7 Connection to the Head Module

When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. The serial communication connection and Ethernet connection are available between the GOT and the head module. The following shows a system configuration example.

Serial communication connection Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4, LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2)

mounted on the head module. For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [Network No. 1

(Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only)

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter setting of the

PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)

Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 0

Q J71G

F11-T2

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

C LP

C P

U

Q33B

CC-Link IE Field Network

LJ72G F15-T2

LJ71C 24

P ow

er supply m

odule

LX 40C

6

LY 10R

2

R J72G

F15-T2

R J71C

24

P ow

er supply m

odule

R J71E

N 71

E m

pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1

Network No. 1, Station No. 2

GOT GOT GOT

Ethernet connectionSerial communication connection Serial communication connection

Hub

4 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module

2

Ethernet connection Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (RJ71EN71) mounted on the head module. For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [Network No. 1

(Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT27, GT25 only)

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter

settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)

Restrictions on connection to head module The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.

2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module 115

11

MEMO

6 2 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 2.7 Connection to the Head Module

3

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM Page 117 MELSEC iQ-R Series Page 175 MELSEC Q Series Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the RCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) Remote head module

3) 4)4)

Remote I/O station

GOT

5)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

CC-Link IE Field Network

When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) Remote head module

2)1)2)1)

2)1)2)1)

3) 4)4)

Remote I/O station

5)

Control system (system B)

Standby system (system A)

CC-Link IE Field Network

GOT

The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU.

The GOT monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.

Ethernet

Ethernet (RCPU redundant system)

(RCPU redundant system)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 117

11

Module configuration when using the SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU) To configure the redundant system of the SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU), mount the SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) and redundant function module (R6RFM) next to the SIL2 Process CPU on the base unit. When mounting these modules on the base unit, mount them in the order of the SIL2 Process CPU, SIL2 function module, and redundant function module.

In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting The following connection methods are available for the RCPU redundant system. Page 119 Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU Page 125 Connection to Ethernet module Page 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Page 137 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Page 142 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network Page 165 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station) Page 168 When connecting via the serial communication unit

1) SIL2 Process CPU (RnPSFCPU) 2) SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) 3) Redundant function module (R6RFM)

2) 3)1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU Page 119 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 121 1:n connection with redundant system Page 123 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Control system (system A) PLC setting (GX Works3) Built-in Ethernet port

Item Set value IP address setting 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting (Use default value)

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting -

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 119

12

Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) Redundant Setting

[Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default). If set to [Use], the GOT will not follow the system switching.

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2

Control system IP address availability Not Use

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

1:n connection with redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 119 PLC Side Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

4)2)1)1) 2) 4)

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 4(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 5(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

(Pair No.2)

(Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 121

12

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 119 PLC Side Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 5) RCPU 6) I/O module

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

4)2)1)1) 2) 4)

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

3)N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 4(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 6(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.6 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 5(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5006

5) 6)

(Non-redundant system )

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 123

12

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 122 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to Ethernet module Page 125 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 128 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 130 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

4)4)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 125

12

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter setting of Ethernet module

Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) Redundant Setting

[Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default). If set to [Use], the GOT will not follow the system switching.

Item Set value IP address setting 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Setting Method of Network No. and Station No. Do Not Use IP Address

Network No. 1

Station No. 1

Transient Transmission Group No. (Use default value)

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting -

Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2

Control system IP address availability 2

B system module operation mode Online mode

Control system IP address availability Not Use

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 127

12

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 126 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4 IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5 IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

4) 4)

4) 4)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 129

13

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 126 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Ethernet module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5001

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4 IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 6 IP address: 192.168.3.6 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5 IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

4)

7)6)

4)

4) 4)

4)

(Non-redundant system)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 127 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 131

13

Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Page 132 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 135 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 136 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Controller Network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

Optical cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Network range assignment

Control system (system A) PLC setting Redundant Setting

Item Set value Station type Control station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Refer to hereinafter

Item Set value Pairing To pair

Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 133

13

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 133 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 4

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 5

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Optical cable

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 135

13

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 4) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Controller Network system to the GOT. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting Page 133 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Page 134 GOT Side Settings

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 136 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Controller Network module 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

N/W No.:1 PC No.:6

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Optical cable

N/W No.:1 PC No.:5

6) 4) 7)

(Non-redundant system )

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Page 137 One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system Page 140 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system Page 141 For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 137

13

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Network range setting

Control system (system A) PLC setting Redundant Setting

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Engineering tool

Network Configuration Settings Refer to next page

Item Set value Sub master station No. 1

Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 139

14

1:n connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 138 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other NW No.: 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. Redundant system-2 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 3) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network system to the GOT. Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Page 138 PLC Side Setting (GX Works3)

GOT Side Settings Page 140 GOT Side Settings

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system Page 141 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (GOT connection) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (Remote I/O station connection) 6) RCPU 7) I/O module

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

5)2)1)1) 2) 5)

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

N/W No.:1 PC No.:5

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

4) 4)

4) 4)

Ethernet cable

N/W No.:1 PC No.:4

6) 4) 7)

(Non-redundant system)

(Redundant system-2: Pair No.2)

(Redundant system-1: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 141

14

Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) Page 162 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) Page 163 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration)

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

3)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

6)1) 2) 1) 2)

7) 5)

4)

6)

GOT

Ethernet (N/W No. :2)

N/W No. :2 PC No. :2 IP Address :192.168.0.2 Port No. :5001

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0 N/W No.:1

PC No.:1

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No. :2 PC No. :1 IP Address :192.168.0.1 Port No. :5001

[CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Remote I/O station

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.:1)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(MR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 143

14

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No.: 1 Station No.: 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 145

14

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address: 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Network No.: 2 Station No.: 1

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Routing Information

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: 0

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 147

14

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GOT

N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 1 IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module(RJ72GF15-T2(SR)) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.: 1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

Ethernet (N/W No.: 2)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(MR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 149

15

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(SR)] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. The second RJ72GF15-T2(SR) Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(SR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 151

15

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address: 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Network No.: 2 Station No.: 1

GOT Side Settings Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3

7)4)4)

GOT

N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station [Ethernet module] N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 1 IP Address:192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5001

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2

Control system (system A) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 0

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2(LR)) 5) Ethernet module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.: 1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

Ethernet (N/W No.: 2)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 153

15

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11- T2(LR)).

3) [Module Parameter]-[Required Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)).

Item Set value Station type Master station (Double-line) (fixed)

Network No. 1

Station number setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter Editor (fixed)

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)). Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].

Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows.

5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)). At [Redundant System Settings], set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 155

15

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (1st) 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type].

2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. RJ72GF15-T2(LR) Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example).

3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module. When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number. (1) In the system configuration example, the network number is 2, and the station number is 1, so the value is as follows. IP Address : 192.168.2.1

When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address : 192.168.0.1 Network No. : 2 Station No. : 1

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 157

15

CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (2nd) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type].

[I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. RJ72GF15-T2(LR))

[CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No. : 1 Station No. : 3

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 159

16

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module Page 142 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module.

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

6)1) 2) 1) 2)

7)

3)

5) 4)

6)

Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:0 N/W No.:1

PC No.:1

Remote I/O station [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Remote I/O station

RS232

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No.:1)

GOT

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 161

16

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module Page 148 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module.

GOT Side Settings Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

GOT RS232

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :3

Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :2

Control system (system A) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

Standby system (system B) N/W No. :1 PC No. :1

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module (RJ72GF15-T2(SR)) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No. :1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (1st) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) At [I/O Assignment], replace the Ethernet module with the serial communication module and assign the module. CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (2nd) Page 153 Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration)

GOT Side Settings Page 160 Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration)

GOT RS232

Remote I/O station 2nd [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :3

7)4)4) Remote I/O station 1st [CC-Link IE Field Network] N/W No. :1 PC No. :2

Control system (system A) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

Standby system (system B) N/W No. :1 PC No. :0

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module(RJ72GF15-T2(LR)) 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)) 7) I/O module

CC-Link IE Field Network (N/W No. :1)

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

5) 7)4)4)

1) 2) 1) 2)6)

3)

6)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 163

16

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station)

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link (intelligent device station) to the GOT. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link(ID) 5) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 5)2) 5)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.:0 PC No.:0

N/W No.:0 PC No.:1

N/W No.:0 PC No.:2

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)4)

4)

CC-Link cable

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 165

16

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Control system (system A) PLC setting Module parameter

Control system (system B) PLC setting Module parameter

Item Set value Station type Master station (Redundant function is supported)

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter (fixed)

Item Set value Station type Standby master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 1

Transmission speed Auto-tracking

Parameter setting Parameter (fixed)

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 0, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 0

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting Check [Enable Redundant Function]. A pairing setting is not required.

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 167

16

When connecting via the serial communication unit

One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) to the GOT. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU Page 132 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network Single RCPU

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

Item Set value Network No. 1

Station No. 3

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) RCPU 5) Serial communication module 6) CC-Link Controller Network module 7) I/O module 8) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

2) 8)2) 8)1) 1)

3)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:1

N/W No.:1 PC No.:2

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

6) 6)

N/W No.:1 PC No.:3

RS232

4) 5)

6) 7)

Optical cable

Single RCPU

(Redundant system: Pair No.1)

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system.

Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D

Device setting (Network setting) Host -

Other Network No. 1

Station No.: Station number of the control system

Control system/ standby system

The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can be speified. Only when checking [Enable Redundant Function] in the following [MELSEC Redundant System Setting], [Control System/Standby System] can be set.

MELSEC Redundant Setting

Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 169

17

When connecting via the extension base unit for the redundant system

Serial communication connection System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the serial communication module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the serial communication module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Set the connection with the serial communication module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) Serial communication module 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

5)

6)

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

RS232

GOTIN1

IN2

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Ethernet connection System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the Ethernet module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Set the connection with the Ethernet module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) Ethernet module 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

6)

5)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 18 IP address: 192.168.3.18 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

IN1

IN2

Ethernet

GOT

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 171

17

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) System configuration example The following describes a connection configuration example for connecting the GOT to a redundant CPU via the CC-Link module mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link module (mounted on the extension base unit for the redundant system) to the GOT. For details on the system configuration, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

PLC settings (GX Works3) and GOT settings Redundant system settings are not required. Configure the settings for connection with the CC-Link module. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

Change of the monitoring target when system switching occurs in the redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (connected to IN2 of the extension base unit for the redundant system) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring according to the specified system.

2)1) 2)1)

3)

4)

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) Extension cable 5) CC-Link(ID) 6) Extension base unit for the redundant system

6)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1

N/W No.: 1 PC No. :0

Control system (system A) Connected to IN1

Standby system (system B) Connected to IN2

IN1

IN2

5) CC-Link cable

GOT

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

Precautions

Start of the redundant system When connected to the redundant system, the GOT starts monitoring after the control system and standby system are decided, regardless of the starting order of the PLC systems A and B. The GOT starts monitoring when both systems start. (For the redundant system configured with a redundant extension base unit, the GOT starts monitoring the system that starts first, which is the control system.) Power on the redundant system within the time set in the GOT (communication timeout time and number of retries) so that the GOT can start monitoring after the redundant system starts (after the control system is decided). If the power supply does not start within the time set on the GOT, the GOT stops monitoring for safety reasons, and the following system alarm occurs. 451: The MELSEC redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again.

System switching When system is switched by user program The communication path does not change, and the GOT follows the monitor. The system alarm is not displayed.

When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system." appears as the system alarm.

Redundant system configuration and operation mode System alarm display With the following system configuration "451: MELSEC Redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match" will appear as the system alarm, and the GOT will not be able to correctly monitor the redundant system's CPU. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again. System configuration with MELSEC redundant settings that do not match the actual redundant system System configuration in which the redundant system operation mode is not the backup mode

Changing the MELSEC redundant settings Always reset the GOT after changing the MELSEC redundant settings. If not reset, the changed MELSEC redundant settings will not be applied on the GOT.

When non-redundant system is monitored after setting MELSEC redundant settings If the MELSEC redundant settings were set for a non-redundant system, the GOT will operate normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the MELSEC redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the MELSEC redundant setting.

When redundant system is monitored without making MELSEC redundant setting When the MELSEC redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series 173

17

When connecting with CC-Link(ID) When system switching is occurred by the following factors, data link control of CC-Link(ID) does not move from the master station of the new standby system to the standby master station of the new control system and the GOT cannot follow the monitor. Make sure that the standby master station of the new control system should control data link. For details of the ladder program for data link control, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC iQ-R Series MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application) Execution of the system switching instruction at the PLC side Execution of system switching operation using the engineering tool Execution of system switching request from other network modules. When system switching is occurred by the above factors, data link control does not move to the standby master station because the master station of the new standby system can communicate with the GOT. Also, the new control system is the standby master station without changing. Therefore, the GOT monitors the master station without following the new control system/new standby system and cannot monitor the redundant system.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.1 MELSEC iQ-R Series

3

3.2 MELSEC Q Series

This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT.

In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system

(System B)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU.

When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Standby system

(System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

The GOT monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Control system

(System A)

Control system

(System B)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 175

17

The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system Direct CPU connection (serial) (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) Page 179 Direct CPU connection (serial) Serial communication connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network

system) Page 180 Serial communication connection Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system) Page 181 Ethernet connection Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 182 Direct CPU connection (serial) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Page 188 CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) CC-Link connection (Via G4) Page 190 CC-Link connection (Via G4) MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system) Page 192 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (Network systems) CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system) Page 193 CC-Link IE controller network connection (Network system) Ethernet connection Page 194 Ethernet connection Connection to the redundant type extension base unit Serial communication connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 196 Serial communication connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 197 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 198 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Page 199 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following. Monitorable controllers of each chapter

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

The following table shows the features of each connection method.

Connection type Before system switching After system switching Direct CPU connection (serial)

(Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) Serial communication

connection (Serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H network system) Ethernet connection

(Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system)

The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU.

Direct CPU connection (serial)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*1

Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) CC-Link connection (Via G4)

The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control system PLC CPU.

Control system

Multiplexed remote master station

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Multiplexed remote sub master station

GOT1

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT3

Ethernet connection

GOT2

Serial communication connection

Remote I/O station

Ethernet module

Serial communication module

Standby system Control system

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Multiplexed remote sub master station

GOT1

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT3

Ethernet connection

GOT2

Serial communication connection

Remote I/O station

Ethernet module

Serial communication module

Multiplexed remote master station

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Remote I/O station

Control system

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

GOT1 GOT2

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

GOT1 GOT2

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Standby system Control system

Intelligent device station

Master station

GOT1

Standby master station

AJ65BT-G4-S3

CC-Link GOT2

Control system

Standby system

Master station Standby master station

Control system

Standby system

GOT1

CC-Link GOT2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 177

17

*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the MELSEC redundant setting, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the MELSEC redundancy setting, refer to the following. Page 200 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection

(Network system)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

Ethernet connection

By the MELSEC redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*2

Serial communication connection

(Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) Ethernet connection

(Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection

(intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) CC-Link connection (Via G4)

(CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)

Connection type Before system switching After system switching

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

CC-Link IE Controller Network

GOT Station No.3 (normal station)

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

CC-Link IE Controller Network

GOT

Control system

Standby system

Station No. 3

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Ethernet GOT

Standby system

Control system

Station No. 3

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Ethernet

CC-Link module

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

CC-Link connection

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

GOT3GOT2GOT1

Control system

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

CC-Link module

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

CC-Link connection

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

GOT3GOT2GOT1

Control system

Station No. 1

Standby system

Station No. 2

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system

Direct CPU connection (serial) This section explains the direct CPU connection (serial) used to connect the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)

Em pty

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

Em pty

Pow er supply

m odule

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 179

18

Serial communication connection This section explains the serial communication connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Serial communication connection

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Control system (System A)

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Ethernet connection This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the MELESCNET/H network system.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. For details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Routing Information Setting Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Network No. 2, Station No. 3

Network No. 2, Station No. 2

Ethernet

GOT

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71E

71-100

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N P

ow er supply

m odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 181

18

Direct CPU connection (serial) This section explains the direct CPU connection (serial) used to connect the GOT to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. For the direct CPU connection (serial), use one GOT or two GOTs.

When using one GOT

Connection method Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching takes over the host station operation. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.

To monitor the control system without MELSEC redundant setting If the system switching occurs when the MELSEC redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station). As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Pow er

supply m odule

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Em pty

Pow er

supply m odule

Em pty

Pow er

supply m odule

Em pty

Em pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

When using two GOTs Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.

Connection method Connect GOTs to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the system switching. The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring. Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required.

To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the MELSEC redundant settings. Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT1

Control system (System A)

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Em pty

Em pty

Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 183

18

Precautions for direct CPU connection (serial) to a CPU in the redundant system without making MELSEC redundant setting As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in

response to the system switching of the redundant system. To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each PLC CPU. When monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system using the direct CPU connection (serial), only the PLC CPU

connected to the GOT can be monitored. When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not

reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).

As countermeasures to the above, perform the following. Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GOT when connecting

the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU. To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the special relay

SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU. (When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system) Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition. For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device. If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the trigger action operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function.

1) Numerically input D100=100 from the GOT.

1) D100=100

2) D100=5

2) Tracks D100=5 from control system to standby system.

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

Pow er supply

m odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Direct CPU connection (serial) Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT1

Control system (System A)

Em pty

Em pty

Em pty

Em pty

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q 25PR

H C

PU

Q J71LP21-25

Q J71BR

11

Q J71E71-100

Q J61BT11N

GOT2

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GOT

Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and standby system. 1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen. 2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of the connection cable.

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Trigger Action operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function)

1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system

GOT

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 0

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 1

QJ72 BR15

Station No. 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 185

18

2. Set the trigger action. Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system (SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Trigger Action].

Create the trigger action in the project on the Project tab.

3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).

1) Device/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status) 3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)

Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.

Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.

Device/Style tab 5151MS :eciveD

enoN :epahS Comment tab : Basic Comment Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.

Touch the screen to display the next screen. Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.

Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation.

1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen

The following shows the created base screen 1.

Next Screen tab Screen Type : Base Go To Screen : Fixed 2 Style tab Display Style : None (Shape) Trigger tab Trigger Type : ON Trigger Device : SM1515

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 187

18

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.

Connection method Connect the CC-Link network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for RX, RY, RWw, RWr of the host station set in the CC-Link network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following. Page 107 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: 0 (fixed)

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CC-Link connection

P ow

er supply

m odule

GOT

Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station)

Control system

(System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (Intelligent device station)

Em pty

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

CC-Link

Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (Standby master station)

P ow

er supply

m odule

P ow

er supply

m odule

E m

pty

Em pty

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new control system after system switching.

System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user

When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching, switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program of the new control system. For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual. QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link)

CC-Link network setting To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection, set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B. For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 189

19

CC-Link connection (Via G4) This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.

Connection method Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

P ow

ersupply m

odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

GOT Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station)

Control system

(System A)

Em pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

CC-Link

Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (Standby master station)

Network No. 0, Station No. 2 (AJ65BT-G4-S3)

P ow

ersupply m

odule

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new control system after system switching.

System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control system, or due to switching by the user

When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station. Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system after system switching. To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching, switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program of the new control system. For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual. QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) (Sample Programs when Using CC-Link)

CC-Link network setting To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection, set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B. For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 191

19

MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (Network systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system.

Connection method Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.

To monitor the control system without MELSEC redundant setting When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function. Page 200 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network

Station No.: Station number of the control system

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

GOT Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)

Control system

(System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty Standby system

(System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Pow ersupply

m odule

P ow

ersupply m

odule

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

CC-Link IE controller network connection (Network system) This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CC-Link IE controller network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. For details, refer to the following. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as described below.

To specify the station number which was set in the Q redundant setting in the device setting, set the station number as the other station.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network

Station No.: Station number of the control system

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

GOT

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71G

P 21-S

X

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71G

P 21-S

X

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)

Monitor target

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)CC-Link IE Controller Network

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Standby system

(System B)

E m

pty

E m

ptyControl system

(System A)

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 193

19

Ethernet connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network.

Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT. Set the Ethernet modules of System A and System B (including NW No., station No, and IP address) to the Ethernet setting of the GOT side. For details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

To specify the station number which was set in the MELSEC redundant setting in the device setting, set the station number as the other station.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet module station No. 2.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host Host (The control system is monitored.)

Other NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet

Station No.: Station number of the control system

MELSEC Redundant Setting Page 215 MELSEC Redundant Setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

GOT

Network No. 1, Station No. 1

Control system

(System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty Standby system

(System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 3

Network No. 1, Station No. 2

Ethernet

P ow

ersupply m

odule

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

When monitoring control system without MELSEC redundant setting When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function. Page 200 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 195

19

Connection to the redundant type extension base unit

Serial communication connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Serial communication connection

Redundant type extension base unit

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

GOT

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71C

24N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

GOT

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71E71-100

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

Ethernet connection

Redundant type extension base unit

Network No.2, Station No.1 (Ethernet module)

Network No. 2, Station No. 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 197

19

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

Connection method Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. For details, refer to the following. Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link network system. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for RX, RY, RWw, RWr of the host station set in the CC-Link network and execute the cyclic transmission. For details, refer to the following. Page 107 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Other NW No.: 0 (fixed)

Station No.: 0 (Master station)

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

GOT

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J61BT11N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

CC-Link connection Redundant type extension base unit

Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station)

Network No. 0, Station No. 1

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.

Connection method Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT. For details, refer to the following. Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700

Device setting (Network setting) Host

MELSEC Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

GOT

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J61B

T11N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

CC-Link connection

Redundant type extension base unit

Network No. 0, Station No. 1 (AJ65BT-G4-S3)

Network No. 0, Station No. 0 (Master station)

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 199

20

Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.) at the occurrence of system switching even if the MELSEC redundant setting is not made. The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function. The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen switching function.

The following explains how to use each function.

Method for using the station number switching function As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be

created on one screen. If the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the same

monitor screen. To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC

CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device. Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection) System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

Function Advantage Disadvantage Station number switching function

The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen.

Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.

Screen switching function All objects can be used since monitor screens are created for each station number.

Monitor screens must be created separately for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system).

Connected module Network No. Station No. MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1 1

MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network 3

MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1

GOT Station No. 3 Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 2

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the trigger action may be disabled.

2. Set the trigger action. Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [trigger action].

Create the trigger action in the project on the Project tab.

Setting for the trigger action function For the trigger action function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the trigger action function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the trigger action function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device]) Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570".

Set here.

Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Station No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to 1.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 201

20

3. Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.

4. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen.

5. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen script for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:

Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.

Check here.

// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){

if([w:GD100]==1){ [w:GD100]=2;

}else{ [w:GD100]=1;

} }

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.

Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection

1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the trigger action may be disabled.

Connected module Network No. Station No. Ethernet module of control system 1 1

Ethernet module of standby system 2

GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3

Ethernet Network No. 1

GOTStation No. 3

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 E71

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 E71

Station No. 2

Set here.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 203

20

2. Set the trigger action. Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [trigger action] turns ON. (For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H))

Create the trigger action in the project on the Project tab.

Setting for the trigger action function For the trigger action function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the trigger action function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the trigger action function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device]) Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570".

3. Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.

Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=258(0102H) Station No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=257(0101H) Station No. is changed to 1.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0". Therefore, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number switching device and the switch for shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1. To make this setting, select [Object] [Switch] [Switch]. The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1, Station No. 1) and base screen=2 to one switch.(Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen)

5. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen. However, do not make this setting on the screen 1 created in step 4.

Check here.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 205

20

6. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen script for Ethernet connection:

For the Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set to the station switching device. For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102". Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.

// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){

2 ot 1 .oN noitatS // {)1010x0==]001DG:w[(fi [w:GD100]=0x0102;

1 ot 2 .oN noitatS //{esle} [w:GD100]=0x0101;

} }

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

Method for using the screen changing function As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the

GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen. To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC

CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the screen switching devices.

Precautions: There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be used. (1) Base screen switching device (2) Overlap window 1 switching device (3) Overlap window 2 switching device (4) Overlap window 3 switching device (5) Overlap window 4 switching device (6) Overlap window 5 switching device (7) Superimpose window 1 switching device (8) Superimpose window 2 switching device

Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection) System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device.

Connected module Network No. Station No. MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1 1

MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network 3

MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1

GOTStation No. 3

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 2

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 207

20

2. Set the trigger action. Set the trigger action so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [trigger action].

Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [trigger action] turns ON.

Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=1 Screen No. is changed to 1.

Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=1 Screen No. is changed to 1.

8 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

3. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2).

4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen scripts for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection: The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection.

When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the screen switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.

Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2

// Script of Screen No. 1 // If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2. if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=2; }

// Script of Screen No. 2 // If Station 2 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 1. if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=1; }

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 209

21

Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device.

2. Set the trigger action. Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [trigger action] turns ON.

3. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2).

Connected module Network No. Station No. Ethernet module of control system 1 1

Ethernet module of standby system 2

GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3

Ethernet Network No. 1

GOTStation No. 3

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 E71

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 E71

Station No. 2

Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : GS231.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=1 Screen No. is changed to 1.

0 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)]. Screen script for Ethernet connection: The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection.

Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2

// Script of Screen No. 1 // If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2. if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=2; }

// Script of Screen No. 2 // If Station 2 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 1. if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){ [w:GD100]=1; }

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 211

21

Precautions

Start of the redundant system When connected to the redundant system, the GOT starts monitoring after the control system and standby system are decided, regardless of the starting order of the PLC systems A and B. The GOT starts monitoring when both systems start. (For the redundant system configured with a redundant extension base unit, the GOT starts monitoring the system that starts first, which is the control system.) Power on the redundant system within the time set in the GOT (communication timeout time and number of retries) so that the GOT can start monitoring after the redundant system starts (after the control system is decided). If the power supply does not start within the time set on the GOT, the GOT stops monitoring for safety reasons, and the following system alarm occurs. 451: The MELSEC redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again.

System switching When system is switched by user program The communication path does not change, and the GOT follows the monitor. The system alarm is not displayed.

When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. The communication path changes, and the GOT follows the monitor. "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system." appears as the system alarm.

Redundant system configuration and operation mode System alarm display With the following system configuration "451: MELSEC Redundant setting and actual system configuration do not match" will appear as the system alarm, and the GOT will not be able to correctly monitor the redundant system's CPU. If the system alarm occurs, restart the GOT (reapply or reset the power supply) to start monitoring again. System configuration with MELSEC redundant settings that do not match the actual redundant system System configuration in which the redundant system operation mode is not the backup mode

Changing the MELSEC redundant settings Always reset the GOT after changing the MELSEC redundant settings. If not reset, the changed MELSEC redundant settings will not be applied on the GOT.

When non-redundant system is monitored after setting MELSEC redundant settings If the MELSEC redundant settings were set for a non-redundant system, the GOT will operate normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the MELSEC redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the MELSEC redundant setting.

When redundant system is monitored without making MELSEC redundant setting When the MELSEC redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected.

2 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

CC-Link(ID) connection When system switching is occurred by the following factors, data link control of CC-Link(ID) does not move from the master station of the new standby system to the standby master station of the new control system and the GOT cannot follow the monitor. Make sure that the standby master station of the new control system should control data link. For details of the ladder program for data link control, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC Q Series QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System) Execution of the system switching instruction at the PLC side Execution of system switching operation using the engineering tool Execution of system switching request from other network modules. When system switching is occurred by the above factors, data link control does not move to the standby master station because the master station of the new standby system can communicate with the GOT. Also, the new control system is the standby master station without changing. Therefore, the GOT monitors the master station without following the new control system/new standby system and cannot monitor the redundant system.

Connection to the remote I/O station Monitor function The GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. Monitor function System monitor function

Clock setting of the GOT The GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made. Use GX Works2 or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.

Connection to MELSECNET/H For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102". Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.

Option functions including the ladder monitor A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when system switching occurs while an option function such as the ladder monitor is used.

Monitor display speed When the control station of the MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU redundant system in the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, , the timeout is detected as the system alarm. If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.

In the direct CPU connection (serial) In the direct CPU connection (serial), the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following cases. When the power supply to the CPU where the GOT is connected is OFF When the cable connecting the GOT with the CPU is broken When the tracking is disabled

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series 213

21

When the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode When the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode, do not make the MELSEC redundant system setting for the GOT side when connecting the GOT.

4 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.2 MELSEC Q Series

3

3.3 MELSEC Redundant Setting The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a RCPU redundant system, QCPU redundant system.

Before making the MELSEC redundant setting In the MELSEC redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [MELSEC Redundant] from the menu.

2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

3. Make the settings for the MELSEC redundant setting. In the MELSEC Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.

*1 For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.

(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)

Item Contents Model CH1 to CH4 Select a tab of the CH No. for the MELSEC redundant setting.

Follow the redundant system via a serial interface

Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station at serial connection.

Pair No.*1 Net No. Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64). Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU. (The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)

Station No. Set the station No. (1 to 120) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64). Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU. (The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)

New Create a new pair No.

Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.

Delete Deletes one setting of the selected pair. After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.

Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.

Copy All Copies the MELSEC redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.

Paste All Pastes the copied MELSEC redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.

3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.3 MELSEC Redundant Setting 215

21

*1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair. Example: Ethernet connection in the RCPU redundant system (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2)

Precautions for making MELSEC redundant setting Pay attention to the following items when making the MELSEC redundant setting. Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed. Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which MELSEC redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.

If any of the QCPUs to which the MELSEC redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.

When making the MELSEC redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the MELSEC redundant setting and the actual network module station Nos. are not matched, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.

GOT supports the backup mode, which is the redundant mode of the RCPU redundant system, and does not support the process mode and separate mode.

GOT supports the backup mode, which is the operation mode of the QCPU redundant system, and does not support the debug mode and separate mode.

GOT

1) Process CPU 2) Redundant function module 3) Tracking cable 4) CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006

4)2)1)1) 2) 4)

2) 4)2) 4) 1) 1)

3)

3)

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 3(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.3 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 4(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.4 Port No.: 5006

N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 5(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.5 Port No.: 5001

Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)

Control system (system A)

Standby system (system B)

Ethernet

(Pair No.2)

(Pair No.1)

6 3 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 3.3 MELSEC Redundant Setting

4

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 217 Connectable Model List Page 226 System Configuration Page 247 GOT Side Settings Page 260 PLC Side Setting Page 367 Precautions

4.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU*1 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

R16PCPU*1

R32PCPU*1

R120PCPU*1

R04ENCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU *2 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

R16PSFCPU *2

R32PSFCPU *2

R120PSFCPU *2

R08SFCPU*3 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module

R16SFCPU*3

R32SFCPU*3

R120SFCPU*3

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List 217

21

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V Ethernet Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W Ethernet Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 236 Connection to Display I/F

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U *5 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

FX5UC *5

FX5UJ*5 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

FX5S Ethernet Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List

4

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleQ00CPU*4

Q01CPU*4

Q02CPU*4

Q02HCPU*4

Q06HCPU*4

Q12HCPU*4

Q25HCPU*4

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V *6

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

Ethernet Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List 219

22

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 245 Connection through a servo amplifier

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

Ethernet Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A*7

Q02HCPU-A*7

Q06HCPU-A*7

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU *7

Q2ACPU-S1*7

Q3ACPU*7

Q4ACPU*7

Q4ARCPU*7

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleA2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List

4

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleA0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*9*10 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleQ173CPU*9*10

Q172CPUN*9

Q173CPUN*9

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module Page 238 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*11

Q170MSCPU*12

Q170MSCPU-S1*12

MR-MQ100

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleA273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleQJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB CC-Link IE - Page 237 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB Ethernet

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List 221

22

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Ethernet Page 236 Connection to Display I/F

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) *13

Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet module

CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) *13

CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) *13

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) *14

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S*15 Ethernet Page 226 Connection to Ethernet moduleFX3G*15

FX3GC*15

FX3GE

FX3U*15

FX3UC*15

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List

4

*1 Mount a redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPCPU on the base unit when building a redundant system. *2 Mount the SIL2 function module R6PSFM and redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *5 When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP, use firmware Ver.1.240 or later. *6 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *7 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted.

Page 224 Ethernet module *8 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.

However, the following devices cannot be monitored. Devices added to QnACPU Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) File register (R)

*9 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*10 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

*11 When using Ethernet module, only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *12 When using Ethernet module, the extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used. *13 The Display I/F of the robot controller cannot be connected.

Ethernet connections can be established via either of the following. Ethernet module (QJ71E71) Ethernet port built in the PLC CPU

*14 Ethernet connections can be established via the PERIPHERAL I/F of the robot controller or either of the following. Ethernet module (QJ71E71) Ethernet port built in the PLC CPU

*15 The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below.

Ethernet module FX3U(C) FX3G(C) FX3S FX3U-ENET-L Ver. 2.21 or later FX3U-ENET-L is not supported.

FX3U-ENET Ver. 2.21 or later FX3U-ENET is not supported.

FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 3.10 or later Ver. 2.00 or later Ver. 1.00 or later

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List 223

22

Ethernet module

*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU. However, the following devices cannot be monitored. Devices added to QnACPU Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) File register (R)

*2 Use an Ethernet module and PLC CPU with function version B or later. *3 Use firmware version 12 or later when building a redundant system.

CPU series Communication module MELSEC iQ-R Series RJ71EN71 *3

RJ71GN11-T2 *4

RJ71GN11-EIP*4

RD78G4 *4*5, RD78G8 *4*5, RD78G16 *4*5, RD78G32 *4*5, RD78G64 *4*5, RD78GHV *4*5, RD78GHW *4*5

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) *10 RJ71GN11-T2 RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, RD78G64, RD78GHV, RD78GHW

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71GN11-T2

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-ENET *6*7

FX5-ENET/IP *6*7

FX5-CCLGN-MS *6

FX5-40SSC-G*6*11, FX5-80SSC-G*6*11

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 (R16NCCPU-S1) CR800-R (R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE Field Network head module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ71EN71 *3

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) MELSEC-QS Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) C Controller module (MELSEC-Q Series)

QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) *1

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) *1 AJ71QE71N3-T *2, AJ71QE71N-B5 *2, AJ71QE71N-B2 *2, AJ71QE71N-T *2, AJ71QE71N- B5T *2, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T *2*8, A1SJ71QE71N-B5 *2*8, A1SJ71QE71N-B2 *2*8, A1SJ71QE71N-T *2*8, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T *2*8, A1SJ71QE71-B5 *8, A1SJ71QE71-B2 *8

MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A (AnCPU) MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T *9, A1SJ71E71N-B5 *9, A1SJ71E71N-B2 *9, A1SJ71E71N-T *9, A1SJ71E71N-B5T *9, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 *9, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 *9

MELSEC-FX FX3U-ENET-L, FX3U-ENET, FX3U-ENET-ADP

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB

MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List

4

*4 The following shows the connectable PLC CPUs and their firmware versions for connection with each module.

*5 Use a Motion module with software version 06 or later. For the PLC CPU firmware version and GX Works3 version that support the Motion module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Application)

*6 Not available to FX5UJ and FX5S. *7 For FX5-ENET and FX5-ENET/IP, use firmware Ver.1.100 or later.

For FX5U, FX5UC, and FX5UJ that support FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP, use firmware Ver.1.240 or later. *8 Only available for MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU). *9 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. *10 When connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module or Motion module, use the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series)

with firmware version 15 or later. *11 For FX5U and FX5UC that support FX5-40SSC-G or FX5-80SSC-G, use firmware Ver.1.230 or later.

Model Firmware version

Connecting to RJ71GN11-T2

Connecting to RJ71GN11-EIP

Connecting to RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, or RD78G64

Connecting to RD78GHV or RD78GHW

R00CPU 11 or later 29 or later 12 or later 14 or later

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU 43 or later 62 or later 44 or later 46 or later

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08SFCPU 20 or later Unavailable 21 or later 21 or later

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1 Connectable Model List 225

22

4.2 System Configuration Connection to Ethernet module

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), MELSEC- Q, QS, QnA, A, Motion CPU (Q series), or MELSEC-L

PLC Connection cable*1

Maximum segment length*2

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name Ethernet module*3*4

Commu nication type

Cable model Option device*6 Model GOT*7*9 Unit*8

UDP TCP

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ71EN71 Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 119 (16 or less recomme nded)

119 17

GT25-J71E71-100

CNC C80 (R16NCCPU-S1) CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE Field Network head module(MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ71EN71 Ethernet - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Ethernet modulePLC CPU Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion CPU (Q Series) *5

Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recomme nded)

63 17

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-QS - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-QnA AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2

Ethernet - (Built into GOT) 63 (4 or less recomme nded)

8 -

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-A MELSEC-Q (A mode) Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5 A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 A1SJ71E71-B2-S3

Ethernet - (Built into GOT) 63 (4 or less recomme nded)

8 -

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100 Ethernet - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recomme nded)

63 17

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Connection cable*1

Maximum segment length*2

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name Ethernet module*3*4

Commu nication type

Cable model Option device*6 Model GOT*7*9 Unit*8

UDP TCP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 227

22

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the cable to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA or NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) For QnA Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual For A Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual

*4 Select one of the following for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series): RJ71EN71 Ethernet module (Q Series): QJ71E71 Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71 Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71 For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 When using the peripheral I/F of Q170MCPU, Q17nDCPU-S1 or MR-MQ100, refer to the following. Page 238 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *7 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *8 The number of GOTs connectable to one Ethernet module is indicated. *9 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4.

16 or less is recommended.

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-F series

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC iQ-F FX5-ENET User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5-ENET/IP User's Manual

*4 Select [FX5-ENET] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *7 The number of GOTs connectable to one Ethernet module is indicated. *8 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4.

16 or less is recommended.

PLC Connection cable*1

Maximum segment length*2

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

Ethernet module*3*4

Communication type

Cable model Option device*5 Model GOT*6*8 Unit*7

UDP TCP MELSEC iQ-F Series (FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ)

FX5-ENET FX5-ENET/IP

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

32 32

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Ethernet modulePLC CPU Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 229

23

When connecting to MELSEC-FX

PLC Connection cable*1

Maximum segment length*2

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

Ethernet module*3*4

Communication type

Cable model Option device*8 Model GOT*9*11 *12

Unit*10

UDP TCP MELSEC-FX (FX3U, FX3G)

FX3U-ENET-L Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 2

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3U, FX3G)

FX3U-ENET Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 4

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3UC, FX3GC)

FX3UC-1PS-5V, FX2NC-CNV-IF + FX3U-ENET-L*5

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 2

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3UC, FX3GC)

FX3UC-1PS-5V, FX2NC-CNV-IF + FX3U-ENET*5

Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 4

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Ethernet modulePLC CPU Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

MELSEC-FX (FX3U, FX3UC-32MT- LT(-2))

FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3U-CNV-BD + FX3U-ENET- ADP*6*7

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 4

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3UC)

FX3U-ENET- ADP

Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3G)

FX3G-CNV- ADP + FX3U-ENET- ADP*7

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommen ded)

- 4

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3GC)

FX3U-ENET- ADP*7

Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3S)

FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-ENET- ADP*7

Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Connection cable*1

Maximum segment length*2

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

Ethernet module*3*4

Communication type

Cable model Option device*8 Model GOT*9*11 *12

Unit*10

UDP TCP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 231

23

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals. For FX Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual

*4 Select [FX] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required. *6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series, FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, or

FX3U-CNV-BD is required. *7 FX3U-ENET-ADP occupies one extension communication adapter CH (Max. 2 CHs) of the FX3U(C) or FX3G(C) and one extension

communication adapter CH (Max. 1 CH) of the FX3S. One CPU allows the connection of only one FX3U-ENET-ADP.

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *9 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *10 The number of GOTs connectable to one Ethernet module is indicated. *11 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4.

16 or less is recommended. *12 For GT21 and GS21, up to four controllers can be connected per channel.

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module

PLC Connection cable*1*2

Maximum segment length *3

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name Communication type

Option device*7 Model GOT*8*10 PLC*9

UDP TCP MELSEC iQ-R Series *4*5*11

Robot controller CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 119 (16 or less recommended)

119 17

GT25-J71E71-100

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) *4*5*11

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 119 (16 or less recommended)

119 17

GT25-J71E71-100

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*11

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 119 (16 or less recommended)

119 17

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*11

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 119 (16 or less recommended)

119 17

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU

Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 233

23

MELSEC-QnUDE(H)*4*5

MELSEC-QnUDV*4*5

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

16 (For UDP and TCP in total)

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-L *4*5 Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

16 (For UDP and TCP in total)

GT25-J71E71-100

C Controller module (Q Series)

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

*6

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC-FX (FX3GE)

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

- 4

GT25-J71E71-100

MELSEC iQ-F Series *4*5 Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 63 (16 or less recommended)

- 8

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Connection cable*1*2

Maximum segment length *3

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name Communication type

Option device*7 Model GOT*8*10 PLC*9

UDP TCP

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA, NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*2 When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub. *3 Length between a hub and a node

The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*4 For the system configuration of the Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the manual of the PLC. *5 For [Unit Type] to be selected in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following.

Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting *6 By the controller type of the C Controller module (Q Series) and an operation mode, It's different in number of connectable GOTs.

*7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *8 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *9 The number of GOTs connectable to one PLC is indicated. *10 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4.

16 or less is recommended. *11 For connection to RnENCPU in the multiple CPU system, the firmware version of the RnENCPU must be 14 or later.

Controller Type Operation mode Number of connectable GOTs Q12DCCPU-V standard monitor mode 1

Expansion mode 16

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG/LS - 16

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 235

23

Connection to Display I/F

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of the CNC C70, refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP MANUAL

*4 Select [Q17nNC] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 Select [RnNCCPU] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*3

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*6 Model

CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU)*3*4

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 16 GOTs for 1 network

GT25-J71E71-100

CNC C80 (R16NCCPU-S1)*5

Ethernet 100m - (Built into GOT) 8 GOTs for 1 network

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

CNC C70/C80PLC CPU Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connection to NZ2GF-ETB

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA, NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Use cables with the following specifications.

*4 For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network module side, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

*5 The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most). *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable 1)*4

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

Connection cable 2)*1 GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Local module

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Commun ication type

Model name

Commu nication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Maximum segment length*3

Option device *6

Model

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion CPU (Q Series)

QJ71GF11 -T2*4

Double- shielded twisted pair cable*3

100m CC-Link IE NZ2GF -ETB

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

128 GOTs*5

(recommended to 16 units or less)

GT25- J71E71- 100

Connector Range Category 5e or higher Shielded RJ-45

Cable that satisfies the following specifications: IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B(Category 5e)

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

GOT CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module

QCPU Hub Connection

cable 2) Connection

cable 1) Connection

cable 2)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 237

23

Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 When using the PERIPHERAL I/F, set as shown below. Use the GT Designer3 Version1.12N or later. Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*3 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Access to other networks Other networks cannot be accessed through the PERIPHERAL I/F.

PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*3

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name*2 Communication type

Option device*4 Model

Motion CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 MR-MQ100 CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

30m - (Built into GOT) 16 GOTs for 1 network

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU

Q172DSRCPU

PLC CPU

Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 MR-MQ100

Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module

PLC Connection cable (1) *1 Extern al device

Connection cable (2) *1

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

CC-Link IE TSN- equipped module*3 *4

Comm unicati on type

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Option device *10

Model GOT *6*8

Unit*7

UDP TCP

MELSEC iQ-R series (RnCPU, RnENCPU, RnSFCPU) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) MELSECWi nCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)

RJ71GN11 -T2

Ethernet 1000BASE- T

Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-

TX Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE- TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

119 (8 or less reco mme nded)

8 8

GT25- J71E71- 100

MELSEC iQ-R series (RnCPU, RnENCPU)

RJ71GN11 -EIP*9

Ethernet 1000BASE- T

Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-

TX Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE- TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

119 (8 or less reco mme nded)

8 8

GT25- J71E71- 100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

PLC CPU GOT

Connection cable (2)Connection cable (1)

General-purpose Switch

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 239

24

*1 Use the straight cable. *2 For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

*3 For the system configuration of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module side, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

*4 Select the following for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. MELSEC iQ-R Series: [RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)] MELSEC iQ-F Series: [FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G] For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 Length between the General-purpose Switch and node *6 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *7 Number of GOTs connectable to one CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module *8 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4. *9 Connect the cable to the P1 port of the RJ71GN11-EIP. *10 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

MELSEC iQ-F series (FX5U, FX5UC)

FX5- CCLGN- MS

Ethernet 1000BASE- T

Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-

TX Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE- TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

63 (8 or less reco mme nded)

8 8

GT25- J71E71- 100

PLC Connection cable (1) *1 Extern al device

Connection cable (2) *1

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

CC-Link IE TSN- equipped module*3 *4

Comm unicati on type

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Option device *10

Model GOT *6*8

Unit*7

UDP TCP

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connection to Motion module The following methods are available to connect the GOT to a Motion module. Page 243 Connecting the GOT to the built-in Ethernet port of the Motion module Page 241 Connecting the GOT and Motion module through the built-in Ethernet port of the PLC

To monitor the global labels of the Motion module with the GOT, connect the GOT and Motion module through the built-in Ethernet port of the PLC. If the GOT is connected to the built-in port of the Motion module, the global labels of the Motion module cannot be monitored.

Connecting the GOT and Motion module through the built-in Ethernet port of the PLC The following shows the system configuration for monitoring the global labels of the Motion module with the GOT.

*1 Use the straight cable. *2 For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following.

For usable general-purpose hubs, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

*3 For the system configuration for the motion module side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

*4 Select [RCPU] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. Set either of the following values for [Port No.] according to the communication method. UDP: [5006] TCP: [5007] For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

PLC Connection cable (1) *1 Externa l device

Connection cable (2) *1 GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Motion module *3

Commu nication type

Cable model Maximum segment length *6

Cable model Maximum segment length *6

Option device *9

Model

MELSEC iQ-R series (RnCPU, RnENCPU, RnSFCPU) *4*8

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) *5

RD78G4 RD78G8 RD78G16 RD78G32 RD78G64 RD78GH V RD78GH W

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable(STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable(STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 motion module *7

GT25- J71E71- 100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Connection cable (2)Connection cable (1)

Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU

GOT General-purpose Switch

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 241

24

*5 Select [RnCCPU/RnWCPU] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. Set either of the following values for [Port No.] according to the communication method. UDP: [5006] TCP: [5007] For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*6 Length between the General-purpose Switch and node *7 Multiple devices cannot access the motion module simultaneously.

Before accessing the motion module being monitored by the GOT, end the monitoring by the GOT. *8 To use the multiple CPU system when the GOT is connected to RnENCPU, the firmware version of the RnENCPU must be 10 or later. *9 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connecting the GOT to the built-in Ethernet port of the Motion module The following shows the system configuration for monitoring the devices of the PLC CPU with the GOT.

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series

*1 Use the straight cable. *2 For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) *3 For the system configuration on the Motion module side, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) *4 Select [RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 Length between the General-purpose Switch and node *6 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *7 Number of GOTs connectable to one Motion module *8 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4. *9 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable (1) *1 Extern al device

Connection cable (2) *1

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

Motion module *3*4

Commu nication type

Cable model Maximum segment length *5

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Option device *9

Model GOT *6*8

Unit*7

UDP TCP

MELSEC iQ-R series (RnCPU, RnENCPU, RnSFCPU) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RD78G4 RD78G8 RD78G16 RD78G32 RD78G64 RD78GH V RD78GH W

Ethernet 1000BASE-T Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-

TX Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE- TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

119 (8 or less reco mme nded)

8 8

GT25- J71E71- 100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

PLC CPU GOT

Connection cable (2)Connection cable (1)

Motion module General-purpose Switch

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 243

24

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-F series

*1 Use the straight cable. *2 For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Motion Module/Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) *3 For the system configuration on the Motion module side, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Motion Module/Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) *4 Select [FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 Length between the General-purpose Switch and node *6 The number of connectable controllers per GOT channel is indicated. *7 Number of GOTs connectable to one Motion module *8 Up to 128 controllers in total can be set for the GOT channels No. 1 to No. 4. *9 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable (1) *1 Externa l device

Connection cable (2) *1

GOT Max. pieces of equipment connected

Model name

Motion module *3*4

Commu nication type

Cable model Maximum segment length *5

Cable model

Maximum segment length *5

Option device *9

Model GOT *6*8

Unit*7

UDP TCP

MELSEC iQ-F series (FX5U, FX5UC)

FX5- 40SSC-G FX5- 80SSC-G

Ethernet 1000BASE-T Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-

TX Double- shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

100m General- purpose Switch*2

100BASE- TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT)

63 (8 or less reco mme nded)

8 8

GT25- J71E71- 100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Connection cable (2)Connection cable (1)

General-purpose Switch Motion modulePLC CPU GOT

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

Connection through a servo amplifier

*1 For the system configuration of the PLC, refer to the following. Manual of the PLC

*2 The length between the hub and node. The maximum length depends on the Ethernet module used. The following shows the number of the connectable pieces of equipment when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: Up to 2 pieces using cascade connection (205 m) For the cascade connection between the switching hubs, there is no theoretical limit to the number of cascades. For whether there is a limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the settings in GOT, refer to the following. Page 247 GOT Side Settings

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Use a PLC whose firmware version is as shown below.

PLC*1 Servo amplifier Connection cable

Maximum segment length*2

GOT*3 Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communic ation type

Model name

Communic ation type

Option device*4 Model

MELSEC iQ-R series*5

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) MELSEC iQ-F series*5

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*6

MELSEC-L*6

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5D1-G4 MR-JET-G

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT25-J71E71-100

Series Model name Applicable firmware version MELSEC iQ-R series R00CPU

R01CPU R02CPU

From the first version

R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

25 or later

R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU

MELSEC iQ-F series FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

1.040 or later

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifierServo amplifierPLC

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration 245

24

*6 Use a PLC with a serial number starting with a 5-digit number as shown below.

Series Model name Applicable version MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q03UDVCPU

Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

PLCs having a serial number starting with 18112 or later

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT

PLCs having a serial number starting with 18112 or later

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 System Configuration

4

4.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] When using the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100), also select [Ethernet:Multi]. [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 248 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 247

24

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in a one-on-one relationship without a hub, set [Timeout Time] to 6 sec. or longer.

*2 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*3 The range is 1 to 64 when [Driver] is set to [Ethernet(FX), Gateway]. *4 When connecting to the QCPU, LCPU, do not set [5009] for the port No. Otherwise, monitoring becomes unavailable. *5 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default

value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*2 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 120*3

GOT Communication Port No.*4 Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. For Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

(Default: 5001*5) For Ethernet(FX), Gateway

(Default: 5019*5)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time*1 Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 250 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 251 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 252 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 249

25

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L], or [MELIPC] is selected for [Controller Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 251

25

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 253

25

Connected Ethernet controller setting

*1 Select one of the following [Unit Type].

Item Description Range [Host] The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

[Net No.] *5 Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

[1] to [239]

[Station] *4*5 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

[1] to [64], [1] to [120], or [0] to [120] *6

[Unit Type] *1 Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: depending on the [Controller Type] setting)

[RCPU] [RnCCPU/RnWCPU] [RnNCCPU] [FX5CPU] [QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)] [Q17nNC] [QnD(H)CCPU] [RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)] [RJ71EN71] [FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G] [FX5-ENET] [QJ71E71/LJ71E71] [LCPU] [NZ2GF-ETB] [AJ71QE71] [AJ71E71] [CR800] [CRnD-700] [Q17nDSR] [FX]

[IP Address] Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: depending on the [Controller Type] setting)

[0.0.0.0] to [255.255.255.255]

[Port No.] *2*3 Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: depending on the [Controller Type] setting)

[1024] to [65534]

[Communication] *2 (Default: depending on the [Controller Type] setting) [UDP], [TCP]

GOT connection destination Unit Type RCPU,RnMTCPU [RCPU]

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

[RnCCPU/RnWCPU]

CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1) [RnNCCPU]

FX5CPU [FX5CPU]

QnUD(P)V, QnUDE(H), QCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), Q173D(S)CPU(-S1), Q172D(S)CPU(-S1)

[QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)]

Q17nNCCPU [Q17nNC]

C Controller module (Q series) [QnD(H)CCPU]

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

Page 226 System Configuration *2 The setting range is as follows:

*3 Match the port number of the CPU and [Port No.] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. *4 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Page 248 Communication detail settings *5 The network No. and PLC No. are unnecessary for Built-in Ethernet port CPU (Port No.: 5006, 5007) and FX5CPU/FXCPU.

Set the numbers of [Network No.] and [Station No.] in the object setting dialog to the numbers of [Net No.] and [Station] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) Motion module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

[RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)]

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) [RJ71EN71]

RnENCPU(Port CPU P1) [RCPU]

RnENCPU(Port P1) [RJ71EN71]

RnENCPU(Port P2) -

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module(MELSEC iQ-F Series) Motion module (MELSEC iQ-F Series)

[FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G]

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) [FX5-ENET]

Ethernet module (Q, L Series) [QJ71E71/LJ71E71]

LCPU [LCPU]

NZ2GF-ETB [NZ2GF-ETB]

Ethernet module (QnA Series) [AJ71QE71]

Ethernet module (A Series) [AJ71E71]

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) [CR800]

CRnQ-700,CR750-Q,CR751-Q(Q172DRCPU) [CRnD-700]

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) [Q17nDSR]

Ethernet module (FX Series) [FX]

Type Port No. Communication format [RCPU] [5001] (For GT21 and GS21, this cannot be set.)

(Select this item to enable the network No. and PC No. of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.)

[UDP] (fixed)

[5006] [UDP] (fixed)

[5007] [TCP] (fixed)

[RnCCPU/RnWCPU], [RnNCCPU], [QnD(H)CCPU], [LCPU], [CR800]

[5006] [UDP] (fixed)

[5007] [TCP] (fixed)

[Q17nNC], [RJ71EN71], [RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)], [QJ71E71/LJ71E71], [NZ2GF-ETB]

[5001] [UDP] (fixed)

[5002] [TCP] (fixed)

[FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G] [5001] [UDP] (fixed)

[5554] [TCP] (fixed)

[FX5-ENET] [5554] [TCP] (fixed)

[5555] [UDP] (fixed)

[QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)] [5001] (For GT21 and GS21, this cannot be set.) (Select this item to enable the network No. and PC No. of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.)

[UDP] (fixed)

[5006] [UDP] (fixed)

[5007] [TCP] (fixed)

[AJ71QE71] [5001] [UDP] (fixed)

[AJ71E71] [1024] to [65535] [UDP] (fixed)

[CRnD-700] [5001] [UDP] (fixed)

[Q17nDSR] [5001] [UDP] (fixed)

[FX5CPU] [5562] [TCP] (fixed)

[FX] [5551] (When using FX3U-ENET-L or FX3U-ENET) [TCP] (fixed)

[5556] (When using FX3U-ENET-ADP) [TCP] (fixed)

GOT connection destination Unit Type

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 255

25

*6 The setting range of the station No. differs depending on the [Controller Type] setting.

Type Station No. setting range [RCPU] [RnCCPU/RnWCPU] [RnNCCPU] [FX5CPU] [RJ71EN71] [FX5-ENET]

1 to 120

[QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)] [QnD(H)CCPU] [LCPU] [Q17nNC] [QJ71E71/LJ71E71] [AJ71QE71] [AJ71E71] [FX] [NZ2GF-ETB]

1 to 64

[RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)] [FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G]

0 to 120

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

When selecting [RCPU] or [QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] When [RCPU] or [QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)] is selected for [Controller Type], the port No. setting can be changed.

When [5001] is set for the port No.: There is the setting for the network No. and PC No. of the built-in Ethernet port CPU (Port No.: 5001). Set the network No. and station No. for the object setting to match the network No. and PC No. of the built-in Ethernet port CPU. However, when connecting to the built-in Ethernet port CPU other than [RCPU] or [QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)], do not set [5001] for the port No.. *1*2

Otherwise, monitoring becomes unavailable. *1 For RCPU, use one with the following firmware version.

R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU: 08 or later Other RCPU: 40 or later

*2 Use the QnUD(P)VCPU with a serial number that contains 17052 or later in the first 5 digits.

When [5006, 5007] is set for the port No.: There is no setting for the network No. and PC No. of the built-in Ethernet port CPU (Port No.: 5006, 5007). Set the same values for [Network No.] and [Station No.] in the object setting dialog as that of [Net No.] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Connection to the built-in Ethernet port PLC using the communication format TCP When using the FA transparent function during communication with the built-in Ethernet port PLC using the communication format TCP, the communication format may be changed from TCP to UDP and communication with the built-in Ethernet port PLC may start. In this case, communication with the built-in Ethernet port PLC cannot be executed normally. Take the following corrective action.

Phenomenon Cause Corrective action When using the FA transparent function, communication is failed.

There is no setting of UDP in the open setting of the built-in Ethernet port PLC.

Add UDP to the open setting at the PLC side.

When using the Ethernet multiple connection, TCP and UDP are used to the same IP address and the FA transparent function for the channel set to TCP is used.

Execute the FA transparent function for the channel set to UDP.

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 257

25

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT21 and GS21 Effective range of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] Only [1] to [4] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] can be used for GT21 and GS21. If [5] onwards are used, the settings are invalid on GT21 and GS21. [Host] setting Set [Host] within the range from [1] to [4] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of N/W No., PLC No., type or IP address are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the combination of the N/ W No. and the PLC No. or the IP address overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. Changing the host on the GOT main unit The host can be changed by the utility function of the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection method, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Only [1] to [4] can be used.

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings

4

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

*1 To access a different network via Built-in Ethernet port CPU, set the same numbers as [Net No.] and [Station] set in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3.

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting may also be necessary for the relay station.For the setting, refer to the following. Page 260 PLC Side Setting Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No.*1 1 to 239

Relay Station No.*1 0 to 120

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.3 GOT Side Settings 259

26

4.4 PLC Side Setting Model Reference Built-in Ethernet port RCPU R00CPU

R01CPU R02CPU R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08PSFCPU R16PSFCPU R32PSFCPU R120PSFCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1) CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

Page 262 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) R12CCPU-V Page 283 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) R102WCPU-W Page 287 Connection to MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

Built-in Ethernet port (MELSEC iQ-F series) FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

Page 291 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q04UDPVCPU Q06UDPVCPU Q13UDPVCPU Q26UDPVCPU Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

Page 301 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU Page 355 Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

Page 321 Connection to C Controller module (Q Series)

Built-in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L06CPU

Page 301 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71EN71 Page 274 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) FX5-ENET FX5-ENET/IP

Page 295 Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series)

Ethernet module (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71

Page 315 Connection to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)

Ethernet module (L Series) LJ71E71-100

Ethernet module (QnA Series) AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2

Page 326 Connection to Ethernet module (QnA Series)

Ethernet module (A Series) AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5 A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 A1SJ71E71-B2-S3

Page 332 Connection to Ethernet module (A Series)

Ethernet module (FX Series)

FX3U-ENET-L FX3U-ENET FX3U-ENET-ADP

Page 338 Connection to Ethernet module (FX Series)

Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU FX3GE Page 345 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE)

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Page 348 Connection to Display I/F (CNC C70)

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module

QJ71GF11-T2 Page 351 Connection to NZ2GF-ETB

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

Page 360 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN- equipped module

Motion module RD78G4 RD78G8 RD78G16 RD78G32 RD78G64 RD78GHV RD78GHW

Page 364 Connection to built-in Ethernet port of Motion module Page 366 Connection to Motion module through Built-in Ethernet port of PLC

Model Reference

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 261

26

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. Page 262 One-on-one connection and the GOTs communication format is UDP Page 264 One-on-one connection and the GOTs communication format is TCP Page 268 Multi-connection and the GOTs communication format is UDP Page 271 Multi-connection and the GOTs communication format is TCP

Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

One-on-one connection and the GOTs communication format is UDP System configuration For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port CPU to one GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU and the GOT. (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 For the settings when using system devices such as a hub, refer to the following. Page 308 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is default value in the PLC Page 312 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC

*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 263 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3 :1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*3 :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

Network No. :1 (virtual) PLC No. (Station)*3 :2 (virtual) IP address :192.168.3.39 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

*2

*2

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting Built-in Ethernet port RCPU and a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].

In the case of CR800-R(R16RTCPU), set to [CR800].

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type RCPU*3

IP Address 192.168.3.39

Port No. 5006

Communication UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 263

26

Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

One-on-one connection and the GOTs communication format is TCP System configuration For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port CPU to one GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.

*1 For the settings when using system devices such as a hub, refer to the following. Page 301 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU

*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 266 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3 :1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*3 :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :TCP (fixed)

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*2

PLC No. (Station)*3 :2 (virtual)*2

IP address :192.168.3.39

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.39

(Use default value)

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Communication data code (Use default value)

External Device Configuration External Device Configuration

Item Set value Protocol (Use default value)

Open system MELSOFT connection

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 265

26

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For how to set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port RCPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].

In the case of CR800-R(R16RTCPU), set to [CR800].

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type RCPU*3

IP Address 192.168.3.39

Port No. 5007

Communication TCP (fixed)

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 267

26

Multi-connection and the GOTs communication format is UDP System configuration (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 269 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

:1 :1

IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

Network No. :1 (virtual) :2 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.1 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

1

Network No. :1 (virtual) :3 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.2 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

2

*1

*1

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Built-in Ethernet port (For MELSEC iQ-R Series)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU and a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP Address 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting (Use default value)

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting -

Item Set value GOT NET No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 269

27

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network. *3 In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].

Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type RCPU*3 RCPU*3

IP Address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2

Port No. 5006 5006

Communication UDP UDP

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Multi-connection and the GOTs communication format is TCP System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 272 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting

(Use default value)

Communication data code

Open Method Setting

External Device Configuration External Device Configuration

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2 :1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*2 :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :TCP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PLC No. (Station)*2 :2 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.1

1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PLC No. (Station)*2 :3 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.2

2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 271

27

External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Item Set value Protocol (Use default value)

Open system MELSOFT connection

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].

Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication \>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type RCPU*3 RCPU*3

IP Address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2

Port No. 5007 5007

Communication TCP (fixed) TCP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 273

27

Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

When the GOT's communication format is UDP System configuration

*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start XY No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2 : 1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*2: 1 IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. : 1 PLC No. (Station)*2 : 2 IP address: 192.168.3.19 Port No.: 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*1

*1 Set [Module parameter] of the port under [Module information].

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *2 Set the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT IP Address 192.168.3.19

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Communications by Network No./Station No. Enable

Setting Method Not Use IP Address

Network No.*2 1

Station No.*3 2

Transient Transmission Group No. (Use default value)

Enable/Disable Online Change

Communication Data Code

Opening Method

External Device Configuration -

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 275

27

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Communication confirmation The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 278 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

RJ71EN71

RUN INIT.

OPEN SD

ERR. COM.ERR.

RD 100M

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port RCPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number.

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type RJ71EN71

IP Address 192.168.3.19

Port No. 5001

Communication UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 277

27

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Reply from 192.168.3.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

When the GOT's communication format is TCP System configuration

*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start XY No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2 : 1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*2 : 1 IP address: 192.168.3.18 Port No.: 5001 Communication format: TCP (fixed)

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No.: 1 PLC No. (Station)*2 : 2 IP address: 192.168.3.19 Port No.: 5002 Communication format : TCP (fixed)

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*1

*1 Set [Module parameter] of the port under [Module information].

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *2 Set the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT IP Address 192.168.3.19

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Setting Method of Network No. and Station No. Do Not Use IP Address

Network No.*2 1

Station No.*3 2

Transient Transmission Group No. (Use default value)

Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting

Communication Data Code

Open Method Setting

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting Target Device connection Configuration Setting

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 279

28

Target Device connection Configuration Setting The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Item Set value Protocol (Use default value)

Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)

Host station port No. (Use default value)

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Communication confirmation The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 282 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type RJ71EN71

IP Address 192.168.3.19

Port No. 5002

Communication TCP

RJ71EN71

RUN INIT.

OPEN SD

ERR. COM.ERR.

RD 100M

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 281

28

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Reply from 192.168.3.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 285 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

:1 :1

IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

Network No. :1 (virtual) :2 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.3 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

1

Network No. :1 (virtual) :3 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.4 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

2

*1

*1

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 283

28

[Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the IP address corresponding to the CH No. to be used to connect to the GOT.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection CH1 Use

IP Address 192.168.3.3

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

CH2 Not Use

IP Address -

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

External Device Configuration -

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network. *3 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT NET No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type RnCCPU/RnWCPU RnCCPU/RnWCPU

IP Address 192.168.3.3 192.168.3.4

Port No.*3 5006 5006

Communication*3 UDP UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 285

28

Checking communication state of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Reply from 192.168.3.3:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator, refer to the following manual. Manuals of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following system configuration.

For the details of MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following. Manuals of MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 289 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

:1 :1

IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

1

Network No. :1 (virtual) :3 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.4 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

2

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

Network No. :1 (virtual) :2 (virtual)

IP address :192.168.3.3 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

*1

*1PLC No. (Station)*2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 287

28

[Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties] Configure communication settings for MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties] in Windows installed in MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series).

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the IP address corresponding to the CH No. to be used to connect to the GOT.

Firewall settings Firewall settings are required to connect the GOT with MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series). For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R MELSECWinCPU Module User's Manual

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

1 2 IP address 192.168.3.3 192.168.3.4

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Default gateway - -

Preferred DNS server - -

Alternative DNS server - -

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network. *3 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT NET No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type RnCCPU/RnWCPU RnCCPU/RnWCPU

IP Address 192.168.3.3 192.168.3.4

Port No.*3 5006 5006

Communication*3 UDP UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 289

29

Checking the communication status of MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Reply from 192.168.3.3:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) specified by a ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R MELSECWinCPU Module User's Manual

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration.

Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 293 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2 :1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*2 :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :TCP (fixed)

(The following settings are set to the default) Network No. : 1 (virtual)*1

PLC No. (Station)*2 : 2 (virtual)*1

IP address : 192.168.3.250 (default) Port No. : 5562 (fixed) Communication format : TCP (fixed)

1

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 291

29

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Target Device connection Configuration Setting The setting is required for all the connected GOTs*1. *1 Even if the target device connection configuration setting is not executed, 1 GOT can be connected. When connecting to the PLC in

Ethernet connection with programming tools such as GX Works3, these programming tools and PLC may not be connected. In this case, the setting is required for all the GOTs.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.250

(Use default value)

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Communication Data Code (Use default value)

Target Device Connection Configuration Setting Page 292 Target Device connection Configuration Setting

Item Set value Protocol (Use default value)

Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)

Host station port No. (Use default value)

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network.

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type FX5CPU

IP Address 192.168.3.250

Port No. 5562 (fixed)

Communication TCP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 293

29

Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.250 Reply from 192.168.3.250:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.250 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) in the following system configurations.

Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) For details of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

When the GOT's communication format is UDP System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 296 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.251 (Default) Port No. : 5555 (fixed) Communication format : UDP (fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*1PLC No. (Station)*2

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 295

29

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 For the connection with FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP, use GX Works3 version 1.075D or later. Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) Set [Module parameter] of the port under [Module information].

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.251

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Communication Data Code (Use default value)

Opening Method (Use default value)

External Device Configuration -

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number.

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.251 Reply from 192.168.3.251:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.251 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of the Ethernet module specified by Ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 *1

Station 2 *2

Unit Type FX5-ENET

IP Address 192.168.3.251

Port No. 5555

Communication UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 297

29

When the GOT's communication format is TCP System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 299 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 For the connection with FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP, use GX Works3 version 1.075D or later. Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) Set [Module parameter] of the port under [Module information].

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.251

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Communication Data Code (Use default value)

Opening Method (Use default value)

External Device Configuration External Device Configuration

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : TCP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.251 (Default) Port No. : 5554 (fixed) Communication format : TCP (fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*1PLC No. (Station)*2

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Item Set value Communication Method MELSOFT connection

Protocol TCP

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 299

30

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number.

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.251 Reply from 192.168.3.251:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.251 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of the Ethernet module specified by Ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 *1

Station 2 *2

Unit Type FX5-ENET

IP Address 192.168.3.251

Port No. 5554

Communication TCP

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. Page 301 One-on-one connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is the default value in the PLC Page 305 One-on-one connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC Page 308 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is default value in the PLC Page 312 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC

Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function) When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

One-on-one connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is the default value in the PLC System configuration For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to one GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set [Port No.] to [5006] and [Communication] to [UDP] to communicate with the PLC. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.

*1 For the settings when using system devices such as a hub, refer to the following. Page 308 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is default value in the PLC Page 312 Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC

*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 303 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*2

*2

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format

: UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.39 Communication format

: UDP

(The following settings are set to the default)

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3

PLC No. (GOT Station)*3

PLC No. (Station)*3

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 301

30

[PLC parameter] of GX Works2 Use the GX Works2 Version1.535H or later. Built-in Ethernet

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192.168.3.39

(Use default value)

Subnet mask pattern -

Default router IP address -

Communication data code (Use default value)

Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on network

Open settings Open settings

FTP settings (Use default value)

Time settings

MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting

Item Set value Protocol UDP, TCP

Open system MELSOFT connection

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU and a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

*4 For CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU), set [Q17nDSR].

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H), LCPU *4

IP address 192.168.3.39

Port No.*3 5006

Communication*3 UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 303

30

Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

One-on-one connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC System configuration Set [Port No.] to [5001] and [Communication] to [UDP] to communicate with the PLC. [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is available for QnUDVCPU and QnUDPVCPU. Set [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] to [Use], and configure the settings. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.

*1 Use the product whose the first five digits of the serial No. for QnUD(P)VCPU is "17052" or later. *2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

[PLC parameter] of GX Works2 Use the GX Works2 Version1.535H or later. Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP address 192.168.3.39 (Use default value)

Subnet mask pattern -

Default router IP address -

Communication data code (Use default value)

Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on network

Open settings Open settings.

FTP settings (Use default value)

Time settings

MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting

Item Set value Protocol UDP, TCP

Open system MELSOFT connection

*1

(The following settings are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. (Station)*2

IP address Communication format

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.3.39 : UDP

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

IP address Port No. Communication format

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.18 : 5001 : UDP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 305

30

MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 For CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU), set [Q17nDSR].

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting Use

Network No. 1

Station No. 2

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H) *3

IP address 192.168.3.39

Port No. 5001

Communication UDP (fixed)

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 307

30

Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is default value in the PLC System configuration Set [Port No.] to [5006] and [Communication format] to [UDP] to communicate with the PLC.

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 310 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format

: UDP(fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.1 Communication format

: UDP

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

1

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 3 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.2 Communication format

: UDP

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

2

*1

*1

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[PLC parameter] of GX Works2 Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP address 192.168.3.1

Subnet mask pattern -

Default router IP address -

Communication data code (Use default value)

Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on network

Open settings Open settings.

FTP settings (Use default value)

Time settings

Item Set value Protocol UDP, TCP

Open system MELSOFT connection

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 309

31

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network. *3 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H), LCPU QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H), LCPU

IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2

Port No.*3 5006 5006

Communication*3 UDP UDP

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 311

31

Multi-connection and [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use] in the PLC System configuration Set [Port No.] to [5001] and [Communication] to [UDP] to communicate with the PLC. [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is available with QnUDVCPU and QnUDPVCPU. Set [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] to [Use], and set the items. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.

*1 Use the product whose the first five digits of the serial No. for QnUD(P)VCPU is "17052" or later. *2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

[PLC parameter] of GX Works2 Use the GX Works2 Version1.535H or later. Built-in Ethernet

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP address 192.168.3.1

Subnet mask pattern -

Default router IP address -

Communication data code (Use default value)

Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in Ethernet port) on network

Open settings Open settings

FTP settings (Use default value)

Time settings

MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting

1

2

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

IP address Port No. Communication format

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.18 : 5001 : UDP (fixed)

*1

(The following settings are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. (Station)*2

IP address Communication format

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.3.1 : UDP

*1

(The following settings are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. (Station)*2

IP address Communication format

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.3.2 : UDP

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when Built-in Ethernet port CPU is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network.

Item Set value Protocol UDP, TCP

Open system MELSOFT connection

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting Use

Network No. 1

Station No. 2

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H) QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)

IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2

Port No. 5001 5001

Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 313

31

Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to Ethernet module (Q/L Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

Ethernet module (Q/L Series) For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration (for Q series)

*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "70".

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2 : 1 PLC No. (GOT Station)*2 : 1 IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 PLC No. (Station)*2 : 2 IP address : 192.168.3.19 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 315

31

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set the start I/O No. to 0070H. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. *4 Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU system.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network type Ethernet (fixed)

Starting I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Station No.*3 2

Mode Online (fixed)

Operation setting Page 317 Operation setting

Initial settings (Use default value)

Open settings

Router relay parameter

Station No.<->IP information

FTP Parameters

E-mail settings

Interrupt settings

Redundant settings*4

Routing Parameters Page 318 Routing parameter setting

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Operation setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the following setting without relations to the setting given here.

Communication date code: [Binary code] Initial timing: "Always wait for OPEN" (Communication is applicable while stopping the PLC CPU.) Enable Write at RUN time: [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing Data is applicable while running the PLC CPU.)

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Communication data code*1 (Use default value)

IP address 192.168.3.19

Initial timing*1 (Use default value)

Send frame setting

Enable Write at RUN time*1

TCP Existence confirmation setting

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 317

31

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Communication confirmation The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 320 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module

*1 The LEDs layout of QJ71E71-100.

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to239

Relay station No. 0 to 64

QJ71E71-100

RUN INIT.

OPEN SD

ERR. COM.ERR.

RD 100M

*1

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set. [Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5002

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type QJ71E71

IP address 192.168.3.19

Port No.*1 5001

Communication*1 UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 319

32

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Reply from 192.168.3.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual. User's manual of the Ethernet module

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to C Controller module (Q Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (Q Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

C Controller module (Q Series) For details of C Controller module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. C Controller Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Function Explanation) When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 324 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.1 Port No. : 5006(fixed) Communication format

: UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

1

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 3 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.2 Port No. : 5006(fixed) Communication format

: UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

2

*1 *1

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 321

32

Utility setting for C Controller module (Q Series) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller (Q Series) setting utility. Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Online operation

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Detailed settings Detail settings

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Detail settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary System settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP address 192.168.3.1

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway -

IP address settings CH2 -

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Points occupied by empty slot (Use default value)

Remote reset

Output mode at STOP to RUN

Intelligent function module settings

Initial settings of intelligent function module

WDT (Watchdog timer) setting

Error check

Operation mode at the time of error

Module synchronization

Built-in Ethernet port open settings Mark the checkbox

Event history registration settings (Use default value)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 323

32

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG/LS Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller (Q Series) setting utility. Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address.

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting C Controller module (Q Series) and a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the PLC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP Address*1 192.168.3.39 (Default)

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (Default)

Default Gateway -

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other PLCs on the same network. *3 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Checking communication state of C Controller module (Q Series) When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of C Controller module (Q Series) specified in the ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 2*2 3*2

Unit Type QnD(H)CCPU QnD(H)CCPU

IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2

Port No.*3 5006 5006

Communication*3 UDP UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 325

32

Connection to Ethernet module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

Ethernet module (QnA Series) For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. For QnA Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

Network No. : 1 : 2

Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

IP address : 192.168.3.19

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch.

*1 The figure of AJ71QE71N3-T and A1SJ71QE71N3-T.

10BASE-T

B

4321 0F

EDCA98 7 65

RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

RDY BSY

SW.ERR. COM.ERR.

CPU R/W

TEST TEST ERR.

AJ71QE71N3-T

ON

0:ONLINE

5:TEST4 4:TEST3 3:TEST2 2:TEST1 1:OFFLINE

MODE

SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

(1)

(2)

ON

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

10BASE-T

A1SJ71QE71N3-T

4:TEST3 3:TEST2 2:TEST1 1:OFFLINE 0:ONLINE

5:TEST4

MODE

567 89

ABCDEF O1234

BSY SW.ERR.

COM.ERR.

CPU R/W TEST ERR.

TEST

RDY RUN BUF1

BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

A1SJ71QE71N3-T

A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2

AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5

(1)

(2)

*1*1

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 327

32

Operation mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Exchange condition setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the following setting without relations to the setting given here.

Data code setting: [Binary code] Enable Write at RUN time: [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing Data is applicable while running the PLC CPU.)

*2 When SW3 is ON, the initial processing is executed regardless of the initial request signal (Y19). In addition, communication is applicable while stopping the PLC CPU. For the initial processing by using the initial request signal (Y19), refer to the following manual. For QnA Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Operation mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Online 0 (fixed)

Exchange condition setting switch

Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error

OFF

SW2 Data code setting*1 OFF (fixed)

SW3 Self start mode setting*2 ON

SW4 (Must not to be used) OFF (fixed)

SW5

SW6

SW7 CPU exchange timing setting*1 OFF (fixed)

SW8 Initial timing setting OFF

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

OFF ON

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *2 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network type Ethernet (fixed)

Start I/O No. 0000H

Network No.*1 1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Station No.*2 2

IP address 192.168.0.19

Station No.<->IP information (Use default value)

FTP Parameters

Router relay parameter

Routing parameters Page 330 Routing parameter setting

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 329

33

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 320 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 64

RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

RDY BSY

SW.ERR. COM.ERR.

CPU R/W

TEST TEST ERR.

BSY SW.ERR.

COM.ERR.

CPU R/W TEST ERR.

TEST

RDY RUN BUF1

BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2

AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting(standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set. [Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP

GOT Net No. Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5002

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type AJ71QE71

IP address 192.168.0.19

Port No.*1 5001

Communication*1 UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 331

33

Connection to Ethernet module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

Ethernet module (A Series) For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to the following manual. For A Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".

*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 337 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*2

*2

*1

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.19 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3

PLC No. (GOT Station)*3

PLC No. (Station)*3

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch.

*1 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T.

A1SJ71E71N3-T

SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

ON

10BASE-T

MODE

0:ONLINE 1:OFFLINE 2:TEST1 3:TEST2 4:TEST3

432 1

FEDCBA98 7 65

1SJ71E71N3-T

BSY SW.ERR.

COM.ERR.

CPU R/W TEST ERR.

TEST

A RDY RUN BUF1

BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

0

10BASE-T

4

C

8

J71E71N3-T RUN BUF1

BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

RDY BSY

SW.ERR. COM.ERR. CPU R/W

TEST TEST ERR.

A

ON

0:ONLINE

4:TEST3 3:TEST2 2:TEST1 1:OFFLINE

MODE

SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

0

(1)

(2)

A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3

(1)

(2)

*1*1

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 333

33

Operation mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Exchange condition setting switch*1

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 The exchange condition setting switches of A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 and A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 are specified as the below.

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Operation mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Online 0 (fixed)

Exchange condition setting switch

Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error

OFF

SW2 Data code setting (binary code)

OFF (fixed)

SW3 (Must not to be used) OFF (fixed)

SW4

SW5

SW6

SW7 CPU exchange timing setting (Enable write at RUN time)

ON (fixed)

SW8 Initial timing setting OFF

Exchange condition setting switch

Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error

OFF

SW2 Data code setting (binary code)

OFF (fixed)

SW3 CPU exchange timing setting (Enable write at RUN time)

ON (fixed)

SW4 Initial timing setting OFF

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

OFF ON

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

OFFON

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Sequence program The sequence program for initial processing and communication line opening processing are required.

Programming condition This program performs the initial processing of the Ethernet module and the opening processing of connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts running. I/O signal of Ethernet module For A Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual Device used by user

Buffer memory settings used in the present example

*1 The details of the application setting are shown below. Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user. 4), 5) and 6) are fixed.

1) Fixed buffer application 0: For sending; no exchange 1: For receiving 2) Existence check 0: No 1: Yes 3) Pairing open 0: No 1: Yes 4) Communication format (Set to "1" (UDP/IP).) 0:TCP/IP 1:UDP/IP 5) Fixed buffer exchange (Set to "0" (With procedure).) 0: With procedure 1: Without procedure 6) Open method (Set to "00" (Active, UDP/IP). 00: Active, UDP/IP 10:Unpassive 11:Fullpassive

Device Application M102 COM.ERR turned off command

D100 IP address of Ethernet module

D110 Application setting

D111 Port No. of Ethernet module

D112 to D113 IP address of GOT

D114 Port No. of GOT

D200 Initial fault code

Buffer memory address Item Set value

Dec (Hex) 0 to 1 (0 to 1H) IP address of Ethernet module C0A80313H

(192.168.3.19)

16 (10H) Application setting*1 100H

24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001

25 to 26 (19 to 1AH)

IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH

27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed)

80 (50H) Initial fault code

b15 0

b14 0

b13 0

b12 0

b11 0

b10 0

b9 0

b8 1

b7 0

b6 0

b5 0

b4 0

b3 0

b2 0

b1 0

b0 0 1)2)3)4)5)

6)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 335

33

Example of sequence program

When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 320 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at executing of the sequence program example described at (2).

IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.3.19)

Initial request

COM. ERR turned off request

Clear the initial fault code.

Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU.

Communication format(UDP/IP)

Port No. of Ethernet module(5001)

IP address of GOT (When GOT is used, FFFFFFFFH)

Port No. of GOT (When GOT is used, FFFFH)

Read the initial fault code.

Request to open

Normal completed initial

No. 1 open completed

Initial request

COM. ERR turned off command

Initial fault detection

WDT ERR detection

Turned on at first scan only while running

WDT ERR detection

* Initial processing

* Opening processing of communication line

RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

RDY BSY

SW.ERR. COM.ERR.

CPU R/W

TEST TEST ERR.

BSY SW.ERR.

COM.ERR.

CPU R/W TEST ERR.

TEST

RDY RUN BUF1

BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8

A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5002

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type AJ71E71

IP address 192.168.3.19

Port No. 5001

Communication UDP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 337

33

Connection to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

Ethernet module (FX Series) For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to the following manual. FX3U-ENET-L User's manual FX3U-ENET User's manual FX3U-ENET-ADP User's manual When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 343 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5019 Communication format : TCP (fixed)

: 2 (virtual) Network No. : 1 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.19 Port No. : 5556 (fixed) Communication format : TCP (fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*1

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Ethernet parameter settings of FX Configurator-EN-L and FX Configurator-EN Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter using FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. To use FX Configurator-EN-L, GX-Developer Ver.8.88S or later is required. To use FX Configurator-EN, GX-Developer Ver.8.25B or later is required. For the details on the engineering tools, refer to the following manuals. FX Configurator-EN-L Operation Manual FX Configurator-EN Operation manual

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required *1 Set the number of the Ethernet module.

Item Setting Setting (with GOT connected)

Module Module 0*1

Operational settings Page 340 Operational settings

Initial settings (Use default value.)

Open settings Page 341 Open settings

Router relay parameter (Use default value.)

E-mail settings

FX Configurator-EN-L FX Configurator-EN

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 339

34

Operational settings

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required *1 Because the port No. 5551 is fixed, the GOT operates as follows, regardless of the setting for the item.

Communication date code: [Binary code] Initial timing: [Always wait for OPEN] (Communications are enabled while the programmable controller CPU stops.)

*2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.254. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration.

When changing Ethernet parameter After writing the Ethernet parameter to the programmable controller CPU, turn off and then on, or reset the programmable controller CPU.

Item Setting Setting (with GOT connected)

Communication date code*1 (Use default value.)

IP address 192.168.3.19

Initial timing*1 (Use default value.)

Send frame setting

TCP Existence confirmation setting

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Open settings

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required

When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set.

Item Setting Setting (with GOT connected)

Protocol TCP

Open system MELSOFT connection

Fixed buffer (Use default value.)

Fixed buffer communication procedure

Pairing open

Existence confirmation

Host station Port No. (DEC.)

Transmission target device IP address

Transmission target device Port No. (DEC.)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 341

34

Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later is required. For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the following manual. FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required *1 Set a channel according to the installation position of FX3U-ENET-ADP on the CPU body. *2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.250. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration.

When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.

Open settings

When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set.

Item Setting Setting (with GOT connected)

Channel CH1 or CH2*1

IP Address 192.168.3.19*2

Open Settings Page 342 Open settings

Communication Data Code (Use default value.)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU on network

Item Setting Setting (with GOT connected)

Protocol TCP

Open System MELSOFT connection

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the value according to the IP address of the connected PLC.

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5019

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type FX (fixed)

IP address 192.168.3.19*1

Port No. 5551

Communication TCP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 343

34

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Reply from 192.168.3.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of the engineering tools, refer to the following manuals. FX Configurator-EN-L Operation manual FX Configurator-EN Operation manual

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration.

FX3GE For details of FX3GE, refer to the following manual. FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 347 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 1 IP address : 192.168.0.18 Port No. : 5019 Communication format : TCP (fixed)

: 2 (virtual) Network No. : 1 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.0.19 Port No. : 5556 (fixed) Communication format : TCP (fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*1

: 1Network No. (GOT Net No.)*2

PLC No. (GOT Station)*2

PLC No. (Station)*2

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 345

34

Ethernet parameter settings of FX3GE Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX3GE, GX Works2 Ver.1.91V or later is required. For details on the setting of FX3GE, refer to the following manual. FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required *1 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.250. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration.

When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.

Open settings

When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set.

Item Set value Setting (with GOT connected)

Channel CH1

IP Address 192.168.0.19*1

Open Settings Page 346 Open settings

Communication Data Code (Use default value.)

Disable direct connection to MELSOFT

Do not respond to search for CPU on network

Item Set value Setting (with GOT connected)

Protocol TCP

Open System MELSOFT connection

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the value according to the IP address of the connected PLC. *2 Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected PLC.

For details, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5019

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type FX (fixed)

IP address 192.168.0.19*1

Port No. 5556*2

Communication TCP (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 347

34

Connection to Display I/F (CNC C70) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system configuration.

Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP MANUAL When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

: 239 : 1

IP address : 192.168.1.1 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 239 : 2

IP address : 192.168.1.2 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*1

PLC No. (GOT Station)*1

PLC No. (Station)*1

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

IP address settings of CNC C70 Remote monitor tool

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

CNC monitor

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Communication check The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Page 350 Checking communication state of CNC C70

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Gateway address 0.0.0.0

Port number 64758 (fixed)

Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Gateway address 0.0.0.0

Port number 64758 (fixed)

Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 349

35

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set. [Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP

Checking communication state of CNC C70 When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.1.2 Reply from 192.168.1.2:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.1.2 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Mounting condition of CNC C70 Cable connecting condition Switch settings and network parameter settings Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of the CNC C70 specified for the Ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 259

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.1.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 239

Station 2

Unit Type Q17nNC

IP address 192.168.1.2

Port No.*1 5001

Communication*1 UDP

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to NZ2GF-ETB This section describes the settings of the GOT, the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module (NZ2GF-ETB), and the PLC in the following system configuration.

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module (NZ2GF-ETB) For details on the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module (NZ2GF-ETB), refer to the following. CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration

*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. *2 The CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit.

The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module is set at [0]. *3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(Use default value for settings other than the following.)

:3 :1

IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field Network

HUB

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Ethernet setting IP address CC-Link IE Field Network setting Network No. PC No. (Station)*3

:192.168.3.30

:1 :1

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type Network No. PC No. (Station)*3

Total Stations

: CC IE Field (Master station) : 1 : 0 : 2

*2

*1

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type Network No. PC No. (Station)*3

: CC IE Field (Local station) : 1 : 2

*2

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3

PLC No. (GOT Station)*3

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 351

35

GX Works2 network parameter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting Example: Master station setting

Routing parameter setting Set the followings as necessary. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Item Set value

Master station Local station Network type CC IE Field (Master station) CC IE Field (Local station)

Network No. 1 1

Total Stations 2 -

Station No. 0 (fixed) 2

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 64

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Ethernet Adapter Module setting Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module setting tool. For details of the setting method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

CC-Link IE Field Network setting

*1 Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side. *2 Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side.

Ethernet setting

*1 Set the IP address within the following range.

Item Set value Network No. 1*1

Station No. 1*2

Item Set value IP address 192.168.3.30*1

192.168. 3. 30

Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64.

Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239.

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 353

35

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. *2 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. *3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address. *4 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP

Routing parameter setting

*1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network No. *2 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address. *3 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.

Item Set value GOT Net No. 3*1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet Setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 3*1

Station 30*2

Unit Type NZ2GF-ETB

IP address 192.168.3.30*3

Port No.*4 5001

Communication*4 UDP

Item Set value Transfer Network No. 1*1

Relay Network No. 3*2

Relay Station No. 30*3

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Connection to PERIPHERAL I/F This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion CPU in the following system configuration.

GOT type setting For details, refer to the following. Page 39 Setting [Controller Type] CPU No. specification of Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set whether to monitor the PLC CPU area or the Motion CPU area of Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) by the CPU No. specification. For details, refer to the following. Page 367 Precautions PLC type of GX Works2/GX Developer When creating a program, set the following PLC type: For Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU QnUD(E)(H)CPU For Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU(-S1) Q03UDCPU Q03UDCPU Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU , Q170MCPU, and Q170MS(-S1)CPU When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 355

35

System configuration Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion CPU settings as default in the following system configuration. Set [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.

*1 For the settings when using system devices such as a hub, refer to the following. Page 301 Connection to MELSEC-Q/L series Built-in Ethernet port CPU

*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 358 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

*3 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

*1

*2

*2

: 1 : 1

IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (virtual) : 2 (virtual)

IP address : 192.168.3.39 Open system : MELSOFT connection (fixed)

(The following settings are set to the default)

Network No. (GOT Net No.)*3

PLC No. (GOT Station)*3

PLC No. (Station)*3

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Basic setting of MT Works2 Use the default values of the basic setting for the system configuration above.

Built-in Ethernet port

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP address 192.168.3.39 (Default)

Subnet mask pattern -

Default router IP address -

Communication data code (Use default value)

Enable online change (MC protocol)

Open settings Page 357 Open settings

Item Set value Protocol UDP (fixed)

Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)

Host station port No. -

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 357

35

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting a Built-in Ethernet port Motion CPU and the GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist on the motion CPU side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not existed on the network system and any station No..

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 Set the value to the IP address of the Built-in Ethernet port Motion CPU. *4 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1*1

Station 2*2

Unit Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDE(H)

IP address 192.168.3.39*3

Port No.*4 5006

Communication*4 UDP

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified in the Ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 359

36

Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module This section describes the settings of the GOT and a CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module in the following system configuration.

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module For details on the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN) When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT. Page 367 Precautions

System configuration The following shows a system configuration example for connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11- T2).

*1 The CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start XY number of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

*3 A General-purpose Switch is required to connect the GOT and a CC-Link IE TSN master/local module. For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following. Manual of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module to be used

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

EthernetEthernet CC-Link IE TSN

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. (GOT Net No.) *2

PLC No. (GOT Station) *2

IP address Port No. Communication format

: 1 : 18 : 192.168.3.18 : 5001 : UDP (fixed)

*1

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Station type Network No. PLC No. (Station) *2

IP address

: Master station : 1 : 0 (fixed) : 192.168.3.99

*3

*1

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Station type Network No. PLC No. (Station) *2

IP address

: Local station : 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.1

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Module Parameter] of GX Works3 The following shows a parameter setting example for connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2). For details on the settings of the PLC, refer to the following manual. Manual of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module to be used

[Required Settings] Example: Settings of CC-Link IE TSN master/local module 1

Item Set value

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module 1 CC-Link IE TSN master/local module 2 Station type Local station Master station

Network No. 1 1

Station No. 1 0 (fixed)

IP Address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.99

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 361

36

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 The following shows a setting example of GT Designer3 for connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2). For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number. *3 For the MELSEC iQ-F series, select [FX5-CCLGN-MS/FX5-nSSC-G].

For RJ71GN11-EIP, select [RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)]. *4 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

MELSEC iQ-R Series [Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP MELSEC iQ-F Series [Port No.]: 5554 [Communication]: TCP

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 *1

Station 1 *2

Unit Type *3 RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G(H)

IP Address 192.168.3.1

Port No. *4 5001

Communication *4 UDP

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

Checking the communication status of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Connection status of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer to the following manual. Manual of PLC to be used

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 363

36

Connection to built-in Ethernet port of Motion module This section describes the settings of the GOT and Motion module in the following system configuration.

For details on the Motion module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

System Configuration

*1 For the following settings, the setting names differ on the PLC side and on the GOT side.

*2 For usable General-purpose Switches, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

[Module Parameter (Network)] of GX Works3 For details on the Motion module side settings, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Network)

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

Item Set value Required Settings Network No. 1

IP Address 192.168.3.39

EthernetEthernet

*2

: 192.168.3.39

: 1 : 0(fixed)

: UDP : 5001 : 192.168.3.18 : 18 : 1

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

Network No. (GOT Net No.) *1 PLC No. (GOT Station) *1 IP address Port No. Communication format

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

Network No. PLC No. (Station) *1 IP address

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 If you set [Communication] to [TCP], set [Port No.] to [5002].

Checking the communication status of the Motion module When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. IP address of the Motion module specified by the ping command execution. Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) Connection status of the Motion module Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 *1

Station 0 (fixed)

Unit Type RJ71GN11-T2/RD78G (H) (fixed)

IP Address 192.168.3.39

Port No. 5001

Communication *2 UDP

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting 365

36

Connection to Motion module through Built-in Ethernet port of PLC

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series For the connection between the GOT and MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following. Page 262 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series Built-in Ethernet port CPU For the details of the motion module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

When connecting to MELSEC iQ-F series For the connection between the GOT and MELSEC iQ-F series Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following. Page 291 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU For the details of the motion module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Motion Module/Simple Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

6 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.4 PLC Side Setting

4

4.5 Precautions

Connection to QnA (S) CPU type Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module (QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type).

Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to 0, the monitoring target differs depending on the GOT connection destination. Refer to the following.

When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. MELSEC iQ-R series, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

GOT connection destination Monitoring target QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1)

Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU(-S1)

Motion CPU area (CPU No.2)

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions 367

36

Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connecting multiple GOTs Setting GOT Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [GOT Station] to the GOT.

Page 247 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Setting IP address Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using multiple GOTs with the GOT 1000 series mixed. A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address.

Setting for starting up multiple GOTs simultaneously (When connected to Built-in Ethernet port CPU)

When connecting multiple GOTs to one Built-in Ethernet port CPU, adjust the timing of GOT communication start. When the communication concentrates on the PLC, the communication between GOT and PLC becomes difficult, and the monitoring by GOT may not start. As a method for adjusting the timing, communicating one GOT alone first, and then communicating the other GOTs is effective. Set the following items on each GOT. [Startup Time] of [Controller Setting], or [Title Display Time] of [GOT Setup]. [Timeout Time] of [Controller Setting] The following shows a setting example.

Connecting multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

Network No. (GOT Net No.): 1 PC No.(GOT Station) : 2 IP address : 192.168.3.2 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP

Network No. : 1 PC No. (Station): 1 IP address : 192.168.3.1 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP

Network No. (GOT Net No.): 1 PC No.(GOT Station) : 3 IP address : 192.168.3.3 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP

Please set [GOT Station] differently.

QnUDE(H)CPU

GOT2GOT1 GOT10 Startup Time

GOT1 GOT2 GOT10

Item

Timeout Time

3sec (default)

3sec (default)

4sec 4sec

4sec 4sec

HUB

8 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions

4

Setting an IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

Monitoring a PLC on a different network in the same line When the network No. of the GOT does not match with that of the PLC on the same Ethernet, the PLC cannot be monitored. When monitoring, set the same network No. as that of the GOT, or connect a Ethernet module to the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other network. When using the multi-channel connection for GT27 or GT25, set a different network No. for each channel.

Remote password Do not set a remote password for the following CPUs. Otherwise, monitoring with the GOT becomes unavailable. RCPU, FX5UCPU, QCPU (Q mode), LCPU

Connecting to the built-in Ethernet port of Built-in Ethernet port CPU Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment such as Built-in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable the communication. When the communication with Built-in Ethernet port CPU is not available, a communication error may occur on the GOT.

Number of CPU modules connectable to one GOT RCPU, FX5UCPU, QCPU, LCPU, ACPU, FXCPU: 128 CPU modules in total can be set for channels No. 1 to No. 4 (16 or fewer CPU modules are recommended.). The following shows the maximum number of CPU modules that can be set for one channel. RCPU: 119 FX5UCPU, QCPU, LCPU, ACPU, FXCPU: 63 RCPU, FX5UCPU, QCPU, LCPU, FXCPU: 4

Connecting to RnSFCPU The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a system alarm occurs. To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F Monitoring other stations The GOT cannot monitor other stations. Routing parameter setting is invalid.

Monitoring servo amplifiers from a robot controller through a simple motion module When a GOT is connected to the PERIPHERAL I/F of the robot controller, servo amplifiers cannot be monitored through a simple motion module.

Monitoring a CPU module on a different network from CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) When a CPU module number on a different network is specified for PERIPHERAL I/F of CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU), the specified CPU module number within the host network is monitored.

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions 369

37

Connecting to the built-in Ethernet port of QnUD(P)VCPU using [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] When [Port No.] is set to [5001] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, the built-in Ethernet port of QnUD(P)VCPU is accessible using [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]. The GOT may not be able to access the PLC depending on the system configuration. The following shows the examples of system configuration to which the GOT cannot access, and the countermeasures.

Example 1 When connected via a CPU module whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Use], the GOT cannot access another CPU module whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Not to Use], or if that CPU does not support [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]. Figure

1) Countermeasures Take one of the following countermeasures. Change [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] on the PLC side. Set [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] to [Use] for CPU module No. 2 that supports [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) Change [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Set [Port No.] to [5006] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

GOT CPU module No. 1

CPU module No. 2

[MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Use]

Ethernet

[MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Not to Use]

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] [Port No.]: [5001]

0 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions

4

Example 2 In a multiple CPU configuration, when connected via a CPU module whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Use], the GOT cannot access a CPU module on a different network via the network module that controls another CPU module whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Not to Use] or if that CPU module does not support [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]. Figure

1) Countermeasures Take one of the following countermeasures. Change [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] on the PLC side. Set [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] to [Use] for CPU module No. 2 that supports [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) Change [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Set [Port No.] to [5006] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

GOT

CPU module No. 1

CPU module No. 2

[MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Use]

Ethernet

[MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Not to Use]

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] [Port No.]: [5001]

Ethernet module

CPU module

Ethernet

Ethernet module that the CPU No. 2 controls

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions 371

37

Example 3 Figure 1 In a multiple CPU configuration, when an Ethernet module is mounted on the CPU base unit, and the same network number is set to Built-in Ethernet port CPU and the Ethernet module, the GOT cannot monitor the other CPUs in the multiple CPU configuration via Built-in Ethernet port CPU whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Use].

1) Countermeasures Take one of the following countermeasures. Change [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Set [Port No.] to [5006] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT side. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting Change the connection route Connect the GOT to CPU module No. 2 via the Ethernet module.

GOT CPU module No. 1

CPU module No. 2

N/W No.: 1 Station No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.39 [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Use]

Ethernet

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] [Port No.]: [5001]

Ethernet module

N/W No.: 1 Station No.: 10 IP address: 192.168.3.10

The network No. is duplicated.

GOT

Ethernet

CPU module No. 1

CPU module No. 2

Ethernet module

2 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions

4

Figure 2 In the following system configuration, when the same network number is set to Built-in Ethernet port CPU and the Ethernet module, the GOT is inaccessible via Built-in Ethernet port CPU whose [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is set to [Use], using GT Designer3.

1) Counter measures Take one of the following counter measures. Change the network No. Do not set the built-in Ethernet port number of the CPU to the network number of the Ethernet module. Change the connection route. Connect the GOT to CPU module No. 2 via the Ethernet module.

Error code Description 801fD0A3 This error occurs when send processing of the transient transmission has failed in the CC-Link IE Field Network

connection or other connections. (For example, when data is not transferred to the GOT but to a different network)

1000000C This error occurs when send processing of the transient transmission has failed in the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100).

GOTCPU module

N/W No.: 1 Station No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.39 [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting]: [Use]

Ethernet

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] [Port No.]: [5001]Ethernet

module

N/W No.: 1 Station No.: 10 IP address: 192.168.3.10

The network No. is duplicated.

USB connection

GOT CPU module

Ethernet

Ethernet module

USB connection

4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions 373

37

MEMO

4 4 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.5 Precautions

5

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 375 Connectable Model List Page 380 System Configuration Page 416 Connection Diagram Page 422 GOT Side Settings Page 430 PLC Side Setting Page 432 Precautions

5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communica tion type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU RS-232 RS-422

- -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU RS-232 RS-422

- -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V RS-232 RS-422

- -

MELSECWinC PU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W RS-232 RS-422

- -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 RS-232 RS-422

- -

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.1 Connectable Model List 375

37

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

RS-232 RS-422

- -

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 RS-232 RS-422

- -

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U RS-232 RS-422

Page 387 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU Q00CPU*1

Q01CPU*1

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q02CPU*1

Q02HCPU*1

Q06HCPU*1

Q12HCPU*1

Q25HCPU*1

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

- - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8 Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

RS-232 RS-422

*2

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*3

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

RS-232 RS-422

*2

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communica tion type

Connectable model Refer to

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.1 Connectable Model List

5

MELSEC-L L02CPU*4

L06CPU*4

L26CPU*4

L26CPU-BT*4

L02CPU-P*4

L06CPU-P*4

L26CPU-P*4

L26CPU-PBT*4

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

RS-232 RS-422

Page 382 Connection to LCPU

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

RS-422 Page 385 Connection to QnACPU

Q4ARCPU RS-422 Page 385 Connection to QnACPU

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

RS-422 Page 385 Connection to QnACPU

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU*5

A1NCPUP21*5

A1NCPUR21*5

A2NCPU*5

A2NCPUP21*5

A2NCPUR21*5

A2NCPU-S1*5

A2NCPUP21-S1*5

A2NCPUR21-S1*5

A3NCPU*5

A3NCPUP21*5

A3NCPUR21*5

RS-422 Page 386 Connection to ACPU

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU RS-422 Page 386 Connection to ACPU

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU*6

A2SCPU-S1*6

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

Series Model name Clock Communica tion type

Connectable model Refer to

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.1 Connectable Model List 377

37

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU*6 RS-422 Page 386 Connection to ACPU

A0J2HCPUP21*6

A0J2HCPUR21*6

A0J2HCPU-DC24*6

A2CCPU*6 RS-422 Page 386 Connection to ACPU

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*7*8

Q173CPU*7*8

Q172CPUN*7

Q173CPUN*7

RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q172HCPU RS-232 RS-422

*2

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 414 Connection to the Motion CPU (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(- S1))

Q170MSCPU

Q170MSCPU-S1

MR-MQ100 RS-422 Page 414 Connection to the Motion CPU (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(- S1))

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU RS-422 Page 386 Connection to ACPU

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 RS-232 Page 413 Connection to WSCPU

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/ H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 RS-232 Page 380 Connection to QCPU

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

Series Model name Clock Communica tion type

Connectable model Refer to

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.1 Connectable Model List

5

*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *2 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. *3 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. *4 The adapter L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4 is required for the direct CPU connection (serial).

When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU whose upper five digits are "15102" or later. *5 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.

AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later A2SCPU: Version H or later

*6 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later A2CCPU, A2SCPU: Version H or later

*7 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*8 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later

*9 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232

*2

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

RS-232

*2

Page 380 Connection to QCPU

MELSEC-FX FX0 RS-422 Page 391 Connection to FXCPU

FX0S FX0N

RS-422

FX1 RS-422

FX2 FX2C

*9 RS-422

FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC

RS-232 RS-422

FX2NC *9

FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3GE FX3U FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communica tion type

Connectable model Refer to

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.1 Connectable Model List 379

38

5.2 System Configuration Connection to QCPU

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

RS-422 connector conversion cable

Communica tion type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*7 Model

MELSEC-Q - RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*5 3m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

RS-422 connector conversion cableQCPU GOT

Connection cable

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 3) *6 GT2104-PMBD and GT2103-PMBD do not support the direct CPU connection (serial) with the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU. *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

MELSEC-Q FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL (0.5m)

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-25P5(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

*6

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

RS-422 connector conversion cable

Communica tion type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*7 Model

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 381

38

Connection to LCPU

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Adapter RS-422 connector conversion cable

Comm unicati on type

Cable model Max. dist ance

Option device*6 Model

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT

L6ADP-R2 - RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*5 3m - (Built into GOT)

L6ADP-R2 FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-25P5(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

RS-422 connector conversion cableLCPU Adapter GOT

Connection cable

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02SCPU L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT

L6ADP-R4 - RS-422 Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

1200 m

GT15-RS4-9S 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT10-C02H-9SC

- (Built into GOT)

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

- - RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*4 3m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Adapter RS-422 connector conversion cable

Comm unicati on type

Cable model Max. dist ance

Option device*6 Model

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 383

38

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 3) *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

- FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-25P5(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Adapter RS-422 connector conversion cable

Comm unicati on type

Cable model Max. dist ance

Option device*6 Model

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connection to QnACPU

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device*4 Model

MELSEC-QnA RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-25P5(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

QnACPU GOT

Connection cable

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 385

38

Connection to ACPU

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device*3 Model

MELSEC-A RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

Motion CPU (A Series)

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Communication driver

MELSEC-A

( For GT21 and GS)

ACPU GOT

Connection cable

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series

Page 387 When connecting via RS-232 communication Page 389 When connecting via RS-422 communication

When connecting via RS-232 communication PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment*2

Model name

Expansion board

Expansion adapter

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

FX5U FX5UJ FX5S

FX5-232-BD - RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

- FX5-232ADP RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Expansion adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

Expansion board

Expansion adapter GOT

Connection cable

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 387

38

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the expansion board (communication board) and the expansion adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

When connecting via RS-422 communication PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment*2

Model name

Expansion board

Expansion adapter

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*5 Model

FX5U FX5UJ FX5S

FX5-422-BD- GOT

- RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4- 8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4- 8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4- 8P5(30m)*4

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4- 8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4- 8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4- 8PC(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)*3

3m - (Built into GOT)

FX5U FX5UC

- - RS-422 *6 Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 389

39

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the expansion board (communication board) and the expansion adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 Use the RS-485 communication terminal block of the PLC to perform RS-422 communications.

FX5U FX5UJ FX5S

FX5-485-BD - RS-422 *6 Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

FX5U FX5UC FX5UJ FX5S

- FX5-485ADP RS-422 *6 Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Expansion adapter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment*2

Model name

Expansion board

Expansion adapter

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*5 Model

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connection to FXCPU

Page 391 When connecting to a PLC directly Page 398 When using the function extension board Page 405 When using the special adapter Page 410 When using the function extension board and special adapter

When connecting to a PLC directly

Page 391 FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C Page 393 FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC Page 394 FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE Page 395 FX3GC (FX3GC-/D, FX3GC-/DSS) Page 396 FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2)) Page 397 FX3UC (FX3UC-/D, FX3UC-/DS, FX3UC-/DSS)

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *5 Model

FX0 FX0S FX0N

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

FX5U FX5UC

Function expansion board

Function adapter GOT

Connection cable

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

FXCPU GOT

Connection cable

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 391

39

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

FX0 FX0S FX0N

RS-422 GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *2

30m - (Built into GOT)

FX0S FX0N

RS-422 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *2

3m - (Built into GOT)

FX1 FX2 FX2C

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) *3

30m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *5 Model

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) can be available for FX1S, FX1N and FX2N. *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1) *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6) *5 The number of connectable GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units differs depending on the PLC type.

Even though function extension boards (FX-422-BD) are used to add RS-422 ports, two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units cannot be connected simultaneously. The current consumption must be added. Two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBL units may not be connected simultaneously depending on the calculation result of the current consumption. For details on calculating the current consumption of a PLC main unit, refer to the following manual. FX Series User's Manuals - Hardware Edition

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *6 Model

FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *2*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *2*3

3m - (Built into GOT)

*5

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 393

39

FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*4 Even though function extension boards (FX-422-BD) are used to add RS-422 ports, two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units cannot be connected simultaneously.

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *5 Model

FX3G FX3S FX3GE

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) *2

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2

3m - (Built into GOT)

*4

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3GC (FX3GC-/D, FX3GC-/DSS)

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*4 Even though function extension boards (FX-422-BD) are used to add RS-422 ports, two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units cannot be connected simultaneously.

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *5 Model

FX3GC-/D FX3GC-/DSS

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) *2

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2

3m - (Built into GOT)

*4

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 395

39

FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL can be used for FX3U or FX3UC--LT(-2). *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1) *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6) *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device *5 Model

FX3U FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *2*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *3

3m - (Built into GOT)

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3UC (FX3UC-/D, FX3UC-/DS, FX3UC-/DSS)

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*4 When the GOT is connected via a function expansion board (FX-422-BD), add the current consumption of the GOT to the calculation of the current consumption of the 5 V DC power supply built in the PLC main module. For details on the calculation of current consumption of a PLC main module, refer to the following manual. FX SERIES USER'S MANUAL - Hardware Edition

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Max. distance Option device*5 Model

FX3UC-/D FX3UC-/DS FX3UC-/DSS

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) *2

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *2

3m - (Built into GOT)

*4

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 397

39

When using the function extension board

Page 398 FX1S, FX1N, FX2N Page 401 FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE Page 403 FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment

Model name Function expansion board *1*3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5 Model

FX1S FX1N FX2N

FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *2 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

FXCPU Function expansion board

GOT

Connection cable

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

*1 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU to be connected. Use the applicable function expansion board shown in the following table.

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1) *6 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

FX1S FX1N FX2N

FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD

RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *2 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *6

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *5

3m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Item Function expansion board to be used

When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series RS-232 communication FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD

RS-422 communication FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Function expansion board *1*3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5 Model

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 399

40

*7 The number of connectable GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units differs depending on the PLC type. Even though function extension boards (FX-422-BD) are used to add RS-422 ports, two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBLS units cannot be connected simultaneously. The current consumption must be added. Two GT2104-PMBLS or GT2103-PMBL units may not be connected simultaneously depending on the calculation result of the current consumption. For details on calculating the current consumption of a PLC main unit, refer to the following manual. FX Series User's Manuals - Hardware Edition

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment *2

Model name Function expansion board *3

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device *7 Model

FX3G FX3S FX3GE

FX3G-232-BD RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *8

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

FX3G FX3S FX3GE

FX3G-422-BD RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) *4

3m - (Built into GOT)

*6

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 401

40

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*6 Even though function expansion boards (FX-422-BD) are used to add RS-422 ports, two units of GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBLS cannot be connected at the same time.

*7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *8 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector.

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2)) PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment *2

Model name Function expansion board *3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *8 Model

FX3U FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

FX3U-232-BD RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *7

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

FX3U FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

FX3U-422-BD RS-422 GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-8P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-8P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-8P5(30m) *6

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m) GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *4*5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) *5

3m - (Built into GOT)

*9

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 403

40

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 GT10-C10R4-8PL can be used for FX3U or FX3UC--LT(-2). *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 1) *6 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 6) *7 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *9 When the GOT is connected via a function expansion board (FX-422-BD), add the current consumption of the GOT to the calculation

of the current consumption of the 5 V DC power supply built in the PLC main module. For details on the calculation of current consumption of a PLC main module, refer to the following manual. FX SERIES USER'S MANUAL - Hardware Edition

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

When using the special adapter

Page 405 FX1NC, FX2NC Page 407 FX3G, FX3GE, FX3S Page 408 FX3GC (FX3GC-/D, FX3GC-/DSS) Page 409 FX3UC (FX3UC-/D, FX3UC-/DS, FX3UC-/DSS)

FX1NC, FX2NC PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment *2

Model name Function adapter *2

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *4 Model

FX1NC FX2NC

FX2NC-232ADP RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *3

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

FXCPU Function adapter GOT

Connection cable

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 405

40

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

FX1NC FX2NC

FX0N-232ADP RS-232 GT01-C30R2-25P(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *3

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment *2

Model name Function adapter *2

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *4 Model

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3G, FX3GE, FX3S PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectable equipment *2

Model name Function adapter *3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5 Model

FX3G FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

FX3GE FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

FX3S FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 407

40

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

FX3GC (FX3GC-/D, FX3GC-/DSS)

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment *2

Model name Function adapter *3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5 Model

FX3GC-/D FX3GC-/DSS

FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

FX3UC (FX3UC-/D, FX3UC-/DS, FX3UC-/DSS)

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment *2

Model name Function adapter *3

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5 Model

FX3UC-/D FX3UC-/DS FX3UC-/DSS

FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 409

41

When using the function extension board and special adapter

Page 410 FX1S, FX1N, FX2N Page 412 FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

connectabl e equipment *3

Model name

Function expansion board *1*3

Function adapter *3

Communica tion type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5

Model

FX1S FX1N FX2N

FX1N-CNV- BD FX2N-CNV- BD

FX2NC- 232ADP

RS-232 GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *2

-

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

FXCPU Function expansion board

Function adapter GOT

Connection cable

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

*1 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU. Select the function expansion board from the following table.

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

FX1S FX1N FX2N

FX1N-CNV- BD FX2N-CNV- BD

FX0N- 232ADP

RS-232 GT01-C30R2- 25P(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4- M*2

-

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Item Function expansion board to be used

When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series When the function adapter is used FX1N-CNV-BD FX2N-CNV-BD

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectabl e equipment *3

Model name

Function expansion board *1*3

Function adapter *3

Communica tion type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *5

Model

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 411

41

FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.

*3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings. Page 432 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment *2

Model name Function expansion board *3

Function adapter *3

Commu nication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device *5 Model

FX3U FX3UC (FX3UC--LT(-2))

FX3U-485-BD FX3U-422-BD FX3U-232-BD FX3U-USB-BD FX3U-8AV-BD FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) or

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 function adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *4

GT01-RS4-M *1 -

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connection to WSCPU

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

MELSEC-WS RS-232 WS0-C20R2(2m) 2m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

WS0-C20R2(2m) +

Page 417 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

2.3m - (Built into GOT)

MELSEC-WS

Communication driver

WSCPU GOT

Connection cable

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 413

41

Connection to the Motion CPU (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1))

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name RS-422 connector conversion cable

Communica tion type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*7 Model

Q170MCPU - RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT9P*4

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*5 3m - (Built into GOT)

FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)*2

30m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

RS-422 connector conversion cable GOT

Connection cable

Q170MCPU

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration

5

*1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 418 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 419 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 416 RS-232 connection diagram 3) *6 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 421 RS-422 connection diagram 11) *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

When connecting to a Motion CPU (Q series) other than Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) A Motion CPU (Q series) mounted on the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connection to a Motion CPU (Q series) are the same as those for connection to a QCPU. Page 380 Connection to QCPU

MR-MQ100 - RS-422 Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) +

Page 420 RS-422 connection diagram 9)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*1 -

- Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) +

Page 421 RS-422 connection diagram 10)

30m - (Built into GOT)

- Q170MIOCBL1M-A(1m)*6 1m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name RS-422 connector conversion cable

Communica tion type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*7 Model

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.2 System Configuration 415

41

5.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin)

1

3

2

6

5

8

4

7

9

GOT side FX PLC side

(D-sub 25-pin)

2

3

8

4

5

6

2

3

5

6

7

20

GOT side (terminal block)

Untied wire color of GT10-C30R2-6P

Brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Green

Purple

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

GOT side (terminal block)

FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin)

2

3

6

8

5

4

7

1

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

GOT side (terminal block)

FX PLC side (D-sub 25-pin)

3

2

5

20

7

6

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

WS0-C20R2(male)side (D-Sub 9-pin)

GOT side (terminal block)

3

2

5

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram 417

41

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1) GT21 (input power supply : 24V)

GT21 (input power supply : 5V)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT10-C R4-8P

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Black

White

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

GOT side (terminal block)

Untied wire color of GT10-C R4-8P

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Black

White

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

INPUT DC5V

-

+

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT10-C R4-25P

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Blue

Purple

Black

White

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330". Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

GOT side*1 PLC side (terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

GOT side*1

(connector terminal block) PLC side

(connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RSA*2

CSA*2

RSB*2

CSB*2

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT21-C R4-25P5

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT21-C R4-8P5

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram 419

42

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330 ".

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330 ". *2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-422 connection diagram 9)

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

PLC side*1

(terminal block)GOT side

GOT side

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA*2

RSB*2

CSA*2

CSB*2

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

PLC side*1

(Terminal block)(Terminal block)

GOT side Q170MIOCBL1M-B side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-422 connection diagram 10)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-422 connection diagram 11)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V, GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". For GS21 Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

GOT side (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RSA*1

RSB*1

CSA*1

CSB*1

GOT side (terminal block)

United wire color of Q170MIOCBL1M-A

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

Yellow(Dot mark:Black)

Yellow(Dot mark:Red)

Pink(Dot mark:Black)

Pink(Dot mark:Red)

White(Dot mark:Black)

White(Dot mark:Red)RSA*1

RSB*1

CSA*1

CSB*1

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.3 Connection Diagram 421

42

5.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

GOT multi-drop connection When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer to the following. Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected. [Serial(MELSEC)] [MELSEC-FX] [MELSEC-WS] [Serial(MELSEC)] [MELSEC-A] [MELSEC-FX] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 423 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings

5

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Serial (MELSEC) The following devices are available to GT27, GT25, and GT23.

*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High(Normal)]. (High performance is hardly affected)

*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Middle] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced.

*3 The format setting differs depending on the controller. L6ADP-R4 adapter: [2] Other than L6ADP-R4 adapter: [1]

*4 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with

the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format*3 Select the communication format. (Default: 1)

1, 2

Monitor Speed*4 Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal)

High(Normal)*1

Middle Low*2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 426 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 427 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 428 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings 423

42

MELSEC-FX

MELSEC-WS

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 5ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings

5

Serial (MELSEC) The following devices are available to GT21 and GS21.

*1 The format setting differs depending on the controller. L6ADP-R4 adapter: [2] Other than L6ADP-R4 adapter: [1]

MELSEC-A The following devices are available to GT21 and GS21.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format*1 Set the communication format. (Default: 1)

1, 2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 426 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 427 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 428 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 2032

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings 425

42

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

6 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings

5

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings 427

42

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

8 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings

5

Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system.

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Disconnect the faulty station

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.4 GOT Side Settings 429

43

5.5 PLC Side Setting When the GOT and a PLC is connected using the direct CPU connection, no setting is required in the PLC. When connecting the GOT and an LCPU via an L6ADP-R4/L6ADP-R2 adapter, configure the following communication settings. For the L6ADP-R2 adapter, configure the communication settings in GX Works2 only.

L6ADP-R4 adapter settings Set the communication settings by the DIP switches of the L6ADP-R4 adapter.

*1 SW7 and SW8 are not used.

DIP switches (SW1 to SW3) Set the data length, parity bit, and stop bit.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. Page 423 Communication detail settings

DIP switches (SW4 to SW6) Set the transmission speed.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. Page 423 Communication detail settings

Setting switch Description Setting range SW1 Data length*1 OFF 7bit

ON 8bit

SW2 Parity*1 OFF Disable

ON Enable

SW3 Stop bit*1 OFF 1bit

ON 2bit

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps SW4 ON OFF ON OFF ON

SW5 ON OFF OFF ON ON

SW6 OFF ON ON ON ON

DIP SWITCH*1

SW1 to 8

L6ADP-R4

SD

RD

SW

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

(FG)

RS-422/485

ON

DATA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PARITY STOP BAUD0 BAUD1 BAUD2

0 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.5 PLC Side Setting

5

GX Works2 settings Set the communication speed in GX Works2.

For L6ADP-R4 adapter

1. Click [PLC parameter] [Adapter Serial Setting].

2. Set [GOT Connection] in [Select Function].

3. Adjust [Communication Speed Setting] with the GOT communication setting. Page 423 Communication detail settings

For L6ADP-R2 adapter

1. Click [PLC parameter] [Adapter Serial Setting].

2. Check that [Not Used] (default) is set in [Select Function].

L6ADP-R4/L6ADP-R2 adapter For details on the L6ADP-R4/L6ADP-R2 adapter, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.5 PLC Side Setting 431

43

5.6 Precautions

Connection to FXCPU When connecting to FX3 series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3 series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O check again. (Page 77 Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/O check is normal, check the status of keyword registration.

When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter When a sequence program and settings that the FXCPU communicates with devices other than the GOT are set with software, including GX Developer, the FXCPU cannot communicate with the GOT. Settings with sequence program Check the sequence program and delete the following. FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL - Data Communication Edition No protocol communication (RS instruction) Sequence program with the computer link, N:N network, and parallel link Parameter setting Set the following special registers to 0. Except FX3U, FX3UC: D8120 FX3U, FX3UC: D8120, D8400, D8420 FX3G, FX3GC, FX3GE: D8120, D8400, D8420, D8370 FX3S: D8120, D8400 Settings with GX Developer Select [PLC parameter] in [Parameter], and then click the PLC system(2) tab on the FX parameter screen. Uncheck [Operate communication setting], and then transfer the parameter to the programmable controller.After the transfer, turn off the programmable controller, and then turn on the programmable controller again.

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

2 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.6 Precautions

5

Connection to LCPU When a system alarm occurs at GOT startup LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When the module is L02SCPU or L02SCPU-P Do not set the serial communication function of L02SCPU or L02SCPU-P. If it is set, communications may be unavailable.

Connection to QCPU Do not set the serial communication function of Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/Q03UD/Q04UDH/Q06UDH/Q10UDH/Q13UDH/ Q20UDH/Q26UDHCPU, Q00/Q01CPU. If the function is set, the communication may not be performed.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.6 Precautions 433

43

Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series

MELSEC iQ-F Series communication settings For details of MELSEC iQ-F Series communication settings, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-F Series User's Manual

Module parameter settings as a default value (MELSOFT Connection). If it sets up other than a default value, it becomes impossible to communicate with GOT.

Module parameter setting (When using FX5-485-BD)

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Connection with the motion controller A series When the following motion controller A series is connected, LINK UNIT ERROR (42) may occur in the SCPU (CPU for PLC control) depending on the content of the displayed screen. A171SHCPU, A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPU, A172SHCPUN In this case, reduce the number of monitored devices to less than 128. The number of monitored devices includes the number of devices of functions running in the background such as alarm, logging, and script in addition to the displayed base screens and window screens.

4 5 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) 5.6 Precautions

6

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 435 Connectable Model List Page 442 System Configuration Page 457 Connection Diagram Page 462 GOT Side Settings Page 472 PLC Side Setting Page 485 Precautions

6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

PLC/Motion CPU Series Model name Clock Communication

type Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU*1 RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

R16PCPU*1

R32PCPU*1

R120PCPU*1

R04ENCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU - - -

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU*2 RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

R16SFCPU*2

R32SFCPU*2

R120SFCPU*2

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*3

R12CCPU-V RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

MELSECWinC PU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*3

R102WCPU-W RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List 435

43

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 RS-232 RS-422

Page 442 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U RS-232 RS-422

- -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q00CPU*4

Q01CPU*4

Q02CPU*4

Q02HCPU*4

Q06HCPU*4

Q12HCPU*4

Q25HCPU*4

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

- - -

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)Q25PRHCPU

(Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series) *3

Q12DCCPU-V *5

Q24DHCCPU-V/ VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List

6

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

RS-232 RS-422

Page 445 Connection to LCPU

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

RS-232 RS-422

Page 446 Connection to QCPU (A mode)

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*6

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

RS-232 RS-422

Page 447 Connection to QnACPU (QnACPU type)

Q4ARCPU RS-232 RS-422

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)*6

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

RS-232 RS-422

Page 450 Connection to QnACPU (QnASCPU type)

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

RS-232 RS-422

Page 453 Connection to ACPU (AnCPU type)

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 455 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2 *7

A1SHCPU*8

A2SCPU*8

A2SCPU-S1*8

A2SHCPU*8

A2SHCPU-S1*8

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU*8

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List 437

43

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU*8 RS-232 RS-422

Page 455 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)

A0J2HCPUP21*8

A0J2HCPUR21*8

A0J2HCPU- DC24*8

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24 RS-232 RS-422

Page 455 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3 - - -

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU *9*10 RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q173CPU *9*10

Q172CPUN *9

Q173CPUN *9

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU *11

Q170MSCPU *12

Q170MSCPU-S1 *12

MR-MQ100 - - -

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 453 Connection to ACPU (AnCPU type)

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 455 Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU*13

A171SHCPUN*13

A172SHCPU*13

A172SHCPUN*13

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/ HRemote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

8 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List

6

*1 Mount a redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPCPU on the base unit when building a redundant system. *2 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*3 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU. *4 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *5 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. *6 If the A series computer link module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices in the same range on AnACPU.

However, the following devices cannot be monitored. Devices added to QnACPU Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.) File register (R)

*7 Use hardware version C or later, software version E or later. *8 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU(P21/

R21/-DC24). In addition, A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used.

*9 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*10 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 RS-232 RS-422

Page 445 Connection to LCPU

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

RS-232 RS-422

Page 443 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List 439

44

*11 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *12 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used. *13 For serial communication connection of A171SHCPU(N) and A172SHCPU(N), use the computer link module whose software version is

version U or later.

0 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List

6

Serial communication module/Computer link module

*1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used.

*2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or later. *3 Only CH2 can be connected. *4 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used. *5 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. *6 The module operates in the device range on AnACPU. *7 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU. *8 Use hardware version C or later, software version E or later. *9 Use firmware version 07 or higher when building a redundant system. *10 Only available for MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU). *11 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type.

CPU series Model name*1

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*7

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*7

CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE Field Network head module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ71C24*9, RJ71C24-R2*9, RJ71C24-R4*9

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Motion CPU (Q Series) MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) C Controller module (MELSEC-Q Series)

QJ71C24*2, QJ71C24-R2*2

QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4

QJ71CMO*3, QJ71CMON*3

MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network head module (MELSEC-L Series)

LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2

MELSEC-Q (A mode) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF

A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

AJ71QC24*4, AJ71QC24-R2*4, AJ71QC24-R4*4

AJ71QC24N*4, AJ71QC24N-R2*4, AJ71QC24N-R4*4

A1SJ71QC24 *4*10, A1SJ71QC24-R2 *4*10

A1SJ71QC24N *4*10, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 *4*10

A1SJ71QC24N1 *4*10, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 *4*10

AJ71UC24*4*6

A1SJ71C24-R2 *6*10, A1SJ71C24-R4 *6*10, A1SJ71C24-PRF *6*10

A1SJ71UC24-R2 *6*10, A1SJ71UC24-R4 *6*10, A1SJ71C24-PRF *6*10

MELSEC-A (AnCPU) MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ71UC24*4*5

A1SJ71UC24-R2 *5*11, A1SJ71UC24-R4 *5*11, A1SJ71UC24-PRF *5*11

A1SJ71C24-R2 *5*11, A1SJ71C24-R4 *5*11, A1SJ71C24-PRF *5*11

A1SCPUC24-R2 *8*11

A2CCPUC24*4, A2CCPUC24-PRF*4

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.1 Connectable Model List 441

44

6.2 System Configuration Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Serial communication module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 (R16NCCPU-S1)

RJ71C24 RJ71C24-R2

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

RJ71C24 RJ71C24-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Serial communication module

RCPU GOT

Connection cable

2 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*5 Model

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24-R2 QJ71C24N-R2 QJ71CMO QJ71CMON

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module*2

1 GOT for 1 modem interface module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

GT01-RS4-M*3 -

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Serial communication module

QCPU (Q mode)

GOT

Connection cable

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 443

44

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual (Basic) For details on the system configuration on the modem interface module side, refer to the following manual. Modem Interface Module User's Manual

*2 Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module. *3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.

Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION *4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

Connection to LCPU

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELSEC-L LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

LJ71C24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

500m GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Serial communication module

LCPU GOT

Connection cable

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 445

44

Connection to QCPU (A mode)

*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Computer link module

QCPU (A mode) GOT

Connection cable

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

Connection to QnACPU (QnACPU type)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Serial communication module*1

Computer link module

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*6 Model

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24-R2 AJ71QC24N-R2

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*5

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 459 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a serial communication module)

AJ71C24/UC24

Communication driver

(When connecting to a computer link module)

Serial communication module /Computer link module

QnACPU (QnACPU type) GOT

Connection cable

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 447

44

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communications Module Users Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 461 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*5 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

AJ71QC24-R4 AJ71QC24N-R4

RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4-25P5(30m)*4

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*3

30m - (Built into GOT)

AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24-R4 AJ71QC24N-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Serial communication module*1

Computer link module

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*6 Model

8 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

AJ71UC24 RS-232 GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 459 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 449

45

Connection to QnACPU (QnASCPU type)

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Serial communication module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24-R2 A1SJ71QC24N-R2 A1SJ71QC24N1-R2

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a serial communication module)

AJ71C24/UC24

Communication driver

(When connecting to a computer link module)

Serial communication module /Computer link module

QnACPU (QnASCPU type) GOT

Connection cable

0 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Serial communication module/Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

500m GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*3

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT01-RS4-M*2 -

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 451

45

*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].

*2 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. Page 1019 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

*3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

2 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

Connection to ACPU (AnCPU type)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

AJ71UC24 RS-232 GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 459 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AJ71C24/UC24

Communication driver

Computer link module

ACPU (AnCPU type) GOT

Connection cable

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 453

45

*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ71UC24 RS-232 GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

Connection to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) (A0J2H) (A2CCPUC)

A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF A1SCPUC24-R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 458 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AJ71C24/UC24

Communication driver

Computer link module

ACPU (AnSPU type) (A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC)

GOT

Connection cable

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration 455

45

*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Motion CPU (A Series)

A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF A1SCPUC24-R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) or

Page 457 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 computer link module

GT15-RS2-9P

A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24-R4

RS-422 GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) or

Page 460 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Computer link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.2 System Configuration

6

6.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin

RS-232 connection diagram 2) PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin

GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PLC side

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4

2

3

6

7

20

8

5

1

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

CD

CS(CTS)

FG

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.3 Connection Diagram 457

45

RS-232 connection diagram 3) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin For GT21 (When connecting to the R/Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module)

For GT21 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module)

GOT side (terminal block) PLC side

2

3

6

4

5

1

7

8

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

SG

CD

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

GOT side (terminal block) PLC side

2

3

6

4

5

1

7

8

9

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

SG

CD

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

8 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.3 Connection Diagram

6

RS-232 connection diagram 4) PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT21 (When connecting to the R/Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)

For GT21 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

GOT side (terminal block) PLC side

3

2

6

20

7

8

4

5

1

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

SG

CD

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

FG

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

GOT side (terminal block) PLC side

3

2

6

20

7

8

4

5

1

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

SG

CD

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

FG

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.3 Connection Diagram 459

46

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

GOT side PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

FG

RDA

SDA

-

-

SG

RDB

SDB

-

-

FG

R

GOT side (connector

terminal block) PLC side

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

RDA

SDA

-

-

SG

RDB

SDB

-

-

FG

R

*1

*1

*1

*1

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT10-C R4-25P

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Blue

Purple

Black

White

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

0 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.3 Connection Diagram

6

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V, GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For GS21 Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

Serial communication module or computer link module side Connect the terminating resistors (330 1/4W (orange/orange/brown/) ) on the serial communication module or computer link module side. For details, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the serial communication module or computer link module Other than A2CCPUC24(-PRF) Connect the terminating resistors supplied with the module across RDA and RDB. A2CCPUC24(-PRF) Set TXD and RXD on the terminating resistor setting pin to "A".

GOT side (connector

terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT21-C R4-25P5

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.3 Connection Diagram 461

46

6.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected. [Serial(MELSEC)] [AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*] [AJ71C24/UC24] [Serial(MELSEC)] [AJ71C24/UC24] [MELSEC-FX] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 463 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

2 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings

6

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Serial (MELSEC) The following devices are available to GT27, GT25, and GT23.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format*3 Select the communication format. (Default: 1) 1, 2

Monitor Speed*4 Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal)

High (Normal)*1

Middle Low*2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 468 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 469 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 470 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 463

46

*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However, when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High(Normal)]. (High performance is hardly affected)

*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Middle] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.

*3 Set this item when replacing the F900 series with GOT2000 series. To change the communication settings of the serial communication module connected to an F900 model, set as follows. The baud rate can be changed to 115200bps. [Intelligent function module switch setting] of PLC

Page 472 PLC Side Setting GOT communication settings

To maintain the communication settings of the serial communication module connected to an F900 model, set as follows. The baud rate remains 38400bps. GOT communication settings

*4 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Switch 1 0000H -

Switch 2 0000H -

Switch 3 - 0000H

Switch 4 - 0000H

Switch 5 0000H 0000H

Item Set value Format 1

Item Set value Format 2

4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings

6

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*

AJ71C24/UC24

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)

8bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

Odd (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)

8bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

Odd (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 465

46

Serial (MELSEC) The following devices are available to GT21 and GS21.

*1 Set this item when replacing the F900 series with GOT2000 series. To change the communication settings of the serial communication module connected to an F900 model, set as follows. The baud rate can be changed to 115200bps. [Intelligent function module switch setting] of PLC

Page 472 PLC Side Setting GOT communication settings

To maintain the communication settings of the serial communication module connected to an F900 model, set as follows. The baud rate remains 38400bps. GOT communication settings

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format*1 Set the communication format. (Default: 1) 1, 2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 468 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 469 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 470 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 2032

Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Switch 1 0000H -

Switch 2 0000H -

Switch 3 - 0000H

Switch 4 - 0000H

Switch 5 0000H 0000H

Item Set value Format 1

Item Set value Format 2

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings

6

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 467

46

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

8 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings

6

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 469

47

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

0 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings

6

Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system.

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Disconnect the faulty station

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 471

47

6.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi Electric PLC in the computer link connection.

The PLC side settings (the serial communication module, computer link module) are explained in Section 7.5.2 to Section 7.5.4.

Transmission specifications Setting Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Yes (Odd)

Stop bit 1bit

Sum check Yes

Transmission speed (Baud rate) Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC.

Model Refer to Serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4

Page 473 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series

Serial communication module (Q Series) QJ71C24N, QJ71C24

Page 474 Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series

QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

Modem interface module QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON

Page 474 Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series

Serial communication module (L Series) LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2

Page 474 Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series

Serial communication module(QnA Series) AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24

Page 477 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series

AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24-R2

AJ71QC24N-R4, AJ71QC24-R4

A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24

A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24-R2

Computer link module AJ71UC24 Page 480 Connecting to MELSEC-A series

A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF

Page 480 Connecting to MELSEC-A series

A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4

Page 480 Connecting to MELSEC-A series

A1SCPUC24-R2 Page 480 Connecting to MELSEC-A series

A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF

Page 480 Connecting to MELSEC-A series

2 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series

Serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

[Module parameter] of GX Works3 The PLC can communicate with the GOT with the default module parameter setting.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models, two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2.

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 473

47

Connecting to MELSEC-Q, L series

Serial communication module (MELSEC-Q, L series) For details on the serial communication module (MELSEC-Q, L series), refer to the following. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) Modem interface module For details of the modem interface module, refer to the following manual. Modem Interface Module User's Manual

[Intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer [The intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer is not necessary. (When no [intelligent function module switch setting] is made, the module runs in the GX Developer connection mode.) A module can be also connected to a GOT by making the following [intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer.

When connecting to the CH1 side

Switch No. Bit Description Set value*3

Position Specified value

Switch 1 b0 OFF CH1 transmission settings*1

Operation setting (Operates according to the GOT side specifications.)

0000H

b1 OFF Data Bit

b2 OFF Parity Bit

b3 OFF Even/Odd parity

b4 OFF Stop bit

b5 OFF Sum check code

b6 OFF Write during RUN

b7 OFF Setting modifications

b8 to b15 CH1 transmission speed setting*2

Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting GX Developer connection 0000H

Switch 5 Station number setting 0th station 0000H

4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

When connecting to the CH2 side

*1 The module operates under the following transmission specifications.

*2 The serial communication module operates at the transmission speed set on the GOT. *3 When the value of switch setting is other than "0", the setting of [Format] and [Transmission Speed] on the GOT side are required to be

changed. Page 463 Communication detail settings

Switch No. Bit Description Set value*3

Position Specified value

Switch 3 b0 OFF CH2 transmission settings*1

Operation setting (Operates according to the GOT side specifications.)

0000H

b1 OFF Data bit

b2 OFF Parity bit

b3 OFF Even/odd parity

b4 OFF Stop bit

b5 OFF Sum check code

b6 OFF Write during RUN

b7 OFF Setting modifications

b8 to b15 CH2 transmission speed setting*2

Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting GX Developer connection 0000H

Switch 5 Station number setting 0th station 0000H

Transmission specifications Setting details Operation setting Independent

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Yes

Even/odd parity Odd

Stop bit 1bit

Sum check code Yes

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 475

47

When the [intelligent function module switch setting] has been set After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models, two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2.

When connecting to the modem interface module When the modem interface module is connected, only CH2 can be used.

Model Connection of 2 GOTs

Function version A Function version B

QJ71C24(-R2)

-)4R/2R-(N42C17JQ

LJ71C24(-R2) -

: 2 GOTs connectable, : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

Connection to MELSEC-QnA series

Serial communication module (MELSEC-QnA series) For details on the serial communication module (MELSEC-QnA series), refer to the following. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)

Switch setting on serial communication module Set the Station number switches, the Mode setting switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and the Transmission specifications switches.

Mode setting switch

*1 The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/R4).

When connecting a GOT to CH2 Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0" (interlocked operation).

Mode setting switch*1 Description Set value Dedicated protocol (Format 5) (Binary mode)

5

AJ71QC24N RUN

CPUR/W

NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S

PRO SIO

SD.WAIT SD RD

CH1.ERR. CH2.ERR.

NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S PRO SIO

SD.WAIT SD RD

CH.1 CH.2

1

CH1 CH2

STATION

No.

MODE

SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

09 10 11 12

RDA

RDB

SG

SDA

SDB

NC

FG

CH1 RS-232C

CH2

RS422

RS485

8

4

0

C

8

4

0

C

5

0

5

0

10

AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4,AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4

(3)

(1)

(2)

A1SJ71QC24N

CH1

ERR. C/N P/S

PRO SID

CH2

ERROR

RD

SW.E NEU ACK

NAK SD.W. SD

STS ERR.

DISPLAY

5

0

5

0

CH1 CH2

10 1

STATION NO.

MODE

A1SJ71QC24N

RUN

RD

C.R/W NEU ACK

NAK SD.W.

SD

ERR. C/N P/S PRO SIO

AB

CH1 RS-232-C

CH2 RS-422/RS-485

SG

(FG)

(NC)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

8

4

0

C

8

4

0

C

ON

2 1

4 3

6 5

8 7

10 9

12 11

SW

(1)

(3)

(2)

A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2

MODE

CH

MODE

CH2CH1

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 477

47

Transmission specifications setting switch

*1 The following shows the layout of switches in the case of the following hardware versions for the module. Switch settings and switch ON/OFF directions are the same.

Transmission specifications setting switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

AJ71QC24(N) (-R2/R4)

A1SJ71QC24(N) (N1)(-R2)*1

SW01 Operation setting Independent operation OFF

SW02 Data bit setting 8bits ON

SW03 Parity bit enable/disable setting Enable ON

SW04 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW05 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

SW06 Sum check enable/disable setting Enable ON

SW07 Write during RUN enable/disable setting

Enable ON

SW08 Setting change enable/disable Disable (prohibit) OFF

SW09 to SW12

Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12)

SW13 to SW15

The switch is located on the left side of the module. (only on AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4))

All OFF

Target unit Hardware version A1SJ71QC24 Version E hardware or earlier

A1SJ71QC24-R2 Version D hardware or earlier

A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 Version A hardware

SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

09 10 11 12

ONON

ON

2 1

4 3

6 5

8 7

10 9

12 11

SW

1

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

12 SW

CH1/2

ON

8 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 When the software version of AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4) and A1SJ71QC24 (-R2) is "L" or earlier, and when 2 devices are connected to the

two interfaces individually, make the setting so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 19200bps. When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 19200bps, a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module. When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 19200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side.

*3 When 3 devices are connected to the two interfaces individually in the case of AJ71QC24N(-R2/R4), A1SJ71QC24N(-R2), and A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2), make the setting so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)). When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)), a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module. When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side.

*4 This can be set only in the case of AJ71QC24N (-R2/R4), A1SJ71QC24N (-R2) or A1SJ71QC24N1 (-R2).

Station number switch (for both CH1 and CH2)

*1 The station number switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/R4).

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Setting Switch Transmission speed*1*2*3

4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps*4 57600 bps*4 115200 bps*4

SW09 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

SW12 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Station number switch*1 Contents Set value Set the station number of the serial communication module to which an access is made from the GOT.

01

STATION No.

10

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 479

48

Connecting to MELSEC-A series

Computer link module (MELSEC-A series) For details on the computer link module (MELSEC-A series), refer to the following. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) Users Manual

Switch setting on the computer link module Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission specifications switches and the Station number setting switches.

Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Contents Set value

Dedicated protocol type 1 RS-232 connection 1

RS-422 connection 5

AJ71UC24

(1)

(3)

(2)

AJ71UC24 2 - C / N 2 - P / S 2 - PRO 2 - SIO 4 - C / N 4 - P / S 4 - PRO 4 - SIO

CPUR / W COM M . D . M M . D . L B0 B1 B2

L 4 L 5 L 6

RUN 2 - SD 2 - RD

2 - NEU 2 - ACK 2 - NAK 4 - NEU 4 - ACK 4 - NAK

4 - SD 4 - RD

L 1 L 2 L 3

MODE

STATION NO.

10

1

SW11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

21 22 23 24

O N

RS - 422 RS - 485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

NC

RS-232-C

A1SJ71UC24-R2 NEU ACK NAK C/N

NEU ACK NAK C/N P/S

PRO SIO SIO

SW 03 04

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

RS-232-C

A1SJ71UC24-R2

MODE

1.FORM1 2.FORM2 3.FORM3 4.FORM4 5.MOFORM

(1) (2)

A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF

8

0

23

5

7

8

0

23

5

7

8 9 0

34

B CD

F

A1SJ71UC24 - R4 SCAN

SCAN E. SET E.

SIO E.

ST. DWN

MD / L

NEU

NAK ACK

C / N P / S PRO SIO

COM

MD

RUN

RD SD

CPU

SW

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

10

STATION NO.

1

MODE

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

NC

RS - 422 / 485

A1SJ71UC24 - R4

(1)

(3)

(2)

A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4

PULL

MELSEC A1SCPU24-R2

STOP RUN

RESETRESET

L CLRRUN

ERROR

STOP RUN

RESETRESET

L CLRRUN

ERROR

MELSEC A1SCPU24-R2

MITSUBISHIMITSUBISHI

When the cover is open

When the cover is open

A1SCPUC24-R2

A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF

(1)

(2)

(1) (3)

(2)

CBA98 7 6 54321 0F

ED

0 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

Transmission specifications switch AJ71UC24

Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW15) Set the transmission speed (SW13 to SW15) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF

Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Transmission specifications switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

SW11 Main channel setting RS-232 connection OFF

RS-422 connection ON

SW12 Data bit setting 8bits ON

SW13 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

See descriptions below.

SW14

SW15

SW16 Parity bit setting Set ON

SW17 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW18 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

SW21 Sum check setting Set ON

SW22 Write during RUN enabled/disabled setting Enabled ON

SW23 Computer link/multi-drop selection Computer link ON

SW24 Master station/Local station setting (Setting ignored) OFF

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW13 OFF ON OFF

SW14 OFF OFF ON

SW15 ON ON ON

Transmission specifications switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

SW03 Unused OFF

SW04 Write during RUN enabled/disabled setting Enabled ON

SW05 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

See descriptions below.

SW06

SW07

SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON

SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON

SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

SW12 Sum check setting Set ON

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF

SW06 OFF OFF ON

SW07 ON ON ON

ON SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18

SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24

ON

ON 03 04

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

ON

SW

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 481

48

A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4

Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. A1SCPUC24-R2

Transmission speed setting (2 to 4) Set the transmission speed (2 to 4) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Transmission specifications switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

SW01 Master station/Local station setting (Setting ignored) OFF

SW02 Computer link/multi-drop selection Computer link ON

SW03 Unused OFF

SW04 Write during RUN enabled/disabled setting Enabled ON

SW05 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

See descriptions below.

SW06

SW07

SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON

SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON

SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

SW12 Sum check setting Set ON

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF

SW06 OFF OFF ON

SW07 ON ON ON

Transmission specifications switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

1 Write during RUN enabled/disabled setting Enabled ON

2 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

See descriptions below.

3

4

5 Data bit setting 8bits ON

6 Parity bit setting Set ON

7 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

8 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

9 Sum check setting Set ON

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 2 OFF ON OFF

3 OFF OFF ON

4 ON ON ON

ON 01 02 03 04

05 06 07 08

10 11 12

SW

09

ON

ON1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9

2 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF

Transmission speed setting (SW11 to SW13) Set the transmission speed (SW11 to SW13) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Station number setting switch

*1 The station number setting switch in the figure is for the A1SJ71UC24-R4.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Transmission specifications switch

Setting switch

Description Set value

SW11 Transmission speed setting (Consistent with the GOT side specifications)

See descriptions below.

SW12

SW13

SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON

SW15 Parity bit setting Set ON

SW16 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

SW18 Sum check setting Set ON

SW19 Main channel setting RS-232 OFF

SW20 Write during RUN enabled/disabled setting Enabled ON

Setting switch Transmission speed*1

4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW11 OFF ON OFF

SW12 OFF OFF ON

SW13 ON ON ON

Station number switch*1 Description Set value Set the station number of the computer link module to which an access is made from the GOT.

0

O N

SW 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ON OFF

2

1 0

987 6

5 4 3

2

1 0

987 6

5 4 3

10

1

STATION NO.

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting 483

48

When connecting GT21 or GS21 to an A series computer link module When you connect GT21 or GS21 to an A series link module via RS-232, refer to the following sequence programs to set the buffer memory of the computer link module so that CD signals are not checked.

In the case of A computer link Refer to the program example below in which the I/O signals of the computer link module are 80 to 9F (H).

In the case of CPU equipped with built-in computer link A1SCPUC24-R2

A2CCPUC24

X87 TO

Writing data in the buffer memory

10B(H): CD terminal check setting K1: No CD terminal check

Area where the computer link module is connected

H8 H10B K1 K1P

X0E7

TO

Writing data in the buffer memory

10B(H): CD terminal check setting K1: No CD terminal checkFixed value

Area where the computer link module is connected (Fixed value)

H0E H10B K1 K1P

X1E7

TO

Writing data in the buffer memory

10B(H): CD terminal check setting K1: No CD terminal checkFixed value

Area where the computer link module is connected (Fixed value)

K61 H10B K1 K1P

4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.5 PLC Side Setting

6

6.6 Precautions

Time taken until the PLC runs when connected in the multiple CPU system The following time is taken until the PLC runs. MELSEC iQ-R series, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to RnSFCPU The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a system alarm occurs. To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.6 Precautions 485

48

MEMO

6 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 6.6 Precautions

7

7 BUS CONNECTION Page 487 Connectable Model List Page 492 System Configuration Page 515 GOT Side Settings Page 526 Precautions

7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to MELSEC iQ-R Series R00CPU Bus connection - -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU Bus connection - -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V Bus connection - -

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W Bus connection - -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 Bus connection - -

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) Bus connection - -

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 Bus connection - -

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5U Bus connection - -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 487

48

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*4

Q00JCPU*1 Bus connection Page 492 Connection to QCPUQ00CPU*2

Q01CPU*2

Q02CPU*2

Q02HCPU*2

Q06HCPU*2

Q12HCPU*2

Q25HCPU*2

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*4

Q12PRHCPU (Main base) - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU*1

Q00UJCPU-S8*1 Bus connection Page 492

Connection to QCPU

Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*3

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

Bus connection Page 492 Connection to QCPU

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

MELSEC-L L02CPU - - -

L06CPU

L26CPU

L26CPU-BT

L02CPU-P

L06CPU-P

L26CPU-P

L26CPU-PBT

L02SCPU

L02SCPU-P

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A - - -

Q02HCPU-A

Q06HCPU-A

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

8 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List

7

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Bus connection Page 496 Connection to QnACPU or AnCPU

Q2ACPU-S1

Q3ACPU

Q4ACPU

Q4ARCPU*5

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Bus connection Page 499 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU

Q2ASCPU-S1

Q2ASHCPU

Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU Bus connection Page 496 Connection to QnACPU or AnCPU

A2UCPU-S1

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU

A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUR21

A2ACPU-S1

A2ACPUP21-S1

A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU

A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU

A1NCPUP21

A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU

A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU Bus connection Page 499 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU*6

A1SJCPU-S3*6

A1SJHCPU*6

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 489

49

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU Bus connection Page 504 Connection to A0J2HCPU

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*7*8 Bus connection Page 492 Connection to QCPUQ173CPU*7*8

Q172CPUN*7

Q173CPUN*7

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*9

Q170MSCPU*10

Q170MSCPU-S1*10

MR-MQ100 - - -

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU Bus connection Page 505 Connection to Motion CPU

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU*11 Bus connection Page 505 Connection to Motion CPU

A171SCPU-S3*11

A171SCPU-S3N*11

A171SHCPU*11

A171SHCPUN*11

A172SHCPU*11

A172SHCPUN*11

A173UHCPU*11

A173UHCPU-S1*11

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB9 - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Bus connection Page 492 Connection to QCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

0 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List

7

*1 When using the bus extension connector box, attach it to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed.) *2 For the multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *3 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *4 When a slim base is used, a bus connection cannot be established. *5 Bus-connect the GOT on the last redundant extension base A68RB (version B or later) for the Q4ARCPU redundant system. *6 When an extension base unit is connected, a bus connection cannot be established. *7 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed.

SW6RN-SV13Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00E or later5 SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*8 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later

*9 Connect Q170MCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *10 Connect Q170MSCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B). *11 When using an extension base, use the A168.

List of the main base or extension base available for the GOT bus connection : The GOT bus connection is available. : The GOT bus connection is not available.

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

Bus connection Page 492 Connection to QCPU

Main/Extension base Model GOT bus connection Main base Q3B

Q3DB (Multiple CPU high speed main base unit)

Q3BL (Large type base unit)

Q3SB (Slim type main base unit)

Q38RB (Redundant power main base unit)

Extension base Q5B (Model requiring no power supply module)

Q6B (Model requiring a power supply module)

QA1S6B (Small type QA base unit)

Q5BL (Large type base unit, Model requiring no power supply module)

Q6BL (Large type base unit, Model requiring a power supply module)

QA6B (Large type QA base unit)

QA6ADP (QA conversion adapter module) + A5B/A6B

Q68RB (Redundant power extension base unit)

Q65WRB (Redundant extension base unit)

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 491

49

7.2 System Configuration

When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment.

Connection to QCPU

When one GOT is connected

*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032). *2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required.

Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit. Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box. When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit. When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage.

PLC Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Main base Extension cable*1

Extension base Option device*4*5

Model

Main base

Bus extension connector box*2

Extension base

Bus extension connector box*2

Main base

- - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT: 13.2m (Including the extension cable length)

- Extension cable (13.2m or less)

Extension base

-

A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT: 37m (Including the extension cable length)

- Extension cable (13.2m or less)

Extension base

A9GT-QCNB

Communication driver

Bus(Q)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box GOTMain base unit

Extension cable Connection cable

2 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

*3 When using the Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, or Q00UJCPU-S8, mount a bus extension connector box on the extension base unit. (It cannot be mounted on the main base unit. When connecting the GOT to the main base unit, the distance between the main base unit and the GOT must be within 13.2 m.)

*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 493

49

When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected

PLC Connection cable 1)

GOT (1st)

Main base Extension cable*1

Extension base Option device *5*6*7

Model

Main base

Bus extension connector box*2

Extension base

Bus extension connector box*2

Main base

- - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m)

GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2

Refer to 1) in the table below.

- Extension cable (13.2m or less)

Extension base - GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2

2)

A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m)

GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2

3)

- Extension cable (13.2m or less)

Extension base A9GT-QCNB GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2

4)

Connection cable 2) GOT (intermediary) *4

Model Connection cable 3)

GOT (terminal) *4 Model Max. distance

Option device *5*6*7 Option device *5*6*7

1) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m)

GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2

GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC150BS(15m) GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QC350BS(35m)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT (1st): 13.2m Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m

2) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT (1st): 13.2m (Including the extension cable length) Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m (Including the extension cable length)

3) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m

4) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

Between main base and GOT (terminal): 37m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(Q)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box 1st GOT Intermediary

GOT

GOT (Terminating station)

Main base unit

Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)

4 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032). *2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required.

Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit. When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit. When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage. Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box. Set the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as that of the GOT unit. For details on the Stage No. setting, refer to the following. Page 515 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*3 When using the Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, or Q00UJCPU-S8, mount a bus extension connector box on the extension base unit. (It cannot be mounted on the main base unit. When connecting the GOTs to the main base unit, the distance between the main base unit and the first GOT must be within 13.2 m.)

*4 When connecting 3 or more GOTs, the overall cable length is restricted. Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs

*5 The bus connection unit GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*6 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 495

49

Connection to QnACPU or AnCPU

When one GOT is connected

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When using GT15-CEXSS-1, follow the precautions below.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *4 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.

Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distance

Main base

Extension cable*1

Extension base

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box*2

Option device*5

Model

Main base

- - - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 6.6m

- - GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 36.6m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m

Main base

Extension cable

Extension base

- - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 36.6m Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box GOTMain base unit

Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

6 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected

PLC*5 Connection cable 2) GOT (1st)*3

Main base

Extension cable*1

Extension base

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box*2

Option device*6*7*8

Model

Main base

- - - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Refer to 1) in the table below.

Extension cable

Extension base

- - GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

2) Extension

cable Extension base

Main base

- - - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

3) Extension

cable Extension base

Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd)*3*5 Connection cable 4)

GOT (3rd)*3*5 Max. distance

Option device*6*7*8

Model Option device*6*7*8

Model

1) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

- - - Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

2) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

- - - Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

3) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box 1st GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 2)Extension cable

2nd GOT 3rd GOT

Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)Connection cable 1)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 497

49

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *4 When using GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *5 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *6 About the bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

8 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU

When one GOT is connected

PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distanceExtension

base Extension cable*1

Main base

Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box*2

Option device*4*5

Model

- - Main base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 5m

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 30m

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 35m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOTExtension base

unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)Extension cable

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 499

50

*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024). *2 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When using GT15-CEXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *4 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.

Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Extension base

Extension cable

Main base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 6m (Including the extension cable length)

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 36m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 36m Between extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including the extension cable length)

PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distanceExtension

base Extension cable*1

Main base

Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box*2

Option device*4*5

Model

0 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

When two GOTs are connected

PLC*5 Connection cable 2)

Extension base Extension cable*1 Main base Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box

- - Main base - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

Refer to 1) in the table below.

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4

2)

GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4

3)

GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 3)

GOT (2nd)*3*5 Max. distance

Option device*6*7*8 Model Option device*6*7*8 Model 1) GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m

2) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m

3) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box 1st GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)Extension cable

2nd GOT

Connection cable 3)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 501

50

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *4 When using GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *5 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *6 About the bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC*5 Connection cable 2)

Extension base Extension cable*1 Main base Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box

Extension base Extension cable Main base - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

4)

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4

5)

GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *4

6)

GOT (1st)*3 Connection cable 3)

GOT (2nd)*3*5 Max. distance

Option device*6*7*8 Model Option device*6*7*8 Model 4) GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)

5) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)

6) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)

2 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

When three GOTs are connected

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *3 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *4 When using GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *5 The bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*6 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC*3 Connection cable 2) GOT (1st)*2

Extension base

Extension cable*1

Main base

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box

Option device*5*6*7

Model

- - Main base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Refer to 1) in the table below.

Extension base

Extension cable

Main base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

2)

Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd)*2*3 Connection cable 4)

GOT (3rd)*2*3 Max. distance

Option device*5*6*7

Model Option device*5*6*7

Mode l

1) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 35m

2) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between extension base and GOT (3rd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit 1st GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 2)Extension cable

2nd GOT

Connection cable 3)

3rd GOT

Connection cable 4)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 503

50

Connection to A0J2HCPU

*1 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the A0J2HCPU. Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs

*2 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable 2) GOT*1 Max. distance

Model name

Connection cable 1)

Power supply module

Option device*2*3

Model

A0J2HCPU A0J2C03(0.3m) A0J2C06(0.55m) A0J2C10(1m) A0J2C20(2m)

A0J2-PW GT15-J2C10B(1m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m Between power supply module and GOT: 1m

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Power supply module GOTPLC

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)

4 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

Connection to Motion CPU Page 505 A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3) Page 510 A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1)

A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3) When one GOT is connected

PLC Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distance

Main base

Extension cable

Extension base

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box*1

Option device*3*4

Model

Main base

- - - - GT15-A370C12B- S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B- S1(2.5m)

GT15- 75ABUSL GT15- 75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 2.5m

GT15- A370C12B(1.2m) GT15- A370C25B(2.5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS- 1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS- 1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS- 1(30m)*2

GT15- 75ABUSL GT15- 75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 32.5m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m

Main base

GT15- A370C12B(1.2m) GT15- A370C25B(2.5m)

Extension base

- - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15- 75ABUSL GT15- 75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m)

A7GT-CNB GT15-C100EXSS- 1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS- 1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS- 1(30m)*2

GT15- 75ABUSL GT15- 75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 36.6m Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)Extension cable

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 505

50

*1 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2 When using GT15-CEXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *3 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.

Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

6 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

When two GOTs are connected

PLC*4 Connection cable 2)

Main base Extension cable Extension base

Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box

Main base - - - - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m)

Refer to 1) in the table below.

GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m)

A7GT-CNB*1 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *3

2)

Main base GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m)

Extension base - - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

3)

GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-AC50B(5m)

A7GT-CNB*1 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *3

4)

GOT (1st)* Connection cable 3)

GOT (2nd)*2*4 Max. distance

Option device*5*6*7 Model Option device*5*6*7 Model 1) GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m

2) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m

3) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

4) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit

Bus extension connector box 1st GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)Extension cable

2nd GOT

Connection cable 3)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 507

50

*1 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *3 When using GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *4 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *5 The bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*6 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

8 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

When three GOTs are connected

*1 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *2 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *3 When using GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *4 The bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*5 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC*2 Connection cable 2) GOT (1st)*1

Extension base

Extension cable Main base

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box

Option device*4*5*6

Model

- - Main base

- - GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Refer to 1) in the table below.

Extension base

GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-A370C25B(2.5m)

Main base

- - GT15-C12NB(1.2m) GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-C50NB(5m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

2)

Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd) *1*2 Connection cable 4)

GOT (3rd) *1*2 Max. distance

Option device*4*5*6

Model Option device*4*5*6

Model

1) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 32.5m

2) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *3

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Extension base unit 1st GOTMain base unit

Connection cable 2)Extension cable

2nd GOT 3rd GOT

Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 509

51

A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1) When one GOT is connected

PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distance

Main base

Extension cable*1

Extension base*2

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box

Option device*5*6

Model

Main base

- - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 3m

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 30m

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15- A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15- A1SC30NB(3m)

A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT: 33m (Including between main base and bus connector conversion box) Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m

Main base

Extension cable

Extension base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 3m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 33m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15- A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15- A1SC30NB(3m)

A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) *4

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between extension base and GOT: 33m Between extension base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOTExtension base

unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)Extension cable

0 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit. *3 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *4 When using GT15-CEXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *5 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.

Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 511

51

When two GOTs are connected

PLC*5 Connection cable 2)

Main base Extension cable*1 Extension base*2 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box

Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

Refer to 1) in the table below.

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5

2)

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m)

A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5

3)

GOT (1st)*4 Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd)*4*6 Max. distance

Option device*7*8*9 Model Option device*7*8*9 Model 1) GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m

2) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m

3) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Main base unit Bus extension connector box

Extension base unit

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)Extension cable

1st GOT 2nd GOT

2 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit. *3 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *4 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *5 When using GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *6 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *7 The bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*8 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*9 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC*5 Connection cable 2)

Main base Extension cable*1 Extension base*2 Connection cable 1) Bus connector conversion box

Main base Extension cable Extension base - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

4)

- - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5

5)

GT15- A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-A1SC30NB(3m)

A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) *5

6)

GOT (1st)*4 Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd)*4*6 Max. distance

Option device*7*8*9 Model Option device*7*8*9 Model 4) GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)

5) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m

6) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including extension cable length) Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 513

51

When two or three GOTs are connected

*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit. *3 GT 2705-V can be available for terminal. *4 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

Page 532 Connection to multiple GOTs *5 When using GT15-CBS, connect as following precautions.

Page 526 GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS *6 The bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)

*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Remote personal computer operation (Serial), video display function, multimedia function, external I/O device, RGB display function, sound output function

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC *4 Connection cable 2) GOT (1st)*3

Main base

Extension cable*1

Extension base*2

Connection cable 1)

Bus connector conversion box

Option device*6*7*8

Model

Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

Refer to 1) in the table below.

Main base Extension cable

Extension base

- - GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

2)

Connection cable 3) GOT (2nd)*3*4 Connection cable 4)

GOT (3rd)*3*4 Max. distance

Option device*6*7*8

Model Option device*6*7*8

Model

1) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m

2) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2

GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C200BS(20m) *5

GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m Between main base and GOT (3rd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)

Communication driver

Bus(A/QnA)

Main base unit Extension base unit

Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)Extension cable

1st GOT 2nd GOT

Connection cable 4)

3rd GOT

4 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration

7

7.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected. [Bus(Q)] [Bus(A/QnA)] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 516 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 515

51

Communication detail settings

Bus(Q)

*1 When using a QA1S6B extension base unit, assign the GOT as a stage next to the QB extension base unit in the stage number setting. For the details, refer to the following. Page 531 When using the QA1S6B extension base unit

*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High(Normal)]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)

*3 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Middle] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced.

*4 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Bus(A/QnA)

Item Description Range Stage No. *1 (Default: 1) 1 to 7

Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 9

Monitor Speed *4 Set the monitor speed of the GOT. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: Normal)

High (Normal) *2/Middle/Low *3

Timeout Time (Sec.) Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 12) 12 to 90

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 518 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 519 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 520 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

Item Description Range Stage No. (Default: 1) 1 to 7

Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 7

Timeout Time (Sec.) Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3) 3 to 90

6 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings

7

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. When changing Stage No. and Slot No. Change these settings with the PLC CPU turned OFF, and then reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT. Failure to do so may generate a system alarm (No.487).

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 517

51

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

8 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings

7

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 519

52

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

0 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings

7

Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system.

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Disconnect the faulty station

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 521

52

Setting Stage No. and Slot No.

Before setting Stage No. and Slot No. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows. QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points Other than QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points At the [Detail setting], assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the PLC CPU.

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Set an additional stage (16 points 10 slots) for GOT connection, and assign a GOT to one of the I/O slots. (The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the main base unit or extension base unit.)

When using the bus extension connector box Set the Stage No. switch on the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as the GOT. For setting details, refer to the following manual: A9GT-QCNB Bus Extension Connector Box User's Manual

Q312B

Q68B

Main base unit

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :0

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :1

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :2

Extension base unit

Stage No. setting connector

Extension stage 1

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

2 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings

7

When connecting to Motion CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot No. in the communication interface settings, set "10" to [2nd Stage].

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 523

52

Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number of empty slots" for other purposes. For details on I/O assignment settings, refer to the following manual: QnU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) Example: I/O assignment (when 16 points are assigned to each of all modules installed with the PLC CPU)

Q35B

Q68B

0 1CPU 2 3 4 Slot No.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Q65B 13 14 15 16 17

X 00

to X

0F

X 10

to X

1F

X 20

to X

2F

X 30

to X

3F

X 40

to X

4F

X 60

to X

6F X

70 to

X 7F

X 80

to X

8F X

90 to

X 9F

X 50

to X

5F

X A

0 to

X A

F X

B 0

to X

B F

X C

0 to

X C

F

X E

0 to

X E

F X

F0 to

X FF

X 10

0 to

X 10

F X

11 0

to X

11 F

X D

0 to

X D

F

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Schematic image of Stage No. for GOT connection viewed from PLC CPU (16 points x 10 slots occupied)

X 12

0 to

X 12

F

X 17

0 to

X 17

F

X 13

0 to

X 13

F X

14 0

to X

14 F

X 15

0 to

X 15

F X

16 0

to X

16 F

X 18

0 to

X 18

F X

19 0

to X

19 F

X 1A

0 to

X 1A

F X

1B 0

to X

1B F

Set Empty (0 points) to unused I/O slots.

Main base unit

Extension base unit

Extension stage 1

Extension stage 2

Extension stage 3

Stage No. setting connector

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

4 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings

7

Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O slots are left on an extension base unit, set an additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O slots. (Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base unit is not allowed.) When there is an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit

When there are no empty I/O slots on the extension base unit

A1S35B

0 1 Slot No. A1S65B

Main base unit

Extension base unit

Stage No. :1 Slot No. :2

Stage No. :1 Slot No. :3

Stage No. :1 Slot No. :4

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

A1S35B

A1S65B

Main base unit

Extension base unit

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :0

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :1

Stage No. :2 Slot No. :2

E m

pt y

E m

pt y

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.3 GOT Side Settings 525

52

7.4 Precautions GT15-CEXSS-1, GT15-CBS

Composition of GT15-CEXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-CBS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m).

GT15-CEXSS-1 connector Connect the connectors as follows: GT15-EXCNB PLC CPU side GT15-CBS GOT side

Grounding When using GT15-CEXSS-1

1. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

2. Use the GT15-CBS's FG cable of 28cm or less.

3. Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG ground cable.

4. Connect the GT15-CBS's FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's terminal block.

5. Connect the GT15-CBS's FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power supply module.

6. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable.

When using GT15-CBS Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above for both GOTs.

(GT15-EXCNB) (GT15-CBS)

PLC side GOT side

FG LG N L

PLC

Not connected

(GT15-EXCNB) GOT

OUT IN

FGLGNL

2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less

2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less

(GT15-CBS)

6 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions

7

Turning the GOT ON

System configuration The PLC CPU remains in the reset status until the GOT is started. Therefore, no sequence program will run until then. The system configuration, in which the GOT is turned on from a sequence program, is not available.

Time taken until the PLC runs after power-on of the GOT The following time is taken from when the GOT is powered on until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Power-on order of the GOTs and PLC Power-up sequence for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) For the power-on order, refer to the following. Page 529 Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs Power-up sequence for connection of the Q4ARCPU redundant system For the power-on order, refer to the following. Page 534 Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system Power-on order of the other GOTs and PLCs The GOT and PLC can both be started up whichever of these devices is turned ON first. (There is no specific sequence in which they are powered ON) Note, however, that operation is as follows when the GOT is turned ON followed by the PLC: When the PLC power is OFF with the GOT turned ON, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated. Upon power-on of the PLC CPU, the GOT automatically starts monitoring. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the System Information, refer to the following manual: GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions 527

52

Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON)

Precautions for reapplying the power to the GOT (OFF to ON) Do not perform power-off and then power-on of the GOT while the GOT is communicating with the PLC. Depending on the power-off timing, communication with the PLC is disabled. Before doing so, be sure to turn off the PLC first.

When one of the following operations is performed, the GOT is automatically restarted. You do not need to turn off the PLC. Writing a package data from GT Designer3 or a data storage location When utility settings have been changed

When turning OFF the GOT before display of the user creation screen When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent communications may be no longer possible. In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT.

Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) Page 529 Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs

Reset switch on GOT When bus connection is used, the reset switch on the GOT does not function.

Powering OFF or resetting the PLC

When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated. When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the System Information, refer to the following manual: GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When turning OFF or resetting the PLC CPU before display of the user creation screen When the PLC CPU is turned OFF or reset before the user creation screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent communications may be no longer possible. In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and GOT.

Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode)) Page 529 Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs

8 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions

7

Position of the GOT Always connect the GOT to the last base unit. Connecting a GOT between base units is not allowed.

When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the standard monitor OS and the communication driver for the bus connection being written onto the GOT, the PLC CPU is reset. (GX Developer cannot communicate with the PLC CPU) In this case, disconnecting the bus connection cable from the GOT will cancel the reset status of the PLC CPU.

When designing the system When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate when it is OFF.) Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main base unit and the total current consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.

When assigning GOT I/O signals Do not use the I/O signals assigned to the PLC CPU in sequence programs, as these signals are used by the GOT system. When these signals are used, GOT functions cannot be assured.

Connection to a QCPU (Q mode)

Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs The following restrictions apply when 3 of more GOTs are connected:

When connecting to No. of GOTs Total current consumption When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) 5 2200mA

4 1760mA

3 1320mA

2 880mA

1 440mA

Other than QCPU (Q mode) 3 360mA

2 240mA

1 120mA

Number of GOTs Overall Cable Length Restriction Overall Cable Length Restriction 1 (No restrictions)

2

3 Less than 25m (No restrictions) 25 to 37m Use the same power supply for the PLC and all GOTs, and turn these devices ON and OFF simultaneously.

4 Less than 20m 20 to 37m

5 Less than 15m 15 to 37m

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions 529

53

When using the Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, or Q00UJCPU-S8 The bus extension connector box can be connected only to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed)

When using a Q00J/Q00UJ/Q00/Q00U/Q01/Q01U/Q02UCPU When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, or Q00UJCPU-S8, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 2 or less. When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 4 or less.

Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8

Stage No. setting connector

Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU

Main base unit

Extension base unit Extension stage 1

Extension stage 2

Extension stage 3

GOT Stage No. :4

Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8

Main base unit

Stage No. setting connector

Extension base unit

GOT Stage No. :2

Extension stage 1

0 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions

7

When using the QA1S6B extension base unit A GOT is physically connected to the last of all extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, assign the GOT as a stage next to the last QB type extension base unit. Assign the QA1S6B type extension base unit as a stage next to the GOT.

Connection to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type

When connecting with a QnASCPU type and an AnSCPU type A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on only one side of the main base unit. (Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension connectors on both sides is not allowed)

In the case of Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A3CPU, A4UCPU Empty I/O slots are required within the max. number of extension stages.

For A0J2HCPU Assign the GOT to the I/O slots 0 to 3 of extension stage 1.

For the CPU other than Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A3CPU, A4UCPU, and A0J2HCPU Even if the max. number of stages are used with no empty I/O slots, when there is a free space of 32 I/O points or more, a GOT can be connected under the following communication interface setting. For the communication interface setting, refer to the following. Page 515 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

When connecting to Max. stage No. Communication interface setting

Stage No. Slot No. A1CPU/A2USCPU(-S1)/QnAS(H)CPU(-S1) 1 2 0

A2CPU/Q2ACPU 3 4 0

A3CPU/A4CPU 7 Cannot be used

Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU 7

A0J2HCPU 1

Q38B Main base unit

Q68B Extension base unit

QA1S68B Extension base unit

Stage No.Connection method

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions 531

53

Connection to multiple GOTs

System including different GOT series The GOT2000 series can be connected with GOT1000 series and GOT-A900 series in a system. When using them together, refer to the following Technical News. Precautions when Replacing GOT1000 Series with GOT2000 Series (GOT-A-0061) Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series with GOT2000 Series (GOT-A-0062) The GOT2000 series cannot be used with GOTs other than GOT1000 or GOT-A900 series in a system.

Restrictions on No. of GOTs The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.

*1 Indicates the following models: AD51(S3), AD51H(S3), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3), AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only), A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3), A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S, A1SJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only)

*2 Only the A1SD51S can be connected to the QCPU (Q Mode).

When connecting to Number of connectable GOTs

Total number of connectable GOTs and intelligent function modules*1

QCPU(Q mode), motion CPU (Q Series) Up to 5 5 GOTs+ 6 intelligent function modules*2

QCPU (A mode) Not connectable

QnACPU Up to 3 6 in total

ACPU AnUCPU, AnACPU, A2US(H)CPU Up to 3 6 in total

AnNCPU, AnS(H)CPU, A1SJ(H)CPU Up to 2 2 in total

A0J2HCPU Up to 1 2 in total

A1FXCPU Not connectable

Motion CPU (A Series) A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3), A173UHCPU(-S1)

Up to 3 6 in total

A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPUN Up to 2 2 in total

GOT-A900GOT1000 GOT800

2 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions

7

When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O slot cannot be used. No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the refresh mode. On PLC CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode before use.

In the cases where input X of an empty I/O slot is used When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10 network When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by the computer link module When input X of the I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/

Momentary) of GOT

Connection to a Q4ARCPU redundant system

When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU redundant system Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system. For the redundant extension base units, use version B or later. The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the rating plate.

Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system configurations The GOT does not operate normally in the following system configurations. When the GOT is bus connected to the bus switching module (A6RAF) on a redundant main base unit

(A32RB/A33RB) When the GOT is bus connected to a version-A redundant main base unit (A68RB)

Caution

Version of redundant extension base unit

Enlarged view of rating plate

7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions 533

53

Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system in the following sequence.

1. Turn ON the GOT.

2. After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system. At this time, a timeout is displayed on the system alarm. Use System Information to reset the alarm. For the system alarm, refer to the following manual: GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When monitoring Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Troubleshooting For the troubleshooting, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.

4 7 BUS CONNECTION 7.4 Precautions

8

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Page 535 Connectable Model List Page 542 System Configuration Page 546 GOT Side Settings Page 553 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H Page 562 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 Page 586 Precautions

8.1 Connectable Model List

Connectable network For MELSECNET/H connection, use the MNET/H mode or MNET/H extension mode with MELSECNET/H. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. For MELSECNET/10 connection, use the MNET/10 mode with MELSECNET/H. MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type. When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MNET/10 mode as a network type.

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List 535

53

PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to MELSEC iQ-R Series R00CPU MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/10 - -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ- R Series)

R12CCPU-V MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5U MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

- -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List

8

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00JCPU MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

*1

Page 542 System ConfigurationQ00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU

Q06HCPU

Q12HCPU

Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

- - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

C Controller module (Q Series) Q12DCCPU-V*2

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

- - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List 537

53

MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU

MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU

MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System Configuration

A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1

- - -

A2NCPUP21-S1 - - -

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2USCPU MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System ConfigurationA2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU - - -

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List

8

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series) Q172CPU*3*4 MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System ConfigurationQ173CPU*3*4

Q172CPUN*3

Q173CPUN*3

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*5

Q170MSCPU*6

Q170MSCPU-S1*6

MR-MQ100 - - -

Motion CPU (A Series) A273UCPU MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System ConfigurationA273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3 - - -

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU MELSECNET/10 Page 542 System ConfigurationA173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List 539

54

*1 Use CPU function version B or a later version. *2 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed.

SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*4 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

*5 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *6 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used.

Robot controller (Q Series) CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Page 542 System Configuration

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

0 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List

8

MELSECNET/H network module

*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.

MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module

*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU. *2 Only available for MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU). *3 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type.

CPU series Model name

Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1

MELSEC-QS Motion CPU (Q series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

QJ71BR11*1

C Controller module (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

QJ71BR11*1

CPU series Model name

Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1

MELSEC-QS Motion CPU (Q series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

QJ71BR11*1

C Controller module (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

AJ71QLP21,AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21 *2, A1SJ71QLP21S *2

AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 *2

MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A (AnCPU) MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 *3

AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 *3

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.1 Connectable Model List 541

54

8.2 System Configuration Connection to optical loop system

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name MELSECNET/H network module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*5 Model

MELSEC-Q QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25 63 GOTs

MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*4

C Controller module (Q Series)

QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25

MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*4

MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25

MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25

MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*4

MELSEC-QnA AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S

MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*4

MELSEC-A AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21

MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25*4

MELSECNET/H

Communication driver

MELSECNET/H network module MELSECNET/10 network module

GOT

Connection cable

QCPU

2 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.2 System Configuration

8

*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

*4 Set the MELSECNET/10 mode in the communication settings. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.2 System Configuration 543

54

Connection to the coaxial bus system

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name MELSECNET/H network module*2

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*6 Model

MELSEC-Q QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13 31 GOTs

QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5

C Controller module (Q Series)

QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13

QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5

MELSEC-QS QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13

QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5

MELSEC-QnA AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11

MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5

MELSEC-A AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11

MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable*3 *4 GT15-J71BR13*5

MELSECNET/H

Communication driver

MELSECNET/H network module

GOT

Connection cable

QCPU

4 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.2 System Configuration

8

*1 Use a PLC CPU of function version B or a later version. *2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.

Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Use a MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or a later version.

*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following. Page 66 Coaxial cable connector connection method

*4 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

*5 Set the MELSECNET/10 mode in the communication settings. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.2 System Configuration 545

54

8.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [MELSECNET/H] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 547 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings

8

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network type.

(Default: MNET/H mode) MNET/H mode MNET/10 mode MNET/H Extended mode*1

Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 64

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection))

Online (auto. reconnection) Offline Test between slave station*2

Self-loopback test*2

Internal self-loopback test*2

H/W test*2

Transmission Speed Set the communication transmission speed. (Default: 25Mbps) When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as The network type, only 10mbps can be set applicable.

10Mbps/25Mbps

Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) Valid when [Secured data send/Secured data receive] Is marked by the control station side network parameters of the melsecnet/h network system.

1 to 1000times

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 549 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 550 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 551 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings 547

54

*1 To monitor the redundant QCPU system, use function version D or later of QCPU, whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 07102 or later. Use version 8.29F or later of GX Developer.

*2 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network using the MELSECNET/H communication module, set [MNET/10 mode] in [Network Type]. Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the GOT utility, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings

8

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings 549

55

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

0 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings

8

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings 551

55

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 553 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 64

2 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.3 GOT Side Settings

8

8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H

This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system configuration shown as 9.4.1. When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type.

MELSECNET/H network module For details of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

System configuration

*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set at "0".

*2 The network type must be set according to the number of assignment of send points for each station. When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or less: MELSECNET/H mode When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or more: MELSECNET/H Extended Mode

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 1 Mode : Online (10Mbps) Network type : MNET/H mode (Control station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 2 Network range assignment *2:

MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0000H to LW00FFH

Network type : MNET/H Mode Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment *2:

Transmission speed : 10Mbps

LB0100H to LB01FFH LW0100H to LW01FFH

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H 553

55

Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the same mode setting and transmission speed as those of the GOT.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting(Station No.1)*1 1

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online: 10Mbps)*1 0

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

QJ71LP21-25

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

QJ71LP21 -25

IN

OUT

EXT.PW

+24V

24G

24G

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

IN

OUT

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

QJ71LP21S-25

QJ71LP21 S-25

EXT.PW

T.

+24V

24G

(FG)

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

4 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H

8

Parameter setting

Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set it according to the system configuration. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. *4 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET/H mode (Control station) (fixed)

Starting I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Total stations 2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode*3 Online

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interrupt settings

Control station return setting

Redundant settings*4

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Routing parameter setting

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H 555

55

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission. *2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Monitoring time 200

LB/LW setting*1 Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Pairing setting*2 Disable

LX/LY setting*1 No setting

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary setting (Use default value)

Station inherent parameters

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H

8

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 64

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H 557

55

Connecting to C Controller module (Q Series) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility.

Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H

8

MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *2 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. *3 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)

Routing parameter Routing parameter setting

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation settings

Network type MNET/H mode (Control station)

Network No.*1 1

Group No. 0

Mode*2 Online

Return (Use default value)

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Network range assignment

Total stations 2

Assignment method Start/End

LB/LW settings*3 Send range for each station LB

Sta. No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Sta. No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for each station LW

Sta. No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Sta. No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

(LX/LY) settings*3 No setting

Monitoring time (Use default value)

Specify I/O master Sta.*3 No setting

Specify reserved Sta. No setting

Supplementary settings (Use default value)

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H 559

56

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

0 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H

8

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network Type MNET/H mode

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)

Retry count 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0sec (Use default value)

Refresh Interval 1time (Use default value)

Monitor Speed 10Mbs

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.4 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H 561

56

8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

Connection to MELSECNET/H network module This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of system configuration. When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.

MELSECNET/H network module For details of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

System configuration

*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set at "0".

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".

Model name Reference MELSECNET/H network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25,

QJ71BR11 Page 562 Connection to MELSECNET/H network module

MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11

Page 571 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series)

MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR1 Page 579 Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series)

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 1 Mode : Online (10Mbps) Network type : MNET/10 mode (Control station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 2 Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH

MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 2 Mode : Online Network No. : 1 Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH

LW0100H to LW01FFH

LW0000H to LW00FFH

2 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (Station No.1)*1 1

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online: 10Mbps) 0 (fixed)

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

QJ71LP21-25

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

QJ71LP21 -25

IN

OUT

EXT.PW

+24V

24G

24G

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

IN

OUT

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

QJ71LP21S-25

QJ71LP21 S-25

EXT.PW

T.

+24V

24G

(FG)

MNG D.LINK RD L ERR.

RUN T.PASS

SD ERR.

0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1 0 5

9

4

8

3

7

2

6

1

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0 8

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

BA

32

91

QJ71BR11

QJ71BR11

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 563

56

Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system configuration. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET/10 mode (Control station) (fixed)

Starting I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Total stations 2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Online (fixed)

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interrupt settings

Control station return setting

Redundant settings*3

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Routing parameter setting

4 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. *2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200

LB/LW setting*1

Send range for station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Pairing setting*2 Disable

LX/LY setting*1 No setting

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary setting (Use default value)

Station inherent parameters

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 565

56

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 64

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility.

Connecting to C Controller module (Q Series) Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 567

56

MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *2 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)

Routing parameter Routing parameter setting

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation settings

Network type MNET/10 mode (Control station)

Network No.*1 1

Group No. 0

Mode Online

Return (Use default value)

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Network range assignment

Total stations 2

Assignment method Start/End

LB/LW settings*2 Send range for each station LB

Sta. No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Sta. No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for each station LW

Sta. No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Sta. No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

(LX/LY) settings*2 No setting

Monitoring time (Use default value)

Specify I/O master Sta.*2 No setting

Specify reserved Sta. No setting

Supplementary settings (Use default value)

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 569

57

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value (Use default) Retry 3times

Timeout Time 3sec

Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1

Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed)

Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2

Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)

0 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations.

MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual

System configuration

*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is set at "0".

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. Mode Network type Network No. Total stations Network range assignment: B0000H to B00FFH W0000H to W00FFH

MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. Mode Network No. Network range assignment: B0100H to B01FFH

: 2 : Online : 1

: 1

: 1 : 2

: Online : MNET/10 (Control station)

W0100H to W01FFH

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 571

57

Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch.

Network number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Network number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network No. setting (Network No.1)*1 1

IN

FRONT SIDE

OUT

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

GROUP NO.

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE

OFF PC REMOTE

N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K)

OFFON ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AJ71QLP21 RUN -

PC - REMOTE -

DUAL - SW.E - M/S.E -

PRM.E - CRC -

OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA -

UNDER - LOOP -

SD - RD -

- POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP - SD - RD

F.LOOP R.LOOP

10 1

100

E R R O R

E R R O R

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

AJ71QLP21

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

GROUP NO.

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE

OFF PC REMOTE

N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K)

OFFON ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AJ71QBR11 RUN -

PC - REMOTE -

SW.E -

M/S.E - PRM.E -

CRC - OVER -

AB.IF - TIME - DATA -

UNDER -

SD - RD -

- POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - - CPUR/W

10 1

100

E R R O R

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

AJ71QBR11

A1SJ71QLP21

A1SJ71QLP21

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF PC

N.ST PRM

ON REM. MNG

D.PRM ST,SIZE

8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE

2,4,6,8k

CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD

PW PC

REM. SWE.

M/S.E. PRM E.

R.E. CPU R/W

RUN MNG

S.MNG DUAL

D.LINK T.PASS

F.E.

d q q n q

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

NETWORK NO.

X100

X10

X1

OFF ON

IN

FRONT SIDE

OUT

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR.NO.

ST.NO. X10

X1

MODE

MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : OFFLINE

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 18 0F

7

(6)

(4) (1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S

A1SJ71QLP21S

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF PC

N.ST PRM

ON REM. MNG

D.PRM ST,SIZE

8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE

2,4,6,8k

CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD

RUN MNG

S.MNG DUAL

D.LINK T.PASS

F.E.

d q q n q

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

NETWORK

EXT.P W

NO.

X100

X10

X1

OFF ON

IN

FRONT SIDE

EXT.PW

{24V

24G

FG

OUT

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR.NO.

ST.NO. X10

X1

MODE

MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : FOFFLINE

PW PC

REM. SWE.

M/S.E. PRM E.

R.E. CPU R/W

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 18 0F

7

(6)

(4) (1)

(2) (3)

(5)

A1SJ71QLP21S

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

A1SJ71QBR11

A1SJ71QBR11

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

3 2

05

9

4

876

1

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF PC

N.ST PRM

ON REM. MNG

D.PRM ST,SIZE

8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE

2,4,6,8k

CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD

PW PC

REM. SWE.

M/S.E. PRM E.

CPU R/W

RUN MNG

S.MNG

D.LINK T.PASS

d q q n q

NETWORK NO.

X100

X10

X1

OFF ON

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR.NO.

ST.NO. X10

X1

MODE

MODE 0 : ONLINE (A.R) 2 : OFFLINE

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 18 0F

7

(6)

(4) (1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

A1SJ71QBR11

IN

24V

24G

FG

FRONT SIDE

OUT

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

GROUP NO.

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE

OFF PC REMOTE

N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K)

OFFON ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AJ71QLP21S RUN -

PC - REMOTE -

DUAL - SW.E -

M/S.E - PRM.E -

CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA -

UNDER - LOOP -

SD - RD -

- POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - EX.POWER - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP - SD - RD

F.LOOP R.LOOP

10 1

100

E R R O R

E R R O R

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

AJ71QLP21S

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

2 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Group number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

LED indication select switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Group number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Group No. setting (No group setting) 0 (fixed)

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (Station No.1)*1 1

LED indication select switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection LED indication select L (F.L.)

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online) 0 (fixed)

3 2

05

9

4 87

6

1GROUP.NO.

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

STATION.NO. X10

X1

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 108

MODE 0 : ONLINE(A.R) 2 : OFFLINE

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 573

57

Condition setting switches

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated by default parameters.

For details, refer to the following manual. For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual

When the switch setting (other than the LED indication select switch) is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 Network type

(PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed)

SW2 Station type (Control station (MNG))

ON (fixed)

SW3 Parameter for using*1

(common parameter (PRM)) OFF (fixed)

SW4 No. of stations*1 OFF (fixed)

SW5

SW6 B/W Total BW points*1

OFF (fixed)

SW7

SW8 Not used OFF (fixed)

OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET/10 (Control station) (fixed)

Start I/O No. 0000H

Network No.*1 1

Total stations 2

Network range assignment Page 576 Network range assignment

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Page 577 Routing parameter setting

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 575

57

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200

BW setting*1 Send range for each station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for each station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

XY setting*1 No setting

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary setting (Use default value)

Station inherent parameters

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 64

Item Set value (Use default) Retry 3times

Timeout Time 3sec

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 577

57

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1

Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed)

Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2

Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Connection to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations.

MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series), refer to the following manual. Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual

System configuration

*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is set at "0".

Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch.

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 1 Mode : Online Network type : MNET/10 (Control station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 2 Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0000H to LW00FFH

MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 2 Mode : Online Network No. : 1 Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH LW0100H to LW01FFH

(6)

(4) (1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21

A1SJ71LP21

3 2

05 9

4

876 1

3 2

05 9

4

876 1

3 2

05 9

4

876 1

3 2 05

9 4

876 1

3 2

05 9

4

876 1

3 2

05 9

4

876 1

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 18 0F 7

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF PC

N.ST PRM

ON REM. MNG

D.PRM ST,SIZE

8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE

2,4,6,8k

CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD

PW PC

REM. SWE.

M/S.E. PRM E.

R.E. CPU R/W

RUN MNG

S.MNG DUAL

D.LINK T.PAS.

F.E.

E

R R

O R

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

NETWORK NO.

X100

X10

X1

OFF ON

IN

FRONT SIDE

OUT

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR.NO.

ST.NO. X10

X1

MODE

MODE

(6)

(4) (1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11

A1SJ71BR11

3 2

05

87

3 2

05

87

3 2

05

87

3 2

05

87

3 2

05

87

3 2

05

87

D

5

C

4

B

3

9 18 0F

7

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF PC

N.ST PRM

ON REM. MNG

D.PRM ST,SIZE

8,16,32,64 LB/LW SIZE

2,4,6,8k

CRC OVER AB. IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD

PW PC

REM. SWE.

M/S.E. PRM E.

CPU R/W

RUN MNG

S.MNG

D.LINK T.PAS.

L R

DISPLAY

NETWORK NO.

X100

X10

X1

OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GR.NO.

ST.NO. X10

X1

MODE

MODE 0 : ONLINE(A,R) 2 : OFFLINE

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

AJ71LP21

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

GROUP NO.

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE

OFF PC REMOTE

N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/ LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K)

OFFON ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AJ71LP21 RUN - PC -

REMOTE - DUAL - SW.E - M/S.E - PRM.E -

CRC - OVER -

AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP -

SD - RD -

- POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - EX.POWER - CPUR/W - CRC - OVER - AB.IF - TIME - DATA - UNDER - LOOP - SD - RD

F.LOOP R.LOOP

10 1

100

E R R O

R

E R R O R

OUT

IN

FRONT SIDE

R

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

AJ71BR11

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

GROUP NO.

STATION NO. X10

X1

MODE 0: ONLINE(A.R) 2: OFFLINE

OFF PC REMOTE

N.ST MNG PRM D.PRM STATION SIZE (8.16.32.64) LB/LW SIZE (2.4.6.8K)

OFFON ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AJ71BR11

RUN - PC -

REMOTE -

SW.E - M/S.E - PRM.E -

CRC - OVER -

AB.IF - TIME - DATA -

UNDER -

SD - RD -

- POWER - MNG - S.MNG - D.LINK - T.PASS - - CPUR/W

10 1

100

E R R O R

0 : ONLINE(A,R) 2 : OFFLINE

E

R R

O R

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 579

58

Network number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *2 Do not specify a number between 240 and 255.

Group number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.

LED indication select switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Network number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network No. setting (Network No.1)*1*2 1

Group number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Group No. setting (No group setting) 0 (fixed)

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (Station No.1)*1 1

LED indication select switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection LED indication select L (F.L.)

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

NETWORK NO. X100

X10

X1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1GROUP.NO.

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

STATION.NO. X10

X1

L R

DISPLAY

(F.L) (R.L.)

0 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Condition setting switches

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated by default parameters.

For details, refer to the following manual. Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual

When the switch setting (other than the LED indication select switch) is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online) 0 (fixed)

Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection SW1 Network type

(PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF (fixed)

SW2 Station type (Control station (MNG))

ON (fixed)

SW3 Parameter for using*1

(common parameter (PRM)) OFF (fixed)

SW4 No. of stations*1 OFF (fixed)

SW5

SW6 Total B/W points*1 OFF (fixed)

SW7

SW8 Not used OFF (fixed)

F

7

E

6

D

5

C

4

B

3

A

2

9 108

MODE 0:ONLINE(A.R) 2:OFFLINE

OFF ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 581

58

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET/10 (Control station) (fixed)

Start I/O No. 0000H

Network No.*1 1

Total stations 2

Network range assignment Page 583 Network range assignment

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Page 584 Routing parameter setting

2 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200

LB/LW setting*1

Send range for each station (LB) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

Send range for each station (LW) Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LX/LY setting*1 No setting

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary setting (Use default value)

Station inherent parameters

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 583

58

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 552 Routing parameter setting

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 1 to 64

Item Set value (Use default) Retry 3times

Timeout Time 3sec

4 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10

8

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit

Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit, refer to the following. Page 546 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1

Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed)

Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2

Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.5 PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/10 585

58

8.6 Precautions

Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network), MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) in the MNET/10 mode, or MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network)

Network type setting Specify all the network modules on the same network as the same network type. (MELSECNET/H Mode and MELSECNET/H Extended Mode cannot be mixed.) When connecting to MELSECNET/H in the QCPU redundant system, [MELSECNET/H Extended Mode] cannot be

specified as the network type.

Monitoring range Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be monitored in GOT. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

GOT startup in the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection In the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection, the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup.

When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

MELSECNET/H network module version For version restrictions of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to QCPU (Q mode) Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and QCPU (Q mode).

6 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.6 Precautions

8

Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, or CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) are applicable to the MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) only. For connecting the GOT to the MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network), set the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) to the MELSECNET/10 mode.

Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connecting one PLC with multiple GOTs When multiple GOTs access one PLC simultaneously, writing (transient/cyclic) and reading (transient) data to/from the GOTs may slow down. The following countermeasures can prevent this slowdown.

Improving the PLC's response speed Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed. Note that caution is required as the scan time will increase.

Designing screens using cyclic devices Create screens using cyclic devices instead of transient devices.

8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.6 Precautions 587

58

Splitting connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems Add a master/local module to the PLC and split the connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems. Improve the current system configuration. (Example of current system configuration) In the following system configuration, the GOTs access one module.

(Improvement measure) Adding a module to the PLC Add a module to the PLC to disperse access destinations for the GOTs.

Splitting the network Split the network to disperse accesses from the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

GOT access is concentrated at one unit

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access

Access to station No. 2Access to station No. 1

station No. 2

station No. 1

GOT GOT GOT

GOT GOT GOT

Split the network to disperse the GOT access

8 8 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 8.6 Precautions

9

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 589 Connectable Model List Page 596 System Configuration Page 598 GOT Side Settings Page 606 PLC Side Settings Page 612 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware Page 616 Precautions

BootOS version of the GOT Install version AN or later of BootOS on the GOT so that the GOT supports the CC-Link IE TSN connection. For the procedure to check the BootOS version and upgrade the version, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

9.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to MELSEC iQ-R Series R00CPU *1 CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System

ConfigurationR01CPU *1

R02CPU *1

R04CPU *2

R08CPU *2

R16CPU *2

R32CPU *2

R120CPU *2

R08PCPU - - -

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU *2 CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System ConfigurationR08ENCPU *2

R16ENCPU *2

R32ENCPU *2

R120ENCPU *2

R08PSFCPU - - -

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU *3 CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System ConfigurationR16SFCPU *3

R32SFCPU *3

R120SFCPU *3

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List 589

59

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU - - -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System Configuration

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System Configuration

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 - - -

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 - - -

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5U *4 CC-Link IE TSN Page 596 System ConfigurationFX5UC *4

FX5UJ - - -

FX5S

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

0 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List

9

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00JCPU - - -

Q00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU

Q06HCPU

Q12HCPU

Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU(Main base)

Q25PRHCPU(Main base)

Q12PRHCPU(Extension base)

- - -

Q25PRHCPU(Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

- - -

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU

Q04UDEHCPU

Q06UDEHCPU

Q10UDEHCPU

Q13UDEHCPU

Q20UDEHCPU

Q26UDEHCPU

Q50UDEHCPU

Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU - - -

Q04UDVCPU

Q06UDVCPU

Q13UDVCPU

Q26UDVCPU

Q04UDPVCPU

Q06UDPVCPU

Q13UDPVCPU

Q26UDPVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

- - -

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List 591

59

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

- - -

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

- - -

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU

- - -

A2NCPUP21 - - -

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU - - -

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SHCPU

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

2 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List

9

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU(Q Series) Q172CPU - - -

Q173CPU

Q172CPUN

Q173CPUN

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU - - -

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU

Q170MSCPU

Q170MSCPU-S1

Motion CPU (A Series) A273UCPU - - -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List 593

59

*1 Use the following firmware version. When configuring a line topology or star topology using RJ71GN11-T2: 11 or later When configuring a ring topology using RJ71GN11-T2: 18 or later When using RJ71GN11-EIP: 29 or later

*2 Use the following firmware version. When configuring a line topology or star topology using RJ71GN11-T2: 43 or later When configuring a ring topology using RJ71GN11-T2: 50 or later When using RJ71GN11-EIP: 62 or later

*3 Use firmware version 20 or later. *4 Use firmware version 1.250 or later.

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

- - -

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

4 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List

9

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module

*1 For the ring connection, use firmware version 10 or later. *2 The ring connection is not supported.

Motion module

CPU series CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module MELSEC iQ-R Series RJ71GN11-T2 *1

RJ71GN11-EIP*2

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-CCLGN-MS *2

CPU series Motion module MELSEC iQ-R Series RD78G4

RD78G8 RD78G16 RD78G32 RD78G64 RD78GHV RD78GHW

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.1 Connectable Model List 595

59

9.2 System Configuration

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module

Communication type

Cable model *1*2

Max distance *3

Option device *4 Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) *7

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ71GN11-T2 *5 CC-Link IE TSN 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5e or higher 100BASE-TX

Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5 or higher

12100m GT25-J71GF13-T2 *5*6

Up to 120 GOTs

MELSEC iQ-R Series (RnCPU, RnENCPU)

RJ71GN11-EIP*5 CC-Link IE TSN 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5e or higher 100BASE-TX

Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5 or higher

12100m GT25-J71GF13-T2 *5*6

Up to 120 GOTs

MELSEC iQ-R Series RD78G4*5

RD78G8*5

RD78G16*5

RD78G32*5

RD78G64*5

RD78GHV*5

RD78GHW*5

CC-Link IE TSN 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5e or higher 100BASE-TX

Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5 or higher

12100m GT25-J71GF13-T2 *5*6

Up to 120 GOTs

CC-Link IE TSN

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped

module or Motion module

PLC CPU

6 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.2 System Configuration

9

*1 When using a hub, use a TSN Switch or General-purpose Switch according to the system configuration. For usable TSN Switches and General-purpose Switches, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

*2 Use the straight cable. *3 The overall distance and station-to-station distance vary according to the connection method (line, star, or ring) and system

configuration. For details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Depending on the combination of the firmware version of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module on the master station

and the firmware version of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2), the GOT cannot access the network. For the combinations of firmware versions, refer to the following. Page 617 Firmware versions of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module on the master station and CC-Link IE TSN communication unit

*6 The firmware version must be 05 or later when monitoring a network where a controller compatible with CC-Link IE TSN protocol version 2.0 exists. For how to check or update the firmware version of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit, refer to the following. Page 612 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware

*7 For C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series), use firmware version 15 or later.

For the system configuration of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN) For the system configuration of the Motion module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-CCLGN-MS CC-Link IE TSN 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5e or higher 100BASE-TX

Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5 or higher

12100m GT25-J71GF13-T2 *5 Up to 60 GOTs

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module

Communication type

Cable model *1*2

Max distance *3

Option device *4 Model

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.2 System Configuration 597

59

9.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Extend I/F [Driver]: [CC-Link IE TSN] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 599 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

8 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings

9

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network Type. CC-Link IE TSN

Network No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

IP Address *1 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.24)

0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 *2

Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0)

0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254

Group No. - 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online) For details on the unit communication test mode, refer to the following. Page 601 Unit Communication test

Online, Offline, Module Communication Test

Communication Speed Set the communication speed of the GOT. (Default: 1Gbps)

1Gbps, 100Mbps *3

Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 25ms)

1 to 1000ms

Input for Error Station Set the hold/clear of input from the station where the data link is faulty due to some reason such as turning the power OFF. (Default: Clear)

Clear, Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed of the CC-Link IE TSN network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High(Normal))

High(Normal), Middle, Low

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 602 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings 599

60

*1 If any of the following settings is configured in the IP address, a communication timeout error occurs. The third octet and fourth octet are all 1 (*.*.255.255) or all 0 (*.*.0.0). The host part is all 1 (*.*.*.255) or all 0 (*.*.*.0). Some reserved addresses determined for special applications For the details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Network) MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

*2 When the subnet mask field is filled with 0, the operation is the same as when the field is left blank. *3 When setting to 100Mbps, the following conditions must be satisfied.

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25J71GN13-T2): Firmware version 02 or later CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2): Firmware version 04 or later

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Setting the refresh interval For [Refresh Interval(ms)] in [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, set 5 ms or more per 1K words for the total size of the device set in [Network Configuration Settings] in GX Works3. Setting less than 5 ms may affect the processing of the GOT such as a decrease of the monitoring speed. The following shows setting examples of the total device size and refresh interval.

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 603 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 604 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

Item Description Range

Total device size Refresh Interval

eromrosm5sdrowK1

eromrosm01sdrowK2

eromrosm51sdrowK3

eromrosm52sdrowK5

eromrosm081sdrowK63

0 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings

9

Unit Communication test In the unit communication test, connect port 1 and port 2 of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit mounted on the GOT with a network cable, and check if the unit operates properly with the GOT. The following shows the test procedure and how to check the test result.

1. Perform one of the following operations to set the GOT to the unit communication test mode. Write the project data for which [Mode Setting] in [Detail Setting] is set to [Stand-alone test mode] to the GOT. Set [Mode setting] in [Detail setting] to [Module Communication Test] in the GOT utility.

2. A unit communication test will start at a GOT startup.

3. After the test is complete, check the result with the ERR LED on the communication unit and GOT internal devices (CC- Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Status (GS1114) or CC-Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Error (GS1115)).

For details on the GOT internal devices (CC-Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Status (GS1114) and CC-Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Error (GS1115)), refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

4. If no error is detected, change [Module Communication Test] in [Mode setting] of [Detail setting]. Since the communication with the controller is not performed when [Mode setting] is set to [Module Communication Test], the communication timeout error occurs when the device of controller is monitored.

5. If any error is detected, replace the communication unit.

Check Test result ERR LED on the communication unit OFF: Normal

ON: Error

GOT internal device

CC-Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Status (GS1114)

Notifies the execution status of a communication test of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit. b0: Turns on when a communication test is executed. b1: Is on while a communication test is being executed. b2: Turns on when a communication test is complete. b3 to b15: Use prohibited

CC-Link IE TSN Module Communication Test Error (GS1115)

Notifies that an error has occurred during a communication test of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit. b0: Turns on if there is a problem with the port 1 side of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit. b1: Turns on if there is a problem with the connection interface (port 1) or the Ethernet cable terminal

connected to port 1. b2: Turns on if there is a problem with the port 1 side Ethernet cable of the CC-Link IE TSN communication

unit. b3 to b7: Use prohibited b8: Turns on if there is a problem with the port 2 side of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit. b9: Turns on if there is a problem with the connection interface (port 2) or the Ethernet cable terminal

connected to port 2. b10: Turns on if there is a problem with the port 2 side Ethernet cable of the CC-Link IE TSN communication

unit. b11 to b15: Use prohibited

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings 601

60

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

2 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings

9

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings 603

60

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

4 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings

9

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 606 PLC Side Settings Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.3 GOT Side Settings 605

60

9.4 PLC Side Settings This section describes the settings of the GOT, CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module, and Motion module in the following system configuration.

For details on the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN) For details on the Motion module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup)

System configuration The following shows a system configuration example for connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11- T2)

*1 The CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is set to "0".

CC-Link IE TSN

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type Network No. PLC No. (Station) IP address

: Master Station : 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.253

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type Network No. PLC No. (GOT Station) IP address Mode Setting

: CC-Link IE TSN : 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.24 : Online

6 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings

9

[Parameter] in GX Works3 The following shows a parameter setting example for connecting to the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2).

For connection with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2) in a ring topology, use GX Works3 version 1.065T or later.

For connection with the CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module (RJ71GN11-EIP), use GX Works3 version 1.082L or later.

For connection with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (FX5-CCLGN-MS), use GX Works3 version 1.085P or later.

CPU parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Link Direct Device Setting Extended Mode (iQ-R Series Mode)

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings 607

60

Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *2 Setting is required for connection to MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. When the GOT monitors a cyclic device of other stations Set [Communication Mode] of the master station to [Multicast].

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Master Station

Network No. *1 1

Setting Method of Basic/Application Settings Parameter Editor

Station No./IP Address Setting Method Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

IP Address 192.168.3.253 (Use default value)

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

Channel No. *2 Parameter Editor

Network Configuration Settings Page 609 Network Configuration Settings

Refresh Setting Use default value

Network Topology Line/Star

Basic Period Setting

Setting in Units of 1s Not set

Communication Period Interval Setting (Do not Set it in Units of 1s)

1000.00s

Cyclic Transmission Time (CC IE TSN) 500.00s

Multiple Period Setting

Normal-Speed 4

Low-Speed 16

Authentication Class Setting Authentication Class B only

Disconnection Detection Setting 4times

8 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings

9

Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station No. 1

Station type Local Station

RX Setting Points 32

RY Setting Points 32

RWr Setting Points 16

RWw Setting Points 16

IP Address 192.168.3.24

Reserved/Error Invalid Station No Setting

Network Synchronous Communication Asynchronous

Communication Period Setting Basic Period

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings 609

61

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 605 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

0 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings

9

[Controller Setting] in GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 598 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network Type CC-Link IE TSN

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 1: Station No.1

IP Address 192.168.3.24

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Communication Speed 1Gbps (Use default value)

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.4 PLC Side Settings 611

61

9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware Firmware versions and supported functions Available functions differ depending on the firmware version of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.

How to check the firmware version Check the firmware version of the communication unit by one of the following methods. Network status display Text display

Network status display Display the [CC-Link IE TSN Network status display] screen from the network status display of the GOT and check [F/W Version]. For details on the network status display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Text display Check the firmware version in the text display on the GOT. Set the text display as follows. Device: SW003D Display digits: 2 For details on the text display, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Firmware version Supported function 01 Cyclic transmission (line topology, star topology)

02 Multicast mode Communication speed 100 Mbps Time setting function Firmware update function

03 Ring topology

05 CC-Link IE TSN protocol version 2.0

2 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware

9

Firmware update Use the firmware update tool installed to a personal computer to update the firmware of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit through a network. The following shows how to execute firmware update.

CC-Link IE TSN firmware update tool For details of the firmware update tool, such as the operating environment, installation procedure, and operating procedure, refer to the following. CC-Link IE TSN Firmware Update Tool Reference Manual CC-Link IE TSN communication unit For details on the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit, refer to the following. CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit User's Manual

Connection method Use one of the following methods to connect the personal computer on which the firmware update tool is to run and the CC- Link IE TSN communication unit on the GOT.

Direct connection

Connection via a hub

For the connection via a hub, use a TSN Switch. For details on the TSN Switch, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

CC-Link IE TSN firmware update tool

GOT

Ethernet cable

Firmware update

TSN Switch

CC-Link IE TSN firmware update tool

Firmware update

Ethernet cable

GOT

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware 613

61

Firmware update procedure Update the firmware as follows.

1. Stop communication of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit in which the firmware is updated. Perform one of the following operations to stop communication. Disconnect the master station from the network. Disconnect the host station from the network.

2. Configure the settings required for the firmware update tool. Network configuration settings

Application settings

For the settings other than the above, refer to the following. CC-Link IE TSN Firmware Update Tool Reference Manual

3. Update the firmware of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.

4. After the update, the GOT on which the unit is mounted is restarted. After the restart, the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit operates with the updated firmware.

Firmware file For the firmware file used for update, contact your local sales office.

Item Setting Module Name GT25-J71GN13-T2

IP Address IP address of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit

FTP Username GT25-J71GN13

FTP Password GT25-J71GN13

Item Setting FTP Mode Active Mode

Firmware Update Timeout(s) 900sec

4 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware

9

Precautions for firmware update The following shows the precautions for executing firmware update.

When firmware update is not performed Make sure to stop communication of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit, and then execute firmware update. In the following cases, firmware update of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit is not performed.

While CC-Link IE TSN Control (GS620.b0) is on. Turn off this bit. For details on the CC-Link IE TSN Control (GS620.b0), refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

While the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit is communicating Disconnect the master station or host station from the network to stop communication of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.

While the GOT is being operated with GT Designer3 Do not perform operations such as writing the package data and executing the GOT diagnostics with GT Designer3.

Performing an operation that makes the GOT offline Do not perform any operation that makes the GOT offline in the utility.

Power-off during firmware update Do not turn off the GOT during firmware update. Doing so may cause the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit to become unusable.

Hardware version of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit Firmware update may not be available depending on the combination of the hardware and firmware versions of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit. If firmware update cannot be performed, check the error code of the firmware update tool.

Firmware downgrade If the version of the firmware file used for the update tool is earlier than the firmware version of the target CC-Link IE TSN communication unit, a warning message prompting for downgrading is displayed. Select a new firmware file to execute firmware update. Otherwise, execute downgrading.

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.5 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware 615

61

9.6 Precautions

Connection status check after the GOT startup The connection with the network cannot be established until the connection check with the master station is completed after the GOT startup. To check the status of connection with the master station, use the CC-Link IE TSN Connection Status (GS1297) of the GOT internal device. For details on the CC-Link IE TSN Connection Status (GS1297), refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

IP address duplication When a local station with the CC-Link IE TSN compatible switching hub connected (linked-up) is added, IP address duplication is not detected at the station to be added. If IP address duplication (error code 1802H) is detected, disconnect the local station from the network. Otherwise, a transient transmission may be performed to an unintended station because multiple stations with the same IP address exist on the network.

Multiple CPU configuration When accessing a CPU in a multiple CPU configuration via a CC-Link IE TSN network, ensure that the firmware version of the CPU is as shown below.

Ethernet connection with a CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module The CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2) does not support the Ethernet connection. For the Ethernet connection, use an Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100) or Ethernet interface built in the GOT. For details on the Ethernet connection, refer to the following. Page 239 Connection to CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Page 241 Connection to Motion module

GT Designer3 version and CC-Link IE TSN communication unit firmware version The combination of the GT Designer3 version and CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2) firmware version is restricted. The following shows the combinations of the GT Designer3 version and CC-Link IE TSN communication unit firmware version. : Available, : Not available

Update the firmware of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2) with firmware version 01 so that the GT Designer3 version 1.225K or later supports the unit. For firmware update of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2), refer to the following. Page 612 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware

CPU Firmware version R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU 11 or later

R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU

43 or later

GT Designer3 version CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2)

01 02 or later Version1.217B to Version1. 220E

Version1.225K or later

6 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.6 Precautions

9

Firmware versions of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module on the master station and CC-Link IE TSN communication unit Depending on the combination of firmware versions of each module and the unit, the GOT cannot access the network. The following shows the module and unit firmware version combinations. : Accessible, : Inaccessible

Update the firmware of the module or unit so that the GOT can access the network. For firmware update of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module (RJ71GN11-T2, RJ71GN11-EIP) or Motion module (RD78G(H)), refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Application) For firmware update of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2), refer to the following. Page 612 CC-Link IE TSN Communication Unit Firmware

When monitoring master and local stations on networks by transient transmission For monitoring of master and local stations on the same network as the GOT by transient transmission, target stations for monitoring depend on [Communication Mode] of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module.

For the settings of the CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application) MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN Plus Master/Local Module User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Module User's Manual (Network) MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN) To monitor master and local stations on other networks by transient transmission, relay data through the master station or local station that can be monitored on the same network as the GOT.

Connecting one PLC with multiple GOTs When multiple GOTs access one PLC simultaneously, writing (transient/cyclic) and reading (transient) data to/from the GOTs may slow down. The following countermeasures can prevent this slowdown.

Improving the PLC's response speed Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed. Note that caution is required as the scan time will increase.

Designing screens using cyclic devices Create screens using cyclic devices instead of transient devices.

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module or Motion module on the master station

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2)

01 02 or later RJ71GN11-T2 03 or earlier

04 or later

RJ71GN11-EIP From the first version

RD78G(H) 19 or earlier

20 or later

[Communication Mode] Availability of monitoring [Unicast] Master station only

[Multicast] Master station

Local station that satisfies the following conditions Being set as a local station in the network configuration setting Not being a reserved or error invalid station

9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.6 Precautions 617

61

Splitting connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems Add a master/local module to the PLC and split the connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems. Improve the current system configuration. (Example of current system configuration) In the following system configuration, the GOTs access one module.

(Improvement measure) Adding a module to the PLC Add a module to the PLC to disperse access destinations for the GOTs.

Splitting the network Split the network to disperse accesses from the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

GOT access is concentrated at one unit

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access

Access to station No. 2Access to station No. 1

station No. 2

station No. 1

GOT GOT GOT

GOT GOT GOT

Split the network to disperse the GOT access

8 9 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 9.6 Precautions

10

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

Page 619 Connectable Model List Page 626 System Configuration Page 627 GOT side settings Page 634 PLC Side Setting Page 655 Precautions

10.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU*1

R16PCPU*1

R32PCPU*1

R120PCPU*1

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU *2

R16PSFCPU *2

R32PSFCPU *2

R120PSFCPU *2

R08SFCPU*3

R16SFCPU*3

R32SFCPU*3

R120SFCPU*3

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

MELSECWinCP U (MELSEC iQ- R Series)

R102WCPU-W CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List 619

62

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 - - -

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U - - -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

Q00CPU*4

Q01CPU*4

Q02CPU*4

Q02HCPU*4

Q06HCPU*4

Q12HCPU*4

Q25HCPU*4

Q02PHCPU

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU

Q04UDEHCPU

Q06UDEHCPU

Q10UDEHCPU

Q13UDEHCPU

Q20UDEHCPU

Q26UDEHCPU

Q50UDEHCPU

Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

0 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List

10

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*5

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

- - -

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

- - -

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21

- - -

A2NCPUP21 - -

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List 621

62

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU - - -

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU - - -

Q173CPU

Q172CPUN

Q173CPUN

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*6

Q170MSCPU*7

Q170MSCPU-S1*7

MR-MQ100 - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

2 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List

10

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU - - -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Page 626 System Configuration

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List 623

62

*1 Mount a redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPCPU on the base unit when building a redundant system. *2 Mount the SIL2 function module R6PSFM and redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *5 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *6 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *7 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used.

4 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List

10

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or later. *2 Use firmware version 12 or higher when building a redundant system.

CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ71GP21-SX*2

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) MELSEC-QS Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71GP21-SX*1

QJ71GP21S-SX*1

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List 625

62

10.2 System Configuration Connection to optical loop system

*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or later. For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Controller Network module side, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*4 When Universal model QCPUs is a control station, up to 119 GOTs can be connected. When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station, the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units (at most). Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station.

*5 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, only MELSEC-Q series Universal model QCPU can be used. *6 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a module with the serial No. 02910908******* or later. *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name*5 CC-Link IE controller network communication unit*1

Communication type

Cable model

Max. distance

Option device*7 Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ- R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R (R16RTCPU)

RJ71GP21-SX CC-Link IE Optical fiber cable *2

*3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 119 GOTs*4

MELSEC-Q Motion CPU (Q Series) C Controller module (Q Series) MELSEC-QS CNC C70 CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71GP21-SX QJ71GP21S-SX

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Communication driver

CC-Link IE controller network moduleQCPU

RCPU GOT

Connection cable

6 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.2 System Configuration

10

10.3 GOT side settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [CC-Link IE Controller Network] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 628 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings 627

62

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Network Type*4 Set the network Type.

(Default: CC IE Control) CC IE Control CC IE Control extended mode

Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

Group No. - 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (Auto Reconnect))

Online (auto. reconnection) Offline Test station*1

Self-loopback test*1

Internal self-loopback test*1

Line test*1

H/W test*1

Transmission Speed - 1 Gbps (fixed)

Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1ms) Valid when [Block data assurance per station is available.] is checked by the control station side network parameters of the CC-Link IE Controller Network.

1 to 1000ms

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Monitor Speed*5 Set the monitor speed for the CC-Link IE controller network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High)

High(Normal)*2/Middle/Low*3

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 630 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 631 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 632 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

8 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings

10

*1 For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High(Normal)]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)

*3 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Middle] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced.

*4 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, set to [CC IE Control extended mode]. The extended mode can be used in GT Designer3 version 1.22Y or later.

*5 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. Page 634 PLC Side Setting Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side. If the net work types of the CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings 629

63

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

0 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings

10

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings 631

63

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a motion CPU or simple motion module, a servo axis No. can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

2 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings

10

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 634 PLC Side Setting Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted.However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. RCPU, Universal model QCPU 0 to 120

QCPU other than Universal model QCPU*1 0 to 64

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.3 GOT side settings 633

63

10.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration.

CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Checking Data-Link status Refer to the followings. Page 92 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network type :CC IE Control (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment :LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

CC-Link IE Controller Network module

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Control Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Mode Setting :Online (auto. reconnection) Network range assignment :LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network type :CC IE Control extended mode (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment :LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

CC-Link IE Controller Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Control extended mode Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Mode Setting :Online (auto. reconnection) Network range assignment :LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

4 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Control station (fixed)

Network No.*1 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

LB/LW setting (1)*1 LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LB/LW setting (2)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (1)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (2)*1 No setting

Reserved station (Use default value)

Pairing

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 635

63

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)

Transmission Speed 1Gbps (fixed)

Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

6 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Module parameter settings of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type CC IE Control (Control station)

Network No.*1 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

B/LW setting (1)*1

LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LB/LW setting (2)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (1)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (2)*1 No setting

Reserved station (Use default value)

Pairing

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 637

63

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control extended mode]. For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

Item Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Online (auto. reconnection)

Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

8 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.

System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network type :CC IE Control (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment :LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

CC-Link IE Controller Network module

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Control Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Mode Setting :Online (auto. reconnection) Network range assignment :LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network type :CC IE Control extended mode (Control station) Network No. :1 Total stations :2 Network range assignment :LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

CC-Link IE Controller Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Control extended mode Network No. :1 Station No. :2 Mode Setting :Online (auto. reconnection) Network range assignment :LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 639

64

Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Control station (fixed)

Network No.*1 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Channel No. (Use default value)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

LB/LW setting (1)*1 LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LB/LW setting (2)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (1)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (2)*1 No setting

Reserved station (Use default value)

Pairing

0 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)

Transmission Speed 1Gbps (fixed)

Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 641

64

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Module parameter settings of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type CC IE Control (Control station)

Network No.*1 1

Station number setting 1

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

B/LW setting (1)*1

LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LB/LW setting (2)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (1)*1 No setting

LX/LY setting (2)*1 No setting

Reserved station (Use default value)

Pairing

2 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control extended mode]. For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

Item Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Online (auto. reconnection)

Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 643

64

Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series

System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set to "70".

System configuration2 (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode)

*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set at [0].

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 1 Mode : Online Network type : CC IE Control (Control station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 2 Network range assignment :

CC-Link IE Controller Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

Network type : CC IE Control Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment :

Monitor Speed : High

LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 1 Mode : Online Network type : CC IE Control extended mode (Control station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 2 Network range assignment :

CC-Link IE Controller Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH

Network type : CC IE Control extended mode Network No. : 1 Station No. : 2 Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) Network range assignment :

Monitor Speed : High

LB0100H to LB01FFH LW00100H to LW001FFH

4 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-Q, QS series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set it according to the system configuration. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network type CC IE Control (Control station) (fixed)

Starting I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Total stations 2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Station No. 1

Mode*3 Online

Network range assignment Network range assignment

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interrupt settings

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Routing parameter setting

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 645

64

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Monitoring time 2000

LB/LW setting(1)*1 LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LX/LY setting*1 No setting

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary setting (Use default value)

6 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 647

64

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE Control utility.

Connection settings between personal computer and C controller module (Q Series)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

8 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)

Routing parameter Routing parameter setting

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. 151

Operation settings

Network type CC IE Control (Control station)

Mode*1 Online

Network No.*2 1

Group No. 0

Station No. 1

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Network range assignment Network range assignment

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 649

65

Network range assignment

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Total stations 2

LB/LW settings (1) LB Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Station No.2 Start 0100H

End 01FFH

LW Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Station No.2 Start 00100H

End 001FFH

LX/LY settings*1 No setting

Monitoring time (Use default value)

Specify I/O master station*1 No setting

Specify reserved station No setting

Supplementary settings (Use default value)

0 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 633 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 651

65

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)

Transmission Speed 1 Gbps (fixed)

Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High(Normal) (Use default value)

2 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

Parameter settings (Connection to Universal model QCPU) of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) [Network parameter] of GX Works2 Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network Type CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station) (fixed)

Start I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Total Stations 2

Group No. 0 (Fixed)

Station No. 1

Mode*3 Online

Network Range Assignment Same as the following setting Page 645 [Network parameter] of GX Developer

Refresh Parameters (Use default value)

Interrupt Setting

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Same as the following setting Page 645 [Network parameter] of GX Developer

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting 653

65

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control extended mode]. For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 627 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Network type of the PLC side Only GX Works2 can set [CC IE Control extended mode (control station)] or [CC IE Control extended mode (ordinary station)]. The CPU which is compatible with the extended mode is Universal model QCPU only.

Item Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 2: Station No.2

Group No. 0 (Fixed)

Mode Online (auto. reconnection)

Refresh Interval High (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 1ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High(Normal) (Use default value)

4 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.4 PLC Side Setting

10

10.5 Precautions

GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup.

When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. MELSEC iQ-R series, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

CC-Link IE Controller Network module version For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.5 Precautions 655

65

Connection to RnSFCPU The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a system alarm occurs. To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connecting one PLC with multiple GOTs When multiple GOTs access one PLC simultaneously, writing (transient/cyclic) and reading (transient) data to/from the GOTs may slow down. The following countermeasures can prevent this slowdown.

Improving the PLC's response speed Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed. Note that caution is required as the scan time will increase.

Designing screens using cyclic devices Create screens using cyclic devices instead of transient devices.

Splitting connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems Add a master/local module to the PLC and split the connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems. Improve the current system configuration. (Example of current system configuration) In the following system configuration, the GOTs access one module.

(Improvement measure) Adding a module to the PLC Add a module to the PLC to disperse access destinations for the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

GOT access is concentrated at one unit

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access

Access to station No. 2Access to station No. 1

station No. 2

station No. 1

6 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.5 Precautions

10

Splitting the network Split the network to disperse accesses from the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT

GOT GOT GOT

Split the network to disperse the GOT access

10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.5 Precautions 657

65

MEMO

8 10 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.5 Precautions

11

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 Connectable Model List Page 666 System Configuration Page 668 GOT side settings Page 676 PLC Side Setting Page 686 Precautions

11.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series R00CPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU*1

R16PCPU*1

R32PCPU*1

R120PCPU*1

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU *2

R16PSFCPU *2

R32PSFCPU *2

R120PSFCPU *2

R08SFCPU*3

R16SFCPU*3

R32SFCPU*3

R120SFCPU*3

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W - - -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 659

66

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5U CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S - - -

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU - - -

Q00CPU*4

Q01CPU*4

Q02CPU*4

Q02HCPU*4

Q06HCPU*4

Q12HCPU*4

Q25HCPU*4

Q02PHCPU

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU(Main base)

Q25PRHCPU(Main base)

Q12PRHCPU(Extension base)

- - -

Q25PRHCPU(Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU

Q04UDEHCPU

Q06UDEHCPU

Q10UDEHCPU

Q13UDEHCPU

Q20UDEHCPU

Q26UDEHCPU

Q50UDEHCPU

Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*4

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

0 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List

11

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*5 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

MELSEC-L L02CPU*6

L06CPU*6

L26CPU*6

L26CPU-BT*6

L02CPU-P*6

L06CPU-P*6

L26CPU-P*6

L26CPU-PBT*6

L02SCPU*6

L02SCPU-P*6

CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

- - -

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU

- - -

A2NCPUP21 - - -

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 661

66

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU - - -

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU - - -

Q173CPU

Q172CPUN

Q173CPUN

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

- -

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*7

*9

Page 666 System Configuration

Q170MSCPU*8

Q170MSCPU-S1*8

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

2 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List

11

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU - - -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK

Page 666 System Configuration

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 663

66

*1 Mount a redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPCPU on the base unit when building a redundant system. *2 Mount the SIL2 function module R6PSFM and redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *5 Use a module with the upper five digits later than "13042". Use GX Developer of Version 8.98C or later. *6 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 13012. *7 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *8 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used. *9 For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later than 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored.

4 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List

11

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

*1 Use firmware version 12 or higher when building a redundant system.

CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ71GF11-T2*1

RJ71EN71*1

RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16, RD77GF32

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-CCLIEF

MELSEC-Q(Universal model) C Controller module (Q Series) CNC C70 CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71GF11-T2, QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16

MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2

MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 665

66

11.2 System Configuration Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

Communication type

Cable model*2 Max distance *1

option device*5 Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 RD77GF4*4

RD77GF8*4

RD77GF16*4

RD77GF32*4

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE- T standard: Category 5e or higher, (double- shielded, STP) straight cable.

12100m GT15-J71GF13-T2 *6*7

120 GOTs

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-CCLIEF

R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU

-

MELSEC-Q (Universal model) Q170MCPU C Controller module (Q Series) CNC C70 CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ71GF11-T2 QD77GF4*3

QD77GF8*3

QD77GF16*3

MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2

MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

-

Ethernet adapter module

-

CC-Link IE Field Network

Communication driver

PLC CPU CC-Link IE Field Network unit GOT

Connection cable

6 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.2 System Configuration

11

*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring), the system configuration, etc. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

*2 Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions. Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function Supporting the auto-negotiation function Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.) Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi Electric products)

For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual *3 When connecting to the QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16, refer to the following manual.

MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual *4 When connecting to the RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16 and RD77GF32, refer to the following manual.

RD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 When connecting to the RCPU redundant system, use the product with hardware version C or later.

For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*7 When a submaster station is in the network configuration, use the software version C or later. The software version is the 10th digit of the serial number described on the rating plate of the unit.

Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.2 System Configuration 667

66

11.3 GOT side settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [CC-Link IE Controller Network] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 669 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

8 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings

11

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network Type. CC IE Field

Network No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

Group No. - 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection)) For details on the H/W test and self-loopback test, refer to the following. Page 671 H/W test Page 671 Self-loopback test

Online Offline H/W test Self-loopback test

Tramsmission Speed - 1 Gbps (fixed)

Reflesh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 25ms)

1 to 1000ms

Input for Error Station Set the hold/clear of input from the station where the data link is faulty due to some reason such as turning the power OFF. (Default: Clear)

Clear/Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Monitor Speed *3 Set the monitor speed for the CC-Link IE field network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High(Normal))

High(Normal) *1/ Middle/Low *2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 672 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 673 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 674 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 669

67

*1 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the monitor screen. However, the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU. If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time, do not set [High(Normal)]. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)

*2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the [Middle] setting when connecting to Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU. However, the monitor speed may be reduced.

*3 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. Page 676 PLC Side Setting Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side. If the network types of the CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.

0 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings

11

H/W test In a H/W test, mount a CC-Link IE field network communication unit on the GOT, and check if the unit operates properly with the GOT. The following shows the H/W test procedure.

1. Perform one of the following operations to set the GOT to the H/W test mode. Write the project data for which [Mode Setting] in [Detail Setting] is set to [H/W test] to the GOT. Set [Mode setting] of [Detail setting] to [H/W Test] in the GOT utility.

2. A H/W test will start at a GOT startup.

3. After the H/W test is complete, check the test result with the ERR LED of the CC-Link IE field network communication unit.

OFF: Normal ON: Error

4. When no error is detected, change [H/W Test] set in [Mode setting] of [Detail setting]. Since the communication with the controller is not performed when [Mode setting] is set to [H/W Test], the communication timeout error occurs when the device of controller is monitored.

5. If any error is detected, replace the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.

Self-loopback test In a self-loopback test, connect port 1 and port 2 of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit mounted on the GOT with a network cable, and check if the unit operates properly with the GOT. The following shows the self-loopback test procedure.

1. Perform one of the following operations to set the GOT to the self-loopback test mode. Write the project data for which [Mode Setting] in [Detail Setting] is set to [Self-loopback test] to the GOT. Set [Mode setting] in [Detail setting] to [Self-loopback Test] in the GOT utility.

2. A self-loopback test will start at a GOT startup.

3. After the test is complete, check the result with the ERR LED on the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit. OFF: Normal ON: Error

4. When no error is detected, change [Self-loopback Test] in [Mode setting] of [Detail setting]. Since the communication with the controller is not performed when [Mode setting] is set to [Self-loopback Test], the communication timeout error occurs when the device of controller is monitored.

5. If any error is detected, replace the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 671

67

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

2 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings

11

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 673

67

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

4 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings

11

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 676 PLC Side Setting Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.3 GOT side settings 675

67

11.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration.

CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R series

System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

*1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set at "0".

Module parameter settings of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No.*1 1

Station number setting Parameter

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Engineering tool

Network Configuration Settings Network Configuration Settings

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :0 (fixed) Mode Setting :Online (normal) Network type :CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 Total stations :1 Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00H to FFH RWW/RWr00H to FFH

CC-Link IE Field Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Field Network No. :1 Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00 to FFH RWW/RWr00 to FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

6 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting

11

Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1)*1

Rx/RY setting Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 00007H

Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 677

67

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 675 Routing parameter setting

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 668 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 1: Station No.1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

8 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting

11

Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.

System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

*1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set at "0".

Module parameter settings of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Master station (fixed)

Network No.*1 1

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Parameter setting Parameter

Channel No. (Use default value)

Network Configuration Settings Network Configuration Settings

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :0 (fixed) Mode Setting :Online (normal) Network type :CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 Total stations :1 Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00H to FFH RWW/RWr00H to FFH

CC-Link IE Field Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Network type :CC IE Field Network No. :1 Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00 to FFH RWW/RWr00 to FFH Monitor Speed :High

*1

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 679

68

Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.

Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1)*1

Rx/RY setting Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 00007H

Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting

Item Range Target Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

0 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting

11

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 675 Routing parameter setting

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 668 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Connection to MELSEC-Q, L series

System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

*1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set at [0].

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit is set to "70".

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 1: Station No.1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station No. : 0 (fixed) Mode : Online (normal) Network type : CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. : 1 Total stations : 1 Network Configuration Settings :

CC-Link IE Field Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

RX/RY00H to FFH RWW/RWr00H to FFH

Network type : CC IE Field Network No. : 1 Station No. : 1 Mode Setting : Online Network Configuration Settings :

Monitor Speed : High

RX/RY00 to FFH RWW/RWr00 to FFH

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 681

68

Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-Q, QS series) of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Network parameter] of GX Works2 Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later. Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set it according to the system configuration. *2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. *3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Network type CC IE Field (Master station) (fixed)

Starting I/O No.*1 0000H

Network No.*2 1

Total stations 1

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Mode*3 Online (Normal mode)

Network Configuration Settings Network Configuration Settings

Refresh parameters (Use default value)

Interrupt settings

Interlink transmission parameters

Routing parameters Routing parameter setting

2 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting

11

Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting. GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1)*1

Rx/RY setting Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 Start 00000H

End 000FFH

Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 683

68

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 675 Routing parameter setting

Item Range Transfer target network No. 1 to 239

Relay network No. 1 to 239

Relay station No. 0 to 120

4 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting

11

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 668 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 1: Station No.1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High(Normal) (Use default value)

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.4 PLC Side Setting 685

68

11.5 Precautions

GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network connection For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT startup.

When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

CC-Link IE Field Network module version For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) The Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) cannot be monitored. Set [CPU No.] to 0 or 1. The device of the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Data link failure in other stations at GOT startup At GOT startup, the data link failure may occur in other stations. However, after the failure occurrence, the GOT reconnects automatically and monitors the devices properly. To avoid such data link failure, start up the GOT 10 seconds earlier than the master station. However, if the master station does not complete startup when GOT starts monitoring (10 seconds after the GOT startup), the communication timeout occurs in the GOT side. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

6 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.5 Precautions

11

Data link failure in all stations at GOT startup or cable connection/disconnection At GOT startup, the communication is broken temporarily between PORT1 and PORT2 in the CC-Link IE Field module which is installed on the GOT. Thus, as the GOT or a station between the GOT and the master station is reconnected, the data link failure may occur on all stations.

GOT startup GOT startup indicates the startups after the following operations: Turning ON the GOT Resetting the GOT main unit Operating the utility Downloading the project including the communication settings Downloading the OS

When the output is required to be held at the data link failure Set the GOT to hold the input from the data link faulty stations in the communication setting. Set "Input for Error Station" to "Hold". Page 669 Communication detail settings

Connection to RnSFCPU The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a system alarm occurs. To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connecting one PLC with multiple GOTs When multiple GOTs access one PLC simultaneously, writing (transient/cyclic) and reading (transient) data to/from the GOTs may slow down. The following countermeasures can prevent this slowdown.

Improving the PLC's response speed Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed. Note that caution is required as the scan time will increase.

Designing screens using cyclic devices Create screens using cyclic devices instead of transient devices.

Splitting connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems Add a master/local module to the PLC and split the connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems.Improve the current system configuration. (Example of current system configuration) In the following system configuration, the GOTs access one module.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

GOT access is concentrated at one unit

11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.5 Precautions 687

68

(Improvement measure) Adding a module to the PLC Add a module to the PLC to disperse access destinations for the GOTs.

Splitting the network Split the network to disperse accesses from the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access

Access to station No. 2Access to station No. 1

station No. 2

station No. 1

GOT GOT GOT

GOT GOT GOT

Split the network to disperse the GOT access

8 11 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.5 Precautions

12

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

Page 689 Connectable Model List Page 696 System Configuration Page 700 GOT Side Settings Page 706 PLC Side Setting Page 772 Precautions

12.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to MELSEC iQ-R Series R00CPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System

ConfigurationR01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU*1

R16PCPU*1

R32PCPU*1

R120PCPU*1

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU *2

R16PSFCPU *2

R32PSFCPU *2

R120PSFCPU *2

R08SFCPU*3

R16SFCPU*3

R32SFCPU*3

R120SFCPU*3

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationR32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List 689

69

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link(ID) - -

MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5U CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationFX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S - - -

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00JCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationQ00CPU*4

Q01CPU*4

Q02CPU*4

Q02HCPU*4

Q06HCPU*4

Q12HCPU*4

Q25HCPU*4

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*5 CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationQ24DHCCPU-V/VG

Q24DHCCPU-LS

Q26DHCCPU-LS

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List

12

MELSEC-L L02CPU CC-Link(ID) Page 698 Connection with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible

L06CPU

L26CPU

L26CPU-B

L02CPU-P

L06CPU-P

L26CPU-P

L26CPU-PBT

L02SCPU

L02SCPU-P

MELSEC-Q (A mode) Q02CPU-A CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

Q02HCPU-A

Q06HCPU-A

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) Q2ACPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

Q2ACPU-S1

Q3ACPU

Q4ACPU

Q4ARCPU

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU) Q2ASCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

Q2ASCPU-S1

Q2ASHCPU

Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2UCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

A2UCPU-S1

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU

A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUR21

A2ACPU-S1

A2ACPUP21-S1

A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU

A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU

A1NCPUP21

A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU

A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List 691

69

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2USCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series) Q172CPU*6*7 CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationQ173CPU*6*7

Q172CPUN*6

Q173CPUN*6

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*8

Q170MSCPU*9

Q170MSCPU-S1*9

MR-MQ100 - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List

12

Motion CPU (A Series) A273UCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

Robot controller (Q Series) CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

CC-Link(ID) Page 696 System Configuration

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G CC-Link (ID) Page 696 System ConfigurationFX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List 693

69

*1 Mount a redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPCPU on the base unit when building a redundant system. *2 Mount the SIL2 function module R6PSFM and redundant function module R6RFM next to the RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *5 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *6 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed.

SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*7 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

*8 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *9 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used.

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List

12

CC-Link module

*1 Transient communication can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later. *2 When using an FX3U-16CCL-M with the MELSEC iQ-F series, bus conversion module (FX5-CNV-BUS or FX5-CNV-BUSC) is required. *3 Use firmware version 4 or higher when building a redundant system. *4 MELSEC-FX do not support FX5-CCL-MS. *5 Only available for MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU). *6 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type.

CPU series CC-Link module MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) CC-Link IE Field Network head module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

RJ61BT11 *3

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N

MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

AJ61QBT11 *1

A1SJ61QBT11 *1*5

MELSEC-Q (A mode) MELSEC-A (AnCPU) MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) Motion CPU (A Series)

AJ61BT11 *1

A1SJ61BT11 *1*6

MELSEC iQ-F series *2

MELSEC-FX *4 FX3U-16CCL-M, FX5-CCL-MS

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List 695

69

12.2 System Configuration Connection with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link module*1

Communication type

Cable model

Max. distance

Option device*8

Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ61BT11 CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 GT15-J61BT13 *5

26 GOTs

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N

MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

MELSEC-L (L26CPU-BT) -

MELSEC-QnA AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11*

4

MELSEC-A AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11*4

MELSEC iQ-F series FX5-CCL-MS FX3U-16CCL- M *6*7

CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 GT15-J61BT13 *5

8 GOTs

MELSEC-FX FX3U-16CCL- M *7

CC-Link Ver2(ID)

Communication driver

CC-Link module

PLC GOT

Connection cable

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.2 System Configuration

12

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL

*4 Transient transmission can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later. *5 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it.

For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*6 When using an FX3U-16CCL-M with the MELSEC iQ-F series, bus conversion module (FX5-CNV-BUS or FX5-CNV-BUSC) is required. *7 FX3U-16CCL-M does not support FX5UJ and FX3S. *8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.2 System Configuration 697

69

Connection with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL

*4 Specify Ver.2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*5 When using an FX3U-16CCL-M with the MELSEC iQ-F series, bus conversion module (FX5-CNV-BUS or FX5-CNV-BUSC) is required. *6 FX3U-16CCL-M does not support FX5UJ and FX3S. *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*7

Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ- R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ61BT11 CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 GT15-J61BT13 *4

26 GOTs

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ61BT11N

MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

MELSEC-L (L26CPU-BT) (L26CPU-PBT)

-

MELSEC iQ-F series FX5-CCL-MS FX3U-16CCL-M *5*6

CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 GT15-J61BT13 *4

8 GOTs

MELSEC-FX FX3U-16CCL-M *6

CC-Link Ver2(ID)

Communication driver

CC-Link module

PLC GOT

Connection cable

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.2 System Configuration

12

Connection with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL

*4 Specify Ver.2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*5 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*6 When using an FX3U-16CCL-M with the MELSEC iQ-F series, bus conversion module (FX5-CNV-BUS or FX5-CNV-BUSC) is required. *7 FX3U-16CCL-M does not support FX5UJ and FX3S. *8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name CC-Link module*1

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*8

Model

MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ- R Series) CNC C80CR800-R(R16RTCPU)

RJ61BT11 CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 GT15-J61BT13*4 26 GOTs

CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 GT15-J61BT13*5

MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

QJ61BT11N CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 GT15-J61BT13*4

CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 GT15-J61BT13*5

MELSEC iQ-F series FX5-CCL-MS FX3U-16CCL-M *6*7

CC-Link (Ver.2) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 GT15-J61BT13*4 8 GOTs

MELSEC-FX FX3U-16CCL-M *7

CC-Link (Ver.1) CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3

CC-Link Ver2(ID)

Communication driver

CC-Link module

PLC GOT

Connection cable

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.2 System Configuration 699

70

12.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]*1: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [CC-Link Ver.2(ID)] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 701 Communication detail settings *1 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series or MELSEC-FX, set to any of the following items.

[MELSEC iQ-R,RnMT] [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] [MELSEC-QnA,MELDAS C6*] [MELSEC-L] [MELSEC-A]

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings

12

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 64

Transmission Rate*1 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0)

0 to E

Mode Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: Ver.1)

Ver.1/Ver.2/Additional/Offline

Expanded Cyclic Set the cyclic point expansion. (Default: Single)

Single/Double/Quadruple/Octuple

Occupied Station Set the number of stations occupied by the GOT. (Default: 1 Station)

1 Station/4 Stations

Input for Error Station Set Clear/Hold at an error occurrence. (Default: Clear)

Clear/Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Transmission method*2 Set the transmission method of CC-Link. (Default: MELSEC (compatible))

MELSEC (compatible), Cyclic

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 703 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 704 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 705 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings 701

70

*1 Transmission speed settings The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC-Link communication.

For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link module to be used *2 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series or MELSEC-FX, Transmission method is set to "cyclic".

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Set value Description 0 Online: 156kbps

1 Online: 625kbps

2 Online: 2.5Mbps

3 Online: 5Mbps

4 Online: 10Mbps

5 Line test: 156kbps

6 Line test: 625kbps

7 Line test: 2.5Mbps

8 Line test: 5Mbps

9 Line test: 10Mbps

A Hardware test: 156kbps

B Hardware test: 625kbps

C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps

D Hardware test: 5Mbps

E Hardware test: 10Mbps

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings

12

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings 703

70

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings

12

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.3 GOT Side Settings 705

70

12.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system.

The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 12.4.5 to 12.4.11.

Station data Description Station type Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device station or Ver.2 intelligent device station

Number of stations occupied Station 1 or Station 4

Model name Refer to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

Connecting with Ver.1 compatible RJ61BT11 Page 708 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1 compatible

Connecting with Ver.2 compatible RJ61BT11 Page 711 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.2 compatible

Connecting with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

RJ61BT11 Page 714 Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

CC-Link module (Q Series)

Connecting with Ver.1 compatible QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N Page 720 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1 compatible

Connecting with Ver.2 compatible QJ61BT11N Page 726 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.2 compatible

Connecting with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

QJ61BT11N Page 732 Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

CC-Link module (QnA Series)

AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11 Page 745 Connection to MELSEC-QnA series

CC-Link module (A Series)

AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11 Page 753 Connection to MELSEC-A series

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC-FX)

Connecting with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

FX3U-16CCL-M Page 762 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F and MELSEC-FX Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series)

Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed FX5-CCL-MS Page 769 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Number of stations occupied The number of stations occupied is setting for determining number of link device points (RX/RY/RWw/RWr) used by the GOT. To use multiple numbers of link device points in the case of cyclic transmission between the GOT and CC-Link module, set the number of stations occupied as the exclusive station 4. The number of link device points at the exclusive station 1 and 4 is shown below. CC-Link Ver.2

CC-Link Ver.1

Link device

Expanded cyclic setting

Single Double Quadruple Octuple

Exclusive station 1

Exclusive station 4

Exclusive station 1

Exclusive station 4

Exclusive station 1

Exclusive station 4

Exclusive station 1

Exclusive station 4

Remote input (RX)

32 points 128

points 32 points

224 points

64 points 448

points 128

points 896

points

Remote output (RY)

32 points 128

points 32 points

224 points

64 points 448

points 128

points 896

points

Remote register (RWw)

4 points 16 points 8 points 32 points 16 points 64 points 32 points 128

points

Remote register (RWr)

4 points 16 points 8 points 32 points 16 points 64 points 32 points 128

points

Link device Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station Exclusive station 4

stniop 821stniop 23)XR( tupni etomeR

stniop 821stniop 23)YR( tuptuo etomeR

stniop 61stniop 4)wWR( retsiger etomeR

stniop 61stniop 4)rWR( retsiger etomeR

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 707

70

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0".

When the switch setting is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Module parameter setting of GX Works3 [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed*1 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1:

:Transmission speed 156kbps(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Link refresh setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device -

Special register (SW) refresh device -

Remote input (RX) refresh device Set as necessary.

Remote output (RY) refresh device

Remote register (RWr) refresh device

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 709

71

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.2 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0".

Module parameter setting of GX Works3 [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed*1 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No.1 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1:

:Transmission speed 156kbps(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 711

71

Link refresh setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device -

Special register (SW) refresh device -

Remote input (RX) refresh device Set as necessary.

Remote output (RY) refresh device

Remote register (RWr) refresh device

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points 32 points (fixed)

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Communication settings] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 713

71

Connection to MELSEC iQ-R Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0".

Module parameter setting of GX Works3 [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed*1 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode Setting : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 2 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1:

:Transmission speed 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.2

Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1

:

Expanded cyclic setting

Single:

Transmission speed : 156kbps

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Link refresh setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting

CC-Link configuration setting of station No.1 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting of station No.2 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device -

Special register (SW) refresh device -

Remote input (RX) refresh device Set as necessary.

Remote output (RY) refresh device

Remote register (RWr) refresh device

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.1 intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 715

71

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)

Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

Item Set value Station No. 2: Station No.2

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller / MELSECWinCPU module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.

CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0".

Module parameter setting of CW Configurator [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed*1 156kbps

Channel No. (Use default value)

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode Setting : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 2 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1:

:Transmission speed 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.2

Number of stations occupied

Exclusive station 1

:

Expanded cyclic setting

Single:

Transmission speed : 156kbps

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 717

71

Link refresh setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting

CC-Link configuration setting of station No.1 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting of station No.2 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Remote input (RX) refresh device Set as necessary.

Remote output (RY) refresh device

Remote register (RWr) refresh device

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.1 intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)

Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

Item Set value Station No. 2: Station No.2

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 719

72

Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series), refer to the following. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1

Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

When the switch setting is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission rate/mode setting (Online: 156kbps)*1

0

(1)

(2)

QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N

05

05

08

1

2

7 6

5 4

3

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

QJ61BT11N RUN

ERR. SD

MST L RUN

L ERR. RD S MST

NC

DA

DB

NC

SLD

DG

(FG)

C

4

MODE

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 721

72

Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Station information setting

Remote device station initial settings (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. *2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-Link utility.

Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 723

72

CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. *2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation settings Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded cyclic setting Single

Occupied number Exclusive station 1

Error event: input data status Clear

CPU stop: data link status Refresh

Other settings (Use default value)

Station information settings All connect count 1

Station Type Sta.No.1 Intelligent device station

Occupied number*2 Sta.No.1 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select Sta.No.1 No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 725

72

Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series), refer to the following. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "70".

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1

Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission rate/mode setting (Online: 156kbps)*1

0

(1)

(2)

QJ61BT11N

05

05

08

1

2

7 6

5 4

3

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

QJ61BT11N RUN

ERR. SD

MST L RUN

L ERR. RD S MST

NC

DA

DB

NC

SLD

DG

(FG)

C

4

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 727

72

Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), set it according to the system configuration.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No.*1 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Station information setting

Remote device station initial setting (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-Link utility.

Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points 32 points (fixed)

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 729

73

CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation settings Type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded cyclic setting Single

Occupied number Exclusive station 1

Error event: input data status Clear

CPU stop: data link status Refresh

Other settings (Use default value)

Station information settings All connect count 1

Station Type Sta. No.1 Ver.2 intelligent device station

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Sta. No.1 Single

Occupied number*2 Sta. No.1 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points Sta. No.1 32 points

Reserve/invalid station select Sta. No.1 No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Communication settings] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 731

73

Connection to MELSEC-Q Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-Q Series), refer to the following. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

When connecting to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) When connected to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), the start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "70".

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No. 0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 2 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No. 1 Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1:

:Transmission speed 156kbps

(Use default value for settings other than the following.)

(Use default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No. 2

Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1:

Expanded cyclic setting Single:

:Transmission speed 156kbps

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission rate/mode setting (Online: 156kbps)*1

0

(1)

(2)

QJ61BT11N

05

05

08

1

2

7 6

5 4

3

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

QJ61BT11N RUN

ERR. SD

MST L RUN

L ERR. RD S MST

NC

DA

DB

NC

SLD

DG

(FG)

C

4

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 733

73

Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set it according to the system configuration.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No.*1 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

All connect count 2

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Station information setting

Remote device station initial setting (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Station information setting

Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Station information setting of station No.2 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.1 intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 735

73

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-Link utility.

Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation settings Type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded cyclic setting Single

Occupied number Exclusive station 1

Error event: input data status Clear

CPU stop: data link status Refresh

Other settings (Use default value)

Station information settings All connect count 2

Station Type Sta. No.1 Ver.1 intelligent device station

Sta. No.2 Ver.2 intelligent device station

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Sta. No.1 Single

Sta. No.2 Single

Occupied number*2 Sta. No.1 Exclusive station 1

Sta. No.2 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points Sta. No.1 32 points

Sta. No.2 32 points

Reserve/invalid station select Sta. No.1 No setting

Sta. No.2 No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 737

73

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)

Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

Item Set value (Use default value) Station No. 2: Station No.2

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L Series with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series), refer to the following. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

System configuration (Example when using CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series))

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1

Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 739

74

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the system configuration.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No.*1 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Page 741 Station information setting

Remote device station initial setting (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 741

74

Connection to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L Series with Ver.2 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series), refer to the following. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

System configuration (Example when using CC-Link module (MELSEC-L Series))

*1

Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.3 mode) All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1

Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the system configuration.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No.*1 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Page 744 Station information setting

Remote device station initial setting (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 743

74

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points 32 points (fixed)

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to MELSEC-QnA series This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC-QnA Series) with Ver.2 compatible in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-QnA Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-QnA Series), refer to the following. Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

Station type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode setting : Remote net mode All connect count : 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 745

74

Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series) Set for each setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online: Remote net mode)

0 (fixed)

AJ61QBT11

E R R O R

R A T E

B

T E S T

1

B RATE 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M

ON

MODE 0 : ONLINE (A. R. )

2 : OFFLINE

RUN ERR. MST

S MST LOCAL

CPU R / W

SW M / S PRM TIME LINE

L RUN L ERR.

OFF S MSTM / L

HOLDCLEAR 3 / 41 / 2

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

10

8

6

4

2

9

7

5

3

1

NC

DA

NC

(FG)

SLD

NC

NC

NC

DB

DG

STATION NO. 10x

x

156K 625K 2. 5M 5M 10M

TEST S0 S1 S2

SD RD

0 1

987

6 5

4 3 2

0 1

987

6 5

4 3 2

0 1

987

6 5

4 3 2

CDBA98 7 6 54321 0F

E

1 : ONLINE (RIM )

2 / 31 / 4

AJ61QBT11

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

10

8

6

4

2

9

7

5

3

1

NC

DA

NC

(FG)

SLD

NC

NC

NC

DB

DG

A1SJ61QBT11

A1SJ61QBT11

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

O N

STATION NO. MODE

10 x

1 x

B RATE 0 156K

1 625K

2 2. 5M

3 5M

4 10M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

M / L

CLR 1/2

S. M

HLD 3/4

SW OFF ON

RUN ERR. MST

S MST LOCAL

CPU R / W L RUN L ERR.

SD RD

SW M / S PRM TIME LINE

E R R O R

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

CD BA987654 3 210FE

1/4 2/3

A1SJ61QBT11

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

10 x

1 x

0 1

9876 5

4 3 2

0 1

9876 5

4 3 2

MODE

CD BA987654 3 2 10FE

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Transmission speed setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

Condition setting switches

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the local station.

In the case of the master station, turn off it.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Transmission speed setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission speed setting (156kbps)*1

0

Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Station type (Master station/Local station) OFF (fixed)

SW2 Not used OFF (fixed)

SW3

SW4 Input data status of the data link error station (clear)

OFF

SW5 Number of stations occupied*1 OFF (fixed)

SW6

SW7 Not used OFF (fixed)

SW8

B RATE 0 156K

1 625K

2 2. 5M

3 5M

4 10M

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

O N 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

M / L

CLR

1/2

S. M

HLD

3/4

SW OFF ON

1/4 2/3

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 747

74

Parameter setting There are two methods for the parameter setting: perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer and the sequence program. Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the CC-Link module use the function version B or later.

Setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Type Master station (fixed)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) B0

Special register (SW) W0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Wait master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Station information setting

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Setting from sequence program The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN. I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual Device used by user

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*1 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Device Application M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting

M102, M103 Flag for data link startup

D0 Number of connected modules

D1 Number of retry

D2 Automatic reconnection station count

D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure

D4 Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)

D5 Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)

D6 Station data (first module)

D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 749

75

Buffer memory settings used in the present example

*1 Details for the station data are shown below. For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station occupied as those of the GOT. For 3), the setting is fixed.

Buffer memory address Item Set value

Decimal (Hex) 1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)

2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)

3(33 (3H) Automatic reconnection station count 1 (1 station)

6(66 (6H) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 0 (stop)

16(1016 (10H) Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification)

20(1420 (14H) Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification)

32(2032 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H

1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT) 01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64

2) Number of stations occupied (Set the number of station occupied as that of the GOT) 1H: Exclusive station 1 2H: Exclusive station 2 3H: Exclusive station 3 4H: Exclusive station 4

3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station) 0H: Remote I/O station 1H: Remote device station 2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

3) 2) 1) b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 to b0to to

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Example of sequence program

When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory)

Data link startup abnormal completion (buffer memory)

Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN

Module ready

Module error

Module ready

Module error

Number of connected modules (1 module)

Number of retry (3 times)

Number of automatic return stations (1 station)

Reserved station specification (No specification)

Refresh insruction

Data link start up request (buffer memory address)

Error code reading (SW0068)

Error invalid station specification (No specification)

Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1)

Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop)

Refresh insruction

Parameter setting

Data link with buffer memory parameter

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 751

75

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to MELSEC-A series This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC-A Series) in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (MELSEC-A Series) For details on the CC-Link module (MELSEC-A Series), refer to the following. Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual

System configuration

*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

*1 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type : Master station

All connect count : 1 Mode setting : Remote net mode Station No. : Station No.0

Module mode : Intelligent mode Transmission speed : 156kbps

Station type : Intelligent device station

Station No. : Station No.1 Number of station occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed

: 156kbps

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 753

75

Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) Set for each setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting (Online: Remote net mode)

0 (fixed)

AJ61BT11

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

A1SJ61BT11

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

AJ61BT11

E R R O R

R A T E

B

T E S T

1

B RATE 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M

ON

MODE 0 : ONLINE (A. R. )

2 : OFFLINE

RUN ERR. MST

S MST LOCAL

CPU R / W

SW M / S PRM TIME LINE

L RUN L ERR.

OFF S MSTM / L

HOLDCLEAR 3 / 41 / 2

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

10

8

6

4

2

9

7

5

3

1

NC

DA

NC

(FG)

SLD

NC

NC

NC

DB

DG

STATION NO. 10x

x

156K 625K 2. 5M 5M 10M

TEST S0 S1 S2

SD RD

0

87

5

3 2

0

87

5

3 2

0

87

5

3 2

C

8

4

0

1 : ONLINE (RIM )

ISFM SFM

2 / 31 / 4

10

8

6

4

2

9

7

5

3

1

NC

DA

NC

(FG)

SLD

NC

NC

NC

DB

DG

A1SJ61BT11

A1SJ61BT11

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

O N

STATION NO. MODE

10 x

1 x

B RATE 0 156K

1 625K

2 2. 5M

3 5M

4 10M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

M / L

CLR 1/2

S. M

HLD 3/4

SW OFF ON

RUN ERR. MST

S MST LOCAL

CPU R / W L RUN L ERR.

SD RD

SW M / S PRM TIME LINE

E R R O R

05

05

05

C

8

4

0

ISM SFM

1/4 2/3

10 x

1 x

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

STATION NO.

MODE

CD BA987654 3 2 10FE

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Transmission speed setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

Condition setting switches

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is a local station.

In the case of the master station, turn off it.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Transmission speed setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission speed setting (156kbps)*1

0

Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Station type (Master station/Local station) OFF (fixed)

SW2 Not used OFF (fixed)

SW3

SW4 Input data status of the data link error station (clear)

OFF

SW5 Number of stations occupied*1 OFF (fixed)

SW6

SW7 Not used OFF (fixed)

SW8 Module mode (Intelligent mode) OFF (fixed)

B RATE 0 156K

1 625K

2 2. 5M

3 5M

4 10M

0 1

9876 5 4 3 2

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

O N 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

M / L

CLR

1/2

S. M

HLD

3/4

SW OFF ON

ISM SFM

1/4 2/3

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 755

75

Sequence program The parameter setting and the sequence program of the data link startup request is required.

Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated instructions) The program sets the network parameter and automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions. I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual Device used by user

Device Application M0 RLPA instruction normal completion flag

M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag

M100 Network parameter setting flag

M101 Automatic refresh parameter setting flag

D0 Synchronous mode valid/invalid

D1 Number of connected modules

D2 Station data

D3 Send buffer size

D4 Receive buffer size

D5 Automatic update buffer size

D400 Error code in the case of error completion of RLPA instruction

D100 to D103 Automatic refresh setting (RX)

D104 to D107 Automatic refresh setting (RY)

D108 to D111 Automatic refresh setting (RW)

D112 to D115 Automatic refresh setting (SB)

D116 to D119 Automatic refresh setting (SW)

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction)

* Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction

* Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRPA instruction

Module ready

Module error

Module ready

RLPA error completion

Module error

RLPA error completion

Synchronous mode (Invalid)

Number of connected modules (1 module)

Send buffer size (64 words)

Receive buffer size (64 words)

Automatic update buffer size (128 words)

CC-Link module head I/O No. (0000H)

Parameter storage head device (D0)

Turning on during 1 scan in the case of instruction completion ON (M0)

Error code reading (SW0068)

Dedicated instruction (RLPA)

Station data (intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 757

75

When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Head No. of RX (RX0)

RY head number (RY0)

RX refresh destination (X)

No. of refresh points (32)

RX refresh destination device head No. (400)

RY refresh destination (Y)

No. of refresh points (32)

RY refresh destination device head No. (400)

RW head No. (RW0)

RW refresh destination (D)

RW refresh destination device head No. (200)

SB head No. (SB0)

SB refresh destination (B)

No. of refresh points (512)

No. of refresh points (260)

SB refresh destination device head number (0)

SW head number (SW0)

SW refresh destination (W)

No. of refresh points (512)

Dedicated instruction (RRPA)

CC-Link module head I/O No. (0000H)

Parameter storage head device (D100)

SW refresh destination device head No. (0)

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction) This program writes parameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual Devices used by user

Buffer memory settings used in the present example

*1 Details for the station data are shown below. For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station occupied settings as those of the GOT. For 3), the setting is fixed.

Device Application M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting

M102, M103 Flag for data link startup

D0 Number of connected modules

D1 Number of retry

D2 Automatic reconnection station count

D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure

D4 Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)

D5 Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)

D6 Station data (first module)

D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure

Buffer memory address Item Set value

Decimal (Hex) 1 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)

2 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)

3 (3H) Automatic reconnection station count 1 (1 station)

6 (6H) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 0 (stop)

16 (10H) Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification)

20 (14H) Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) 0 (No specification)

32 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H

1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.) 01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64

2) Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the number of station occupied as that of the GOT.) 1H: Exclusive station 1 2H: Exclusive station 2 3H: Exclusive station 3 4H: Exclusive station 4

3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station.) 0H: Remote I/O station 1H: Remote device station 2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

b15 b12to b11 b8to b7 to b0

3) 2) 1)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 759

76

Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction)

When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory)

Data link startup abnormal completion (buffer memory)

Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN

Module ready

Module error

Module ready

Module error

Number of connected modules (1 module)

Number of retry (3 times)

Number of automatic return stations (1 station)

Reserved station specification (No specification)

Refresh instruction

Data link startup request (buffer memory address)

Error code reading (SW0068)

Error invalid station specification (No specification)

Station data (Intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No. 1)

Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop)

* Parameter setting

* Refresh instruction

* Data link with buffer memory parameters

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 700 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method MELSEC (compatible)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 761

76

Connection to MELSEC iQ-F and MELSEC-FX Series with Ver.1/ Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (FX3U-16CCL-M) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (FX3U-16CCL-M) For details on the CC-Link module (FX3U-16CCL-M), refer to the following. FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL

System configuration

Switch setting of CC-Link module (FX3U-16CCL-M) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed/mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting (master station)

0 (fixed)

*1

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Type : Master station Station No. : Station No. 0 Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 2 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No. 1 (1st unit) Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No. 2 (2nd unit) Expanded cyclic setting : Quadruple Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(2)

(1)

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Transmission speed/Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Parameter setting [Network parameter] of GX Works2 Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set as necessary.

FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL

Transmission speed/Mode setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission speed/Mode setting (Online: 156kbps)*1

0

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Special Function Block No.*1 0 to 7(Default: 0)

Operation Setting*1 Data Link Disorder Station Setting

[Hold input data]: No check

Case of CPU STOP Setting [Clears compulsorily]: No check

Type master station (fixed)

Mode Remote Net (Ver.2 Mode)

Total Module Connected 2

Retry Count*1 7

Automatic Reconnection Station Count*1 2

PLC Down Select*1 Stop

Station Information Setting Station Information Setting

Remote Device Station initial Setting (Use default value)

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 763

76

Station Information Setting

Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Station information setting of station No.2 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station Type Ver.1 Intelligent Device Station (fixed)

Number of Occupied Stations*1 Occupied Station 1

Reserve/Invalid Station Select No Setting

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station Type Ver.2 Intelligent Device Station (fixed)

Expanded Cyclic Setting*1 Quadruple

Number of Occupied Stations*1 Occupied Station 1

Reserve/Invalid Station Select No Setting

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Setting from sequence program The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN.

Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series When connecting with MELSEC iQ-F series, it isn't possible to establish a network parameter in GX Works3. Set the network parameters in the sequence program.

I/O signal of CC-Link module FX3U-16CCL-M USER'S MANUAL Devices used by user

Buffer memory settings used in the present example

*1 Details for the station data are shown below. For 1) and 2) and 3), set the same station No. and number of station occupied and expanded cyclic as those of the GOT.

Device Application D0 Mode

D1 Number of connected modules

D2 Retry Count

D3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count

D4 PLC Down Select

D5 Data Link Disorder Station Setting

D6 Case of CPU STOP Setting

D20 Station information (1st unit)

D21 Station information (2nd unit)

Buffer memory address Item Set value

Decimal (Hex) 0(0H) Mode 2 (Remote net (Ver.2 mode))

1(1H) Number of connected modules 2 (2module)

2(2H) Retry Count 7 (7times)

3(3H) Automatic Reconnection Station Count 2 (2module)

6(6H) PLC Down Select 0 (stop)

12(CH) Data Link Disorder Station Setting 1 (Clear)

6(DH) Case of CPU STOP Setting 0 (Refresh)

32(20H) Station information (1st unit)*1 2301H

33(21H) Station information (2nd unit)*1 C104H

1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.) 01H to 10H: Station No.1 to Station No.16

2) Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the number of station occupied as that of the GOT.) 1H: Exclusive station 1 2H: Exclusive station 2 3H: Exclusive station 3 4H: Exclusive station 4

3) Station type 2H: Ver.1 compatible intelligent device station 6H: Ver.2 compatible single intelligent device station 9H: Ver.2 compatible double intelligent device station CH: Ver.2 compatible quadruple intelligent device station FH: Ver.2 compatible octuple intelligent device station

3) 2) 1) b15 b12to b11 b8to b7 to b0

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 765

76

Example of sequence program

M0PLS

M1SET

M8000

Unit error

M20 M35

RUN monitor

Unit ready

M1

Number of automatic return units (2 units)

Number of retries (7 times)

Mode Remote net ver. 1 mode

BFM#10 M35 to M20

M0

Number of connected units (2 units)

FNC 79 FROM K0 K10 K4M20 K1

Operation specification when CPU is down (stop)

FNC 12 MOV D0K0

FNC 12 MOV D1

FNC 12 MOV D2

FNC 12 MOV D3

FNC 78 TO K0 K0 D0 K4

FNC 12 MOV D4

FNC 78 TO K0 K6 D4 K1

Data link disorder station setting (clear)

FNC 12 MOV D5

Case of CPU STOP setting (refresh)

FNC 12 MOV D6

FNC 78 TO K0 K12 D5 K2

K2

K7

K2

K0

K1

K0

To the next page

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

When changing the sequence program After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

M8002

Unit error

M20 M35

Initial pulse

Unit ready

M3

When data link startup by buffer memory parameters is completed abnormally

Refresh command

M2

When data link startup by buffer memory parameters is completed normally

M26

M27

M8000

RUN monitor

M55 to M40 BFM#10

M1

FNC 78 TO K0 K32 D20 K2

M1RST

M40SET

M2PLS

M3SET

M46SET

M46RST

M3RST

FNC 79 FROM K0 H0668 D50 K1

M46RST

M3RST

FNC 78 TO K0 K10 K4M40 K1

FNC 12 MOV D20H2301

D21FNC 12 MOV

HC104

Station information(1st unit) Ver. 1 compatible intelligent device station (GOT)

Station information(2nd unit) Ver. 2 compatible intelligent device station (GOT)

Station information

From the previous page

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 767

76

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Controller Setting of Station No.1 (GOT)

Controller Setting of Station No.2 (GOT)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic -

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method Cyclic

Item Set value Station No. 2: Station No.2

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Quadruple

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method Cyclic

8 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (FX5-CCL-MS) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration.

CC-Link module (FX5-CCL-MS) For details on the CC-Link module (FX5-CCL-MS), refer to the following. Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series

System configuration

Module parameter setting of GX Works3 [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station

Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Station No. 0 (fixed)

Transmission speed*1 156kbps

Parameter setting Parameter

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Type : Master station Station No. : Station No.0 Mode Setting : Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count : 2 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No.1 Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station type : Intelligent device station Station No. : Station No.2 Expanded cyclic setting : Single Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 769

77

Link refresh setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting

CC-Link configuration setting of station No.1 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting of station No.2 (GOT)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device Set as necessary.

Special register (SW) refresh device

Remote input (RX) refresh device

Remote output (RY) refresh device

Remote register (RWr) refresh device

Remote register (RWw) refresh device

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.1 intelligent device station (fixed)

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed)

Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

0 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting

12

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)

Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)

Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method Cyclic

Item Set value Station No. 2: Station No.2

Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station

Input for Error Station 0: Clear

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Transmission method Cyclic

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.4 PLC Side Setting 771

77

12.5 Precautions

Using cyclic transmission I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit Users Manual GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual

Access range that can be monitored The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary according to the mode in the master station of the CC-Link system.

: Applicable : N/A(All "0") -: N/A of system configuration *1 Monitoring is applicable only when MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used.

When GOT malfunctions, the cyclic output status remains the same as before becoming faulty.

For transient transmission CC-Link module of target station Mount the CC-Link module of function version B or later and software version J or later to the PLC CPU when performing the following CC-Link modules and transient transmission. Only cyclic transmission can be communicated with the CC-Link module of function version A or before and software version I or before. AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11

Access range that can be monitored The GOT can access to the PLC CPU mounting the master and local station of the CC-Link System. It cannot access another network via the CC-Link module.

Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible When connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible, the device setting must be set within the range of the specifications of the controller. When a device number outside the range is set, the GOT may not monitor the controller correctly.

GOT startup in the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) For CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup.

Mode of master station Applicable of monitoring

Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.1

Data for each station compatible with CC-Link ver.2

Remote net mode -

Remote net ver.1 mode -

Remote net ver.2 mode *1

Remote net additional mode *1

2 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.5 Precautions

12

When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. MELSEC iQ-R series, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, or CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) are applicable to CC-Link Ver.2 only. For connecting to the CC-Link (ID) network system, set the CC-Link (ID) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2 mode.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to RnSFCPU The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a system alarm occurs. To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.5 Precautions 773

77

Connecting one PLC with multiple GOTs When multiple GOTs access one PLC simultaneously, writing (transient/cyclic) and reading (transient) data to/from the GOTs may slow down. The following countermeasures can prevent this slowdown.

Improving the PLC's response speed Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed. Note that caution is required as the scan time will increase.

Designing screens using cyclic devices Create screens using cyclic devices instead of transient devices.

Splitting connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems Add a master/local module to the PLC and split the connection destinations of the GOTs into multiple systems.Improve the current system configuration. (Example of current system configuration) In the following system configuration, the GOTs access one module.

(Improvement measure) Adding a module to the PLC Add a module to the PLC to disperse access destinations for the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

GOT access is concentrated at one unit

GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT GOT

Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access

Access to station No. 2Access to station No. 1

station No. 2

station No. 1

4 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.5 Precautions

12

Splitting the network Split the network to disperse accesses from the GOTs.

GOT GOT GOT

GOT GOT GOT

Split the network to disperse the GOT access

12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.5 Precautions 775

77

MEMO

6 12 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.5 Precautions

13

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Page 777 Connectable Model List Page 783 System Configuration Page 788 Connection Diagram Page 790 GOT Side Settings Page 796 PLC Side Settings Page 806 Precautions

13.1 Connectable Model List PLC/Motion CPU The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU CC-Link (G4) - -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU CC-Link (G4) - -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V CC-Link (G4) - -

MELSECWinCP U (MELSEC iQ- R Series)

R102WCPU-W CC-Link (G4) - -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 CC-Link (G4) - -

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List 777

77

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

CC-Link (G4) - -

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

RJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link (G4) - -

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U - - -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Q00JCPU CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q00CPU*1

Q01CPU*1

Q02CPU*1

Q02HCPU*1

Q06HCPU*1

Q12HCPU*1

Q25HCPU*1

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*2

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

CC-Link(G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

8 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List

13

MELSEC-L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

CC-Link(G4) Page 785 Connection to LCPU

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU

- - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

- - -

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

- - -

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU - - -

A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SCPU-S1

A2SHCPU

A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List 779

78

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU - - -

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*3*4 CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Q173CPU*3*4

Q172CPUN*3

Q173CPUN*3

Q172HCPU

Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU*5

Q170MSCPU*6

Q170MSCPU-S1*6

MR-MQ100 - - -

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU - - -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

0 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List

13

*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *2 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. *3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed.

SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*4 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

*5 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *6 The extension base unit (Q5B/Q6B) can be used.

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)

CC-Link (G4) Page 783 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List 781

78

CC-Link module/peripheral module CPU series Model name

CC-Link module Peripheral module MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Motion CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (Q Series)

QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N

AJ65BT-G4-S3 AJ65BT-R2N

MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

2 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List

13

13.2 System Configuration Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

PLC Connection cable 1)

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link module *1

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Model name

Communic ation type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*7 Model

MELSEC-Q

(Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) Robot controller (Q Series)

QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N

CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 AJ65BT- R2N

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P or

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*6

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CC-Link (G4)

Communication driver

CC-Link module QCPU

(Q mode) Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 1)

GOT

Connection cable 2)

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.2 System Configuration 783

78

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 789 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 789 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*6 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

MELSEC-Q C Controller module (Q Series)

QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N

CC-Link dedicated cable*2

*3 AJ65BT- G4-S3

RS-422 GT01-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT01-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT01-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT01-C300R4- 25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT21-C30R4- 25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4- 25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4- 25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4- 25P5(30m) *5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT10-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT10-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT10-C300R4- 25P(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable 1)

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link module *1

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Model name

Communic ation type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*7 Model

4 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.2 System Configuration

13

Connection to LCPU

PLC Connection cable 1)

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link module *1

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Model name

Communic ation type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device *7 Model

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU- PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

LJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 AJ65BT- R2N

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P or

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *6

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CC-Link (G4)

Communication driver

CC-Link moduleLCPU

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2)

GOT

Connection cable 2)

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.2 System Configuration 785

78

L02CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L26CPU- PBT

LJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 AJ65BT- G4-S3

RS-422 GT01-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT01-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT01-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT01-C300R4- 25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT21-C30R4- 25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4- 25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4- 25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4- 25P5(30m) *5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT10-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT10-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT10-C300R4- 25P(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

L26CPU-BT L26CPU- PBT

- CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 AJ65BT- R2N

RS-232 GT09-C30R2-9P or

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *6

Page 788 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable 1)

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link module *1

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Model name

Communic ation type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device *7 Model

6 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.2 System Configuration

13

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed. For details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 789 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*5 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. Page 789 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*6 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *7 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

L26CPU-BT L26CPU- PBT

- CC-Link dedicated cable *2

*3 AJ65BT- G4-S3

RS-422 GT01-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT01-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT01-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT01-C300R4- 25P(30m)

30m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT21-C30R4- 25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4- 25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4- 25P5(20m) GT21-C300R4- 25P5(30m) *5

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT10-C100R4- 25P(10m) GT10-C200R4- 25P(20m) GT10-C300R4- 25P(30m) *4

30m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable 1)

Peripheral connection module

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name CC-Link module *1

Cable model

Max. dista nce

Model name

Communic ation type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device *7 Model

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.2 System Configuration 787

78

13.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

GOT side (D-Sub 9-pin)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PLC side

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

GOT side (terminal block)

PLC side

2

3

6

4

5

1

7

8

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

SG

CD

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

8 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.3 Connection Diagram

13

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V) Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V, GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "330". For GS21 Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

GOT side (connector terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT10-C R4-25P

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

Blue

Purple

Black

White

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

GOT side (connector terminal block)

Unfastened cable color of GT21-C R4-25P5

Brown

Red

Orange

Yellow

Green

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.3 Connection Diagram 789

79

13.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [CC-Link(G4)] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 791 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

0 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings

13

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (3sec(fixed))

3sec(fixed)

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out.(Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 792 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 793 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 794 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings 791

79

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

2 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings

13

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings 793

79

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

4 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings

13

Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system.

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Disconnect the faulty station

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.4 GOT Side Settings 795

79

13.5 PLC Side Settings

Connection AJ65BT-G4-S3 This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration.

Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-G4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume) CC-Link module For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual CC-Link function built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

System configuration

*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

Switch setting of peripheral connection module Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch.

Model Reference Peripheral connection module AJ65BT-G4-S3 Page 796 Connection AJ65BT-G4-S3

AJ65BT-R2N Page 798 Connection AJ65BT-R2N

*1

Station type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed

Station type Station No. Number of stations occupied Transmission speed

Setting example Transmission speed: 9600bps

: Master station : Station No. 0 : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) : 1

: Intelligent device station : Station No. 1 : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps

: 156kbps

Setting example

Setting example

(2) (1)

(3)

B RATE STATION NO. x 10 x 1

SW 1 82 3 4 5 6 7

ON RESET

PW RUN

L RUN SD RD

L ERR.

MITSUBISHI AJ65BT-G4-S3

RS-422

5

0

6

9 2

7 8

1 3

45

0

6 2

1 3

4

0 2

1 3

4

SW1 MODE

QnA A

non-used Q

SW6 OFF OFF ON ON

OFF

OFF ON

ON

6 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings

13

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Data link transmission speed setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Operation setting DIP switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT.

Page 805 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3

Operation mode of peripheral connection module Be sure to set the "Q mode" as an operation mode of the peripheral connection module.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

AJ65BT-G4-S3 station number setting 1 to 64

Data link transmission speed setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Data link transmission speed setting 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps

Operation setting DIP switch Setting Switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1, SW6 Operation mode SW1 = OFF SW6 = ON (fixed) (Q mode)

SW2 Peripheral transmission speed*1

OFF (fixed)

SW3

SW4 Not used OFF (fixed)

SW5

SW7

SW8 Test mode OFF (fixed) (Online mode)

STATION NO. 10 1

5

0

6

9 2

7 8

1 3

45

0

6 2

1 3

4

B RATE

0 2

1 3

4

SW 1 82 3 4 5 6 7

ON

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings 797

79

Connection AJ65BT-R2N This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration.

Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-R2N User's Manual CC-Link module For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N CC-Link built-in CPU For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

System configuration

*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

Switch setting of peripheral connection module Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

AJ65BT-R2N station number setting

1 to 64

*1 Station type Station No. Mode All connect count Transmission speed

: Master station : Station No. 0 : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) : 1 : 156kbps

Station type Station No. Number of stations occupied Transmission speed

: Intelligent device station : Station No. 1 : Exclusive station 1 : 156kbps

Transmission speed: 9600bps

Setting example

Setting example

Setting example

(1)2

4

(3) ( )

(4)

8 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings

13

Data link transmission speed setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

RS-232 transmission setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT.

Page 805 [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3

Precautions when setting peripheral connection module mode setting switch Be sure to set the Operation mode setting switch to "5" (MELSOFT/connection mode). RS-232 transmission setting switch Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS-232 transmission setting switch. If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON, setting error will occur (RUN LED turns off).

Data link transmission speed setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Data link transmission speed setting

0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps

Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Mode setting 5 (fixed) (MELSOFT/connection mode)

RS-232 transmission setting switch Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

SW1 Peripheral transmission speed*1

OFF (fixed)

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5 Data bit length OFF (fixed)

SW6 Parity bit length OFF (fixed)

SW7

SW8 Stop bit length OFF (fixed)

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings 799

80

Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch.

Station number setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station number setting (master station) 0 (fixed)

Transmission rate/mode setting switch

Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Transmission rate/mode setting 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps 2: 2.5Mbps 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps

(1)

(2)

QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N

05

05

08

1

2

7 6

5 4

3

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

QJ61BT11N RUN

ERR. SD

MST L RUN

L ERR. RD S MST

NC

DA

DB

NC

SLD

DG

(FG)

C

4

05

05

STATION NO.

X10

X1

08MODE

C

4

0 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings

13

[Network parameter] of GX Developer

Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

No. of boards in module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Operation setting (Use default value)

Type Master station (fixed)

Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

All connect count 1

Remote input (RX) X400

Remote output (RY) Y400

Remote register (RWr) D300

Remote register (RWw) D200

Special relay (SB) SB0

Special register (SW) SW0

Retry count (Use default value)

Automatic reconnection station count

Stand by master station No.

PLC down select

Scan mode setting

Delay information setting

Station information setting Page 802 Station information setting

Remote device station initial setting (Use default value)

Interrupt setting

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings 801

80

Station information setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station. The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.

*2 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver. 2 mode)] or [Remote net - Additional mode], set to [Ver. 1 Intelligent device station].

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.

Completion confirmation After initial communications of CC-Link are completed, the L RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on. The GOT starts to monitor after the L-RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on. It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off.

Item*1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type*2 Intelligent device station (fixed)

Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1 (fixed)

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

PW RUN

L RUN SD RD

L ERR.

2 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings

13

Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller module setting utility.

Connection settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. *2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed user name and password.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Target module*1 192.168.3.3

Write authority Mark the checkbox

User name*2 target

Password*2 password

Detailed settings -

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings 803

80

[Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility Network parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -Ver.1 mode], [Remote station points] cannot be set. *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Number of modules 1

Target module 1

Start I/O No. 0000H

Channel No. (Use default value)

Operation setting type Master station(fixed)

Mode*1 Remote net (Ver.1 mode)

Expanded cyclic station Single(fixed)

Occupied number Exclusive station 1 (fixed)

Error event : input data status Clear

CPU stop: data link status Refresh

Other settings (Use default value)

Station information settings

All connect count 1

Station type Ver.1 Intelligent device station(fixed)

Expanded cyclic station Single

Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1

Remote station points 32 points

Reserve/invalid station select No setting

Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

4 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings

13

[Controller Setting] in GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 790 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Transmission Speed 9600bps

19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps

Retry Count 0 to 5times

Timeout Time 3 to 30sec

Delay Time 0 to 300ms

13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.5 PLC Side Settings 805

80

13.6 Precautions

Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, or CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), CNC C70, CRnQ-700, and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) are applicable to CC-Link Ver.2 only. For connecting to the CC-Link (Via G4) network system, set the CC-Link (G4) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2 mode.

Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No. 2). When [CPU No.] is set to 0 or 1, the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No. 1) is monitored. When [CPU No.] is set to the number other than 0 to 2, a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed. For the setting of [CPU No.], refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.6 Precautions

PART 3 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

14 MELIPC CONNECTION

15 INVERTER CONNECTION

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

18 CNC CONNECTION

19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

807

80

14 MELIPC CONNECTION Page 808 Connectable Model List Page 808 Ethernet Connection Page 823 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection Page 831 Settable Device Range

14.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

14.2 Ethernet Connection Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW)

Direct connection

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELIPC MI5122-VW Ethernet Page 808 Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW)

CC-Link IE Field Network

Page 823 Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW)

MELIPC Connection cable*1 Max. distance*2

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*5 Model

MI5122-VW*3*4

(Built-in Ethernet port: CH1) Ethernet 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 16 GOTs

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

MELIPC Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

8 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.1 Connectable Model List

14

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of MELIPC, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

*4 Select [MELIPC] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 815 GOT Ethernet Setting

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Connection through a servo amplifier

*1 For the system configuration of MELIPC, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

*2 The length between the hub and node. The maximum length depends on the Ethernet module used. The following shows the number of the connectable pieces of equipment when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: Up to 2 pieces using cascade connection (205 m) For the cascade connection between the switching hubs, there is no theoretical limit to the number of cascades. For whether there is a limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the settings in GOT, refer to the following. Page 810 GOT side settings

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

MELIPC*1 Servo amplifier Connection cable

Maximum segment length*2

GOT*3 Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication type

Model name Communica tion type

Option device*4

Model

MI5122-VW CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5D1-G4 MR-JET-G

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

MELIPC GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifierServo amplifier

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 809

81

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: [MELIPC] [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 811 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

0 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 816 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

Examples of [Controller Setting] For examples of [Controller Setting], refer to the following. Page 817 MELIPC Side Settings

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18) 1 to 120

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5001*2)

1024 to 5010 and 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5 times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the MELIPC. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255 sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90 sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination MELIPC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 812 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 813 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 814 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 811

81

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

2 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 813

81

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

4 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 815

81

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 811 Communication detail settings

Examples of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] For examples of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting], refer to the following. Page 817 MELIPC Side Settings Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Net No. N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1). (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1). (Default: 1)

1 to 120

Unit Type Set the type of the connected MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1). MELIPC

IP address Set the IP address of the connected MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1). (Default: 192.168.3.3)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1). (Default: 5006)

5006, 5007

Communication Connection Method differs depending on the port No. UDP (fixed) TCP (fixed)

UDP, TCP

6 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

MELIPC Side Settings

Connecting to MELIPC(MI5122-VW) (multiple connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELIPC(MI5122-VW) in the following case of system configuration. The settings of MELIPC side use the Peripheral Tool for Edge Computer MI Configurator.

Peripheral Tool for Edge Computer MI Configurator For details of Peripheral Tool for Edge Computer MI Configurator, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

When the GOT's communication format is UDP System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the MELIPC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Model name MELIPC MI5122-VW

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 PC No. :18 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PC No. :1 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.3 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

1

2 (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PC No. :2 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.4 Port No. :5006 (fixed) Communication format :UDP (fixed)

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 817

81

[Basic Parameter] of MI Configurator 1) External device interaction setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 810 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when connecting MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) and a GOT The setting items for the network number and station number do not exist at the MELIPC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

1) Controller setting

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP Address 192.168.3.3

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

CC-Link IEF Basic Setting (Use default value)

External Device Configuration -

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 18

GOT Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

8 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

2) GOT Ethernet Setting

3) Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number and PLC numbers of other MELIPCs on the same network.

Checking communication state of MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) 1) When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Reply from 192.168.3.3:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Request timed out. 2) At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of MELIPC (faulty or not) The IP address of MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of MI Configurator Ethernet diagnostics of MI Configurator is available to a Ping test from the MELIPC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of MI Configurator, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 1*2 2*2

Unit Type MELIPC MELIPC

IP Address 192.168.3.3 192.168.3.4

Port No. 5006 5006

Communication UDP UDP

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 819

82

When the GOT's communication format is TCP System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the MELIPC side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

[Basic Parameter] of MI Configurator 1) External device interaction setting

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

IP Address 192.168.3.3

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

CC-Link IEF Basic Setting (Use default value)

External Device Configuration 2) External Device Configuration

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 PC No. :18 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :TCP (fixed)

1

2

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PC No. :1 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.3

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PC No. :2 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.3.4

0 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

2) External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 810 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] when MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) is connected to a GOT The setting items for the network No. and station No. do not exist at the MELIPC side. Set the network No. and station No. on the GOT side. Set the network No. that does not exist on the network system and any station No.

1) Controller setting

2) GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Set value Protocol (Use default value)

Open system MELSOFT connection

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 18

GOT Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection 821

82

3) Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set the same value as GOT Net No. *2 Set a value different from the GOT station number.

Checking communication state of MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) 1) When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Reply from 192.168.3.3:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.3 Request timed out. 2) At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of MELIPC (faulty or not) The IP address of MELIPC built-in Ethernet port (CH1) specified in the ping command

Ethernet diagnostics of MELIPC Ethernet diagnostics of MELIPC is available to a Ping test from the MELIPC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of MELIPC, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1*1 1*1

Station 1*2 2*2

Unit Type MELIPC MELIPC

IP Address 192.168.3.3 192.168.3.4

Port No. 5007 5007

Communication TCP(fixed) TCP(fixed)

2 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.2 Ethernet Connection

14

14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection Connection to MELIPC(MI5122-VW)

*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring), the system configuration, etc. For details, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

*2 Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions. Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function Supporting the auto-negotiation function Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.)

Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi Electric products)

For details, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *4 When a submaster station is in the network configuration, use the software version C or later.

The software version is the 10th digit of the serial number described on the rating plate of the unit.

MELIPC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model*2 Overall extension cable length*1

Option device*3 Model

MI5122-VW (Built-in Ethernet port: CC-Link IE Field)

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher, (double-shielded, STP) straight cable.

12100 m GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 120 GOTs

Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8

CC-Link IE Field Network

Communication driver

MELIPC GOT

Connection cable

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 823

82

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: [MELIPC] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 669 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

4 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

14

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 When using a global label, to read or write more than 235 two-byte characters, set the [Monitor speed] to [High (Standard)] or [Middle]. If [Monitor speed] is set to [Low], a system error occurs when reading or writing. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network Type. CC IE Field

Network No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

Group No. - 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default:Online) For the details of the H/W test and self-loopback test, refer to the following. Page 671 H/W test Page 671 Self-loopback test

Online Offline H/W test Self-loopback test

Tramsmission Speed - 1 Gbps (fixed)

Reflesh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 25ms)

1 to 1000ms

Input for Error Station Set the hold/clear of input from the station where the data link is faulty due to some reason such as turning the power OFF. (Default: Clear)

Clear/Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Monitor Speed *1 Set the monitor speed for the CC-Link IE field network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High(Normal))

High(Normal)/Middle/Low

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 826 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 827 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 828 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 825

82

Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. Page 829 MELIPC Side Setting Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Network type Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU side and the GOT side. If the network types of the CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

6 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

14

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 827

82

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

8 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

14

MELIPC Side Setting

This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELIPC in the following case of system configuration.

CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. Manuals of MELIPC

Connecting to MELIPC System configuration

Module parameter settings of System configuration [Application Parameter] of MI Configurator 1) CC-Link IE Field Network Parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

Model name Refer to MELIPC MI5122-VW Page 829 MELIPC Side Setting

Item Set value range Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Station type Master station/Local station Master station

Network No. 1 to 239 *1

Station number setting Parameter Editor (fixed) Parameter Editor (fixed)

Station No. Master station 0 (fixed) 0 (fixed)

Local station 1 to 120 - -

Synchronous communication setting

Setting in 0.05 ms units Not set/Set (Use default value)

Synchronous cycle setting (not set in 0.05 ms units)

0.222ms/0.444ms/0.888ms/ 1.777/3.555ms/7.111ms

Synchronous cycle setting (set in 0.05 ms units)

0.10 to 0.50 to 10.00

Network Configuration Settings 2) Network Configuration Settings

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No. :0 (fixed) Mode Setting :Online (normal) Network type :CC IE Field (Master station) Network No. :1 Total stations :1 Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00H to FFH

RWw/RWr00H to FFH

CC-Link IE Field Network

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network type :CC IE Field Network No. :1 Station No. :1 Mode Setting :Online Network Configuration Settings :RX/RY00 to FFH

RWw/RWr00 to FFH Monitor Speed :High

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 829

83

2) Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.

GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)

[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 824 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1)*1

Rx/RY setting Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 Start 0000H

End 00FFH

Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting

Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field

Network No. 1: Network No.1

Station No. 1: Station No.1

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

0 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.3 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

14

14.4 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. Page 1532 [MELIPC]

14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.4 Settable Device Range 831

83

MEMO

2 14 MELIPC CONNECTION 14.4 Settable Device Range

15

15 INVERTER CONNECTION Page 833 Connectable Model List Page 838 Serial Connection Page 895 Ethernet Connection Page 906 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 917 Connection through a PLC Page 921 Settable Device Range

15.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Type Series *2 Model name Clock Comm unicati on type

Connectable model Refer to

Inverter FR-A500(L) series

FR-A50(L) RS-485

*1

Page 838 Connection to FR- A500(L), FR- F500(L), or FR- V500(L)

FR-F500(L) series

FR-F50(L)

FR-V500(L) series

FR-V50(L)

FR-E500 series

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

RS-485

*1

Page 841 Connection to FR- E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J, FR-D700, or FR-F700PJ

FR- S500(E) series

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F500J series

FR-F50J(F)

FR-D700 series

FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

FR-F700PJ series

FR-F70PJ(F)

FR-E700 series

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

RS-485

*1

Page 843 Connection to FR- E700 or sensorless servo (FR-E70EX)

FR-E70-NE *5 Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-A700 series

FR-A70 RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

FR-F700 series

FR-F70

FR-F700P series

FR-F70P

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 833

83

Inverter FR-A800 series

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet *6

Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

CC-Link IE TSN *6

Page 906 Connection to FR- A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

Type Series *2 Model name Clock Comm unicati on type

Connectable model Refer to

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List

15

Inverter FR-A800 series

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

CC-Link IE TSN

Page 906 Connection to FR- A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-A800 Plus series

FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-LC

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-E-AWH FR-A80-E-LC

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

Type Series *2 Model name Clock Comm unicati on type

Connectable model Refer to

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 835

83

Inverter FR-F800 series

FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet *6

Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

CC-Link IE TSN *6

Page 906 Connection to FR- A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

FR-F80-E *4

FR-F82-E *4 RS-485

*1

Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

Type Series *2 Model name Clock Comm unicati on type

Connectable model Refer to

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List

15

*1 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *2 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A700 and FR-A800 series). *3 The communication type depends on the connection type between a PLC CPU and the GOT. *4 When the communication type is the Ethernet connection and the communication format is TCP, use an inverter with SERIAL (serial

No.) "7Z******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*5 Use an inverter with SERIAL (serial No.) "88******" or later. For FR-E700-SC-NNE and FR-E700-SC-ENE, use an inverter with SERIAL (serial No.) "89******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*6 A built-in option (FR-A8NCG) is required. Use an inverter with the following SERIAL (serial No.). SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

Inverter FR-E800 series

FR-E80 RS-485 Page 846 Connection to FR- A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

FR-E80-E Ethernet Page 895 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

CC-Link IE TSN

Page 906 Connection to FR- A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*3 Page 917 Connection to FR- E700, FR-A800, FR- A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

Sensorless servo

- FR-E70EX RS-485

*1

Page 843 Connection to FR- E700 or sensorless servo (FR-E70EX)

Magnet motor drive

MELIPM series

MD-CX522-K(-A0) RS-485

*1

Page 856 Connection to MELIPM

Country of origin indication SERIAL (serial No.) MADE in Japan 96****** and later

MADE in China 97****** and later

Type Series *2 Model name Clock Comm unicati on type

Connectable model Refer to

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 837

83

15.2 Serial Connection Connection to FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), or FR-V500(L)

When connecting to one inverter

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Computer link option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

FR-A50(L) FR-F50(L) FR-V50(L)

- RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

*2

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

FR-A50(L) FR-F50(L) FR-V50(L)

FR-A5NR Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*2

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 862 RS-485 connection diagram 11)

500m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Computer link optionInverter

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *3 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor*2 Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Commu nication type

Connection diagram number

Model name Connection diagram number

Option device*5

Model

FR-A50(L) FR-F50(L) FR-V50(L)

RS-485 Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *1

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*4

500m 31 inverters for one GOT*3

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

InverterInverter

Connection cable 1)

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 839

84

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option)

*1 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Computer link option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Option device*3 Model

FR-A50(L) FR-F50(L) FR-V50(L)

FR-A5NR RS-485 Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*2

500m 31 inverters for one GOT*1

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 862 RS-485 connection diagram 12)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

Inverter

GOT

Connection cable

Computer link option

Inverter Computer link option

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connection to FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J, FR-D700, or FR- F700PJ

When connecting to one inverter

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

type Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R) FR-F50J(F) FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W FR-F70PJ(F)

RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

*2

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

Inverter GOT

Connection cable

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 841

84

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *3 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distribu tor*2

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distan ce

Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communi

cation type

Connection diagram number

Model name

Connection diagram number

Option device*5 Model

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W FR-S50(E)(- R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(- R) FR- S50W(E)(-R) FR-F50J(F) FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W FR-F70PJ(F)

RS-485 Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *1

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*4

500m 31 inverters for one GOT*3

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Inverter

Connection cable 1)

Inverter

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connection to FR-E700 or sensorless servo (FR-E70EX)

When connecting to one inverter

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time. *3 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Control terminal option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*4

Model

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W FR-E70EX

- RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

*3

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *1

500m - (Built into GOT)

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W FR-E70EX

FR-E7TR*2 RS-485 Page 860 RS-485 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 864 RS-485 connection diagram 15)

500m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

Control terminal option

GOT

Connection cable

Inverter Sensorless servo

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 843

84

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *3 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Terminati ng cable

Connectio n cable 1)

Distribut or*2

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distan ce

Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communi

cation type

Connectio n diagram number

Model name

Connection diagram number

Option device*5 Model

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W FR-E70EX

RS-485 Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *1

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*4

500m 31inverters for one GOT*3

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Connection cable 1)

Inverter Sensorless servo

Inverter Sensorless servo

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the control terminal option)

*1 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time. *2 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *3 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Connection cable

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel name Control

terminal option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Option device*4 Model

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W FR-E70EX

FR-E7TR*1 RS-485 Page 861 RS- 485 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

*3

500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 864 RS- 485 connection diagram 16)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Control terminal option

Control terminal option

Inverter Sensorless servo

Inverter Sensorless servo

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 845

84

Connection to FR-A700, FR-F700, or FR-F700P

When connecting to one inverter

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name *2 Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *3 Model

FR-A70 FR-F70 FR-F70P

RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *4

500m - (Built into GOT)

*1

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *4

500m - (Built into GOT)

FR-A70 FR-F70 FR-F70P

RS-485 Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 5) *5

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 13) *5

500m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Inverter

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

*1 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *2 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A700 series). *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *4 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *5 Connect to the RS-485 terminal block of the inverter.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 847

84

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

*1 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *2 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *3 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *4 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A700 series). *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.

Inverter Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor *1 Connecti on cable 2)

GOT Max. dist ance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name *4 Commun ication type

Connection diagram number

Model name Connecti on diagram number

Option device *5

Model

FR-A70 FR-F70 FR-F70P

RS-485 Page 861 RS- 485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *6

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 858 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*3

500m 31 inverters for one GOT *2

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H- 9SC

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 861 RS- 485 connection diagram 10)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Inverter

Connection cable 1)

Inverter

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block)

*1 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A700 series). *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Connect to the RS-485 terminal of the inverter.

Inverter Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name *3 Communication type

Connection diagram number

Option device *4 Model

FR-A70 FR-F70 FR-F70P

RS-485 Page 860 RS-485 connection diagram 6) *5

- (Built into GOT)

*2

500m 31 inverters for one GOT *1

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 14) *5

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Inverter Inverter

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 849

85

Connection to FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR-E800

When connecting to one inverter

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name *3 Control terminal option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *4 Model

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86 FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-E-AWH FR-A80-LC FR-A80-E-LC FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86 FR-F80-E FR-F82-E FR-E80

- RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *5

500m - (Built into GOT)

*1

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *5

500m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

FREQROL 800

Communication driver

(For automatic connection, Using the PLC function)

FREQROL(Batch monitor)

Communication driver

Control terminal option

GOT

Connection cable

Inverter

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

*1 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *2 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time. *3 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A800 series). *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *6 Connect to the RS-485 terminal block of the inverter.

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86 FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-LC FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

- RS-485 Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 5) *6

500m - (Built into GOT)

*1

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 13) *6

500m - (Built into GOT)

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

A8ERS *2 RS-485 Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*1

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 13)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name *3 Control terminal option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *4 Model

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 851

85

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

Inverter Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor *1 Connecti on cable 2)

GOT Max. dist ance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name *4 Commun ication type

Connection diagram number

Model name Connecti on diagram number

Option device *5

Model

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86 FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-E-AWH FR-A80-LC FR-A80-E-LC FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86 FR-F80-E FR-F82-E FR-E80

RS-485 Page 861 RS- 485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *6

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 858 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*3

500m 31 inverters for one GOT *2

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H- 9SC

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 861 RS- 485 connection diagram 10)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

FREQROL 800

Communication driver

(For automatic connection, Using the PLC function)

FREQROL(Batch monitor)

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Inverter

Connection cable 1)

Inverter

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

*1 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *2 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *3 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *4 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A800 series). *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 853

85

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal or control terminal option)

Inverter Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name *3 Control terminal option

Communication type

Connection diagram number

Option device *4 Model

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86 FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-LC FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

- RS-485 Page 860 RS-485 connection diagram 6) *5

- (Built into GOT)

*2

500m 31 inverters for one GOT *1

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 14) *5

- (Built into GOT)

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

A8ERS RS-485 Page 860 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

- (Built into GOT)

*2

500m 31 inverters for one GOT *1

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 863 RS-485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

FREQROL 800

Communication driver

(For automatic connection, Using the PLC function)

FREQROL(Batch monitor)

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Control terminal option

Control terminal option

Inverter Inverter

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

*1 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 The GOT supports the FR-B, B3 series (explosion-proof type of FR-A800 series). *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Connect to the RS-485 terminal of the inverter.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 855

85

Connection to MELIPM

When connecting to one inverter

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

type Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MD-CX522-K(-A0) RS-485 Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1) *1

20m - (Built into GOT)

*2

1 GOT for 1 inverter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 10) *1

20m - (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

Inverter GOT

Connection cable

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)

*1 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *3 Up to 10 inverters can be connected to GS21-W. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Inverter Terminatin g cable

Connecti on cable 1)

Distributor*2 Connectio n cable 2)

GOT Max. distan ce

Number of connectab le equipmentModel

name Communic ation type

Connecti on diagram number

Model name Connectio n diagram number

Option device*5

Model

MD-CX522- K(-A0)

RS-485 Page 861 RS-485 connection diagram 9)

Page 859 RS-485 connection diagram 3) *1

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

*4

20m 31 inverters for one GOT*3

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

BMJ-8 (Recommended)

Page 858 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT)

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Communication driver

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2)Connection cable 1)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Inverter

Connection cable 1)

Inverter

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 857

85

Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the inverter.

RS-485 cable RS-485 connection diagram 1)

*1 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor to Disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR.The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. *2 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor to Disable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

GOT side*1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

5

4

3

6

2

8

-

-

1

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

P5S

P5S

-

-

SG

Inverter or Distributor side (Modular connector)

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RDR

SG

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

*1

GOT side*2

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

RS-485 connection diagram 3)

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.

*2 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor of the GOT side, which will be a terminal, to enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, or GS21-W-N in the end position of the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

RS-485 connection diagram 5)

*1 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor of the GOT side, which will be a terminal, to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, or GS21-W-N in the end position of the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 RDA2, RDB2, SDA2 and SDB2 terminals of the RS-485 terminal block (built into the inverter) cannot be used.

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

P5S

P5S

SG

5

4

3

6

2

8

1

5

4

3

6

2

8

1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

P5S

P5S

SG

Inverter side or distributor side (Modular connector)

Distributor side (Modular connector)

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

-

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.0

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.nGOT side*2

*1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

FG

GOT side*1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB1(RXD1-)

SG(GND)

Inverter side RS485 terminal block

(built into the inverter)*2, or A8ERS

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 859

86

RS-485 connection diagram 6)

*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100). *2 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor of the GOT side, which will be a terminal, to enable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, or GS21-W-N in the end position of the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

RS-485 connection diagram 7)

*1 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor of the GOT side, which will be a terminal, to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, or GS21-W-N in the end position of the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 Turn ON (100) the terminator switch for the FR-E7TR.

SG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

GND

GND

RDB1

RDA1

SDB1

SDA1

5

6

1

7

2

3

8

4

9

-

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

GND

GOT side*2

Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.0,

or A8ERS

Built-in RS-485 terminal block Station No.1,

or A8ERS

Built-in RS-485 terminal block*1

Station No.n, or A8ERS

GOT side*1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FR-E7TR side (terminal block)*2

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

RS-485 connection diagram 8)

*1 Turn ON (100) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT. *2 For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor of the GOT side, which will be a terminal, to enable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, or GS21-W-N in the end position of the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

RS-485 connection diagram 9)

RS-485 connection diagram 10)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330". Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

SG

GOT side*2

FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.0

FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.1

FR-E7TR side terminal block*1

Station No.2

Distributor side

Terminating resistor 100 1/2W

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

P5S

P5S

SG

5

4

3

6

2

8

1

GOT side*1

(connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

3

6

5

4

1

2

7

8

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

P5S

SG

P5S

Inverter or Distributor side (Modular connector)

*2

*2

*2

*2

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 861

86

RS-485 connection diagram 11)

*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. *2 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-485 connection diagram 12)

*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.

*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330". Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

GOT side*2

(connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

*1

*3

*3

*3

*3

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.0

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDR

FR-A5NR side (terminal block)

Station No.n GOT side*2

(connector terminal block)

*1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB*3

*3

*3

*3

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

RS-485 connection diagram 13)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330". Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-485 connection diagram 14)

*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100). *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

GOT side*1

(connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB1(RXD1-)

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

SG(GND)

Inverter side built-in RS485 terminal block,

or A8ERS

*2

*2

*2

*2

SG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

Built-in RS485 terminal block Station No.0,

or A8ERS

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

Built-in RS485 terminal block Station No.1,

or A8ERS

GND

RDB1

RDA1

SDB1

SDA1

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

GND

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

GND

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

GND

Built-in RS485 terminal block*1

Station No.n, or A8ERS

GOT side (connector terminal block)

*3

*3

*3

*3

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 863

86

RS-485 connection diagram 15)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330". Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-485 connection diagram 16)

*1 Turn ON (100) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FR-E7TR side (terminal block)

GOT side*1

(connector terminal block)

*2

*2

*2

*2

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.0

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FR-E7TR side terminal block Station No.1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

FR-E7TR side terminal block*1

Station No.2 GOT side*2

(connector terminal block)

*3

*3

*3

*3

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500 m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Inverter connector specifications Pin layout in the PU port

The contents in the parentheses indicate symbols described in the inverter manual. The pins number 2 and 8 (P5S) are connected to the power supply for an operation panel or a parameter unit. Do not use them in RS-485 communication. Connector of cable between FREQROL Series inverters Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products.(Refer to the manual for the inverter.)

Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link option Mount this option to the FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), or FR-V500(L) series.

Pin No. Signal name Remark 1 GND (SG)

2 (P5S) Not used

3 RXD+ (RDA)

4 TXD- (SDB)

5 TXD+ (SDA)

6 RXD- (RDB)

7 GND (SG)

8 (P5S) Not used

Name Model name Specifications Manufacturer Connector 5-554720-3 RJ45 connector Tyco International, Ltd

Modular ceiling rosette (Distributor)

BMJ-8 - HAKKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. TEL(03)-3806-9171

Cable SGLPEV 0.5mm 4P Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as cable 10BASE-T)

MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.

When seen from the front of the inverter (receptacle side)

Modular jack

SDBSDA RDA RDB RDR SG A B C

Connected to the GOT

Terminal block Screw size: M3

Terminal symbol

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 865

86

Terminal block layout in the FR-E7TR control terminal option Mount this option to the FR-E700 series or the sensorless servo (FR-E70EX).

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.Set the terminating resistor setting switch. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

O N

OPEN

100

S O

U R

C E

S O

U R

C E

S IN

K S

IN K

V II

SE

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 2A B A B S

SDA SDB RDA RDB RUN FUA DB DA DB UN FU SE

10 4

RM RH MRS RES SD PC STF STR SD SD

A B C

FM RL

To the GOT or the previous inverter

Set the terminal 2/SG switch to the right position (ON) to change the terminal 2 to the terminal SG.

To the next inverter

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 868 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

When [Controller Type] is set to [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] The [Faults history] and [Batch monitor] functions of FR Configurator2 can be realized on GOT by creating the screens. Checking controller setting The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 867

86

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 10ms)

0 to 300ms

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

FREQROL(Batch monitor), FREQROL 800 (For automatic connection)

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manuals. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the station number of the inverter in the system configuration. (Default: 0)

0 to 31

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 10ms)

0 to 300ms

Negotiation Time Set the time period that the GOT side communication setting is sent to the inverter. (Default: 5sec)

1 to 10sec

Initialization Wait Time Set the wait time from when the communication setting is changed until when the communication starts. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 10sec

Automatioc Negotiation Set whether to use the automatic connection. (Default: Yes)

Yes No

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 869

87

FREQROL series inverter side settings For details on the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.

When operating the inverter from the GOT When operating the inverter from the GOT, set the parameter of the inverter side so that the GOT connection destination of the inverter side is set to the mode with the command right. For details, refer to the following manual. Manual for the inverter to be connected with GOT

Connecting to FR-S500(E) or FR-F500J series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.30 (Extended function selection) to 1 [With display] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-S500(E) and FR-F500J series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 When being monitored from the GOT, the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr.331 through Pr.337, and the parameter n10

through n12 correspond with Pr.340 through Pr.342. Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use.

*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter RS-485 port Pr.79, n1 to n7, n10 to n12

Setting item*1 Parameter No.*4 Set value Contents of setting Communication station number n1 (331) 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

Communication speed*2 n2 (332) 192*3 19200bps

Stop bit length*2 n3 (333) 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 n4 (334) 1 Odd

Number of communication retries n5 (335) - (65535)

The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval n6 (336) - Communication check suspension

Wait time setting n7 (337) 0 0ms

CRLF selection n11 (341) 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection*5 - - -

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Link start mode selection n10 (340) 1 Computer link operation

E2PROM write selection n12 (342) 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-E500 series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT.If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-E500 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. *5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 (65535)

The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection*4 - - -

Operation mode selection Pr.79 1*3 PU operation mode

Communication startup mode selection*4 - - -

E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

Frequency setting command selection*5 Pr.146 9999 Built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 871

87

Connecting to FR-F500(L) series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (user group read selection) to 0 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-F500(L) series and FR-A5NR manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. *5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. *6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124

FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number

setting

Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

Stop bit length/data length Stop bit length*2

Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension

Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection*5 - - - -

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Link start mode selection*6 - Pr.340 1 Computer link operation

E2PROM write selection*6 - Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-A500(L) series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-A500(L) series and FR-A5NR manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. *5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. *6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342

FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number

setting

Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension

Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection*5 - - - -

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Link start mode selection*6 - Pr.340 1 Computer link operation

E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 873

87

Connecting to FR-V500(L) series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (Extended function display selection) to 1 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-V500(L) series and FR-A5NR manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. *5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side. *6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342

FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector FR-A5NR Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number

setting

Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

Stop bit length/data length Stop bit length*2

Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 Communication check suspension

Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection*5 - - - -

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

FR-A5NR 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Link start mode selection*6 - Pr.340 1 Computer link operation

E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-E700 series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-E700 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change)

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

FR-E7TR (RS-485 terminal block)

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 PU operation mode

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 875

87

Connecting to FR-D700 series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Before setting the parameters, set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 so that simple mode + extended mode parameters are displayed. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-D700 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change)

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 PU operation mode

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-F700 or FR-F700P series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Before setting the parameters, set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 so that simple mode + extended mode parameters are displayed. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-F700 and FR-F700P series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.

Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FR-F700P series only) If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342

RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector

RS-485

PU communication station number/RS-485 communication station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed/RS-485 communication speed*2

Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length/ RS-485 communication stop bit length*2

Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check/ RS-485 communication parity check*2

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries/ RS-485 communication retry count

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval/ RS-485 communication check time interval

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4 Communication check suspension

PU communication waiting time setting/ RS-485 communication waiting time setting

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection/ RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection - Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

RS-485 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 PU connector 0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.

RS-485 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.

Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode

Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO][GOT][1]Write

-)lanimret 584-SR( sgnittes laitinITOG11

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 877

87

Connecting to FR-F700PJ series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Before setting the parameters, set Pr.160 (Extended function display selection) to 0 so that simple mode + extended mode parameters are displayed. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-F700PJ series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change)

Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.

Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode

Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-A700 series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-A700 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change) *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342

RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector

RS-485

PU communication station number/ RS-485 communication station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed/ RS-485 communication speed*2

Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length/ RS-485 communication stop bit length*2

Pr.119 Pr.333 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check/ RS-485 communication parity check*2

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries/ RS-485 communication retry count

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval/ RS-485 communication check time interval

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4 Communication check suspension

PU communication waiting time setting/ RS-485 communication waiting time setting

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection/ RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection - Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

RS-485 0*3 External operation mode at power on

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 PU connector 0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.

RS-485 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 879

88

Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side.

Inverters available for automatic batch setting Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL (production number) symbol of the inverter to be used. For details, contact your local distributor.

*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.

Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode

Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

-)584-SR( sgnittes laitinI TOG11

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series Configure the inverter communication settings by one of the following three methods. To automatically reconfigure the GOT side communication settings to the inverter side communication settings in batches and to perform the automatic connection, refer to the following. Page 881 Communication settings of inverter (Automatic connection) To automatically reconfigure the GOT side default communication settings to the inverter side communication settings in batches, refer to the following. Page 882 Automatic setting with Pr.999 To manually reconfigure the GOT side communication settings to the inverter communication settings, refer to the following. Page 883 Communication settings of inverter (Manual setting) Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter (Automatic connection) When [Automatic Negotiation] is set to [Yes] in the GOT communication settings, the inverter parameters are reconfigured to the GOT communication settings. Set the following parameters before the automatic connection.

The following shows the parameters to be reconfigured by the automatic connection.

Before performing the automatic connection, connect all the GOTs and the inverters. After the automatic connection is performed, if a station is added or changed, or the communication settings are not reconfigured normally, change the settings with the automatic batch parameter setting (Pr.999) separately. If the inverter power turns off while the automatic connection is executed, execute the automatic connection on the GOT again. If the automatic connection fails, a communication timeout error occurs. If the automatic connection succeeds, the GOT normally starts communicating with each station.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.414

RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.414, Pr.549

Setting item Parameter No. Setting range

Contents of setting

PU connector RS-485 PU communication station number/RS-485 communication station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PLC function operation selection Pr.414 0 to 2 0: Disable PLC function 1 or 2: Enable PLC function

Protocol selection - Pr.549 0, 1 0: Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol 1: MODBUS RTU protocol

Setting item Parameter No.

PU connector RS-485 PU communication speed/RS-485 communication speed Pr.118 Pr.332

PU communication stop bit length/RS-485 communication stop bit length Pr.119 Pr.333

PU communication parity check/RS-485 communication parity check Pr.120 Pr.334

Number of PU communication retries/RS-485 communication retry count Pr.121 Pr.335

PU communication check time interval/RS-485 communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336

PU communication waiting time setting/RS-485 communication waiting time setting Pr.123 Pr.337

PU communication CR/LF selection/RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 Pr.341

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 881

88

Automatic setting with Pr.999 Setting Pr.999 as shown below automatically configures the communication settings to the default communication settings of the GOT side collectively.

*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored. The following shows the values to be automatically set in batches when the above values are set for Pr.999. Pr.999=10

Pr.999=11

Pr.999=12

*1 Before configuring the automatic batch setting, if Pr.414 is set to 1, the setting is not changed.

Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode

Pr.999*1 10 GOT (FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO) initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

11 GOT (FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO) initial settings (RS-485) -

12 GOT (FREQROL 800) initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [2]Write

13 GOT (FREQROL 800) initial settings (RS-485) -

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 1

118 PU communication speed 192

119 PU communication stop bit length 10

120 PU communication parity check 1

121 Number of PU communication retries 9999

122 PU communication check time interval 9999

123 PU communication waiting time setting 0ms

124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1

340 Communication startup mode selection 0

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 0

332 RS-485 communication speed 192

333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 10

334 RS-485 communication parity check 1

335 RS-485 communication retry count 9999

336 RS-485 communication check time interval 9999

337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 0ms

340 Communication startup mode selection 1

341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1

549 Protocol selection 0

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 1

118 PU communication speed 1152

119 PU communication stop bit length 0

120 PU communication parity check 1

121 Number of PU communication retries 9999

122 PU communication check time interval 9999

123 PU communication waiting time setting 0ms

124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1

340 Communication startup mode selection 0

414 PLC function operation selection 2*1

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Pr.999=13

*1 Before configuring the automatic batch setting, if Pr.414 is set to 1, the setting is not changed.

Communication settings of inverter (Manual setting) Set the following parameters using the PU (operation panel or parameter unit). Before setting the parameters, set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 so that simple mode + extended parameters are displayed. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-A800 and FR-F800 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. *4 To use [FR 800 driver], set 0. *5 Inverter default values (No need to change). *6 The inverter side setting defaults to 0 (invalid).

To use the PLC function, set 1 or 2.

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 0

332 RS-485 communication speed 1152

333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 0

334 RS-485 communication parity check 1

335 RS-485 communication retry count 9999

336 RS-485 communication check time interval 9999

337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 0ms

340 Communication startup mode selection 1

341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1

414 PLC function operation selection 2*1

549 Protocol selection 0

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting

PU connector

RS-485

PU communication station number/ RS-485 communication station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed/ RS-485 communication speed*2

Pr.118 Pr.332 192*3 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length/data length/ RS-485 communication stop bit length/data length*2

Pr.119 Pr.333 10*4 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check/ RS-485 communication parity check*2

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries/ RS-485 communication retry count

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval/ RS-485 communication check time interval

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*3 Communication check suspension

PU communication waiting time setting/ RS-485 communication waiting time setting

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection/ RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

Pr.124 Pr.341 1*5 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection - Pr.549 0*5 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU connector 1 PU operation mode

RS-485 0*5 External operation mode at power on

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 PU connector 0*5 Refer to Pr.79 settings.

RS-485 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*5 Written to RAM and EEPROM

PLC function operation selection*6 Pr.414 1, 2 Enabled with 1 and 2.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 883

88

Parameters for monitoring data specific to FR-A800 Plus series How to monitor the winding length (upper + lower) (PV29) Set Pr.645 (Winding diameter storage selection) to [1], and set Pr.1263 (Stored winding length (lower 4 digits)) and Pr.1298 (Stored winding length (upper 4 digits)) on the inverter side. Communication drivers of FREQROL (Batch monitor) that supports monitoring PV are the setting target.

*1 The parameter names described in the FR-A800 Plus series manuals *2 The unit differs depending on the setting of Pr.1262.

Setting item *1 Parameter No. Setting range Description Winding diameter storage selection Pr.645 0, 1 Select whether to store the winding diameter and winding

length. 0: Do not store. 1: Stores the current winding diameter.

Stored winding diameter Pr.646 1 to 6553 mm The stored winding diameter can be read/written.

Operation time with stored winding diameter

Pr.647 0 to 100 s Set the time to hold the stored winding diameter after the start signal turns on.

Target winding diameter Pr.648 1 to 6563 mm Set the winding diameter to output the Target winding diameter achieved signal (Y233).

Winding length increment Pr.1262 0 1km

1 100m

2 10m

3 1m

4 1cm

5 1mm

Stored winding length (lower 4 digits) Pr.1263 0 to 9999 m*2 The stored winding length (lower 4 digits) can be read/ written.

Winding length detection (lower 4 digits) Pr.1264 0 to 9999 m*2 Set the winding length (lower 4 digits) to output the Winding/unwinding completion signal (Y234).

Stored winding length (upper 4 digits) Pr.1298 0 to 9999 m*2 The stored winding length (upper 4 digits) can be read/ written.

Stored winding length increment Pr.1299 0 1m

1 1cm

2 1mm

Winding length detection (upper 4 digits) Pr.1346 0 to 9999 m*2 Set the winding length (lower 4 digits) to output the Winding/unwinding completion signal (Y234).

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

How to monitor the actual line speed (PV27) The actual line speed can be set with the input value of the line speed command by setting Pr.362 (Actual line speed input se- lection) to [0]. For the line speed command, a value can be set in Pr.360 by setting Pr.361 (Line speed command input selection) to [8]. Communication drivers of FREQROL (Batch monitor) that supports monitoring PV are the setting target.

Setting item *1 Parameter No. Setting range Description Line speed command voltage/current bias Pr.350 0 to 100% Set the converted value (%) of the bias voltage (current)

for analog input.

Line speed command bias Pr.351 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the bias line speed command value for analog input.

Line speed command voltage/current gain Pr.352 0 to 100% Set the converted value (%) of the gain voltage (current) for analog input.

Line speed command gain Pr.353 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

9999 Set the gain line speed command value for analog input.

Line speed command pulse input bias Pr.354 0 to 500k pulses/s Set the number of bias input pulses for pulse train input.

Line speed command pulse input gain Pr.355 0 to 500k pulses/s Set the number of gain input pulses for pulse train input.

Line speed command digital input bias Pr.356 0 to 65535 Set the bias line speed command value for pulse train input.

Line speed command digital input gain Pr.357 0 to 65535 Set the gain line speed command value for pulse train input.

Line speed unit Pr.358 0 m/min

1 m/sec

2 mm/min

3 mm/sec

Line speed command value Pr.360 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the line speed command value.

Line speed command input selection Pr.361 0 According to the priority of the speed command rights

1 Terminal JOG single-phase pulse train input

2 FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8TP encoder pulse train input

3 Terminal 2 (0 to 100%)

4 Terminal 4 (20 to 100%)

5 Terminal 1 (-100 to 100%)

6 Terminal 6 (FR-A8AZ) (-100 to 100%)

7 FR-A8AL single-phase pulse train input

8 Line speed command according to the setting of Pr.360 (Line speed command value)

9999 No function

Actual line speed input selection Pr.362 0 (Default) V* (line speed command)

1 Terminal JOG single-phase pulse train input

2 FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8TP encoder pulse train input (complementary 12 V / differential 5 V (A-, B-phases)) *3

3 Terminal 2 (analog value: 0 to 100%) (0 to 5 V DC) *4

4 Terminal 4 (analog value: 20 to 100%) (4 to 20 mA DC) *4

5 Terminal 1 (analog value: -100 to 100%) (0 to 10 V DC) *4

6 Terminal 6 (FR-A8AZ) (analog value: -100 to 100%) (0 to 10 V DC) *4

7 FR-A8AL single-phase pulse train input (PP, NP)

9999 No function *5

Command pulse selection Pr.428 0 Forward/Reverse pulse train (negative logic)

1 Pulse train + rotation direction sign (negative logic)

2 A/B-phase pulse train (negative logic)

3 Forward/Reverse pulse train (positive logic)

4 Pulse train + rotation direction sign (positive logic)

5 A/B-phase pulse train (positive logic)

Start line speed command Pr.622 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the line speed command to start operation.

Line multi-speed setting (high-speed) Pr.1265 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the line speed command value when the RH signal is ON.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 885

88

*1 The parameter names described in the FR-A800 Plus series manuals *2 The unit differs depending on the setting of Pr.358. *3 When Pr.362 is set to [2], select the option to input the actual line speed with Pr.862. *4 The input specification in the initial setting is indicated. *5 When Pr.362 is set to [9999] (No function), the actual line speed is regarded as 0.

Line multi-speed setting (middle-speed) Pr.1266 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the line speed command value when the RM signal is ON.

Line multi-speed setting (low-speed) Pr.1267 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 Set the line speed command value when the RL signal is ON.

Line multi-speed setting (speed 4) Pr.1268 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2 The line speed from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals.

Line multi-speed setting (speed 5) Pr.1269 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 6) Pr.1270 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 7) Pr.1271 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 8) Pr.1272 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 9) Pr.1273 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 10) Pr.1274 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 11) Pr.1275 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 12) Pr.1276 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 13) Pr.1277 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 14) Pr.1278 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Line multi-speed setting (speed 15) Pr.1279 0 to 6553.4 m/min *2

Setting item *1 Parameter No. Setting range Description

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to FR-E800 series Configure the inverter communication settings by one of the following three methods. To automatically reconfigure the GOT side communication settings to the inverter side communication settings in batches and to perform the automatic connection, refer to the following. Page 887 Communication settings of inverter (Automatic connection) To automatically reconfigure the GOT side default communication settings to the inverter side communication settings in batches, refer to the following. Page 888 Automatic setting with Pr.999 To manually reconfigure the GOT side communication settings to the inverter communication settings, refer to the following. Page 889 Communication settings of inverter (Manual setting) Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter (Automatic connection) When [Automatic Negotiation] is set to [Yes] in the GOT communication settings, the inverter parameters are reconfigured to the GOT communication settings. Set the following parameters before the automatic connection.

The following shows the parameters to be reconfigured by the automatic connection.

Before performing the automatic connection, connect all the GOTs and the inverters. After the automatic connection is performed, if a station is added or changed, or the communication settings are not reconfigured normally, change the settings with the automatic batch parameter setting (Pr.999) separately. If the inverter power turns off while the automatic connection is executed, execute the automatic connection on the GOT again. If the automatic connection fails, a communication timeout error occurs. If the automatic connection succeeds, the GOT normally starts communicating with each station.

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.414, Pr.549

Setting item Parameter No. Setting range Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PLC function operation selection Pr.414 0 to 2 0: Disable PLC function 1 or 2: Enable PLC function

Protocol selection Pr.549 0, 1 0: Mitsubishi Electric inverter (computer link) protocol 1: MODBUS RTU protocol

Setting item Parameter No. PU communication speed Pr.118

PU communication stop bit length/data length Pr.119

PU communication parity check Pr.120

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121

PU communication check time interval Pr.122

PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 887

88

Automatic setting with Pr.999 Setting Pr.999 as shown below automatically configures the communication settings to the default communication settings of the GOT side collectively.

*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored. The following shows the values to be automatically set in batches when the above values are set for Pr.999. Pr.999=10

Pr.999=12

*1 Before configuring the automatic batch setting, if Pr.414 is set to 1, the setting is not changed.

Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode

Pr.999 *1 10 GOT ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) initial settings [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

12 GOT ([FREQROL 800], [FREQROL(Batch monitor)]) initial settings [AUTO] [GOT] [2]Write

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 1

118 PU communication speed 192

119 PU communication stop bit length/data length 10

120 PU communication parity check 1

121 Number of PU communication retries 9999

122 PU communication check time interval 9999

123 PU communication waiting time setting 0ms

124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1

340 Communication startup mode selection 0

549 Protocol selection 0

Pr.No. Setting item Set value 79 Operation mode selection 1

118 PU communication speed 1152

119 PU communication stop bit length/data length 0

120 PU communication parity check 1

121 Number of PU communication retries 9999

122 PU communication check time interval 9999

123 PU communication waiting time setting 0ms

124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1

340 Communication startup mode selection 0

414 PLC function operation selection 2 *1

549 Protocol selection 0

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Communication settings of inverter (Manual setting) Set the following parameters using the PU (operation panel or parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-E800 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change). *4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side. *5 The inverter side setting defaults to 0 (invalid).

To use the PLC function, set 1 or 2. *6 To use [FREQROL 800] or [FREQROL(Batch monitor)] drivers, set 0.

Setting item *1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed *2 Pr.118 192 *4 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length/data length *2 Pr.119 10 *6 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check *2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 *4 Communication check suspension

PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1 *3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection Pr.549 0 Mitsubishi Electric inverter (computer link) protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0 *3 External operation mode at power on

Link start mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.

E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0 Written to RAM and EEPROM

PLC function operation selection *5 Pr.414 1, 2 Enabled with 1 and 2.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 889

89

Connecting to sensor less servo (FR-E70EX) Configure the communication settings of sensorless servo (FR-E70EX). Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of sensorless servo Set the following parameters using the PU (operation panel or parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are the parameters name described in the sensorless servo (FR-E70EfX) manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 No change is required since this is the default value of sensorless servo (FR-E70EX).

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

FR-E7TR (RS-485 terminal block)

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3 PU operation mode

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Connecting to MELIPM series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). After setting the parameters for the communication settings, reset the inverter. Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.

*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of MELIPM series. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Inverter default values (No need to change)

GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 Page 892 Station number setting

Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps

Stop bit length/data length*2 Pr.119 10 Data length: 7bit Stop bit length: 1bit

Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.

Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension

Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

CRLF presence/absence selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 891

89

Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 155 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the inverter.

Specification range 0 to 31

Specification station NO. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 0 to 31

For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

GOT

Station No.1

Station No.0

Station No.3

Station No.21

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

Precautions

Station No. of inverter system The station No. required for the inverter system will differ according to the selected driver. When selecting [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0 station. When selecting [FREQROL(Batch monitor)] or [FREQROL 800] Make sure to establish inverter system with the station number set with the host address.

Number of inverter Up to 31 inverters can be connected.

Parameter setting Communication parameter change Do not make any change for each communication parameter of the inverter side from GOT. If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot be made.

When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9999" designate special function. When specifying from the GOT, it will be as follows.

Screen switching devices, system information devices Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and system information devices when the GOT is connected to only the inverter.

GOT clock setting The clock function is enabled or disabled depending on the driver selected. When selecting [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] The clock function is disabled even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set by the GOT clock setting. When selecting [FREQROL(Batch monitor)] or [FREQROL 800] The clock function is enabled by using the PLC function of the FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series.

Settable driver The following shows the settable drivers according to the models used. When connecting the GOT to one or more inverters or sensorless servo drive units [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] When connecting the GOT to one or more inverters (FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series) [FREQROL(Batch monitor)] [FREQROL 800] When automatically connecting the GOT to an inverter (FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series) or using the PLC

function of an inverter (FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series) [FREQROL(Batch monitor)] [FREQROL 800]

Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT 8888 65520

9999 65535

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection 893

89

Automatic connection of FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, or FR-F800 series The automatic connection requires the user-specified negotiation time and the initialization wait time. By monitoring the Notify Automatic Connection Status (GS277), you can check the completion of the automatic connection. For details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 Serial Connection

15

15.3 Ethernet Connection Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR- E800

Inverter Connection cable*1*2 Maximum segment length*3

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*4 Model

FR-E70-NE *6 *8

FR-A80 *7

FR-A82 *7

FR-A86 *7

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-A80-E *5

FR-A82-E *5

FR-A86-E *5

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-E-AWH FR-A80-E-LC FR-F80 *7

FR-F82 *7

FR-F86 *7

FR-F80-E *5

FR-F82-E *5

FR-E80-E

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) *9

GT25-J71E71-100

Ethernet(FREQROL), Gateway

Communication driver

Ethernet(FREQROL(Batch monitor)), Gateway

Communication driver

Inverter Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 895

89

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA, NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*2 When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub. *3 Length between a hub and a node

The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 When the communication type is the Ethernet connection and the communication format is TCP, use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial

No.) is "7Z******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*6 Use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "88******" or later. For FR-E700-SC-NNE and FR-E700-SC-ENE, use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "89******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*7 A built-in option (FR-A8NCG) is required. Use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is the following. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*8 Select [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] for [Controller Type] in [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. *9 The number of connectable GOTs and those of inverters differ depending on [Controller Type] in [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

Country of origin indication SERIAL (serial No.) MADE in Japan 96****** and later

MADE in China 97****** and later

[Controller Type] Number of GOTs connectable to one inverter Number of inverters connectable to one GOT [FREQROL 800] UDP: 16 (When monitoring the devices of the PLC)

TCP: 1 UDP: 128 (16 or less recommended) TCP: 128 (16 or less recommended)

[FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]

UDP: Unlimited TCP: 1

UDP: 128 (16 or less recommended) TCP: 128 (16 or less recommended)

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection

15

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Select one of the following items. -[FREQROL 800] -[FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 898 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

When [Controller Type] is set to [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] The [Faults history] and [Batch monitor] functions of FR Configurator2 can be realized on GOT by creating the screens. Checking controller setting The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 897

89

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 899 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 120

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. The default value varies depending on the [Controller Type]. [FREQROL 800]: 5033 *2

[FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]: 5036 *2

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection

15

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 898 Communication detail settings

*2 For the connection to FR-E700-NE, only UDP is supported.

When connecting to an inverter in communication format [TCP] When connecting to an inverter via [TCP] communication, use an inverter with SERIAL (serial No.) "7Z******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter. Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

Unit Type FREQROL (fixed) FREQROL (fixed)

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 0.0.0.0)

Inverter side IP address

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 5001)

Inverter side port No.

Communication UDP, TCP*2

(Default: UDP) Adjust the settings with the Inverter settings.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 899

90

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] for GT21 and GS21 Effective range of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] Only [1] to [4] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] can be used for GT21 and GS21. If [5] onwards are used, the settings are invalid on GT21 or GS21. [Host] setting Set [Host] within the range from [1] to [4] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Only [1] to [4] can be used.

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection

15

Inverter side settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.

Connecting to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800 series (FR-A80-E, FR-A82-E, FR-A86- E, FR-F80-E, FR-F82-E, or FR-E80-E) Communication settings For setting up the inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. For parameter setting values, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used : Required, : Set it as necessary

GOT connection destination

Parameters corresponding to inverter

Ethernet connector Pr.79, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.414, Pr.502, Pr.549 to 551, Pr.779, Pr.1424 to 1429, Pr.1431 to 1432, Pr.1434 to 1455

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Setting necessity at GOT connection Operation mode switching Pr.79

Communication startup mode Pr.340

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342

PLC function operation Pr.414

Stop mode selection at communication error Pr.502

Protocol selection Pr.549

NET mode command source selection Pr.550

PU mode command source selection Pr.551

Operation frequency during communication error Pr.779

Ethernet communication network number *2 Pr.1424

Ethernet communication station number *2 Pr.1425

Link speed and duplex mode selection Pr.1426

Ethernet function selection 1 *2 Pr.1427

Ethernet function selection 2 Pr.1428

Ethernet function selection 3 Pr.1429

Ethernet signal loss detection function selection Pr.1431

Ethernet communication check time interval Pr.1432

Ethernet IP address 1 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1434

Ethernet IP address 2 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1435

Ethernet IP address 3 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1436

Ethernet IP address 4 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1437

Subnet mask 1 *2 Pr.1438

Subnet mask 2 *2 Pr.1439

Subnet mask 3 *2 Pr.1440

Subnet mask 4 *2 Pr.1441

Ethernet IP filter address 1 Pr.1442

Ethernet IP filter address 2 Pr.1443

Ethernet IP filter address 3 Pr.1444

Ethernet IP filter address 4 Pr.1445

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range specification Pr.1446

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range specification Pr.1447

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 901

90

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-A800, FR-F800, and FR-E800 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.

Connecting to FR-A800 Plus series Communication setting For the inverter side settings, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Communication port and the supported parameters

Inverter communication settings Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change the parameters for communication setting from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT may be disabled. : Required, : Set it as necessar

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range specification Pr.1448

Ethernet command source selection IP address 1 Pr.1449

Ethernet command source selection IP address 2 Pr.1450

Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 Pr.1451

Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 Pr.1452

Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification Pr.1453

Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification Pr.1454

Keepalive time Pr.1455

GOT connection destination

Inverter side parameter (R2R) Inverter side parameter (CRN, AWH, LC)

Ethernet connector Pr.79, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.442 to 445, Pr.502, Pr.549 to 551, Pr.1073 to 1078, Pr.1431, 1432, Pr.1434 to 1455

Pr.79, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.442 to 445, Pr.502, Pr.549 to 551, Pr.1424 to 1429, Pr.1431, 1432, Pr.1434 to 1455

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Operation mode switching Pr.79 0 (default) *3

Communication startup mode Pr.340 10 *3

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0 (default) *3

Stop mode selection at communication error Pr.502 0 (default) *3

Protocol selection Pr.549 0 (default)

NET mode command source selection Pr.550 9999 (default) *3

PU mode command source selection Pr.551 2 *3

Ethernet communication network number *2 Pr.1073 (R2R) or Pr.1424 (CRN, AWH, LC) 1 to 239

Ethernet communication station number *2 Pr.1074 (R2R) or Pr.1425 (CRN, AWH, LC) 1 to 120

Link speed and duplex mode selection Pr.1075 (R2R) or Pr.1426 (CRN, AWH, LC) 0 (default)

Ethernet function selection 1 *2 Pr.1076 (R2R) or Pr.1427 (CRN, AWH, LC) 5000 to 5002, 5006 to 5008

Ethernet function selection 2 Pr.1077 (R2R) or Pr.1428 (CRN, AWH, LC) 45237 (default) *3

Ethernet function selection 3 Pr.1078 (R2R) or Pr.1429 (CRN, AWH, LC) 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet signal loss detection function selection Pr.1431 0 (default) *3

Ethernet communication check time interval Pr.1432 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP address 1 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1434 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 2 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1435 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 3 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1436 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 4 (Built-in Ethernet) *2 Pr.1437 0 to 255

Subnet mask 1 *2 Pr.1438 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 2 *2 Pr.1439 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 3 *2 Pr.1440 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 4 *2 Pr.1441 0 (default) *3

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Setting necessity at GOT connection

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection

15

*1 The parameter names described in the FR-A800 Plus series manuals *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Change the setting depending on the usage environment. *4 For the precautions for the TCP/IP connection, refer to the following.

Page 905 When the GOT and inverter are connected using TCP/IP

Parameters for monitoring data specific to FR-A800 Plus series For how to monitor the winding length (upper + lower) (PV29) and actual line speed (PV27), refer to the following. Page 884 Parameters for monitoring data specific to FR-A800 Plus series

Ethernet IP filter address 1 Pr.1442 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 Pr.1443 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 Pr.1444 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 Pr.1445 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range specification Pr.1446 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range specification Pr.1447 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range specification Pr.1448 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 1 Pr.1449 0 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 2 Pr.1450 0 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 Pr.1451 0 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 Pr.1452 0 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification

Pr.1453 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification

Pr.1454 9999 (default) *3

Keepalive time Pr.1455 3600s (default) *3*4

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 903

90

Connecting to FR-E700 series (FR-E70-NE) Communication settings For setting up the inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. : Required, : Set it as necessary

GOT connection destination

Parameters corresponding to inverter

Ethernet connector Pr.79, Pr.340,Pr.342, Pr.442 to 445, Pr.502, Pr.549 to 551, Pr.805 to 812, Pr.830 to 835, Pr.837 to 852

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Operation mode switching Pr.79 0 (default)*3

Communication startup mode Pr.340 10*3

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0 (default)*3

Stop mode selection at communication error Pr.502 0 (default)*3

Protocol selection Pr.549 0 (default)

NET mode command source selection Pr.550 0 (default)*3

PU mode command source selection Pr.551 2*3

Ethernet communication network number*2 Pr.830 1 to 239

Ethernet communication station number*2 Pr.831 1 to 120

Link speed and duplex mode selection Pr.832 0 (default)

Ethernet function selection 1*2 Pr.833 30, 31, 36, 38

Ethernet function selection 2 Pr.834 20 (default)*3

Ethernet function selection 3 Pr.835 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet signal loss detection function selection Pr.851 3 (default)*3

Ethernet communication check time interval Pr.852 1.5 seconds (default)*3

Ethernet IP address 1 (Built-in Ethernet)*2 Pr.805 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 2 (Built-in Ethernet)*2 Pr.806 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 3 (Built-in Ethernet)*2 Pr.807 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 4 (Built-in Ethernet)*2 Pr.808 0 to 255

Subnet mask 1*2 Pr.809 255 (default)*3

Subnet mask 2*2 Pr.810 255 (default)*3

Subnet mask 3*2 Pr.811 255 (default)*3

Subnet mask 4*2 Pr.812 0 (default)*3

Gateway address 1*2 Pr.442 0 (default)*3

Gateway address 2*2 Pr.443 0 (default)*3

Gateway address 3*2 Pr.444 0 (default)*3

Gateway address 4*2 Pr.445 0 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 1 Pr.837 0 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 Pr.838 0 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 Pr.839 0 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 Pr.840 0 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range specification Pr.841 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range specification Pr.842 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range specification Pr.843 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet command source specification IP address 1 Pr.844 0 (default)*3

Ethernet command source specification IP address 2 Pr.845 0 (default)*3

Ethernet command source specification IP address 3 Pr.846 0 (default)*3

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection

15

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-E700 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Change the setting depending on the usage environment.

Precautions

Connection port of inverter Make sure to connect an Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port of an inverter. When connecting an Ethernet cable by mistake to a PU port, there is a fear that equipment is damaged.

Monitoring virtual devices (RS, WS, A, Pr, PG, SP) From multiple GOTs, it cannot monitor the virtual devices (RS, WS, A, Pr, PG, SP) of a single inverter at the same time.

When the GOT and inverter are connected using TCP/IP When the GOT and inverter are connected using TCP/IP, they may not be connected again after they are disconnected. In such a case, reset the inverter, or shorten the keepalive time and Ethernet TCP disconnection time coefficient. For setting the keepalive time and Ethernet TCP disconnection time coefficient, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Ethernet command source specification IP address 4 Pr.847 0 (default)*3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 3 range specification Pr.848 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 range specification Pr.849 9999 (default)*3

Ethernet TCP disconnection time coefficient Pr.850 3600*3

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Ethernet Connection 905

90

15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Connection to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800

*1 When using a hub, use a TSN Switch or General-purpose Switch according to the system configuration. For usable TSN Switches and General-purpose Switches, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup)

*2 Use the straight cable. *3 The overall distance and station-to-station distance vary according to the connection method (line or star) and system configuration.

For details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup)

*4 For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 The number of connectable local devices is 120 (1 inverter and 119 GOTs). *7 A built-in option (FR-A8NCG) is required.

Use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is the following. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

System configuration of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module For the system configuration of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup)

Inverter Connection cable PLC*4 GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

CC-Link IE TSN Class

Communication type

Cable model *1*2

Max distance *3

CC-Link IE TSN master/ local module

CPU type

Option device *5

Model

FR-A80 *7

FR-A82 *7

FR-A86 *7

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-F80 *7

FR-F82 *7

FR-F86 *7

CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication)

CC-Link IE TSN 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5e or higher 100BASE-TX

Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable of category 5 or higher

12100m RJ71GN11-T2 RnCPU RnENC PU RnSFC PU

GT25- J71GF13 -T2

Up to 119 GOTs *6

FR-E80-E CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication)

Country of origin indication SERIAL (serial No.) MADE in Japan 96****** and later

MADE in China 97****** and later

CC-Link IE TSN

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Inverter CC-Link IE TSN

master/local module PLC CPU

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

GOT Side Settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D] [I/F]: Extend I/F [Driver]: [CC-Link IE TSN] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 908 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 907

90

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network Type. CC-Link IE TSN

Network No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 120

IP Address *1 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.24)

0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 *2

Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0)

0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254

Group No. - 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online) For details on the unit communication test mode, refer to the following. Page 601 Unit Communication test

Online, Offline, Module Communication Test

Communication Speed Set the communication speed of the GOT. (Default: 1Gbps)

1Gbps, 100Mbps *3

Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 25ms)

1 to 1000ms

Input for Error Station Set the hold/clear of input from the station where the data link is faulty due to some reason such as turning the power OFF. (Default: Clear)

Clear, Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed of the CC-Link IE TSN network. This setting is not valid in all systems. (Default: High(Normal))

High(Normal), Middle, Low

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 602 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

*1 If any of the following settings is configured in the IP address, a communication timeout error occurs. The third octet and fourth octet are all 1 (*.*.255.255) or all 0 (*.*.0.0). The host part is all 1 (*.*.*.255) or all 0 (*.*.*.0). Some reserved addresses determined for special applications For the details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)

*2 When the subnet mask field is filled with 0, the operation is the same as when the field is left blank. *3 When setting to 100Mbps, the following conditions must be satisfied.

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25J71GN13-T2): Firmware version 02 or later CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2): Firmware version 04 or later

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Setting the refresh interval For [Refresh Interval(ms)] in [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, set 5 ms or more per 1K words for the total size of the device set in [Network Configuration Settings] in GX Works3. Setting less than 5 ms may affect the processing of the GOT such as a decrease of the monitoring speed. The following shows setting examples of the total device size and refresh interval.

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 603 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 604 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

Item Description Range

Total device size Refresh Interval

eromrosm5sdrowK1

eromrosm01sdrowK2

eromrosm51sdrowK3

eromrosm52sdrowK5

eromrosm081sdrowK63

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 909

91

Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.

Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network, routing parameter setting is unnecessary. For details of routing parameters, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station. For the setting, refer to the following. Page 911 PLC side settings Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When the settings of Transfer network No., Relay network No. or Relay station No. are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings are added. Items set in advance are not deleted. However, if the target network No. overlaps, the item set in advance is overwritten. The routing information is used manually by the user when the data is created. Therefore, after changing the network configuration by MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing information again. For details of the creation of the routing information, refer to the MELSOFT Navigator help.

Item Range Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

PLC side settings This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link IE TSN master/local module in the following system configuration.

CC-Link IE TSN Master/Local module For the details of CC-Link IE TSN master/local module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup)

System configuration The following shows a system configuration example when the GOT is connected with a CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) inverter in a star topology. For the setting details, refer to the following. Page 606 PLC Side Settings

*1 The CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit. The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module is set to "0".

*2 For the following setting contents, the setting names are different on the PLC side and the GOT side.

*3 For the connection via a hub, use a TSN Switch. For details on the TSN Switch, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Startup)

To directly control an inverter from a GOT, set [Communication Mode] of the master station to [Multicast].

Contents of setting Setting names

PLC side GOT side

Controller Setting Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Network No. Network No. GOT Net No. Net No.

PC No. Station GOT Station Station

*1

*3

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type Network type Network No. PLC No. (GOT Station) IP address Mode Setting

: Local Station : CC-Link IE TSN : 1 : 2 : 192.168.3.24 : Online

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type Network No. PLC No. (Station) IP address Communication Mode

: Master Station : 1 : 0 : 192.168.3.253 : Multicast

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)

Station type Network No. PLC No. (Station) IP address CC-Link IE TSN Class

: Remote Station : 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.1 : CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication)

*2

*2

*2

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 911

91

[Parameter] in GX Works3 Module parameter

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.

When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU.

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master Station

Network No. *1 1

Setting Method of Basic/Application Settings

Parameter Editor

Station No./IP Address Setting Method

Parameter Editor

Station No. 0 (fixed)

IP Address 192.168.3.253 (Use default value)

Subnet Mask -

Default Gateway -

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

Network Configuration Settings

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

GOT network configuration settings For the GOT network configuration settings, refer to the following. Page 609 Network Configuration Settings

[Controller Setting] in GT Designer3

[Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 907 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station No. 1

Station type Remote Station

IP Address 192.168.3.1

Item Set value Network Type CC-Link IE TSN

Network No. 1

Station No. 2

IP Address 192.168.3.24

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Group No. 0 (fixed)

Mode Setting Online

Communication Speed 1Gbps (Use default value)

Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)

Input for Err. Sta. Clear (Use default value)

Retry 3times (Use default value)

Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)

Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)

Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 913

91

Inverter side settings For details on the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.

Connecting to FR-A800 or FR-F800 series (FR-A80, FR-A82, FR-A86, FR-A80-GN, FR-A82-GN, FR-F80, FR-F82, or FR-F86) Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. : Required : Set it as necessary

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-A800 and FR-F800 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Change the setting depending on the usage environment. *4 Specifying a value from [1] to [254] with the rotary switch of the inverter enables the settings of the switch.

When the setting is changed, the new setting is applied after the inverter reset or at the next power-on. *5 The time synchronization operation differs depending on whether the FR-LU08 is installed.

For details on the time synchronization operations, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

GOT connection destination

Parameters corresponding to inverter

CC-Link IE TSN port Pr.434 to 441, Pr.1442 to 1459

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Ethernet IP address 1 *2*4 Pr.434 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 2 *2*4 Pr.435 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 3 *2*4 Pr.436 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 4 *2*4 Pr.437 0 to 255

Subnet mask 1 *2 Pr.438 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 2 *2 Pr.439 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 3 *2 Pr.440 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 4 *2 Pr.441 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 1 Pr.1442 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 Pr.1443 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 Pr.1444 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 Pr.1445 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range specification Pr.1446 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range specification Pr.1447 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range specification Pr.1448 9999 (default) *3

Clock source selection Pr.1459 0 (default) *3*5

4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

Connecting to FR-E800 series (FR-E80-E) Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.

Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. : Required : Set it as necessary

*1 Setting items are the parameter names described in the FR-E800 series manuals. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Change the setting depending on the usage environment.

GOT connection destination

Parameters corresponding to inverter

CC-Link IE TSN port Pr.1427 to 1429, Pr.1434 to 1448

Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Ethernet function selection 1 Pr.1427 5001

Ethernet function selection 2 Pr.1428 45237

Ethernet function selection 3 Pr.1429 45238

Ethernet function selection 4 Pr.1430 9999

Ethernet IP address 1 *2 Pr.1434 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 2 *2 Pr.1435 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 3 *2 Pr.1436 0 to 255

Ethernet IP address 4 *2 Pr.1437 0 to 255

Subnet mask 1 *2 Pr.1438 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 2 *2 Pr.1439 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 3 *2 Pr.1440 255 (default) *3

Subnet mask 4 *2 Pr.1441 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 1 Pr.1442 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 Pr.1443 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 Pr.1444 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 Pr.1445 0 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range specification Pr.1446 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range specification Pr.1447 9999 (default) *3

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range specification Pr.1448 9999 (default) *3

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION 915

91

Precautions

GOT startup time Connecting to the PLC or inverter takes longer time in the CC-Link IE TSN connection. If you start the GOT while the connection is being established, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Connection status check after the GOT startup The connection with the network cannot be established until the connection check with the master station is completed after the GOT startup. To check the status of connection with the master station, use the CC-Link IE TSN Connection Status (GS1297) of the GOT internal device. For details on the CC-Link IE TSN Connection Status (GS1297), refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

15

15.5 Connection through a PLC Connection to FR-E700, FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800, or FR- E800

Inverter PLC Communication type *1 GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

CPU type Option device *5

Model

FR-E70-NE *8

FR-A80-E *7

FR-A82-E *7

FR-A86-E *7

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-E-AWH FR-A80-E-LC FR-F80-E *7

FR-F82-E *7

FR-E80-E

Ethernet RCPU For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION*12

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)*12

Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION*12

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION*12

Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION*4*12

*2 *2 *3

QCPU

LCPU

FR-A80 *6

FR-A82 *6

FR-A86 *6

FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF FR-A80-CRN *6

FR-A82-CRN *6

FR-A80-R2R *6

FR-A82-R2R *6

FR-A80-LC*6

FR-F80 *6

FR-F82 *6

FR-F86 *6

CC-Link IE Field Network *4*11

RCPU

QCPU

LCPU

FR-A80 *9

FR-A82 *9

FR-A86 *9

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN FR-F80 *9

FR-F82 *9

FR-F86 *9

FR-E80-E

CC-Link IE TSN *10 RCPU

GOTPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Inverter Ethernet CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE TSN

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 Connection through a PLC 917

91

*1 The connection type depends on the CPU model. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*2 The option devices and GOT models depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*3 The numbers of connectable devices below depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter Number of GOTs connectable to one PLC Number of PLCs connectable to one GOT

*4 When connecting the GOT and PLC using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection and then connecting an inverter, connect the inverter via a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (master station). In this case, a different network will be accessed, so the routing must be set.

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *6 CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Option (FR-A8NCE) is required.

Use a CC-Link IE Field Network communication option (FR-A8NCE) whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "83***" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on the CC-Link IE Field Network communication option (FR-A8NCE).

*7 When the communication type is the Ethernet connection and the communication format is TCP, use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "7Z******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*8 Use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "88******" or later. For FR-E700-SC-NNE and FR-E700-SC-ENE, use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is "89******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*9 A built-in option (FR-A8NCG) is required. Use an inverter whose SERIAL (serial No.) is the following. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*10 When connecting a GOT and inverter via the PLC, set the third octet of the inverter IP address to the network No., and the fourth octet to the station No. The following shows a setting example of the IP address when the network No. is "1" and the station No. is "2".

For the setting details, refer to the following. FR-A800-GN CC-LINK IE TSN FUNCTION MANUAL FR-A8NCG INSTRUCTION MANUAL

*11 Use an inverter with SERIAL (serial No.) "83******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is described on a rating plate of the inverter.

*12 To monitor other networks, routing parameter setting is necessary. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following. Routing parameter setting described in each chapter

GOT side settings The GOT settings depend on the connection type between the GOT and PLC. For details on the GOT settings, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

Country of origin indication SERIAL (serial No.) MADE in Japan 96****** and later

MADE in China 97****** and later

192.168

Station No.

Network No.

. 2. 1

8 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 Connection through a PLC

15

Inverter side settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.

Connection by Ethernet Communication settings For setting up the inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used For details on the communication port, parameters corresponding to the inverter, and communication settings of the inverter, refer to the following. Page 901 Connecting to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800 series (FR-A80-E, FR-A82-E, FR-A86-E, FR-F80-E, FR- F82-E, or FR-E80-E)

CC-Link IE Field Network connection Communication settings For setting up the inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used Communication port and corresponding parameters

Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled. : Required, : Set it as necessary

*1 The setting items are the parameter names described in the manuals of the FR-A800 and FR-F800 series. *2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.

When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. *3 Change the setting depending on the usage environment. *4 For FR-A80-R2R and FR-A82-R2R, this setting is unavailable.

GOT connection destination

Parameters corresponding to inverter

Ethernet connector Pr.79, Pr.313 to 315, Pr.338 to 340, Pr.342, Pr.349, Pr.434 to 435, Pr.500 to 502, Pr.541, Pr.550, Pr.779, Pr.804, Pr.810

Setting item *1 Parameter No. Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0 (default) *3

Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 10 *3

DO0 output selection Pr.313 9999 (default) *3

DO1 output selection Pr.314 9999 (default) *3

DO2 output selection Pr.315 9999 (default) *3

Communication operation command source Pr.338 0 (default) *3

Communication speed command source Pr.339 0 (default) *3

Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0 (default) *3

Communication reset selection Pr.349 0 (default) *3

Network number (CC-Link IE) *2 Pr.434 1 to 239

Station number (CC-Link IE) *2 Pr.435 1 to 120

Communication error execution waiting time Pr.500 0s (default) *3

Communication error occurrence count display Pr.501 0 (default) *3

Stop mode selection at communication error Pr.502 0 (default) *3

Frequency command sign selection Pr.541 0 (default) *3

NET mode operation command source selection Pr.550 0 *3

Operation frequency during communication error Pr.779 *4 9999 (default) *3

Torque command source selection Pr.804 0 (default) *3

Torque limit input method selection Pr.810 0 (default) *3

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 Connection through a PLC 919

92

Parameters for monitoring data specific to FR-A800 Plus series For how to monitor the winding length (upper + lower) (PV29) and actual line speed (PV27), refer to the following. Page 884 Parameters for monitoring data specific to FR-A800 Plus series

CC-Link IE TSN connection Communication settings For setting up the inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used For details on the communication port, parameters corresponding to the inverter, and communication settings of the inverter, refer to the following. Page 914 Connecting to FR-A800 or FR-F800 series (FR-A80, FR-A82, FR-A86, FR-A80-GN, FR-A82-GN, FR- F80, FR-F82, or FR-F86) Page 915 Connecting to FR-E800 series (FR-E80-E)

Precautions

When the device of the PLC and virtual device of the inverter are monitored simultaneously In the following cases, the device monitor speed of the PLC that passes through the GOT and inverter decreases. Monitoring the device of the PLC and virtual device of the inverter on the same screen or background Resetting the inverter By connecting a different channel for each controller with the multi-channel function, the decreasing device monitor speed of the PLC can be improved.

Link devices of CC-Link IE Field Network, CC-Link IE TSN, or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic connection When functions (signals) are assigned to link devices (RX, RY, RWr, RWw) on the inverter, the GOT cannot write data to these virtual devices. Example) CMD1 (Forward rotation command) Since the forward rotation command is assigned to RY0 on the inverter, the GOT cannot write data to the virtual device, or CMD1 (forward rotation command). For the functions (signals) assigned to the link devices (RX, RY, RWw, and RWr), refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used Control the functions (signals) assigned to the link devices (RX, RY, RWw, and RWr) on the master station. For CC-Link IE Field Network Basic connection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

0 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 Connection through a PLC

15

15.6 Settable Device Range Direct connection to inverter For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. Page 1692 [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] Page 1701 [FREQROL 800] Page 1709 [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]

Connection to inverter through PLC For details of the device setting, refer to the following. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Settable Device Range 921

92

MEMO

2 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Settable Device Range

16

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Page 923 Connectable Model List Page 925 Serial Connection Page 945 Ethernet Connection Page 964 Connection through a PLC Page 972 Settable Device Range Page 973 Precautions

16.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

MELSERVO-J2- Super

MR-J2S-A RS-232 RS-422

Page 925 Connection to the MELSERVO-J2- Super Series

MR-J2S-CP

MR-J2S-CL

MELSERVO-J2M MR-J2M-P8A RS-232 RS-422

Page 927 Connection to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

MR-J2M-DU

MELSERVO-J3 MR-J3-A RS-232 RS-422

Page 929 Connection to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series

MR-J3-T

MELSERVO-J4 MR-J4-A*1

MR-J4-A-RJ*1 RS-232

RS-422 Page 929 Connection to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series

MR-J4-B*2*6

MR-J4-B-RJ*2*6

MR-J4W2-B*2*6

MR-J4W3-B*2*6

*3 Page 964 Connection to MELSERVO-J4 series

MR-J4-GF*4

MR-J4-GF-RJ*4 *5

MELSERVO-J5 MR-J5-B MR-J5-B-RJ MR-J5W2-B MR-J5W3-B

*5 Page 966 Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

MR-J5-G *7

MR-J5-G-RJ *7

MR-J5W2-G *7

MR-J5W3-G *7

MR-J5D1-G4*7

MR-J5D2-G4*7

MR-J5D3-G4*7

*5 Page 966 Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5W2-G *8

MR-J5W3-G *8

MR-J5D1-G4 MR-J5D2-G4*8

MR-J5D3-G4*8

Ethernet Page 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

MELSERVO-JET MR-JET-G *7 *5 Page 966 Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

MR-JET-G Ethernet Page 945 Connection to the MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List 923

92

*1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version. *2 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion controller or Simple Motion module. *3 The communication type depends on the connection type between a motion CPU or PLC CPU and the GOT. *4 The models are connected to the GOT through a Simple Motion module or CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module. *5 The communication type depends on the connection type between a PLC CPU and the GOT. *6 If the models are J3-compatible, the GOT cannot monitor the servo amplifiers. *7 The models are connected to the GOT through a Motion module or CC-Link IE TSN master/local module. *8 The connection with the PLC through a CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is not supported.

MELSERVO-JE MR-JE-A RS-422 Page 933 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE- A Series

MR-JE-B*2

MR-JE-BF*2 *3 Page 970

Connection to MELSERVO-JE- B series

MR-JE-C Ethernet Page 948 Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C Series

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List

16

16.2 Serial Connection Connection to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series

When connecting via RS-232 communication

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MR-J2S-A*1

MR-J2S-CP*1

MR-J2S-CL*1

RS-232 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1) +

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

RS-232 connection diagram 3) 15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

Servo amplifier GOT

Connection cable

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 925

92

When connecting via RS-422 communication

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Up to 10 servo amplifiers can be connected to GS21-W. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Connection diagram number

Option device*3 Model

MR-J2S-A*1

MR-J2S-CP*1

MR-J2S-CL*1

RS-422 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT) 30m Up to 32 servo amplifiers for 1 GOT*2 (multi-drop communication)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

6 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Connection to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

When connecting via RS-232 communication

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MR-J2M-P8A*1

MR-J2M-DU*1 RS-232 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)

or RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1) +

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

RS-232 connection diagram 3) 15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

Servo amplifier GOT

Connection cable

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 927

92

When connecting via RS-422 communication

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Up to 10 servo amplifiers can be connected to GS21-W. *3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

MR-J2M-P8A*1

MR-J2M-DU*1 RS-422 RS-422 connection

diagram 1) 30m - (Built into GOT) 0 to 31 servo

amplifiers for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

8 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Connection to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series

When connecting to one servo amplifier

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name RS-422/232 interface converter RS-422/232 conversion cable

Communication type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*5 Model

MR-J4-A*1

MR-J4-A-RJ*1

MR-J3-A*1

MR-J3-T*1

DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2

or FA-T-RS40VS*3

RS-232 - 2.5m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

- RS-422 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

RS-422/232 converter GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifier

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 929

93

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation. *3 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together. Use the provided cables to connect devices. * FA-T-RS40VS stopped being produced at the end of March, 2013. The replacement product is not produced.

*4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

0 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers RS-232 connection

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this product,

contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together. Use the cables packed together to connect.

*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector.

* FA-T-RS40VS stopped being produced at the end of March, 2013. The replacement product is not produced. *5 Up to 10 servo amplifiers can be connected to GS21-W. *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplif ier*1

Terminat ing cable

Connecti on cable 1)

Distribu tor *3

Connecti on cable 2)

Distribu tor *3

RS-422/232 interface converter*2

Connecti on cable 3)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connec table equipm ent

Model name

Connect ion diagram number

Connecti on diagram number

Model name

Connecti on diagram number

Model name

Model name

Commu nication type

Connecti on diagram number

Option device *6

Model

MR-J4- A*1

MR-J4- A-RJ*1

MR-J3- A*1

MR-J3- T*1

RS- 422 connection diagram 5)

RS- 422 connection diagram 4)

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

RS- 422 connection diagram 3)

BMJ-8 (Recomm ended)

FA-T- RS40VS

RS-232 - - (Built into GOT)

30m Up to 32 servo amplifiers for 1 GOT*5

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

4

RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

RS-422/232 converterDistributor

Connection cable 1)

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 931

93

RS-422 connection

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. *3 Up to 10 servo amplifiers can be connected to GS21-W. *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier*1 Terminati ng cable

Connecti on cable 1)

Distributor *2

Connecti on cable 2)

Distributor *2

Connecti on cable 3)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connecta ble equipme nt

Model name

Commu nication type

Connecti on diagram number

Connecti on diagram number

Model name

Connecti on diagram number

Model name

Connecti on diagram number

Option device *4

Model

MR-J4- A*1

MR-J4- A-RJ*1

MR-J3- A*1

MR-J3- T*1

RS-422 RS- 422 connection diagram 5)

RS- 422 connection diagram 4)

BMJ-8 (Recommend ed)

RS- 422 connection diagram 3)

BMJ-8 (Recommend ed)

RS- 422 connection diagram 2)

- (Built into GOT)

30m Up to 32 servo amplifiers for 1 GOT*3

GT15- RS4-9S

GT10- C02H- 9SC

RS- 422 connection diagram 7)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOTDistributor

Connection cable 3)Connection cable 2)Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)

Distributor

Connection cable 1)

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-A Series

*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN1. *2 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *3 Up to 10 servo amplifiers can be connected to GS21-W.

Servo amplifier*1 Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

type Connection diagram number

Option device *2 Model

MR-JE-A*1 RS-422 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT) 30m Up to 32 servo amplifiers for 1 GOT (multi-drop communication) *3

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 933

93

Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier.

RS-232 cable RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

Connector for interface unit's or servo amplifier's CN3

1

3

9

2

5

7

8

6

4

GOT side

Plate

2

1

12

11

CD/NC*1

SD(TXD)

-

RD(RXD)

SG

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

DR(DSR)

ER(DTR)

FG

RXD

LG

TXD

LG

GOT side Connection cable side

3

2

1

4

5

6

7

8

9

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

ER(DTR)

DR(DSR)

SG

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

NC

TXD

RXD

-

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

-

Connector for interface unit's or servo amplifier's CN3

GOT side

2

1

12

11

Plate

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

ER(DTR)

DR(DSR)

SG

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

NC

RXD

LG

TXD

LG

FG

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Precautions when preparing cable Cable length The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

RS-422 cable RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*1 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN.

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

GOT side

SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

SD

Connector for interface unit's

or 2nd axis servo amplifier's CN3

SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

SD

RXD+(RDA)

RXD-(RDB)

TXD+(SDA)

TXD-(SDB)

SG(GND)

RTS+(RSA)

RTS-(RSB)

CTS+(CSA)

CTS-(CSB)

2

7

1

6

5

3

8

4

9

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

Connector for interface unit's

or 1st axis servo

amplifier's CN3

Connector for interface unit's

or 32nd axis (last axis)

servo amplifier's CN3 *1

SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

SD

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

GOT side Modular connector

(Servo amplifier side/Distributor side)

3

5

2

7

1

6

4

8

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

FG

RDP

SDP

P5D

LG

LG

RDN

SDN

NC

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 935

93

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible.

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP (3-pin) and RDN (6-pin) with a 150 resistor.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Distributor side (Modular connector)

Distributor side (Modular connector)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

LG

P5D

RDP

SDN

SDP

RDN

LG

NC

LG

P5D

RDP

SDN

SDP

RDN

LG

NC

*1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Distributor side (Modular connector)

Servo amplifier side (Modular connector)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

LG

P5D

RDP

SDN

SDP

RDN

LG

NC

LG

P5D

RDP

SDN

SDP

RDN

LG

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Distributor side (Modular connector)

LG

P5D

RDP

SDN

SDP

RDN

LG

NC

*1

6 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*1 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN. *2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

GOT side

Connector for interface unit's or

2nd axis servo amplifier's CN3

Connector for interface unit's or

1st axis servo amplifier's CN3 SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

SDP

SDN

RDP

RDN

LG

LG

TRE

9

19

5

15

11

1

10

Plate

*2

*2

*2

*2

Connector for interface unit's or

32nd axis (last axis) CN3)*1

GOT side Modular connector

(Servo amplifier side/Distributor side)

3

6

5

4

1

7

2

8

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB *1

*1

*1

*1

RDP

RDN

SDP

SDN

LG

LG

P5D

NC

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 937

93

Precautions when preparing cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications Servo amplifier connector Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier. For details, refer to the following. See the technical data of the servo amplifier to be used. Servo amplifier connector specifications Pin layout in the Modular connector

Connector of cable between MELSERVO Series servo amplifiers

Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products. (Refer to the manual for the servo amplifier.)

Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a Servo Amplifier to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 . For GS21-W Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

Pin No. Signal name 1 LG

2 P5D

3 RDP

4 SDN

5 SDP

6 RDN

7 LG

8 NC

Name Model name Specifications Manufacturer Connector TM10P-88P (Plug) RJ45 connector HIROSE ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.

Modular ceiling rosette (Distributor)

BMJ-8 - HAKKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. TEL(03)-3806-9171

Cable - Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as cable 10BASE-T)

-

When seen from the front of the servo amplifier (receptacle side)

Modular jack

8 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 940 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 939

94

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)

8bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

Even (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the station number of the servo amplifier in the system configuration. (Default: 0)

0 to 31

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Station No. Selection Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is fixed to "0." (Default: Yes)

Yes/No

0 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Servo amplifier side settings

Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series

MELSERVO-J2-Super Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series, refer to the following manual. MELSERVO-J2-Super Series Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual

Parameters of MELSERVO-J2-Super Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other axes. *2 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 939 GOT side settings

*3 To change the set value, enter "000E" to basic parameter No. 19.

Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software.

When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.

Model name Refer to MELSERVO-J2-Super Series Page 941 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series

MELSERVO-J2M Series Page 942 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE-A, JE Series Page 943 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3, JE-A Series

Item Set value Basic parameter No. 15 Station number setting: 0 to 31

(Default: 0)*1

Basic parameter No. 16 Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000)

(1)Serial communication baud rate selection*2

0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps (2)Serial communication I/F selection 0: RS-232 1: RS-422 (3)Communication response delay time selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid (Response after 800s or longer delay)

In case of MR-J2S-: Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 In case of MR-J2S-CP: Expansion parameter 2 No. 57 In case of MR-J2S-CL: Expansion parameter 2 No. 57

Function selection 8 (Default: 0000)*3

(1)Station No. selection for protocol 0: With station No. 1: Without station No.

0(3) (2) (1) Basic parameter No. 16

0 00 Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 or No. 57

(1)

MODE UP DOWN SET

Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 941

94

Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

MELSERVO-J2M Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the following manual. MELSERVO-J2M Series Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual

Parameter of MELSERVO-J2M Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series.

*1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 939 GOT side settings

*2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units.

Item Set value Basic IFU parameter No. 0

Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000)

(1)Serial communication baud rate selection*1

0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps (2)Serial communication I/F selection 0: RS-232 1: RS-422 (3)Communication response delay time selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid (Response after 800s or longer delay)

Basic IFU parameter No. 10

Interface unit serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 0) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 11

Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 1) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 12

Slot 2 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 2) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 13

Slot 3 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 3) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 14

Slot 4 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 4) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 15

Slot 5 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 5) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 16

Slot 6 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 6) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 17

Slot 7 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 7) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 18

Slot 8 serial communication station No. selection: 0 to 31 (Default: 8) *2

Basic IFU parameter No. 0 0(3) (2) (1)

2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software.

When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.

Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3, JE-A Series

MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE-A Series For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series, refer to the following manual. MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual

Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE-A Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other axes. *2 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 939 GOT side settings

Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software.

When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.

Item Set value Basic parameter No. PC20

Station number setting: 0 to 31 (Default: 0)*1

Basic parameter No. PC21

Serial communication function selection (Default: 0000)

(1)Serial communication baud rate selection*2

0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps 4: 115200bps (2)Communication response delay time selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid (Response after 800s or longer delay)

MODE UP DOWN SET

Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier

(2) (1) Basic parameter No. PC21

MODE UP DOWN SET

Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection 943

94

Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3,the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No.specification will be the station No.of the servo amplifier.

All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. For write-in operation, all station will be a target. For read-out operation, only one station will be a target.

Specification range 0 to 31

Specification station NO. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 0 to 31

For the setting other than the above, a communication timeout error will occur.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

Station NO.3

Station NO.0

Station NO.1

Station NO.21

Station NO. 6

Examples of station number setting

GOT

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 Serial Connection

16

16.3 Ethernet Connection Connection to the MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

When connecting a servo amplifier and PLC or Motion module by the CC-Link IE TSN connection

*1 Use a hub to connect the servo amplifier. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T standard.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Controller Commu nication type

Connection cable External device

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Cable model Maximum segment length*2

Cable model Maximum segment length*2

Option device*3

GOT Model

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5W2-G MR-J5W3-G MR-J5D1-G4 MR-J5D2-G4 MR-J5D3-G4 MR-JET-G

Ethernet 1000BASE-T Double-shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or twisted pair cable: Category 5e or higher

100 m Hub*1 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT25- J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MELSERVO),Gateway

GOTServo amplifier Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

PLC

CC-Link IE TSN

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 945

94

When connecting servo amplifiers and PLC by the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic connection Direct connection to a servo amplifier

*1 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*2 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable Maximum segment length*1

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*2

Model

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5D1-G4 MR-JET-G

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MELSERVO),Gateway

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifierServo amplifierPLC

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

6 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

Connection via a hub

*1 Use a hub to connect the servo amplifier. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX standard.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Controller Commu nication type

Connection cable External device

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Cable model Maximum segment length*2

Cable model Maximum segment length*2

Option device*3

GOT Mode l

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5D1-G4 MR-JET-G

Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m Hub*1 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier

GT25- J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MELSERVO),Gateway

GOTServo amplifier Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

PLC

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 947

94

Connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C Series

When connecting to one servo amplifier

*1 The connection destination of the twisted pair cable differs depending on the configuration of the Ethernet network system to be used. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, the wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA, NZ2WL-JPS) or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX standard. For the controller to which the wireless LAN adapter can be connected and the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter, refer to the manual of the wireless LAN adapter.

*2 When connecting Servo amplifier and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, remember that the by cross cable is available. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*3 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection cable*1*2 Maximum segment length*3

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*4

Model

MR-JE-C Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MELSERVO),Gateway

GOT

Connection cable

Servo amplifier

8 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers

*1 Use a hub to connect the servo amplifier. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX standard.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Use the straight cable for the twisted pair cable. *4 For details, refer to the manual of MELSERVO-JE-C.

One GOT is recommended to connect to MELSERVO-JE-C. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Controller Commu nication type

Connection cable External device

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Cable model*3 Maximum segment length*3

Cable model*3 Maximum segment length*2

Option device*5

GOT Model

MR-JE-C Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m Hub*1 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher

100 m - (Built into GOT)

When servo amplifier:GOT is N:1 128 or less servo amplifiers for one GOT When servo amplifier:GOT is 1:N The following number of GOTs for one servo amplifierDepends on MELSERVO-JE- C*4

GT25- J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MELSERVO),Gateway

GOTServo amplifier Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 949

95

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected. [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] [MELSERVO-JE-*C] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 940 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

0 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 953 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 MR-JE-C is not supported.

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

1 (fixed) 1 (fixed)

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 254

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Servo amplifier. (Default: 5035)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the Servo amplifier. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000(ms)

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points) *2

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 952 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 951

95

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup. Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap. Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting When the model is [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]

*1 [Net No.] and [Station] should match [Network No.] and [Station No.] set for the monitoring target device. *2 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Page 951 Communication detail settings *3 Since [0.0.0.0] and [255.255.255.255] cannot be set in the servo amplifier, set the IP address within the range of [0.0.0.1] to

[255.255.255.254]. When [0.0.0.0] or [255.255.255.255] is set, a communication error occurs.

Item Description Range Host The host is displayed.

(The host is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Net No. *1 Set the network No. of the connected Servo amplifier. 1 (fixed)

1 (fixed)

Station*1*2 Set the station No. of the connected Servo amplifier. (Default: 1)

1 to 254

Unit Type MR-J5(D)-G/MR-JET-G (fixed) MR-J5(D)-G/MR-JET-G (fixed)

IP address Set the IP address of the connected Servo amplifier. (Default: 192.168.3.1)

0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.254 *3

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Servo amplifier. 5010 (fixed)

5010 (fixed)

Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 953

95

When the model is [MELSERVO-JE-*C]

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 951 Communication detail settings

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Host The host is displayed.

(The host is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Servo amplifier. 1 (fixed)

1 (fixed)

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected Servo amplifier. (Default: 1)

1 to 254

Unit Type MR-JE-C (fixed) MR-JE-C (fixed)

IP address Set the IP address of the connected Servo amplifier. (Default: 192.168.3.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No./Communication Set the port No. of the connected Servo amplifier. (Default: 5010) Communication format differs depending on the port No. to be set. When the port No. is [5010], the communication is [UDP] (fixed). When the port No. is [5012], the communication is [TCP] (fixed).

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] for GT21 and GS21 Effective range of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] Only [1] to [4] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] can be used for GT21 and GS21. If [5] onwards are used, the settings are invalid on GT21 or GS21. [Host] setting Set [Host] within the range from [1] to [4] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Only [1] to [4] can be used.

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 955

95

Servo amplifier side settings This section describes the settings of the GOT and servo amplifier in the following system configuration.

Servo amplifier For the details of the servo amplifier, refer to the following. Manual of the MELSERVO-J5 Manual of the MELSERVO-JET Manual of the MELSERVO-JE-C

Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series System configuration The following shows a system configuration example for connection to the MELSERVO-J5 series.

*1 Although the setting is nonexistent on the servo amplifier side, set a virtual value on the GOT side. Page 958 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5035 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No. : 2 (virtual) *1

IP address : 192.168.3.1 Port No. : 5010 (fixed) Communication format : UDP (fixed)

6 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

IP address setting The following shows an example of servo amplifier settings for connection to the MELSERVO-J5 series. [Network basic] of MR Configurator2

IP address setting

Setting item Description Setting value [NPA01] Select whether to set the IP address with the rotary switches or parameter.

The following shows the IP address when the rotary switches are used. First octet to third octet: Values set in [NPA02] Fourth octet: Values set with the rotary switches SW1 and SW2

When the parameter is used, the values set in [NPA02] are used as the IP address.

0: Use rotary switch 1: Use parameter

[NPA02] Set the IP address. 192.168.3.1 (Default)

[NPA04] Set the subnet mask. 255.255.255.0 (Default)

Setting value of [NPA01] Rotary switch (SW1, SW2) IP address 0 : Use rotary switch 00h First octet The first octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Second octet The second octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Third octet The third octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Fourth octet The fourth octet set in [NPA02] is used.

01h to FEh First octet The first octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Second octet The second octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Third octet The third octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Fourth octet The setting values of the rotary switches (SW1 and SW2) are used.

FFh First octet Use prohibited

Second octet

Third octet

Fourth octet

1 : Use parameter First octet The first octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Second octet The second octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Third octet The third octet set in [NPA02] is used.

Fourth octet The fourth octet set in [NPA02] is used.

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 957

95

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 The following shows an example of GOT settings for connection to the MELSERVO-J5 series. Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.

Checking the communication status of the servo amplifier When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Reply from 192.168.3.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of servo amplifier Ethernet port specified by Ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5035

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 (fixed)

Station 2*1

Unit Type MR-J5(D)-G/MR-JET-G

IP address 192.168.3.1

Port No. 5010

Communication UDP

8 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

When connecting to MELSERVO-JE-C (when connecting to GOT and one servo amplifier) System configuration The following shows a system configuration example for connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C series.

*1 PC No. corresponds to "Identification number" on the servo amplifier side. *2 The fourth octet of IP address follows PC No. (Identification number).

Setting of the identification number and IP address on the servo amplifier side The following shows an example of servo amplifier settings for connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C series. Set the identification number of the servo amplifier using the rotary switch SW1 and SW2 in front of the servo amplifier. The fourth octet of IP address follows the identification number of the servo amplifier.

*1 Cannot be set by the rotary switch SW1 and SW2.

Setting item Setting range Range Identification number 01H to FEH 02H

First octet*1 192 (Default) 192 (Default)

Second octet*1 168 (Default) 168 (Default)

Third octet*1 3 (Default) 3 (Default)

Fourth octet 1 to 254

The value of the identification number converted from the hexadecimal number to the decimal number is the value of the fourth octet of IP address on the servo amplifier side.

2

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5035 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No.*1 :2*2

IP address : 192.168.3.2*2

Port No. : 5010 (fixed) Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Rotary switch SW1 and SW2

0123456789AB C

D

EF 0123456789AB C

D

EF

F E

hexadecimal number

FE

decimal number

254

SW1 SW2

0123456789AB C

D

EF 0123456789AB C

D

EF

0 2

hexadecimal number

02

decimal number

2

SW1 SW2

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 959

96

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 The following shows an example of GOT settings for connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C series. Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No. *2 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5012 [Communication]: TCP

Checking the communication status of the servo amplifier When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.2 Reply from 192.168.3.2:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.2 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of servo amplifier Ethernet port specified by Ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5035

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1 (fixed)

Station 2*1

Unit Type MR-JE-C

IP address 192.168.3.2

Port No.*2 5010

Communication*2 UDP

0 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

When connecting to MELSERVO-JE-C (when connecting to GOT and multiple servo amplifiers) System configuration The following shows a system configuration example for connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C series.

*1 PC No. corresponds to "Identification number" on the servo amplifier side. *2 The fourth octet of IP address follows PC No. (Identification number).

Setting of the identification number and IP address on the servo amplifier side The following shows an example of servo amplifier settings for connection to the MELSERVO-JE-C series. Set the identification number of the servo amplifier using the rotary switch SW1 and SW2 in front of the servo amplifier. The fourth octet of IP address follows the identification number of the servo amplifier. For details of the setting method, refer to the following. Page 959 When connecting to MELSERVO-JE-C (when connecting to GOT and one servo amplifier)

*1 Cannot be set by the rotary switch SW1 and SW2.

Setting item Set value

1 2 Identification number 02H 03H

First octet*1 192 (Default) 192 (Default)

Second octet*1 168 (Default) 168 (Default)

Third octet*1 3 (Default) 3 (Default)

Fourth octet 2 3

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No. :1 IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5035 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No.*1 :2*2

IP address : 192.168.3.2*2

Port No. : 5010 (fixed) Communication format : UDP (fixed)

1

2 Network No. : 1 (fixed) PC No.*1 :3*2

IP address : 192.168.3.3*2

Port No. : 5010 (fixed) Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Rotary switch SW1 and SW2

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 961

96

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 The following shows a setting example on the GOT side for connecting to the MELSERVO-JE-C series. Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No. *2 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.

[Port No.]: 5012 [Communication]: TCP

Checking the communication status of the servo amplifier When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. 1) At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.2 Reply from 192.168.3.2:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 2) At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.2 Request timed out. At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) IP address of servo amplifier Ethernet port specified by Ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5035

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value

1 2 Ethernet setting No.1 Host * -

Net No. 1 (fixed) 1 (fixed)

Station 2*1 3*1

Unit Type MR-JE-C MR-JE-C

IP address 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.3

Port No.*2 5010 5010

Communication*2 UDP UDP

2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection

16

Communication setting other than identification number setting by the rotary switch SW1 and SW2 Communication setting can also be set by the following method other than identification number setting by the rotary switch SW1 and SW2. Method for using SLMP command (IP Address Set) Method for using MR Configurator2 For details, refer to the following manual. Manual of the MELSERVO-JE-C

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Ethernet Connection 963

96

16.4 Connection through a PLC Connection to MELSERVO-J4 series

When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module

*1 The connection type depends on the CPU model. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*2 The option devices and GOT models depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*3 The numbers of connectable devices below depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter Number of GOTs connectable to one motion controller or PLC Number of motion controllers or PLCs connectable to one GOT

*4 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042. *5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier Motion controller CPU, or PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communicat ion type

Simple motion module or master/ local module

CPU type

Communication type*1 Option device *5

Model

MR-J4-B MR-J4-B-RJ MR-J4W2-B MR-J4W3-B

SSCNETIII/H - RnMT Q17nDS Q170MS

For the system configuration between the GOT and the motion controller or PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

*2 *2 *3

RD77MS2 RD77MS4 RD77MS8 RD77MS16

RnCPU

QD77MS2 *4

QD77MS4 *4

QD77MS16 *4

QnCPU

LD77MS2 LD77MS4 LD77MS16

LnCPU

FX5-40SSC-S FX5-80SSC-S

FX5CPU

SSCNET /H

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

Motion controller CPU, or PLC CPU

Varies according to the connection type.

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC

16

When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a simple motion module or CC- Link IE field network master/local module

*1 The connection type depends on the CPU model. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*2 The option devices and GOT models depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*3 The numbers of connectable devices below depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter Number of GOTs connectable to one PLC Number of PLCs connectable to one GOT

*4 When connecting the GOT and PLC using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection and then connecting a servo amplifier, connect the servo amplifier through a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (master station). In this case, a different network will be accessed, so the routing must be set.

*5 Use the following version or later.

*6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *7 To monitor other networks, routing parameter setting is necessary.

For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following. Routing parameter setting described in each chapter

Servo amplifier PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communicat ion type

Simple motion module or master/local module

CPU type

Communication type*1 Option device*6

Model

MR-J4-GF MR-J4-GF-RJ

CC-Link IE Field network*4

RD77GF4*5

RD77GF8*5

RD77GF16*5

RD77GF32

RCPU For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION *7

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/ 10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) *7

Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION *7

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION *7

Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *4

*2 *2 *3

QD77GF4*5

QD77GF8*5

QD77GF16*5

QCPU

RnENCPU RCPU

RJ71EN71 RJ71GF11-T2

RCPU

QJ71GF11-T2*5 QCPU

LJ71GF11-T2*5 LCPU

Simple motion module or master/local module Motion mode I/O mode RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16 Software version [01] or later Software version [02] or later

QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16 From first product First 5 digits of serial No. 18022 or higher

QJ71GF11-T2 - First 5 digits of serial No. 14102 or higher

LJ71GF11-T2 - First 5 digits of serial No. 14102 or higher

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CC-Link IE Field network

PLC

Varies according to the connection type.

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC 965

96

Connection to MELSERVO-J5 or JET series

When connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier through a Motion controller or Simple Motion module

*1 The connection type depends on the CPU model. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*2 The option devices and GOT models depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*3 The numbers of connectable devices below depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter Number of GOTs connectable to one motion controller or PLC Number of motion controllers or PLCs connectable to one GOT

*4 Use a module that has a serial number starting with 23092 or later. *5 Use a module with OS software version 00Y or later. *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier Motion controller CPU, or PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Simple Motion module

CPU type

Communication type*1 Option device *6

Model

MR-J5-B MR-J5-B-RJ MR-J5W2-B MR-J5W3-B

SSCNETIII/H - RnMT Q17nDS*5

For the system configuration between the GOT and the motion controller or PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

*2 *2 *3

RD77MS2 RD77MS4 RD77MS8 RD77MS16

RnCPU

QD77MS2*4

QD77MS4*4

QD77MS16*4

QnCPU

SSCNET /H

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

Motion controller CPU, or PLC CPU

Varies according to the connection type.

6 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC

16

When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a Motion module

*1 Select either of the following for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. For RnCPU and RnENCPU: [RCPU] For R12CCPU-V: [RnCCPU/RnWCPU] Set either of the following values for [Port No.] according to the communication method. UDP: [5006] TCP: [5007] For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*2 Select [FX5CPU] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*3 To monitor other networks, routing parameter setting is necessary. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Servo amplifier PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Motion module*5

CPU type Communication type Option device*4 Model

MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5W2-G MR-J5W3-G MR-J5D1-G4 MR-J5D2-G4 MR-J5D3-G4 MR-JET-G

CC-Link IE TSN RD78G4 RD78G8 RD78G16 RD78G32 RD78G64 RD78GHV RD78GHW

RnCPU*1

RnENCPU*1

R12CCPU-V*1

For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module *3

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 motion module

GT25-J71E71-100

FX5-40SSC-G FX5-80SSC-G

FX5U*2

FX5UC*2 For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module *3

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 motion module

GT25-J71E71-100

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CC-Link IE TSN

PLC

Ethernet

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC 967

96

*5 When monitoring a servo amplifier through a Motion module, the available mode on the servo amplifier varies depending on the firmware version of the Motion module to be used. The following shows the details.

Motion module Motion mode Simple Motion mode RD78G4 RD78G8 RD78G16

From the first product Firmware version 16 or later

RD78G32 RD78G64

From the first product Unavailable

RD78GHV RD78GHW

From the first product Unavailable

FX5-40SSC-G FX5-80SSC-G

Unavailable From the first product

8 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC

16

When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a CC-Link IE TSN master/local module

*1 Select either of the following for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. For RnCPU, RnENCPU, or RnSFCPU: [RCPU] For R12CCPU-V or R102WCPU-W: [RnCCPU/RnWCPU] Set either of the following values for [Port No.] when the communication format is: UDP: [5006] TCP: [5007] For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 254 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*2 To monitor other networks, routing parameter setting is necessary. For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following. Page 259 Routing parameter setting

*3 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *4 For the number of connectable GOTs and PLCs, refer to the following.

Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module *5 Use one with firmware version 11 or later. *6 Use one whose firmware version is as shown below.

Servo amplifier PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

CC-Link IE TSN master/ local module

CPU type*1 Communication type Option device*3 Model

MR-J5-G*6

MR-J5-G-RJ*6

MR-J5W2-G*6

MR-J5W3-G*6

MR-J5D1-G4*6

MR-J5D2-G4*6

MR-J5D3-G4*6

MR-JET-G*6

CC-Link IE TSN RJ71GN11-T2*5 RnCPU RnENCPU RnSFCPU R12CCPU-V R102WCPU-W

For the system configuration between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following. Page 233 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module *2

- (Built into GOT) *4

GT25-J71E71-100

Servo amplifier Applicable firmware version MR-J5-G MR-J5-G-RJ MR-J5W2-G MR-J5W3-G MR-JET-G

B9 or later

MR-J5D1-G4 MR-J5D2-G4 MR-J5D3-G4

C0 or later

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

CC-Link IE TSN

PLC

Ethernet

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC 969

97

Connection to MELSERVO-JE-B series

*1 The connection type depends on the CPU model. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*2 The option devices and GOT models depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter

*3 The numbers of connectable devices below depend on the connection type. [System Configuration] section in each chapter Number of GOTs connectable to one motion controller or PLC Number of motion controllers or PLCs connectable to one GOT

*4 Use the firmware version later than 3. *5 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 16102.

Servo amplifier Motion controller CPU, or PLC GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication type

Simple motion module

CPU type

Communication type*1 Option device

Model

MR-JE-B MR-JE-BF

SSCNETIII/H RD77MS*4 RnCPU For the system configuration between the GOT and the motion controller or PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/ 10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

*2 *2 *3

QD77MS*5 QnCPU

LD77MS*5 LnCPU

FX5-40SSC-S FX5CPU

GOTServo amplifier

Servo amplifier

Motion controller CPU, or PLC CPU

Varies according to the connection type.

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

0 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC

16

GOT side settings

Connection through Motion controller or PLC The settings of the GOT depend on the connection type between the GOT and the Motion module or the GOT and the PLC CPU. For details of the GOT side settings, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

Connection through Motion module The settings of the GOT depend on the connection type between the GOT and the PLC CPU. For details of the GOT side settings, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 Connection through a PLC 971

97

16.5 Settable Device Range Direct connection For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For the range of devices usable in the GOT when the GOT and servo amplifier are directly connected, refer to the following. Page 1534 [MELSERVO-J2M-P8A] Page 1541 [MELSERVO-J2M-*DU] Page 1549 [MELSERVO-J2S-*A] Page 1557 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] Page 1567 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] Page 1576 [MELSERVO-J3-*A] Page 1586 [MELSERVO-J3-*T] Page 1599 [MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] Page 1616 [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] Page 1639 [MELSERVO-JE-*C] Page 1657 [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]

Connection through Motion controller or PLC For the range of devices usable in the GOT when the GOT and servo amplifier are connected through a Motion controller or Simple Motion module, refer to the following. Page 1367 Settable Device Range

2 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Settable Device Range

16

16.6 Precautions

Station number setting in the servo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 939 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

GOT clock function Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock function, the settings of [Adjust] or [Broadcast] by GOT clock control will be disabled.

Servo amplifier/test operation using the GOT During the servo amplifier/test operation, when the communication between the GOT and the servo amplifier is interrupted for 0.5[ms] or more, the servo amplifier decelerates, stops, and then gets into the servo lock status. During the servo amplifier/ test operation, continue the communication constantly by monitoring the status display of the servo amplifier on the GOT screen, etc.

When connecting multiple GOTs Do not monitor the same servo amplifier simultaneously with multiple GOTs. If multiple GOTs simultaneously write data to a device of the same servo amplifier, the servo amplifier may malfunction.

When multiple GOTs and the servo amplifier are connected by Ethernet connection If the same servo amplifier is monitored (read) by multiple GOTs simultaneously, the servo amplifier may not receive all the commands and the GOTs may not monitor (read) the servo amplifier correctly.

When monitoring same communication channel, PLC and servo amplifier at the same time Deterioration of the monitoring performance If devices of the PLC and servo amplifier are monitored on the same screen or back ground, the monitoring performance

will slow down. If devices of multiple servo amplifiers are monitored on the same screen, the monitoring performance will slow down.

How to improve deterioration of monitoring performance Separating the channel numbers used for the controllers connected by using the multi-channel function can prevent

slowdown in monitoring of the PLC devices.

When monitoring the servo amplifier for multiple axes at the same communication channel Deterioration of monitoring performance If devices of the servo amplifier for multiple axes are monitored on the same screen or back ground, the monitoring

performance may extremely slow down.

How to improve deterioration of monitoring performance The number of the axes which is monitored on the same screen or back ground should be 4 or less. Using the multi-channel function, set the monitor of the servo amplifier for multiple axes to the different channel separately

per 4 axes.

16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Precautions 973

97

MEMO

4 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Precautions

17

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION Page 975 Connectable Model List Page 976 System Configuration Page 977 GOT Side Settings Page 984 Robot Controller Side Settings Page 989 Settable Device Range Page 989 Precautions

17.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 For details on the connection with CR800-R (R16RTCPU), CRnQ-700/CR750-Q/CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU), and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU), refer to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS.

*2 When the robot controller is connected, use the GOT outside the safety fence.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model*2 Refer to

Robot controller*1

CR800-D CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

Ethernet Page 976 Connection to robot controller (CR800-D, CRnD-700)

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List 975

97

17.2 System Configuration Connection to robot controller (CR800-D, CRnD-700)

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*2 When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub. *3 Length between a hub and a node

The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*4 For the system configuration of CR800-D, refer to the following manual. Manuals of CR800-D

*5 Select [CR800] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 983 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*6 For the system configuration of CRnD-700, CR750-D/CR751-D, refer to the following manual. CRnD-700, CR750-D/CR751-D SET UP MANUAL

*7 Select [CRnD-700] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 983 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

Robot controller Connection cable*1*2 Maximum segment length*3

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication type

Option device*8 Model

CR800-D*4*5

CRnD-700*6*7

CR750-D*6*7

CR751-D*6*7

Ethernet Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3, 4, or 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) of category 5 or 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Robot controller Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

6 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.2 System Configuration

17

17.3 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] When using the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100), also select [Ethernet:Multi]. [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 978 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 977

97

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 983 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

Example of [Controller Setting] For examples of [Controller Setting], refer to the following. Page 984 Robot Controller Side Settings

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18) 1 to 64

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5001*2)

1024 to 5010 and 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 979 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 980 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 981 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520 0 to 2032

8 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings

17

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 979

98

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

0 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings

17

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 981

98

GOT Ethernet setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

2 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings

17

Connected Ethernet controller setting

*1 Selected from [CRnD-700] and [CR800] for [Controller Type]. *2 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Page 978 Communication detail settings

Example of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] For examples of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting], refer to the following. Page 984 Robot Controller Side Settings Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1) 1 to 239

Station*2 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1) 1 to 64

Unit Type*1 Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. CRnD-700, CR800

CRnD-700, CR800

IP address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No./Communication The port No. and communication that can be set differ depending on the [Unit Type]. When the port No. is [5006], the communication is [UDP] (fixed). When the port No. is [5007], the communication is [TCP] (fixed).

Port No. can be set only [5001], and the communication is [UDP] (fixed).

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 983

98

17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings

Connection to robot controller (CR800-D) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration.

Robot controller (CR800-D) For details of the robot controller (CR800-D), refer to the following manual. CR800-D SET UP MANUAL

System configuration

*1 These setting items do not exist at the robot controller side. However, the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Page 985 [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Parameter settings for CR800-D Set the parameters using RT ToolBox3 Select [Online] [Parameter] [Communication Parameter] [Ethernet] and set [IP Address].

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Model Reference Robot controller CR800-D Page 984 Connection to robot controller (CR800-D)

CRnD-700 Page 986 Connection to robot controller (CRnD-700)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address (NETIP) 192.168.0.19

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 (virtual)*1

PC No. :2 (virtual)*1

IP address :192.168.0.19

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 PC No. :18 IP address :192.168.0.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :UDP (fixed)

4 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings

17

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 977 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Controller Setting

GOT Ethernet Setting

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set. [Port No.]: 5007 [Communication]: TCP

Checking communication state of CR800-D When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the following and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of CR800-D (faulty or not) The IP address of CR800-D specified in the ping command

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT PC No. 18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3 times

Startup Time 3 sec

Timeout Time 3 sec

Delay Time 0 ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 1

Unit Type CR800

IP Address 192.168.0.19

Port No.*1 5006

Communication*1 UDP

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings 985

98

Connection to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration.

Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to the following manual. CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL

System configuration

Parameter settings for CRnD-700 For RT ToolBox2

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection NETIP 192.168.0.19

GOTPORT 5001

(The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. : 1 PLC No. : 1 IP address : 192.168.0.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed)

Network No. : 1 PLC No. : 2 IP address : 192.168.0.19 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP(fixed)

(The settings other than the following are set to the default)

6 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings

17

For R32TB or R56TB

(For R56TB)

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

[Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] and [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 977 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

Communication settings

GOT Ethernet Setting (standard port)

Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection NETIP 192.168.0.19

GOTPORT 5001

Item Set value GOT Net No. 1

GOT Station 1

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Retry 3times

Startup Time 3sec

Timeout Time 3sec

Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. 5015

Transparent Port No. 5014

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings 987

98

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Confirming communication state of CRnD-700 When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=32 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. Cable connecting condition Parameter settings Operation state of the CRnD-700. (faulty or not) The IP address of the CRnD-700 specified for the Ping command.

Item Set value Ethernet setting No.1 Host *

Net No. 1

Station 2

Unit Type CRnD-700

IP address 192.168.0.19

Port No. 5001 (fixed)

Communication UDP (fixed)

8 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 Robot Controller Side Settings

17

17.5 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. Page 1377 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] Page 1480 [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

17.6 Precautions

When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.5 Settable Device Range 989

99

MEMO

0 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.6 Precautions

18

18 CNC CONNECTION Page 991 Connectable Model List Page 992 System Configuration Page 996 Connection Diagram Page 997 GOT Side Settings Page 1008 CNC Side Settings Page 1016 Settable Device Range Page 1016 Precautions

18.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 Use the NC system software version D0 or later. *2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O

network. For the connection to CNC C80, CNC C70, refer to PART 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model Refer to MELDAS C6/C64 *1

FCA C6 FCA C64

RS-232 RS-422

Page 992 Direct CPU connection (serial)

MELSECNET/10*2 Page 993 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

CC-Link(ID) Page 994 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

Ethernet Page 995 Ethernet connection

M700VS/M70V M700VS M70V

CC-Link(ID) Page 994 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

M800/M80 M800/M80 CC-Link(ID) Page 994 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List 991

99

18.2 System Configuration Direct CPU connection (serial)

*1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL. *2 Connect the connector of the CNC side to SIO. *3 To be prepared by the user, referring the following.

MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) *4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

CNC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name F311 cable Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELDAS C6/C64 *1 - RS-232 Page 996 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

MELDAS C6/C64 *2 *3 RS-422 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)

30.5m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

AJ71C24, MELDAS C6*

Communication driver

F311 cable GOT

Connection cable

MELDAS C6/C64

2 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration

18

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.

*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manuals. MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL (BNP-B2373)

*2 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following. Page 997 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*3 For the coaxial cable and optical fiber cable, refer to the following manuals. MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL (BNP-B2373)

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

CNC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Expansion unit

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-EX878 MELSECNET/10 (Coaxial bus system)

Coaxial cable*3 *1 GT15-J71BR13*2 31 GOTs

FCU6-EX879 MELSECNET/10 (Optical loop system)

Optical fiber cable*3 *1 GT15-J71LP23-25*2 63 GOTs

MELSECNET/H

Communication driver

(When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used)

Expansion unit GOT

Connection cable

MELDAS C6/C64

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 993

99

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

*2 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it. For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual. Page 997 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

*3 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following. CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*4 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices. *5 Connect it to the relay module for communication extension (FCU8-EX702, or FCU8-EX703).

CNC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Expansion unit

Communication type

Cable model Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-HR865 CC-Link(ID) CC-Link dedicated cable*3 *1 GT15-J61BT13*2 26 GOTs

M700VS M70V

FCU7-HN746

M800W/M80W FCU8-EX561 (WN561)

M80/M800S FCU8-EX561 (WN561)*5

CC-Link Ver2(ID)

Communication driver

Expansion unit GOT

Connection cable

CNC

4 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration

18

Ethernet connection

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module, hub, or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. When only one GOT is connected, the GOT can be directly connected to the controller without a hub.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 For the system configuration of the expansion unit, refer to the following manuals. C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

*4 Select [AJ71QE71] for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3. For [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. Page 1007 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*5 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

CNC Connection cable*1 GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Expansion unit

Communication type

Cable model Maximum segment length*2

Option device*5 Model

MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-EX875*2*4 Ethernet 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 3 or higher

100m - (Built into GOT) 128 GOTs (recommended to 16 units or less)

GT25-J71E71-100

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Expansion unit

MELDAS C6/C64 Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 995

99

18.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the CNC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1)

*1 For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to the following manuals. MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

MELDAS C6/C64 side*1 (20 pin half pitch)

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

GND

SD

RD

-

GND

-

-

ER(DTR)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

6

16

-

11

-

-

18

-

GOT side

6 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Connection Diagram

18

18.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: [MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6*] [I/F]: Interface to be used When using the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100), select [Ethernet:Multi]. [Driver]: For direct CPU connection (serial) [AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*] For ELSECNET/10 connection [MELSECNET/H] (used in MNET/10 mode of network type) For CC-Link (ID) connection [CC-Link Ver.2(ID)] For Ethernet connection [Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC), Gateway] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 998 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 997

99

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)

8bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

Odd (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

8 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings

18

MELSECNET/H (used in the MNET/10 mode)

*1 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network using the MELSECNET/H communication unit, specify [MNET/10 mode] as [Network Type].

Item Description Range Network Type Set the network type. (Default: MNET/H mode) MNET/H mode

MNET/10 mode MNET/H EXT mode

Network No. Set the network No. (Default: 1) 1 to 239

Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64

Mode Setting Set the operation mode of the GOT. (Default: Online (auto. reconnection))

Online (auto. reconnection) Offline Test between slave station*1

Self-loopback test*1

Internal self-loopback test*1

H/W test*1

Transmission Speed Set the communication transmission speed. (Default: 25Mbps) When specifying [MNET/10 mode] as the network type, only 10Mbps can be set applicable.

10Mbps/25Mbps

Refresh Interval Set the number of refreshes to secure the send/receive data in station units during communication. (Default: 1time) Valid when [Secured data send/Secured data receive] is marked by the control station side network parameters of the MELSECNET/H network system.

1 to 1000times

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1003 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1004 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1005 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 999

10

CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)

Item Description Range Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64

Transmission Rate*1 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0) 0 to E

Mode Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: Ver.1) Ver.1/Ver.2/Additional/Offline

Expanded Cyclic Set the cyclic point expansion. (Default: Single) Single/Double/Quadruple/Octuple

Occupied Station Set the number of stations occupied by the GOT. (Default: 1 Station) 1 Station/4 Stations

Input for Error Station Set Clear/Hold at an error occurrence. (Default: Clear) Clear/Hold

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When no response is received after retries, a communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Transmission method*2 Set the transmission method of CC-Link. (Default: MELSEC (compatible)

MELSEC (compatible), Cyclic

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1003 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1004 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1005 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

00 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings

18

*1 Transmission speed settings The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC-Link communication.

For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link module to be used *2 In the case of M800/M80, M700VS/M70V series, Transmission method is set to "cyclic".

Set value Description 0 Online: 156kbps

1 Online: 625kbps

2 Online: 2.5Mbps

3 Online: 5Mbps

4 Online: 10Mbps

5 Line test: 156kbps

6 Line test: 625kbps

7 Line test: 2.5Mbps

8 Line test: 5Mbps

9 Line test: 10Mbps

A Hardware test: 156kbps

B Hardware test: 625kbps

C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps

D Hardware test: 5Mbps

E Hardware test: 10Mbps

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 1001

10

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC), Gateway

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 1007 Connected Ethernet controller setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18) 1 to 64

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5001*2)

1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1003 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 65520

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1004 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 65520

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1005 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 65520

02 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings

18

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 1003

10

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L] or [MELIPC] is selected for [Unit Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

04 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings

18

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 1005

10

GOT Ethernet setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extended port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extended port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

06 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings

18

Connected Ethernet controller setting

*1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239". *2 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Page 998 Communication detail settings

Item Description Range Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1) Network No. of CNC*1

Station*2 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1) Station No. of CNC

Unit Type Set the type of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: QJ71E71/LJ71E71) AJ71QE71

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1.1.1.1) IP address of CNC

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 5001) 5001

Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 1007

10

18.5 CNC Side Settings MELSECNET/10 connection

Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of using the default parameters or not requiring separate settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to set the network

Control Station Parameter If you wish to place the control station in CNC and set the common parameters, set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. Start I/O No.

Example of GX Developer setting

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

Normal Station Parameter As for normal stations, it is not necessary to set parameters unless separate settings are required. The refresh parameters are set and written as required. In this case, the parameter setting of the first I/O No. is the same as in the case of the control station.

Slot Start I/O No. Slot position EXT1 0200

EXT2 0280

EXT1

EXT2

08 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings

18

Expansion unit settings FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable)

*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. *2 Set as necessary. *3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. *4 Set the station type to the control station.

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

No. Switch name Settings 1) Condition setting switch Set the operation condition.

SW Description OFF ON

1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net

2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)

3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM)

4 Number of stations*2

(Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF 8

Station ON 16

Station OFF 32

Station ON 64

Station5 OFF OFF ON ON

6 B/W total points*2

(Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF 2K

points ON 4K

points OFF 6K

points ON 8K

points7 OFF OFF ON ON

8 Not used Always OFF

2) Station number setting switch

Station number setting*2*3

(Setting range) 01 to 64: Station number Other than 01 to 64: Setting error

3) Setting switch of group number

Group number setting Not used, fixed to 0

4) Setting switch of network number

Network number setting*2

(Setting range) 001 to 255: Network number Other than 001 to 255: Setting error

5) Mode setting switch Mode setting*2

0: Online 1: Cannot be used 2: Offline 3 to F: Test mode

1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2

ON

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 1009

10

FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable)

*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. *2 Set as necessary. *3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. *4 Set the station type to the control station.

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

Switch layout No. Switch name Settings 1) Condition setting switch Set the operation condition.

SW Description OFF ON

1 Network type*1

Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net

2 Station type*4

Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)

3 Used parameter *2

Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM)

4 Number of stations*2

(Valid when SW3 is ON)

OFF 8 Station

ON 16 Station

OFF 32 Station

ON 64 Station5 OFF OFF ON ON

6 B/W total points*2

(Valid when SW3 is ON)

OFF 2K points

ON 4K points

OFF 6K points

ON 8K points7 OFF OFF ON ON

8 Not used Always OFF

2) Station number setting switch

Station number setting*2*3

(Setting range) 01 to 64: Station number Other than 01 to 64: Setting error

3) Setting switch of group number

Group number setting Not used, fixed to 0

4) Setting switch of network number

Network number setting*2

(Setting range) 001 to 255: Network number Other than 001 to 255: Setting error

5) Mode setting switch Mode setting*2

0: Online 1: Cannot be used 2: Offline 3 to F: Test mode

1)

3)

5)

2)

4)

1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2

ON

10 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings

18

CC-Link(ID) connection to MELDAS C6/C64

Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary to set the network parameters.

Master station parameter It is necessary to set and write the network parameters to CNC with GX Developer. The following shows an example of parameter settings.Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. Start I/O No.

Example of GX Developer setting

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

Slot Start I/O No. Slot position EXT1 0200

EXT2 0280

EXT1

EXT2

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 1011

10

Expansion unit settings Make the communication settings by the setting switch in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865).

Expansion unit

4)

3)

2)

1)

1)

2)

12 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings

18

Contents of setting

*1 Set as necessary. *2 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

No. Switch name Settings 1) Condition setting

switch Set the operation condition.

No. Description Switch status Setting validity

OFF ON Master station (Standby master station)

Local station (Standby master station)

SW1 Station type*1 Master station/local station Standby master station (Valid) (Valid)

SW2 Not used Always OFF - -

SW3 Not used Always OFF - -

SW4 Data link error station input data status*1

Clear Hold valid valid

SW4 Number of occupied stations*1

OFF 1 Station

OFF 2 Station

ON 3 Station

ON 4 Station

Invalid valid

SW5 OFF ON ON OFF

SW7 Not used Always OFF - -

SW8 Not used Always OFF - -

2) Mode setting switch This switch sets the unit operation status.

No. Name Description Settability

Master station

Local station

0 Online*1 Automatic online return provided when data link is enabled Yes Yes

1 Link with remote I/O net mode Yes No

2 Offline*1 Data link offline state Yes Yes

3 Line test 1*1 Line test 1 in offline state Yes No

4 Line test 2*1 Line test 2 in offline state Yes No

5 Parameter confirmation test*1

Checks the parameter details Yes No

6 Hardware test*1 Test Expansion unit (FCU6-HR865) Yes Yes

7 to F Not usable

3) Transmission speed setting switch

This switch sets the unit transmission speed.

No. Description

0 156Kbps*1

1 625Kbps*1

2 2.5Mbps*1

3 5Mbps*1

4 10Mbps*1

5 to F Not usable

4) Setting switch of station No.

This switch sets the unit station No.*1*2

(Setting range) Master station: 00 Local station: 01 to 64 Standby master station: 01 to 64

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 1013

10

CC-Link(ID) connection to M800/M80, M700VS/M70V series For details of the CC-Link settings of M800/M80, M700VS/M70V series, please contact our company.

Ethernet connection

System configuration The following shows the example of the system configuration when using the CNC monitor function.

Parameter setting Set parameters related to Ethernet with MELSECs peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer.

Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted. Unit No.

Slot position Start I/O No. Mounting position of extension unit EXT1 0200

EXT2 0280

EXT3 0300

Ethernet (192.168.1.xx)

[Communication with GOT] N/W No. :239 PLC No. :2 IP address :192.168.1.2

N/W No. :239 PLC No. :3 IP address :192.168.1.3

N/W No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address :192.168.1.1

EXT2

EXT1

Unit2

Unit1

EXT3

EXT1

EXT2 EXT3

EXT1

When mounted in EXT2 only

When mounted in EXT3 only

EXT2 EXT3

When mounted in EXT1 and EXT2

When mounted in EXT1 and EXT3

When mounted in EXT2 and EXT3

When mounted in EXT1 only

Unit2

Unit2 Unit1

Unit1

Unit1

Unit1

Unit1

14 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings

18

Example of GX Developer setting

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

IP address setting IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid. Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page.

CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and port No. by the 7- segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side. For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 IV Setting the Ethernet IP Address

7-segment LED

Rotary switch

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 1015

10

18.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. Page 1498 [MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]

18.7 Precautions Direct CPU connection (serial)

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later.

MELSECNET/10 connection

Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT.

The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)

When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the following.

Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Monitoring range Only CNC of the same networks No. can be monitored in GOT. For the access range that can be monitored, refer to the following. Page 92 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems

Starting GOT with CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection) With the CNC connection (MESLSECNET/10 connection), the data link starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts.

When a network error occurs in the system alarm When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs with the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection), the system alarm is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error factor is removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version E0 or later.

16 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.6 Settable Device Range

18

CC-Link (ID) connection

Using cyclic transmission I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Manual

CC-Link Mode It's different in the correspondence version of CC-Link depending on the models of CNC. MELDAS C6/C64: Ver.1 only correspondence M700VS/M70V: Ver.2, Ver.1 correspondence M800/M80:Ver.2, Ver.1 correspondence

When GOT malfunctions The cyclic output status remains the same as before becoming faulty.

For transient transmission Access range that can be monitored The GOT can access to the CNC mounting the master and local station of the CC-Link System. It cannot access another network via the CC-Link module.

GOT startup in CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)), the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup.

When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)), when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed. To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later.

18 CNC CONNECTION 18.7 Precautions 1017

10

Ethernet connection

Via network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (network module, Ethernet module, etc.).

When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT. Page 997 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)

When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and CNC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

Ethernet cable connection Ethernet cable is so susceptible to noise that you should wire power cables and electric supply cables separately. And you need to attach a ferrite core (attachment) on the control unit side. For details of the Ethernet cable connection, refer to the following C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 IX Connection Function with GOT

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later.

LED1

1 turn Ferrite core

Ferrite core Ethernet

FG cable for Ethernet

GOT

18 18 CNC CONNECTION 18.7 Precautions

19

19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION

Page 1019 Connectable Model List Page 1019 System Configuration Page 1020 Connection Diagram Page 1021 GOT Side Settings Page 1023 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings Page 1023 Settable Device Range

19.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 GT2104-PMBDS2 only supported.

19.2 System Configuration Connection to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11

*1 For the connection to GOT, refer to the following connection diagram. Page 1020 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

*2 GT2104-PMBDS2 only supported.

Series Model name Clock Communication type

Connectable model Refer to

Laser Displacement Sensor MH11

MH11CTMF-N RS-232

*1

Page 1019 Connection to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11MH11CTMF-NNA

MH11CTMF-P

MH11CTMF-PNA

Controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentSeries Communication

type Connection cable Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

MH11CTMF-N MH11CTMF-NNA MH11CTMF-P MH11CTMF-PNA (CONSOLE port)

RS-232 MH11C30R2*1 3m - (Built into GOT)

*2

1 GOT for 1 Controller

Laser Displacement Sensor MH11

Communication driver

Controller GOT

Connection cable

19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.1 Connectable Model List 1019

10

19.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the Controller.

RS-232 cable

Connection Diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

GOT side (terminal block)

Untied wire color of MH11C30R2

White

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

24V+

24V-

20 19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.3 Connection Diagram

19

19.4 GOT Side Settings Setting the communication interface (Controller setting) Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 1022 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.4 GOT Side Settings 1021

10

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Laser Displacement Sensor MH11

*1 Set the value as follows: Transmission Speed: 15200bps(Default values) Data Bit: 8bit(Default values) Stop Bit: 1bit(Default values) Parity: None(Default values)

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed*1 Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with

the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit*1 Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)

7bit/8bit

Stop Bit*1 Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bit

Parity*1 Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: None)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

22 19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.4 GOT Side Settings

19

19.5 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings Connection to laser displacement sensor MH11

Communication settings Communication settings are not required, since the following contents are fixed.

19.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog, refer to the following. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. Page 1729 [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]

Setting item Controller Side Settings Communication speed 115200bps (fixed)

Data Bit 8bit (fixed)

Parity bit None (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.5 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings 1023

10

MEMO

24 19 LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 19.6 Settable Device Range

PART 4 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION

1025

10

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Page 1026 CPU that can be Monitored Page 1027 Connectable Model List Page 1042 System Configuration Page 1045 Connection Diagram Page 1051 GOT Side Settings Page 1053 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Page 1060 Precautions

20.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.

Serial multi-drop connection unit

26 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.1 CPU that can be Monitored

20

20.2 Connectable Model List Direct CPU connection (serial) The following table shows the connectable models for direct CPU connection (serial) of the CPU and serial multi-drop connection unit.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1027

10

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*4

Q00JCPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12 Q00JCPU

Q00CPU*1

Q01CPU*1

Q02CPU*1

Q02HCPU*1

Q06HCPU*1

Q12HCPU*1

Q25HCPU*1

Q02PHCPU - - -

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU RS-232 RS-485

*2*12 Q04UDEHCPU

Q06UDEHCPU

Q10UDEHCPU

Q13UDEHCPU

Q20UDEHCPU

Q26UDEHCPU

Q50UDEHCPU

Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU

Q04UDVCPU

Q06UDVCPU

Q13UDVCPU

Q26UDVCPU

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

28 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*3 RS-232 RS-485

*2*12 Q24DHCCPU-V/VG

Q24DHCCPU-LS

Q26DHCCPU-LS RS-232 RS-485 -

MELSEC-QS*4 QS001CPU - - -

MELSEC-L*4 L02CPU*5

L06CPU*5

L26CPU*5

L26CPU-BT*5

L02CPU-P*5

L06CPU-P*5

L26CPU-P*5

L26CPU-PBT*5

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12

MELSEC-Q (A mode)*4

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*4

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

RS-422 RS-485

*12

Q4ARCPU RS-422 RS-485 -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)*4

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

RS-422 RS-485

*12

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)*6

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU*7

A1NCPUP21*7

A1NCPUR21*7

A2NCPU*7

A2NCPUP21*7

A2NCPUR21*7

A2NCPU-S1*7

A2NCPUP21-S1*7

A2NCPUR21-S1*7

A3NCPU*7

A3NCPUP21*7

A3NCPUR21*7

RS-422 RS-485

*12

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1029

10

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)*6

A2USCPU RS-422 RS-485

*12 A2USCPU-S1

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU*8

A2SHCPU

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

MELSEC-A*6 A0J2HCPU*8 RS-422 RS-485

*12 A0J2HCPUP21*8

A0J2HCPUR21*8

A0J2HCPU-DC24*8

A2CCPU*8 RS-422 RS-485

*12 A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*9*10 RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12 Q173CPU*9*10

Q172CPUN*9

Q173CPUN*9

Q172HCPU RS-232 RS-485

*2*12 Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU RS-232 RS-485

*12 Q170MSCPU

Q170MSCPU-S1

MR-MQ100

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

30 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

Motion CPU (A Series)*6

A273UCPU - - -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

A171SHCPU RS-422 RS-485 -

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 RS-232 - -

WS0-CPU1

WS0-CPU3

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 RS-232 - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 - -

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

RS-232 - -

MELSEC-FX FX0 RS-422 RS-485

*12 FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2 *11

FX2C

FX1S RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*12 FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC *11

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1031

10

FR-A500(L) FR-A50(L) - - -

FR-F500(L) FR-F50(L)

FR-V500(L) FR-V50(L)

FR-E500 FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

- - -

FR-S500(E) FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F500J FR-F50J(F)

FR-D700 FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

FR-F700PJ FR-F70PJ(F)

FR-E700 FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

FR-E70-NE

FR-A700 FR-A70

FR-F700 FR-F70

FR-F700P FR-F70P

FR-A800 FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

FR-A800-E FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

FR-A800-GF FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

FR-A800-GN FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

FR-A800 Plus FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-F800 FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

FR-F800-E FR-F80-E FR-F82-E

FR-E800 FR-E80

FR-E800-E FR-E80-E

Sensorless servo FR-E70EX

MELIPM MD-CX522-K(-A0)

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

32 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *2 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. *3 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. *4 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. *5 The adapter L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4 is required for the direct CPU connection (serial).

When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU whose upper five digits are "15102" or later. *6 SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. *7 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.

AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later A2SCPU: Version H or later

*8 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later A2CCPU: Version H or later

*9 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*10 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later

*11 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. *12 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

MELSERVO MR-J2S-A - - -

MR-J2S-CP

MR-J2S-CL

MR-J2M-P8A

MR-J2M-DU

MR-J3-A

MR-J3-T

MR-J4-A

MR-JE-A

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1033

10

Serial communication connection The following table shows the connectable models for connecting the CPU to the serial multi-drop connection unit in the serial communication connection.

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

MELSEC iQ-R Series

R00CPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

R01CPU

R02CPU

R04CPU

R08CPU

R16CPU

R32CPU

R120CPU

R08PCPU

R16PCPU

R32PCPU

R120PCPU

R04ENCPU

R08ENCPU

R16ENCPU

R32ENCPU

R120ENCPU

R08PSFCPU

R16PSFCPU

R32PSFCPU

R120PSFCPU

R08SFCPU

R16SFCPU

R32SFCPU

R120SFCPU

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R16MTCPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

R32MTCPU

R64MTCPU

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R12CCPU-V RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

R102WCPU-W RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

CNC C80 R16NCCPU-S1 RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CR800-R(R16RTCPU) RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

MELSEC iQ-F Series

FX5U RS-232 RS-422

RS-485 -

FX5UC

FX5UJ

FX5S

34 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*3

Q00JCPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8 Q00CPU*1

Q01CPU*1

Q02CPU*1

Q02HCPU*1

Q06HCPU*1

Q12HCPU*1

Q25HCPU*1

Q02PHCPU - - -

Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

Q12PRHCPU (Main base) - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU

Q06UDHCPU

Q10UDHCPU

Q13UDHCPU

Q20UDHCPU

Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU

Q04UDEHCPU

Q06UDEHCPU

Q10UDEHCPU

Q13UDEHCPU

Q20UDEHCPU

Q26UDEHCPU

Q50UDEHCPU

Q100UDEHCPU

Q03UDVCPU

Q04UDVCPU

Q06UDVCPU

Q13UDVCPU

Q26UDVCPU

C Controller module (Q Series)

Q12DCCPU-V*2 RS-232 RS-485

*8 Q24DHCCPU-V/VG

Q24DHCCPU-LS

Q26DHCCPU-LS RS-232 RS-485 -

MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - - -

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1035

10

MELSEC-L*3 L02CPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8 L06CPU

L26CPU

L26CPU-BT

L02CPU-P

L06CPU-P

L26CPU-P

L26CPU-PBT

L02SCPU

L02SCPU-P

MELSEC-Q (A mode)*3

Q02CPU-A - - -

Q02HCPU-A

Q06HCPU-A

MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU)*3

Q2ACPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8 Q2ACPU-S1

Q3ACPU

Q4ACPU

Q4ARCPU - - -

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)*3

Q2ASCPU RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8 Q2ASCPU-S1

Q2ASHCPU

Q2ASHCPU-S1

MELSEC-A (AnCPU)

A2UCPU RS-232 RS-422

- -

A2UCPU-S1

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU

A2ACPUP21

A2ACPUR21

A2ACPU-S1

A2ACPUP21-S1

A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU

A3ACPUP21

A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU

A1NCPUP21

A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU

A2NCPUP21

A2NCPUR21

A2NCPU-S1

A2NCPUP21-S1

A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU

A3NCPUP21

A3NCPUR21

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

36 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)

A2USCPU RS-232 RS-422

- -

A2USCPU-S1 - - -

A2USHCPU-S1

A1SCPU

A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SHCPU

A2SCPU

A2SHCPU

A1SJCPU

A1SJCPU-S3

A1SJHCPU

MELSEC-A A0J2HCPU - - -

A0J2HCPUP21

A0J2HCPUR21

A0J2HCPU-DC24

A2CCPU

A2CCPUP21

A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24

A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Motion CPU (Q Series)

Q172CPU*4*5 RS-232 RS-422

RS-485

*8 Q173CPU*4*5

Q172CPUN*4*5

Q173CPUN*4*5

Q172HCPU

*6*8 Q173HCPU

Q172DCPU

Q173DCPU

Q172DCPU-S1

Q173DCPU-S1

Q172DSCPU

Q173DSCPU

Q170MCPU

*8 Q170MSCPU

Q170MSCPU-S1

Motion CPU (A Series)

A273UCPU RS-232 RS-422

- -

A273UHCPU

A273UHCPU-S3

A373UCPU

A373UCPU-S3

A171SCPU

A171SCPU-S3

A171SCPU-S3N

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1037

10

Motion CPU (A Series)

A171SHCPU - - -

A171SHCPUN

A172SHCPU

A172SHCPUN

A173UHCPU

A173UHCPU-S1

MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU0 - - --

WS0-CPU1

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25 - - -

QJ72LP25G

QJ72BR15

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

LJ72GF15-T2 - - -

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

NZ2GF-ETB - - -

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU - - -

Robot controller (Q Series)

CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q(Q172DRCPU) CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)

- - -

MELSEC-FX FX0 - - -

FX0S

FX0N

FX1

FX2 *7

FX2C

FX1S

FX1N

FX2N

FX1NC

FX2NC *7

FX3S

FX3G

FX3GC

FX3GE

FX3U

FX3UC

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

38 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

FR-A500(L) FR-A50(L) - - -

FR-F500(L) FR-F50(L)

FR-V500(L) FR-V50(L)

FR-E500 FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

FR-S500(E) FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F500J FR-F50J(F)

FR-D700 FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

FR-F700PJ FR-F70PJ(F) - - -

FR-E700 FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

FR-E70-NE

FR-A700 FR-A70

FR-F700 FR-F70

FR-F700P FR-F70P

FR-A800 FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

FR-A800-E FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

FR-A800-GF FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

FR-A800-GN FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

FR-A800 Plus FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R

FR-F800 FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

FR-F800-E FR-F80-E FR-F82-E

FR-E800 FR-E80

FR-E800-E FR-E80-E

Sensorless servo FR-E70EX

MELIPM MD-CX522-K(-A0)

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1039

10

*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. *2 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042. *3 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored. *4 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use a Motion CPU with the following version of OS installed.

SW6RN-SV13Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV22Q: 00E or later SW6RN-SV43Q: 00B or later

*5 Use main modules with the following product numbers. Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later

*6 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system. *7 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

MELSERVO MR-J2S-A - - -

MR-J2S-CP

MR-J2S-CL

MR-J2M-P8A

MR-J2M-DU

MR-J3-A

MR-J3-T

MR-J4-A

MR-JE-A

Series Model name Clock Communication type Connectable model

Between CPU and serial multi- drop connection unit

Between serial multi- drop connection unit and GOT

40 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List

20

[Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT multi-drop connection is available.

GOT type PLC Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection type Type Serial multi-drop connection driver DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700 Serial (MELSEC)

MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6*

MELSEC-L

DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

MELSEC-A MELSEC-A

MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.2 Connectable Model List 1041

10

20.3 System Configuration

When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is not used

PLC Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection cable GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel Communication

type Cable model Option device Model

For the system configuration between the serial multi-drop connection unit and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT01-RS4-M RS-485 Page 1045 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

- (Built into GOT) 500m*2 16 GOTs for a serial multi-drop connection unit*3

GT15-RS4-9S

*4*5

Page 1046 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

GT15-RS4-TE

*4*5

Page 1047 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

GT10-9PT5S*1

*6

- (Built into GOT)

*9

GT10-C02H-9SC

GT14-RS2T4-9P*7

*8

(Serial multi-drop connection unit)

Connection type dependent

Communication driver

(GOT)

Multidrop(Slave)

Communication driver

Connection cable

GOT GOTPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection cable

42 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.3 System Configuration

20

*1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT). *2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT. *3 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases. *4 Not available to GT25-W. *5 Not available to GT2505-V. *6 GT2505-V, GT2105-Q only supported. *7 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). *8 Only available to GT2505-V. *9 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

When the RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is used

When an RS-485 terminal block conversion unit is used

*1 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT. *2 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases. *3 Not available to GT2505-V.

PLC Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection cable

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel Communication

type Cable model Option device*3 Model

For the system configuration between the serial multi-drop connection unit and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT01-RS4-M RS-485 Page 1048 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

500m*1 Two GOTs for a serial multi-drop connection unit *2

GOT GOTPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

Serial multi-drop connection unit

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.3 System Configuration 1043

10

When multiple RS-485 terminal block conversion units are used

*1 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT. *2 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases. *3 Not available to GT2505-V.

PLC Serial multi-drop connection unit

Connection cable

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentModel Communication

type Cable model Option device*3 Model

For the system configuration between the serial multi-drop connection unit and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

GT01-RS4-M RS-485 Page 1048 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

500m*1 16 GOTs for a serial multi-drop connection unit *2

GOT

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

GOTPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable Connection cable

Serial multi-drop connection unit

44 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.3 System Configuration

20

20.4 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT.

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS-485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". *3 In the case of GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23, set the terminating resistor setting to disable.

In the case of GT2505-V, set the terminating resistor setting to 330 . Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

*4 In the case of GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23, connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. *5 Make sure to ground the shield of the cable with a ground resistance of 100 or less. *6 For the cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block, refer to the following.

Page 1049 Precautions when preparing a cable

Serial multi-drop connection unit

Terminal block

GOT side (9 pin)

RDA*1

RDB*1

SDA*1

SDB*1

SG

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

SG FG

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

R SA

R SB

C SA

C SB

SG SH EL

L

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

*5

*3 GOT side (9 pin)*3 GOT side (9 pin)*3

*6 Terminal block*6

Terminal block*6SD

A SD

B R

D A

R D

B SD

A SD

B R

D A

R D

B SG FG

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

R SA

R SB

C SA

C SB

SG SH EL

L

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

SG FG

SD A

SD B

R D

A R

D B

R SA

R SB

C SA

C SB

SG SH EL

L

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

R *4

R *2

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram 1045

10

RS-485 connection diagram 2) (For 1 pair wiring)

*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 110 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.

RS-485 connection diagram 2) (For 2 pair wiring)

*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB, RDA/RDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal. *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.

GOT side*3 GOT side*3 GOT side*3 Serial multi-drop connection unit *2

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

10

SDA*1

SDB*1

RDA

RDB

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

*5

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

10

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

FG

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

10

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

*4

R

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

10

RDA*1

RDB*1

SDA*1

SDB*1

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

*5

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

10

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

FG

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

10

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

*4

R

Serial multi-drop connection unit *2 GOT side*3 GOT side*3 GOT side*3

46 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram

20

RS-485 connection diagram 3) (For 1 pair wiring)

*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "110".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 It is a connector pin number of GT10-C02H-9SC. *4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less).

RS-485 connection diagram 3) (For 2 pair wiring)

*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330".

Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 It is a connector pin number of GT10-C02H-9SC. *4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. *5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less).

GOT side*1 Serial multi-drop connection unit*2

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*5

GOT side*1

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

*5

*3

GOT side*2

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

*5 *4

*4

*4

*4

*3 *3 SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

GOT side*1 Serial multi-drop connection unit*2

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

*5

GOT side*1

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

*5

*3 *3 *3

GOT side*2

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

*5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram 1047

10

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

RS-485 connection diagram 5)

GOT side Serial multi-drop connection unit

6

8

10

12

2

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

NC

NC

NC

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

NC

NC

NC

NC

GOT side

5

1

6

2

7

3

4

8

9

SG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

FG

GOT side Serial multi-drop connection unit

6

8

10

12

2

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

NC

NC

NC

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

NC

NC

NC

NC

6

8

10

12

2

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

NC

NC

NC

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

NC

NC

NC

NC

GOT side

48 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram

20

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names and manufacturers of the cable to be used.

Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block Create by yourself, referring to the following connection diagram.

Make sure to connect the wiring branched on the GOT side connector. Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.2mm2 or more. Use an applicable cable to D-sub connector. Wiring should be the shortest distance.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Manufacturer Model Remark Mitsubishi Electric Cable Industries,Ltd SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2

Showa Electric Wire & Cable Co.,Ltd KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P

Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2

Sumitomo Electric Industries.,Ltd DPEV SB 0.3 3P Three-pair cable of 0.3mm2

DPEV SB 0.5 3P Three-pair cable of 0.5mm2

The Furukawa Electric Co.,Ltd D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P Three-pair cable of 0.5mm2

Fujikura Ltd. IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2 Two-pair cable of 0.3mm2

IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2 Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2

Pair Shield

Two-pair cable structural drawing example Three-pair cable structural

drawing example

Example of connection diagram for 2 pair wiring

SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB FG

1 6 2 7 5 3 8 4 9

Shell

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram 1049

10

Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a serial multi-drop connection unit to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.

For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to disable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor selector. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

50 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.4 Connection Diagram

20

20.5 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: Configure the setting according to the controller. [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller. [I/F]: Interface to be used [Driver]: [Multidrop(Slave)] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 1052 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.5 GOT Side Settings 1051

10

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

GOT Address Specify the station number of the host station in the system configuration. (Default: 0)

0 to 15

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 ms

52 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.5 GOT Side Settings

20

20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Write the OS Install the standard monitor OS and communication driver according to the desired connection type to the serial multi-drop connection unit using GT Designer3 (GOT1000) (Version1.12N or later). For the OS writing methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design manual

1. Check-mark a communication driver according to the desired connection type and click the [Write] button.

1.

Click!

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 1053

10

Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Make the serial multi-drop connection unit interface setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer 3. For the communication interface driver, set the same communication driver as the serial multi-drop connection. For details on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer3, refer to the manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design manual

Controller Setting

1. Set [Controller Type] as follows. PLC used [Driver For Connected GOT] is fixed to the following selection. Multi-drop(Host)

2. Configure the detailed settings for the driver. Page 1058 Communication detail settings

3. Set [Use the system information of Multidrop] as necessary. Page 1055 Setting the multi-drop system information function

4. Click the [Write] button when settings are completed.

5. If the [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] dialog box is closed, communication setting contents for GT01-RS4-M does not remain.

To maintain the communication setting contents, click (export). Page 1057 Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents To use communication setting contents which are saved previously, click (import). Page 1057 Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents

54 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit

20

Setting the multi-drop system information function When checking the connection status of each GOT which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side, set the multi-drop system information function. The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side word device.

Setting on the PLC side word device

1. Select [Use the system information of Multidrop] and click the [Set] button. The following dialog window is displayed.

2. Set the PLC side word device to [Head Device (10 Points)]. In this example, "D0" is set.

Assignment contents of the PLC side word device The following table shows the device assignment contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to "D0".

Device Description D0 (Head device+0) Control signal 1-1

D1(Head device+1) Station information notification signal

D2(Head device+2) (Reserve)

D3(Head device+3) (Reserve)

D4(Head device+4) (Reserve)

D5(Head device+5) Slave station control signal

D6(Head device+6) (Reserve)

D7(Head device+7) (Reserve)

D8(Head device+8) (Reserve)

D9(Head device+9) (Reserve)

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 1055

10

Details on the word device assignment contents Control signal 1-1

< 10 second cycle flicker signal *1 > By the repetition of turning ON/OFF every 5 seconds, the connection between GT01-RS4-M and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side. When no repetition of this ON/OFF is observed, GT01-RS4-M is not connected to the PLC.

*1 When writing or clearing data on the program area from the personal computer to the PLC using FA transparent function, flicker of the signal as shown above may be temporarily stopped.

Station information notification signal *1

This signal notifies the status of the slave station (GOT) which is connected to the master station (GT01-RS4-M). Only the bit corresponding to the number of connected slave station (GOT) is turned ON and other bits are turned OFF.

1: Connected 0: Unconnected (Including communication error status) *1 When the communication between GT01-RS4-M and the PLC becomes faulty, the station information notification signal is not updated.

Slave station control signal This signal controls slave stations which are not updated by the master station. Usually, the master station accesses all stations (up to 16 stations). In addition, if stations are temporarily in communication error due to a power disconnection or screen data transfer during the steady operation, the automatic recovery of the station is executed for one station per ten seconds. Therefore, the automatic recovery may take maximum 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Using this control signal, the number of slave stations to be monitored by the master station can be reduced to the actual number of slave stations to be used by a user. This makes the automatic recovery processing smooth. If an error occurs in only one station, the time for the station to recover automatically can be reduced within 10 seconds.

When the bits are off and the master station and the slave stations are in communication, the communication with the corresponding slave stations is disconnected if the above corresponding bits are turned on.

Bit position Description bit0 10 second cycle flicker signal

bit1 to 15 (Reserve)

bit15 bit14 .................. bit2 bit1 bit0 Station No. 15

Station No. 14

.................. Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 0

Device value Action 0 The master station accesses all the slave stations (station 0 to 15). When the multi-drop system information is not used, the operation

is the same.

Other than 0 Turning on the bit corresponding to a station No. disconnects the specified slave station from the master station.

1...Connected 0...Unconnected

OFF

ON

5sec 5sec

bit15 bit14 .......... bit2 bit1 bit0

Station No. 15

Station No. 14

.......... Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 0

56 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit

20

Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents Export

1. After determining the storage location as necessary, name the file and save it. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).

Import

1. Enter the name of the file previously saved and open the file. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 1057

10

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

For the connection with GOT

For the connected equipment Set the communication detail settings of the driver for controllers according to the connection type. Refer to each chapter.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 ms

58 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit

20

Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type.

Serial multi-drop connection unit For details on the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer to the following manual. Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit Users Manual

Terminating resistor selector switch

PLC communication selection switch

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.6 Settings of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 1059

10

20.7 Precautions

Connecting GOT2000 in multi-drop connection Installing standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection

unit When connecting GOT2000 in multi-drop connection, the standard monitor OS and communication driver must be installed to the GOT from GT Designer3 (GOT1000) (Version 1.12N or later). The standard monitor OS or communication driver cannot be installed from GT Designer3 (GOT2000).

Device specification Network No. and station No. are not supported.

Station number setting on GOT Set each station number so that no station number overlaps.When the station No. is duplicated, the GOT whose station No. is duplicated cannot be monitored normally. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order.There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Extended function of GOT The extended functions of GOT shown below are not available. System monitor, Device monitor, Ladder monitor, A list editor, FX list editor, Intelligent unit monitor, Network monitor, Q motion monitor, Servo amplifier monitor, CNC monitor, Backup/restore, CNC data I/O, SFC monitor, Ladder editor, Log viewer, MELSEC-L troubleshoot, Motion SFC, motion program (SV43) editor, Motion program (SV43) I/O

System alarm The alarms of the serial multi-drop connection unit are displayed on the system alarm.The alarms of the connected PLC are not displayed.

Activating the serial multi-drop connection unit The master module detects a slave GOT, which is connected, at the startup.It may take time to detect again the slave station which is not detected at this point.Activate the master module in the condition that a communication can be made after the startup of the slave GOT.

Using the multi-drop connection in the multi-channel configuration If a communication timeout error occurs when using the multi-drop connection in the multi-channel configuration, set the send delay time to the serial multi-drop connection unit side. Page 1058 Communication detail settings

Station No.3

Station No.0

Station No.15

The example of a Station No. setting

60 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.7 Precautions

20

Device update cycle When the number of connected slave GOTs and the device points of each GOT increase, the device update cycle on the

screen may get slower. In such a case, it is recommended to reduce the device points of each GOT. (Please consider 250 points as a guide of 1 GOT, and 750 points as a guide of the total points.) In addition, when a timeout error occurs, make the timeout time longer in the communication settings of the slave GOT.

When the device number is set randomly, the device update cycle becomes slower compared to the case that the device number is set consecutively.Therefore, it is recommended to set the device number consecutively.

Depending on the device points or combination, it may take time to switch the screen.At this time, the device update cycle of other slave station is also affected.

FA transparent function FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the GOT multi-drop connection system.

Standard monitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (GOT1000) (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.

Number of personal computers Only one personal computer can be connected to the multi-drop connection system.

Monitor speed of GOT The monitoring performance slows down according to the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA transparent function, the monitoring performance of the whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.

Specifying a CPU number or module number with a device In the GOT multi-drop connection, specifying a CPU number or module number with a device is not available.

8-bit and 64-bit devices The GOT multi-drop connection does not support 8-bit and 64-bit devices. When the GOT multi-drop connection is established with 64-bit devices, the following alarms occur. At writing data: System alarm 315 At reading data: System alarm 322 8-bit devices can be set only to the GOT internal devices (GB). When 8-bit devices are set to the GB devices, no alarm occurs in the GOT multi-drop connection.

Mixture of GOT2000 series and GOT1000 series In the GOT multi-drop connection, GOT2000 series and GOT1000 series cannot be mixed.

Only one personal computer

20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.7 Precautions 1061

10

MEMO

62 20 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20.7 Precautions

21

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION Page 1063 Connectable Model List Page 1064 System Configuration Page 1070 Connection Diagram Page 1075 GOT Side Settings Page 1082 Precautions

21.1 Connectable Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.1 Connectable Model List 1063

10

21.2 System Configuration Connection to PLC via RS-232 interface

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Communi cation type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-232 - (Built into GOT)

- RS-422 Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

Page 1073 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

30m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m GT10- C02H-9SC

Page 1073 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

30m - (Built into GOT)

- (Built into GOT)

- RS-422 Page 1073 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H-9SC

Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m

- Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H-9SC

Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m GT10- C02H-9SC

- Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

30m - (Built into GOT)

*6

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Communication driver

MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

GOT (1st)

GOT (2nd)PLC

Differ according to connection type.

Connection cable

64 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration

21

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-232 GT10-C02H- 6PT9P*4

- RS-422 Page 1073 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

30m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

GT10- C02H-9SC

Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m

- Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

30m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H-9SC

Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

30m GT10- C02H-9SC

- Page 1072 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

30m - (Built into GOT)

*6

RS-232 - (Built into GOT)

- RS-232 GT10-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m

RS-232 - (Built into GOT)

- RS-232 GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*2

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

GT10-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

- GT10-C30R2- 6P

3m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Communi cation type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 1065

10

*1 When connected to the Serial communication, the multiple connection function supports only RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), LCPU. *2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 2) *3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 5) *4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 In the case of a serial communication module with two serial ports, four GOTs (two GOTs for each port) can be connected. *6 is not support the ACPU connection.

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-232 GT10-C02H- 6PT9P*4

- RS-232 Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*3

3m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Communi cation type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

66 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration

21

Connection to PLC via RS-422 interface

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Commun ication type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-422 - (Built into GOT)

- RS-232 GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

- (Built into GOT)

- RS-232 Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*4

3m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

Communication driver

Serial (MELSEC)

Communication driver

MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

GOT (1st)

GOT (2nd)PLC

Differ according to connection type.

Connection cable

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 1067

10

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-422 - (Built into GOT)

- RS-232 GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m

- GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*4

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

- GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT10-C02H- 9SC

- RS-232 Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*4

3m - (Built into GOT)

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Commun ication type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

68 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration

21

*1 When connected to the Serial communication, the multiple connection function supports only RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), LCPU. *2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 2) *3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

Page 1071 RS-232 connection diagram 5) *5 In the case of a serial communication module with two serial ports, four GOTs (two GOTs for each port) can be connected.

For the system configuration between a got and A plc, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATI ON CONNECTION*1

RS-422 GT10-C02H- 9SC

- RS-232 GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

2 GOTs for one serial port *5

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

3m

- GT10-C30R2- 6P(3m)*4

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 9S(3m) or

Page 1070 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m - (Built into GOT)

- GT01-C30R2- 6P

3m GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

PLC GOT (1st) Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of connectable equipment

Connection type

Commu nication type

Option device

Model Option device

Commun ication type

Cable model

Max. distan ce

Option device

Model

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 1069

10

21.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side GOT side

N.C.

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

3

2

6

5

4

8

7

-

N.C.

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

CS(CTS)

RS(RTS)

-

Second GOT side (terminal block)

Brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Green

Purple

Untied wire color of GT10-C30R2-6P

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

1st GOT side 2nd GOT side

(connector terminal block)

N.C.

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

RS

SD

RD

DR

SG

ER

CS

N.C.

N.C.

70 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3 Connection Diagram

21

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

2nd GOT side (connector terminal block)

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

NC

RD

SD

ER

SG

DR

RS

CS

NC

RS

SD

RD

DR

SG

ER

CS

NC

NC

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

Brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Green

Purple

Untied wire color of GT10-C30R2-6P

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

2nd GOT side

N.C.

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RST)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

RS

SD

RD

DR

SG

ER

CS

N.C.

N.C.

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3 Connection Diagram 1071

10

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

2

1

4

3

5

7

6

9

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

RDA

SDA

CSA

RSA

SG

RDB

SDB

CSB

RSB

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

2nd GOT side (connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

CSA

CSB

RSA

RSB

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

2nd GOT side (connector terminal block)

RDA

SDA

CSA

RSA

SG

RDB

SDB

CSB

RSB

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

72 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3 Connection Diagram

21

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

1st GOT side 2nd GOT side (connector terminal block)

RDA

SDA

CSA

RSA

SG

RDB

SDB

CSB

RSB

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1st GOT side (connector terminal block)

2nd GOT side

RDA

SDA

CSA

RSA

SG

RDB

SDB

CSB

RSB

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

2

1

4

3

5

7

6

9

8

1st GOT side 2nd GOT side (connector terminal block)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

CSA

CSB

RSA

RSB

2

7

1

6

5

4

9

3

8

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3 Connection Diagram 1073

10

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "330". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 68 Terminating resistors of GOT

74 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.3 Connection Diagram

21

21.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) This section explains with an example of the following system configuration.

Setting for the first GOT Settings of communication interface connecting to the PLC

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Configure the setting according to the controller to be connected. [I/F]: [Standard I/F(RS232)] [Driver]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected. [Serial(MELSEC)] [MELSEC-A] [MELSEC-FX] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 1078 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

Direct CPU connection (serial)

RS-422 cableRS-232 cable

1st GOT 2nd GOT

Click!

2.

3.

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings 1075

10

Settings of communication interface connecting to the second GOT

1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.

2. The I/F Connection list window is displayed. Select the following. I/F-1: RS422/485 CH No.: 9 Driver: Host (PC)

3. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

[Transparent] setting

1. Select [Common] [GOT Setup] [Basic Setting] [Transparent Mode Setting].

2. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple GOTs. For details of connectable models, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

3. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

2.

Click!

76 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings

21

Setting for the second GOT Set the communication interface connecting to the first GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select [CH1] from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC] [Controller Type]: Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC). [I/F]: [Standard I/F(RS422/485)] [Driver]: Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC). [Detail Setting]: Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication interface connecting to the PLC).

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

Click!

2.

3.

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings 1077

10

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Serial (MELSEC)

*1 The format setting differs depending on the controller. L6ADP-R4 adapter: [2] Other than L6ADP-R4 adapter: [1]

MELSEC-FX

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 3 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format*1 Set the communication format. (Default: 1) 1, 2

CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for CPU No. switching. (Default: 500) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1079 Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching

0 to 2032

Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the start device number of the GD devices for module No. switching. (Default: 550) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1080 Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching

0 to 2032

Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)

Set the servo axis switching GD device first No. (Default: 10) For the details, refer to the following. Page 1081 Servo axis switching GD device first No.

0 to 2032

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

78 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings

21

MELSEC-A

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Start device number of the GD devices for CPU number switching Specifying a CPU number with a device [CPU No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 102) to [CPU No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)]. Specify [CPU No.] with the three consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [500] is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)], GD500 to GD502 are used to specify [CPU No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a CPU number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a CPU number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the monitoring target CPU No. set to each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a CPU number and a station number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in a different channel switches the monitoring target CPU No. and station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.

9600bps

CPU No. GD device Setting range 100 GD500 1 to 4

Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error. Specifying a nonexistent CPU No. or a CPU No. not supporting a multiple CPU system with a device causes a controller error.

101 GD501

102 GD502

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings 1079

10

Start device number of the GD devices for module number switching Specifying a module number with a device In a connection via a simple motion module, [Unit No.] can be specified with the GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 10F) to [Unit No.] in the device setting dialog in GT Designer3. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify [Unit No.] with the 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [550] is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD550 to GD565 are used to specify [Unit No.] as shown in the following table.

Specifying a module number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a module number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting range of [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a module number with devices in a multi-channel connection When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the module No. of the simple motion module via the servo amplifier device and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Unit No. GD device Setting range 100 GD550 The setting range depends on [Unit Type].

When [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-L], or [MELIPC] is selected for [Controller Type]

00 to FF When [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Unit Type]

01 to 10 Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.

101 GD551

102 GD552

103 GD553

104 GD554

105 GD555

106 GD556

107 GD557

108 GD558

109 GD559

10A GD560

10B GD561

10C GD562

10D GD563

10E GD564

10F GD565

80 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings

21

Servo axis switching GD device first No. Indirect specification of the servo axis No. In a connection via a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module, a servo axis No. can be indirectly specified with GOT internal registers (GD devices) by specifying a value (100 to 115) to the axis No. of the servo amplifier device. Set the start device number of the GD devices to be used in [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)]. Specify a servo axis number with 16 consecutive GD devices, starting the set device number. When [10] is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)], GD10 to GD25 are used to specify a servo axis number as shown in the following table.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device on the initially-displayed screen Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the values of the GD devices are retained and monitored upon the GOT startup.

Specifying a servo axis number with a device in a multi-channel connection If the setting rage of [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] set in each channel overlaps, the axis No. of the servo amplifier of each channel is switched simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] for each channel so that the setting range does not overlap.

Specifying a station number and a servo axis number with devices in a multi-channel connection

When GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller connected, setting [10] to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] switches the axis No. of the servo amplifier and the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller set to each channel simultaneously. Set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] so that the setting range does not overlap the station No. of an inverter or non-Mitsubishi temperature controller.

Servo axis No. GD device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 64

Setting an invalid value causes a device range error.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.4 GOT Side Settings 1081

10

21.5 Precautions

GOT's communication timing GOT's communication timing Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying the power to the system, the communication with the connected device (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC) is performed in order starting from the first GOT (from the 1st GOT to the 2nd, and so on). When the communication is failed, retries are performed. And if the predetermined time has elapsed, a communication error occurs. If the first GOT is turned on after a while the second GOT is turned on, because the communication start of the second

GOT is delayed, a communication error may be detected at the second GOT. If the system power is turned on simultaneously and it takes time to start the communication of the second GOT, a

communication error may be developed.

Adjusting communication timing When powering up the system simultaneously Using the utility or selecting [GOT Setup] - [Basic Setting] - [Display Setting/Language Setting] from GT Designer3, set the timing for displaying the title by adding a delay to each setting for the GOTs from the first GOT. During the opening process, communication with the connected device does not start. Example: Set value of [Opening Screen Time] (Inside (): set value) First module (5s) Second module (10s) When powering on devices individually Turn on the connected device first, and then the first GOT, the second GOT, and so on.

Using the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent function is not available.

User screen

User screen

The title screen is displayed.

Power supply (24VDC) supplied to GOT

First GOT's communication

Second GOT's communication Retry

Communication of the 2nd GOT is enabled.

82 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.5 Precautions

21

Monitoring stop condition for the GOT in the multiple-GT11 connection In the system where multiple GOTs are connected, when GOT setup is performed with the first GOT, the second GOT stops monitoring. When the first GOT resumes monitoring, the second GOT also resumes monitoring.

When PLC power disconnection occurs in the multiple-GOT connection In the system where multiple GOTs are connected, when the communication between the PLC and the first GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection and a disconnection of the communication cable between the PLC and the first GOT, the GOT waits for timeout against the communication request from the peripheral devices (GX Developer, etc.), and recovery of monitoring between the PLC and the GOT is delayed.

1st GOT 2nd GOT

Monitoring stoppedIn setup

1st GOT 2nd GOT

MonitoringMonitoring

21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.5 Precautions 1083

10

MEMO

84 21 MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21.5 Precautions

PART 5 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

1085

10

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION Page 1086 What is Multi-channel Function? Page 1088 System Configuration Example Page 1091 GOT Side Settings Page 1112 Precautions Page 1113 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet

22.1 What is Multi-channel Function? Multi-channel Function is a function to monitor up to four FA controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter, etc.) on one GOT by writing multiple communication drivers in the GOT.

Before using the multi-channel function This manual describes the procedure to use the multi-channel function, based on the following system configuration example. Page 1088 Example of bus connection or serial connection Page 1090 Example of multi-channel Ethernet connection System configuration when the multi-channel function is used The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi- channel function. For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration

Channel No.1

Channel No.2

Channel No.3

Channel No.4

Installing multiple communication drivers

Bus connection

OMRON PLC connection

Temperature controller connection

Servo amplifier connection

Monitoring the devices of FA controllers

86 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.1 What is Multi-channel Function?

22

Features of the multi-channel function With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo

amplifier and other controllers can be configured. One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is possible.

Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.). For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied, using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) as the trigger for action.

With one GOT, the Ethernet connection and the bus or network connection are available in combination. (GT27, GT25)

One GOT can make the Ethernet connections and the bus or network connection. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established. Also, the GOT can monitor multiple controllers on an Ethernet network. (Multi-channel Ethernet connection)

PLC Temperatur controller Servo amplifier

PLC system

Temperature controller system

Servo amplifier system Can monitor different kinds of controllers on the same screen.

FXCPU

Condition is satisfied

Writing to a device

Hub

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.1 What is Multi-channel Function? 1087

10

22.2 System Configuration Example Example of bus connection or serial connection One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, a system, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily configured. In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is possible. For details on the connection type and channel number to be used, refer to the following. Page 1094 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

*1 Only one channel is available for GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS. *2 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support option devices.

PLC Connection type

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Channel No.

Option device *2

Model

OMRON PLC Direct CPU connection (serial)

For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration

1 - (Built into GOT) 4 connected equipment for 1 GOT (4 channels)

MELSERVO-J2-Super 2

OMRON temperature controller 3 GT15-RS2-9P

MELSEC-Q Bus connection 4 GT15-QBUS

OMRON PLC Direct CPU connection (serial)

1 - (Built into GOT)

*1

2 connected equipment for 1 GOT (2 channels)

MELSERVO-J2-Super 2

Communication driver

Bus(Q) OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC /INPANEL NEO

Communication driver Communication driver

MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M

Bus connection (Channel No.4)

Temperature controller connection (Channel No.3)

Connection cableQCPU

Connection cable

Direct CPU connection (serial) (Channel No.1)Connection cableOMRON

PLC

OMRON temperature controller

Servo amplifier connection (Channel No.2)Connection cable

MELSERVO- J2-Super series GOT

88 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.2 System Configuration Example

22

Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8 The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8. For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller.

*1 Only one channel can be assigned to one driver.

Channel No. Driver*1 Reference

5 to 7 Barcode Reader, RFID Controller, PC Remote Operation (Serial)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals)

BAR CODE READER CONNECTION

PC REMOTE CONNECTION

RFID CONNECTION

8 Barcode Reader, RFID Controller, PC Remote Operation (Serial)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.2 System Configuration Example 1089

10

Example of multi-channel Ethernet connection One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established. For details on the connection type and channel number to be used, refer to the following. Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

PLC Connection type

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Channel No.

Option device Model

MELSEC-FX Ethernet For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration

1 Ethernet 4 connected equipment for 1 GOT (4 channels)

QCPU 2

ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

3

Robot controller 4

MELSEC-FX Ethernet For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following. Each chapter indicating the system configuration

1 - (Built into GOT) 2 connected equipment for 1 GOT (2 channels)

QCPU 2

Ethernet (FX), Gateway

Communication driver

Ethernet(AB), Gateway

Communication driver Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

Ethernet connection (Channel No.1)

Ethernet connection (Channel No.2)

Ethernet connection (Channel No.3)

Ethernet connection (Channel No.4)

Connection cable

Connection cable

Connection cable

Connection cable

GOT

FXCPU

ALLEN- BRADLEY PLC

Robot controller

QCPU

90 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.2 System Configuration Example

22

22.3 GOT Side Settings Basics of interface selection This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function. For the steps from system selection to screen design, refer to the following. Page 1093 General flow from system selection to drawing

Multi-channel function specifications How the units are installed and the multi-channel function specifications are described below.

Image drawing of unit installation

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

Extension interface

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

(Example: In the case of the GT27)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1091

10

Specifications

*1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

*2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS/TCP connection *3 Gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download *4 Barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer (writing remote personal computer operation (serial), FA transparent function, OS

install, project data) *5 GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13 *6 GT27-V4-Z, GT27-R2-Z, GT27-V4R1-Z, GT27-ROUT-Z, GT27-MMR-Z *7 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GT2705-V can supply. GOT other than GT2705-V, the calculation of the current value is not required. For details of the calculation of the consumed current when GT2705-V is used, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

Item Specifications Description Max. number of channels 4 channels In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT.

For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set. When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection other than communication

with a controller (*3), the connection is not included in the count of the number of channels. The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not included in the count of the

number of channels.

Max. installable number of modules 3 Multiple identical units can be installed only for serial communication units. It is necessary to calculate the consumed current. Page 1092 Calculating consumed current of GT2705-V

Allowable number of stages Max. 3 stages (2 slots)

A module that occupies 2 slots (*5, *6, *7) must be installed at the first stage. For the video/RGB display, RGB output, and multimedia function, install only either one of the unit

indicated in *6 at the first stage and the other units at the second or later stage. When a unit indicated in *7 is used, other extension units cannot be installed. The CF card unit must be installed on the last stage, if used.

92 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below. Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below.

1. System selection Determine the connection type and the channel No. to be used. Page 1094 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

2. Interface selection Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to be used for the multichannel function. Page 1100 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)

3. Checking the unit installation position Determine the communication unit installation position. Page 62 Precautions when installing units on top of one another

4. Make settings for Communication Settings. Page 1107 Setting for communication settings

5. Confirm items to know before starting drawing. Page 1110 Items to be checked before starting drawing

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1093

10

Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)

Determining the connection type For GT27, GT25, GT23 GT27, GT25 and GT23 allow bus/network connection, Ethernet connection, and serial connection shown in the following table to be used simultaneously.

Connection type Reference Bus/network connection Bus connection Page 487 BUS CONNECTION

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Page 535 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

CC-Link IE TSN connection Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

CC-Link IE Field Network connection Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Page 689 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network))

Page 993 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))

Page 994 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

Ethernet connection Ethernet connection Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Robot controller connection Page 975 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

CNC connection (Ethernet connection) Page 995 Ethernet connection

Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection 15. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15.3 Ethernet Connection

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)

MODBUS/TCP connection Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 6. MODBUS/TCP CONNECTION

94 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

The following shows the applicable combinations of connection types, the number of channels, and restricted functions. : Allowed : Restricted

Serial connection Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

Serial communication connection Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

CC-Link connection (via G4) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

Inverter connection Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

Servo amplifier connection Page 923 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

CNC connection (serial connection) Page 992 Direct CPU connection (serial)

GOT multi-drop connection Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 13. CONNECTION TO SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.2 Serial Connection 11. CONNECTION TO GE PLC

Serial connection Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 15. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

Third party safety controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 14. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER

Third party servo amplifier connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

Third party temperature controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

Microcomputer Connection (Serial) Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)

MODBUS/RTU connection Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 5. MODBUS/RTU CONNECTION

Item Allowable combination of connection types GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1

GT27 FA transparent function

RS-232 USB Ethernet (a) Bus/network connection: 1 channel

Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels Max. 4 channels *2

(b) Bus/network connection: 1 channel Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels

Max. 4 channels *2 *3

(c) Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels

Max. 4 channels *2 *3

(d) Bus/network connection: 1 channel Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels Serial connection: 1 to 2 channels

Max. 4 channels *2 *3

(e) Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2

(f) Ethernet connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2

Connection type Reference

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1095

10

*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Barcode function RFID function Remote personal computer operation function Video display function (GT27 only) Multimedia function (GT27 only) External I/O function RGB display function (GT27 only) Report function Sound output function The video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together. For details, refer to the following. Page 1100 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)

*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.

*3 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not allowed.

96 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

For GT21 For GT21, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table.

The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. : Allowed : Restricted

*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Barcode function RFID function For details, refer to the following. Page 1100 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)

*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only. When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.

*3 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not allowed.

Connection type Reference Ethernet connection Ethernet connection Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Robot controller connection Page 975 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection 15. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 15.3 Ethernet Connection

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet) Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)

MODBUS/TCP connection Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 6. MODBUS/TCP CONNECTION

Serial connection Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

Serial communication connection Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

CC-Link connection (via G4) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

Inverter connection Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

Servo amplifier connection Page 923 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

GOT multi-drop connection Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

Third party PLC connection (Serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

Microcomputer Connection (Serial) Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)

MODBUS/RTU connection Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 5. MODBUS/RTU CONNECTION

GOT to be used Allowable combination of connection types Max. number of channels

Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1

FA transparent function

RS-232 USB Ethernet GT2104-RTBD Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels

Serial connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2 *3

GT2104-PMBD GT2103-PMBD

Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels Serial connection: 1 channels

Max. 2 channels - *3

GT2104-PMBDS GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBDS

Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2 -

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1097

10

For GS21 For GS21, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table.

The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. : Allowed : Restricted

*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the functions to be used. Barcode function RFID function For details, refer to the following. Page 1100 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)

*2 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not allowed.

Connection type Reference Ethernet connection Ethernet connection Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Serial connection Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

Computer link connection Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

CC-Link connection (via G4) Page 777 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

Inverter connection Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

Servo amplifier connection Page 923 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

Third party PLC connection (Serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

Microcomputer Connection (Serial) Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)

MODBUS/RTU connection Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals 5. MODBUS/RTU CONNECTION

Item Allowable combination of connection types GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1

GS21 FA transparent function

USB Ethernet (a) Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels

Serial connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2

(b) Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2

98 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Determining the channel No. Channel No. of PLC, motion controller, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC,

robot controller After determining the connection type to be used, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be used for the respective connection types. There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos. Set the channel No. by selecting [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu. Page 37 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)

Channel No. of external devices (barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer and serial printer)

When connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer, select the channel No. (No. 5 to No. 8) for each external device. Number of external devices that can be connected to the GOT One barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer can be connected to one GOT. One driver must be set for one channel No. (No. 5 to No. 8) in the communication settings. Operator authentication (external authentication) When using the operator authentication (external authentication), the RFID controller is available for the channel No. 8 only. External devices that requires the power supply from the GOT When using the barcode reader or RFID controller that requires the power supply from the GOT, set the channel No.8. When the channel No.5 to No.7 is set, the GOT cannot supply the power.

Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.

Selection of connection type Write down the name of connection type to be used.

Write Check Sheet

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1099

11

Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) To use the multi-channel function, add interfaces to the GOT with the following methods if required. Install communication units on the extension interfaces. Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485 interface, and/or

the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: In the case of the GT27)

Extension interface

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

Allows controllers to be connected via Ethernet. Up to four channels can be set.

Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication.

Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication.

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

Not used for the multi-channel function.

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage. These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 4th or higher stage.

00 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Select the interface to be used to enable the selected connection. Select the interfaces according to the connection type by referring to the following.

Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit Bus connection Page 1102 GOT interface used for bus connection

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Page 1102 GOT interface used for network connection

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network), CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))

Ethernet connection Page 1102 GOT interface used for Ethernet connection

Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)

Robot controller connection

CNC connection (Ethernet connection)

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

MODBUS/TCP connection

Direct CPU connection (serial) Page 1102 GOT interface used for serial connection

Serial communication connection

CC-Link connection (via G4)

Inverter connection

Servo amplifier connection

CNC connection (serial connection)

GOT multi-drop connection

Third party PLC connection (serial connection)

Third party safety controller connection

Third party servo amplifier connection

Third party robot controller connection

Third party temperature controller connection

Microcomputer Connection (Serial)

MODBUS/RTU connection

Other functions Page 1103 Interfaces and option units used for other functions

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1101

11

GOT interface used for bus connection For the bus connection, use the following communication units.

*1 To mount multiple units, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required.

Bus connection units to be used GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels. When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15- ABUS(2). Restrictions by bus connection unit installation For the following functions, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2), regardless of the number of channels used for the serial connection. With the GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, the following functions are not available.

GOT interface used for network connection For the network connection, use the following communication units.

GOT interface used for Ethernet connection For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT.

*1 Up to four channels can be used.

GOT interface used for serial connection For the serial connection, provide interfaces equivalent to the number of channels by using the following interfaces built in the GOT and communication units in combinations.

*1 The operator authentication (external authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.

Interface Model*1

Bus connection unit GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS(2), GT15-ABUS(2)

Interface Model MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Interface Name Name Ethernet interface*1

Interface Name/model Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface

Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

Function

Remote personal computer operation (serial),Video display function,Multimedia function, External I/O function,RGB display function,Sound output function

02 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Interfaces and option units used for other functions When the following functions are used in combinations, the number of available channels may vary according to the combinations of units

Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi-channel function to be used is restricted or not. If it is restricted, review the system configuration.

Number of stages taken up by the individual functions (number of slots) Report function and sound output function

Remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function

Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, and gateway function

Barcode function, RFID function, and remote personal computer operation (serial)

Function Reference Sound output function External I/O function, Report function and sound output function

Remote personal computer operation (serial), Multimedia function,

Video display function, RGB display function

Remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function

Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Gateway function,

Ethernet download, MES interface function

Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, and gateway function

RFID function, Barcode function, Remote personal computer operation (serial),

Barcode function, RFID function, and remote personal computer operation (serial)

The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit is required depending on the function to be used. Each unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface.

A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used. Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface. Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT.

Use the interface built in the GOT. The Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.

Use the interface built in the GOT or a serial communication unit. A serial communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1103

11

Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.

Selection of interface (communication unit) Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type.

Write Check Sheet

04 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Write down the following items to the check sheet.

Attaching the communication unit

1. Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type.

Write Check Sheet

(2)

Extension interface

1st stage

2nd stage

3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name

Com. unit name

CH No.

CH No.

Standard interface 2 Connection a controller

Driver name

Connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer

Driver name

Driver name

(only one connection)

(1)

(3)

(8)

Standard interface 4 Connection a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)

Driver name

Connection a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(only one connection)

(9)

Standard interface 1 Connection a controller

Driver name

(only one connection)

(7)

Driver name

Multi-channel Ethernet connectionMulti

Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

(1) (2) (3)

(9)

(8) (7)

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: For GT27)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1105

11

(1) (2) (3)

(9)

(8) (7)

(2)

Extension interface

1st stage

2nd stage

3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name

Com. unit name

CH No.

CH No.

Standard interface 2 Connection a controller

Driver name

Connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer

Driver name

Driver name

(only one connection)

(1)

(3)

(8)

Standard interface 4 Connection a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)

Driver name

Connection a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(only one connection)

(9)

Standard interface 1 Connection a controller

Driver name

(only one connection)

(7)

Driver name

Multi-channel Ethernet connectionMulti

Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: For GT27)

5

4

1

3

8

2

2. After writing down the names of communication units, write down CH No. to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in Check Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface).

3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types, refer to the following.

Chapters of each respective connection type

(2)

Extension interface

1st stage

2nd stage

3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name

Com. unit name

CH No.

CH No.

Standard interface 2 Connection a controller

Driver name

Connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer

Driver name

Driver name

(only one connection)

(1)

(3)

(8)

Standard interface 4 Connection a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)

Driver name

Connection a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(only one connection)

(9)

Standard interface 1 Connection a controller

Driver name

(only one connection)

(7)

Driver name

Multi-channel Ethernet connectionMulti

Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: For GT27)

MELSERVO-J4,J3,J2S/M

RFID

1

2

3

4

5

8

Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

BarcodeGT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-QBUS2 Bus(Q)

(1) (2) (3)

(9)

(8) (7)

06 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Setting for communication settings Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

Extend interface

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT) Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

(Example: For GT27)

Check

Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written. The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are specified on the check sheet by numbers.

This completes the setting for Communication Settings. Create a screen with GT Designer3.

(2)

Extension interface

1st stage

2nd stage

3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name

Com. unit name

CH No.

CH No.

Standard interface 2 Connection a controller

Driver name

Connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer

Driver name

Driver name

(only one connection)

(1)

(3)

(8)

Standard interface 4 Connection a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)

Driver name

Connection a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(only one connection)

(9)

Standard interface 1 Connection a controller

Driver name

(only one connection)

(7)

Driver name

Multi-channel Ethernet connectionMulti

Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: For GT27)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-QBUS2

5

4

1

Barcode

MELSERVO-J4,J3,J2S/M

Bus(Q)

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

RFID

Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway2

3

8

(1) (2) (3)

(9)

(8) (7)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1107

11

Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code reader"

Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 channel)"

08 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Example: Setting example for Ethernet connection (4 channels)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1109

11

Items to be checked before starting drawing The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set beforehand when using the multi-channel function.

Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Accessible range for monitoring The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used. Page 92 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set. Set the device.

FXCPU

Accessible range is not changed.

FXCPU

10 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings

22

Clock function Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

FA transparent function Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No. Page 1051 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility. To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility.

Station No. switching function Set the controller for which the station No. switching function should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

CH No. 1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC

CH No. 2 Servo amplifier

CH No. 3 OMRON PLC

CH No. 4 Temperature controller

Broadcast is executed for CH No. 1 and CH No. 3.

10:10 10:10

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

10:10

FA transparent function is executed for CH No. 1.

CHARGE

MITSUBISHI

CH No. 1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC

CH No. 2 Servo amplifier

CH No. 3 OMRON PLC

CH No. 4 Temperature controller

Station No. switching is executed for CH No. 1.

CHARGE

MITSUBISH I

CH No. 1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC

CH No. 2 Servo amplifier

CH No. 3 OMRON PLC

CH No. 4 Temperature controller

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.3 GOT Side Settings 1111

11

22.4 Precautions Precautions for use

Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm. Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT.

Confirmation of the channel No. at which a system alarm occurred When a system alarm occurred, confirm the channel No. where the alarm occurred, using the procedure indicated below.

Check by [System alarm display] of the utility. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Monitor the internal devices of the GOT. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

12 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.4 Precautions

22

22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used. Sections 20.3.3 to 20.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet. Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the setting for the multi-channel function.

Write Check Sheet

The following symbols are used for each purpose.

Indicates parts where items and details are to be written. Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet.

Indicates parts where written details are to be checked. Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings.

Check

Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.

Selection of connection type Enter the name of connection type to be used.

Write Check Sheet

Shows items and contents to be written on the check sheet. Also describes an example of the check sheet.

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 1113

11

Check sheet No.1 (selection of connection type and interface) (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller CPU, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot controller (No.1 to No.4)

(2) Channel No. of barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (CH No. 5 to 8)

CH No.

Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)

1 Connection name

2 Connection name

3 Connection name

4 Connection name

CH No.

Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)

5 Connection name

6 Connection name

7 Connection name

8 Connection name

14 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet

22

Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Attaching the communication unit

Page 62 Precautions when installing units on top of one another

(2)

Extension interface

1st stage

2nd stage

3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name

Com. unit name

CH No.

CH No.

Standard interface 2 Connection a controller

Driver name

Connecting a barcode reader, RFID controller, or personal computer

Driver name

Driver name

(only one connection)

(1)

(3)

(8)

Standard interface 4 Connection a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)

Driver name

Connection a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(only one connection)

(9)

Standard interface 1 Connection a controller

Driver name

(only one connection)

(7)

Driver name

Multi-channel Ethernet connectionMulti

Driver name

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

Com. unit name CH No.

3rd stage

2nd stage

1st stage

(Example: For GT27)

(1) (2) (3)

(9)

(8) (7)

22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 1115

11

MEMO

16 22 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet

PART 6 FA TRANSPARENT

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

1117

11

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Page 1118 FA Transparent Function Page 1119 Compatible Software Page 1131 List of Models that Can Be Monitored Page 1180 System Configuration Page 1202 Connection Diagram Page 1203 GOT Side Settings Page 1207 Personal Computer Side Setting Page 1360 Precautions

23.1 FA Transparent Function The FA transparent function allows the programs of the Mitsubishi Electric PLC to be read, written, and monitored via a GOT connected to a personal computer with the GOT and the PLC connected. Example) When the sequence programs are read from, written to, and monitored from the Mitsubishi Electric PLC through a GOT

Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc.

Bus connection cable RS-232/RS-422 cable Ethernet connection cable

USB cable Ethernet connection cable RS-232 cable

A 1254

348B

A 1254

348B Wireless LAN

18 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.1 FA Transparent Function

23

23.2 Compatible Software The following shows the software compatible with the FA transparent function.

The range accessible by software when FA transparent function is used Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software. For details on accessible range, refer to the manual for the respective software. The software settings when using FA transparent function For the software settings, refer to the following when using FA transparent function. Page 1207 Accessing by GX Works3 Page 1245 Accessing by CW Configurator Page 1263 Accessing the PLC by the PX Developer, GX Configurator Page 1270 Accessing by GX Works2 Page 1298 Accessing by GX LogViewer Page 1299 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP Page 1301 Accessing by the MT Developer Page 1303 Accessing by the MT Works2 Page 1314 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Page 1314 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Page 1315 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator Page 1316 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator2 Page 1322 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP Page 1323 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN Page 1324 Accessing by RT ToolBox3 Page 1337 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 Page 1341 Accessing by NC Configurator2 Page 1342 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator Page 1343 Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Page 1344 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module Page 1348 Accessing by MX Component (MX Sheet) Page 1353 Accessing by MI Configurator

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1119

11

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB When connecting the GOT and controller using the bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet. *2 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.66U or later. *3 A Motion controller is required between the GOT and controller in the bus connection.

Controller Software Applicable version QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

PX Developer 1.40S or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

Setting/monitoring tool for C Controller module

4.04E or later

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

QCPU (A Mode), QnA/ACPU, Motion CPU (A series)

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

Motion CPU (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

MT Works2 1.66U or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

CNC CPU (Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator2 B0 or later

Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2 3.00 or later

RT ToolBox3 From the first version

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) RT ToolBox3 1.20W or later

MELSERVO (MR-J3-B)*3 MR Configurator2*2 1.23Z or later

MELSERVO (MR-J4-B)*3 MR Configurator2*2 1.23Z or later

20 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

When connecting the GOT and controller using the direct CPU connection (serial) The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

Controller Software Applicable version FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 1.005F or later

MX Component 4.11M or later

MX Sheet *5

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

FX5S GX Works3 1.080J or later

QCPU (Q mode) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

PX Developer 1.40S or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

LCPU*2 MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

QCPU (A Mode), QnA/ACPU, Motion CPU (A series)

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

FXCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

Motion CPU (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

MT Works2 1.66U or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

FR-A700 series FR Configurator 3.00

FR-F700 series FR Configurator 3.00

FR-E700 series FR Configurator 3.00

FR-D700 series FR Configurator 3.00

FR-A800 and FR-F800 series FR Configurator2 From the first version

FR-A800 Plus series FR-A800-CRN FR-A800-E-CRN FR-A800-R2R FR-A800-E-R2R

FR Configurator2 1.16S or later

FR-A800-LC FR-A800-E-LC

FR Configurator2 1.19V or later

FR-E800 series FR Configurator2 1.19V or later

Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2 3.00 or later

RT ToolBox3 From the first version

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) RT ToolBox3 1.20W or later

MELSERVO (MR-J3-B)*4 MR Configurator2*3 1.24A or later

MELSERVO (MR-J4-B)*4 MR Configurator2*3 1.24A or later

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1121

11

*1 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet. *2 An adapter (L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4) is required to use an LCPU other than the following.

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU having a serial number starting with 15102 or later.

*3 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.66U or later. *4 A Motion controller is required between the GOT and controller in the direct CPU connection (serial). *5 Use MX Component (Version 4.11M or later) for MX Sheet.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the serial communication connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet. *2 Use MX Component (Version 4.06G or later) for MX Sheet.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: From the first version

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *2

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *1

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

QCPU (Q mode) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

PX Developer 1.40S or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

LCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *1

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

22 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

When connecting the GOT and controller using the Ethernet connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: From the first version

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *5

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) MT Works2 1.100E or later

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *5

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator From the first version

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

Robot controller (CR800-R, CR800-D) RT ToolBox3 From the first version

FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: 1.075D or later

Other than the above: 1.005F or later

MX Component When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: Not available Other than the above: 4.11M or later

MX Sheet When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: Not available Other than the above: *6

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

FX5S GX Works3 1.080J or later

QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2*1 1.497T or later (Same when using the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB))

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *2

Setting/monitoring tool for C Controller module

4.04E or later

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

LCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

GX Works2 1.497T or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *2

GX LogViewer 1.32J or later

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.32J or later

FXCPU GX Works2 1.497T or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *2

QCPU (A Mode), QnA/ACPU GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *2

Motion CPU (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.71Z or later

MT Works2 1.66U or later

CNC CPU (Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator2 B0 or later

FR-E700 (FR-E70-NE), FR-A800, and FR-F800 series

FR Configurator2 Through the Ethernet port built in the RCPU: 1.16S or later

Other than the above: 1.15R or later

FR-A800 Plus series FR-A800-E-CRN FR-A800-E-R2R

FR Configurator2 1.16S or later

FR-A800-E-LC FR Configurator2 1.19V or later

FR-E800 series FR Configurator2 1.19V or later

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1123

11

*1 C controller module (Q series) does not support CC-Link IE Field Network. *2 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet. *3 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.66U or later. *4 A Motion controller is required between the GOT and controller in the Ethernet connection. *5 Use MX Component (Version 4.06G or later) for MX Sheet. *6 Use MX Component (Version 4.11M or later) for MX Sheet.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE TSN connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2 3.00 or later

RT ToolBox3 From the first version

CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) RT ToolBox3 1.20W or later

MELSERVO (MR-J3-B) *4 MR Configurator2*3 1.23Z or later

MELSERVO (MR-J4-B) *4 MR Configurator2*3 1.23Z or later

MELIPC MI Configurator From the first version

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: 1.025B or later

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series) GX Works2 1.525X or later

Motion CPU (Q series) (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 only)

GX Works2 1.525X or later

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 1.030G or later

(Same for the RCPU redundant system)

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 1.035M or later

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 1.545T or later

Motion CPU (Q series) (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 only)

GX Works2 1.545T or later

LCPU GX Works2 1.545T or later

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 1.080J or later

Controller Software Applicable version

24 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer using the RS-232 connection When connecting the GOT and controller using the direct CPU connection (serial) The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 The RS-232/USB conversion adaptor (GT10-RS2TUSB-5S) is not compatible with FX-PCS/WIN. *2 An adapter (L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4) is required to use an LCPU other than the following.

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU having a serial number starting with 15102 or later.

*3 Use MX Component (Version 3.14Q or later) for MX Sheet. *4 Use MX Component (Version 4.00A or later) for MX Sheet. *5 Use MX Component (Version 4.11M or later) for MX Sheet.

Controller Software Applicable version FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 1.005F or later

MX Component 4.11M or later

MX Sheet *5

QCPU (Q mode) MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2 1.03D or later

MX Component 4.00A or later

MX Sheet *3

LCPU*2 MELSOFT Navigator 1.07H or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2 1.11M or later

GX LogViewer From the first version

MX Component 4.00A or later

MX Sheet *3

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.04E or later

QCPU (A Mode), QnA/ACPU GX Developer 8.118Y or later

MX Component 4.00A or later

MX Sheet *3

FXCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2 1.03D or later

FX-PCS/WIN*1 From the first version

FX Configurator-FP 1.30 or later

FX Configurator-EN-L From the first version

FX Configurator-EN From the first version

MX Component 4.00A or later

MX Sheet *3

Motion CPU (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

MT Developer From the first version

SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user APIs)

From the first version

MT Works2 1.00A or later

MX Component 4.00A or later

MX Sheet *4

Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2 3.00 or later

RT ToolBox3 From the first version

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1125

11

When connecting the GOT and controller using the serial communication connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Use MX Component (Version 3.14Q or later) for MX Sheet. *2 Use MX Component (Version 4.06G or later) for MX Sheet.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: From the first version

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *2

QCPU (Q mode) MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2 1.03D or later

MX Component 4.03D or later

MX Sheet *1

LCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.07H or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2 1.11M or later

GX LogViewer From the first version

MX Component 4.03D or later

MX Sheet *1

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.04E or later

26 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

When connecting the GOT and controller using the Ethernet connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Only QCPU can be connected. When connecting the GOT to QnA/ACPU, connect the GOT via QCPU. *2 Use MX Component (Version 3.14Q or later) for MX Sheet. *3 Use MX Component (Version 4.06G or later) for MX Sheet. *4 Use MX Component (Version 4.11M or later) for MX Sheet. *5 For connection through a servo amplifier, the FA transparent function is not supported.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3*5 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: From the first version

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *3

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) MT Works2 1.100E or later

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *3

Robot controller (CR800-R, CR800-D) RT ToolBox3 From the first version

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator From the first version

FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3*5 When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: 1.075D or later

Other than the above: 1.005F or later

MX Component When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: Not available Other than the above: 4.11M or later

MX Sheet When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: Not available Other than the above: *4

QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2*5 1.10L or later

MX Component 4.03D or later

MX Sheet *2

LCPU MELSOFT Navigator 1.07H or later

GX Developer 8.118Y or later

GX Works2*5 1.11M or later

GX LogViewer From the first version

MX Component 4.03D or later

MX Sheet *2

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool 1.04E or later

FXCPU GX Works2 1.98C or later

Motion CPU (Q series) MELSOFT Navigator 1.04E or later

SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P, SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user APIs)

From the first version

MT Works2 When connecting to Q17nDCPU-S1: 1.12N or later Other than the above: 1.08J or later

Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2 3.00 or later

RT ToolBox3 From the first version

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1127

11

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer via Ethernet When connecting the GOT and controller using the bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Use MX Component (Version 3.15R or later) for MX Sheet. *2 A Motion controller is required between the GOT and controller in the bus connection.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the direct CPU connection (serial) The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 An adapter (L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4) is required to use an LCPU other than the following. L02SCPU L02SCPU-P When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU having a serial number starting with 15102 or later.

*2 Use MX Component (Version 3.15R or later) for MX Sheet. *3 A Motion controller is required between the GOT and controller in the direct CPU connection (serial). *4 Use MX Component (Version 4.11M or later) for MX Sheet. *5 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet.

Controller Software Applicable version QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series) GX Works2 1.48A or later

MX Component 3.15R or later

MX Sheet *1

Setting/monitoring tool for C Controller module

4.00A or later

Motion CPU (Q series) MT Works2 1.25B or later

MELSERVO (MR-J3-B) *2 MR Configurator2 1.07H or later

MELSERVO (MR-J4-B) *2 MR Configurator2 1.09K or later

Controller Software Applicable version FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 1.005F or later

MX Component 4.11M or later

MX Sheet *4

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

FX5S GX Works3 1.080J or later

QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 1.48A or later

MX Component 3.15R or later

MX Sheet *2

LCPU*1 GX Works2 1.48A or later

MX Component 3.15R or later

MX Sheet *2

FXCPU GX Works2 1.73B or later

MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *5

Motion CPU (Q series) MT Works2 1.19V or later

MELSERVO (MR-J3-B)*3 MR Configurator2 1.07H or later

MELSERVO (MR-J4-B)*3 MR Configurator2 1.09K or later

28 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

When connecting the GOT and controller using the serial communication connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

*1 Use MX Component (Version 3.15R or later) for MX Sheet. *2 Use MX Component (Version 4.06G or later) for MX Sheet. *3 Use MX Component (Version 4.05F or later) for MX Sheet.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: From the first version

MX Component 4.06G or later

MX Sheet *2

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) MX Component 4.05F or later

MX Sheet *3

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 1.48A or later

MX Component 3.15R or later

MX Sheet *1

LCPU GX Works2 1.48A or later

MX Component 3.15R or later

MX Sheet *1

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 RCPU redundant system: 1.030G or later

Other than the above: 1.025B or later

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series) GX Works2 1.525X or later

Motion CPU (Q series) (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 only)

GX Works2 1.525X or later

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 1.030G or later

(Same for the RCPU redundant system)

C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) CW Configurator 1.013P or later

FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 1.035M or later

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 1.545T or later

Motion CPU (Q series) (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 only)

GX Works2 1.545T or later

LCPU GX Works2 1.545T or later

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software 1129

11

When connecting the GOT and controller using the Ethernet connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

When connecting the GOT and controller using the CC-Link IE TSN connection The following shows the software and the accessible controllers.

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 1.040S or later

FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 When using FX5-ENET or FX5-ENET/IP: 1.075D or later

Other than the above: 1.045X or later

FX5UJ GX Works3 1.060N or later

FX5S GX Works3 1.080J or later

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) MT Works2 1.140W or later

QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 1.565P or later

MX Component 4.14Q or later

MX Sheet 2.11M or later

Motion CPU (Q series) (Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 only)

GX Works2 1.565P or later

LCPU GX Works2 1.565P or later

FXCPU GX Works2 1.570U or later

MELIPC MI Configurator From the first version

FR-E700 (FR-E70-NE), FR-A800, and FR-F800 series

FR Configurator2 1.16S or later

FR-E800 series FR Configurator2 1.19V or later

Controller Software Applicable version RCPU GX Works3 1.080J or later

30 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.2 Compatible Software

23

23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored The following models support FA transparent function.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB MELSEC iQ-R Series

*1 For R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, use GX Works3 Ver.1.040S and later. *2 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*3 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later. MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later).

*4 MX Component or MX Sheet does not support the FA transparent function through CC-Link IE Controller Network. *5 Mount a SIL2 function module R6PSFM and a redundant function module R6RFM next to RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *6 Use GX Works3 Version 1.050C or later. *7 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *8 GX Works3 Ver.1.080J or later is required to use the FA transparent function using the CC-Link IE TSN connection.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R00CPU *1

R01CPU *1

R02CPU *1

R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

GX Works3*8

MX Component*4

MX Sheet*4

- -

*7 *7 *7

R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU

-

R04ENCPU *3

R08ENCPU *3

R16ENCPU *3

R32ENCPU *3

R120ENCPU *3

*7

R08SFCPU *2*3

R16SFCPU *2*3

R32SFCPU *2*3

R120SFCPU *2*3

R08PSFCPU *5

R16PSFCPU *5

R32PSFCPU *5

R120PSFCPU *5

GX Works3 *6 - - - -

*7 *7

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1131

11

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 CW Configurator Ver.1.013P or later is required to use the FA transparent function through one of the following: Serial communication connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection

*2 Not available to GT25-W and GT2505-V.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU

MT Works2 - - - - - -

MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R12CCPU-V CW Configurator*1 - - -

*2 *2

32 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 Use CW Configurator Ver.1.013P or later. *2 Not available to GT25-W and GT2505-V.

CNC C80

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R102WCPU-W CW Configurator*1 - - -

*2

-

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16NCCPU-S1 GX Works3 - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1133

11

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

RT ToolBox3 - - - - - -

CR800-D RT ToolBox3 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

RJ72GF15-T2 GX Works3 - - -

*1 *1

34 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC iQ-F Series

*1 Use FX5-ENET Version 1.240 or later. *2 The FA transparent through FX5-ENET is not supported. *3 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later.

MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later). *4 Use GX Works3 Version 1.060N or later. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *6 Use GX Works3 Version 1.080J or later.

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX5U FX5UC

GX Works3*1

MX Component*2*3

MX Sheet*2*3

- - - -

*5

FX5UJ GX Works3*4 - - - -

*5

FX5S GX Works3*6 - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q00JCPU GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

*4

-

*4 *4 Q00CPU

Q01CPU

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1135

11

*1 GX Developer, GX Configurator, PX Developer, MX Component, or MX Sheet does not support the FA transparent function through CC- Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network.

*2 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool and GX LogViewer are supported. *3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since the CPU has no direct coupled I/F. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Q02CPU GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

*4

-

*4 *4 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

*4

-

*4 *4

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

- - -

*4 *4Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

- - - - - - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

*4

-

*4 *4Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

GX Works2 GX Developer *1

GX Configurator *1

PX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

*4

*3

-

*4 *4

Q03UDVCPU *2

Q04UDVCPU *2

Q06UDVCPU *2

Q13UDVCPU *2

Q26UDVCPU *2

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

36 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

C Controller module (Q Series)

*1 GX Developer, MX Component or MX Sheet, GX LogViewer, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool does not support the FA transparent function through CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network.

*2 When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V/VG as the connected CPU, only MX Component can be used. When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-V/VG, GX Works2 can also be used.

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *4 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V/VG have no direct coupled I/F.

MELSEC-QS

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q12DCCPU-V GX Works2 GX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1 *2*3

*4

-

*2

-

*3 *3

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

GX Works2 GX Developer *1

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1 *2*3

*4

-

*2

-

*3 *3

Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module *2*3

*4

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QS001CPU - - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1137

11

MELSEC-L

*1 L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L02SCPU-P, and L26CPU-PBT do not support MX Component and MX Sheet. *2 GX Works2 cannot be connected to the MELSEC-L series through the Ethernet port of the MELSEC iQ-R series built-in Ethernet port

CPU. *3 GX Developer, MX Component or MX Sheet, GX LogViewer, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool does not support the FA

transparent function through CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network. *4 When connecting to the Ethernet unit (LJ71E71-100) , use MX Component Version 4.13P or later and MX Sheet Version 2.10L or later. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

MELSEC-QnA(QnACPU)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L06CPU-P *1

L26CPU-P *1

L02CPU-P *1

L26CPU-PBT *1

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P *1

GX Works2 *2

GX Developer *3

GX LogViewer *3

MX Component *3

MX Sheet *3

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool *3

-

*4

- -

*5

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Q4ARCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

38 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC-QnA(QnASCPU)

MELSEC-A(AnCPU)

*1 Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *1*2

- - - - -

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1139

11

MELSEC-A(AnSCPU)

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

MELSEC-A

*1 Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *1

- - - - -

A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU

A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *1*2

- - - - -

A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

40 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

Motion CPU (Q Series)

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since only the USB port is available as the direct coupled I/F for Q172H/

Q173HCPU. *3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172D/Q173DCPU has no direct coupled I/F. *4 MT Works2 does not support the FA transparent function through CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN

MT Developer

*1

- - - - -

Q172HCPU Q173HCPU

MT Developer MR Configurator

*1

*2

- - - - -

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU

MT Works2

*1

*3

- - - -

Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1

MT Works2 *4

GX Works2

*1

- -

*1 *1

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1141

11

Motion CPU (A Series)

*1 Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

MELSEC-FX

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet *1*2

- - - - -

A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX0 GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

FX0S FX0N

GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

FX1 FX2 FX2C

GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

42 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

*1 For FX3U-ENET-L and FX3U-ENET, use a module with version 1.12 or later and serial number 1340001 or later.

FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC

GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

FX3G(C) FX3S FX3GE

GX Developer FX Configurator- FP

- - - - - -

GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - -

FX3U(C) *1 GX Developer FX Configurator- FP FX Configurator- EN-L FX Configurator- EN

- - - - - -

GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1143

11

MELSEC-WS

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

CNC

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q173NCCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

LJ72GF15-T2 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

NZ2GF-ETB GX Works2 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CNC C70(Q173NCCPU)

NC Configurator2

*1

- -

*2

- - -

MELDAS C6/C64 - - - - - - - -

44 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

Robot controller (Q Series)

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since CRnQ-700 and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) have no direct coupled I/F.

MELIPC

FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), FR-V500(L), FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CRnQ- 700(Q172DRCPU) CR750- Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751- Q(Q172DRCPU)

RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

*1

*2

- - - -

CR800- Q(Q172DSRCPU)

RT ToolBox3

CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

- - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MI5122-VW MI Configurator - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A50(L) FR Configurator - - - - - -

FR-F50(L)

FR-V50(L)

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

FR-F50J(F)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1145

11

FR-D700, FR-F700PJ, FR-E700, FR-A700, FR-F700, FR-F700P

*1 For connection to the inverter through the Ethernet port built in the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU, use FR Configurator2 Ver.1.16S or later. *2 Set the port number that supports the UDP connection (5000, 5001, 5006, or 5008) for the communication port setting of the inverter.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

FR Configurator - - - - - -

FR-F70PJ(F)

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

FR-E70-NE FR Configurator2 *1

- - -

*2

- - -

FR-A70 FR Configurator - - - - - -

FR-F70

FR-F70P

46 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

FR-A800

*1 For connection to the inverter through the Ethernet port built in the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU, use FR Configurator2 Ver.1.16S or later. *2 Set the port number that supports the UDP connection (5000, 5001, 5006, or 5008) for the communication port setting of the inverter.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

FR Configurator2 *1

- - - - - -

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

FR Configurator2 *1

- -

*2

- - -

FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

FR Configurator2 *1

- - - - - -

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1147

11

FR-A800 Plus

*1 For connection to the inverter through the Ethernet port built in the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU, use FR Configurator2 Ver.1.16S or later. *2 Set the port number that supports the UDP connection (5000, 5001, 5006, or 5008) for the communication port setting of the inverter. *3 Use FR Configurator2 Version 1.16S or later. *4 Use FR Configurator2 Version 1.19V or later.

FR-F800

*1 For connection to the inverter through the Ethernet port built in the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU, use FR Configurator2 Ver.1.16S or later. *2 Set the port number that supports the UDP connection (5000, 5001, 5006, or 5008) for the communication port setting of the inverter.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80-CRN*3

FR-A82-CRN*3

FR-A80-R2R*3

FR-A82-R2R*3

FR-A80-LC*4

FR Configurator2 *1

- - - - - -

FR-A80-E-CRN*3

FR-A82-E-CRN*3

FR-A80-E-R2R*3

FR-A82-E-R2R*3

FR-A80-E-LC*4

FR Configurator2 *1

- -

*2

- - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

FR Configurator2 *1

- - - - - -

FR-F80-E FR-F82-E

FR Configurator2 *1

- -

*2

- - -

48 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

FR-E800

*1 For connection to the inverter through the Ethernet port built in the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU, use FR Configurator2 Ver.1.16S or later. *2 Use FR Configurator2 Version 1.19V or later. *3 Set the port number that supports the UDP connection (5000, 5001, 5006, or 5008) for the communication port setting of the inverter.

Sensorless servo

MELIPM

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E80 FR Configurator2 *1*2

- - - - - -

FR-E80-E FR Configurator2 *1*2

- - -

*3

- - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E70EX FR Configurator - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MD-CX522-K(-A0) FR Configurator - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1149

11

MELSERVO

*1 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. *2 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (serial). *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MR-J2S-A MR-J2S-CP MR-J2S-CL

- - - - - - - -

MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M-DU

- - - - - - - -

MR-J3-A MR-J3-T

- - - - - - - -

MR-J3-B *1*2 MR Configurator

*3

- - - - -

MR Configurator2

*3

- - - -

MR-J4-A MR-J4-A-RJ MR-JE-A

- - - - - - - -

MR-J4-B *1*2

MR-J4-B-RJ *1*2

MR-J4W2-B *1*2

MR-J4W3-B *1*2

MR Configurator2

*3

- - - -

MR-JE-B - - - - - - - -

50 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

When connecting the GOT and PC by serial MELSEC iQ-R Series

*1 For R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, use GX Works3 Ver.1.040S and later. *2 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later.

MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later). *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 Mount a SIL2 function module R6PSFM and a redundant function module R6RFM next to RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *5 Use GX Works3 Version 1.050C or later. *6 For connection through a servo amplifier, the FA transparent function is not supported.

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R00CPU *1

R01CPU *1

R02CPU *1

R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

GX Works3*6

MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - -

R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU

R04ENCPU *2

R08ENCPU *2

R16ENCPU *2

R32ENCPU *2

R120ENCPU *2

R08SFCPU *2*3

R16SFCPU *2*3

R32SFCPU *2*3

R120SFCPU *2*3

GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet

R08PSFCPU *4

R16PSFCPU *4

R32PSFCPU *4

R120PSFCPU *4

GX Works3 *5 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1151

11

C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CNC C80

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R12CCPU-V - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R102WCPU-W - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16NCCPU-S1 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

RT ToolBox3 - - - - - -

CR800-D RT ToolBox3 - - - - - -

52 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

MELSEC iQ-F Series

*1 Use FX5-ENET Version 1.240 or later. *2 The FA transparent through FX5-ENET is not supported. *3 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later.

MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later). *4 For connection through a servo amplifier, the FA transparent function is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

RJ72GF15-T2 GX Works3 - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX5U FX5UC

GX Works3 *1*4

MX Component *2*3

MX Sheet *2*3

- - - - -

FX5UJ - - - - - - - -

FX5S - - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1153

11

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

*1 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool and GX LogViewer are supported. *2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since the CPU has no direct coupled I/F. *3 For connection through a servo amplifier, the FA transparent function is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q00JCPU GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Q00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

- - - - - - - -

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

- - - - - - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

- - - - - - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

-

*2

- - -

Q03UDVCPU *1

Q04UDVCPU *1

Q06UDVCPU *1

Q13UDVCPU *1

Q26UDVCPU *1

GX Works2*3

GX Developer GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

54 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

C Controller module (Q Series)

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1/VG and Q24DHCCPU-V/VG have no direct coupled I/F.

MELSEC-QS

MELSEC-L

*1 GX Works2 cannot be connected to the MELSEC-L series through the Ethernet port of the MELSEC iQ-R series built-in Ethernet port CPU.

*2 For connection through a servo amplifier, the FA transparent function is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q12DCCPU-V GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

-

*1

- - - -

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module

-

*1

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QS001CPU - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L02CPU-P L26CPU-PBT

GX Works2 *1*2

GX Developer GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool

- - - -

L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

GX Works2 *1

GX Developer GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool

- - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1155

11

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

MELSEC-QnA(QnACPU)

MELSEC-QnA(QnASCPU)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - -

Q4ARCPU - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

56 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC-A(AnCPU)

MELSEC-A(AnSCPU)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

A3UCPU

A4UCPU

A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1

A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21

A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21

A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1

A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU

A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1

A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1157

11

MELSEC-A

Motion CPU (Q Series)

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since only the USB port is available as the direct coupled I/F for Q172H/ Q173HCPU.

*2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172D/Q173DCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24

GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21

A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF

A2CJCPU-S3

A1FXCPU

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN

MT Developer - - - - - -

Q172HCPU Q173HCPU

MT Developer MR Configurator

-

*1

- - - - -

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU

MT Works2 -

*2

- - - -

Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1

MT Works2 GX Works2

- - - - -

58 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

Motion CPU (A Series) Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3

- - - - - - - -

A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1159

11

MELSEC-FX

*1 For FX3U-ENET-L and FX3U-ENET, use a module with version 1.12 or later and serial number 1340001 or later.

MELSEC-WS

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX0 GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

FX0S FX0N

FX1 FX2 FX2C

FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC

GX Works2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

FX3G(C) FX3S FX3GE

GX Developer FX Configurator- FP MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

GX Works2 - - - - -

FX3U(C) *1 GX Developer FX Configurator- FP FX Configurator- EN-L FX Configurator- EN MX Component MX Sheet

- - - - - -

GX Works2 - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3

- - - - - - - -

60 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

CNC

Robot controller (Q Series)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

LJ72GF15-T2 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

NZ2GF-ETB - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CNC C70(Q173NCCPU)

- - - - - - - -

MELDAS C6/C64 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CRnQ- 700(Q172DRCPU) CR750- Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751- Q(Q172DRCPU)

RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

- - - - - -

CR800- Q(Q172DSRCPU)

- - - - - - - -

CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1161

11

MELIPC

FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), FR-V500(L), FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J

FR-D700, FR-F700PJ, FR-E700, FR-A700, FR-F700, FR-F700P

FR-A800

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MI5122-VW - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-F50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-V50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

- - - - - - - -

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

- - - - - - - -

FR-F50J(F) - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

- - - - - - - -

FR-F70PJ(F) - - - - - - - -

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

- - - - - - - -

FR-E70-NE - - - - - - - -

FR-A70 - - - - - - - -

FR-F70 - - - - - - - -

FR-F70P - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

- - - - - - - -

62 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

FR-A800 Plus

FR-F800

FR-E800

Sensorless servo

MELIPM

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-LC

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-E-LC

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

- - - - - - - -

FR-F80-E FR-F82-E

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E80 - - - - - - - -

FR-E80-E - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E70EX - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MD-CX522-K(-A0) - - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1163

11

MELSERVO Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MR-J2S-A MR-J2S-CP MR-J2S-CL

- - - - - - - -

MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M-DU

- - - - - - - -

MR-J3-A MR-J3-T MR-J3-B

- - - - - - - -

MR-J4-A MR-J4-A-RJ MR-JE-A

- - - - - - - -

MR-J4-B MR-J4-B-RJ MR-J4W2-B MR-J4W3-B

- - - - - - - -

MR-JE-B - - - - - - - -

64 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet or wireless LAN MELSEC iQ-R Series

*1 For R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, use GX Works3 Ver.1.040S and later. *2 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later.

MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later). *3 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit.

The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.

*4 Mount a SIL2 function module R6PSFM and a redundant function module R6RFM next to RnPSFCPU on the base unit. *5 MX Component and MX Sheet do not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network, CC-Link IE Controller Network,

and CC-Link IE Field Network. *6 Use GX Works3 Version 1.050C or later. *7 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *8 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *9 When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN, the FA transparent function using the CC-Link IE TSN

connection is not supported. *10 GX Works3 Ver.1.080J or later is required to use the FA transparent function using the CC-Link IE TSN connection.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection *9

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R00CPU *1

R01CPU *1

R02CPU *1

R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU

GX Works3*10

MX Component *5

MX Sheet *5

- -

*7

*8 *8 *8

R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU

-

R04ENCPU *2

R08ENCPU *2

R16ENCPU *2

R32ENCPU *2

R120ENCPU *2

*8

R08SFCPU *2*3

R16SFCPU *2*3

R32SFCPU *2*3

R120SFCPU *2*3

R08PSFCPU *4

R16PSFCPU *4

R32PSFCPU *4

R120PSFCPU *4

GX Works3 *6 - - - -

*8 *8

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1165

11

Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 GT2505-V does not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network. *2 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection.

C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 Use CW Configurator Ver.1.013P or later. *2 CW Configurator does not support wireless LAN connection. *3 Not available to GT25-W and GT2505-V.

MELSECWinCPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

*1 Use CW Configurator Ver.1.013P or later. *2 CW Configurator does not support wireless LAN connection. *3 Not available to GT25-W and GT2505-V.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU

MT Works2 *1 - - - - - -

MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1 - -

*2

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R12CCPU-V CW Configurator*1*2

- - - -

*3 *3

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R102WCPU-W CW Configurator*1*2

- - - -

*3

-

66 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

CNC C80

Robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R Series)

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

*1 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

R16NCCPU-S1 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CR800- R(R16RTCPU)

- - - - - - - -

CR800-D - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

RJ72GF15-T2 GX Works3 - -

*1

-

*2 *2

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1167

11

MELSEC iQ-F Series

*1 Use FX5-ENET Version 1.240 or later. *2 The FA transparent through FX5-ENET is not supported. *3 Please use the MX Component Version 4.11M or later.

MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later). *4 MX Component and MX Sheet do not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network and CC-Link IE Field Network. *5 Use GX Works3 Version 1.060N or later. *6 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *7 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported. *8 Use GX Works3 Version 1.080J or later.

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX5U FX5UC

GX Works3 *1

MX Component *2*3*4

MX Sheet *2*3*4

-

*6

- - -

*7

FX5UJ GX Works3 *5 -

*6

- - -

*7

FX5S GX Works3*8 -

*6

- - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q00JCPU GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2 *5

*4

*4

-

*5 *5 Q00CPU

Q01CPU

68 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

*1 MX Component or MX Sheet does not support the FA transparent function through Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network.

*2 GT2505-V does not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network. *3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since the CPU has no direct coupled I/F. *4 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Q02CPU GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2 *5

*4 *4

-

*5 *5 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2 *5

-

*5 *5

Q12PRHCPU (Main base)

GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2

- - - -

*5 *5Q25PRHCPU (Main base)

Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)

- - - - - - - -

Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)

Q00UJCPU Q00UJCPU-S8

GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2 *5

*4 *4

-

*5 *5Q00UCPU

Q01UCPU

Q02UCPU

Q03UDCPU

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU

GX Works2 MX Component *1*2

MX Sheet *1*2 *5

*3*4 *4

-

*5 *5

Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1169

11

C controller module (Q Series)

*1 MX Component or MX Sheet does not support the FA transparent function through Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network.

*2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V/VG have no direct coupled I/F. *3 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

MELSEC-QS

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q12DCCPU-V GX Works2 MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1 *4

*2*3

- - -

*4 *4

Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS Q26DHCCPU-LS

GX Works2 MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1 *4

*2*3

- - -

*4 *4

Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module *4

*2*3

- - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QS001CPU - - - - - - - -

70 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC-L

*1 MX Component and MX Sheet do not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network. *2 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection.

MELSEC-Q (A mode)

MELSEC-QnA(QnACPU)

MELSEC-QnA(QnASCPU)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P

GX Works2 MX Component *1

MX Sheet *1

-

*2 *2

- - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU

- - - - - - - -

Q4ARCPU - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1171

11

MELSEC-A(AnCPU)

MELSEC-A(AnSCPU)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

A3UCPU - - - - - - - -

A4UCPU - - - - - - - -

A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1

- - - - - - - -

A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21

- - - - - - - -

A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21

- - - - - - - -

A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1

- - - - - - - -

A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU

- - - - - - - -

A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU

- - - - - - - -

72 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC-A

Motion CPU (Q Series)

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172D/Q173DCPU has no direct coupled I/F. *2 MT Works2 does not support the FA transparent function through CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link IE Field Network. *3 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24

- - - - - - - -

A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21

- - - - - - - -

A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF

- - - - - - - -

A2CJCPU-S3 - - - - - - - -

A1FXCPU - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN

- - - - - - - -

Q172HCPU Q173HCPU

- - - - - - - -

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU

MT Works2

*4

*1*3

- - - - -

Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1

MT Works2 *2

GX Works2

*4

*3

- - -

*4 *4

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1173

11

Motion CPU (A Series) Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3

- - - - - - - -

A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1

- - - - - - - -

74 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELSEC-FX

*1 FX1, FX2, and FX2C cannot be connected with the Ethernet-connectable models of GT21-P. *2 For FX3U-ENET-L and FX3U-ENET, use a module with version 1.12 or later and serial number 1340001 or later. *3 GT21 and GS21 do not support the wireless LAN connection.

MELSEC-WS

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FX0 GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

-

*3

- - - - -

FX0S FX0N

FX1 *1

FX2 *1

FX2C *1

GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

-

*3

- - - - -

FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC

GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

-

*3

- - - - -

FX3G(C) FX3S FX3GE FX3U(C) *2

GX Works2 -

*3

- - - -

MX Component MX Sheet

-

*3

- - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

WS0-CPU0 WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3

- - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1175

11

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

CNC

Robot controller (Q Series)

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

LJ72GF15-T2 GX Works2 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

NZ2GF-ETB - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CNC C70(Q173NCCPU)

- - - - - - - -

MELDAS C6/C64 - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

CRnQ- 700(Q172DRCPU) CR750- Q(Q172DRCPU) CR751- Q(Q172DRCPU)

- - - - - - - -

CR800- Q(Q172DSRCPU)

- - - - - - - -

CRnD-700 CR750-D CR751-D

- - - - - - - -

76 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

MELIPC

*1 GT2505-V does not support the FA transparent function through an Ethernet network.

FR-A500(L), FR-F500(L), FR-V500(L), FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J

FR-D700, FR-F700PJ, FR-E700, FR-A700, FR-F700, FR-F700P

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MI5122-VW MI Configurator *1 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-F50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-V50(L) - - - - - - - -

FR-E50(C) FR-E50S FR-E50W

- - - - - - - -

FR-S50(E)(-R)(-C) FR-S50S(E)(-R) FR-S50W(E)(-R)

- - - - - - - -

FR-F50J(F) - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-D70 FR-D70S FR-D70W

- - - - - - - -

FR-F70PJ(F) - - - - - - - -

FR-E70 FR-E70S FR-E70W

- - - - - - - -

FR-E70-NE FR Configurator2 - - - - - -

FR-A70 - - - - - - - -

FR-F70 - - - - - - - -

FR-F70P - - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1177

11

FR-A800

FR-A800 Plus

FR-F800

FR-E800

*1 Use FR Configurator2 Version 1.19V or later.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80 FR-A82 FR-A86

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-E FR-A82-E FR-A86-E

FR Configurator2 - - - - - -

FR-A80-GF FR-A82-GF

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-GN FR-A82-GN

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-A80-CRN FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-LC

- - - - - - - -

FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R FR-A80-E-LC

- - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-F80 FR-F82 FR-F86

- - - - - - - -

FR-F80-E FR-F82-E

FR Configurator2 - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E80 - - - - - - - -

FR-E80-E FR Configurator2 *1

- - - - - -

78 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored

23

Sensorless servo

MELIPM

MELSERVO

*1 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection. *2 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (serial). *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not supported.

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

FR-E70EX - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MD-CX522-K(-A0) - - - - - - - -

Model name Target software Connection type

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communic ation connection

Ethernet connection

CC-Link IE TSN connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection

CC-Link IE field network connection

MR-J2S-A MR-J2S-CP MR-J2S-CL

- - - - - - - -

MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M-DU

- - - - - - - -

MR-J3-A MR-J3-T

- - - - - - - -

MR-J3-B *1*2 MR Configurator2

*3

- - - - -

MR-J4-A MR-J4-A-RJ MR-JE-A

- - - - - - - -

MR-J4-B *1*2

MR-J4-B-RJ *1*2

MR-J4W2-B *1*2

MR-J4W3-B *1*2

MR Configurator2

*3

- - - - -

MR-JE-B - - - - - - - -

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 1179

11

23.4 System Configuration GX Series, MX Series, for C Controller module The following shows the software for each series.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB or serial

Series Software GX Series GX Works3, GX Works2, GX Developer, GX LogViewer, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool

MX Series MX Component, MX Sheet

For C Controller module CW Configurator, setting/monitoring tool for C Controller module

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works3 CW Configurator MX Component MX Sheet

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION*9

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

*8

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works3 GX Works2 CW Configurator

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*1*4

Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*2

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*3

*8

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works2 GX Developer GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Setting/Monitoring toolfor C Controllermodule

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PCPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable

80 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION *7

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works3 CW Configurator MX Component MX Sheet

1 personal computer for 1 GOTRS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*7

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*7

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

RS-232 Page 1202 RS- 232 connection diagram 1)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*7

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*7

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m)

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1181

11

*1 Applicable to the QCPU only *2 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool is not applicable to the bus connection *3 GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, QnUDVCPULCPU Logging Configuration Tool and Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller

module are not supported. *4 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module. *5 GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBLS do not support the GOT multi-drop connection. *6 GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBLS use the USB only as the interface between the GOT and a personal computer. *7 CW Configurator uses the USB only as the interface between the GOT and a personal computer. *8 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support the following connection types:

Bus connection CC-Link IE TSN connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection

*9 GX Works2 and CW Configurator do not support the CC-Link IE TSN connection.

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION *1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION *3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works2 GX Developer GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Setting/Monitoring toolfor C Controllermodule

1 personal computer for 1 GOTRS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

RS-232 Page 1202 RS- 232 connection diagram 1)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4*6

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*3*5

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m GX Works2 GX Developer GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Setting/Monitoring toolfor C Controllermodule

1 personal computer for 1 GOTRS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m)

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

82 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet

PLC GOT Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*2

Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

*5

- (Built into GOT) or GT25-J71E71-100

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m GX Works3 GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

*5

- (Built into GOT) or GT25-J71E71-100

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet CW Configurator

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 589 CC-Link IE TSN CONNECTION*7

Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

*5*6

- (Built into GOT) or GT25-J71E71-100

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m GX Works3 GX Works2 CW Configurator

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*4

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*4

*5

- (Built into GOT) or GT25-J71E71-100

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m GX Works2 Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*3

*5*6

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PCPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1183

11

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the cable to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA or NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *4 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21 do not support GT25-J71E71-100. *6 GT25-W and GT2505-V do not support the following connection types:

Bus connection CC-Link IE TSN connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection

*7 GX Works2 and CW Configurator do not support the CC-Link IE TSN connection.

84 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN

*1 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *2 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module. *3 Set the wireless LAN. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual *4 When the [Access point] is set to the [Operation mode] using the wireless LAN function for the GOT, the wireless LAN access point is

not required. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection, the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection and the CC-Link IE Field

Network connection. *6 Check the compliance with the standards applicable to GT25-WLAN before use.

For the standards applicable to GT25-WLAN, refer to the following. Page 59 Communication module

PLC GOT Wireless LAN access point Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Option

device *6 Model name Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

*3

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

GX Works3 GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*4

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION

*3

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*4

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 619 CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION Page 659 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION *3*5

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

GX Works3 GX Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*4

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*1

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*2

Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION*2

*3*5

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

GX Works2 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*4

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

PLC

Varies according to the connection type.

GOT Wireless LAN

Communication Unit

Wireless LAN access point PC

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1185

11

PX Developer, GX Configurator

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION *1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m PX Developer GX Configurator

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION

*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m PX Developer GX Configurator

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PCPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable

86 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

MT Developer, MT Works2

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB or serial

*1 The Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) does not support the bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), and GOT multi-drop connection.

*2 GT23 is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*1*2

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*1

*5

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION *1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1*4

Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*1*3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 1026 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MT Developer MT Works2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 Page 1202 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

3m

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PC

Connection cable

Varies according to the connection type.

RCPU + Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) QCPU + Motion CPU(Q series)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1187

11

*3 GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBLS do not support the GOT multi-drop connection. *4 GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBLS use the USB only as the interface between the GOT and a personal computer. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

88 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the cable to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA or NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*2

Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

*4

- (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m MT Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*3

*4

- (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m MT Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PCPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1189

11

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN

*1 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *2 Set the wireless LAN. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual *3 When the [Access point] is set to the [Operation mode] using the wireless LAN function for the GOT, the wireless LAN access point is

not required. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Wireless LAN access point Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Option device Model name Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*1

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

*2*4

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

MT Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*3

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

PLC

Varies according to the connection type.

GOT Wireless LAN

Communication Unit

Wireless LAN access point PC

90 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

MR Configurator, MR Configurator2

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB

*1 Only MR Configurator2 is compatible with the Ethernet connection. *2 The Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) does not support the bus connection and direct CPU connection (serial). *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*2

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION*1 *3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MR Configurator MR Configurator2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*2

*3

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MR Configurator MR Configurator2

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier QCPU +

Motion CPU (Q series)

RCPU + Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) PC

Connection cable

Varies according to the connection type.

SSCNET , SSCNET /H

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1191

11

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the cable to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA or NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*2

Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

*4

- (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m MR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*3

*4

- (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m MR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT Servo amplifier

Servo amplifier

QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series)

PC

Connection cable

Varies according to the connection type.

, SSCNET /H

92 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN

*1 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection. *2 Set the wireless LAN. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual *3 When the [Access point] is set to the [Operation mode] using the wireless LAN function for the GOT, the wireless LAN access point is

not required. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Wireless LAN access point Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Option device Model name Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*1

Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

*2*4

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

MR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*3

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

Wireless LAN access pointGOT

Servo amplifier PC

Varies according to the connection type.

, SSCNET /H

Servo amplifier

Wireless LAN Communication

Unit

QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1193

11

FR Configurator, FR Configurator2

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB

Inverter GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi Electric inverter, refer to the following. Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FR Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

Inverter GOT

Varies according to the connection type.

Inverter PC

Connection cable

94 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet

*1 Only available for MELSEC-Q (A mode), MELSEC-A (AnSCPU), and Motion CPU (A series) small type. Connect the cable to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA or NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment according to the Ethernet network system used. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

Inverter GOT Connection cable *1 Maximum segment length *2

Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Software

For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi Electric inverter, refer to the following. Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

- (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m FR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

Inverter GOT

Varies according to the connection type.

Inverter PC

Connection cable

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1195

11

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN

*1 Set the wireless LAN. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 When the [Access point] is set to the [Operation mode] using the wireless LAN function for the GOT, the wireless LAN access point is not required.

Inverter GOT Wireless LAN access point Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Model name Software

For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi Electric inverter, refer to the following. Page 833 INVERTER CONNECTION

*1

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

FR Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*2

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

Wireless LAN access pointGOT PC

Wireless LAN Communication

Unit Inverter

Varies according to the connection type.

Inverter

96 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN-L, FX Configurator-EN

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment

Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max. distance

Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN-L FX Configurator-EN

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN-L FX Configurator-EN

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN-L FX Configurator-EN

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m FX Configurator-FP FX Configurator-EN-L FX Configurator-EN

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 Page 1202 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

3m

MELSEC-FX

Communication driver

GOT PCPLC

Varies according to the connection type.

Connection cable

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1197

11

RT ToolBox2, RT ToolBox3

*1 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection or the direct CPU connection (serial). *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL)*1

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION *2

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION*1

*2

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m RT ToolBox2 RT ToolBox3

1 personal computer for 1 GOT

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PC

Connection cable

CRnQ-700 CRnD-700 CR800-Q

(Q172DSRCPU)

Varies according to the connection type.

98 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

NC Configurator2

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V is not applicable to the bus connection.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m NC Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 487 BUS CONNECTION

*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m NC Configurator2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Connection type dependant

Communication driver

GOT PC

Connection cable

Q173NCCPU

Varies according to the connection type.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1199

12

MI Configurator

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB

*1 Only for Ethernet connection, the GOT supports FA transparent function.

PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Max.

distance Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and MELIPC, refer to the following. Page 808 MELIPC CONNECTION*1

USB GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)

3m MI Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

Communication driver

Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway

GOT PCConnection cableMELIPC

00 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet

*1 The connection destination of the twisted pair cable differs depending on the configuration of the Ethernet network system to be used. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, the wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL-JPA, NZ2WL-JPS) or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. For the controller to which the wireless LAN adapter can be connected and the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter, refer to the manual of the wireless LAN adapter.

*2 Length between a hub and a node The maximum length depends on the Ethernet equipment used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Up to 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500 m) 100BASE-TX: UP to 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205 m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support GT25-J71E71-100. *4 Only for Ethernet connection, the GOT supports FA transparent function.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by wireless LAN

*1 Set the wireless LAN. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 When the [Access point] is set to the [Operation mode] using the wireless LAN function for the GOT, the wireless LAN access point is not required.

*3 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 Only for Ethernet connection, the GOT supports FA transparent function.

PLC GOT Connection cable*1 Maximum segment length*2

Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Interface Cable model Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and MELIPC, refer to the following. Page 808 MELIPC CONNECTION*4 *3

- (Built into GOT) or GT25-J71E71-100

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m MT Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

PLC GOT Wireless LAN access point Personal computer

Number of connectable equipmentConnection type Model Option device Model name Software

For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. Page 808 MELIPC CONNECTION*4

*1*2*3

GT25-WLAN For the wireless LAN access point, use the access point compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

MT Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT

*2

GOT PCConnection cableMELIPC

MELIPC GOT PC Wireless LAN

Communication Unit

Wireless LAN access

point

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.4 System Configuration 1201

12

23.5 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection Diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the maximum distance specifications.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 64 GOT connector specifications

PC side (D-Sub 9-pin)

GOT side (connector terminal block)

N.C.

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

RS

SD

RD

DR

SG

ER

CS

N.C.

N.C.

02 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.5 Connection Diagram

23

23.6 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface

Controller Setting Set the channel of the connected equipment.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set [Manufacturer], [Controller Type], [I/F], and [Detail Setting] according to the controller used.

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 54 I/F communication setting

Click!

2.

3.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.6 GOT Side Settings 1203

12

Communication setting with personal computer Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer. For details of the setting contents, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

1. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC(Data Transfer) ] from the menu.

2. The [PC (Data Transfer)] is displayed. Set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer.

Host (PC) setting When communicating the GOT and the personal computer in the direct connection, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer.

Ethernet download setting When communicating the GOT via Ethernet, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer.

*1 For setting, refer to the following. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Description Range GOT Standard Ethernet Setting *1 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.3.18) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

04 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.6 GOT Side Settings

23

Wireless LAN setting When communicating the GOT via wireless LAN, set the interface of the GOT to be used in the communication with the personal computer.

*1 For setting, refer to the following. Page 50 GOT Ethernet Setting

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet or wireless LAN, match the GOT IP address and the transparent port No. with those in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] of GX Works2. Page 1270 Accessing by GX Works2

1. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after downloading [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range GOT Wireless LAN I/F Setting *1 Set the IP address of the GOT. (Default: 192.168.4.20) 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.6 GOT Side Settings 1205

12

GOT Setup When using the multi-channel function, specify the channel No. on which FA transparent function is executed. (For GT27, GT25)

1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu.

2. Check [Enable GOT Setup].

3. As necessary, check one of [CH1] to [CH4]. (Default: CH1)

4. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

Transparent setting on the utility screen Transparent setting can be performed by the GOT. For details of the operating, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

GOT Selectable CH No. [CH1], [CH2], [CH3], [CH4]

[CH1], [CH2]

2. 3.

Click!

06 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.6 GOT Side Settings

23

23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting Accessing by GX Works3 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works3. GX Works3 Version 1.030G or later is required to use the FA transparent function for the RCPU redundant system.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection When connecting to RCPU

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1207

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

5. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port CPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

6. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

Item Description [PLC Type] Select the controller connected to the GOT by Ethernet.

[RJ71EN71] [Ethernet Built-in CPU]

[Module Side] [Network No.] When [RJ71EN71] is set for [PLC type], specify the network number assigned to the Ethernet module.

[Station No.] When [RJ71EN71] is set for [PLC type], specify the station number assigned to the Ethernet module.

[IP address] Specify the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port CPU or Ethernet module.

MELSOFT GX Works3

08 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting to FX5U, FX5UC, or FX5UJ

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] [Other connection method] in GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set the [Specify Connection Destination]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

4. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1209

12

6. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

7. By clicking [Setting], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port CPU , which is firstly connected via a GOT.

8. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port CPU.

9. The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5CPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

10 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (serial) (FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] [Other connection method] in GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set the [Specify Connection Destination]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification:

3. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

4. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1211

12

6. Check-mark [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

12 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connecting to RJ71C24)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1213

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

14 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1215

12

4. Check-mark [CC IE Cont] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

5. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

6. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/ 10(H)].

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

16 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC using the CC-Link IE TSN connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1217

12

4. Check-mark [CC IE TSN] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

5. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE TSN master/local module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE TSN master/local module.

6. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field].

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

18 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE field network connection When connecting to RCPU

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1219

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Check-mark [CC IE Field] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

5. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

6. Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Field].

20 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1221

12

When connecting to FX5U, FX5UC, or FX5UJ

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] [Other connection method] in GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Check-mark [CC IE Field] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

22 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Set the [CPU mode] and [Relay network No.] and [Relay station No.]. When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

6. Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Field].

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5CPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1223

12

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (serial) (FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] [Other connection method] in GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

24 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. [Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5CPU.

Successfully connected with the FX5UCPU

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1225

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connecting to RJ71C24)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

26 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [C24] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1227

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

28 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [CC IE Cont] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1229

12

9. Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/10(H)].

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

30 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC using the CC-Link IE TSN connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. The network number and the station number are not used. The default settings need not be changed.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1231

12

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [CC IE TSN] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE TSN master/local module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE TSN master/local module.

32 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

9. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field].

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1233

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE field network connection When connecting to RCPU

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

34 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [CC IE Field] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

9. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1235

12

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

36 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting to FX5U, FX5UC, or FX5UJ

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] [Other connection method] in GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5. Check-mark [CC IE Field] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1237

12

6. Set the [CPU mode] and [Relay network No.] and [Relay station No.]. When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

7. Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Field].

8. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

9. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5CPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

38 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and PLC by Ethernet Configure the settings in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT. The routing setting may also be needed for the GOT side depending on the system configuration. For details, refer to the following procedure. The following shows an example of connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series. When the routing setting is not needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network number, PLC number, and IP address of the PLC CPUs that support the FA transparent function on GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Network No. :1 PC No.:1

Network No. :1 PC No.:2 IP address :192.168.3.39

GX Works3

Ethernet

Ethernet

(Network No. :1)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1239

12

3) GX Works3 settings

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

40 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

6. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] or [RJ71EN71] for the connection destination of the GOT.

7. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1241

12

When the routing setting is needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Since the MELSEC iQ-F series has no settings of the network number and station number, the routing setting cannot be configured. The programmable controller which is set as [Host] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] will be the target of the FA transparent function.

Network No. :1 Station:1

Ethernet side Network No. :1 Station:2 IP address :192.168.3.39 CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:1

GX Works3

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field network (Network No. :2)

(Network No. :1)

CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:2

Target of the FA transparent function

42 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

3) Routing setting of GT Designer3 Be sure to set the transfer network No., relay network No., and relay station No. for CPUs supporting the FAtransparent function by GT Desinger3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4) GX Works3 settings

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on GX Works3. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: Other Station (Single Network) Network path: CC IE TSN CC IE Field

3. Double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field] to set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1243

12

4. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

7. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] or [RJ71EN71] for the connection destination of the GOT.

8. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU.

MELSOFT GX Works3

44 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by CW Configurator The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of CW Configurator.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1245

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

5. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port CPU, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

6. Set [Ethernet Built-in CPU] for [PLC Type].

7. For [IP address], specify the IP address that is set for the Built-in Ethernet port CPU.

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

46 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connecting to RJ71C24)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1247

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

48 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1249

12

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Select [CC IE Cont] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

6. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/ 10(H)].

50 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1251

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE field network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

52 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Select [CC IE Field] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

6. Return [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1253

12

7. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

54 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connecting to

RJ71C24)

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. Select [Adapter] in [PC side I/F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Board]. The network number and the station number are not used. The default settings need not be changed.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1255

12

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [C24] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

56 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. Select [Adapter] in [PC side I/F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Board]. The network number and the station number are not used. The default settings need not be changed.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1257

12

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [CC IE Cont] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

58 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

8. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

9. Return [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/ 10(H)].

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1259

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE field network connection

1. Click [Online] [Current Connection Destination] on CW Configurator. Displays the [Specify Connection Destination] dialog.

2. Set [Specify Connection Destination]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

4. 4. Select [Adapter] in [PC side I/F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Board]. The network number and the station number are not used. The default settings need not be changed.

60 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. Check-mark [CC IE Field] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. Set [Setup]. Set [Relay Station No.] as follows: When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE field network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE field network module.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1261

12

9. Return to [Specify Connection Destination], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE TSN CC IE Field].

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE TSN/Field module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if CW Configurator has been connected to the R12CCPU-V.

62 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing the PLC by the PX Developer, GX Configurator The setting method for the FA transparent function of PX Developer is used as an example.

Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial) (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in PX Developer.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Serial USB (COM) PLC side I/F: PLC module Other station: No specification

4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog. (For bus connection)

6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1263

12

7. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

[via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode]

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if PX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

64 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connected to the QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.)

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in PX Developer.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Serial PLC side I/F: C24 Other station: No specification

4. Return to [Transfer Setup] and double-click [C24] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F detailed setting of C24].

5. Check [via GOT transparent mode] for [PLC side I/F detailed setting of C24].

6. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1265

12

7. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if PX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

66 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in PX Developer.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Serial USB (COM) PLC side I/F: PLC module Other station: No specification

4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1267

12

7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set].

8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name]. When connecting the Q173NCCPU, set [QJ71E71].

10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting is not required.

11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module.

12. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if PX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

68 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (serial) (when connecting to FXCPU)

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in PX Developer.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Serial PLC side I/F: PLC module Other station: No specification

4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting].

5. Select [USB (GOT transparent mode)] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if PX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU.

How to operate PX Developer For the PX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. PX Developer Version 1 Operating Manual (Programming Tool)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1269

12

Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works2.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial) (when

connecting to QCPU (Q mode))

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification:

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

70 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog. (For bus connection)

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox.

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1271

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in serial communication connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N))

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

72 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1273

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

74 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [PLC Type].

10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is not required.

11. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module.

12. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1275

12

Connecting to FXCPU

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

76 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module], which is connected via a GOT.

9. Set [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module] for [PLC Type].

10.Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module].

11. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the FXCPU.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1277

12

Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB) in Ethernet connection, and connecting it to a PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network.

This section describes the settings of the GX Works2 in the following case of system configuration.

Version of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to execute the FA transparent function with using Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB).

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

Network No. :3 PC No. :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format

:UDP (fixed)

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field Network

HUB

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Ethernet setting IP address CC-Link IE Field Network setting Network No. Station No.

:192.168.3.30

:1 :1

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type Network No. PC No. Total Stations

: CC IE Field (Master station) : 1 : 0 : 2

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network Type Network No. PC No.

: CC IE Field (Local station) : 1 : 2

(Use default value for settings other than the following.)

78 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1279

12

8. On the[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Setting...].

9. [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

10.Set [NZ2GF-ETB] for [PLC Type].

11. Set the same number to [IP address] as the number assigned to NZ2GF-ETB, and click [OK]. In the system configuration example, the setting is as follows. [IP address]: 192 168 3 30

12.Return to [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], and click [OK].

13. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.

80 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

14.Click [Other station (Single network)].

15.Double-click [CC IE Field].

16.Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is displayed.

17.Set [Network No.] and [Station No.] assigned to CPU, and click [OK]. When connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module of the system configuration example, the setting is as follows. [Network No.] :1 [Station No.] :0

18. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1281

12

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. [Connection Channel Setup] is displayed.

3. Set [Connection Channel Setup]. PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

82 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Check-mark [USB] in [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Check-mark [CC IE Cont] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

8. Set the [CPU mode] and [Relay network No.] and [Relay station No.]. When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1283

12

9. Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/10(H)].

10.Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

11. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Successfully connected with the Q02/Q02HCPU

84 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial) (when

connecting to QCPU (Q mode))

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F :Ethernet Board PLC side I/F :GOT Other Station Setting : No specification

4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1285

12

5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

(For bus connection)

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox.

9. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

86 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N))

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No specification

4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1287

12

5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

8. Check [C24] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

9. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

88 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and PLC in CC-Link IE controller network connection

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

2. [Connection Channel Setup] is displayed.

3. Set [Connection Channel Setup]. PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No Specification

4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1289

12

5. Set the protocol to TCP.Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

8. Check-mark [CC IE Cont] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

9. Set the [CPU mode] and [Relay network No.] and [Relay station No.]. When the target PLC has the same network No. as that of the GOT Set the number assigned to the PLC that is targeted by using the transparent function and CC-Link IE controller network module. When the target PLC has a different network No. from that of the GOT Set the number assigned the PLC that is used as a relay station and CC-Link IE controller network module.

90 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

10.Return [Transfer Setup], click [Other Station (Single Network)], and double-click [CC IE Cont NET/10(H)].

11. Set as shown below and click [OK]. When the GOT and PLC are on the same network Select [Access to CC IE Cont module set on PLC side I/F]. When the GOT and PLC are on the different networks Select [Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system] and set [Network No.] and [Station No.].

12. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Successfully connected with the Q02/Q02HCPU

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1291

12

When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication Configure the settings of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT. The routing setting may also be needed for the GOT side depending on the system configuration. For details, refer to the following procedure. The following shows an example for connecting with QCPU (Q mode). When the routing setting is not needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

For FXCPU FA transparent function is applied to only FXCPU which sets a host station.

Network No. :1 PC No.:1

Network No. :1 PC No.:2 IP address :192.168.3.39

GX Works2

Ethernet

Ethernet

(Network No. :1)

92 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

3) GX Works2 settings

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

2. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1293

12

5. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

6. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] for the connection destination of the GOT.

7. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Successfully connected with the Q06UDEH

94 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When the routing setting is needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Network No. :1 Station:1

Ethernet side Network No. :1 Station:2 IP address :192.168.3.39 CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:1

GX Works2

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field network (Network No. :2)

(Network No. :1)

CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:2

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1295

12

3) Routing setting of GT Designer3 Be sure to set the transfer network No., relay network No., and relay station No. for CPUs supporting the FAtransparent function by GT Desinger3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4) GX Works2 settings

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

2. Set the [Transfer Setup]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: Other Station (Single Network) Network path: CC IE Field

3. Double-click [CC IE Field] to set the network No. and station No.

96 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

7. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] or [QJ71E71] for the connection destination of the GOT.

8. [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).

Successfully connected with the Q06UDEH

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1297

12

Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX LogViewer.

1. Click [Show Assistant Dialog] for [View] on GX LogViewer.

2. The [Assistant] dialog box is displayed.

3. Click [LCPU] [Show Logged Device Status] in the [Assistant] dialog box.

4. The [Transfer Setup Connection 1] dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection 1]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: (Select from the system configuration)

6. For [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] of [Transfer Setup], refer to the following. Page 1270 Accessing by GX Works2

98 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Configurator-QP.

1. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on GX Configurator-QP.

2. The [Connection setup] is displayed.

3. Set the following in [PC] of the [Connection setup] dialog. Interface: USB

4. Set the [PLC side] in [Connection setup]. PLC type: Q series PLC type Multi PLC specification: None/No.1 to 4 Direct CPU connection, mark the [via GOT transparent mode] checkbox.

Interface: PLC Type: Bus

Interface: PLC Type: Direct coupled

Interface: C24 (For bus connection only)

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Computer link connection

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1299

13

5. Set the [Module connecting I/O address] in [Connection setup]. Specify the actual IP address of the module.

6. The screen returns to the [Connection setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if GX Configurator-QP has been connected to the QD75***(QnCPU).

00 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the procedure for setting the FA transparent function of MT Developer using the setting when the motion CPU (Q series) is connected as an example.

1. Click [Communication] [Communication Setting] in MT Developer.

2. Select [USB] in [Serial port].

3. Click [Detail].

4. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]

5. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted by using the transparent function in [CPU].

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1301

13

6. Click [Connection Test].

7. Confirm that the personal computer is connected to the Motion CPU (Q series).

02 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by the MT Works2 This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Works2 using connection to a Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series or Q series) as an example.

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB Connecting the GOT and a PLC using the bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial)

(Motion CPU (Q series) only)

1. Click [Transfer setup] [Online].

2. The [Transfer setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer setup]: PC side I/F: Serial USB CPU side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting : No specification

4. Double-click [Serial] of the PLC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1303

13

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Check-mark either of the following in [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox.

Mark the [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox.

8. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode).

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

04 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and a PLC using the bus connection or direct CPU connection (Motion CPU (Q series) only)

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Serial USB PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification:

4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].

5. Select [USB] in the [PC side I/F Serial Setting] dialog.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1305

13

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set].

8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.

9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name].

10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting is not required.

11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module.

12. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode).

06 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet Connecting the GOT and a PLC using the bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial)

(Motion CPU (Q series) only)

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: No Specification:

4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1307

13

5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

(For bus connection)

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] checkbox.

9. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the Motion controller (Q mode).

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

08 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication Configure the settings of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT. The routing setting may also be needed for the GOT side depending on the system configuration. For details, refer to the following procedure. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series). When the routing setting is not needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3) MT Works2 settings

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] on MT Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

Network No. :1 PC No. :1

Network No. :1 PC No.:2 IP address :192.168.3.39

MT Works2

Ethernet

Ethernet

(Network No. :1)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1309

13

2. Set the [Transfer Setup]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: Other Station (Single Network) Network path: CC IE Field

3. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

4. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

6. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] for the connection destination of the GOT.

7. [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the R16MTCPU.

Successfully connected with the R16MTCPU

10 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When the routing setting is needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Network No. :1 Station:1

Ethernet side Network No. :1 Station:2 IP address :192.168.3.39 CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:1

MT Works2

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field network (Network No. :2)

(Network No. :1)

CC-Link IE Field network side Network No. :2 Station:2

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1311

13

3) Routing setting of GT Designer3 Be sure to set the transfer network No., relay network No., and relay station No. for CPUs supporting the FAtransparent function by GT Desinger3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4) MT Works2 settings

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] on MT Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

2. Set the [Transfer Setup]. PC side I/F: Ethernet Board PLC side I/F: GOT Other Station Setting: Other Station (Single Network) Network path: CC IE Field

3. Double-click [CC IE Field] to set the network No. and station No.

12 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6. On the [Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection], check-mark [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] and click [Setting].

7. Specify [Built-in Ethernet port CPU] or [RJ71EN71] for the connection destination of the GOT.

8. [Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the R16MTCPU.

Successfully connected with the R16MTCPU

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1313

13

Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Developer. For details, refer to the following: Page 1301 Accessing by the MT Developer

Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the FA transparent settings in the MT Works2 communication settings. For details of MT Works2, refer to the following. Page 1303 Accessing by the MT Works2

14 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator This section explains how to set the FA transparent function of FR Configurator using a connection to the FR-A700 or FR- F700 series as an example.

1. Click [Settings] [Communication Settings...] in FR Configurator.

2. Select [USB] in [Communication Port].

3. Click [GOT Transparent Communication].

4. Click the [OK].

5. Click [OFFLINE] to make it [ONLINE].

6. Click [System Read], and ensure that the GOT has been connected to the FR-A700 or FR-F700 series properly.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1315

13

Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator2 This section explains how to set the FA transparent function of FR Configurator2 using a connection to the FR-E700 (FR- E700-NE), FR-A800, or FR-F800 series as an example.

When directly connecting the GOT and inverter USB connection between the GOT and personal computer, serial connection between the

GOT and inverter

1. Click [Project] [System setting] in FR Configurator2 to display the [System setting] dialog.

2. Set [Connection setting] in the [System setting] dialog. [PC-side port]: [USB] [Through]: [GOT]

3. Set [GOT]. [Model]: [GOT2000] [OUT port]: [RS-232C/RS-485]

4. Set [Model setting]. [Model]: Model of the inverter to be connected

5. Click [OK] to complete the setting.

16 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

USB connection between the GOT and personal computer, Ethernet connection between the GOT and inverter

1. Click [Project] [System setting] in FR Configurator2 to display the [System setting] dialog.

2. Set [Connection setting] in the [System setting] dialog. [PC-side port]: [USB] [Through]: [GOT] [St. No. (GOT)]: Station number of the GOT to be used

3. Set [GOT]. [Model]: [GOT2000] [OUT port]: [Ethernet]

4. Set [Model setting]. [Inverter network No.]: Network No. of the inverter to be connected [Model]: Model of the inverter to be connected

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1317

13

5. Click the [Network setting] button to display the [Network setting] dialog.

6. Configure [Model setting] in the [Network setting] dialog, and click [OK]. [St. No.]: Station number of the inverter to be connected [IP address]: IP address of the inverter to be connected [Port No.]: Port number of the inverter to be connected

7. Click [OK] in the [System setting] dialog to complete the settings.

18 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Ethernet connection between the GOT and personal computer, Ethernet connection between the GOT and inverter

1. Click [Project] [System setting] in FR Configurator2 to display the [System setting] dialog.

2. Set [Connection setting] in the [System setting] dialog. [PC-side port]: [Ethernet] [Through]: [GOT]

3. Set [GOT]. [IP address / host name]: IP address assigned to the GOT [Port No.]: [5014]

4. Set [Model setting]. [Model]: Model of the inverter to be connected

5. Click [OK] to complete the setting.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1319

13

When connecting the GOT and inverter via a PLC

1. Click [Project] [System setting] in FR Configurator2 to display the [System setting] dialog.

2. Set [Connection setting] in the [System setting] dialog. [PC-side port]: [USB] [Through]: [GOT to Programmable controller] [St. No. (GOT)]: Station number of the GOT to be used

3. Set [Programmable controller]. [Module]: Type of the PLC module that relays the GOT and inverter [Model]: Model of the PLC module that relays the GOT and inverter [IP address / host name]: IP address/host name of the PLC module that relays the GOT and inverter [Network number]: Network No. of the PLC module that relays the GOT and inverter [St. No.]: Station number of the PLC module that relays the GOT and inverter

4. Set [Model setting]. [Inverter network No.]: Network No. of the inverter to be connected [Model]: Model of the inverter to be connected

20 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Click the [Network setting] button to display the [Network setting] dialog.

6. Configure [Model setting] in the [Network setting] dialog, and click [OK]. [St. No.]: Station number of inverter to be connected

7. Click [OK] in the [System setting] dialog to complete the settings.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1321

13

Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP This section explains the procedure for setting the FA transparent function of FR Configurator2 with an example of connecting to the FREQROL E700/A800/F800 series.

1. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on FX Configurator-FP.

2. Select [USB (GOT Transparent)] in [PC side].

3. Click [Comm. Test].

4. After the communication test is completed, check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU.

22 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN This section explains how to set the FA transparent function using FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. The following shows FX Configurator-EN-L as an example.

1. Click [Transfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN-L.

2. Select [USB (GOT Transparent mode)] in [Serial port/USB] of [Connecting interface].

3. Click [Connection test]

4. After the communication test is completed, check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1323

13

Accessing by RT ToolBox3 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox3.

CR800-R Series

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the workspace of RT ToolBox3, and click [Edit Project] to display the [Edit Project] dialog.

2. Click the [Next] button.

3. Set the following item, and click the [Next] button. [Series]: [FR-R series CR800-R]

24 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Setting] dialog. [Method]: [CRnQ_R]

5. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Detail Setting] dialog. [Serial Port]: [USB]

6. Select [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] in [(2)PLC Side I/F Setting of PLC Module]. Select the transparent target controller in [(3)Target CPU] as necessary.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1325

13

7. Click the [Setting] button to display the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] dialog.

8. Set the following according to the interface of the controller. When connecting with an Ethernet port built in a PLC CPU

When connecting with an Ethernet module

9. Click the [OK] buttons of the dialogs set at Step 5 to 8 to complete the settings.

10.Click [Finish] in the [Edit Project] dialog to complete the settings. After completing the settings, change the operation mode to [Online]. Change the operation mode with the GOT and robot controller connected.

Item Setting [Type] [RnCPU]

[Unit] [IP Address] IP address assigned to RnCPU

Item Setting [Type] [RJ71EN71]

[Unit] [Network No.] Network number assigned to the Ethernet module

[Station No.] Station number assigned to the Ethernet module

[IP Address] IP address assigned to the Ethernet module

[GOT] [Station No.] Station number assigned to the GOT

26 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

CR800-D Series

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the workspace of RT ToolBox3, and click [Edit Project] to display the [Edit Project] dialog.

2. Click the [Next] button.

3. Set the following item, and click the [Next] button. [Series]: [FR-D series CR800-D]

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1327

13

4. Set the following items.

5. Click [Finish] in the [Edit Project] dialog to complete the settings. After completing the settings, change the operation mode to [Online]. Change the operation mode with the GOT and robot controller connected.

Item Setting [Method] [GOT]

[PC side I/F setting] [Communication] [USB]

[Robot controller side I/F setting] [Timeout [sec]] Set this item as necessary.

28 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

CRnQ-700 Series

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the workspace of RT ToolBox3, and click [Edit Project] to display the [Edit Project] dialog.

2. Click the [Next] button.

3. Set the following item, and click the [Next] button. [Series]: [FQ series CR750-Q]

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1329

13

4. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Setting] dialog. [Method]: [CRnQ_R]

5. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Detail Setting] dialog. [Serial Port]: [USB]

6. Select either of the following in [(2)PLC Side I/F Setting of PLC Module]. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] Here, select [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]. Select the transparent target controller in [(3)Target CPU] as necessary.

30 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. Click the [Setting] button to display the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] dialog.

8. Set the following according to the interface of the controller. When connecting with an Ethernet port built in a PLC CPU

When connecting with an Ethernet module

9. Click the [OK] buttons of the dialogs set at Step 5 to 8 to complete the settings.

10.Click [Finish] in the [Edit Project] dialog to complete the settings. After completing the settings, change the operation mode to [Online]. Change the operation mode with the GOT and robot controller connected.

Item Setting [Type] [QnUDE(H)]

[Unit] [IP Address] IP address assigned to QnUDE(H)

Item Setting [Type] [QJ71E71]

[Unit] [Network No.] Network number assigned to the Ethernet module

[Station No.] Station number assigned to the Ethernet module

[IP Address] IP address assigned to the Ethernet module

[GOT] [Station No.] Station number assigned to the GOT

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1331

13

CRnD-700 Series

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the workspace of RT ToolBox3, and click [Edit Project] to display the [Edit Project] dialog.

2. Click the [Next] button.

3. Set the following item, and click the [Next] button. [Series]: [FD series CR750-D]

32 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Set the following items.

5. Click [Finish] in the [Edit Project] dialog to complete the settings. After completing the settings, change the operation mode to [Online]. Change the operation mode with the GOT and robot controller connected.

Item Setting [Method] [GOT]

[PC side I/F setting] [Communication] [USB]

[Network No.] Network number assigned to the GOT

[Station No.] Station number assigned to the GOT

[Robot controller side I/F setting] [Station No.] Station number assigned to the robot controller

[Timeout [sec]] Set this item as necessary.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1333

13

CR800-Q Series

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the workspace of RT ToolBox3, and click [Edit Project] to display the [Edit Project] dialog.

2. Click the [Next] button.

3. Set the following item, and click the [Next] button. [Series]: [FR-Q series CR800-Q]

34 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

4. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Setting] dialog. [Method]: [CRnQ_R]

5. Set the following item, and click the [Detail] button to display the [CRnQ_R Communication Detail Setting] dialog. [Serial Port]: [USB]

6. Select either of the following in [(2)PLC Side I/F Setting of PLC Module]. [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode] [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] Here, select [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]. Select the transparent target controller in [(3)Target CPU] as necessary.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1335

13

7. Click the [Setting] button to display the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] dialog.

8. Set the following according to the interface of the controller. When connecting with an Ethernet port built in a PLC CPU

When connecting with a PERIPHERAL I/F of CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) or Ethernet module

9. Click the [OK] buttons of the dialogs set at Step 5 to 8 to complete the settings.

10.Click [Finish] in the [Edit Project] dialog to complete the settings. After completing the settings, change the operation mode to [Online]. Change the operation mode with the GOT and robot controller connected.

Item Setting [Type] [QnUDE(H)]

[Unit] [IP Address] IP address assigned to QnUDE(H)

Item Setting [Type] [QJ71E71]

[Unit] [Network No.] Arbitrary network number

[Station No.] Arbitrary station number

[IP Address] IP address assigned to the Ethernet module

[GOT] [Station No.] Station number assigned to the GOT

36 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by RT ToolBox2 This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ-700.

Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial) (CRnQ-700 only)

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Click [Edit Project].

2. Set [Method] to [CRnC].

3. Click [Detail].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1337

13

4. Select [USB] in [Serial port].

5. Click [Detail].

6. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module].

[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]

[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]

7. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU].

Bus connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

38 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Connecting the GOT and Controller in Ethernet connection

1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Click [Edit Project].

2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ].

3. Click [Detail].

4. Select [USB] in [Serial port].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1339

13

5. Click [Detail].

6. On the [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module], mark the [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and click [Set].

7. Set [QJ71E71] for [Type].

8. Specify the number assigned to the Ethernet module for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "Module side".

9. Specify the number assigned to the GOT for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "GOT side".

10.As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU].

40 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by NC Configurator2 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of NC Configurator2.

1. Click [Communicate] [Communication settings] [C70 series] [USB].

2. Depending on the connect pattern, set one of the following in the [Connect pattern]. USB-GOT (Ethernet-CNC Unit) USB-GOT (Ethernet-Ethernet Unit) USB-GOT (Ethernet-Sequencer CPU Unit) USB-GOT (Q Mode)

3. Set as necessary [IP address], [Network No.] and [Station No.].

4. check that the GOT is correctly connected to the CNC in [Test].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1341

13

Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the MELSOFT Navigator.

1. Click [Online] [Batch Read] in MELSOFT Navigator.

2. The [Batch Read] is displayed.

3. Select the projects to be read from [Select Project], and set the storage destination of the workspace in [Save Workspace].

4. Click [Execute] to read and display the specified project.

42 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool.

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup...].

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT Other Station Setting : No specification

4. Set [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] in [Transfer Setup]. For details, refer to the following.

Page 1270 Accessing by GX Works2

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1343

13

Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module (Q Series) with the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) connected.

When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification

4. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] screen.

6. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode).

44 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification

4. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] screen.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1345

13

6. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed. Here, set the C Controller module (Q Series) (Q24DHCCPU-V), which is firstly connected via a GOT.

7. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the C Controller module (Q Series) (Q24DHCCPU-V).

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the C Controller module (Q Series) (Q24DHCCPU-V).

When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection

1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Ethernet Board PLC side I/F : GOT Other station : No specification

4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].

46 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No. are not required to be changed (default) because they are not used.

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the motion controller (Q mode).

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1347

13

Accessing by MX Component (MX Sheet) This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MX Component(MX Sheet) with an example of MX Sheet Version2.

MX Component(MX Sheet) manuals For details of the MX Component(MX Sheet), refer to the following manual. MX Sheet Version 2 Operating Manual (Introduction) MX Component Version 4 Operating Manual When MX Component is used alone Start [Communication Setting Utility] and start communication setting from the following step 3.

1. Click [MX sheet] of Microsoft Excel [Cell Settings]. Set [Use] and click [Access Data].

48 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

2. Click [Communication Setting].

3. Click [Wizard].

4. Set [Logical station number] and click [Next].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1349

13

5. Select either of the following option from [PC side I/F] according to the connection configuration and click [Next].

[USB (Via GOT)]

[Ethernet Board (Via GOT)]

6. Select either of the following option from [GOT PLC I/F] according to the connection configuration.

[Serial]

[Bus connection]

[Ethernet]

GOT and USB connection

GOT and Ethernet connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Bus connection

Ethernet connection

50 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

7. Select either of the following option from [Connect module] according to the setting of [GOT PLC I/F] and click [Next]. For [Serial] [CPU unit],[RJ71C24],[QJ71C24], [LJ71C24] For [Bus connection] [CPU unit] For [Ethernet] [CPU unit], [QJ71E71], [RJ71E71],[CC IE Field Ethernet adapter], [FX3U-ENET-ADP] [FX3U-ENET(-L)], [CPU unit(FX5)] For example, set as shown below and click [Next]. [GOT and PLC I/F]: [Ethernet] [Connection destination unit type]: [CPU unit]

Select [Host(IP Address)] according to the connection configuration and click [Next].

8. Select [Station type], [CPU type], and [Multiple CPU] according to the connection configuration and click [Next].

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1351

13

9. Set [Comment] and click [Finish].

10.Click [Connection test]

11. Click [Test] and check that normal communication is performed.

52 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

Accessing by MI Configurator This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the MI Configurator.

When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in MI Configurator.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]. Connection source I/F : USB Connection destination I/F : GOT Other station : No specification

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1353

13

4. Double-click [GOT] of the Connection destination I/F to display [Connection destination I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed.

6. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the IP address assigned to the MELIPC.

7. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if MI Configurator has been connected to the MELIPC.

MELSOFT MI Configurator

Successfully connected with the MI5122-VW

54 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication Configure the settings of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] on the GOT. The routing setting may also be needed for the GOT side depending on the system configuration. For details, refer to the following procedure. When the routing setting is not needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Network No. :1 PC No. :1

Network No. :1 PC No. :2

MI Configurator

Ethernet

Ethernet

IP address :192.168.3.39

(Network No. :1)

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1355

13

3) MI Configurator settings

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in MI Configurator.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]. Connection source I/F : Ethernet Board Connection destination I/F : GOT Other station : No specification

4. Double-click [GOT] of the Connection destination I/F to display [Connection destination I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

5. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

6. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if MI Configurator has been connected to the MELIPC.

MELSOFT MI Configurator

Successfully connected with the MI5122-VW

56 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

When the routing setting is needed for the GOT side 1) System configuration

2) [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Set the network No., PC No., and IP address of the target PLC CPUs for the FA transparent function in GT Designer3.

Page 217 ETHERNET CONNECTION

Network No. :1 Station:1

MI Configurator

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet side Network No. :1 Station:2 IP address :192.168.3.39 Ethernet side Network No. :2 Station:1

(Network No. :1)

(Network No. :2)

Ethernet side Network No. :2 Station:2

Ethernet

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1357

13

3) Routing setting of GT Designer3 Be sure to set the transfer network No., relay network No., and relay station No. for CPUs supporting the FA transparent function by GT Desinger3.

4) MI Configurator settings

1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in MI Configurator.

2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.

3. Set the [Transfer Setup]. Connection source I/F : Ethernet Board Connection destination I/F : GOT Other station Setting: Other Station (Single Network) Network Communication Rute: Ethernet

4. Double-click [Ethernet] of the [Network Communication Rute] to set the network No. and station No.

58 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting

23

5. Double-click [GOT] of the Connection destination I/F to display [Connection destination I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

6. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection]. Check the IP address and port number on the GOT side in the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window in GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

7. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the [Connection Test] to check if MI Configurator has been connected to the MELIPC.

MELSOFT MI Configurator

Successfully connected with the MI5122-VW

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.7 Personal Computer Side Setting 1359

13

23.8 Precautions Precautions common to each software

GOT interface required to use the FA transparent function Connect the personal computer, to which PX Developer or any other relevant software has been installed, to the USB interface of the GOT. When performing the FA transparent function, use USB interface of the GOT. Using both of them to perform the FA transparent function concurrently is not allowed.

Conditions for suspending the FA transparent function The FA transparent function is also suspended when any of the following operations, which stop the GOT monitor, is performed. Note that the FA transparent function will not be stopped while using the extended function such as the Utility display or ladder monitor function. When project data is written/read, or when the OS is written by GT Designer3*1

When the GOT is set up*1

When no communication request (online monitor, etc.) has been issued from PX Developer for 45 minutes *1 A timeout error occurs in PX Developer.

When GOT monitoring is faulty The FA transparent function cannot be used in case that the GOT monitoring is faulty due to PLC CPU errors or faulty communication between the PLC CPU and GOT. When GOT monitoring is faulty, check the following.

Whether the PLC CPU operates normally Refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU you use.

Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected normally Page 375 DIRECT CPU CONNECTION (SERIAL) Page 435 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Page 487 BUS CONNECTION

When monitoring the PLC CPU from a personal computer When monitoring the PLC CPU from a personal computer, the GOT and personal computer refresh the display slower.

USB

60 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions

23

Software available for the FA transparent function When multiple kinds of software are activated on one personal computer, only one of them is available for communications using the FA transparent function. Do not concurrently perform any communications using the FA transparent function. (Offline operation with each software is available) Also, do not perform communications with the GOT (e.g. downloading project data) from GT Designer3 during execution of communications using the FA transparent function.

When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection When multiple GOTs are bus-connected When multiple GOTs are bus-connected, the FA transparent function can be used on each GOT. However, note that the monitoring performance of each GOT slows down as the number of monitoring GOTs and personal computers increases.

When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection When the FA transparent function is used in a bus connection, the following GX Works2 functions cannot be executed. The message [The executed function is not supported. Please check the manual and other documentation.] is displayed on GX Works2.

When PLC power disconnection occurs with the FA transparent function being used While the FA transparent function is being used, if the communication between the PLC and the GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection or a disconnection of the communication cable between the PLC and the GOT, the GOT waits for timeout against the communication request from the peripheral devices (PX Developer, etc.), and it takes a few minutes to recover the monitoring between the PLC and the GOT.

Unsupported functions Remark Remote Reset Remote system reset

Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote latch clear Write clock data Clear malfunction log

Inexecutable only when specify all stations/groups has been performed.

GT Designer3

PX Developer and so on Online operation

Communication with GOT

PC

PX Developer and so on Online operation

Monitoring

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions 1361

13

When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection GX Works3, GX Works2 function When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection, the following GX Works3, GX Works2 functions cannot be executed. The message [The executed function is not supported. Please check the manual and other documentation.] is displayed on GX Works3, GX Works2.

GOT station monitoring function When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection, GOT station monitoring function cannot be operated. Therefore, in the cases of [no connection target], [PLC power OFF], etc., the monitoring of the GOT delays for the timeout time.

When connecting to FXCPU When connecting the GOT and FXCPU in Ethernet communication, and using the FA transparent function, a timeout may occur. When a timeout occurs, set [Delay Time] in the communication detail settings according to the circumstance of the system. Page 248 Communication detail settings

When connecting the GOT multi-drop connection FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the GOT multi-drop connection system.

Standard monitor OS installation, Communication driver writing When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.

Number of personal computers Only one personal computer can be connected to the multi-drop connection system.

Monitor speed of GOT The monitoring performance slows down according to the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA transparent function, the monitoring performance of the whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.

Unsupported functions Remark Remote Reset Remote system reset

Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote latch clear Write clock data Clear malfunction log

Inexecutable only when specify all stations/groups has been performed.

Remote password function MELSECNET diagnostics CC IE Control diagnostics CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics (GX Works3) CC IE Field diagnostics (GX Works2) Ethernet diagnostics (PING test/loopback test with the Ethernet module (R/Q series))

Only one personal computer

62 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions

23

When connecting the GOT and the personal computer by USB When the following operations are executed, the display on the GOT may stop temporarily or a timeout message may appear on GX Works3 or GX Works2. The operations are executed in the PLC.

When using GX Works3, GX Works2

When [monitor conditions] have been set on GX Works3, GX Works2 Monitoring performance of the GOT is temporarily suspended.

The GOT cannot respond to the touch switch operation and numerical/ascii inputs.

Writing to PLC results in a system alarm occurrence and displays the message, "315 Device writing error. Correct device.".

While setting the monitor conditions, do not perform any operation which makes the GOT restart (e.g. downloading project data, changing utility data).

Doing so may display a system alarm, "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." when the GOT restarts. When the monitor conditions setting for the PLC CPU has not been cancelled, reconnect GX Works3, GX Works2 to cancel the setting.(An error may be output when the monitor conditions setting is cancelled.)

When the time check of GX Works3, GX Works2 is set to 30 seconds or more in the monitor condition settings, the message "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." may appear.

Set the time check time of GX Works3, GX Works2 to 30 seconds or less.

When exiting GX Works3, GX Works2 For 30 seconds after GX Works3, GX Works2 has been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same speed as when the FA transparent function is working.

Operation Target station Remote Reset Current station

Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote STEP-RUN Remote Reset Remote latch clear Write clock data

All stations

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions 1363

13

When performing [Read to PLC], [Write to PLC] and other file operations on GX Works3, GX Works2 If any of the following GOT functions is executed during the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to PLC], an error may occur on the GOT, GX Works3, GX Works2. In this case, take the following corrective action: File reading in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC-Q

Read/write of values of the file register specified for the recipe function

*1 The numerical indicates the system alarm No. Reading TC monitor set value in the system monitor function

Reading the special module monitor CPU Malfunction log

Backup/restore

SFC monitor file reading

Reading/Writing files of ladder edit

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 The file is not found. With no file operation being executed

on GX Works2, re-execute the file reading.

File access failure. Please retry.

With no file reading being executed in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC-Q, re-execute the file operation.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 358 PLC file access failure. Confirm PLC drive.*1

With no file operation on GX Works3, GX Works2, turn ON the trigger device for the recipe function again.

File access failure. Please retry.

Execute the file access operation again with the recipe in-process signal in GOT system information OFF.PLC file system error. Unable to

communicate with PLC.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 No message is displayed. (The TC set value space is blank.)

With no file operation being executed on GX Works3, GX Works2, re- execute the TC monitor.

File access failure. Please retry.

With no TC set value being read, re- execute the file operation.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 Communication error With no file operation being executed

on GX Works3, GX Works2, re- execute the CPU malfunction log reading.

File access failure. Please retry.

With no special module monitor malfunction log being read, execute the file operation.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 Backup With no file operation being executed

on GX Works2, re-execute the backup.

- With no backup being executed, execute the file operation.

Restore With no file operation being executed on GX Works2, re-execute the restore.

- With no restore being executed, execute the file operation.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 - With no file operation being executed

on GX Works3, GX Works2, re- execute the file reading.

- With no special module monitor CPU malfunction log being read, execute the file operation.

Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Works2 Read With no file operation being executed

on GX Works2, re-execute the file reading.

With no file reading being executed on ladder edit, execute the file operation.

Write With no file operation being executed on GX Works3, GX Works2, re- execute the file writing.

With no file writing being executed on ladder edit, execute the file operation.

64 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions

23

When PLC write fails while using the FA transparent function The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent function may fail due to some reason such as cable disconnection. When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the same personal computer, or reset the PLC CPU.

Restrictions on GX Works2 during backup/restoration When PLC read, PLC write, or monitoring is executed from GX Works2 using the FA

transparent function during backup/restoration of the GOT, the backup/restoration stops. Check that PLC read, PLC write, or monitoring is not executed from GX Works2 using the FA transparent. Then, execute backup/restoration of the GOT again.

When backup/restoration is executed from the GOT while PLC read, PLC write, monitoring, or other operation is run with GX Works2 using the FA transparent function, an errors on GX Works2.

Backup/restoration of the GOT is correctly executed.

When using MT Developer, MT Works2

When exiting MT Developer, MT Works2 For 45 seconds after MT Developer, MT Works2 has been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same speed as when the FA transparent function is working.

When PLC write fails while using the FA transparent function The execution of PLC write to the Motion CPU using the FA transparent function may fail due to some reasons such as cable disconnection. In that case, re-execute the PLC write from the same personal computer, or reset the Motion CPU.

When a cable disconnection has occurred When the cable between the GOT and the motion CPU is disconnected, it takes time until a timeout error occurs in MT Developer, MT Works2.

When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2

Unavailable functions and restrictions For the use via the motion controller, there are unavailable functions and restrictions. For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen of MR Configurator.

Monitor speed of GOT Since the FA transparent function is used via the motion CPU, the monitor speed of GOT is slow.

23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions 1365

13

When using FR Configurator, FR Configurator2

GOT monitoring when using FA transparent function When FA transparent function is used, GOT suspends monitoring on channels supporting FA transparent function.

Cancelling the suspended GOT monitoring immediately To cancel the suspended (45 seconds) GOT monitoring immediate30ly after FA transparent is executed, input "1" to device GS457.Then GOT resumes monitoring. If FA transparent is resumed even if "1" is already input to device GS457, an error will occur on FR Configurator. For the details of the device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual

When using the oscilloscope function (When using FR Configurator) Since the monitoring of the inverter data may be not performed at the specified sampling intervals depending on the settings of oscilloscope function, adjust the communication setting, a sampling interval, etc.

PU mode operation command source selection On the setting of PU mode operation command source selection (Pr:551) of the inverter, specify the terminal (1:RS-485 terminals, 2:PU connected) connected to GOT.

When displaying the monitor screen of FR Configurator2 Timing for displaying the monitor screen of FR Configurator2 After displaying the monitor screen, move online. If the monitor screen is displayed after the timeout time of FR Configurator2 has passed, an error may occur.

Refreshing the monitor screen after the inverter reset If the monitor screen is displayed after the inverter reset has been performed in the [Faults history] window of FR Configurator2, an error may occur. If an error occurs, lengthen the communication timeout time in FR Configurator2.

High speed sampling using FR Configurator2 High speed sampling is unavailable when the FA transparent function is used.

66 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23.8 Precautions

A

APPENDIX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range This section describes the range of devices settable in GT Designer3 for each of Mitsubishi Electric products connected to the GOT. The settable range varies with the selection for [Controller Type] in the [Controller Setting] window. Configure the device setting according to the specifications of the controller to be used. Device specifications differ depending on the controller model even among the controllers of the same series. If a non-existent device or a device number out of the range is set for an object, other objects for which correct devices are set may not be monitored. Page 1368 Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) Page 1377 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] Page 1463 [MELSEC iQ-F] Page 1480 [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] Page 1498 [MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*] Page 1502 [MELSEC-L] Page 1516 [MELSEC-A] Page 1520 [MELSEC-FX] Page 1527 [MELSEC-WS] Page 1532 [MELIPC] Page 1534 [MELSERVO-J2M-P8A] Page 1541 [MELSERVO-J2M-*DU] Page 1549 [MELSERVO-J2S-*A] Page 1557 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] Page 1567 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] Page 1576 [MELSERVO-J3-*A] Page 1586 [MELSERVO-J3-*T] Page 1599 [MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] Page 1616 [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] Page 1639 [MELSERVO-JE-*C] Page 1657 [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] Page 1692 [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] Page 1701 [FREQROL 800] Page 1709 [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] Page 1729 [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1367

13

Device setting dialog (Mitsubishi Electric equipment) Set a device to be monitored.

1) Title Data type and channel number of the device to be set 2) [Device] Set the device name and device number. If a bit number needs to be specified, the setting item is displayed. Example) Setting of X0000

The setting items vary with the selected device name.

3) [Information] Displays the setting range of each setting item according to the selected device. 4) [Network] Set the station number of the controller to be monitored. The setting items depend on the controller setting. Page 1370 Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric PLC Page 1372 Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric servo amplifier Page 1374 Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric inverter

2) 3)

4)

5)

1)

4)

6)

[MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D] [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]

X0000

Device name Device No.

When [X] is selected for the device name

When [SP] is selected for the device name

68 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

5) [Switch to the device comment dialog] button You can open the device comment setting dialog to check the device comments imported to GT Designer3. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual 6) [Switch to the device define dialog] button You can open the device definition setting dialog to check the definitions of the virtual servo amplifier or inverter devices. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

For the formats of devices, refer to the following. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual For the specifications of each device, refer to the following. Page 1377 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] Page 1463 [MELSEC iQ-F] Page 1480 [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700] Page 1498 [MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*] Page 1502 [MELSEC-L] Page 1516 [MELSEC-A] Page 1520 [MELSEC-FX] Page 1527 [MELSEC-WS] Page 1532 [MELIPC] Page 1534 [MELSERVO-J2M-P8A] Page 1541 [MELSERVO-J2M-*DU] Page 1549 [MELSERVO-J2S-*A] Page 1557 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CP] Page 1567 [MELSERVO-J2S-*CL] Page 1576 [MELSERVO-J3-*A] Page 1586 [MELSERVO-J3-*T] Page 1599 [MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A] Page 1616 [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ] Page 1639 [MELSERVO-JE-*C] Page 1657 [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G] Page 1692 [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] Page 1701 [FREQROL 800] Page 1709 [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] Page 1729 [Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1369

13

Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric PLC Configure the following settings for connecting to a Mitsubishi Electric PLC. Example) Device setting dialog for [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D]

1) [CPU No.] Set the CPU number of the controller. Page 1371 Setting the CPU No. 2) Station type specification Select the station type (host or other) for the controller to be monitored. [Host]: The controller to be monitored is the host station. [Other]: The controller to be monitored is not the host station. When monitoring link relay (B) and link register (W) assigned in link parameter and network parameter, select [Host]. If [Other] is selected, the cyclic transmission will be changed to the transient transmission irrespective of the network type, resulting in delay of the object display. Set RX, RY, RWw, RWr, LB, or LW as [Host] when monitoring a cyclic device. 3) [Network No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Specify a network number. 4) [Station No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Specify a station number. 5) [Control System/Standby System] This item can be set only when [Use the function of MELSEC Redundant] is selected in [MELSEC Redundant] of the [Controller Setting] window. The following shows the items to be selected. [Control System] [Standby System] Example) Display terminology of the control system

For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

1) 2)

3) 4)

5)

[-S] is displayed for a device of the standby system.

1-1/1-S W0.b0

70 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Setting the CPU No.

The setting range depends on the system configuration of the monitoring target.

To specify a CPU number with the value of a GOT data register (GD), refer to the following. Page 1371 Indirect specification of a CPU number

Indirect specification of a CPU number To set a GOT data register (GD) to specify a CPU number, set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in the [Controller Setting] window. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual In GT SoftGOT2000, set [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] in the [Communication Setup] dialog. GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual The following shows the correspondence between CPU numbers and GOT data registers (GD). Example) When 500 is set to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)] Three consecutive devices, starting from GD500, are set to specify CPU numbers.

Upon the GOT startup, 0 is stored in the specified GD devices until values are set. If you set the GD devices on the screen that appears upon the GOT startup, a communication timeout error occurs. To avoid such situation, set the GD devices so that their values are retained at a power failure. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When specifying GD devices for multiple channels, set different GD devices to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)].

GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the monitoring targets, such as the station number of an inverter. When setting GD devices for a different channel, set different GD devices to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)].

Do not change the value of the specified device while a touch switch with the bit momentary is being pressed. Doing so may cause the touch switch to exhibit unintended behavior.

Item Description When monitoring a single CPU system Set the CPU No. to [0].

When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. to any of [1] to [4].

When GT SoftGOT2000 on the PC CPU module is connected using the bus connection

Do not specify 0 for [CPU No.]. When 0 is specified, the monitoring target is set to the PC CPU module that cannot be monitored.

When monitoring an inverter Set the CPU No. to [0].

CPU number GOT data registers (GD) Setting range 100 GD500 [1] to [4]

(Setting an invalid value causes a communication timeout error.)101 GD501

102 GD502

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1371

13

Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric servo amplifier Example) Device setting dialog of [MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]

1) Monitor target specification Set the monitoring target of the set device.

2) [Station No.] This item appears when [Selection] is selected for the monitor target specification. The setting range is [0] to [31] (direct) or [100] to [115] (indirect). For indirect specification of a station number, refer to the following. Page 1372 Indirect specification of a station number (for connection to a servo amplifier) For the network settings of [MELSERVO-JE-*C] and [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G], refer to the following. Page 1373 For the network settings of [MELSERVO-JE-*C] and [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]

Indirect specification of a station number (for connection to a servo amplifier) When you specify any of 100 to 115 for the station number, the value of the corresponding GOT data register (GD10 to GD25) is used as the station number. The following shows the correspondence between station number setting values and GOT data registers (GD).

Item Description [All] Select this item when writing data to all servo amplifiers connected.

During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of the station No. 0 is monitored. When inputting data by the numerical input, the data is written to all servo amplifiers connected during inputting and the servo amplifier of the station No. 0 is monitored during other than inputting (displaying). When [All] is selected for a device, network No. 0 and station No. FF are displayed in the device list window and the printed report.

[Selection] Specify the station number of a servo amplifier to be monitored.

Station No. GOT data registers (GD) Setting range 100 GD10 [0] to [31]

Setting a value outside the range causes a timeout error.101 GD11

: :

114 GD24

115 GD25

1) 2)

72 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For the network settings of [MELSERVO-JE-*C] and [MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]

1) Station type specification Select the station type (host or other) for the controller to be monitored. [Host]: The controller to be monitored is the host station. [Other]: The controller to be monitored is not the host station. 2) [Station No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Specify a station number.

1) 2)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1373

13

Network setting for connection to the Mitsubishi Electric inverter Page 1374 Network setting for [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] Page 1375 Network setting for [FREQROL 800] Page 1376 Network setting for [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]

Network setting for [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]

1) [Station No.] Set the station number of the inverter to be monitored. The setting range is [0] to [31] (direct) or [100] to [115] (indirect). For indirect specification of a station number, refer to the following. Page 1374 Indirect specification of a station number (for connecting an inverter)

Indirect specification of a station number (for connecting an inverter) When you specify any of 100 to 115 for the station number, the value of the corresponding GOT data register (GD10 to GD25) is used as the station number. The following shows the correspondence between station number setting values and GOT data registers (GD).

Do not change the value of the specified device while a touch switch with the bit momentary is being pressed. Doing so may cause the touch switch to exhibit unintended behavior.

Station No. GOT data registers (GD) Setting range 100 GD10 [0] to [31]

Setting a value outside the above range causes a device range error.101 GD11

: :

114 GD24

115 GD25

1)

74 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Network setting for [FREQROL 800]

1) Station type specification Select the station type (host or other) for the controller to be monitored. [Host]: The controller to be monitored is the host station. [Other]: The controller to be monitored is not the host station. 2) [Network No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. The setting depends on the connection type between the GOT and the inverter.

3) [Station No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Set the station number of the inverter to be monitored. The setting depends on the connection type between the GOT and the inverter.

Connection type Description Serial communication connection [Network No.] is not used.

Ethernet connection Specify a network number. The setting range is [1] to [239].

Connection type Description Serial communication connection The setting range is [0] to [31] (direct) or [100] to [115] (indirect).

For indirect specification of a station number, refer to the following. Page 1374 Indirect specification of a station number (for connecting an inverter)

Ethernet connection The setting range is [1] to [120].

1)

2) 3)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1375

13

Network setting for [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]

1) Station type specification Select the station type (host or other) for the controller to be monitored. [Host]: The controller to be monitored is the host station. [Other]: The controller to be monitored is not the host station. 2) [Network No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Specify a network number. The setting range is [1] to [239]. 3) [Station No.] This item appears when [Other] is selected for the station type. Set the station number of the inverter to be monitored. The setting range is [1] to [120].

1)

2) 3)

76 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1384 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1377 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/

RT, CR800-D])

Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ- R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1384 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Specifications of word devices Page 1386 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1395 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1397 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1398 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1399 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1400 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices

Page 1453 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

Y Output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

B*4 Link relay Hexadecimal 0000000 to 9A61FFF

M*4 Internal relay Decimal 0 to 161882111

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767

S*5 Step relay Decimal 0 to 16383

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 131071

TC*4 Timer coil Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

TT*4 Timer contact Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1377

13

CC*4 Counter coil Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

CT*4 Counter contact Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

SC*4 Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

SS*4 Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 8993439 (Not usable as word data)

SB*4 Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000000 to 9A61FFF

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 4095

RX Remote input Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

RY Remote output Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

LB Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

LTC*4 Long timer coil Decimal 0 to 2529407 (Not usable as word data)

LTT*4 Long timer contact Decimal 0 to 2529407 (Not usable as word data)

LCC*4 Long counter coil Decimal 0 to 4761215 (Not usable as word data)

LCT*4 Long counter contact Decimal 0 to 4761215 (Not usable as word data)

LSC*4 Long retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 2529407 (Not usable as word data)

LSS*4 Long retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 2529407 (Not usable as word data)

SAX Safety input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 2FFF

SAY Safety output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 2FFF

SAB Safety link relay Hexadecimal 00000 to 9BFFF

SAM Safety internal relay Decimal 0 to 638975

SATC Safety timer coil Decimal 0 to 35487

SATT Safety timer contact Decimal 0 to 35487

SACC Safety counter coil Decimal 0 to 35487

SACT Safety counter contact Decimal 0 to 35487

SASC Safety retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 35487

SASS Safety retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 35487

SASM Safety special relay Decimal 0 to 4095

BL SFC block Decimal 0 to 319

BLS Step relay (block) Decimal BL(SFC Block No.)-S(Device) Notation example: BL1-S3 SFC Block No. (decimal): 0 to 319 Device (decimal): 0 to 511

SP*2 Servo amplifier request Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

78 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1400 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1453 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

*4 For the maximum number of devices when an extended SRAM cassette is installed, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

*5 If a bit-specified word device is used in the random read processing, GT SoftGOT2000 (Single channel) or GT Simulator3 uses the value of the bit device in block No. 0 only. The bit device status depends on the SFC program status (active or inactive). When the SFC program is inactive, the bit device is off (stores 0). If a step relay (S) is used in the random read processing, specify the relevant step relay (block) (BLS) on GT SoftGOT2000 or GT Simulator3.

OM*2 Operation mode selection Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

TMB*2 Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

OTI*2 One-touch tuning instruction Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

GFDI*2 Gear failure diagnosis instruction Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

ECCDI*2 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction

Decimal Page 1380 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

JnX Link input (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-X(Device) Notation example: J1-X0000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to

3FFF

JnY Link output (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-Y(Device) Notation example: J1-Y0000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to

3FFF

JnB Link relay (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-B(Device) Notation example: J1-B0000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to

7FFF

JnSB Link special relay (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-SB(Device) Notation example: J1-SB000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 000 to FFF

IOST*3 I/O terminal monitor Decimal 0 to 127

CMD*3 Operation command Decimal 0 to 63

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1379

13

Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (RD77MS). The following items are displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the

Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (RD77GF).

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE TSN and a Motion module (RD78G(H)). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example SP [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-SP(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

A64-SP0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-SP(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A64-SP0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] SP(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

SP0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-SP(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

AA3-SP0

OM [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

A64-OM0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

UFF-A64-OM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

OM0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OM(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

AA3-OM0

80 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For indirect specification of a module number, axis number, or axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMB [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

A64-TMB1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

UFF-A64-TMB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

TMB1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMB(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

AA3-TMB1

OTI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A64-OTI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A64-OTI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

OTI0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OTI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-OTI0

GFDI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-GFDI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A64-GFDI1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-GFDI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A64-GFDI1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-GFDI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-GFDI0

ECCDI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ECCDI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A64-ECCDI1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ECCDI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A64-ECCDI1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ECCDI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-ECCDI0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1381

13

Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

To set a GOT data register to specify a module number, set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] in the [Controller Setting] window. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual In GT SoftGOT2000, set [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] in the [Communication Setup] dialog. GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual The following shows the correspondence between module numbers and GOT data registers (GD). Example) When 550 is set to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)] Sixteen consecutive devices, starting from GD550, are set to specify module numbers.

Upon the GOT startup, 0 is stored in the specified GD devices until values are set. If you set the GD devices on the screen that appears upon the GOT startup, module No.0 is monitored unintentionally, or a device range error occurs. To avoid such situation, set the GD devices so that their values are retained at a power failure. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When setting GD devices for multiple channels, set different GD devices to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)].

GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the monitoring targets, such as the station number of an inverter. When setting GD devices for a different channel, set different GD devices to [Module No. switching GD device first No. (16 points)].

Do not change the value of the specified device while a touch switch with the bit momentary is being pressed. Doing so may cause the touch switch to exhibit unintended behavior.

Module No. GOT data registers (GD) Setting range 100 GD550 [000] to [0FF]

([001] to [010] when [MELSEC iQ-F] is selected for [Controller Type] in the [Controller Setting] window) Setting a value outside the above range causes a device range error.

101 GD551

: :

10E GD564

10F GD565

82 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

To use GOT data registers (GD) to specify an axis number or axis designation, set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] in the [Controller Setting] window. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual In GT SoftGOT2000, set [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] in the [Communication Setup] dialog. GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual The following shows the relationship between the axis number or axis designation and the GOT data register (GD). Example) When 10 is set to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)] Sixteen consecutive devices, starting from GD10, are set to specify an axis number.

Upon the GOT startup, 0 is stored in the specified GD devices until values are set. If you set the GD devices on the screen that appears upon the GOT startup, a device range error occurs. To avoid such situation, set the GD devices so that their values are retained at a power failure. For the details, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When specifying GD devices for multiple channels, set different GD devices to [CPU No. switching GD device first No. (3 points)].

GD10 to GD25 are used to specify the monitoring targets, such as the station number of an inverter. When setting GD devices for a different channel, set different GD devices to [Servo axis switching GD device first No. (16 points)].

Do not change the value of the specified device while a touch switch with the bit momentary is being pressed. Doing so may cause the touch switch to exhibit unintended behavior.

Axis No. or axis designation

GOT data registers (GD) Setting range

100 GD10 Axis number [1] to [64] Axis designation

[1]: Single-axis/Axis A [2]: Axis B [3]: Axis C Setting a value outside the above range causes a device range error.

101 GD11

: :

114 GD24

115 GD25

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1383

13

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LTC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LTT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LCC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LCT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LSC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LSS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SAX R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

SAY R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

SAB R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

SAM R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

SATC R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SATT R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SACC R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SACT R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SASC R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SASS R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

SASM R/- -/- R/- R/- -/-

BL R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

BLS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

GFDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

84 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ECCDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

JnX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

JnY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

JnB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

JnSB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

IOST R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

CMD -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1385

13

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1395 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN*4 Timer current value Decimal 0 to 8993439

CN*4 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 8993439

SN*4 Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 8993439

D*4 Data register Decimal 0 to 10117631

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 4095

W*4 Link register Hexadecimal 000000 to 9A61FF

SW*4 Link special register Hexadecimal 000000 to 9A61FF

R File register Decimal 0 to 32767

ER Extension file register(Block) Decimal ER(R block)-(Device) Notation example: ER255-100 R block (decimal): 0 to 255 Device (decimal): 0 to 32767

ZR*4 Extension file register Decimal 0 to 10027007

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 23 (Not usable as bit data)

G Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal U(Unit No.)-G(Device) Notation example: UFF-G100 Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF Device (decimal): 0 to 268435455

For the module No., set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.

Ww*3 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

Wr*3 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

LW Link register Hexadecimal 00000 to 1FFFF

# Motion device Decimal 0 to 108287

U3E0*5 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal 0 to 12287

U3E1*5 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal 0 to 12287

U3E2*5 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal 0 to 12287

U3E3*5 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal 0 to 12287

SATN Safety timer (current value) Decimal 0 to 35487

SACN Safety counter (current value) Decimal 0 to 35487

SASN Safety retentive timer (current value) Decimal 0 to 35487

SAD Safety data register Decimal 0 to 39935

SASD Safety special register Decimal 0 to 4095

SAW Safety link register Hexadecimal 0000 to 9BFF

PA*2 Basic parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

86 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PB*2 Gain filter parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PC*2 Extension setting parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PD*2 I/O setting parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PO*2 Option unit parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PS*2 Special parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PU*2 Multi encoder parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PT*2 Positioning control parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PL*2*6 Motor extension parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

PN*2 Network setting parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PVS*2*7 Position extension parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ST*2 Status display Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PE*2 Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PF*2 Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

NPA*2 Network basic parameter Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1387

13

ALM*2 Alarm (current alarm J4A extend) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Alarm (alarm history J4A extend) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Alarm (alarm history J5G extend) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

POS*2 Point table (position) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

SPD*2 Point table (speed) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ACT*2 Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT*2 Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DWL*2 Point table (dwell) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AUX*2 Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MCD*2 Point table (M code) Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MD*2 Machine diagnosis data Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDS*2 Gear failure diagnosis data Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDS*2 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data

Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS*2 One-touch tuning data Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DI*2 External input signal Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

88 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1400 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

*3 Not available to GT21 and GS21. *4 For the maximum number of devices when an extended SRAM cassette is installed, refer to the following.

MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) *5 For monitoring the multiple CPU high speed transmission memory, the CPU buffer memory access device (HG) for RCPU is monitored.

The CPU buffer memory access device (G) is not monitored. *6 The device name depends on the servo amplifier.

MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G: Motor extension parameter Other than MR-J5-G(-RJ) or MR-J5W-G: Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

*7 PVS is a virtual device corresponding to the servo parameter (PV) of MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G, and MR-JET-G. Use the virtual devices (PVS) to read/write data from/to servo parameters (PV).

DO*2 External output signal Decimal Page 1390 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

JnW Link register (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-W(Device) Notation example: J1-W00000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 00000 to

1FFFF

JnSW Link special register (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-SW(Device) Notation example: J1-SW000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 000 to FFF

U3E0G CPU buffer memory access device Decimal U3E0-G(Device) Notation example: U3E0-G100 Device (decimal): 0 to 268435455

U3E1G CPU buffer memory access device Decimal U3E1-G(Device) Notation example: U3E1-G100 Device (decimal): 0 to 268435455

U3E2G CPU buffer memory access device Decimal U3E2-G(Device) Notation example: U3E2-G100 Device (decimal): 0 to 268435455

U3E3G CPU buffer memory access device Decimal U3E3-G(Device) Notation example: U3E3-G100 Device (decimal): 0 to 268435455

RD Refresh data register Decimal 0 to 1048575

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1389

13

Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (RD77MS). The following items are displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (RD77GF).

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE TSN and a Motion module (RD78G(H)). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example PA [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PA(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

A64-PA1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PA(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

UFF-A64-PA1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PA (Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

PA1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PA(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

AA3-PA1

PB [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

A64-PB1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

UFF-A64-PB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

PB1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PB(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

AA3-PB1

90 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PC [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

A64-PC1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

UFF-A64-PC1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PC(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

PC1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PC(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

AA3-PC1

PD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

A64-PD1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

UFF-A64-PD1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

PD1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

AA3-PD1

PO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

A64-PO1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

UFF-A64-PO1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

AA3-PO1

PS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

A64-PS1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

UFF-A64-PS1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

AA3-PS1

PU [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PU(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

A64-PU1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PU(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

UFF-A64-PU1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PU(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

AA3-PU1

PT [Master Module(CCIEF)] PT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

PT1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

AA3-PT1

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1391

13

PL [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

A64-PL1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

UFF-A64-PL1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

PL1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PL(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

AA3-PL1

PN [Master Module(CCIEF)] PN(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

PN1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PN(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

AA3-PN1

PVS [Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PVS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

AA3-PVS1

ST [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

A64-ST0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

UFF-A64-ST0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ST(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

ST0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ST(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

AA3-ST0

PE [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

A64-PE1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

UFF-A64-PE1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PE(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

PE1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PE(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

AA3-PE1

PF [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

A64-PF1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

UFF-A64-PF1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PF(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

PF1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PF(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

AA3-PF1

NPA [Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] NPA(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 12, 2001 to 2032

NPA1

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

92 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

A64-ALM0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

UFF-A64-ALM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

ALM0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ALM(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

AA3-ALM0

POS [Master Module(CCIEF)] POS(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

POS1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-POS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-POS1

SPD [Master Module(CCIEF)] SPD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

SPD1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-SPD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-SPD1

ACT [Master Module(CCIEF)] ACT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

ACT1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ACT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-ACT1

DCT [Master Module(CCIEF)] DCT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DCT1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DCT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-DCT1

DWL [Master Module(CCIEF)] DWL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DWL1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DWL(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-DWL1

AUX [Master Module(CCIEF)] AUX(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AUX1

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-AUX(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-AUX1

MCD [Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-MCD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-MCD1

MD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

A64-MD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

UFF-A64-MD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] MD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

MD0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-MD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

AA3-MD0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1393

13

For indirect specification of a module number, axis number, or axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-GFDS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A64-GFDS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-GFDS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A64-GFDS0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-GFDS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-GFDS0

ECCDS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ECCDS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A64-ECCDS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ECCDS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A64-ECCDS0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ECCDS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-ECCDS0

OTS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

A64-OTS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

UFF-A64-OTS0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTS(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

OTS0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OTS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

AA3-OTS0

DI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

A64-DI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A64-DI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

DI0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

AA3-DI0

DO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

A64-DO0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

UFF-A64-DO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DO(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

DO0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

AA3-DO0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

94 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W R/W R/W

SD R/W R/W R/W R/W

W R/W R/W R/W R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W R/W R/W

ER R/W R/W R/W R/W

ZR R/W R/W R/W R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- -/-

G R/W R/W R/W R/W

Ww R/W R/W R/W R/W

Wr R/W R/W R/W R/W

LW R/W R/W R/W R/W

# R/W R/W -/- R/W

U3E0 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E1 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E2 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E3 R/W R/W R/W R/W

SATN R/- R/- -/- -/-

SACN R/- R/- -/- -/-

SASN R/- R/- -/- -/-

SAD R/- R/- -/- R/-

SASD R/- R/- -/- R/-

SAW R/- R/- -/- R/-

PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

PS R/W R/W -/- -/-

PU R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

PVS R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

NPA*1 R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1395

13

*1 Only reading is available for NPA1 and NPA2001 to NPA2032. *2 Only reading is available for OTS0 to OTS5.

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MCD R/W R/W -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

GFDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

ECCDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS*2 R/W R/W -/- -/-

DI R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

JnW R/W R/W R/W R/W

JnSW R/W R/W -/- R/W

U3E0G R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E1G R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E2G R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E3G R/W R/W R/W R/W

RD R/W R/W R/W R/W

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data

96 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following table shows monitoring-supported double-word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1399 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1400 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1453 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

*4 For the maximum number of devices when an extended SRAM cassette is installed, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

*5 If you specify LPr900 to LPr935, the following item is displayed in the device setting dialog. [Setting items (for calibration parameters)]: [Bias/gain value], [Analog input value] Enclose the device number in parentheses when selecting [Analog input value]. Example 1) Notation when [Bias/gain value] is selected: LPr900 Example 2) Notation when [Analog input value] is selected: LPr(900) When LPr900 or LPr901 (Calibration parameter) is specified, selecting [Bias/gain value] or [Analog input value] does not affect the monitoring target.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

LTN*4 Long timer current value Decimal 0 to 2529407

LCN*4 Long counter current value Decimal 0 to 4761215

LSN*4 Long retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 2529407

ZZ Index register (32 bits) Decimal 0 to 22

LZ Index register (32 bits) Decimal 0 to 11

ALD*2 Life diagnosis Decimal Page 1398 Setting virtual double- word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMI*2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1398 Setting virtual double- word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMO*2 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1398 Setting virtual double- word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMD*2 Set data (for test operation) Decimal Page 1398 Setting virtual double- word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AL*3 Faults history Decimal 0 to 899

LPr*3*5 Parameter (32-bit) Decimal 0 to 1500

OP*3 Operation parameter Decimal 0 to 5

PV*3 Current value monitor Decimal 1 to 143

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1397

13

Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (RD77MS). The following items are displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (RD77GF).

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE TSN and a Motion module (RD78G(H)). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example ALD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A64-ALD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A64-ALD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

ALD0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ALD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-ALD0

TMI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

A64-TMI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

UFF-A64-TMI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

TMI0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

AA3-TMI0

98 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For indirect specification of a module number, axis number, or axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

TMO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

A64-TMO0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

UFF-A64-TMO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMO(Device) Device (decimal): 0

TMO0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

AA3-TMO0

TMD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

A64-TMD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 64 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

UFF-A64-TMD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

TMD0

[Master/Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

AA3-TMD0

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data LTN -/- R/W -/- -/-

LCN -/- R/W -/- -/-

LSN -/- R/W -/- -/-

ZZ -/- R/W -/- -/-

LZ -/- R/W -/- -/-

ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

AL -/- R/- -/- -/-

LPr -/- R/W -/- -/-

OP -/- R/W -/- -/-

PV -/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1399

14

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1402 Servo amplifier request ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OM Page 1402 Operation mode selection ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMB Page 1403 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

OTI Page 1403 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDI Page 1404 Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDI Page 1404 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PA Page 1405 Basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PB Page 1407 Gain filter parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PC Page 1411 Extension setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PD Page 1414 I/O setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PO Page 1416 Option unit parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PS Page 1416 Special parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PU Page 1416 Multi encoder parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PT Page 1417 Positioning control parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PL Page 1420 Motor extension parameter, linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PN Page 1421 Network setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PVS Page 1422 Position extension parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ST Page 1423 Status display ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PE Page 1425 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PF Page 1427 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

NPA Page 1430 Network basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALM Page 1431 Alarm ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1440 Specifications of ALM260 to ALM275, ALM280 to ALM295, and ALM300 to ALM315 ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

POS Page 1440 Point table (position) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

SPD Page 1440 Point table (speed) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ACT Page 1441 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT Page 1441 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DWL Page 1441 Point table (dwell) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AUX Page 1442 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MCD Page 1442 Point table (M code) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MD Page 1443 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDS Page 1444 Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDS Page 1445 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS Page 1445 One-touch tuning data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

00 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

DI Page 1446 External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1446 External input signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1447 External input signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1447 External input signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1447 External input signal in MR-JE-B and MR-JE-BF ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1448 External input signal in MR-J4-GF(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1448 External input signal in MR-J4(W)-B-RJ ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DO Page 1448 External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1449 External output signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D]) Page 1449 External output signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1449 External output signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1449 External output signal in MR-JE-B and MR-JE-BF ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1450 External output signal in MR-J4-GF(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1450 External output signal in MR-J4(W)-B-RJ ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALD Page 1450 Life Diagnosis ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMI Page 1450 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

TMO Page 1451 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMD Page 1451 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Reference

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1401

14

Servo amplifier request ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited

-

SP4 External output signal prohibited

-

SP5 External input signal resumed

-

SP6 External output signal resumed

-

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode)

-

Cancel test operation mode

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 For manufacturer setting -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output

-

OM5 One step sending -

OM6 For manufacturer setting -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

02 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ- R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the one-touch tuning instruction, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

Pause

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command

-

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance

-

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

OTI0 One-touch tuning start command (Basic mode)

-

OTI1 One-touch tuning start command (High mode)

-

OTI2 One-touch tuning start command (Low mode)

-

OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command

-

OTI4 Return to initial value -

OTI5 Return to value before adjustment

-

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1403

14

Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the gear failure diagnosis instruction, note the following.

Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

GFDI0 Backlash estimation start command

-

GFDI1 Backlash estimation stop command

-

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ECCDI0 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis start command

-

ECCDI1 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis start command

-

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

04 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA44: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PA1001 to PA1044: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PA1, PA1001

Operation mode **STY

PA2, PA1002

Regenerative brake option **REG

PA3, PA1003

Absolute position detection system

*ABS

PA4, PA1004

Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005

For manufacturer setting -

PA6, PA1006

Electronic gear numerator *CMX

PA7, PA1007

Electronic gear denominator *CDV

PA8, PA1008

Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009

Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010

In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011

Forward rotation torque limit/ positive direction thrust limit

TLP

Forward rotation torque limit

PA12, PA1012

Reverse rotation torque limit/ negative direction thrust limit

TLN

Reverse rotation torque limit

PA13, PA1013

For manufacturer setting -

PA14, PA1014

Rotation direction selection/ travel direction selection

*POL

Moving direction selection

PA15, PA1015

Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16, PA1016

Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2

PA17, PA1017

Servo motor series setting **MSR

PA18, PA1018

Servo motor type setting **MTY

PA19, PA1019

Parameter block *BLK

PA20, PA1020

Tough drive setting *TDS

PA21, PA1021

Function selection A-3 *AOP3

PA22, PA1022

Position control composition selection

**PCS

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1405

14

PA23, PA1023

Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting

DRAT

PA24, PA1024

Function selection A-4 AOP4

PA25, PA1025

One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level

OTHOV

PA26, PA1026

Function selection A-5 *AOP5

PA27, PA1027

Hot-line forced stop function *HTL

PA28, PA1028

Function selection A-6 **AOP6

PA29 to PA33, PA1029 to PA1033

For manufacturer setting -

PA34, PA1034

Quick tuning permissible travel distance

QDIS

PA35 to PA44, PA1035 to PA1044

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

06 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Gain filter parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB92: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PB1001 to PB1092: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PB1, PB1001

Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II)

FILT

PB2, PB1002

Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control II)

VRFT

PB3, PB1003

Torque feedback loop gain TFBGN

PB4, PB1004

Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005

For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006

Load to motor inertia ratio/ load to motor mass ratio

GD2

PB7, PB1007

Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008

Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009

Speed control gain VG2

PB10, PB1010

Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011

Speed differential compensation

VDC

PB12, PB1012

Overshoot amount compensation

OVA

PB13, PB1013

Machine resonance suppression filter 1

NH1

PB14, PB1014

Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015

Machine resonance suppression filter 2

NH2

PB16, PB1016

Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017

Shaft resonance suppression filter

NHF

PB18, PB1018

Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019

Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency

VRF11

PB20, PB1020

Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency

VRF12

PB21, PB1021

Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping

VRF13

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1407

14

PB22, PB1022

Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping

VRF14

PB23, PB1023

Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024

Slight vibration suppression control

*MVS

PB25, PB1025

Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026

Gain switching function *CDP

PB27, PB1027

Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028

Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029

Load to motor inertia ratio/ load to motor mass ratio after gain switching

GD2B

PB30, PB1030

Position loop gain after gain switching

PG2B

PB31, PB1031

Speed loop gain after gain switching

VG2B

PB32, PB1032

Speed integral compensation after gain switching

VICB

PB33, PB1033

Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency after gain switching

VRF11B

PB34, PB1034

Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency after gain switching

VRF12B

PB35, PB1035

Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching

VRF13B

PB36, PB1036

Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching

VRF14B

PB37 to PB44, PB1037 to PB1044

For manufacturer setting -

PB45, PB1045

Command notch filter CNHF

PB46, PB1046

Machine resonance suppression filter 3

NH3

PB47, PB1047

Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3

PB48, PB1048

Machine resonance suppression filter 4

NH4

PB49, PB1049

Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB50, PB1050

Machine resonance suppression filter 5

NH5

PB51, PB1051

Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5

PB52, PB1052

Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency

VRF21

PB53, PB1053

Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency

VRF22

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

08 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PB54, PB1054

Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping

VRF23

PB55, PB1055

Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping

VRF24

PB56, PB1056

Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency after gain switching

VRF21B

PB57, PB1057

Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency after gain switching

VRF22B

PB58, PB1058

Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching

VRF23B

PB59, PB1059

Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching

VRF24B

PB60, PB1060

Model loop gain after gain switching

PG1B

PB61 to PB64, PB1061 to PB1064

For manufacturer setting -

PB65, PB1065

Gain changing 2 condition CDL2

PB66, PB1066

Gain changing 2 time constant

CDT2

PB67, PB1067

Gain changing 2 - Load in. mom. rat./Load mass rat.

GD2C

PB68, PB1068

Gain changing 2 position loop gain

PG2C

PB69, PB1069

Gain changing 2 speed loop gain

VG2C

PB70, PB1070

Gain changing 2 speed integral compensation

VICC

PB71, PB1071

Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. after gain changing 2

VRF11C

PB72, PB1072

Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. after gain changing 2

VRF12C

PB73, PB1073

Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. damping aft. gain chng2

VRF13C

PB74, PB1074

Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. damping aft. gain chng2

VRF14C

PB75, PB1075

Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. after gain changing 2

VRF21C

PB76, PB1076

Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. after gain changing 2

VRF22C

PB77, PB1077

Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. damping aft. gain chng2

VRF23C

PB78, PB1078

Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. damping aft. gain chng2

VRF24C

PB79, PB1079

Gain changing 2 model loop gain

PG1C

PB80, PB1080

For manufacturer setting -

PB81, PB1081

Command filter *CFIL

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1409

14

PB82, PB1082

Position command smoothing filter time constant

PFT

PB83 to PB92, PB1083 to PB1092

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

10 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PC1001 to PC1090: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PC1, PC1001

Error excessive alarm level ERZ

PC2, PC1002

Electromagnetic brake sequence output

MBR

PC3, PC1003

Encoder output pulse selection

*ENRS

PC4, PC1004

Function selection C-1 **COP1

PC5, PC1005

Function selection C-2 **COP2

PC6, PC1006

Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC7, PC1007

Zero speed ZSP

PC8, PC1008

Overspeed alarm detection level

OSL

PC9, PC1009

Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PC10, PC1010

Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

PC11, PC1011

Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PC12, PC1012

Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PC13, PC1013

Analog monitor - Feedback position output standard data - Low

MOSDL

PC14, PC1014

Analog monitor - Feedback position output standard data - High

MOSDH

PC15, PC1015

For manufacturer setting -

PC16, PC1016

Function selection C-3A *COP3A

PC17, PC1017

Function selection C-4 **COP4

PC18, PC1018

Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC19, PC1019

Function selection C-6 *COP6

PC20, PC1020

Function selection C-7 *COP7

PC21, PC1021

Alarm history clear *BPS

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1411

14

PC22 and PC23, PC1022 and PC1023

For manufacturer setting -

PC24, PC1024

Forced stop deceleration time constant

RSBR

PC25, PC1025

For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026

Function selection C-8 **COP8

PC27, PC1027

Function selection C-9 **COP9

PC28, PC1028

For manufacturer setting -

PC29, PC1029

Function selection C-B *COPB

PC30, PC1030

For manufacturer setting -

PC31, PC1031

Vertical axis freefall prevention compensation amount

RSUP1

PC32 to PC36, PC1032 to PC1036

For manufacturer setting -

PC37, PC1037

Function selection C-D **COPD

PC38, PC1038

Error excessive warning level ERW

PC39, PC1039

Collision detection level 1 TLW1

PC40, PC1040

Collision detection level 2 TLW2

PC41, PC1041

Function selection C-J *COPJ

PC42 to PC44, PC1042 to PC1044

For manufacturer setting -

PC45, PC1045

Drive unit function selection 1 *DUOP1

PC46, PC1046

Drive unit function selection 2 *DUOP2

PC47 to PC64, PC1047 to PC1064

For manufacturer setting -

PC65, PC1065

Zero speed 2 level ZSP2L

PC66, PC1066

Zero speed 2 filter time ZSP2F

PC67, PC1067

Following error output level FEWL

FEW

PC68, PC1068

Following error output level FEWH

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

12 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PC69, PC1069

Following error output filtering time

FEWF

PC70, PC1070

In-position 2 output range INP2R

PC71, PC1071

In-position 2 output filter time INP2F

PC72, PC1072

Speed reached 2 output range

SA2R

PC73, PC1073

Speed reached 2 output filter time

SA2F

PC74 to PC75, PC1074 to PC1075

For manufacturer setting -

PC76, PC1076

Function selection C-E *COPE

PC77, PC1077

Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PC78, PC1078

Function selection C-F *COPF

PC79, PC1079

Function selection C-G *COPG

PC80, PC1080

For manufacturer setting -

PC81, PC1081

Function selection C-H **COPH

PC82 to PC90, PC1082 to PC1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1413

14

I/O setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD72: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PD1001 to PD1072: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PD1, PD1001

Input signal automatic on selection 1

*DIA1

PD2, PD1002

Input signal automatic on selection 2

*DIA2

PD3, PD1003

Input device selection 1 *DI1

PD4, PD1004

Input device selection 2 *DI2

PD5, PD1005

Input device selection 3 *DI3

PD6, PD1006

For manufacturer setting -

PD7, PD1007

Output device selection 1 *DO1

PD8, PD1008

Output device selection 2 *DO2

PD9, PD1009

Output device selection 3 *DO3

PD10, PD1010

For manufacturer setting -

PD11, PD1011

Input filter setting *DIF

PD12, PD1012

Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD13, PD1013

Function selection D-2 *DOP2

PD14, PD1014

Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD15, PD1015

Driver communication setting *IDCS

PD16, PD1016

Driver communication setting - Master - Transmit data selection 1

*MD1

PD17, PD1017

Driver communication setting - Master - Transmit data selection 2

*MD2

PD18 and PD19, PD1018 and PD1019

For manufacturer setting -

PD20, PD1020

Driver communication setting - Slave - Master axis No. selection 1

*SLA1

14 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PD21 to PD29, PD1021 to PD1029

For manufacturer setting -

PD30, PD1030

Master-slave operation - Torque command coefficient on slave

TLC

PD31, PD1031

Master-slave operation - Speed limit coefficient on slave

VLC

PD32, PD1032

Master-slave operation - Speed limit adjusted value on slave

VLL

PD33 to PD36, PD1033 to PD1036

For manufacturer setting -

PD37, PD1037

Touch probe function selection

*TPOP

PD38, PD1038

Input device selection 4 *DI4

PD39, PD1039

Input device selection 5 *DI5

PD40, PD1040

For manufacturer setting -

PD41, PD1041

Function selection D-4 *DOP4

PD42 to PD50, PD1042 to PD1050

For manufacturer setting -

PD51, PD1051

Input device selection 3-2 *DI3W2

PD52 to PD59, PD1052 to PD1059

For manufacturer setting -

PD60, PD1060

DI pin polarity selection *DIP

PD61 to PD72, PD1061 to PD1072

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1415

14

Option unit parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PO1 to PO2: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PO1001 to PO1002: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Special parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PS1 to PS99: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PS1001 to PS1099: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Multi encoder parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PU1 to PU44: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PU1001 to PU1044: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PO1 to PO2, PO1001 to PO1002

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PS1 to PS99, PS1001 to PS1099

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PU1 to PU44, PU1001 to PU1044

For manufacturer setting -

16 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Positioning control parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PT1 to PT90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PT1001 to PT1090: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PT1, PT1001

Command mode selection **CTY

PT2, PT1002

Function selection T-1 *TOP1

PT3, PT1003

Feeding function selection *FTY

PT4, PT1004

For manufacturer setting -

PT5, PT1005

Home position return speed ZRF

PT6, PT1006

Creep speed CRF

PT7, PT1007

Home position shift distance ZST

PT8, PT1008

Home position return position data

ZPS

PT9, PT1009

Moving distance after proximity dog

DCT

PT10, PT1010

Stopper type home position return stopper time

ZTM

PT11, PT1011

Stopper type home position return torque limit value

ZTT

PT12, PT1012

Rough match output range CRP

PT13, PT14, PT1013, PT1014

For manufacturer setting -

PT15, PT1015

Software limit + LMPL

Software position limit+ LMP

PT16, PT1016

Software limit + LMPH

PT17, PT1017

Software limit - LMNL

Software position limit- LMN

PT18, PT1018

Software limit - LMNH

PT19, PT1019

Position range output address +

*LPPL

Position range output 1 address+

*LPP1

PT20, PT1020

Position range output address +

*LPPH

PT21, PT1021

Position range output address -

*LNPL

Position range output 1 address-

*LNP1

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1417

14

PT22, PT1022

Position range output address -

*LNPH

PT23 to PT28, PT1023 to PT1028

For manufacturer setting -

PT29, PT1029

Function selection T-3 *TOP3

PT30 to PT33, PT1030 to PT1033

For manufacturer setting -

PT34, PT1034

Point table default *PDEF

Positioning operation data default

*PDEF

PT35 to PT37, PT1035 to PT1037

For manufacturer setting -

PT38, PT1038

Function selection T-7 *TOP7

PT39 to PT40, PT1039 to PT1040

For manufacturer setting -

PT41, PT1041

Home position return inhibit selection

ORP

Function selection T-8 TOP8

PT42 to PT44, PT1042 to PT1044

For manufacturer setting -

PT45, PT1045

Home position return method HMM

PT46 to PT48, PT1046 to PT1048

For manufacturer setting -

PT49, PT1049

Acceleration time constant STA

PT50, PT1050

Deceleration time constant STB

PT51, PT1051

S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant

STC

PT52, PT1052

For manufacturer setting -

PT53, PT1053

Torque slope TQS

PT54, PT1054

For manufacturer setting -

PT55, PT1055

Function selection T-8 *TOP8

Function selection T-10 *TOP10

PT56, PT1056

Home position return acceleration time constant

HMA

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

18 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PT57, PT1057

Home position return deceleration time constant

HMB

PT58 to PT61, PT1058 to PT1061

For manufacturer setting -

PT62, PT1062

Remote register-based position/speed specifying method selection

*DSS

PT63, PT64, PT1063, PT1064

For manufacturer setting -

PT65, PT1065

Jog speed command PVC

Profile speed command

PT66, PT1066

Maximum profile speed MPVC

PT67, PT1067

Speed limit VLMT

PT68, PT1068

Function selection T-11 TOP11

PT69, PT1069

Home position shift distance (extension parameter)

ZSTH

PT70, PT1070

For manufacturer setting -

PT71, PT1071

Travel distance after proximity dog (extension parameter)

DCTH

PT72 to PT90, PT1072 to PT1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1419

14

Motor extension parameter, linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PL1 to PL72: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PL1001 to PL1072: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PL1, PL1001

Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 1

**LIT1

Function selection L-1

PL2, PL1002

Linear encoder resolution - Numerator

**LIM

PL3, PL1003

Linear encoder resolution - Denominator

**LID

PL4, PL1004

Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 2

*LIT2

Function selection L-2

PL5, PL1005

Position deviation error detection level

LB1

PL6, PL1006

Speed deviation error detection level

LB2

PL7, PL1007

Torque/thrust deviation error detection level

LB3

Torque deviation error detection level

PL8, PL1008

Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 3

*LIT3

Function selection L-3

PL9, PL1009

Magnetic pole detection voltage level

LPWM

PL10 to PL16, PL1010 to PL1016

For manufacturer setting -

PL17, PL1017

Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Function selection

LTSTS

PL18, PL1018

Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Identification signal amplitude

IDLV

PL19 to PL72, PL1019 to PL1072

For manufacturer setting -

20 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Network setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PN1 to PN32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PN1001 to PN1032: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PN1, PN1001

For manufacturer setting -

PN2, PN1002

Communication error detection time

CERT

PN3, PN1003

Communication mode setting for CC-Link IE communication

**NEMD

PN4, PN1004

CC-Link IE communication network number

**NENO

PN5, PN1005

Communication error detection frequency setting

CERI

PN6, PN1006

Function selection N-1 NOP1

PN7 to PN12, PN1007 to PN1012

For manufacturer setting -

PN13, PN1013

Network protocol setup NPS

PN14 to PN19, PN1014 to PN1019

For manufacturer setting -

PN20, PN1020

Automatic parameter backup update interval

**PABI

PN21, PN1021

For manufacturer setting -

PN22, PN1022

Function selection N-5 NOP5

PN23 to PN32, PN1023 to PN1032

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1421

14

Position extension parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PVS1 to PVS32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PVS1001 to PVS1032: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PVS1, PVS1001

Profile speed command extension setting

PVC2

PVS2, PVS1002

For manufacturer setting -

PVS3, PVS1003

Maximum profile speed extension setting

MPVCE

PVS4, PVS1004

For manufacturer setting -

PVS5, PVS1005

Profile acceleration PACC

PVS6, PVS1006

For manufacturer setting -

PVS7, PVS1007

Profile deceleration PDEC

PVS8, PVS1008

For manufacturer setting -

PVS9, PVS1009

Forced stop deceleration RSBDEC

PVS10, PVS1010

For manufacturer setting -

PVS11, PVS1011

Home position return speed extension setting

ZRFE

PVS12, PVS1012

For manufacturer setting -

PVS13, PVS1013

Creep speed extension setting

CRFE

PVS14, PVS1014

For manufacturer setting -

PVS15, PVS1015

Home position return acceleration

HMACC

PVS16, PVS1016

For manufacturer setting -

PVS17, PVS1017

Home position return deceleration

HMDEC

PVS18, PVS1018

For manufacturer setting -

PVS19, PVS1019

Speed reached 2 output range extension setting

SA2RE

PVS20, PVS1020

Zero speed 2 level extension setting

ZSP2LE

PVS21, PVS1021

Speed limit extension setting VLMTE

PVS22, PVS1022

For manufacturer setting -

PVS23, PVS1023

Speed unit conversion electronic gear numerator

*VCMX

22 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Status display ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

PVS24, PVS1024

Speed unit conversion electronic gear denominator

*VCDV

PVS25, PVS1025

Acceleration unit conversion electronic gear nmrtr.

*ACMX

PVS26, PVS1026

Acceleration unit conversion electronic gear dnmntr.

*ACDV

PVS27 to PVS28, PVS1027 to PVS1028

For manufacturer setting -

PVS29, PVS1029

Acceleration limit ACCLMT

PVS30, PVS1030

For manufacturer setting -

PVS31, PVS1031

Deceleration limit DECLMT

PVSS32, PVS1032

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 and ST6

For manufacturer setting -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

Torque/Instantaneous torque

ST11 Within one-revolution position

-

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

ST15 Load-side cumulative feedback pulses

-

ST16 Load-side encoder droop pulses

-

ST17 Load-side encoder information 1

-

ST18 Load-side encoder information 2

-

ST19 Analog monitor output voltage 1

-

ST20 Analog monitor output voltage 2

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1423

14

ST21 AB phase output pulse F/B integrated value

-

ST22 Temperature of servo motor thermistor

-

ST23 Servo motor-side cumulative feedback pulses (before gear)

-

Cumulative feedback pulses (Motor unit)

-

ST24 Electrical angle -

ST25 to ST29

For manufacturer setting -

ST30 Motor/load side position difference

-

ST31 Motor/load side speed difference

-

ST32 Encoder inside temperature -

ST33 Setting time -

ST34 Oscillation detection frequency

-

ST35 Number of tough drive operations

-

ST36 to ST39

For manufacturer setting -

ST40 Unit power consumption -

ST41 Unit total power consumption -

ST42 Position actual value -

Current position -

ST43 Command position -

ST44 Command remaining distance

-

Remaining command distance

-

ST45 Point table No. -

Command number -

ST46 to ST48

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

24 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PE1 to PE88: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PE1001 to PE1088: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PE1, PE1001

Fully closed loop function selection 1

**FCT1

PE2, PE1002

For manufacturer setting -

PE3, PE1003

Fully closed loop function selection 2

*FCT2

PE4, PE1004

Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 - Numerator

**FBN

PE5, PE1005

Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 - Denominator

**FBD

PE6, PE1006

Fully closed loop control - Speed deviation error detection level

BC1

PE7, PE1007

Fully closed loop control - Position deviation error detection level

BC2

PE8, PE1008

Fully closed loop dual feedback filter

DUF

PE9, PE1009

For manufacturer setting -

PE10, PE1010

Fully closed loop function selection 3

FCT3

PE11 to PE33, PE1011 to PE1033

For manufacturer setting -

PE34, PE1034

Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 - Numerator

**FBN2

PE35, PE1035

Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 - Denominator

**FBD2

PE36 to PE40, PE1036 to PE1040

For manufacturer setting -

PE41, PE1041

Function selection E-3 EOP3

PE42, PE43, PE1042, and PE1043

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1425

14

PE44, PE1044

Lost motion compensation positive-side compensation value selection

LMCP

PE45, PE1045

Lost motion compensation negative-side compensation value selection

LMCN

PE46, PE1046

Lost motion filter setting LMFLT

PE47, PE1047

Torque offset TOF

PE48, PE1048

Lost motion compensation function selection

*LMOP

PE49, PE1049

Lost motion compensation timing

LMCD

PE50, PE1050

Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band

LMCT

PE51, PE1051

Load-side encoder resolution setting

**EDV2

PE52, PE1052

For manufacturer setting -

PE53, PE1053

Maximum torque limit 1 TLMX1

PE54 to PE64, PE1054 to PE1064

For manufacturer setting -

PE65, PE1065

Collision detection friction torque

TRUB

PE66, PE1066

Collision detection viscosity friction torque

VFTQ

PE67, PE1067

Collision detection restoration torque

CLTQ

PE68, PE1068

Tandem control function selection

**TANC

PE69, PE1069

Tandem control function setting

*TCOP

PE70, PE1070

Interaxial torque deviation permissible level

TTRQ

PE71, PE1071

Interaxial speed deviation permissible level

TPOSI

PE72 to PE88, PE1072 to PE1088

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

26 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PF1 to PF99: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PF1001 to PF1099: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

PF1, PF1001

For manufacturer setting -

PF2, PF1002

Function selection F-2 *FOP2

PF3 to PF5, PF1003 to PF1005

For manufacturer setting -

PF6, PF1006

Function selection F-5 *FOP5

PF7 to PF11, PF1007 to PF1011

For manufacturer setting -

PF12, PF1012

Electronic dynamic brake operating time

DBT

PF13 to PF17, PF1013 to PF1017

For manufacturer setting -

PF18, PF1018

STO diagnosis error detection time

**STOD

PF19, PF1019

Friction trouble prediction compen. coefficient 1

TSL

PF20, PF1020

Friction trouble prediction compen. coefficient 2

TIC

PF21, PF1021

Drive recorder switching time setting

DRT

PF22, PF1022

For manufacturer setting -

PF23, PF1023

Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level

OSCL1

PF24, PF1024

Vibration tough drive function selection

*OSCL2

Function selection F-9 *FOP9

PF25, PF1025

SEMI-F47 function - Instantaneous power failure detection time

CVAT

SEMI-F47 Inst pwr.fail.det.t. (Inst pwr.fail.tuf.drv.)

PF26 to PF28, PF1026 to PF1028

For manufacturer setting -

PF29, PF1029

Function selection F-10 *FOP10

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1427

14

PF30, PF1030

For manufacturer setting -

PF31, PF1031

Machine diagnosis function - Friction judgment speed

FRIC

PF32, PF1032

Oscillation detection alarm time

*VIBT

PF33, PF1033

For manufacturer setting -

PF34, PF1034

Machine diagnosis function selection

*MFP

PF35 to PF39, PF1035 to PF1039

For manufacturer setting -

PF40, PF1040

Machine trouble prediction parameter

MFPP

PF41, PF1041

Trouble prediction motor total move distance

FPMT

Failure prediction - Servo motor total move distance

PF42, PF1042

Friction trouble prediction average characteristic

PAV

PF43, PF1043

Friction trouble prediction standard deviation

PSD

PF44, PF1044

For manufacturer setting -

PF45, PF1045

Vibration trouble prediction average characteristic

VAV

PF46, PF1046

Vibration trouble prediction standard deviation

VSC

VSD

PF47, PF1047

Servo motor total move distance offset

TMO

PF48 to PF65, PF1048 to PF1065

For manufacturer setting -

PF66, PF1066

Gear ratio setting for backlash estimation

BLG

PF67, PF1067

Backlash nominal value BLN

PF68, PF1068

Backlash threshold magnification

BLTT

PF69, PF1069

Static friction failure prediction avg. characteristic

SPAV2

PF70, PF1070

Static friction failure prediction standard deviation

SPSD2

PF71, PF1071

Belt failure prediction function selection

BFP

PF72, PF1072

Belt tension at installation SBT

PF73, PF1073

Belt tension at extension ABT

PF74, PF1074

Static friction at installation SSF

PF75, PF1075

Static friction at extension ASF

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

28 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PF76, PF1076

Belt tension error threshold BTS

PF77 to PF78, PF1077 to PF1078

For manufacturer setting -

PF79, PF1079

Event history setting EVS

PF80, PF1080

Drive recorder Operation condition selection

DRMC

PF81, PF1081

Drive recorder Sampling operation selection

DRMS

PF82, PF1082

Drive recorder Trigger operation selection

DRTM

PF83, PF1083

Drive recorder Trigger operation axis common sel.

**DRTAX

PF84, PF1084

Drive recorder Trigger channel selection

DRTC

PF85, PF1085

Drive recorder Trigger level setting 1

DRTL1

PF86, PF1086

Drive recorder Trigger level setting 2

DRTL2

PF87, PF1087

Drive recorder Analog channel setting 1

DRAC1

PF88, PF1088

Drive recorder Analog channel setting 2

DRAC2

PF89, PF1089

Drive recorder Analog channel setting 3

DRAC3

PF90, PF1090

Drive recorder Analog channel setting 4

DRAC4

PF91, PF1091

Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1

DRDC1

PF92, PF1092

Drive recorder Digital channel setting 2

DRDC2

PF93, PF1093

Drive recorder Digital channel setting 3

DRDC3

PF94, PF1094

Drive recorder Digital channel setting 4

DRDC4

PF95, PF1095

Drive recorder History clear **DRCLR

PF96 to PF99, PF1096 to PF1099

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1429

14

Network basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Set [Data Type] and [Format] as shown below for the objects for which this device is set. [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN32] [Format]: [Hexadecimal] : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

NPA1 IP address setting -

NPA2 IP address -

NPA3 Use prohibited -

NPA4 Subnet mask -

NPA5 Use prohibited -

NPA6 For manufacturer setting -

NPA7 Use prohibited -

NPA8 Host name -

NPA9 to NPA11

For manufacturer setting -

NPA12 Communication speed -

NPA2001 to NPA2032

Host name expansion area -

30 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ALM0 Current alarm number -

ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms

-

ALM2*1 Currently occurring alarm number and detail number

-

ALM11 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses

-

ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed

-

ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses

-

ALM14 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative command pulses

-

ALM15 Servo status(alarm) Command pulse frequency

-

ALM16 and ALM17

For manufacturer setting -

ALM18 Servo status(alarm) Regenerative load ratio

-

ALM19 Servo status(alarm) Effective load ratio

-

ALM20 Servo status(alarm) Peak load ratio

-

ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Instantaneous torque

-

Servo status(alarm) Torque/ Instantaneous torque

ALM22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position

-

ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter

-

ALM24 Servo status(alarm) Load inertia moment ratio

-

ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage

-

ALM26 Servo status(alarm) Load- side cumulative feedback pulses

-

ALM27 Servo status(alarm) Load- side droop pulses

-

ALM28 Servo status(alarm) Load- side encoder information 1

-

ALM29 Servo status(alarm) Load- side encoder information 2

-

ALM30 Servo status(alarm) Analog monitor output voltage 1

-

ALM31 Servo status(alarm) Analog monitor output voltage 2

-

ALM32 Servo status(alarm) AB phase output pulse F/B integrated value

-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1431

14

ALM33 Servo status(alarm) Temperature of servo motor thermistor

-

ALM34 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor-side cumulative feedback pulses (before gear)

-

Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses (Motor unit)

ALM35 Servo status(alarm) Electrical angle

-

ALM36 to ALM40

For manufacturer setting -

ALM41 Servo status(alarm) Motor/ load side position difference

-

ALM42 Servo status(alarm) Motor/ load side speed difference

-

ALM43 Servo status(alarm) Internal temperature of encoder

-

Servo status(alarm) Internal temperature of encoder

-

ALM44 Servo status(alarm) Setting time

-

Servo status(alarm) Setting time

-

ALM45 Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency

-

Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency

-

ALM46 Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drives

-

Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drives

-

ALM47 to ALM50

For manufacturer setting -

ALM51 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption

-

ALM52 Servo status(alarm) Unit total power consumption

-

ALM53 Servo status(alarm) Position actual value

-

Servo status(alarm) Current position

-

ALM54 Servo status(alarm) Command position

-

ALM55 Servo status(alarm) Command remaining distance

-

Servo status(alarm) Remaining command distance

-

ALM56 Servo status(alarm) Point table No.

-

Servo status(alarm) Command number

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

32 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM57 to ALM59

For manufacturer setting -

ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm

-

ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past

-

ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM204 Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past

-

ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past

-

ALM206 Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in past

-

ALM207 Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in past

-

ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past

-

ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past

-

ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in past

-

ALM211 Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in past

-

ALM212 Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in past

-

ALM213 Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in past

-

ALM214 Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in past

-

ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past

-

ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1433

14

ALM223 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM224 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM225 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM230 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

34 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM231 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM232 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM233 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM234 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM235 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th alarm in past

-

Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM240 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM241 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM242 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM243 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM244 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM245 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1435

14

ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 13th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM254 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM255 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in past

-

Alarm detail number in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM260 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM261 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM262 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM263 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM264 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM265 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

36 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM266 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM267 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM268 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM269 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM270 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM271 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM272 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM273 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM274 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM275 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM280 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM281 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM282 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM283 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM284 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM285 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM286 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM287 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM288 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM289 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1437

14

ALM290 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM291 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM292 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM293 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM294 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM295 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM300 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM301 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM302 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM303 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM304 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM305 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM306 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM307 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM308 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM309 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM310 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM311 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM312 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM313 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

38 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 Set [Data Type] and [Format] as shown below for the objects for which this device is set. [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN32] [Format]: [Hexadecimal]

ALM314 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM315 Alarm occurrence time (minute, second) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1439

14

Specifications of ALM260 to ALM275, ALM280 to ALM295, and ALM300 to ALM315 ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

The date and time of alarm occurrence are stored in BCD code in the upper eight bits and lower eight bits of each device. The time zone setting of the controller is applied to the date and time to be acquired. Example) When the date and time of the most recent alarm occurrence is 15:30:20 May 15, 2020

In either of the following cases, 0 is stored. When the date and time of alarm occurrence are those of 1999 or earlier When the controller is MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ)

Point table (position) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. POS1 to POS255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier POS1001 to POS1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (speed) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. SPD1 to SPD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier SPD1001 to SPD1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

POS1 to POS255, POS1001 to POS1255

Point table/position data No. 1 to No. 255

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

SPD1 to SPD255, SPD1001 to SPD1255

Point table/speed data No. 1 to No. 255

-

ALM260 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8 ALM280

Date and time of alarm occurrence: 2020 / 5 / 15 15:30:20 (Binary Coded Decimal)

ALM300 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8

40 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ- R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. ACT1 to ACT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier ACT1001 to ACT1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ- R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DCT1 to DCT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier DCT1001 to DCT1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (dwell) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DWL1 to DWL255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier DWL1001 to DWL1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ACT1 to ACT255, ACT1001 to ACT1255

Point table/acceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

DCT1 to DCT255, DCT1001 to DCT1255

Point table/deceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255

Point table/dwell No. 1 to No. 255

-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1441

14

Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. AUX1 to AUX255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier AUX1001 to AUX1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (M code) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. MCD1 to MCD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier MCD1001 to MCD1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255

Point table/auxiliary function No. 1 to No. 255

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

MCD1 to MCD255, MCD1001 to MCD1255

Point table/M code No. 1 to No. 255

-

42 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Machine diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

MD0 Machine diagnosis data, station number

-

MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment(test mode)

-

MD2*1 Machine diagnosis data status

-

MD3*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction

-

MD4*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction

-

MD5*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative direction

-

MD6*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in negative direction

-

MD7*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is stopped)

-

MD8*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is stopped)

-

MD9*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is operating)

-

MD10*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is operating)

-

MD11 Machine diagnosis data, rated speed at forward or reverse rotation torque

-

MD12 Machine diagnosis data friction based fault prediction prepare status

-

Machine diagnosis data: friction failure prediction - threshold creation progress

*3

MD13 Machine diagnosis data vibration based fault prediction prepare status

-

Machine diagnosis data: vibration failure prediction - threshold creation progress

*3

MD14 Machine diagnosis data motor total move distance

- *3

MD15 Machine diagnosis data, friction failure prediction, upper threshold at forward rotation torque, lower threshold at reverse rotation torque

- *3

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1443

14

*1 While the servo amplifier is estimating the corresponding machine status in the machine diagnosis, do not write data to the parameters of the servo amplifier from another GOT. Doing so may cause the servo amplifier to malfunction.

*2 When MD2 indicates that the servo amplifier does not complete the machine diagnosis (is estimating or warning of the machine status), do not monitor MD3 to MD6 (friction states) and MD7 to MD10 (vibration/oscillation states). To start monitoring those devices upon the estimation completion, set [Trigger] in the applicable object settings.

*3 The commands assigned to MD12 to MD21 are not supported by MR-JET-G. When the commands are used, the read values will be indefinite.

Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

MD16 Machine diagnosis data, friction failure prediction, lower threshold at forward rotation torque, upper threshold at reverse rotation torque

- *3

MD17 Machine diagnosis data vibration level threshold

-

Machine diagnosis data: vibration failure prediction - threshold acquisition

*3

MD18 Machine diagnosis data trouble prediction status

- *3

MD19 Machine diagnosis data: Belt tension estimation value

- *3

MD20 Machine diagnosis data: static friction used in failure prediction

- *3

MD21 Machine diagnosis data: Belt tension threshold estimation

- *3

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

GFDS0 Backlash estimation (threshold)

-

GFDS1 Backlash estimation (estimation value)

-

GFDS2 Backlash estimation (estimation progress)

-

GFDS3 Backlash estimation (status) -

GFDS4 Backlash error number -

GFDS5 Backlash estimation move distance

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

44 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

One-touch tuning data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

*1 Writing is not available when a negative value is set for the device value.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ECCDS0 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis possibility

-

ECCDS1 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis possibility

-

ECCDS2 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis status

-

ECCDS3 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis status

-

ECCDS4 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis result

-

ECCDS5 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis result

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation

-

OTS1 Error code list -

OTS2 Setting time -

OTS3 Overshoot amount -

OTS4 One-touch tuning command mode

-

OTS5 Load inertia moment ratio -

OTS3000 *1

Read/write permissible move distance

-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1445

14

External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External input signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI1 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI2 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The input device statuses switched on through communications (corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI1 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI2 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The input device statuses switched on through communications (corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

46 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

External input signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External input signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External input signal in MR-JE-B and MR-JE-BF ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI1 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI2 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The input device statuses switched on through communications (corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

Virtual device name Name Symbol DI0 Input device statuses -

DI1 Input device statuses -

DI2 Input device statuses -

DI3 External input pin statuses -

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - System information

DI1 Input device statuses - System information

DI2 Input device statuses - System information

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-JE-_B SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1447

14

External input signal in MR-J4-GF(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ- R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External input signal in MR-J4(W)-B-RJ ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - System information

DI1 Input device statuses - System information

DI2 Input device statuses - System information

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J4-_GF_(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual (Motion Mode)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - System information

DI1 Input device statuses - System information

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J4-_B_(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8000 to 801F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO1 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8020 to 803F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO2 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8040 to 805F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

48 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

External output signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External output signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External output signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External output signal in MR-JE-B and MR-JE-BF ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8000 to 801F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO1 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8020 to 803F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO2 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8040 to 805F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8000 to 801F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO1 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8020 to 803F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO2 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8040 to 805F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder - Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

Virtual device name Name Symbol DO0 Output device statuses -

DO1 Output device statuses -

DO2 Output device statuses -

DO4 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - System information

DO1 Output device statuses - System information

DO2 Output device statuses - System information

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-JE-_B SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1449

14

External output signal in MR-J4-GF(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

External output signal in MR-J4(W)-B-RJ ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Life Diagnosis ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - System information

DO1 Output device statuses - System information

DO2 Output device statuses - System information

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J4-_GF_(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual (Motion Mode)

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - System information

DO1 Output device statuses - System information

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J4-_B_(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

ALD0 Cumulative power-on time -

ALD1 Number of inrush current switching times

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1

-

TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2

-

TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3

-

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

50 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR- J4(W)- B(-RJ)

MR-J4- GF(-RJ)

MR-JE- B

MR-JE- BF

MR-J5- G(-RJ), MR- J5W-G

MR- JET-G

MR- J5D-G

MR-J5- B(-RJ)

TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

Motor speed

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/ deceleration time constant (test mode)

-

Write acceleration/ deceleration time constant

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode)

-

Move distance

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1451

14

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) When handling real numbers for virtual servo amplifier devices For the servo amplifier, if a real number is written to a virtual device, only the integer portion of the number is stored into the device. Example) When 12.34 is entered with the numerical input on the GOT, the value is written as 1234 to the device of the servo amplifier. If the data type of the virtual servo amplifier device is set to [Real], the value after the writing may differ from the one before the writing. Additionally, the monitoring process may take a longer time. Therefore, select one of the following items as the data type of the virtual device. Signed 16-bit binary data Unsigned 16-bit binary data Signed 32-bit binary data Unsigned 32-bit binary data When you use the value of the virtual servo amplifier device, remember that only the integer portion of the value is stored in the device. To display a real number on the numerical display or numerical input object, set [Format] to [Real] and select [Adjust Decimal Point Range] in the object setting.

Data type and format settings for using virtual servo amplifier devices When using virtual servo amplifier devices in the object or other settings, the data type and format must be set according to the notation of the value that the virtual device handles. For notation of the virtual device values, refer to the following. Instruction manual for the servo amplifier used MR Configurator2 HELP

When real numbers are stored in virtual devices, set the data type as shown below instead of setting [Real]. The following shows a setting example for using virtual servo amplifier devices for an object. Example) When using a numerical display

Specifying consecutive virtual servo amplifier devices The GOT does not support writing/reading data to/from consecutive virtual servo amplifier devices.

Notation of the virtual device values Setting Decimal number (positive values only) [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 65536 or more)

[Format]: [Unsigned Decimal]

Decimal number (positive and negative values) [Data Type]: [Signed BIN16] ([Signed BIN32] for -32769 or less, and 32768 or more) [Format]: [Signed Decimal]

Hexadecimal number [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 0x10000 or more) [Format]: [Hexadecimal]

Decimal point notation (positive values only) [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] as necessary) [Format]: [Real] [Digits (Integral)]: Set the number of digits in the integral portion. [Digits (Fractional)]: Set the number of digits in the fractional portion. [Adjust Decimal Point Range]: Selected

Decimal point notation (positive and negative values)

[Data Type]: [Signed BIN16] ([Signed BIN32] as necessary) [Format]: [Real] [Digits (Integral)]: Set the number of digits in the integral portion. [Digits (Fractional)]: Set the number of digits in the fractional portion. [Adjust Decimal Point Range]: Selected

When the notation varies by digit [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 0x10000 or more) [Format]: [Hexadecimal] On the [Operation/Script] tab, select [Data Operation] for [Operation Type], and set [Bit Mask] or [Bit Shift].

52 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data.

The lists of virtual devices shown in this section explain the FR-A800 Plus series and FR-E800 series models using the following abbreviations.

I/O terminal monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Reference

IOST Page 1453 I/O terminal monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

CMD Page 1455 Operation command ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1456 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Page 1456 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices (MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AL Page 1456 Faults history ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

LPr Page 1458 Parameter (32-bit) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OP Page 1459 Operation parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PV Page 1460 Current value monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Series Abbreviation Model FR-A800 Plus series CRN FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN

R2R FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R

AWH FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-E-AWH

LC FR-A80-LC FR-A80-E-LC

FR-E800 series E800 FR-E80

E FR-E80-E

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

E800 E FR-E70-NE

IOST1 Input terminal STF/DI0 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST2 Input terminal STR/DI1 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST3 Input terminal RL *1 *1 *1

IOST4 Input terminal RM *1 *1 *1

IOST5 Input terminal RH *1 *1 *1

IOST6 Input terminal RT *1

IOST7 Input terminal AU *1

IOST8 Input terminal JOG *1

IOST9 Input terminal CS *1

IOST10 Input terminal MRS *1 *1 *1

IOST11 Input terminal STOP *1

IOST12 Input terminal RES *1 *1 *1

IOST32 Output terminal RUN *1 *1 *1

IOST33 Output terminal SU *1

IOST34 Output terminal IPF *1

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1453

14

*1 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 or Pr.313 to Pr.322 (output terminal function selection). For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*2 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

IOST35 Output terminal OL *1

IOST36 Output terminal FU *1 *1 *1

IOST37 Output terminal ABC1 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST38 Output terminal ABC2 *1

IOST39 Output terminal SO

IOST48 NET Y1 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST49 NET Y2 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST50 NET Y3 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST51 NET Y4 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST64 Option input terminal X0

IOST65 Option input terminal X1

IOST66 Option input terminal X2

IOST67 Option input terminal X3

IOST68 Option input terminal X4

IOST69 Option input terminal X5

IOST70 Option input terminal X6

IOST71 Option input terminal X7

IOST72 Option input terminal X8

IOST73 Option input terminal X9

IOST74 Option input terminal X10

IOST75 Option input terminal X11

IOST76 Option input terminal X12

IOST77 Option input terminal X13

IOST78 Option input terminal X14

IOST79 Option input terminal X15

IOST80 Option input terminal DY

IOST96 Option output terminal Y0/DO0 *1 *1 *1

IOST97 Option output terminal Y1/DO1 *1 *1 *1

IOST98 Option output terminal Y2/DO2 *1 *1 *1

IOST99 Option output terminal Y3/DO3 *1 *1 *1

IOST100 Option output terminal Y4/DO4 *1 *1 *1

IOST101 Option output terminal Y5/DO5 *1 *1 *1

IOST102 Option output terminal Y6/DO6 *1 *1 *1

IOST103 Option output terminal RA1 *1 *1 *1

IOST104 Option output terminal RA2 *1 *1 *1

IOST105 Option output terminal RA3 *1 *1 *1

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

E800 E FR-E70-NE

54 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation command ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

*4 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

When using the operation command, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

CMD0 Stop command

CMD1 Forward rotation command

CMD2 Reverse rotation command

CMD3*1 RL terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD4*1 RM terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD5*1 RH terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD6*1 RT terminal *2

CMD7*1 AU terminal *2

CMD8*1 JOG terminal *2*3

CMD9*1 CS terminal *2*3

CMD10*1 MRS terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD11*1 STOP terminal *2*3

CMD12*1 RES terminal *2*3 *2*3 *2

CMD16 Alarm history clear

CMD24 Inverter reset

CMD32 Parameter clear

CMD33 Parameter clear (communication parameters are not cleared)

CMD34 All parameter clear

CMD35 All parameter clear (communication parameters are not cleared)

CMD48 NET X1 input *2*3*4

CMD49 NET X2 input *2*3*4

CMD50 NET X3 input *2*3*4

CMD51 NET X4 input *2*3*4

CMD52 NET X5 input *2*3*4

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Operation when a CMD device is turned on Page 1456 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/ RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1456 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices (MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/ RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1455

14

Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/ RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

The CMD3 to CMD12 devices cannot be controlled simultaneously. When you turn on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Use OP4 to control multiple devices from CMD3 to CMD12 simultaneously. The following shows the relationship between CMD3 to CMD12 and OP4.

Example) Turning on the CMD3 (RL terminal) and CMD12 (RES terminal) devices For a hexadecimal value, write 0201. For a decimal value, write 513.

Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices (MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/ RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

The CMD48 to CMD52 devices cannot be controlled simultaneously. When you turn on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Use OP5 to control multiple devices from CMD48 to CMD52 simultaneously. The following shows the relationship between CMD48 to CMD52 and OP5.

Example) Turing on the CMD48 (NET X1 input) and CMD52 (NET X5 input) devices For a hexadecimal value, write 0011. For a decimal value, write 17.

Faults history ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

AL0 Current fault

AL1 Current warning 1

AL2 Current warning 2

AL100 Faults history 1 (symbol)

AL101 Faults history 1 (output frequency)

AL102 Faults history 1 (output current)

AL103 Faults history 1 (output voltage)

AL104 Faults history 1 (energization time)

AL105 Faults history 1 (year)

AL106 Faults history 1 (month)

AL107 Faults history 1 (day)

AL108 Faults history 1 (hour)

OP4 b15 b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CMD3 CMD4 CMD5 CMD6 CMD7 CMD8 CMD9 CMD10 CMD11 CMD12

b31 b23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

OP5 b15 b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CMD48 CMD49 CMD50 CMD51 CMD52

b31 b23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

56 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

AL109 Faults history 1 (minute)

AL200 Faults history 2 (symbol)

AL201 Faults history 2 (output frequency)

AL202 Faults history 2 (output current)

AL203 Faults history 2 (output voltage)

AL204 Faults history 2 (energization time)

AL205 Faults history 2 (year)

AL206 Faults history 2 (month)

AL207 Faults history 2 (day)

AL208 Faults history 2 (hour)

AL209 Faults history 2 (minute)

AL300 Faults history 3 (symbol)

AL301 Faults history 3 (output frequency)

AL302 Faults history 3 (output current)

AL303 Faults history 3 (output voltage)

AL304 Faults history 3 (energization time)

AL305 Faults history 3 (year)

AL306 Faults history 3 (month)

AL307 Faults history 3 (day)

AL308 Faults history 3 (hour)

AL309 Faults history 3 (minute)

AL400 Faults history 4 (symbol)

AL401 Faults history 4 (output frequency)

AL402 Faults history 4 (output current)

AL403 Faults history 4 (output voltage)

AL404 Faults history 4 (energization time)

AL405 Faults history 4 (year)

AL406 Faults history 4 (month)

AL407 Faults history 4 (day)

AL408 Faults history 4 (hour)

AL409 Faults history 4 (minute)

AL500 Faults history 5 (symbol)

AL501 Faults history 5 (output frequency)

AL502 Faults history 5 (output current)

AL503 Faults history 5 (output voltage)

AL504 Faults history 5 (energization time)

AL505 Faults history 5 (year)

AL506 Faults history 5 (month)

AL507 Faults history 5 (day)

AL508 Faults history 5 (hour)

AL509 Faults history 5 (minute)

AL600 Faults history 6 (symbol)

AL601 Faults history 6 (output frequency)

AL602 Faults history 6 (output current)

AL603 Faults history 6 (output voltage)

AL604 Faults history 6 (energization time)

AL605 Faults history 6 (year)

AL606 Faults history 6 (month)

AL607 Faults history 6 (day)

AL608 Faults history 6 (hour)

AL609 Faults history 6 (minute)

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1457

14

Parameter (32-bit) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

The virtual device numbers (LPr) used in the GOT correspond to the inverter parameter numbers. For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used When using a parameter (32-bit), note the following.

AL700 Faults history 7 (symbol)

AL701 Faults history 7 (output frequency)

AL702 Faults history 7 (output current)

AL703 Faults history 7 (output voltage)

AL704 Faults history 7 (energization time)

AL705 Faults history 7 (year)

AL706 Faults history 7 (month)

AL707 Faults history 7 (day)

AL708 Faults history 7 (hour)

AL709 Faults history 7 (minute)

AL800 Faults history 8 (symbol)

AL801 Faults history 8 (output frequency)

AL802 Faults history 8 (output current)

AL803 Faults history 8 (output voltage)

AL804 Faults history 8 (energization time)

AL805 Faults history 8 (year)

AL806 Faults history 8 (month)

AL807 Faults history 8 (day)

AL808 Faults history 8 (hour)

AL809 Faults history 8 (minute)

Precautions Description When setting [8888] or [9999] to a 32-bit parameter (Lpr) of an inverter

[8888] and [9999] are used for particular purposes. From the GOT, if you set these numbers to a 32-bit parameter that can accept a value with a fractional part, you are recommended to set the data type to [Real].

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

58 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

*4 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

OP0 Operation frequency(RAM)

OP1 Operation frequency (EEPROM)

OP2 Operation mode

OP3 Operating status

OP4*1*2*3 - Input terminal command

b0 CMD3: RL terminal

b1 CMD4: RM terminal

b2 CMD5: RH terminal

b3 CMD6: RT terminal

b4 CMD7: AU terminal

b5 CMD8: JOG terminal

b6 CMD9: CS terminal

b7 CMD10: MRS terminal

b8 CMD11: STOP terminal

b9 CMD12: RES terminal

OP5*2 - Input terminal command (extend) *4

b0 CMD48: NET X1 input

b1 CMD49: NET X2 input

b2 CMD50: NET X3 input

b3 CMD51: NET X4 input

b4 CMD52: NET X5 input

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1459

14

Current value monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

: Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE PV1 Output frequency/speed

Output frequency

PV2 Output current

PV3 Output voltage

PV5 Frequency setting value/speed setting

Frequency setting value

PV6 Speed/machine speed

Operation speed

PV7 Motor torque

PV8 Converter output voltage

PV9 Regenerative brake duty

PV10 Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor

PV11 Output current peak value

PV12 Converter output voltage peak value

PV13 Input power

PV14 Output power

PV17 Load meter

PV18 Motor excitation current

PV19 Position pulse

Analog output signal for dancer tension control

PV20 Cumulative energization time

PV22 Orientation status

Winding diameter

PV23 Actual operation time

PV24 Motor load factor

PV25 Cumulative power

PV26 Position command (lower digits)

Line speed command

PV27 Position command (upper digits)

Actual line speed

PV28 Current position (lower digits)

Dancer compensation speed

PV29 Current position (upper digits)

Winding length (upper + lower)

PV30 Droop pulse (lower digits)

Analog output signal 2 for dancer tension control

PV31 Droop pulse (upper digits)

Line speed pulse monitor

PV32 Torque command

PV33 Torque current command

PV34 Motor output

PV35 Feedback pulse

60 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PV36 Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/negative polarity for regenerative braking torque)

PV38 Trace status

PV39 SSCNET III communication status

PV40 PLC function user monitor 1

PV41 PLC function user monitor 2

PV42 PLC function user monitor 3

PV43 Station number (RS-485 terminals)

PV44 Station number (PU)

PV45 Station number (CC-Link)

PV46 Motor temperature

PV50 Energy saving effect

PV51 Cumulative energy saving

PV52 PID set point

PV53 PID measured value

PV54 PID deviation

PV61 Motor thermal load factor

PV62 Inverter thermal load factor

PV63 Cumulative power 2

Winding length (upper)

PV64 PTC thermistor resistance

PV67 PID measured value 2

PV68 Emergency drive status

PV69 PID input pressure value

PV71 Cumulative pulse

PV72 Cumulative pulse overflow times

PV73 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option)

PV74 Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)

PV75 Multi-revolution counter

PV77 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits)

PV78 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits)

PV79 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits)

PV80 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits)

PV81 BACnet reception status

Tension command after taper compensation

PV82 BACnet token pass counter

Winding diameter compensation torque command

PV83 BACnet valid APDU counter

Inertia compensation

PV84 BACnet communication error counter

Mechanical loss compensation

PV85 BACnet terminal FM/CA output level

Terminal 1 input voltage

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1461

14

PV86 BACnet terminal AM output level

Terminal 1 input after calibration (%)

PV87 Remote output value 1

PV88 Remote output value 2

PV89 Remote output value 3

PV90 Remote output value 4

PV91 PID manipulated variable

PV92 Second PID set point

PID torque control actual tension

PV93 Second PID measured value

PID torque control manipulated tension

PV94 Second PID deviation

PV95 Second PID measured value 2

PV96 Second PID manipulated variable

PV97 Dancer main set speed (For FR-E800 and FR-E800-E, dancer main speed setting)

Winding diameter compensation speed

PV98 Control circuit temperature

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE

62 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSEC iQ-F]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1467 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) : Available : Not available

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1463 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1467 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Specifications of word devices Page 1468 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1473 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1474 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1475 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1477 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1477 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Page 1479 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Octal 0000 to 1777

Y Output relay Octal 0000 to 1777

B Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

M Internal relay Decimal 0 to 32767

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767

S Step relay Decimal 0 to 4095

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 32767

TC Timer coil Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

TT Timer contact Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

CC Counter coil Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

CT Counter contact Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

SC Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

SS Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

SB Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 9999

RX*3 Remote input Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

RY*3 Remote output Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1463

14

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1477 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

*3 The target device of the host station can be monitored only. Monitoring the target device of any other station causes a system error.

LCC Long counter coil Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

LCT Long counter contact Decimal 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

BL SFC block Decimal 0 to 31

BLS Step relay (block) Decimal 0 to 511

SP*2 Servo amplifier request Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

OM*2 Operation mode selection Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

TMB*2 Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

OTI*2 One-touch tuning instruction Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

GFDI*2 Gear failure diagnosis instruction Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ECCDI*2 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction

Decimal Page 1465 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

64 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Connection through a Simple Motion module

[Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the Simple Motion module.

[Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion module (FX5-nSSC-G). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example SP [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-SP(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

U10-A32-SP0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-SP(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

AA3-SP0

OM [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

U10-A32-OM0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OM(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

AA3-OM0

TMB [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

U10-A32-TMB1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMB(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

AA3-TMB1

OTI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

U10-A32-OTI0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OTI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-OTI0

GFDI [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-GFDI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-GFDI0

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1465

14

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDI [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ECCDI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-ECCDI0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

66 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LCC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

LCT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

BL R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

BLS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

GFDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

ECCDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1467

14

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1473 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN Timer current value Decimal 0 to 1023

CN Counter current value Decimal 0 to 1023

SN Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 1023

D Data register Decimal 0 to 7999

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 11999

W Link register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

SW Link special register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

R*4 File register Decimal 0 to 32767

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 23 (Not usable as bit data)

G*5 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal U(Unit No.)-G(Device) Notation example: U10-G100 Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF Device (decimal): 0 to 262143

For the unit No., set the module number of the intelligent function module.

Ww*3 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

Wr*3 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

PA*2 Basic parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PB*2 Gain filter parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PC*2 Extension setting parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PD*2 I/O setting parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PO*2 Option unit parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PS*2 Special parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PU*2 Multi encoder parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PT*2 Positioning control parameters Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PL*2*6 Motor extension parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

PN*2 Network setting parameters Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PVS*2*7 Position extension parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ST*2 Status display Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PE*2 Extension setting No.2 parameter

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

PF*2 Extension setting No.3 parameter

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

68 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1477 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

*3 The target device of the host station can be monitored only. Monitoring the target device of any other station causes a system error.

*4 Available for the file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. *5 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.

Set the buffer memory within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the intelligent function module. *6 The device name depends on the servo amplifier.

MR-J5-G(-RJ) or MR-J5W-G: Motor extension parameter Other than MR-J5-G(-RJ) or MR-J5W-G: Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

*7 PVS is a virtual device corresponding to the servo parameter (PV) of MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W -G, and MR-JET-G. Use the virtual device (PVS) to read/write data from/to the servo parameter (PV).

NPA*2 Network basic parameter Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ALM*2 Alarm (current alarm J4A extend)

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ALM*2 Alarm (alarm history J4A extend)

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

POS*2 Point table (position) Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

SPD*2 Point table (speed) Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ACT*2 Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

DCT*2 Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

DWL*2 Point table (dwell) Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

AUX*2 Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

MCD*2 Point table (M code) Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

MD*2 Machine diagnosis data Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

GFDS*2 Gear failure diagnosis data Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

ECCDS *2

Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data

Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

OTS*2 One-touch tuning data Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

DI*2 External input signal Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

DO*2 External output signal Decimal Page 1470 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1469

14

Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Connection through a Simple Motion module

[Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the Simple Motion module.

[Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion module (FX5-nSSC-G). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example PA [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PA(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

U10-A32-PA1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PA(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

AA3-PA1

PB [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

U10-A32-PB1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PB(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

AA3-PB1

PC [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

U10-A32-PC1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PC(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

AA3-PC1

PD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

U10-A32-PD1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

AA3-PD1

PO [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

AA3-PO1

70 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PS [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

AA3-PS1

PU [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PU(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

AA3-PU1

PT [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

AA3-PT1

PL [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

U10-A32-PL1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PL(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

AA3-PL1

PN [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PN(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

AA3-PN1

PVS [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PVS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

AA3-PVS1

ST [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

U10-A32-ST0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ST(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

AA3-ST0

PE [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

U10-A32-PE1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PE(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

AA3-PE1

PF [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

U10-A32-PF1

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-PF(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

AA3-PF1

NPA [Motion Module(CCIET)] NPA(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 12, 2001 to 2032

NPA1

ALM [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

U10-A32-ALM0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ALM(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

AA3-ALM0

POS [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-POS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-POS1

SPD [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-SPD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-SPD1

ACT [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ACT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-ACT1

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1471

14

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DCT(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-DCT1

DWL [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DWL(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-DWL1

AUX [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-AUX(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-AUX1

MCD [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-MCD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AA3-MCD1

MD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

U10-A32-MD0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-MD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

AA3-MD0

GFDS [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-GFDS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-GFDS0

ECCDS [Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ECCDS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

AA3-ECCDS0

OTS [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

U10-A32-OTS0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-OTS(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

AA3-OTS0

DI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

U10-A32-DI0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

AA3-DI0

DO [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

U10-A32-DO0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-DO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

AA3-DO0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

72 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W R/W R/W

SD R/W R/W R/W R/W

W R/W R/W R/W R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W R/W R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- -/-

G R/W R/W R/W R/W

Ww R/W R/W R/W R/W

Wr R/W R/W R/W R/W

PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

PS R/W R/W -/- -/-

PU R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

PVS R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

NPA R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MCD R/W R/W -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

GFDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

ECCDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1473

14

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following table shows monitoring-supported double-word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1477 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1477 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

LCN Long counter current value Decimal 0 to 1023

LZ Index register (32 bits) Decimal 0 to 11

ALD*2 Life diagnosis Decimal Page 1475 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

TMI*2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1475 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

TMO*2 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1475 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

TMD*2 Set data (for test operation) Decimal Page 1475 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F])

74 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC iQ-F]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Connection through a Simple Motion module

[Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the Simple Motion module.

[Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Motion Module(CCIET)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion module (FX5-nSSC-G). After the selection, set a device that enables axis designation to display the following item. [Axis Designation]: Set the axis to be monitored.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example ALD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

U10-A32-ALD0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-ALD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

AA3-ALD0

TMI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

U10-A32-TMI0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMI(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

AA3-TMI0

TMO [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

U10-A32-TMO0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMO(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

AA3-TMO0

TMD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 01 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

U10-A32-TMD0

[Motion Module(CCIET)] AA(Axis designation)-TMD(Device) Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

AA3-TMD0

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1475

14

Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

76 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data LCN -/- R/W -/- -/-

LZ -/- R/W -/- -/-

ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1402 Servo amplifier request ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OM Page 1402 Operation mode selection ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMB Page 1403 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

OTI Page 1403 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDI Page 1404 Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDI Page 1404 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PA Page 1405 Basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PB Page 1407 Gain filter parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PC Page 1411 Extension setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PD Page 1414 I/O setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PO Page 1416 Option unit parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PS Page 1416 Special parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PU Page 1416 Multi encoder parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PT Page 1417 Positioning control parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PL Page 1420 Motor extension parameter, linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PN Page 1421 Network setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PVS Page 1422 Position extension parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ST Page 1423 Status display ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PE Page 1425 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PF Page 1427 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

NPA Page 1430 Network basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALM Page 1431 Alarm ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

POS Page 1440 Point table (position) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

SPD Page 1440 Point table (speed) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ACT Page 1441 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT Page 1441 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DWL Page 1441 Point table (dwell) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AUX Page 1442 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MCD Page 1442 Point table (M code) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1477

14

MD Page 1443 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDS Page 1444 Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDS Page 1445 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS Page 1445 One-touch tuning data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DI Page 1446 External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DO Page 1448 External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALD Page 1450 Life Diagnosis ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMI Page 1450 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

TMO Page 1451 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMD Page 1451 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Reference

78 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-F]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1479

14

[MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1484 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) : Available : Not available

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1480 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q,

Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1484 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD- 700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Specifications of word devices Page 1485 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC- Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1492 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1493 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1494 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1495 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1496 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Page 1497 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices

Page 1497 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/ M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

Y Output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

B Link relay Hexadecimal 00000 to 9FFFF

M *4 Internal relay Decimal 0 to 61439

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767

S Step relay Decimal 0 to 32767

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 32767

TC *4 Timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

TT *4 Timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

80 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1496 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1497 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD- 700])

*4 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q system. Doing so disables the correct monitoring.

CC *4 Counter coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

CT *4 Counter contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SC *4 Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SS *4 Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SB Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 2255

RX Remote input Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

RY Remote output Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

LB Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

SP *2 Servo amplifier request Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

OM *2 Operation mode selection Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

TMB *2 Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

OTI *2 One-touch tuning instruction Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

IOST *3 I/O terminal monitor Decimal 0 to 127

CMD *3 Operation command Decimal 0 to 63

GFDI*2 Gear failure diagnosis instruction Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

ECCDI*2 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction

Decimal Page 1482 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1481

14

Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (QD77MS). The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (QD77GF).

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example SP [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-SP(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

A32-SP0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-SP(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A32-SP0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] SP(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

SP0

OM [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

A32-OM0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

UFF-A32-OM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

OM0

TMB [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

A32-TMB1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

UFF-A32-TMB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

TMB1

82 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A32-OTI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A32-OTI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

OTI0

GFDI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-GFDI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A32-GFDI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-GFDI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A32-GFDI0

ECCDI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ECCDI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A32-ECCDI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ECCDI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A32-ECCDI0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1483

14

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/ DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. The GOT can only read data from the device when the QS001CPU is used. To write data to the consecutive devices of a Q172DR(CR750-Q), use the Q172DR(CR750-Q) with firmware version R6b or later. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

IOST R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

CMD -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

GFDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

ECCDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

84 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD- 700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1492 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD- 700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN *6 Timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767

CN *6 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 32767

SN *6 Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767

D *3*5*6 Data register Decimal 0 to 4910079

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 2255

W *3*5 Link register Hexadecimal 000000 to 4AEBFF

SW Link special register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

R *3*4 File register Decimal 0 to 32767

ER *3*9 Extension file register(Block) Decimal ER(R block)-(Device) Notation example: ER255-100 R block (decimal): 0 to 255 Device (decimal): 0 to 32767

ZR *3*5*7*9

Extension file register Decimal 0 to 4849663

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 19 (Not usable as bit data)

G *9 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal U(Unit No.)-G(Device) Notation example: UFF-G100 Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF Device (decimal): 0 to 65535

For the module No., set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.

Ww *8 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

Wr *8 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

LW Link register Hexadecimal 00000 to 1FFFF

# Motion device Decimal 0 to 12287

U3E0 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal U3E0-G(Device) Notation example: U3E0-10000 Device (decimal): 10000 to 24335

U3E1 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal U3E1-G(Device) Notation example: U3E1-10000 Device (decimal): 10000 to 24335

U3E2 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal U3E2-(Device) Notation example: U3E2-10000 Device (decimal): 10000 to 24335

U3E3 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory

Decimal U3E3-(Device) Notation example: U3E3-10000 Device (decimal): 10000 to 24335

PA *2 Basic parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PB *2 Gain filter parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1485

14

PC *2 Extension setting parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PD *2 I/O setting parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PO*2 Option unit parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PS*2 Special parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PU*2 Multi encoder parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PT *2 Positioning control parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PL*2 Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PN *2 Network setting parameter Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

ST *2 Status display Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PE *2 Extension setting No.2 parameter

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

PF *2 Extension setting No.3 parameter

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

ALM *2 Alarm (current alarm J4A extend)

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

ALM *2 Alarm (alarm history J4A extend)

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

POS *2 Point table (position) Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

SPD *2 Point table (speed) Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

86 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1496 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

*3 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program.] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. Otherwise, read or write at GOT will be erroneous.

*4 Available for the file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. *5 Available for the file register of block number of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. *6 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q system.

Doing so disables the correct monitoring. *7 ZR1042432 to ZR4184063 cannot be used for GT SoftGOT2000. *8 Not available to GT21. *9 Available to GT21 when a Universal model QCPU is connected only.

ACT *2 Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

DCT *2 Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

DWL *2 Point table (dwell) Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

AUX *2 Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

MD *2 Machine diagnosis data Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

GFDS*2 Gear failure diagnosis data Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

ECCDS*2 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data

Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

OTS *2 One-touch tuning data Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

DI *2 External input signal Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

DO *2 External output signal Decimal Page 1488 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/ NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1487

14

Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/ DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (QD77MS). The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (QD77GF).

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example PA [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PA(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

A32-PA1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PA(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

UFF-A32-PA1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PA(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

PA1

PB [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

A32-PB1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

UFF-A32-PB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to 1092

PB1

PC [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

A32-PC1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

UFF-A32-PC1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PC(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

PC1

88 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

A32-PD1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

UFF-A32-PD1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

PD1

PO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

A32-PO1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to 1002

UFF-A32-PO1

PS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

A32-PS1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

UFF-A32-PS1

PU [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PU(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

A32-PU1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PU(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to 1044

UFF-A32-PU1

PT [Master Module(CCIEF)] PT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to 1090

PT1

PL [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

A32-PL1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

UFF-A32-PL1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to 1072

PL1

PN [Master Module(CCIEF)] PN(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

PN1

ST [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

A32-ST0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

UFF-A32-ST0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ST(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

ST0

PE [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

A32-PE1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

UFF-A32-PE1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PE(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to 1088

PE1

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1489

14

PF [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

A32-PF1

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

UFF-A32-PF1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PF(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to 1099

PF1

ALM [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

A32-ALM0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

UFF-A32-ALM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255

ALM0

POS [Master Module(CCIEF)] POS(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

POS1

SPD [Master Module(CCIEF)] SPD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

SPD1

ACT [Master Module(CCIEF)] ACT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

ACT1

DCT [Master Module(CCIEF)] DCT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DCT1

DWL [Master Module(CCIEF)] DWL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DWL1

AUX [Master Module(CCIEF)] AUX(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AUX1

MD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

A32-MD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

UFF-A32-MD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] MD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

MD0

GFDS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-GFDS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A32-GFDS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-GFDS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A32-GFDS0

ECCDS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ECCDS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

A32-ECCDS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ECCDS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A32-ECCDS0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

90 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

A32-OTS0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

UFF-A32-OTS0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTS(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

OTS0

DI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

A32-DI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A32-DI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

DI0

DO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

A32-DO0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

UFF-A32-DO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DO(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

DO0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1491

14

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/ DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. The GOT can only read data from the device when the QS001CPU is used. To write data to the consecutive devices of a Q172DR(CR750-Q), use the Q172DR(CR750-Q) with firmware version R6b or later. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W R/W R/W

SD R/W R/W R/W R/W

W R/W R/W R/W R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W R/W R/W

ER R/W R/W R/W R/W

ZR R/W R/W R/W R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- -/-

G R/W R/W R/W R/W

Ww R/W R/W R/W R/W

Wr R/W R/W R/W R/W

LW R/W R/W R/W R/W

# R/W R/W -/- R/W

U3E0 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E1 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E2 R/W R/W R/W R/W

U3E3 R/W R/W R/W R/W

PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

PS R/W R/W -/- -/-

PU R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

92 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 Only reading is available for OTS0 to OTS5.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following table shows monitoring-supported double-word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1495 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1496 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1497 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD- 700])

*4 If you specify LPr900 to LPr935, the following item is displayed in the device setting dialog. [Setting items (for calibration parameters)]: [Bias/gain value], [Analog input value] Enclose the device number in parentheses when selecting [Analog input value]. Example 1) Notation when [Bias/gain value] is selected: LPr900 Example 2) Notation when [Analog input value] is selected: LPr(900) When LPr900 or LPr901 (Calibration parameter) is specified, selecting [Bias/gain value] or [Analog input value] does not affect the monitoring target.

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

GFDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

ECCDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS*1 R/W R/W -/- -/-

DI R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

ALD*2 Life diagnosis Decimal Page 1494 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

TMI*2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1494 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

TMO*2 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1494 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

TMD*2 Set data (for test operation) Decimal Page 1494 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700])

AL*3 Faults history Decimal 0 to 899

LPr*3*4 Parameter (32-bit) Decimal 0 to 1500

OP*3 Operation parameter Decimal 0 to 5

PV*3 Current value monitor Decimal 1 to 143

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1493

14

Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/ DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Motion controller.

The following item is displayed. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (QD77MS). The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network or a Simple Motion module (QD77GF).

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example ALD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device)

Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

A32-ALD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A32-ALD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

ALD0

TMI [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

A32-TMI0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

UFF-A32-TMI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

TMI0

TMO [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

A32-TMO0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

UFF-A32-TMO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMO(Device) Device (decimal): 0

TMO0

94 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. The GOT can only read data from the device when the QS001CPU is used. To write data to the consecutive devices of a Q172DR(CR750-Q), use the Q172DR(CR750-Q) with firmware version R6b or later. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

TMD [Motion Controller(SSCNET III/H)] A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

A32-TMD0

[Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

UFF-A32-TMD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

TMD0

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

AL -/- R/- -/- -/-

LPr -/- R/W -/- -/-

OP -/- R/W -/- -/-

PV -/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1495

14

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1402 Servo amplifier request ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OM Page 1402 Operation mode selection ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMB Page 1403 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTI Page 1403 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDI Page 1404 Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDI Page 1404 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PA Page 1405 Basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PB Page 1407 Gain filter parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PC Page 1411 Extension setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PD Page 1414 I/O setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PO Page 1416 Option unit parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PS Page 1416 Special parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PU Page 1416 Multi encoder parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PT Page 1417 Positioning control parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PL Page 1420 Motor extension parameter, linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PN Page 1421 Network setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ST Page 1423 Status display ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PE Page 1425 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PF Page 1427 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALM Page 1431 Alarm ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

POS Page 1440 Point table (position) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

SPD Page 1440 Point table (speed) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ACT Page 1441 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT Page 1441 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DWL Page 1441 Point table (dwell) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AUX Page 1442 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MD Page 1443 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

GFDS Page 1444 Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ECCDS Page 1445 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS Page 1445 One-touch tuning data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DI Page 1446 External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1447 External input signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

DO Page 1448 External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) Page 1449 External output signal in MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALD Page 1450 Life Diagnosis ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMI Page 1450 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMO Page 1451 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMD Page 1451 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

96 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC-Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR/DSR, CRnD-700], [MELSEC- Q, Q17nD/M/DR/DSR, CRnD-700]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data.

Virtual device name

Reference

IOST Page 1453 I/O terminal monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

CMD Page 1455 Operation command ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AL Page 1456 Faults history ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

LPr Page 1458 Parameter (32-bit) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OP Page 1459 Operation parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PV Page 1460 Current value monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1497

14

[MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1499 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q system. Doing so disables the correct monitoring.

*3 When monitoring MELDAS C6/C64, if a word device outside the range is set, the value will be indefinite. If a bit device outside the range is set, the object may not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate. Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer3.

*4 Devices used by the MELDAS C6/C64 system cannot be used.

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1498 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*])

Page 1499 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*])

Specifications of word devices Page 1500 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*])

Page 1501 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*])

Device name*3*4 Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

GT27, GT25, GT23, and SoftGOT2000

GT21 and GS21 Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF 0000 to 1FFF

Y Output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF 0000 to 1FFF

B Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF 0000 to 7FFF

M*2 Internal relay Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

S Step relay Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

TC*2 Timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

TT*2 Timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

CC*2 Counter coil Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

CT*2 Counter contact Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SC*2 Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SS*2 Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SB Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 07FF 0000 to 07FF

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 2047 0 to 2047

RX Remote input Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

RY Remote output Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

LB Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF -

98 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1499

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1501 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program.] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. (With exceptions of MELSEC-QnA) Otherwise, read or write at GOT will be erroneous.

*3 Available for the file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. *4 Available for the file register of block number of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. *5 Set a value within the range of registers that exist in the PLC *6 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q system.

Doing so disables the correct monitoring. *7 This cannot be monitored when the GOT multi-drop is connected. *8 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.

Set the buffer memory within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the intelligent function module. *9 When monitoring MELDAS C6/C64, if a word device outside the range is set, the value will be indefinite.

If a bit device outside the range is set, the object may not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate. Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer3.

*10 Devices used by the MELDAS C6/C64 system cannot be used.

Device name *9*10 Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

GT27, GT25, GT23, and SoftGOT2000

GT21 and GS21 Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN *6 Timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

CN *6 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

SN *6 Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

D *6 Data register Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 2047 0 to 2047

W Link register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF 0000 to 7FFF

SW Link special register Hexadecimal 0000 to 07FF 0000 to 07FF

R *2*3*5 File register Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 32767

ER *2*7 Extension file register(Block) Decimal ER(R block)-(Device) Notation example: ER255-100 R block (decimal): 0

to 255 Device (decimal): 0

to 32767

-

ZR *2*4*5*7

Extension file register Decimal 0 to 1042431 -

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 15 0 to 15 (Not usable as bit data)

G *7*8 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal U(Unit No.)-G(Device) Notation example: UFF-G100 Unit No.

(hexadecimal): 00 to FF

Device (decimal): 0 to 65535

-

Ww *7 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF -

Wr *7 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF -

LW Link register Hexadecimal 00000 to 1FFFF -

00 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC QnA, MELDAS C6*]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W -/- R/W

SD R/W R/W -/- R/W

W R/W R/W -/- R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W -/- R/W

ER R/W R/W -/- R/W

ZR R/W R/W -/- R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- -/-

G R/W R/W -/- R/W

Ww R/W R/W -/- R/W

Wr R/W R/W -/- R/W

LW R/W R/W -/- R/W

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1501

15

[MELSEC-L]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1505 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-L]) : Available : Not available

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1502 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1504 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1505 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-L])

Specifications of word devices Page 1506 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1511 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-L])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1512 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1513 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1514 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-L])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices Page 1514 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L])

Page 1515 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices Page 1515 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-L])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

Y Output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

B Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to EFFF

M *4 Internal relay Decimal 0 to 61439

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767

S Step relay Decimal 0 to 8191

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 32767

TC *4 Timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

TT *4 Timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

CC *4 Counter coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

CT *4 Counter contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SC *4 Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SS *4 Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 (Not usable as word data)

SB Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 2047

RX Remote input Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

RY Remote output Hexadecimal 0000 to 3FFF

02 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1514 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1515 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-L])

*4 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-L system. Doing so disables the correct monitoring. D32768 or later can be used for data register (D).

SP *2 Servo amplifier request Decimal Page 1504 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

OM *2 Operation mode selection Decimal Page 1504 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

TMB *2 Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1504 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

OTI *2 One-touch tuning instruction Decimal Page 1504 Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

IOST *3 I/O terminal monitor Decimal 0 to 127

CMD *3 Operation command Decimal 0 to 63

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1503

15

Setting virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (LD77MS).

The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example SP [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-SP(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A32-SP0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] SP(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

SP0

OM [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

UFF-A32-OM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

OM0

TMB [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

UFF-A32-TMB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

TMB1

OTI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

UFF-A32-OTI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

OTI0

04 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

IOST R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

CMD -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1505

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1511 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-L]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN *6 Timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767

CN *6 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 32767

SN *6 Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767

D *6 Data register Decimal 0 to 421887

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 2047

W Link register Hexadecimal 00000 to 66FFF

SW Link special register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF

R *3*4 File register Decimal 0 to 32767

ZR *3*5 Extension file register Decimal 0 to 393215

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 19 (Not usable as bit data)

G Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal U(Unit No.)-G(Device) Notation example: UFF-G100 Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF Device (decimal): 0 to 65535

For the unit No., set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.

Ww *7 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

Wr *7 Remote register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF

PA *2 Basic parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PB *2 Gain filter parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PC *2 Extension setting parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PD *2 I/O setting parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PT *2 Positioning control parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PL *2 Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PN *2 Network setting parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

ST *2*7 Status display Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PE *2 Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

PF *2 Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

ALM *2*7 Alarm (current alarm J4A extend) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

ALM *2*7 Alarm (alarm history J4A extend) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

POS *2 Point table (position) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

SPD *2 Point table (speed) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

06 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1514 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L])

*3 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use the same file name as the program.] by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. Otherwise, read or write at GOT will be erroneous.

*4 Available for the file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction. *5 Available for the file register of block number of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction. *6 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-L system.

Doing so disables the correct monitoring. D32768 or later can be used for data register (D).

*7 This cannot be monitored when the GOT multi-drop is connected.

ACT *2 Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

DCT *2 Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

DWL *2 Point table (dwell) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

AUX *2 Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

MD *2*7 Machine diagnosis data Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

OTS *2*7 One-touch tuning data Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

DI *2 External input signal Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

DO *2*7 External output signal Decimal Page 1508 Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1507

15

Setting virtual word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (LD77MS).

The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example PA [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PA(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

UFF-A32-PA1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PA(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

PA1

PB [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PB(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

UFF-A32-PB1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PB(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

PB1

PC [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PC(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 80, 1001 to 1080

UFF-A32-PC1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PC(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 80, 1001 to 1080

PC1

PD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 48, 1001 to 1048

UFF-A32-PD1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 48, 1001 to 1048

PD1

PT [Master Module(CCIEF)] PT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 80, 1001 to 1080

PT1

PL [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PL(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 48, 1001 to 1048

UFF-A32-PL1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 48, 1001 to 1048

PL1

08 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PN [Master Module(CCIEF)] PN(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to 1032

PN1

ST [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ST(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

UFF-A32-ST0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ST(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

ST0

PE [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PE(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

UFF-A32-PE1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PE(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

PE1

PF [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-PF(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

UFF-A32-PF1

[Master Module(CCIEF)] PF(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 64, 1001 to 1064

PF1

ALM [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALM(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255

UFF-A32-ALM0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALM(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 11 to 59, 200 to 215, 220 to 235, 240 to

255

ALM0

POS [Master Module(CCIEF)] POS(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

POS1

SPD [Master Module(CCIEF)] SPD(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

SPD1

ACT [Master Module(CCIEF)] ACT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

ACT1

DCT [Master Module(CCIEF)] DCT(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DCT1

DWL [Master Module(CCIEF)] DWL(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

DWL1

AUX [Master Module(CCIEF)] AUX(Device) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to 1255

AUX1

MD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-MD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 18

UFF-A32-MD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] MD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 18

MD0

OTS [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-OTS(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 3

UFF-A32-OTS0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] OTS(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 3

OTS0

DI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

UFF-A32-DI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

DI0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1509

15

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DO [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-DO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

UFF-A32-DO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] DO(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

DO0

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example

10 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W R/W R/W

SD R/W R/W R/W R/W

W R/W R/W R/W R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W R/W R/W

ZR R/W R/W R/W R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- -/-

G R/W R/W R/W R/W

Ww R/W R/W R/W R/W

Wr R/W R/W R/W R/W

PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1511

15

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following table shows monitoring-supported double-word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1514 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-L]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Virtual servo amplifier device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1514 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L])

*3 Virtual inverter device For the details, refer to the following. Page 1515 Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-L])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

ALD*2 Life diagnosis Decimal Page 1513 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

TMI*2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1513 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

TMO*2 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal Page 1513 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

TMD*2 Set data (for test operation) Decimal Page 1513 Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L])

AL*3 Faults history Decimal 0 to 899

LPr*3 Parameter (32-bit) Decimal 0 to 1500

OP*3 Operation parameter Decimal 0 to 5

PV*3 Current value monitor Decimal 1 to 143

12 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Setting virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers ([MELSEC-L]) For virtual servo amplifier devices, the notation differs according to the connection type between the GOT and the servo amplifier. Select one of the following according to the control type in the device setting dialog.

The following shows the notation and setting range of virtual devices.

For indirect specification of a module or axis number, refer to the following. Page 1382 Indirect specification of a module number ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D]) Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Item Description [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] Select this item to connect the GOT through a Simple Motion module (LD77MS).

The following item is displayed. [Unit No.]: Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of

the Simple Motion module. [Axis No.]: Set the axis number to be monitored.

[Master Module(CCIEF)] Select this item to connect the GOT through the master station on the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Device name Device notation and setting range Notation example ALD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-ALD(Device)

Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

UFF-A32-ALD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] ALD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

ALD0

TMI [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMI(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

UFF-A32-TMI0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMI(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

TMI0

TMO [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMO(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

UFF-A32-TMO0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMO(Device) Device (decimal): 0

TMO0

TMD [Simple Motion(SSCNET III/H)] U(Unit No.)-A(Axis No.)-TMD(Device) Unit No. (hexadecimal): 00 to FF (direct), 100 to 10F (indirect) Axis No. (decimal): 1 to 32 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

UFF-A32-TMD0

[Master Module(CCIEF)] TMD(Device) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

TMD0

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1513

15

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

AL -/- R/- -/- -/-

LPr -/- R/W -/- -/-

OP -/- R/W -/- -/-

PV -/- R/- -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1402 Servo amplifier request ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OM Page 1402 Operation mode selection ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMB Page 1403 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800- D])

OTI Page 1403 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PA Page 1405 Basic parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PB Page 1407 Gain filter parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PC Page 1411 Extension setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PD Page 1414 I/O setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PT Page 1417 Positioning control parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PL Page 1420 Motor extension parameter, linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800- D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PN Page 1421 Network setting parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ST Page 1423 Status display ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PE Page 1425 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PF Page 1427 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALM Page 1431 Alarm ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

POS Page 1440 Point table (position) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

SPD Page 1440 Point table (speed) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ACT Page 1441 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DCT Page 1441 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DWL Page 1441 Point table (dwell) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AUX Page 1442 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

MD Page 1443 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OTS Page 1445 One-touch tuning data ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DI Page 1446 External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

DO Page 1448 External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

ALD Page 1450 Life Diagnosis ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

14 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC-L]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual inverter devices ([MELSEC-L]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data.

TMI Page 1450 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/ RT, CR800-D])

TMO Page 1451 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

TMD Page 1451 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Reference

IOST Page 1453 I/O terminal monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

CMD Page 1455 Operation command ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

AL Page 1456 Faults history ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

LPr Page 1458 Parameter (32-bit) ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

OP Page 1459 Operation parameter ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PV Page 1460 Current value monitor ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Reference

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1515

15

[MELSEC-A]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1517 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-A]) For monitoring-supported bit devices in the multi-drop connection, refer to the range for GT21 and GS21 in the following table. : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples of 16. Example) M9000, M9016, M9240

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1516 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-A])

Page 1517 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-A])

Specifications of word devices Page 1518 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-A])

Page 1519 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-A])

Device name Device No. representatio n

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

GT27, GT25, GT23, and SoftGOT2000

GT21 and GS21 Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF 0000 to 1FFF

Y Output relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF 0000 to 1FFF

B Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF 0000 to 1FFF

M Internal relay Decimal 0 to 8999 9256 to 32767

0 to 8999

M*2 Special internal relay Decimal 9000 to 9255 9000 to 9255

L Latch relay Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 8191

F Annunciator Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 2047

TC Timer coil Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 2047 (Not usable as word data)

TT Timer contact Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 2047 (Not usable as word data)

CC Counter coil Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

CT Counter contact Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 1023 (Not usable as word data)

SB Link special relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 07FF -

RX Remote input Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

RY Remote output Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

LB Link relay Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF -

16 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-A]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

B R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

L R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

F R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RX R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

RY R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

LB R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1517

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1519 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-A]) For monitoring-supported word devices in the multi-drop connection, refer to the range for GT21 and GS21 in the following table. : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified. Set the buffer memory within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the intelligent function module.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

GT27, GT25, GT23, and SoftGOT2000

GT21 and GS21 Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TN Timer current value Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 2047

CN Counter current value Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 1023

D Data register Decimal 0 to 8999 9256 to 32767

0 to 8999

D Special data register Decimal 9000 to 9255 9000 to 9255

W Link register Hexadecimal 0000 to 7FFF 0000 to 1FFF

SW Link special register Hexadecimal 0000 to 07FF -

R File register Decimal 0 to 32767 0 to 8191

ER Extension file register(Block) Decimal ER(R block)-(Device) Notation example: ER255-100 R block (decimal): 0

to 255 Device (decimal): 0

to 8191

-

ZR Extension file register Decimal 0 to 1042431 -

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 6 0 to 6 (Not usable as bit data)

V Index register Decimal 0 to 6 0 to 6 (Not usable as bit data)

BM*2 Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)

Decimal GM(R block)-(Device) Notation example: BMFF-100 BM start No.

(hexadecimal): 00 to FF

Device (decimal): 0 to 32767

For the BM start No., set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit number that represents the start I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.

- (Not usable as bit data)

Ww Remote register Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

Wr Remote register Hexadecimal 000 to 7FF -

LW Link register Hexadecimal 0000 to 1FFF -

A Accumulator Decimal 0 to 1 0 to 1

18 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the extension file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, A4UCPU is not available. When the bit specification writing of the word device is required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.

*2 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register (such as the touch switch function and numerical input function) is not available.

*3 In the multi-drop connection (computer link connection between the CPU and the serial multi-drop connection unit), reading/writing data from/to an accumulator is not available.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data TN R/W R/W -/- R/W

CN R/W R/W -/- R/W

D R/W R/W -/- R/W

W R/W R/W -/- R/W

SW R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W -/- R/W

ER*1 R/W R/W -/- R/W

ZR R/W R/W -/- R/W

Z*2 R/W R/W -/- -/-

V*2 R/W R/W -/- R/W

BM R/W R/W -/- -/-

Ww R/W R/W -/- R/W

Wr R/W R/W -/- R/W

LW R/W R/W -/- R/W

A*3 R/W R/W -/- R/W

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1519

15

[MELSEC-FX]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-FX]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1520 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-FX]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-FX]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1520 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-FX])

Page 1520 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-FX])

Specifications of word devices Page 1521 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-FX])

Page 1522 Setting the buffer memory device ([MELSEC-FX])

Page 1526 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-FX])

Protection with a keyword Page 1526 Protection using a keyword ([MELSEC-FX])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

X Input relay Octal 0000 to 0377

Y Output relay Octal 0000 to 0377

M Auxiliary relay Decimal 0 to 7679

M Special aux relay Decimal 8000 to 8511

S State Decimal 0 to 4095

T Timer contact Decimal 0 to 511 (Not usable as word data)

C Counter contact Decimal 0 to 255 (Not usable as word data)

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

S R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

T R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

C R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

20 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-FX]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1526 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-FX]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Only 16-bit (1-word) specification is possible. *3 For CS0 to CS199 and C0 to C199, only 16-bit (1-word) specification is allowed.

For CS200 to CS255 and C200 to C255, only 32-bit (2-word) specification is allowed. *4 The setting values of the timer and counter, which are not used for the program, cannot be monitored.

If monitoring is executed, a reading error occurs. *5 Usable only for special blocks or special units compatible with FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC.

(Except FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD, and FX2N-2DA) *6 GT SoftGOT2000 and GT Simulator3 cannot monitor the set values.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

T Timer current value Decimal 0 to 511

C*3 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 255

D Data register Decimal 0 to 7999

D Special data register Decimal 8000 to 8511

R Extension register Decimal 0 to 32767

Z Index register Decimal 0 to 7 (Not usable as bit data)

V Index register Decimal 0 to 7 (Not usable as bit data)

BM*5 Buffer memory Decimal Page 1522 Setting the buffer memory device ([MELSEC-FX])

TS*2*4*6 Timer set value Decimal 0 to 511

CS*3*4*6 Counter set value Decimal 0 to 255

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1521

15

Setting the buffer memory device ([MELSEC-FX]) Buffer memory format ([MELSEC-FX]) The following shows the format in the setting dialog of objects or others.

Example) Unit No.: 1, MASK: 6, Device: 100

The buffer memory format includes the following elements.

Device name Format Buffer memory BM(Unit No.)/(MASK)-(Device)

Item Description MASK Setting range 0 to 6

Device No. representation Decimal

Explanation Set this item when only specific bit of the buffer memory is monitored or written. When this item is 0, /(MASK) is unnecessary. For the processing corresponding to each setting value, refer to the following. Page 1523 MASK setting ([MELSEC-FX])

Unit No. Setting range 0 to 7 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect)

Device No. representation Decimal

Explanation Set the unit No. of the special block or special unit to be monitored or written. The unit No. (No.0 to No.7) is assigned to the unit or block in order of distance from the main unit. For the details of the unit No., refer to the following. User's Manual (Hardware) of the MELSEC-FX used For indirect specification of a unit No., refer to the following. Page 1525 Indirect specification of a unit No. ([MELSEC-FX])

Device Setting range 0 to 32767

Device No. representation Decimal

Explanation Buffer memory

22 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

MASK setting ([MELSEC-FX]) The following shows the processing corresponding to each setting value for MASK.

MASK Processing

Data type: 16-bit Data type: 32-bit 0 The buffer memory value is monitored or written.

1 Only b0 to b3 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 1: Monitored value = 0001H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 1: BM0 = 0001H

Only b0 to b3 and b16 to b19 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 1: Monitored value = 00050001H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0 = 00000000H with MASK 1: BM0 = 00050001H

2 Only b4 to b7 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 2: Monitored value = 0002H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 2: BM0 = 0010H

Only b4 to b7 and b20 to b23 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 2: Monitored value = 00060002H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0 = 00000000H with MASK 2: BM0 = 00500010H

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 1 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

0 0 0 1 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 2 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

0 0 1 0 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1523

15

3 Only b8 to b11 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 3: Monitored value = 0003H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 3: BM0 = 0100H

Only b8 to b11 and b28 to b31 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 3: Monitored value = 00070003H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0 = 00000000H with MASK 3: BM0 = 00050001H

4 Only b12 to b15 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 4: Monitored value = 0004H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 4: BM0 = 1000H

Only b12 to b15 and b28 to b31 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 4: Monitored value = 00080004H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0=00000000H with MASK 4: BM0=50001000H

5 Only b0 to b7 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 5: Monitored value = 0021H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 5: BM0 = 0021H

Only b0 to b7 and b16 to b13 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 5: Monitored value = 00650021H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0=00000000H with MASK 5: BM0=00650021H

MASK Processing

Data type: 16-bit Data type: 32-bit

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 3 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

0 1 0 0 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 7 0 0 0 3 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 4 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

1 0 0 0 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 8 0 0 0 4 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 2 1 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

0 0 2 1 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

24 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Indirect specification of a unit No. ([MELSEC-FX]) When you specify any of 100 to 115 for the unit No., the value of the corresponding GOT internal register (GD10 to GD25) is used as the unit number of a special block or special unit. In the multi-drop connection, indirect specification of a unit No. not available. The following shows the correspondence between unit Nos. and GOT data registers.

Precautions for using the buffer memory When the special block or special unit is turned off, the data in the buffer memory, except the data in some keep areas, are initialized. When the GOT monitors the buffer memory, the scan time of the PLC may momentarily increase. Specify 16-bit data for a 16-bit buffer memory, and specify 32-bit data for a 32-bit buffer memory. If 16-bit data is specified for a 32-bit buffer memory, monitoring/writing may not be performed properly. For the data size of each buffer memory, refer to the following. User's Manual of the special block or special unit When reading/writing data from/to the special block or special unit is performed by interrupting the sequence program, monitoring the buffer memory from the GOT or writing data from the GOT to the buffer memory may not be performed properly.

6 Only b8 to b15 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 4321H with MASK 6: Monitored value = 0043H

Example) Writing the input value (4321H) to BM0 = 0000H with MASK 6: BM0 = 2100H

Only b8 to b15 and b24 to b31 of the buffer memory is monitored or written. Example) Monitoring BM0 = 87654321H with MASK 6: Monitored value = 00870043H

Example) Writing the input value (87654321H) to BM0=00000000H with MASK 6: BM0=65002100H

Unit No. GOT data registers (GD) Setting range 100 GD10 [0] to [7]

Setting a value outside the above range causes a device range error. If a non-existent unit No. is set, a communication timeout error occurs.

101 GD11

: :

114 GD24

115 GD25

MASK Processing

Data type: 16-bit Data type: 32-bit

BM0

Monitored value

H4 3 2 1

0 0 4 3 H

BM0 (Before writing)

(After writing) BM0

Input value H4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 H

2 1 0 0 H

HBM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 8 7 0 0 4 3 HMonitored value

H

BM0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H

Input value

BM0 6 5 0 0 2 1 0 0 H

(Before writing)

(After writing)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1525

15

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-FX]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 When executing the touch switch function that has been set during the bit specification of the word device, do not write any data to the word device through the sequence program.

Protection using a keyword ([MELSEC-FX]) How to select a protection level by using a keyword You can set a protection level for equipment that is allowed to access the FX PLC online, and three protection levels are selectable. When performing monitoring or changing settings with any on-line equipment is required, specify a keyword with referring to the following.

Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level The following shows the device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level.

*1 When the value of the T or C device is set indirectly, changing the device is available.

Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition When all online operations are prohibited, the programming tool and GOT cannot display devices and input data. When all operations are prohibited, you cannot perform all operations with the programming tool, but the GOT can display devices and input data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data*1

T R/W R/W -/- R/W

C R/W R/W -/- R/W

D R/W R/W -/- R/W

R R/W R/W -/- R/W

Z R/W R/W -/- R/W

V R/W -/- -/- R/W

BM R/W R/W -/- R/W

TS R/W -/- -/- -/-

CS R/W R/W -/- -/-

Registered keyword Description When registering a keyword only Select a protection level by specifying an applicable letter for the initial letter in a keyword.

All operations prohibited: Specify a keyword beginning with A, D to F, or 0 to 9. Incorrect write/read prohibited: Specify a keyword beginning with B. Incorrect write prohibited: Specify a keyword beginning with C.

When registering a keyword and the second keyword Select a protection level in [Registration condition].

Item When registering a keyword only When registering a keyword and the second keyword

Keyword not registered or protection canceled

All operations prohibited

Incorrect write/read prohibited

Write prohibited

All online operations prohibited

Read/write prohibited

Write prohibited

Monitoring devices

Changing devices

Value of T or C, and file registers (D1000 and the following)

*1 *1 *1

Other than the above

26 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSEC-WS]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-WS]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1527 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-WS]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-WS]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1527 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSEC-WS])

Page 1527 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSEC-WS])

Specifications of word devices Page 1528 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-WS])

Page 1528 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-WS])

Engineering software for MELSEC- WS and device representation of GT Designer3

Page 1529 Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device representation of GT Designer3 ([MELSEC-WS])

Offset specifications Page 1530 Offset specification ([MELSEC-WS])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

I Input Decimal I(Module No.).(Input position) Notation example: I12.8 Module No. (decimal): 1 to 12 Input position (decimal): 1 to 8

Q Output Decimal Q(Module No.).(Output position) Notation example: Q12.8 Module No. (decimal): 1 to 12 Output position (decimal): 1 to 8

LI Logic input Decimal LI(Byte No.).(Bit position) Notation example: LI3.7 Byte No. (decimal): 0 to 3 Bit position (decimal): 0 to 7

LQ Logic result Decimal LQ(Byte No.).(Bit position) Notation example: LQ3.7 Byte No. (decimal): 0 to 3 Bit position (decimal): 0 to 7

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

I R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

Q R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

LI R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

LQ R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1527

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSEC-WS]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1528 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-WS]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC-WS]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

EI EFI input (byte) Decimal EI(EFI No.)(Device No.)(Byte No.) Notation example: EI231 EFI No. (decimal): 1 to 2 Device No. (decimal): 1 to 3 Byte No. (decimal): 0 to 3

EQ EFI output (byte) Decimal EQ(EFI No.)(Device No.)(Byte No.) Notation example: EQ21 EFI No. (decimal): 1 to 2 Byte No. (decimal): 0 to 2

D Data (byte) Decimal 0 to 99

LD Logic input (byte) Decimal 0 to 3

W Data (word) Decimal 0 to 49

LW Logic input (word) Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data EI R/- -/- -/- R/-

EQ R/- -/- -/- R/-

D R/- -/- -/- R/-

LD R/- -/- -/- R/-

W R/- R/- -/- R/-

LW R/- R/- -/- R/-

28 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device representation of GT Designer3 ([MELSEC-WS]) The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different. Set the device by referring to the following table.

*1 When the mapping position is changed by the MELSEC-WS engineering software, a mismatch occurs between virtual devices on GOT and MELSEC-WS mapping devices. When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices.

Device name GT Designer3 Engineering software for MELSEC-WS I*1 I.

(1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Input position

[],I : I/O model name (such as XTIO and XTDI) (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Input position

Q*1 Q. (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Output position

[].Q : I/O model name (such as XTIO and XTDI) (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-8): Output position

LI*1 LI. (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position

[0].. : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position

LQ*1 LQ. (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position

. : Result (0-3): Byte number (0-7): Bit position

EI*1 EI (1-2): EFI number (1-3): Device number (0-3): Byte number

[0].EFI:,Byte : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (1-2): EFI number (1-3): Device number (0-3): Byte number

EQ*1 EQ (1-2): EFI number (0-2): Byte number

[0].EFI:1,Byte : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1) (1-2): EFI number (0-2): Byte number

D D (0-99(Dec)): Byte number

RS232 data (Safety controller to RS232)

LD LD (0-3): Byte number

RS232 data (RS232 to safety controller)

W W (0-49(Dec)): Word number Word virtualization of D device W0 = (D1(Higher-order bits), D0(Lower-order bits))

GOT independent device (Not available)

LW LW (0-1): Word number Word virtualization of LD device LW0 = (LD1(Higher-order bits), LD0(Lower-order bits))

GOT independent device (Not available)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1529

15

Offset specification ([MELSEC-WS]) When devices are set with using the offset function, the device values are as follows.

Input (I)

Output (Q)

Logic input (LI)

Logic result (LQ)

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15 +0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8 Fixed to 0 (OFF)

+16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8

+32 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3 I3.4 I3.5 I3.6 I3.7 I3.8

+48 I4.1 I4.2 I4.3 I4.4 I4.5 I4.6 I4.7 I4.8

+64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8

+80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8

+96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8

+112 I8.1 I8.2 I8.3 I8.4 I8.5 I8.6 I8.7 I8.8

+128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.7 I9.8

+144 I10.1 I10.2 I10.3 I10.4 I10.5 I10.6 I10.7 I10.8

+160 I11.1 I11.2 I11.3 I11.4 I11.5 I11.6 I11.7 I11.8

+176 I12.1 I12.2 I12.3 I12.4 I12.5 I12.6 I12.7 I12.8

+192 Device range error

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15 +0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8 Fixed to 0 (OFF)

+16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8

+32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8

+48 Q4.1 Q4.2 Q4.3 Q4.4 Q4.5 Q4.6 Q4.7 Q4.8

+64 Q5.1 Q5.2 Q5.3 Q5.4 Q5.5 Q5.6 Q5.7 Q5.8

+80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8

+96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8

+112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 Q8.8

+128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8

+144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8

+160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8

+176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8

+192 Device range error

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7

+8 LI1.0 LI1.1 LI1.2 LI1.3 LI1.4 LI1.5 LI1.6 LI1.7

+16 LI2.0 LI2.1 LI2.2 LI2.3 LI2.4 LI2.5 LI2.6 LI2.7

+24 LI3.0 LI3.1 LI3.2 LI3.3 LI3.4 LI3.5 LI3.6 LI3.7

+32 Device range error

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7

+8 LQ1.0 LQ1.1 LQ1.2 LQ1.3 LQ1.4 LQ1.5 LQ1.6 LQ1.7

+16 LQ2.0 LQ2.1 LQ2.2 LQ2.3 LQ2.4 LQ2.5 LQ2.6 LQ2.7

+24 LQ3.0 LQ3.1 LQ3.2 LQ3.3 LQ3.4 LQ3.5 LQ3.6 LQ3.7

+32 Device range error

30 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

EFI input (EI)

EFI output (EQ)

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 to +15 +0 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113 Fixed to 0

+16 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123

+32 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133

+48 : +240

Fixed to 0

+256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 Fixed to 0

+272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223

+288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 Device range error

+302 Device range error

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 to +15 +0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12 Fixed to 0

+16 : +240

Fixed to 0

+256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error

+272 Device range error

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1531

15

[MELIPC]

Not available to GT2105-Q. This section shows the device range of MELIPC (MI5122-VW).

The settable device range is the same when [MELIPC] is selected and when [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D] is selected. For the device range when the GOT is connected to the MELSEC iQ-R series, refer to the following. Page 1377 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELIPC]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1384 [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D] : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1532 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELIPC])

Specifications of word devices Page 1533 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELIPC])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

B Link relay Hexadecimal 00000 to 9FFFF

M Internal relay Decimal 0 to 61439

SM Special relay Decimal 0 to 4095

JnX Link input (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-X(Device) Notation example: J1-X0000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to 3FFF

JnY Link output (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-Y(Device) Notation example: J1-Y0000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to 3FFF

JnSB Link special relay (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-SB(Device) Notation example: J1-SB000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 000 to 1FF

32 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELIPC]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1395 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

D Data register Decimal 0 to 4184063

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 4095

W Link register Hexadecimal 00000 to FFFFF

ZR Extension file register Decimal 0 to 524287

JnW Link register (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-W(Device) Notation example: J1-W00000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 0000 to 3FFF

JnSW Link special register (link direct) Hexadecimal J(Network No.n)-SW(Device) Notation example: J1-SW000 Network No.n (decimal): 1 to 239 Device (hexadecimal): 000 to 1FF

U3E0G CPU buffer memory access device Decimal U3E0-G(Device) Notation example: U3E0-G100 Device (decimal): 0 to 199999

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1533

15

[MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1534 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1536 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1534 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Page 1534 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Specifications of word devices Page 1535 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Page 1535 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1536 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Page 1536 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1536 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 1 to 2

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0, 4

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

34 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1535 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1536 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PRM Parameter Decimal 0 to 29 1000 to 1029

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 2

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 11 to 13

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 2

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PRM R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI R/- R/- -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1535

15

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1536 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1536 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M- P8A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1536 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

OM Page 1537 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

PRM Page 1537 Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

ST Page 1537 Status display ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

AL Page 1538 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

DI Page 1538 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

DO Page 1538 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

TMO Page 1538 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

36 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PRM0 to PRM29: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PRM1000 to PRM1029: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Status display ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS

PRM1, PRM1001 Regenerative brake option selection *REG

PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1

PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1

PRM4, PRM1004 Analog monitor 2 output MD2

PRM5, PRM1005 Analog monitor 3 output MD3

PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PRM7, PRM1007 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PRM8, PRM1008 Analog monitor 3 offset MO3

PRM9, PRM1009 Function selection 2 *OP2

PRM10, PRM1010 Interface unit serial communication number selection *ISN

PRM11, PRM1011 1slot serial communication station number selection *DSN1

PRM12, PRM1012 2slot serial communication station number selection *DSN2

PRM13, PRM1013 3slot serial communication station number selection *DSN3

PRM14, PRM1014 4slot serial communication station number selection *DSN4

PRM15, PRM1015 5slot serial communication station number selection *DSN5

PRM16, PRM1016 6slot serial communication station number selection *DSN6

PRM17, PRM1017 7slot serial communication station number selection *DSN7

PRM18, PRM1018 8slot serial communication station number selection *DSN8

PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter write inhibit *BLK

PRM20, PRM1020 Serial communication time-out selection SIC

PRM21 to PRM29, PRM1021 to PRM1029

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Regenerative load ratio -

ST1 Bus voltage -

ST2 Peak bus voltage -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1537

15

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, bus voltage -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 External input pin status CN1A/CN1B - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2M-A Instruction Manual

DI1 External input pin status CN5 -

DI2 External input pin status CN4A/CN4B -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 External output pin status CN1A/CN1B - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2M-A Instruction Manual

DO1 External output pin status CN4A/CN4B -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

38 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A]) Monitoring servo amplifier Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully understand the operating procedures before monitoring. Before operation, check the parameter settings and adjust them as required. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation. The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable.

Data length of a virtual device Set the data length of a virtual device as shown below.

If the above data length is not set, data will be specified incorrectly for the servo amplifier or cannot be properly monitored by the GOT.

Memory to which parameter values are written Parameter values are written to the RAM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Data type and format settings for using virtual servo amplifier devices (direct connection between the GOT and servo amplifier)

To specify virtual servo amplifier devices in the object setting or other settings, the data type and format must be set according to the notation of the values handled by the virtual devices. For notation of the virtual device values, refer to the following. Instruction manual for the servo amplifier used MR Configurator2 HELP The following shows a setting example for using virtual servo amplifier devices for an object. Example) When using a numerical display

Virtual device Data length PRM, ST, AL, PA, PB, PC, PD, POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX

16 bits or 32 bits Depending on the servo amplifier data

DI, DO, TMI, TMO, TMD 32 bits

Item Operation Monitoring Handling 16-bit data as 32-bit data The upper 16 bits are displayed as 0.

Handling 32-bit data as 16-bit data The lower 16 bits only are displayed.

Writing The GOT writes within the range of data length set. Note that the servo amplifier responds correctly while the written data is invalid in the servo amplifier side when the written data is out of the range of values which can be set by the servo amplifier.

Write destination Precautions RAM Remember that the written parameter values are cleared when the servo amplifier is turned off.

EEPROM The written parameter values are not cleared when the servo amplifier is turned off. However, there is a limit on the number of times data can be written to EEPROM. If you update the data frequently (more than once an hour), write parameter values to RAM. For the details, refer to the manual of the servo amplifier used.

Notation of the virtual device values Setting Decimal number (positive values only) [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 65536 or more)

[Format]: [Unsigned Decimal]

Decimal number (positive and negative values) [Data Type]: [Signed BIN16] ([Signed BIN32] for -32769 or less, and 32768 or more) [Format]: [Signed Decimal]

Hexadecimal number [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 0x10000 or more) [Format]: [Hexadecimal]

Decimal point notation (positive values only) [Data Type]: [Real] [Format]: [Real] [Digits (Integral)]: Set the number of digits in the integral portion. [Digits (Fractional)]: Set the number of digits in the fractional portion.

Decimal point notation (positive and negative values)

When the notation varies by digit [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 0x10000 or more) [Format]: [Hexadecimal] On the [Operation/Script] tab, select [Data Operation] for [Operation Type], and set [Bit Mask] or [Bit Shift].

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1539

15

Specifying consecutive virtual servo amplifier devices The GOT does not support writing/reading data to/from consecutive virtual servo amplifier devices.

40 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1541 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1544 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1541 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Page 1541 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Specifications of word devices Page 1542 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Page 1542 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1543 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Page 1543 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1544 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Page 1548 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1541

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1542 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1544 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PRM Parameter Decimal 0 to 84 1000 to 1084

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 10

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 11 to 21

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PRM R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

42 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1543 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1544 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2M- *DU]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to 2

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1543

15

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1544 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

OM Page 1544 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

TMB Page 1544 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

PRM Page 1545 Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

ST Page 1546 Status display ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

AL Page 1547 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

TMI Page 1548 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

TMO Page 1548 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

TMD Page 1548 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB0 Clearing acceleration/deceleration time constant -

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

44 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PRM0 to PRM84: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PRM1000 to PRM1084: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 For manufacturer setting -

PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1

PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU

PRM3, PRM1003 Electronic gear numerator (Command pulse multiplying factor numerator) CMX

PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear denominator (Command pulse multiplying factor denominator) CDV

PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP

PRM6, PRM1006 Position control gain 1 PG1

PRM7, PRM1007 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST

PRM8 to PRM15, PRM1008 to PRM1015

For manufacturer setting -

PRM16, PRM1016 Alarm history clear *BPS

PRM17 to PRM18, PRM1017 to PRM1018

For manufacturer setting -

PRM19, PRM1019 DRU parameter block *BLK

PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2

PRM21, PRM1021 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) *OP3

PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4

PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC

PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP

PRM25 to PRM26, PRM1025 to PRM1026

For manufacturer setting -

PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1

PRM29 to PRM32, PRM1029 to PRM1032

For manufacturer setting -

PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2

PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1

PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2

PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC

PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC

PRM40 to PRM41, PRM1040 to PRM1041

For manufacturer setting -

PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1

PRM43 to PRM50, PRM1043 to PRM1050

For manufacturer setting -

PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6

PRM52 to PRM53, PRM1052 to PRM1053

For manufacturer setting -

PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9

PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA

PRM56 to PRM57, PRM1056 to PRM1057

For manufacturer setting -

PRM58, PRM1058 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PRM59, PRM1059 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PRM60, PRM1060 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF

PRM61, PRM1061 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1545

15

Status display ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

PRM62, PRM1062 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B

PRM63, PRM1063 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B

PRM64, PRM1064 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB

PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP

PRM66, PRM1066 Gain switching condition CDS

PRM67, PRM1067 Gain switching time constant CDT

PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting -

PRM69, PRM1069 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2

PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3

PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4

PRM72 to PRM75, PRM1072 to PRM1075

For manufacturer setting -

PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PRM77 to PRM84, PRM1077 to PRM1084

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Effective load ratio -

ST6 Peak load ratio -

ST7 Instantaneous torque -

ST8 Within one-revolution position -

ST9 ABS counter -

ST10 Load inertia moment ratio -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

46 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative command pulses -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, command pulse frequency -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, instantaneous torque -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1547

15

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-*DU]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

48 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J2S-*A]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1549 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1552 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1549 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Page 1549 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Specifications of word devices Page 1550 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Page 1550 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1551 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Page 1551 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1552 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Page 1556 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1549

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1550 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1552 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PRM Parameter Decimal 0 to 84 1000 to 1084

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 14

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 25

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

DI External input signal Decimal 0

DO External output signal Decimal 0

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PRM R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI R/- R/- -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

50 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1551 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1552 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to 2

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1551

15

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1552 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

OM Page 1552 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

TMB Page 1552 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

PRM Page 1553 Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

ST Page 1554 Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

AL Page 1555 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

DI Page 1556 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

DO Page 1556 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

TMI Page 1556 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

TMO Page 1556 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

TMD Page 1556 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB0 Clearing acceleration/deceleration time constant -

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

52 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PRM0 to PRM84: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PRM1000 to PRM1084: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 Control mode, regenerative brake option selection *STY

PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1

PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU

PRM3, PRM1003 Electronic gear numerator (Command pulse multiplying factor numerator) CMX

PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear denominator (Command pulse multiplying factor denominator) CDV

PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP

PRM6, PRM1006 Position control gain 1 PG1

PRM7, PRM1007 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant PST

PRM8, PRM1008 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1

PRM9, PRM1009 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2

PRM10, PRM1010 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3

PRM11, PRM1011 Acceleration time constant STA

PRM12, PRM1012 Deceleration time constant STB

PRM13, PRM1013 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant STC

PRM14, PRM1014 Torque command time constant TQC

PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO

PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS

PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD

PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD

PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK

PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2

PRM21, PRM1021 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) *OP3

PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4

PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC

PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP

PRM25, PRM1025 Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum speed VCM

PRM26, PRM1026 Analog torque command maximum output TLC

PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1

PRM29, PRM1029 Analog speed command offset/limit offset VCO

PRM30, PRM1030 Analog torque command offset/limit offset TLO

PRM31, PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2

PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1

PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2

PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC

PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC

PRM40, PRM1040 For manufacturer setting -

PRM41, PRM1041 Input signal automatic ON selection *DIA

PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1

PRM43, PRM1043 Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5) *DI2

PRM44, PRM1044 Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14) *DI3

PRM45, PRM1045 Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8) *DI4

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1553

15

Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

PRM46, PRM1046 Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7) *DI5

PRM47, PRM1047 Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8) *DI6

PRM48, PRM1048 Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9) *DI7

PRM49, PRM1049 Output signal selection 1 *DO1

PRM50, PRM1050 For manufacturer setting -

PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6

PRM52, PRM1052 For manufacturer setting -

PRM53, PRM1053 Function selection 8 *OP8

PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9

PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA

PRM56, PRM1056 Serial communication time-out selection SIC

PRM57, PRM1057 For manufacturer setting -

PRM58, PRM1058 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PRM59, PRM1059 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PRM60, PRM1060 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF

PRM61, PRM1061 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B

PRM62, PRM1062 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B

PRM63, PRM1063 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B

PRM64, PRM1064 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB

PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP

PRM66, PRM1066 Gain switching condition CDS

PRM67, PRM1067 Gain switching time constant CDT

PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting -

PRM69, PRM1069 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2

PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3

PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4

PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4

PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5

PRM74, PRM1074 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6

PRM75, PRM1075 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7

PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PRM77 to PRM84, PRM1077 to PRM1084

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Within one-revolution position -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

54 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative command pulses -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, command pulse frequency -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, Instantaneous torque -

AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs, Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1555

15

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*A]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 External input pin statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_A Instruction Manual

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 External output pin statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_A Instruction Manual

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

56 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1557 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1560 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1557 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Page 1557 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Specifications of word devices Page 1558 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Page 1559 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1559 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Page 1560 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1560 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Page 1566 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1557

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1559 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1560 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PRM Parameter Decimal 0 to 90 1000 to 1090

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 16

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 27

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

POS Point table (position) Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

SPD Point table (speed) Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

ACT Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

DCT Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

DWL Point table (dwell) Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

AUX Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal 1 to 31 1001 to 1031

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 2

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 1

58 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI1.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1560 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1560 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PRM R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to 2

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1559

15

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S- *CP]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1561 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

OM Page 1561 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

TMB Page 1561 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

PRM Page 1562 Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

ST Page 1563 Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

AL Page 1564 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

POS Page 1565 Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

SPD Page 1565 Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

ACT Page 1565 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

DCT Page 1565 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

DWL Page 1565 Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

AUX Page 1565 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

DI Page 1566 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

DO Page 1566 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

TMI Page 1566 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

TMO Page 1566 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

TMD Page 1566 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

60 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB0 Clearing acceleration/deceleration time constant -

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1561

15

Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PRM0 to PRM90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PRM1000 to PRM1090: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/regenerative brake option selection *STY

PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY

PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1

PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU

PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX

PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV

PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP

PRM7, PRM1007 Position control gain 1 PG1

PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY

PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF

PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF

PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST

PRM12, PRM1012 Rough match output range CRP

PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG

PRM14, PRM1014 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant *STC

PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO

PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS

PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD

PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD

PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK

PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2

PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting -

PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4

PRM23, PRM1023 Serial communication time-out selection SIC

PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC

PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO

PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO

PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1

PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC

PRM31, PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2

PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1

PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2

PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC

PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC

PRM40 to PRM41, PRM1040 to PRM1041

For manufacturer setting -

PRM42, PRM1042 Home position return position data *ZPS

PRM43, PRM1043 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PRM44, PRM1044 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PRM45, PRM1045 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

62 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

PRM46, PRM1046 Software limit + *LMP

PRM47, PRM1047

PRM48, PRM1048 Software limit - *LMN

PRM49, PRM1049

PRM50, PRM1050 Position range output address + *LPP

PRM51, PRM1051

PRM52, PRM1052 Position range output address - *LNP

PRM53, PRM1053

PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting -

PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 *OP6

PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting -

PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8

PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9

PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA

PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting -

PRM61, PRM1061 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PRM62, PRM1062 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PRM63, PRM1063 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF

PRM64, PRM1064 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B

PRM65, PRM1065 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B

PRM66, PRM1066 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B

PRM67, PRM1067 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB

PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP

PRM69, PRM1069 Gain switching condition CDS

PRM70, PRM1070 Gain switching time constant CDT

PRM71 to PRM90, PRM1071 to PRM1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Current position -

ST1 Command position -

ST2 Command remaining distance -

ST3 Point table No. -

ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST5 Servo motor speed -

ST6 Droop pulses -

ST7 Override -

ST8 Torque limit voltage -

ST9 Regenerative load ratio -

ST10 Effective load ratio -

ST11 Peak load ratio -

ST12 Instantaneous torque -

ST13 Within one-revolution position -

ST14 ABS counter -

ST15 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST16 Bus voltage -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1563

15

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, current position -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, command position -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, command remaining distance -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, point table No. -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, override -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, torque limit voltage -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs, instantaneous torque -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs, Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

64 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. POS1 to POS31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. POS1001 to POS1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. SPD1 to SPD31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. SPD1001 to SPD1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. ACT1 to ACT31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. ACT1001 to ACT1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DCT1 to DCT31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DCT1001 to DCT1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DWL1 to DWL31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DWL1001 to DWL1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. AUX1 to AUX31: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. AUX1001 to AUX1031: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Virtual device name Name Symbol POS1 to POS31, POS1001 to POS1031

Point table/position data No. 1 to No. 31 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol SPD1 to SPD31, SPD1001 to SPD1031

Point table/speed data No. 1 to No. 31 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ACT1 to ACT31, ACT1001 to ACT1031

Point table/acceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 31 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DCT1 to DCT31, DCT1001 to DCT1031

Point table/deceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 31 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DWL1 to DWL31, DWL1001 to DWL1031

Point table/dwell No. 1 to No. 31 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol AUX1 to AUX31, AUX1001 to AUX1031

Point table/auxiliary function No. 1 to No. 31 -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1565

15

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CP]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_CP Instruction Manual

DI1 External input pin statuses -

DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

-

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_CP Instruction Manual

DO1 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

66 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1567 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1570 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1567 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Page 1567 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Specifications of word devices Page 1568 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Page 1568 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1569 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Page 1569 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1570 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Page 1575 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1567

15

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1568 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1570 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI1.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PRM Parameter Decimal 0 to 90 1000 to 1090

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 17

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 28

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 2

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PRM R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

68 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1569 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1570 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx.

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

LD Current position latch data Decimal 1

RR*2 Value of the general-purpose register (Rx)

Decimal 1 to 4 1001 to 1004

RD Value of the general-purpose register (Dx)

Decimal 1 to 4

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to 2

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data LD -/- R/- -/- -/-

RR -/- R/W -/- -/-

RD -/- R/W -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1569

15

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1570 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

OM Page 1570 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

TMB Page 1570 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

PRM Page 1571 Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

ST Page 1572 Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

AL Page 1573 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

DI Page 1573 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

DO Page 1574 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

LD Page 1574 Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

RR Page 1574 Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

RD Page 1574 Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

TMI Page 1574 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

TMO Page 1574 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

TMD Page 1574 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB0 Clearing acceleration/deceleration time constant -

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

70 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Parameter ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PRM0 to PRM90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PRM1000 to PRM1090: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/regenerative brake option selection *STY

PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY

PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1

PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU

PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX

PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV

PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP

PRM7, PRM1007 Position control gain 1 PG1

PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY

PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF

PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF

PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST

PRM12, PRM1012 For manufacturer setting -

PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG

PRM14, PRM1014 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant *STC

PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO

PRM16, PRM1016 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS

PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD

PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD

PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK

PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2

PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting -

PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4

PRM23, PRM1023 Serial communication time-out selection SIC

PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC

PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO

PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO

PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1

PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC

PRM31, PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PRM32, PRM1032 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PRM33, PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2

PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1

PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2

PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC

PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC

PRM40, PRM1040 JOG operation acceleration/deceleration time constant JTC

PRM41, PRM1041 Home position return operation acceleration/deceleration time constant ZTS

PRM42, PRM1042 Home position return position data *ZPS

PRM43, PRM1043 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PRM44, PRM1044 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PRM45, PRM1045 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1571

15

Status display ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

PRM46, PRM1046 Software limit + *LMP

PRM47, PRM1047

PRM48, PRM1048 Software limit - *LMN

PRM49, PRM1049

PRM50, PRM1050 Position range output address + *LPP

PRM51, PRM1051

PRM52, PRM1052 Position range output address - *LNP

PRM53, PRM1053

PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting -

PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 *OP6

PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting -

PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8

PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9

PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA

PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting -

PRM61, PRM1061 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PRM62, PRM1062 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PRM63, PRM1063 Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control LPF

PRM64, PRM1064 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 GD2B

PRM65, PRM1065 Position control gain 2 changing ratio PG2B

PRM66, PRM1066 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio VG2B

PRM67, PRM1067 Speed integral compensation changing ratio VICB

PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP

PRM69, PRM1069 Gain switching condition CDS

PRM70, PRM1070 Gain switching time constant CDT

PRM71 to PRM73, PRM1071 to PRM1073

For manufacturer setting -

PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1

PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2

PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3

PRM77, PRM1077 Selected to program input polarity selection 1 SYC1

PRM78 to PRM90, PRM1078 to PRM1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Current position -

ST1 Command position -

ST2 Command remaining distance -

ST3 Program Number -

ST4 Step Number -

ST5 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST6 Servo motor speed -

ST7 Droop pulses -

ST8 Override -

ST9 Torque limit voltage -

ST10 Regenerative load ratio -

ST11 Effective load ratio -

ST12 Peak load ratio -

ST13 Instantaneous torque -

ST14 Within one-revolution position -

ST15 ABS counter -

ST16 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST17 Bus voltage -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

72 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, current position -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, command position -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, command remaining distance -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, program number -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, step number -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, override -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, torque limit voltage -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs, instantaneous torque -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs, Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_CL Instruction Manual

DI1 External input pin statuses -

DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read or written, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_CL Instruction Manual

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1573

15

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. RR1 to RR4: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. RR1001 to RR1004: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J2S-_CL Instruction Manual

DO1 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name Name Symbol LD1 Current position latch data -

Virtual device name Name Symbol RR1, RR1001 Value of the general-purpose register (R1) -

RR2, RR1002 Value of the general-purpose register (R2) -

RR3, RR1003 Value of the general-purpose register (R3) -

RR4, RR1004 Value of the general-purpose register (R4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol RD1 Value of the general-purpose register (D1) -

RD2 Value of the general-purpose register (D2) -

RD3 Value of the general-purpose register (D3) -

RD4 Value of the general-purpose register (D4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD2 Writes the moving distance in pulses (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

74 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2S-*CL]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1575

15

[MELSERVO-J3-*A]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1576 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1579 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1576 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Page 1576 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Specifications of word devices Page 1577 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Page 1577 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1578 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Page 1578 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1579 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Page 1585 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 1 to 6

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

76 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1577 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1579 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI1.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic parameter Decimal 1 to 19 1001 to 1019

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal 1 to 45 1001 to 1045

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal 1 to 50 1001 to 1050

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal 1 to 30 1001 to 1030

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 14

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 25

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 2

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 1

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1577

15

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1578 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1579 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to1, 3

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

78 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1579 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

OM Page 1579 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

TMB Page 1580 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

PA Page 1580 Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

PB Page 1581 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

PC Page 1582 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

PD Page 1583 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

ST Page 1583 Status display ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

AL Page 1584 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

DI Page 1585 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

DO Page 1585 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

TMI Page 1585 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

TMO Page 1585 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

TMD Page 1585 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1579

15

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA50: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PA1001 to PA1050: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplication numerator) CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplication denominator) CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS

PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16 to PA18, PA1016 to PA1018

For manufacturer setting -

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

80 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB50: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PB1001 to PB1050: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control) VRFT

PB3, PB1003 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed control gain VG2

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting -

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 For manufacturer setting -

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting VRF1

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting VRF2

PB21 to PB22, PB1021 to PB1022

For manufacturer setting -

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor after gain switching GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB

PB33, PB1033 Suppression control and vibration frequency setting after gain switching VRF1B

PB34, PB1034 Suppression control and vibration resonance setting after gain switching VRF2B

PB35 to PB45, PB1035 to PB1045

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1581

15

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC50: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PC1001 to PC1050: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA

PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB

PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant STC

PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC

PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1

PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2

PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3

PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4

PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5

PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6

PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7

PC12, PC1012 Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum speed VCM

PC13, PC1013 Analog torque command maximum output TLC

PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP

PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO

PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP

PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1

PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2

PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC27 to PC29, PC1027 to PC1029

For manufacturer setting -

PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2

PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2

PC32, PC1032 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 2 CMX2

PC33, PC1033 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 3 CMX3

PC34, PC1034 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 4 CMX4

PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD

PC37, PC1037 Analog speed command offset/limit offset VCO

PC38, PC1038 Analog torque command offset/limit offset TPO

PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PC41 to PC50, PC1041 to PC1050

For manufacturer setting -

82 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD50: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PD1001 to PD1050: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Status display ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic ON selection 1 *DIA1

PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting -

PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1 (CN1-15) *DI1

PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 2 (CN1-16) *DI2

PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 3 (CN1-17) *DI3

PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 4 (CN1-18) *DI4

PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 5 (CN1-19) *DI5

PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 6 (CN1-41) *DI6

PD9, PD1009 For manufacturer setting -

PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 8 (CN1-43) *DI8

PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 9 (CN1-44) *DI9

PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 10 (CN1-45) *DI10

PD13, PD1013 Output device selection 1 (CN1-22) *DO1

PD14, PD1014 Output device selection 2 (CN1-23) *DO2

PD15, PD1015 Output device selection 3 (CN1-24) *DO3

PD16, PD1016 Output device selection 4 (CN1-25) *DO4

PD17, PD1017 For manufacturer setting -

PD18, PD1018 Output device selection 6 (CN1-49) *DO6

PD19, PD1019 Input filter setting *DIF

PD20, PD1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting -

PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting -

PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5

PD25 to PD30, PD1025 to PD1030

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Within one-revolution position -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1583

15

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative command pulses -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, command pulse frequency -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, Instantaneous torque -

AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs, bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

84 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*A])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*A]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J3-_A Instruction Manual

DI1 External input pin statuses -

DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

-

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J3-_A Instruction Manual

DO1 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD2 For manufacturer setting -

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1585

15

[MELSERVO-J3-*T]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1586 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1589 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1586 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Page 1586 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Specifications of word devices Page 1587 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Page 1588 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1588 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Page 1589 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1589 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Page 1598 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 5

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 1 to 6

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

86 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1588 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1589 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 MCD cannot be used as a real number.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic parameter Decimal 1 to 19 1001 to 1019

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal 1 to 45 1001 to 1045

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal 1 to 50 1001 to 1050

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal 1 to 30 1001 to 1030

PO Option unit parameter (PO)*1 Decimal 1 to 35 1001 to 1035

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 17

AL Alarm (current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 28

AL Alarm (alarm history) Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

POS Point table (position) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

SPD Point table (speed) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

ACT Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

DCT Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

DWL Point table (dwell) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

AUX Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

MCD*2 Point table (M code) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 7

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 4

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1587

15

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 For DI0 to DI4, the GOT can only read data from devices.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1589 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1589 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MCD R/W R/W -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 2

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 1

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to1, 3

88 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1590 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

OM Page 1590 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

TMB Page 1590 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

PA Page 1591 Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

PB Page 1592 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

PC Page 1593 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

PD Page 1594 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

PO Page 1595 Option unit parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

ST Page 1595 Status display ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

AL Page 1596 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

POS Page 1597 Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

SPD Page 1597 Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

ACT Page 1597 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

DCT Page 1597 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

DWL Page 1597 Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

AUX Page 1597 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

MCD Page 1597 Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

DI Page 1598 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

DO Page 1598 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

TMI Page 1598 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

TMO Page 1598 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

TMD Page 1598 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1589

15

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM3 Motorless operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

OM5 Single-step feed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

90 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA19: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PA1001 to PA1019: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 Feeding function selection *FTY

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator *CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 For manufacturer setting -

PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16 to PA18, PA1016 to PA1018

For manufacturer setting -

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1591

15

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB45: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PB1001 to PB1045: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control) VRFT

PB3, PB1003 For manufacturer setting -

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed control gain VG2

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting -

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 For manufacturer setting -

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting VRF1

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting VRF2

PB21 to PB22, PB1021 to PB1022

For manufacturer setting -

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 For manufacturer setting -

PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor after gain switching GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB

PB33, PB1033 Suppression control and vibration frequency setting after gain switching VRF1B

PB34, PB1034 Suppression control and vibration resonance setting after gain switching VRF2B

PB35 to PB45, PB1035 to PB1045

For manufacturer setting -

92 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC50: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PC1001 to PC1050: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PC1, PC1001 For manufacturer setting -

PC2, PC1002 Home position return type *ZTY

PC3, PC1003 Direction of home position return *ZDIR

PC4, PC1004 Home position return speed ZRF

PC5, PC1005 Creep speed CRF

PC6, PC1006 Home position shift distance ZST

PC7, PC1007 Home position return position data *ZPS

PC8, PC1008 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PC9, PC1009 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PC10, PC1010 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

PC11, PC1011 Rough match output range CRP

PC12, PC1012 Jog speed JOG

PC13, PC1013 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant *STC

PC14, PC1014 Backlash compensation *BKC

PC15, PC1015 For manufacturer setting -

PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP

PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO

PC21, PC1021 RS-422 communication function selection *SOP

PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1

PC23, PC1023 For manufacturer setting -

PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC27, PC1027 For manufacturer setting -

PC28, PC1028 Function selection C-7 *COP7

PC29 to PC30, PC1029 to PC1030

For manufacturer setting -

PC31, PC1031 Software limit + Low LMPL

PC32, PC1032 Software limit + High LMPH

PC33, PC1033 Software limit - Low LMNL

PC34, PC1034 Software limit - High LMNH

PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD

PC37, PC1037 Position range output address + Low *LPPL

PC38, PC1038 Position range output address + High *LPPH

PC39, PC1039 Position range output address - Low *LNPL

PC40, PC1040 Position range output address - High *LNPH

PC41 to PC50, PC1041 to PC1050

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1593

15

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD30: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PD1001 to PD1030: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic ON selection 1 *DIA1

PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting -

PD3, PD1003 Input signal automatic ON selection 3 *DIA3

PD4, PD1004 Input signal automatic ON selection 4 *DIA4

PD5, PD1005 For manufacturer setting -

PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2 (CN6-2) *DI2

PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3 (CN6-3) *DI3

PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 4 (CN6-4) *DI4

PD9, PD1009 Output signal device selection 1 (CN6-14) *DO1

PD10, PD1010 Output signal device selection 2 (CN6-15) *DO2

PD11, PD1011 Output signal device selection 3 (CN6-16) *DD3

PD12 to PD15, PD1012 to PD1015

For manufacturer setting -

PD16, PD1016 Input polarity selection *DIAB

PD17 to PD18, PD1017 to PD1018

For manufacturer setting -

PD19, PD1019 Input filter setting *DIF

PD20, PD1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting -

PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting -

PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5

PD25 to PD30, PD1025 to PD1030

For manufacturer setting -

94 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Option unit parameter ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PO1 to PO35: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PO1001 to PO1035: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Status display ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Virtual device name Name Symbol PO1, PO1001 For manufacturer setting -

PO2, PO1002 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 1 (CN10-21, 26) *ODI1

PO3, PO1003 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 2 (CN10-27, 28) *ODI2

PO4, PO1004 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 3 (CN10-29, 30) *ODI3

PO5, PO1005 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 4 (CN10-31, 32) *ODI4

PO6, PO1006 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 5 (CN10-33, 34) *ODI5

PO7, PO1007 MR-J3-D01 Input signal device selection 6 (CN10-35, 36) *ODI6

PO8, PO1008 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 1 (CN10-46, 47) *ODO1

PO9, PO1009 MR-J3-D01 Output signal device selection 2 (CN10-48, 49) *ODO2

PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1

PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting -

PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3

PO13, PO1013 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PO14, PO1014 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

PO15, PO1015 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PO16, PO1016 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PO17 to 20, PO1017 to PO1020 For manufacturer setting -

PO21, PO1021 MR-J3-D01 Override offset VCO

PO22, PO1022 MR-J3-D01 Analog torque limitation offset TLO

PO23 to PO35, PO1023 to PO1035

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Current position -

ST1 Command position -

ST2 Command remaining distance -

ST3 Point table No. -

ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST5 Servo motor speed -

ST6 Droop pulses -

ST7 Override voltage -

ST8 Override -

ST9 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ST10 Regenerative load ratio -

ST11 Effective load ratio -

ST12 Peak load ratio -

ST13 Instantaneous torque -

ST14 Within one-revolution position -

ST15 ABS counter -

ST16 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST17 Bus voltage -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1595

15

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs, current position -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs, command position -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs, command remaining distance -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs, point table No. -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs, cumulative feedback pulses -

AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs, servo motor speed -

AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs, droop pulses -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs, override voltage -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs, override -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs, analog torque limit voltage -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs, regenerative load ratio -

AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs, effective load ratio -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs, peak load ratio -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs, instantaneous torque -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs, within one-revolution position -

AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs, ABS counter -

AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs, load inertia moment ratio -

AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs, Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

96 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. POS1 to POS255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. POS1001 to POS1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. SPD1 to SPD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. SPD1001 to SPD1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. ACT1 to ACT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. ACT1001 to ACT1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DCT1 to DCT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DCT1001 to DCT1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DWL1 to DWL255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DWL1001 to DWL1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. AUX1 to AUX255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. AUX1001 to AUX1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. MCD1 to MCD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. MCD1001 to MCD1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Virtual device name Name Symbol POS1 to POS255, POS1001 to POS1255

Point table/position data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol SPD1 to SPD255, SPD1001 to SPD1255

Point table/speed data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ACT1 to ACT255, ACT1001 to ACT1255

Point table/acceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DCT1 to DCT255, DCT1001 to DCT1255

Point table/deceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255

Point table/dwell No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255

Point table/auxiliary function No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol MCD1 to MCD255, MCD1001 to MCD1255

Point table/M code No.1 to No.255 -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1597

15

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J3-*T])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J3-*T]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J3-_T Instruction Manual

DI1 Input device statuses -

DI3 External input pin statuses -

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read or written, refer to the following. MR-J3-_T Instruction ManualDI6 Statuses of input devices switched on

through communication -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J3-_T Instruction Manual

DO1 Output device statuses -

DO3 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 -

TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 -

TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output from signal pin (CN6) -

TMO1 Forced output from signal pin (CN10) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

98 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1599 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1602 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1599 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1599 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Specifications of word devices Page 1600 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1601 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1601 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1602 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1602 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1615 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 4

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 1 to 6

OTI One-touch tuning instruction Decimal 0 to 5

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1599

16

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1601 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1602 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic parameter Decimal 1 to 32 1001 to 1032

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal 1 to 80 1001 to 1080

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

PL Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 41

AL Alarm (current alarm, J3A compatible)

Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 25

AL Alarm (alarm history, J3A compatible)

Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

PE Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PF Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ALM Alarm (current alarm, J4A extend) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 52

ALM Alarm (alarm history, J4A extend) Decimal 200 to 215 220 to 235 240 to 255

MD Machine diagnosis data Decimal 0 to 11

OTS One-touch tuning data Decimal 0 to 3

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 2

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 1

00 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 and DI1.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1602 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1602 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

ALD Life diagnosis Decimal 0 to 1

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to1, 3

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1601

16

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, - JE-*A]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1603 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

OM Page 1603 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

TMB Page 1603 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

OTI Page 1604 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PA Page 1604 Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PB Page 1605 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PC Page 1606 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PD Page 1608 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PL Page 1609 Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

ST Page 1609 Status display ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

AL Page 1610 Alarm (MELSERVO-J3-*A compatible) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PE Page 1611 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

PF Page 1611 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

ALM Page 1612 Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

MD Page 1613 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

OTS Page 1614 One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

DI Page 1614 External input signal in MR-J4-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1614 External input signal in MR-JE-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

DO Page 1614 External output signal in MR-J4-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Page 1614 External output signal in MR-JE-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

ALD Page 1614 Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

TMI Page 1615 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

TMO Page 1615 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

TMD Page 1615 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

02 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

TMB1 Temporary stop command -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1603

16

One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PA1001 to PA1032: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

OTI0 One-touch tuning start command (Basic mode) -

OTI1 One-touch tuning start command (High mode) -

OTI2 One-touch tuning start command (Low mode) -

OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command -

OTI4 Return to initial value -

OTI5 Return to value before adjustment -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplication numerator)

CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplication denominator)

CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS

PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2

PA17 to PA18, PA1017 to PA1018

For manufacturer setting -

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS

PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3

PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting -

PA23, PA1023 Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting DRAT

PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 *AOP4

PA25, PA1025 One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level OTHOV

PA26, PA1026 Function selection A-5 *AOP5

PA27 to PA32, PA1027 to PA1032

For manufacturer setting -

04 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PB1001 to PB1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control)

VRFT

PB3, PB1003 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing)

PST

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Load inertia moment ratio GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed control gain VG2

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency VRF12

PB21, PB1021 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping VRF13

PB22, PB1022 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping VRF14

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Load to motor inertia ratio after gain switching GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB

PB33, PB1033 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency after gain switching

VRF1B

PB34, PB1034 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency after gain switching

VRF2B

PB35, PB1035 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching

VRF3B

PB36, PB1036 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching

VRF4B

PB37 to PB44, PB1037 to PB1044

For manufacturer setting -

PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1605

16

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC80: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PC1001 to PC1080: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

PB46, PB1046 Machine resonance suppression filter 3 NH3

PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3

PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 NH4

PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 NH5

PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5

PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21

PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency VRF22

PB54, PB1054 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping VRF23

PB55, PB1055 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping VRF24

PB56, PB1056 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency after gain switching

VRF21B

PB57, PB1057 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency after gain switching

VRF22B

PB58, PB1058 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching

VRF23B

PB59, PB1059 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching

VRF24B

PB60, PB1060 Model loop gain after gain switching PG1B

PB61 to PB64, PB1061 to PB1064

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA

PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB

PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant STC

PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC

PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1

PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2

PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3

PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4

PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5

PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6

PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7

PC12, PC1012 Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum speed VCM

PC13, PC1013 Analog torque command maximum output TLC

PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP

PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO

PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP

PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

06 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2

PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6

PC28 to PC29, PC1028 to PC1029

For manufacturer setting -

PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2

PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2

PC32, PC1032 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 2 CMX2

PC33, PC1033 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 3 CMX3

PC34, PC1034 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 4 CMX4

PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD

PC37, PC1037 Analog speed command offset/limit offset VCO

PC38, PC1038 Analog torque command offset/limit offset TPO

PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PC41 to PC42, PC1041 to PC1042

For manufacturer setting -

PC43, PC1043 Error excessive alarm detection level ERZ

PC44 to PC 50, PC1044 to PC1050

For manufacturer setting -

PC51, PC1051 Forced stop deceleration time constant RSBR

PC52 to PC53, PC1052 to PC1053

For manufacturer setting -

PC54, PC1054 Vertical axis freefall prevention compensation amount RSUP1

PC55 to PC59, PC1055 to PC1059

For manufacturer setting -

PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD

PC61 to PC65, PC1061 to PC1065

For manufacturer setting -

PC66, PC1066 Mark detection range+ LPSPL

PC67, PC1067 Mark detection range+ LPSPH

PC68, PC1068 Mark detection range- LPSNL

PC69, PC1069 Mark detection range- LPSNH

PC70, PC1070 Modbus-RTU Communication station number setting *SNOM

PC71, PC1071 Function selection C-F *COPF

PC72, PC1072 Function selection C-G *COPG

PC73, PC1073 Error excessive warning level ERW

PC74 to PC80, PC1074 to PC1080

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1607

16

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PD1001 to PD1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic on selection 1 *DIA1

PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting -

PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L

PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H

PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L

PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H

PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3L *DI3L

PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H

PD9, PD1009 Input device selection 4L *DI4L

PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H

PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L

PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 5H *DI5H

PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L

PD14, PD1014 Input device selection 6H *DI6H

PD15 to PD16, PD1015 to PD1016

For manufacturer setting -

PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L

PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H

PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L

PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H

PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L

PD22, PD1022 Input device selection 10H *DI10H

PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1

PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2

PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3

PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4

PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting -

PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6

PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting *DIF

PD30, PD1030 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD31, PD1031 For manufacturer setting -

PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD33, PD1033 For manufacturer setting -

PD34, PD1034 Function selection D-5 *DOP5

PD35 to PD40, PD1035 to PD1040

For manufacturer setting -

PD41, PD1041 Input signal automatic on selection 3 *DIA3

PD42, PD1042 Input signal automatic on selection 4 *DIA4

PD43, PD1043 Input device selection 11L *DI11L

PD44, PD1044 Input device selection 11H *DI11H

PD45, PD1045 Input device selection 12L *DI12L

PD46, PD1046 Input device selection 12H *DI12H

PD47 to PD48, PD1047 to PD1048

For manufacturer setting -

08 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PL1 to PL48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PL1001 to PL1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Status display ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PL1, PL1001 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 1 *LIT1

PL2, PL1002 Linear encoder resolution - Numerator *LIM

PL3, PL1003 Linear encoder resolution - Denominator *LID

PL4, PL1004 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 2 *LIT2

PL5, PL1005 Position deviation error detection level LB1

PL6, PL1006 Speed deviation error detection level LB2

PL7, PL1007 Torque/thrust deviation error detection level LB3

PL8, PL1008 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 3 *LIT3

PL9, PL1009 Magnetic pole detection voltage level LPWM

PL10 to PL16, PL1010 to PL1016

For manufacturer setting -

PL17, PL1017 Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Function selection

LTSTS

PL18, PL1018 Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Identification signal amplitude

IDLV

PL19 to PL48, PL1019 to PL1048

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Within one-revolution position (1 pulse unit) -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

ST15 to ST31 For manufacturer setting -

ST32 Internal temperature of encoder -

ST33 Settling time -

ST34 Oscillation detection frequency -

ST35 Number of tough drive operations -

ST36 to ST39 For manufacturer setting -

ST40 Unit power consumption 1 (increment of 1 W) -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1609

16

Alarm (MELSERVO-J3-*A compatible) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

ST41 Unit total power consumption 1 (increment of 1 Wh) -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency -

AL16 Servo status(alarm) analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

AL17 Servo status(alarm) analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque -

AL22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

10 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PE1 to PE64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PE1001 to PE1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PF1 to PF48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PF1001 to PF1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PE1 to PE40, PE1001 to PE1040

For manufacturer setting -

PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3

PE42 to PE43, PE1042 to PE1043

For manufacturer setting -

PE44, PE1044 Lost motion compensation positive-side compensation value selection

LMCP

PE45, PE1045 Lost motion compensation negative-side compensation value selection

LMCN

PE46, PE1046 Lost motion filter setting LMFLT

PE47, PE1047 Torque offset TOF

PE48, PE1048 Lost motion compensation function selection *LMOP

PE49, PE1049 Lost motion compensation timing LMCD

PE50, PE1050 Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band LMCT

PE51 to PE64, PE1051 to PE1064

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

PF1 to PF8, PF1001 to PF1008

For manufacturer setting -

PF9, PF1009 Function selection F-5 *FOP5

PF10 to PF14, PF1010 to PF1014

For manufacturer setting -

PF15, PF1015 Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT

PF16 to PF20, PF1016 to PF1020

For manufacturer setting -

PF21, PF1021 Drive recorder switching time setting DRT

PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting -

PF23, PF1023 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level OSCL1

PF24, PF1024 Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2

PF25, PF1025 Instantaneous power failure tough drive - Detection time CVAT

PF26 to PF30, PF1026 to PF1030

For manufacturer setting -

PF31, PF1031 Machine diagnosis function - Friction judgment speed FRIC

PF32 to PF44, PF1032 to PF1044

For manufacturer setting -

PF45, PF1045 Function selection F-12 -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1611

16

Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

PF46, PF1046 Modbus-RTU comm. - Communication time-out time -

PF47 to PF48, PF1047 to PF1048

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

ALM0 Current alarm number -

ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms -

ALM11 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed -

ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses -

ALM14 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative command pulses -

ALM15 Servo status(alarm) Command pulse frequency -

ALM16 Servo status(alarm) analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

ALM17 Servo status(alarm) analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ALM18 Servo status(alarm) Regenerative load ratio -

ALM19 Servo status(alarm) Effective load ratio -

ALM20 Servo status(alarm) Peak load ratio -

ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Instantaneous torque -

ALM22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) -

ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter -

ALM24 Servo status(alarm) Load inertia moment ratio -

ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage -

ALM26 to ALM42 For manufacturer setting -

ALM43 Servo status(alarm) Internal temperature of encoder -

ALM44 Servo status(alarm) Setting time -

ALM45 Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency -

ALM46 Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drives -

ALM47 to ALM50 For manufacturer setting -

ALM51 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption 1 (increment of 1 W) -

ALM52 Servo status(alarm) Unit total power consumption 1 (increment of 1 Wh) -

ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM204 Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM206 Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM207 Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM211 Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM212 Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM213 Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM214 Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past -

ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

12 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

ALM223 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd alarm in past -

ALM224 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th alarm in past -

ALM225 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th alarm in past -

ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past -

ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past -

ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past -

ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past -

ALM230 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past -

ALM231 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in past -

ALM232 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th alarm in past -

ALM233 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th alarm in past -

ALM234 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th alarm in past -

ALM235 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th alarm in past -

ALM240 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM241 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM242 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM243 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM244 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM245 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM254 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM255 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

MD0 Machine diagnosis data station number -

MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment(test mode) -

MD2 Machine diagnosis data status -

MD3 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction -

MD4 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction

-

MD5 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative direction -

MD6 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in negative direction

-

MD7 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is stopped) -

MD8 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is stopped) -

MD9 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is operating) -

MD10 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is operating) -

MD11 Machine diagnosis data, rated speed at forward or reverse rotation torque

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1613

16

One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

External input signal in MR-J4-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

External input signal in MR-JE-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

External output signal in MR-J4-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

External output signal in MR-JE-A ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A])

Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation -

OTS1 Error code list -

OTS2 Setting time -

OTS3 Overshoot amount -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read, refer to the following. MR-J4-_A_(-RJ)/MR-J4-03A6(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI1 External input pin statuses -

DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - System information

DI1 External input pin statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read, refer to the following. MR-JE-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI2 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read, refer to the following. MR-J4-_A_(-RJ)/MR-J4-03A6(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DO1 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read, refer to the following. MR-JE-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DO1 External output pin statuses - System information

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

ALD0 Cumulative power-on time -

ALD1 Number of inrush current switching times -

14 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) : Available : Not available

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

TMI0 Input signal for test operation -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J4-A MR-JE-A

TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1615

16

[MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1616 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1620 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1616 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Page 1616 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Specifications of word devices Page 1617 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Page 1618 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1619 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Page 1619 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1620 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Page 1638 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 2, 4 to 5

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 1 to 6

OTI One-touch tuning instruction Decimal 0 to 5

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

16 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1618 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1620 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic parameter Decimal 1 to 32 1001 to 1032

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal 1 to 80 1001 to 1080

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

PO Option setting parameter Decimal 1 to 32 1001 to 1032

PL Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter

Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

PT Positioning control parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 48

AL Alarm (current alarm, J3A compatible)

Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 25

AL Alarm (alarm history, J3A compatible)

Decimal 200 to 205 210 to 215 230 to 235

PE Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PF Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ALM Alarm (current alarm, J4A extend) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 59

ALM Alarm (alarm history, J4A extend) Decimal 200 to 215 220 to 235 240 to 255

POS Point table (position) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

SPD Point table (speed) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

ACT Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

DCT Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

DWL Point table (dwell) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

AUX Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

MCD*2 Point table (M code) Decimal 1 to 255 1001 to 1255

MD Machine diagnosis data Decimal 0 to 11

OTS One-touch tuning data Decimal 0 to 3

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 6

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 4

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1617

16

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 MCD cannot be used as a real number.

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI3.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

AL R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MCD R/W R/W -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

18 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1619 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1620 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx.

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A- RJ]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

LD Current position latch data Decimal 0 to 1

RR*2 Value of the general-purpose register (Rx)

Decimal 1 to 4 1001 to 1004

RD Value of the general-purpose register (Dx)

Decimal 1 to 4

ALD Life diagnosis Decimal 0 to 1

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 2

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to1, 3

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data LD -/- R/- -/- -/-

RR -/- R/W -/- -/-

RD -/- R/W -/- -/-

ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1619

16

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1621 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

OM Page 1621 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

TMB Page 1621 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

OTI Page 1621 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PA Page 1622 Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PB Page 1622 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PC Page 1624 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PD Page 1626 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PO Page 1627 Option setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PL Page 1628 Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PT Page 1628 Positioning control parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

ST Page 1630 Status display ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

AL Page 1631 Alarm (MELSERVO-J3-*A compatible) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PE Page 1632 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

PF Page 1633 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

ALM Page 1634 Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

POS Page 1635 Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

SPD Page 1636 Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

ACT Page 1636 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

DCT Page 1636 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

DWL Page 1636 Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

AUX Page 1636 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

MCD Page 1636 Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

MD Page 1637 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

OTS Page 1637 One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

DI Page 1637 External input signal ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

DO Page 1637 External output signal ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

LD Page 1637 Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

RR Page 1638 Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

RD Page 1638 Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

ALD Page 1638 Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

TMI Page 1638 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

TMO Page 1638 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

TMD Page 1638 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

20 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

OM5 Single-step feed operation -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OTI0 One-touch tuning start command (Basic mode) -

OTI1 One-touch tuning start command (High mode) -

OTI2 One-touch tuning start command (Low mode) -

OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command -

OTI4 Return to initial value -

OTI5 Return to value before adjustment -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1621

16

Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PA1001 to PA1032: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PB1001 to PB1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplication numerator)/number of gear teeth on machine side

*CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplication denominator)/number of gear teeth on servo motor side

*CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit/positive direction thrust limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit/negative direction thrust limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS

PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection/travel direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2

PA17, PA1017 Servo motor series setting *MSR

PA18, PA1018 Servo motor type setting *MTY

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS

PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3

PA22, PA1022 Position control composition selection *PCS

PA23, PA1023 Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting DRAT

PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 AOP4

PA25, PA1025 One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level OTHOV

PA26, PA1026 Function selection A-5 *AOP5

PA27 to PA32, PA1027 to PA1032

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control II) VRFT

PB3, PB1003 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Load to motor inertia ratio/load to motor mass ratio GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed control gain VG2

22 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency VRF12

PB21, PB1021 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping VRF13

PB22, PB1022 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping VRF14

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Load to motor inertia ratio/load to motor mass ratio after gain switching GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB

PB33, PB1033 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency after gain switching VRF1B

PB34, PB1034 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF2B

PB35, PB1035 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching VRF3B

PB36, PB1036 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching VRF4B

PB37 to PB44, PB1037 to PB1044

For manufacturer setting -

PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF

PB46, PB1046 Machine resonance suppression filter 3 NH3

PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3

PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 NH4

PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 NH5

PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5

PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21

PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency VRF22

PB54, PB1054 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping VRF23

PB55, PB1055 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping VRF24

PB56, PB1056 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency after gain switching VRF21B

PB57, PB1057 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF22B

PB58, PB1058 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching VRF23B

PB59, PB1059 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching VRF24B

PB60, PB1060 Model loop gain after gain switching PG1B

PB61 to PB64, PB1061 to PB1064

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1623

16

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC80: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PC1001 to PC1080: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PC1, PC1001 JOG operation acceleration time constant/acceleration time constant 1 STA

PC2, PC1002 JOG operation deceleration time constant/deceleration time constant 1 STB

PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant *STC

PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant/thrust command time constant TQC

PC5, PC1005 Automatic operation speed 1 SC1

PC6, PC1006 Automatic operation speed 2 SC2

PC7, PC1007 Manual operation speed 1 SC3

PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4

PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5

PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6

PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7

PC12, PC1012 Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum speed VCM

PC13, PC1013 Analog torque command maximum output TLC

PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP

PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO

PC21, PC1021 RS-422 communication function selection *SOP

PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1

PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2

PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6

PC28, PC1028 Function selection C-7 *COP7

PC29, PC1029 For manufacturer setting -

PC30, PC1030 Home position return acceleration time constant/acceleration time constant 2 STA2

PC31, PC1031 Home position return deceleration time constant/deceleration time constant 2 STB2

PC32, PC1032 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 2 CMX2

PC33, PC1033 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 3 CMX3

PC34, PC1034 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 4 CMX4

PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2/internal thrust limit 2 TL2

PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD

PC37, PC1037 Analog override offset VCO

PC38, PC1038 Analog torque command offset/limit offset TPO

PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PC41 to PC42, PC1041 to PC1042

For manufacturer setting -

PC43, PC1043 Error excessive alarm detection level ERZ

PC44, PC1044 Function selection C-9 *COP9

PC45, PC1045 Function selection C-A *COPA

PC46 to PC50, PC1046 to PC1050

For manufacturer setting -

24 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PC51, PC1051 Forced stop deceleration time constant RSBR

PC52 to PC53, PC1052 to PC1053

For manufacturer setting -

PC54, PC1054 Vertical axis freefall prevention compensation amount RSUP1

PC55 to PC59, PC1055 to PC1059

For manufacturer setting -

PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD

PC61 to PC65, PC1061 to PC1065

For manufacturer setting -

PC66, PC1066 Mark detection range+(Low) LPSPL

PC67, PC1067 Mark detection range+(High) LPSPH

PC68, PC1068 Mark detection range-(Low) LPSNL

PC69, PC1069 Mark detection range-(High) LPSNH

PC70, PC1070 Modbus-RTU Communication station number setting *SNOM

PC71, PC1071 Function selection C-F *COPF

PC72, PC1072 Function selection C-G *COPG

PC73, PC1073 Error excessive warning level ERW

PC74 to PC80, PC1074 to PC1080

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1625

16

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PD1001 to PD1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic on selection 1 *DIA1

PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting -

PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L

PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H

PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L

PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H

PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3L *DI3L

PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H

PD9, PD1009 Input device selection 4L *DI4L

PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H

PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L

PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 5H *DI5H

PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L

PD14, PD1014 Input device selection 6H *DI6H

PD15 to PD16, PD1015 to PD1016

For manufacturer setting -

PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L

PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H

PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L

PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H

PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L

PD22, PD1022 Input device selection 10H *DI10H

PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1

PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2

PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3

PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4

PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting -

PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6

PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting *DIF

PD30, PD1030 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD31, PD1031 Function selection D-2 *DOP2

PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD33, PD1033 Function selection D-4 *DOP4

PD34, PD1034 Function selection D-5 *DOP5

PD35 to PD40, PD1035 to PD1040

For manufacturer setting -

PD41, PD1041 Input signal automatic on selection 3 *DIA3

PD42, PD1042 Input signal automatic on selection 4 *DIA4

PD43, PD1043 Input device selection 11L *DI11L

PD44, PD1044 Input device selection 11H *DI11H

PD45, PD1045 Input device selection 12L *DI12L

PD46, PD1046 Input device selection 12H *DI12H

PD47, PD1047 Output device selection 7 *DO7

PD48, PD1048 For manufacturer setting -

26 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Option setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PO1 to PO32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PO1001 to PO1032: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PO1, PO1001 For manufacturer setting -

PO2, PO1002 MR-D01 input device selection 1 *ODI1

PO3, PO1003 MR-D01 input device selection 2 *ODI2

PO4, PO1004 MR-D01 input device selection 3 *ODI3

PO5, PO1005 MR-D01 input device selection 4 *ODI4

PO6, PO1006 MR-D01 input device selection 5 *ODI5

PO7, PO1007 MR-D01 input device selection 6 *ODI6

PO8, PO1008 MR-D01 output device selection 1 *ODO1

PO9, PO1009 MR-D01 output device selection 2 *ODO2

PO10, PO1010 Function selection O-1 *OOP1

PO11, PO1011 Function selection O-2 *OOP2

PO12, PO1012 Function selection O-3 *OOP3

PO13, PO1013 MR-D01 analog monitor 1 output selection OMOD1

PO14, PO1014 MR-D01 analog monitor 2 output selection OMOD2

PO15, PO1015 MR-D01 analog monitor 1 offset OMO1

PO16, PO1016 MR-D01 analog monitor 2 offset OMO2

PO17 to PO20, PO1017 to PO1020

For manufacturer setting -

PO21, PO1021 MR-D01 override offset OVCO

PO22, PO1022 MR-D01 analog torque limit offset OTLO

PO23 to PO26, PO1023 to PO1026

For manufacturer setting -

PO27, PO1027 MR-D01 input device selection 7 *ODI7

PO28, PO1028 MR-D01 input device selection 8 *ODI8

PO29 to PO32, PO1029 to PO1032

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1627

16

Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PL1 to PL48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PL1001 to PL1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Positioning control parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PT1 to PT48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PT1001 to PT1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PL1, PL1001 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 1 *LIT1

PL2, PL1002 Linear encoder resolution - Numerator *LIM

PL3, PL1003 Linear encoder resolution - Denominator *LID

PL4, PL1004 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 2 *LIT2

PL5, PL1005 Position deviation error detection level LB1

PL6, PL1006 Speed deviation error detection level LB2

PL7, PL1007 Torque/thrust deviation error detection level LB3

PL8, PL1008 Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection 3 *LIT3

PL9, PL1009 Magnetic pole detection voltage level LPWM

PL10 to PL16, PL1010 to PL1016

For manufacturer setting -

PL17, PL1017 Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Function selection LTSTS

PL18, PL1018 Magnetic pole detection - Minute position detection method - Identification signal amplitude IDLV

PL19 to PL48, PL1019 to PL1048

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection *CTY

PT2, PT1002 Function selection T-1 *TOP1

PT3, PT1003 Feeding function selection *FTY

PT4, PT1004 Home position return type *ZTY

PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed ZRF

PT6, PT1006 Creep speed CRF

PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance ZST

PT8, PT1008 Home position return position data *ZPS

PT9, PT1009 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PT10, PT1010 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PT11, PT1011 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

PT12, PT1012 Rough match output range CRP

PT13, PT1013 JOG operation JOG

PT14, PT1014 Backlash compensation *BKC

PT15, PT1015 Software limit +(Low) LMPL

PT16, PT1016 Software limit +(High) LMPH

PT17, PT1017 Software limit -(Low) LMNL

PT18, PT1018 Software limit -(High) LMNH

PT19, PT1019 Position range output address +(Low) *LPPL

PT20, PT1020 Position range output address +(High) *LPPH

PT21, PT1021 Position range output address -(Low) *LNPL

PT22, PT1022 Position range output address -(High) *LNPH

PT23, PT1023 OUT1 output setting time OUT1

PT24, PT1024 OUT2 output setting time OUT2

28 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PT25, PT1025 OUT3 output setting time OUT3

PT26, PT1026 Function selection T-2 *TOP2

PT27, PT1027 Operation mode selection *ODM

PT28, PT1028 Number of stations per rotation *STN

PT29, PT1029 Function selection T-3 *TOP3

PT30, PT1030 Mark sensor stop movement amount (Low) MSTL

PT31, PT1031 Mark sensor stop movement amount (High) MSTH

PT32 to PT33, PT1032 to PT1033

For manufacturer setting -

PT34, PT1034 Point table/program default *PDEF

PT35, PT1035 Function selection T-5 *TOP5

PT36 to PT37, PT1036 to PT1037

For manufacturer setting -

PT38, PT1038 Function selection T-7 *TOP7

PT39, PT1039 Torque limit delay time INT

PT40, PT1040 Station home position shift distance *SZS

PT41, PT1041 Home position return inhibit selection ORP

PT42, PT1042 Digital override minimum multiplication *OVM

PT43, PT1043 Digital override pitch width *OVS

PT44, PT1044 For manufacturer setting -

PT45, PT1045 Home position return type 2 *CZTY

PT46 to PT48, PT1046 to PT1048

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1629

16

Status display ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Virtual device name Name Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Analog speed command voltage/analog speed limit voltage -

ST6 Analog torque limit voltage/analog torque command voltage -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Within one-revolution position -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

ST15 Load-side cumulative feedback pulses -

ST16 Load-side droop pulses -

ST17 Load-side encoder information 1 -

ST18 Load-side encoder information 2 -

ST19 to ST21 For manufacturer setting -

ST22 Temperature of servo motor thermistor -

ST23 Servo motor-side cumulative feedback pulses (before gear) -

ST24 Electrical angle -

ST25 to ST29 For manufacturer setting -

ST30 Servo motor-side/load-side position deviation -

ST31 Servo motor-side/load-side speed deviation -

ST32 Internal temperature of encoder -

ST33 Settling time -

ST34 Oscillation detection frequency -

ST35 Number of tough drive operations -

ST36 to ST39 For manufacturer setting -

ST40 Unit power consumption -

ST41 Unit total power consumption -

ST42 Current position -

ST43 Command position -

ST44 Command remaining distance -

ST45 Point table No./program No./station position No. -

ST46 Step No. -

ST47 Analog override voltage -

ST48 Override level -

30 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm (MELSERVO-J3-*A compatible) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Virtual device name Name Symbol AL0 Current alarm number -

AL1 Detailed data of current alarms -

AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative feedback pulses -

AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed -

AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses -

AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses -

AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency -

AL16 Servo status(alarm) analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

AL17 Servo status(alarm) analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio -

AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio -

AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio -

AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs Instantaneous torque -

AL22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) -

AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter -

AL24 Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio -

AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage -

AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past -

AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past -

AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past -

AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past -

AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past -

AL230 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

AL231 Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in past -

AL232 Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm in past -

AL233 Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in past -

AL234 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm in past -

AL235 Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in past -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1631

16

Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PE1 to PE64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PE1001 to PE1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PE1, PE1001 Fully closed loop function selection 1 *FCT1

PE2, PE1002 For manufacturer setting -

PE3, PE1003 Fully closed loop function selection 2 *FCT2

PE4, PE1004 Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 - Numerator *FBN

PE5, PE1005 Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 - Denominator *FBD

PE6, PE1006 Fully closed loop control - Speed deviation error detection level BC1

PE7, PE1007 Fully closed loop control - Position deviation error detection level BC2

PE8, PE1008 Fully closed loop dual feedback filter DUF

PE9, PE1009 For manufacturer setting -

PE10, PE1010 Fully closed loop function selection 3 FCT3

PE11 to PE33, PE1011 to PE1033

For manufacturer setting -

PE34, PE1034 Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 - Numerator *FBN2

PE35, PE1035 Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 - Denominator *FBD2

PE36 to PE40, PE1036 to PE1040

For manufacturer setting -

PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3

PE42 to PE43, PE1042 to PE1043

For manufacturer setting -

PE44, PE1044 Lost motion compensation positive-side compensation value selection LMCP

PE45, PE1045 Lost motion compensation negative-side compensation value selection LMCN

PE46, PE1046 Lost motion filter setting LMFLT

PE47, PE1047 Torque offset TOF

PE48, PE1048 Lost motion compensation function selection *LMOP

PE49, PE1049 Lost motion compensation timing LMCD

PE50, PE1050 Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band LMCT

PE51 to PE64, PE1051 to PE1064

For manufacturer setting -

32 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PF1 to PF48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PF1001 to PF1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Virtual device name Name Symbol PF1 to PF8, PF1001 to PF1008 For manufacturer setting -

PF9, PF1009 Function selection F-5 *FOP5

PF10 to PF14, PF1010 to PF1014

For manufacturer setting -

PF15, PF1015 Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT

PF16 to PF17, PF1016 to PF1017

For manufacturer setting -

PF18, PF1018 STO diagnosis error detection time *STOD

PF19 to PF20, PF1019 to PF1020

For manufacturer setting -

PF21, PF1021 Drive recorder switching time setting DRT

PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting -

PF23, PF1023 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level OSCL1

PF24, PF1024 Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2

PF25, PF1025 SEMI-F47 function - Instantaneous power failure detection time CVAT

PF26 to PF30, PF1026 to PF1030

For manufacturer setting -

PF31, PF1031 Machine diagnosis function - Friction judgment speed FRIC

PF32 to PF33, PF1032 to PF1033

For manufacturer setting -

PF34, PF1034 RS-422 communication function selection 3 *SOP3

PF35 to PF44, PF1035 to PF1044

For manufacturer setting -

PF45, PF1045 Function selection F-12 *FOP12

PF46, PF1046 Modbus-RTU comm. - Communication time-out time MIC

PF47 to PF48, PF1047 to PF1048

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1633

16

Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Virtual device name Name Symbol ALM0 Current alarm number -

ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms -

ALM11 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed -

ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses -

ALM14 Servo status(alarm) cumulative command pulses -

ALM15 Servo status(alarm) command pulse frequency -

ALM16 Servo status(alarm) analog speed command voltage/limit voltage -

ALM17 Servo status(alarm) analog torque command voltage/limit voltage -

ALM18 Servo status(alarm) regenerative load ratio -

ALM19 Servo status(alarm) effective load ratio -

ALM20 Servo status(alarm) peak load ratio -

ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Instantaneous torque -

ALM22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) -

ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter -

ALM24 Servo status(alarm) load inertia moment ratio -

ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage -

ALM26 Servo status(alarm) Load-side cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM27 Servo status(alarm) Load-side droop pulses -

ALM28 Servo status(alarm) Load-side encoder information 1 -

ALM29 Servo status(alarm) Load-side encoder information 2 -

ALM30 to ALM32 For manufacturer setting -

ALM33 Servo status(alarm) Temperature of servo motor thermistor -

ALM34 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor-side cumulative feedback pulses (before gear) -

ALM35 Servo status(alarm) Electrical angle -

ALM36 to ALM40 For manufacturer setting -

ALM41 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor-side/load-side position deviation -

ALM42 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor-side/load-side speed deviation -

ALM43 Servo status(alarm) Internal temperature of encoder -

ALM44 Servo status(alarm) Settling time -

ALM45 Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency -

ALM46 Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drives -

ALM47 to ALM50 For manufacturer setting -

ALM51 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption -

ALM52 Servo status(alarm) Unit total power consumption -

ALM53 Servo status(alarm) Current position -

ALM54 Servo status(alarm) Command position -

ALM55 Servo status(alarm) Command remaining distance -

ALM56 Servo status(alarm) Point table No./Program No./Station position No. -

ALM57 Servo status(alarm) Step No. -

ALM58 Servo status(alarm) Analog override voltage -

ALM59 Servo status(alarm) Override level -

ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM204 Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM206 Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM207 Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

34 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. POS1 to POS255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. POS1001 to POS1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM211 Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM212 Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM213 Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM214 Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past -

ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past -

ALM223 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd alarm in past -

ALM224 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th alarm in past -

ALM225 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th alarm in past -

ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past -

ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past -

ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past -

ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past -

ALM230 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past -

ALM231 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in past -

ALM232 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th alarm in past -

ALM233 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th alarm in past -

ALM234 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th alarm in past -

ALM235 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th alarm in past -

ALM240 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM241 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM242 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM243 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM244 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM245 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM254 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM255 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

Virtual device name Name Symbol POS1 to POS255, POS1001 to POS1255

Point table/position data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1635

16

Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. SPD1 to SPD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. SPD1001 to SPD1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. ACT1 to ACT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. ACT1001 to ACT1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DCT1 to DCT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DCT1001 to DCT1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DWL1 to DWL255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. DWL1001 to DWL1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. AUX1 to AUX255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. AUX1001 to AUX1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. MCD1 to MCD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. MCD1001 to MCD1255: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Virtual device name Name Symbol SPD1 to SPD255, SPD1001 to SPD1255

Point table/speed data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ACT1 to ACT255, ACT1001 to ACT1255

Point table/acceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DCT1 to DCT255, DCT1001 to DCT1255

Point table/deceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255

Point table/dwell No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255

Point table/auxiliary function No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name Name Symbol MCD1 to MCD255, MCD1001 to MCD1255

Point table/M code No.1 to No.255 -

36 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

External input signal ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Virtual device name Name Symbol MD0 Machine diagnosis data, station number -

MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment(test mode) -

MD2 Machine diagnosis data status -

MD3 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction -

MD4 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction -

MD5 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative direction -

MD6 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in negative direction -

MD7 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is stopped) -

MD8 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is stopped) -

MD9 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is operating) -

MD10 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is operating) -

MD11 Machine diagnosis data, rated speed at forward or reverse rotation torque -

Virtual device name Name Symbol OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation -

OTS1 Error code list -

OTS2 Settling time -

OTS3 Overshoot amount -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J4-_A_(-RJ)/MR-J4-03A6(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI3 External input pin statuses -

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to be read or written, refer to the following. MR-J4-_A_(-RJ)/MR-J4-03A6(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - For the mapping of the bits corresponding to the data to

be read, refer to the following. MR-J4-_A_(-RJ)/MR-J4-03sA6(-RJ) SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DO4 External output pin statuses -

Virtual device name Name Symbol LD0 Position data unit -

LD1 Current position latch data -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1637

16

Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. RR1 to RR4: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. RR1001 to RR1004: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1539 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J2M-P8A])

Virtual device name Name Symbol RR1, RR1001 Value of the general-purpose register (R1) -

RR2, RR1002 Value of the general-purpose register (R2) -

RR3, RR1003 Value of the general-purpose register (R3) -

RR4, RR1004 Value of the general-purpose register (R4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol RD1 Value of the general-purpose register (D1) -

RD2 Value of the general-purpose register (D2) -

RD3 Value of the general-purpose register (D3) -

RD4 Value of the general-purpose register (D4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ALD0 Cumulative power-on time -

ALD1 Number of inrush current switching times -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 -

TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 -

TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

38 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-JE-*C]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1639 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1642 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1639 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Page 1639 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Specifications of word devices Page 1640 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Page 1641 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1641 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Page 1642 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1642 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Page 1656 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal 0 to 2 4 to 5

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal 1 to 6

OTI One-touch tuning instruction Decimal 0 to 5

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1639

16

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1641 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1642 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic setting parameter Decimal 1 to 32 1001 to 1032

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal 1 to 80 1001 to 1080

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

PT Positioning control parameter Decimal 1 to 80 1001 to 1080

PN Network setting parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ST Status display Decimal 0 to 48

PE Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal 1 to 64 1001 to 1064

PF Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal 1 to 48 1001 to 1048

ALM Alarm (Current alarm) Decimal 0 to 1 11 to 59

ALM Alarm (Alarm history) Decimal 200 to 215 220 to 235 240 to 255

MD Machine diagnosis data Decimal 0 to 11

OTS One-touch tuning data Decimal 0 to 3

DI External input signal Decimal 0 to 6

DO External output signal Decimal 0 to 4

40 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI3.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1642 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1642 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS R/- R/- -/- -/-

DI*1 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

LD Current position latch data Decimal 0 to 1

RR Value of the general-purpose register (Rx)

Decimal 1 to 4 1001 to 1004

RD Value of the general-purpose register (Dx)

Decimal 1 to 4

ALD Life diagnosis Decimal 0 to 1

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal 0 to 2

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal 0 to 1, 3

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1641

16

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data LD -/- R/- -/- -/-

RR -/- R/W -/- -/-

RD -/- R/W -/- -/-

ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1643 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

OM Page 1643 Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

TMB Page 1643 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

OTI Page 1643 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PA Page 1644 Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PB Page 1644 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PC Page 1646 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PD Page 1648 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PT Page 1649 Positioning control parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PN Page 1650 Network setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

ST Page 1651 Status display ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PE Page 1651 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

PF Page 1652 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

ALM Page 1652 Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

MD Page 1654 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

OTS Page 1654 One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

DI Page 1654 External input signal ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

DO Page 1654 External output signal ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

LD Page 1655 Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

RR Page 1655 Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

RD Page 1655 Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

ALD Page 1655 Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

TMI Page 1655 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

TMO Page 1655 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

TMD Page 1656 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

42 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Virtual device name Name Symbol SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

OM5 Single-step feed operation -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch. Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name Name Symbol OTI0 One-touch tuning start command (Basic mode) -

OTI1 One-touch tuning start command (High mode) -

OTI2 One-touch tuning start command (Low mode) -

OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command -

OTI4 Return to initial value -

OTI5 Return to value before adjustment -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1643

16

Basic parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PA1001 to PA1032: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PB1001 to PB1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS

PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR

PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2

PA17 to PA18, PA1017 to PA1018

For manufacturer setting -

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS

PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3

PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting -

PA23, PA1023 Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting DRAT

PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 *AOP4

PA25, PA1025 One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level OTHOV

PA26, PA1026 Function selection A-5 *AOP5

PA27, PA1027 For manufacturer setting -

PA28, PA1028 Function selection A-6 *AOP6

PA29 to PA32, PA1029 to PA1032

For manufacturer setting -

Device name Name Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration suppression control II) VRFT

PB3, PB1003 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) PST

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Load inertia moment ratio GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position control gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed control gain VG2

44 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency VRF12

PB21, PB1021 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping VRF13

PB22, PB1022 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping VRF14

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter setting VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Load to motor inertia ratio after gain switching GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Position loop gain after gain switching PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain after gain switching VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Speed integral compensation after gain switching VICB

PB33, PB1033 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency after gain switching VRF1B

PB34, PB1034 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF2B

PB35, PB1035 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching VRF3B

PB36, PB1036 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching VRF4B

PB37 to PB44, PB1037 to PB1044

For manufacturer setting -

PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF

PB46, PB1046 Machine resonance suppression filter 3 NH3

PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3

PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 NH4

PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 NH5

PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5

PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21

PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency VRF22

PB54, PB1054 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping VRF23

PB55, PB1055 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping VRF24

PB56, PB1056 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency after gain switching VRF21B

PB57, PB1057 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency after gain switching VRF22B

PB58, PB1058 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency damping after gain switching VRF23B

PB59, PB1059 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency damping after gain switching VRF24B

PB60, PB1060 Model loop gain after gain switching PG1B

PB61 to PB64, PB1061 to PB1064

For manufacturer setting -

Device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1645

16

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC80: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PC1001 to PC1080: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA

PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB

PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant STC

PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC

PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command 1 SC1

PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command 2 SC2

PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command 3 SC3

PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command 4 SC4

PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command 5 SC5

PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command 6 SC6

PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command 7 SC7

PC12, PC1012 Analog speed command maximum speed VCM

PC13, PC1013 Analog torque command maximum output TLC

PC14 to PC15, PC1014 to PC1015

For manufacturer setting -

PC16, PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP

PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC20 to PC21, PC1020 to PC1021

For manufacturer setting -

PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1

PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2

PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC25, PC1025 Function selection C-4 *COP3

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5

PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6

PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting -

PC29, PC1029 Function selection C-8 *COP7

PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2

PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2

PC32, PC1032 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 2 CMX2

PC33, PC1033 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 3 CMX3

PC34, PC1034 Command input pulse multiplication numerator 4 CMX4

PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

PC36, PC1036 For manufacturer setting -

PC37, PC1037 Analog speed command offset VCO

PC38, PC1038 Analog torque command offset TPO

PC39 to PC42, PC1039 to PC1042

For manufacturer setting -

PC43, PC1043 Error excessive alarm detection level ERZ

PC44 to PC50, PC1044 to PC1050

For manufacturer setting -

PC51, PC1051 Forced stop deceleration time constant RSBR

PC52 to PC53, PC1052 to PC1053

For manufacturer setting -

PC54, PC1054 Vertical axis freefall prevention compensation amount RSUP1

46 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PC55 to PC59, PC1055 to PC1059

For manufacturer setting -

PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD

PC61 to PC72, PC1061 to PC1072

For manufacturer setting -

PC73, PC1073 Error excessive warning level ERW

PC74, PC1074 For manufacturer setting -

PC75, PC1075 Following error output level FEWL

PC76, PC1076 Following error output level FEWH

PC77, PC1077 Following error output filtering time FEWF

PC78 to PC80, PC1078 to PC1080

For manufacturer setting -

Device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1647

16

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PD1001 to PD1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic on selection 1 *DIA1

PD2 to PD4, PD1002 to PD1004 For manufacturer setting -

PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 1L *DI1L

PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 1M *DI1M

PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 1H *DI1H

PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 2L *DI2L

PD9, PD1009 Input device selection 2M *DI2M

PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 2H *DI2H

PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 3L *DI3L

PD12, PD1012 Input device selection 3M *DI3M

PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 3H *DI3H

PD14, PD1014 Input device selection 4L *DI4L

PD15, PD1015 Input device selection 4M *DI4M

PD16, PD1016 Input device selection 4H *DI4H

PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 5L *DI5L

PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 5M *DI5M

PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 5H *DI5H

PD20 to 22, PD1020 to PD1022 For manufacturer setting -

PD23, PD1023 Input device selection 7L *DI7L

PD24, PD1024 Input device selection 7M *DI7M

PD25, PD1025 Input device selection 7H *DI7H

PD26, PD1026 Input device selection 8L *DI8L

PD27, PD1027 Input device selection 8M *DI8M

PD28, PD1028 Input device selection 8H *DI8H

PD29, PD1029 Output device selection 1 *DO1

PD30, PD1030 Output device selection 2 *DO2

PD31, PD1031 Output device selection 3 *DO3

PD32, PD1032 Output device selection 4 *DO4

PD33, PD1033 For manufacturer setting -

PD34, PD1034 Input filter setting *DIF

PD35, PD1035 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD36, PD1036 For manufacturer setting -

PD37, PD1037 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD38, PD1038 Function selection D-4 *DOP4

PD39, PD1039 Function selection D-5 *DOP5

PD40 to PD48, PD1040 to PD1048

For manufacturer setting -

48 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Positioning control parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PT1 to PT80: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PT1001 to PT1080: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection *CTY

PT2, PT1002 For manufacturer setting -

PT3, PT1003 Feeding function selection *FTY

PT4, PT1004 For manufacturer setting -

PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed ZRF

PT6, PT1006 Creep speed CRF

PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance ZST

PT8, PT1008 For manufacturer setting -

PT9, PT1009 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PT10, PT1010 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PT11, PT1011 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

PT12 to PT14, PT1012 to PT1014

For manufacturer setting -

PT15, PT1015 Software limit + LMPL

PT16, PT1016 Software limit + LMPH

PT17, PT1017 Software limit - LMNL

PT18, PT1018 Software limit - LMNH

PT19 to 25, PT1019 to PT1025 For manufacturer setting -

PT26, PT1026 Function selection T-2 *TOP2

PT27 to 28, PT1027 to PT1028 For manufacturer setting -

PT29, PT1029 Function selection T-3 *TOP3

PT30 to PT40, PT1030 to PT1040

For manufacturer setting -

PT41, PT1041 Home position return inhibit selection ORP

PT42 to PT44, PT1042 to PT1044

For manufacturer setting -

PT45, PT1045 Home position return method HMM

PT46 to PT48, PT1046 to PT1048

For manufacturer setting -

PT49, PT1049 Torque slope TQS

PT50, PT1050 Profile speed command PVC

PT51, PT1051 Maximum profile speed MPVC

PT52, PT1052 Speed limit VLMT

PT53 to 56, PT1053 to PT1056 For manufacturer setting -

PT57, PT1057 Home position shift distance (extension parameter) ZSTH

PT58, PT1058 For manufacturer setting *ZPSH

PT59, PT1059 Travel distance after proximity dog (extension parameter) DCTH

PT60, PT1060 Function selection T-8 *TOP8

PT61, PT1061 Home position return acceleration time constant HMA

PT62, PT1062 Home position return deceleration time constant HMB

PT63, PT1063 Zero speed 2 level ZSP2L

PT64, PT1064 Zero speed 2 filter time ZSP2F

PT65, PT1065 In-position 2 output range INP2R

PT66, PT1066 In-position 2 output filter time INP2F

PT67, PT1067 Speed reached 2 output range SA2R

PT68, PT1068 Speed reached 2 output filter time SA2F

PT69 to 80, PT1069 to PT1080 For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1649

16

Network setting parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PN1 to PN48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PN1001 to PN1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol PN1, PN1001 For manufacturer setting -

PN2, PN1002 Communication error detection time CERT

PN3 to PN5, PN1003 to PN1005 For manufacturer setting -

PN6, PN1006 Function selection N-1 NOP1

PN7, PN1007 For manufacturer setting -

PN8, PN1008 Function selection N-2 NOP2

PN9, PN1009 For manufacturer setting -

PN10, PN1010 Ethernet communication time-out selection EIC

PN11, PN1011 IP address setting 1 *IPAD1

PN12, PN1012 IP address setting 2 *IPAD2

PN13, PN1013 IP address setting 3 *IPAD3

PN14, PN1014 IP address setting 4 *IPAD4

PN15, PN1015 Subnet mask setting 1 *SNMK1

PN16, PN1016 Subnet mask setting 2 *SNMK2

PN17, PN1017 Subnet mask setting 3 *SNMK3

PN18, PN1018 Subnet mask setting 4 *SNMK4

PN19, PN1019 Default gateway setting 1 *DGW1

PN20, PN1020 Default gateway setting 2 *DGW2

PN21, PN1021 Default gateway setting 3 *DGW3

PN22, PN1022 Default gateway setting 4 *DGW4

PN23, PN1023 KeepAlive time *KAA

PN24, PN1024 IP address filter 1 *IPAF1

PN25, PN1025 IP address filter 2 *IPAF2

PN26, PN1026 IP address filter 3 *IPAF3

PN27, PN1027 IP address filter 4 *IPAF4

PN28, PN1028 IP address filter 2 range specification *IPFR2

PN29, PN1029 IP address filter 3 range specification *IPFR3

PN30, PN1030 IP address filter 4 range specification *IPFR4

PN31, PN1031 Operation specification IP address 1 *IPOA1

PN32, PN1032 Operation specification IP address 2 *IPOA2

PN33, PN1033 Operation specification IP address 3 *IPOA3

PN34, PN1034 Operation specification IP address 4 *IPOA4

PN35, PN1035 Operation specification IP address 3 range spec. *IPOR3

PN36, PN1036 Operation specification IP address 4 range spec. *IPOR4

PN37 to PN48, PN1037 to PN1048

For manufacturer setting -

50 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Status display ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PE1 to PE64: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PE1001 to PE1064: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Device name Name Symbol ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 Analog speed command voltage -

ST6 Analog torque command voltage -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Within one-revolution position -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load inertia moment ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

ST15 to ST31 For manufacturer setting -

ST32 Encoder inside temperature -

ST33 Settling time -

ST34 Oscillation detection frequency -

ST35 Number of tough drive operations -

ST36 to ST39 For manufacturer setting -

ST40 Unit power consumption -

ST41 Unit total power consumption -

ST42 Current position -

ST43 Command position -

ST44 Command remaining distance -

ST45 to ST48 For manufacturer setting -

Device name Name Symbol PE1 to PE40, PE1001 to PE1040

For manufacturer setting -

PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3

PE42 to PE43, PE1042 to PE1043

For manufacturer setting -

PE44, PE1044 Lost motion compensation positive-side compensation value selection LMCP

PE45, PE1045 Lost motion compensation negative-side compensation value selection LMCN

PE46, PE1046 Lost motion filter setting LMFLT

PE47, PE1047 Torque offset TOF

PE48, PE1048 Lost motion compensation function selection *LMOP

PE49, PE1049 Lost motion compensation timing LMCD

PE50, PE1050 Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band LMCT

PE51 to PE64, PE1051 to PE1064

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1651

16

Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PF1 to PF48: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. PF1001 to PF1048: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier. For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.

Alarm (MELSERVO-J4-*A extended) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Device name Name Symbol PF1 to PF8, PF1001 to PF1008 For manufacturer setting -

PF9, PF1009 Function selection F-5 *FOP5

PF10 to PF14, PF1010 to PF1014

For manufacturer setting -

PF15, PF1015 Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT

PF16 to PF20, PF1016 to PF1020

For manufacturer setting -

PF21, PF1021 Drive recorder switching time setting DRT

PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting -

PF23, PF1023 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level OSCL1

PF24, PF1024 Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2

PF25, PF1025 Instantaneous power failure tough drive - Detection time CVAT

PF26 to PF30, PF1026 to PF1030

For manufacturer setting -

PF31, PF1031 Machine diagnosis function - Friction judgment speed FRIC

PF32 to PF48, PF1032 to PF1048

For manufacturer setting -

Device name Name Symbol ALM0 Current alarm number -

ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms -

ALM11 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed -

ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses -

ALM14 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative command pulses -

ALM15 Servo status(alarm) Command pulse frequency -

ALM16 Servo status(alarm) Analog speed command voltage -

ALM17 Servo status(alarm) Analog torque command voltage -

ALM18 Servo status(alarm) Regenerative load ratio -

ALM19 Servo status(alarm) Effective load ratio -

ALM20 Servo status(alarm) Peak load ratio -

ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Instantaneous torque -

ALM22 Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution position -

ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter -

ALM24 Servo status(alarm) Load inertia moment ratio -

ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage -

ALM26 to ALM42 For manufacturer setting -

ALM43 Servo status(alarm) Internal temperature of encoder -

ALM44 Servo status(alarm) Settling time -

ALM45 Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency -

ALM46 Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drives -

ALM47 to ALM50 For manufacturer setting -

ALM51 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption -

ALM52 Servo status(alarm) Unit total power consumption -

ALM53 Servo status(alarm) Current position -

ALM54 Servo status(alarm) Command position -

52 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM55 Servo status(alarm) Command remaining distance -

ALM56 to ALM59 For manufacturer setting -

ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM204 Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM205 Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM206 Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM207 Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM208 Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

ALM209 Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM210 Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM211 Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM212 Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM213 Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM214 Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm -

ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past -

ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past -

ALM223 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd alarm in past -

ALM224 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th alarm in past -

ALM225 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th alarm in past -

ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past -

ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past -

ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past -

ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past -

ALM230 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past -

ALM231 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in past -

ALM232 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th alarm in past -

ALM233 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th alarm in past -

ALM234 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th alarm in past -

ALM235 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th alarm in past -

ALM240 Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent alarm -

ALM241 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in past -

ALM242 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past -

ALM243 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past -

ALM244 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in past -

ALM245 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in past -

ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in past -

ALM247 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in past -

ALM248 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in past -

ALM249 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in past -

ALM250 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in past -

ALM251 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in past -

ALM252 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 12th alarm in past -

ALM253 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 13th alarm in past -

ALM254 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in past -

ALM255 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in past -

Device name Name Symbol

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1653

16

Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

*1 While the servo amplifier is estimating the corresponding machine status in the machine diagnosis, do not write data to the parameters of the servo amplifier from another GOT. Doing so may cause the servo amplifier to malfunction.

*2 When MD2 indicates that the servo amplifier does not complete the machine diagnosis (is estimating or warning of the machine status), do not monitor MD3 to MD6 (friction states) and MD7 to MD10 (vibration/oscillation states). To start monitoring those devices upon the estimation completion, set [Trigger] in the applicable object settings.

One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

External input signal ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

External output signal ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Virtual device name Name Symbol MD0 Machine diagnosis data parameter number -

MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment(test mode) -

MD2*1 Machine diagnosis data status -

MD3*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction -

MD4*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction -

MD5*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative direction -

MD6*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in negative direction -

MD7*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is stopped) -

MD8*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is stopped) -

MD9*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is operating) -

MD10*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is operating) -

MD11 Machine diagnosis data, rated speed at forward or reverse rotation torque -

Virtual device name Name Symbol OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation -

OTS1 Error code list -

OTS2 Settling time -

OTS3 Overshoot amount -

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DI0 Input device statuses - System information

DI1 Input device statuses -

DI2 Input device statuses -

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-JE-_C SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- System information

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

-

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

-

Virtual device name Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier DO0 Output device statuses - System information

DO1 Output device statuses -

DO2 Output device statuses -

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-JE-_C SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

54 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Current position latch data ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Value of the general-purpose register (Rx) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. RR1 to RR4: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier. RR1001 to RR1004: Writing data to the EEPROM of a servo amplifier.

Value of the general-purpose register (Dx) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Life diagnosis ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name Name Symbol LD0 Position data unit -

LD1 Current position latch data -

Virtual device name Name Symbol RR1, RR1001 Value of the general-purpose register (R1) -

RR2, RR1002 Value of the general-purpose register (R2) -

RR3, RR1003 Value of the general-purpose register (R3) -

RR4, RR1004 Value of the general-purpose register (R4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol RD1 Value of the general-purpose register (D1) -

RD2 Value of the general-purpose register (D2) -

RD3 Value of the general-purpose register (D3) -

RD4 Value of the general-purpose register (D4) -

Virtual device name Name Symbol ALD0 Cumulative power-on time -

ALD1 Number of inrush current switching times -

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 -

TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 -

TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1655

16

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-JE-*C])

When using the set data (for test operation), note the following.

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-JE-*C]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name Name Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) -

TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) -

TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

56 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]

Not available to GT2105-Q.

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1658 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1664 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

For indirect specification of an axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1657 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Page 1658 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Specifications of word devices Page 1658 Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Page 1662 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Specifications of double-word devices

Page 1663 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Page 1663 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Specifications of virtual servo amplifier devices

Page 1664 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Page 1691 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

SP Servo amplifier request Decimal AA(Axis designation)-SP(Device) Notation example: AA3-SP0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

OM Operation mode selection Decimal AA(Axis designation)-OM(Device) Notation example: AA3-OM0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 4 to 5

TMB Instruction demand (for test operation)

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-TMB(Device) Notation example: AA3-TMB1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 6

OTI One-touch tuning instruction

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-OTI(Device) Notation example: AA3-OTI0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

GFDI Gear failure diagnosis instruction

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-GFDI(Device) Notation example: AA3-GFDI0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

ECCDI Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ECCDI(Device) Notation example: AA3-ECCDI0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1657

16

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), - JET-*G]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Monitoring-supported word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1662 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1664 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

SP -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OM -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TMB -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

OTI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

GFDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

ECCDI -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

PA Basic setting parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PA(Device) Notation example: AA3-PA1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to

1044

PB Gain filter parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PB(Device) Notation example: AA3-PB1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 92, 1001 to

1092

PC Extension setting parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PC(Device) Notation example: AA3-PC1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to

1090

PD I/O setting parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PD(Device) Notation example: AA3-PD1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to

1072

58 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PT Positioning control parameters Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PT(Device) Notation example: AA3-PT1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 90, 1001 to

1090

PN Network setting parameters Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PN(Device) Notation example: AA3-PN1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to

1032

ST Status display Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ST(Device) Notation example: AA3-ST0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 48

PE Extension setting No.2 parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PE(Device) Notation example: AA3-PE1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 88, 1001 to

1088

PF Extension setting No.3 parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PF(Device) Notation example: AA3-PF1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to

1099

ALM Alarm (Current alarm) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ALM(Device) Notation example: AA3-ALM0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2, 11 to 59

ALM Alarm (Alarm history) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ALM(Device) Notation example: AA3-ALM200 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 200 to 215, 220

to 235, 240 to 255, 260 to 275, 280 to 295, 300 to 315

POS Point table (position) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-POS(Device) Notation example: AA3-POS1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

SPD Point table (speed) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-SPD(Device) Notation example: AA3-SPD1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

ACT Point table (acceleration time constant)

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ACT(Device) Notation example: AA3-ACT1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

DCT Point table (deceleration time constant)

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-DCT(Device) Notation example: AA3-DCT1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1659

16

DWL Point table (dwell) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-DWL(Device) Notation example: AA3-DWL1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

AUX Point table (auxiliary function) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-AUX(Device) Notation example: AA3-AUX1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

MCD Point table (M code) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-MCD(Device) Notation example: AA3-MCD1 Axis designation (decimal): 1 to 3

(direct), 100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 255, 1001 to

1255

MD Machine diagnosis data Decimal AA(Axis designation)-MD(Device) Notation example: AA3-MD0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 21

OTS One-touch tuning data Decimal AA(Axis designation)-OTS(Device) Notation example: AA3-OTS0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5, 3000

DI External input Decimal AA(Axis designation)-DI(Device) Notation example: AA3-DI0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 6

DO External output Decimal AA(Axis designation)-DO(Device) Notation example: AA3-DO0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 4

PO Option unit parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PO(Device) Notation example: AA3-PO1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 2, 1001 to

1002

PS Special parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PS(Device) Notation example: AA3-PS1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 99, 1001 to

1099

PL Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameters

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PL(Device) Notation example: AA3-PL1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 72, 1001 to

1072

PU Multi encoder parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PU(Device) Notation example: AA3-PU1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 44, 1001 to

1044

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

60 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

For indirect specification of an axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

PVS Position extension parameter Decimal AA(Axis designation)-PVS(Device) Notation example: AA3-PVS1 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 1 to 32, 1001 to

1032

NPA Network basic parameter Decimal 1 to 12 2001 to 2032

GFDS Gear failure diagnosis data Decimal AA(Axis designation)-GFDS(Device) Notation example: AA3-GFDS0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

ECCDS Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data

Decimal AA(Axis designation)- ECCDS(Device) Notation example: AA3-ECCDS0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 5

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1661

16

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), - JET-*G]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from word devices is available by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for OTS0 to OTS5. *2 Only reading is available for DI0 to DI3. *3 Only reading is available for NPA1, NPA8, and NPA2001 to NPA2032.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data PA R/W R/W -/- -/-

PB R/W R/W -/- -/-

PC R/W R/W -/- -/-

PD R/W R/W -/- -/-

PT R/W R/W -/- -/-

PN R/W R/W -/- -/-

ST R/- R/- -/- -/-

PE R/W R/W -/- -/-

PF R/W R/W -/- -/-

ALM R/- R/- -/- -/-

POS R/W R/W -/- -/-

SPD R/W R/W -/- -/-

ACT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DCT R/W R/W -/- -/-

DWL R/W R/W -/- -/-

AUX R/W R/W -/- -/-

MCD R/W R/W -/- -/-

MD R/- R/- -/- -/-

OTS*1 R/W R/W -/- -/-

DI*2 R/- R/W -/- -/-

DO R/- R/- -/- -/-

PO R/W R/W -/- -/-

PS R/W R/W -/- -/-

PL R/W R/W -/- -/-

PU R/W R/W -/- -/-

PVS R/W R/W -/- -/-

NPA*3 R/W R/W -/- -/-

GFDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

ECCDS R/- R/- -/- -/-

62 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for servo amplifiers. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1663 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) For details on virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1664 Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

For indirect specification of an axis designation, refer to the following. Page 1383 Indirect specification of an axis number or axis designation ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)- *G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from double-word devices is available by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

ALD Life diagnosis Decimal AA(Axis designation)-ALD(Device) Notation example: AA3-ALD0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1

TMI Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-TMI(Device) Notation example: AA3-TMI0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 2

TMO Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Decimal AA(Axis designation)-TMO(Device) Notation example: AA3-TMO0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0

TMD Set data (for test operation) Decimal AA(Axis designation)-TMD(Device) Notation example: AA3-TMD0 Axis designation: 1 to 3 (direct),

100 to 115 (indirect) Device (decimal): 0 to 1, 3

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data ALD -/- R/- -/- -/-

TMI -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMO -/- -/W -/- -/-

TMD -/- -/W -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1663

16

Virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the servo amplifier data.

Virtual device name

Reference

SP Page 1665 Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

OM Page 1665 Operation mode selection (MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

TMB Page 1665 Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

OTI Page 1666 One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

GFDI Page 1666 Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ECCDI Page 1666 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PA Page 1667 Basic setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PB Page 1668 Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PC Page 1669 Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PD Page 1671 I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PT Page 1672 Positioning control parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PN Page 1673 Network setting parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ST Page 1674 Status display ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PE Page 1675 Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PF Page 1676 Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ALM Page 1678 Alarm ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Page 1681 Specifications of ALM260 to ALM275, ALM280 to ALM295, and ALM300 to ALM315 ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), - JET-*G])

POS Page 1681 Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

SPD Page 1682 Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ACT Page 1682 Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

DCT Page 1682 Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

DWL Page 1682 Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

AUX Page 1683 Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

MCD Page 1683 Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

MD Page 1684 Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

OTS Page 1685 One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

DI Page 1685 External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Page 1686 External input signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Page 1686 External input signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

DO Page 1687 External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Page 1687 External output signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Page 1687 External output signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PO Page 1688 Option unit parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PS Page 1688 Special parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PL Page 1688 Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PU Page 1689 Multi encoder parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

PVS Page 1689 Positioning control parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

NPA Page 1690 Network basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

GFDS Page 1690 Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ECCDS Page 1690 Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

ALD Page 1690 Life Diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

TMI Page 1691 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

TMO Page 1691 Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

TMD Page 1691 Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

64 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Servo amplifier request ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the servo amplifier request, note the following.

Operation mode selection (MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the operation mode selection, note the following.

Instruction demand (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the instruction demand (for test operation), note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

SP0 Status display data clear -

SP1 Current alarm clear -

SP2 Alarm history clear -

SP3 External input signal prohibited -

SP4 External output signal prohibited -

SP5 External input signal resumed -

SP6 External output signal resumed -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

OM0 Cancel test operation mode -

OM1 JOG operation -

OM2 Positioning operation -

OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output -

OM5 Single-step feed operation -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

TMB1 Pause -

TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command -

TMB3 Forward rotation direction -

TMB4 Reverse rotation direction -

TMB5 Restart for remaining distance -

TMB6 Remaining distance clear -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1665

16

One-touch tuning instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the one-touch tuning instruction, note the following.

Gear failure diagnosis instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the gear failure diagnosis instruction, note the following.

Encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the encoder communication circuit diagnosis instruction, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

OTI0 One-touch tuning start command (Basic mode) -

OTI1 One-touch tuning start command (High mode) -

OTI2 One-touch tuning start command (Low mode) -

OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command -

OTI4 Return to initial value -

OTI5 Return to value before adjustment -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

GFDI0 Backlash estimation start command -

GFDI1 Backlash estimation stop command -

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ECCDI0 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis start command

-

ECCDI1 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis start command

-

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

66 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Basic setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PA1 to PA44: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PA1001 to PA1044: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PA1, PA1001 Operation mode **STY

PA2, PA1002 Regenerative option **REG

PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS

PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

PA5, PA1005 For manufacturer setting -

PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX

PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator *CDV

PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU

PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP

PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP

PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN

PA13, PA1013 For manufacturer setting -

PA14, PA1014 Moving direction selection *POL

PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulse *ENR

PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulse 2 *ENR2

PA17, PA1017 Servo motor series setting **MSR

PA18, PA1018 Servo motor type setting **MTY

PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS

PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3

PA22, PA1022 Position control structure selection **PCS

PA23, PA1023 Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger setting DRAT

PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 AOP4

PA25, PA1025 One-touch tuning - Overshoot permissible level OTHOV

PA26, PA1026 Function selection A-5 *AOP5

PA27, PA1027 For manufacturer setting -

PA28, PA1028 Function selection A-6 **AOP6

PA29 to PA33, PA1029 to PA1033

For manufacturer setting -

PA34, PA1034 Quick tuning permissible travel distance QDIS

PA35 to PA44, PA1035 to PA1044

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1667

16

Gain filter parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PB1 to PB92: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PB1001 to PB1092: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II) FILT

PB2, PB1002 Vib. supp. ctrl tuning mode (Adv. vib. supp. ctrl II) VRFT

PB3, PB1003 For manufacturer setting -

PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC

PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting -

PB6, PB1006 Load inertia moment ratio/Load mass ratio GD2

PB7, PB1007 Model loop gain PG1

PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2

PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2

PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC

PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC

PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA

PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1

PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1

PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2

PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF

PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

PB19, PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 - Vibration frequency VRF11

PB20, PB1020 Vibration suppression control 1 - Resonance freq. VRF12

PB21, PB1021 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vibration frequency damping VRF13

PB22, PB1022 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Resonance frequency damping VRF14

PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF

PB24, PB1024 Slight vibration suppression control *MVS

PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1

PB26, PB1026 Gain changing function *CDP

PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL

PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT

PB29, PB1029 Gain changing - Load in. mom. rat./Load mass rat. GD2B

PB30, PB1030 Gain changing position loop gain PG2B

PB31, PB1031 Gain changing speed loop gain VG2B

PB32, PB1032 Gain changing speed integral compensation VICB

PB33, PB1033 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. after gain changing VRF11B

PB34, PB1034 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. after gain changing VRF12B

PB35, PB1035 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. damping after gain chng VRF13B

PB36, PB1036 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. damping after gain chng VRF14B

PB37 to PB44, PB1037 to PB1044

For manufacturer setting -

PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF

PB46, PB1046 Machine resonance suppression filter 3 NH3

PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3

PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 NH4

PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 NH5

68 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PC1 to PC90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PC1001 to PC1090: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5

PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21

PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance freq. VRF22

PB54, PB1054 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vibration frequency damping VRF23

PB55, PB1055 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Resonance frequency damping VRF24

PB56, PB1056 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. after gain changing VRF21B

PB57, PB1057 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. after gain changing VRF22B

PB58, PB1058 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. damping after gain chng VRF23B

PB59, PB1059 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. damping after gain chng VRF24B

PB60, PB1060 Gain changing model loop gain PG1B

PB61 to PB64, PB1061 to PB1064

For manufacturer setting -

PB65, PB1065 Gain changing 2 condition CDL2

PB66, PB1066 Gain changing 2 time constant CDT2

PB67, PB1067 Gain changing 2 - Load in. mom. rat./Load mass rat. GD2C

PB68, PB1068 Gain changing 2 position loop gain PG2C

PB69, PB1069 Gain changing 2 speed loop gain VG2C

PB70, PB1070 Gain changing 2 speed integral compensation VICC

PB71, PB1071 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. after gain changing 2 VRF11C

PB72, PB1072 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. after gain changing 2 VRF12C

PB73, PB1073 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Vib. frq. damping aft. gain chng2 VRF13C

PB74, PB1074 Vib. supp. ctrl. 1 - Res. frq. damping aft. gain chng2 VRF14C

PB75, PB1075 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. after gain changing 2 VRF21C

PB76, PB1076 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. after gain changing 2 VRF22C

PB77, PB1077 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Vib. frq. damping aft. gain chng2 VRF23C

PB78, PB1078 Vib. supp. ctrl. 2 - Res. frq. damping aft. gain chng2 VRF24C

PB79, PB1079 Gain changing 2 model loop gain PG1C

PB80, PB1080 For manufacturer setting -

PB81, PB1081 Command filter *CFIL

PB82, PB1082 Position command smoothing filter time constant PFT

PB83 to PB92, PB1083 to PB1092

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PC1, PC1001 Error excessive alarm level ERZ

PC2, PC1002 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR

PC3, PC1003 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS

PC4, PC1004 Function selection C-1 **COP1

PC5, PC1005 Function selection C-2 **COP2

PC6, PC1006 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PC7, PC1007 Zero speed ZSP

PC8, PC1008 Overspeed alarm detection level OSL

PC9, PC1009 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1

PC10, PC1010 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1669

16

PC11, PC1011 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1

PC12, PC1012 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2

PC13 to PC15, PC1013 to PC1015

For manufacturer setting -

PC16, PC1016 Function selection C-3A *COP3A

PC17, PC1017 Function selection C-4 **COP4

PC18, PC1018 For manufacturer setting -

PC19, PC1019 Function selection C-6 *COP6

PC20, PC1020 Function selection C-7 *COP7

PC21, PC1021 Alarm history clear *BPS

PC22 and PC23, PC1022 and PC1023

For manufacturer setting -

PC24, PC1024 Forced stop deceleration time constant RSBR

PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting -

PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-8 **COP8

PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-9 **COP9

PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting -

PC29, PC1029 Function selection C-B *COPB

PC30, PC1030 For manufacturer setting -

PC31, PC1031 Vertical ax.freefall prevention compensation amount RSUP1

PC32 to PC37, PC1032 to PC1037

For manufacturer setting -

PC38, PC1038 Error excessive warning level ERW

PC39 to PC40, PC1039 to PC1040

For manufacturer setting -

PC41, PC1041 Function selection C-J *COPJ

PC42 to PC45, PC1042 to PC1045

For manufacturer setting -

PC46, PC1046 Drive unit function selection 2 *DUOP2

PC47 to PC64, PC1047 to PC1064

For manufacturer setting -

PC65, PC1065 Zero speed 2 level ZSP2L

PC66, PC1066 Zero speed 2 filter time ZSP2F

PC67, PC1067 Following error output level FEW

PC68, PC1068 For manufacturer setting -

PC69, PC1069 Following error output filter time FEWF

PC70, PC1070 In-position 2 output range INP2R

PC71, PC1071 In-position 2 output filter time INP2F

PC72, PC1072 Speed reached 2 output range SA2R

PC73, PC1073 Speed reached 2 output filter time SA2F

PC74 to PC75, PC1074 to PC1075

For manufacturer setting -

PC76, PC1076 Function selection C-E *COPE

PC77, PC1077 For manufacturer setting -

PC78, PC1078 Function selection C-F *COPF

PC79, PC1079 Function selection C-G *COPG

PC80, PC1080 For manufacturer setting -

PC81, PC1081 Function selection C-H **COPH

PC82 to PC90, PC1082 to PC1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

70 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

I/O setting parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PD1 to PD72: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PD1001 to PD1072: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic on selection 1 *DIA1

PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting -

PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1 *DI1

PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 2 *DI2

PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 3 *DI3

PD6, PD1006 For manufacturer setting -

PD7, PD1007 Output device selection 1 *DO1

PD8, PD1008 Output device selection 2 *DO2

PD9, PD1009 Output device selection 3 *DO3

PD10, PD1010 For manufacturer setting -

PD11, PD1011 Input filter setting *DIF

PD12, PD1012 Function selection D-1 *DOP1

PD13, PD1013 Function selection D-2 *DOP2

PD14, PD1014 Function selection D-3 *DOP3

PD15 to PD37, PD1015 to PD1037

For manufacturer setting -

PD38, PD1038 Input device selection 4 *DI4

PD39, PD1039 Input device selection 5 *DI5

PD40, PD1040 For manufacturer setting -

PD41, PD1041 Function selection D-4 *DOP4

PD42 to PD50, PD1042 to PD1050

For manufacturer setting -

PD51, PD1051 Input device selection 3-2 *DI3W2

PD52 to PD59, PD1052 to PD1059

For manufacturer setting -

PD60, PD1060 DI pin polarity selection *DIP

PD61 to PD72, PD1061 to PD1072

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1671

16

Positioning control parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PT1 to PT90: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PT1001 to PT1090: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection **CTY

PT2, PT1002 Function selection T-1 *TOP1

PT3 to PT4, PT1003 to PT1004

For manufacturer setting -

PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed ZRF

PT6, PT1006 Creep speed CRF

PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance ZST

PT8, PT1008 Home position return position data ZPS

PT9, PT1009 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT

PT10, PT1010 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM

PT11, PT1011 Stopper type home position return torque limit value ZTT

PT12, PT1012 Rough match output range CRP

PT13 to PT14, PT1013 to PT1014

For manufacturer setting -

PT15, PT1015 Software position limit+ LMP

PT16, PT1016 For manufacturer setting -

PT17, PT1017 Software position limit- LMN

PT18, PT1018 For manufacturer setting -

PT19, PT1019 Position range output 1 address+ *LPP1

PT20, PT1020 For manufacturer setting -

PT21, PT1021 Position range output 1 address- *LNP1

PT22 to PT28, PT1022 to PT1028

For manufacturer setting -

PT29, PT1029 Function selection T-3 *TOP3

PT30 to PT33, PT1030 to PT1033

For manufacturer setting -

PT34, PT1034 Positioning operation data default **PDEF

PT35 to PT37, PT1035 to PT1037

For manufacturer setting -

PT38, PT1038 Function selection T-7 **TOP7

PT39 to PT40, PT1039 to PT1040

For manufacturer setting -

PT41, PT1041 Function selection T-8 TOP8

PT42 to PT44, PT1042 to PT1044

For manufacturer setting -

PT45, PT1045 Home position return method HMM

PT46 to PT48, PT1046 to PT1048

For manufacturer setting -

PT49, PT1049 Acceleration time constant STA

PT50, PT1050 Deceleration time constant STB

PT51, PT1051 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant STC

PT52, PT1052 For manufacturer setting -

PT53, PT1053 Torque slope TQS

PT54, PT1054 For manufacturer setting -

PT55, PT1055 Function selection T-10 *TOP10

72 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Network setting parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PN1 to PN32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PN1001 to PN1032: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

PT56, PT1056 Home position return acceleration time constant HMA

PT57, PT1057 Home position return deceleration time constant HMB

PT58 to PT64, PT1058 to PT1064

For manufacturer setting -

PT65, PT1065 Profile speed command PVC

PT66, PT1066 Maximum profile speed MPVC

PT67, PT1067 Speed limit VLMT

PT68, PT1068 Function selection T-11 TOP11

PT69 to PT90, PT1069 to PT1090

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PN1, PN1001 For manufacturer setting -

PN2, PN1002 Communication error detection time CERT

PN3 to PN4, PN1003 to PN1004

For manufacturer setting -

PN5, PN1005 Communication error detection frequency setting CERI

PN6 to PN12, PN1006 to PN1012

For manufacturer setting -

PN13, PN1013 Network protocol setup **NPS

PN14 to PN19, PN1014 to PN1019

For manufacturer setting -

PN20, PN1020 Automatic parameter backup update interval **PABI

PN21, PN1021 For manufacturer setting -

PN22 , PN1022 Function selection N-5 **NOP5

PN23 to PN32, PN1023 to PN1032

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1673

16

Status display ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses -

ST1 Servo motor speed -

ST2 Droop pulses -

ST3 Cumulative command pulses -

ST4 Command pulse frequency -

ST5 to ST6 For manufacturer setting -

ST7 Regenerative load ratio -

ST8 Effective load ratio -

ST9 Peak load ratio -

ST10 Torque/Instantaneous torque -

ST11 Position within one-revolution -

ST12 ABS counter -

ST13 Load to motor inertia ratio -

ST14 Bus voltage -

ST15 Load-side cumulative feedback pulses -

ST16 Load side encoder droop pulses -

ST17 Load-side encoder information 1 -

ST18 Load-side encoder information 2 -

ST19 to ST21 For manufacturer setting -

ST22 Temperature of servo motor thermistor -

ST23 Cumulative feedback pulses (Motor unit) -

ST24 Electrical angle -

ST25 to ST29 For manufacturer setting -

ST30 Motor/load side position difference -

ST31 Motor/load side speed difference -

ST32 Encoder inside temperature -

ST33 Settling time -

ST34 Oscillation detection frequency -

ST35 Number of tough drive operations -

ST36 to ST39 For manufacturer setting -

ST40 Unit power consumption -

ST41 Unit total power consumption -

ST42 to ST48 For manufacturer setting -

74 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Extension setting No.2 parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PE1 to PE88: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PE1001 to PE1088: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PE1, PE1001 Fully closed loop function selection 1 **FCT1

PE2, PE1002 For manufacturer setting -

PE3, PE1003 Fully closed loop function selection 2 *FCT2

PE4, PE1004 Fully closed loop ctrl. - F/B pls. elec. gear 1 nmrtr. **FBN

PE5, PE1005 Fully closed loop ctrl. - F/B pls. elec. gear 1 dnmntr. **FBD

PE6, PE1006 Fully closed loop ctrl. - Spd. dev. err. detection level BC1

PE7, PE1007 Fully closed loop ctrl. - Pos. dev. err. detection level BC2

PE8, PE1008 Fully closed dual feedback filter DUF

PE9, PE1009 For manufacturer setting -

PE10, PE1010 Fully closed loop function selection 3 FCT3

PE11 to PE40, PE1011 to PE1040

For manufacturer setting -

PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3

PE42 to PE43, PE1042 to PE1043

For manufacturer setting -

PE44, PE1044 Lost motion positive side compensation value sel. LMCP

PE45, PE1045 Lost motion negative side compensation value sel. LMCN

PE46, PE1046 Lost motion filter setting LMFLT

PE47, PE1047 Unbalanced torque offset TOF

PE48, PE1048 Lost motion compensation function selection *LMOP

PE49, PE1049 Lost motion compensation timing LMCD

PE50, PE1050 Lost motion compensation dead zone LMCT

PE51, PE1051 Load-side encoder resolution setting **EDV2

PE52, PE1052 For manufacturer setting -

PE53, PE1053 Maximum torque limit 1 TLMX1

PE54 to PE88, PE1054 to PE1088

For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1675

16

Extension setting No.3 parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PF1 to PF99: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PF1001 to PF1099: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PF1, PF1001 For manufacturer setting -

PF2, PF1002 Function selection F-2 *FOP2

PF3 to PF5, PF1003 to PF1005

For manufacturer setting -

PF6, PF1006 Function selection F-5 *FOP5

PF7 to PF11, PF1007 to PF1011

For manufacturer setting -

PF12, PF1012 Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT

PF13 to PF17, PF1013 to PF1017

For manufacturer setting -

PF18, PF1018 STO diagnostic error detection time **STOD

PF19, PF1019 Friction failure prediction compen. coefficient 1 TSL

PF20, PF1020 Friction failure prediction compen. coefficient 2 TIC

PF21, PF1021 Drive recorder switching time setting DRT

PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting -

PF23, PF1023 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection level OSCL1

PF24, PF1024 Function selection F-9 *FOP9

PF25, PF1025 SEMI-F47 Inst pwr.fail.det.t. (Inst pwr.fail.tuf.drv.) CVAT

Instantaneous power failure tough drive - Detection time CVAT

PF26 to PF28, PF1026 to PF1028

For manufacturer setting -

PF29, PF1029 Function selection F-10 *FOP10

PF30, PF1030 For manufacturer setting -

PF31, PF1031 Machine diagnosis func. - Friction judgment speed FRIC

PF32, PF1032 Oscillation detection alarm time *VIBT

PF33, PF1033 For manufacturer setting -

PF34, PF1034 Machine diagnosis function selection *MFP

PF35 to PF39, PF1035 to PF1039

For manufacturer setting -

PF40, PF1040 Machine failure prediction parameter MFPP

PF41, PF1041 Failure prediction - Servo motor total move distance FPMT

PF42, PF1042 Friction failure prediction average characteristic PAV

PF43, PF1043 Friction failure prediction standard deviation PSD

PF44, PF1044 For manufacturer setting -

PF45, PF1045 Vibration failure prediction average characteristic VAV

PF46, PF1046 Vibration failure prediction standard deviation VSC

PF47, PF1047 Servo motor total move distance offset TMO

PF48 to PF65, PF1048 to PF1065

For manufacturer setting -

PF66, PF1066 Gear ratio setting for backlash estimation BLG

PF67, PF1067 Backlash nominal value BLN

PF68, PF1068 Backlash threshold magnification BLTT

PF69, PF1069 Static friction failure prediction avg. characteristic SPAV2

PF70, PF1070 Static friction failure prediction standard deviation SPSD2

PF71, PF1071 Belt failure prediction function selection BFP

76 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PF72, PF1072 Belt tension at installation SBT

PF73, PF1073 Belt tension at extension ABT

PF74, PF1074 Static friction at installation SSF

PF75, PF1075 Static friction at extension ASF

PF76, PF1076 Belt tension error threshold BTS

PF77 to PF79, PF1077 to PF1079

For manufacturer setting -

PF80, PF1080 Drive recorder Operation condition selection DRMC

PF81, PF1081 Drive recorder Sampling operation selection DRMS

PF82, PF1082 Drive recorder Trigger operation selection DRTM

PF83, PF1083 Drive recorder Trigger operation axis common sel. **DRTAX

PF84, PF1084 Drive recorder Trigger channel selection DRTC

PF85, PF1085 Drive recorder Trigger level setting 1 DRTL1

PF86, PF1086 Drive recorder Trigger level setting 2 DRTL2

PF87, PF1087 Drive recorder Analog channel setting 1 DRAC1

PF88, PF1088 Drive recorder Analog channel setting 2 DRAC2

PF89, PF1089 Drive recorder Analog channel setting 3 DRAC3

PF90, PF1090 Drive recorder Analog channel setting 4 DRAC4

PF91, PF1091 Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 DRDC1

PF92, PF1092 Drive recorder Digital channel setting 2 DRDC2

PF93, PF1093 Drive recorder Digital channel setting 3 DRDC3

PF94, PF1094 Drive recorder Digital channel setting 4 DRDC4

PF95, PF1095 Drive recorder History clear **DRCLR

PF96 to PF99, PF1096 to PF1099

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1677

16

Alarm ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ALM0 Current alarm number -

ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms -

ALM2*1 Currently occurring alarm number and detail number -

ALM11 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed -

ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses -

ALM14 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative command pulses -

ALM15 Servo status(alarm) Command pulse frequency -

ALM16 to ALM17 For manufacturer setting -

ALM18 Servo status(alarm) Regenerative load ratio -

ALM19 Servo status(alarm) Effective load ratio -

ALM20 Servo status(alarm) Peak load ratio -

ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Torque/Instantaneous torque -

ALM22 Servo status(alarm) Position within one-revolution -

ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter -

ALM24 Servo status(alarm) Load to motor inertia ratio -

ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage -

ALM26 Servo status(alarm) Load-side cumulative feedback pulses -

ALM27 Servo status(alarm) Load side encoder droop pulses -

ALM28 Servo status(alarm) Load-side encoder information 1 -

ALM29 Servo status(alarm) Load-side encoder information 2 -

ALM30 to ALM32 For manufacturer setting -

ALM33 Servo status(alarm) Temperature of servo motor thermistor -

ALM34 Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback pulses (Motor unit)

-

ALM35 Servo status(alarm) Electrical angle -

ALM36 to ALM40 For manufacturer setting -

ALM41 Servo status(alarm) Motor/load side position difference -

ALM42 Servo status(alarm) Motor/load side speed difference -

ALM43 Servo status(alarm) Encoder inside temperature -

ALM44 Servo status(alarm) Settling time -

ALM45 Servo status(alarm) Oscillation detection frequency -

ALM46 Servo status(alarm) Number of tough drive operations -

ALM47 to ALM50 For manufacturer setting -

ALM51 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption -

ALM52 Servo status(alarm) Unit power consumption -

ALM53 to ALM59 For manufacturer setting -

ALM200 Alarm number in alarm history: most recent alarm -

ALM201 Alarm number in alarm history: 1st alarm in past -

ALM202 Alarm number in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past -

ALM203 Alarm number in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past -

ALM204 Alarm number in alarm history: 4th alarm in past -

ALM205 Alarm number in alarm history: 5th alarm in past -

ALM206 Alarm number in alarm history: 6th alarm in past -

ALM207 Alarm number in alarm history: 7th alarm in past -

ALM208 Alarm number in alarm history: 8th alarm in past -

ALM209 Alarm number in alarm history: 9th alarm in past -

ALM210 Alarm number in alarm history: 10th alarm in past -

ALM211 Alarm number in alarm history: 11th alarm in past -

78 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

ALM212 Alarm number in alarm history: 12th alarm in past -

ALM213 Alarm number in alarm history: 13th alarm in past -

ALM214 Alarm number in alarm history: 14th alarm in past -

ALM215 Alarm number in alarm history: 15th alarm in past -

ALM220 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM221 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM222 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM223 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM224 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM225 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM226 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM227 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM228 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM229 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM230 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM231 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM232 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM233 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM234 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM235 Alarm occurrence time (cumulative power-on time) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM240 Alarm detail number in alarm history: most recent alarm -

ALM241 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 1st alarm in past -

ALM242 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past -

ALM243 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past -

ALM244 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 4th alarm in past -

ALM245 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 5th alarm in past -

ALM246 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 6th alarm in past -

ALM247 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 7th alarm in past -

ALM248 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 8th alarm in past -

ALM249 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 9th alarm in past -

ALM250 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 10th alarm in past -

ALM251 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 11th alarm in past -

ALM252 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 12th alarm in past -

ALM253 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 13th alarm in past -

ALM254 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 14th alarm in past -

ALM255 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 15th alarm in past -

ALM260 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM261 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1679

16

ALM262 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM263 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past -

ALM264 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 4th alarm in past -

ALM265 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 5th alarm in past -

ALM266 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 6th alarm in past -

ALM267 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 7th alarm in past -

ALM268 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 8th alarm in past -

ALM269 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 9th alarm in past -

ALM270 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 10th alarm in past -

ALM271 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 11th alarm in past -

ALM272 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 12th alarm in past -

ALM273 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 13th alarm in past -

ALM274 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 14th alarm in past -

ALM275 Alarm detail number in alarm history: 15th alarm in past -

ALM280 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM281 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM282 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM283 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM284 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

ALM285 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM286 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM287 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM288 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM289 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM290 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM291 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM292 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM293 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM294 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM295 Alarm occurrence time (year, month) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

ALM300 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: most recent alarm

-

ALM301 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 1st alarm in past

-

ALM302 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 2nd alarm in past

-

ALM303 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 3rd alarm in past

-

ALM304 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 4th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

80 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 Set [Data Type] and [Format] as shown below for the objects for which this device is set. [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN32] [Format]: [Hexadecimal]

Specifications of ALM260 to ALM275, ALM280 to ALM295, and ALM300 to ALM315 ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

The date and time of alarm occurrence are stored in BCD code in the upper eight bits and lower eight bits of each device. The time zone setting of the controller is applied to the date and time to be acquired. Example) When the date and time of the most recent alarm occurrence is 15:30:20 May 15, 2020

When the date and time of alarm occurrence are those of 1999 or earlier, 0 is displayed.

Point table (position) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. POS1 to POS255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier POS1001 to POS1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

ALM305 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 5th alarm in past

-

ALM306 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 6th alarm in past

-

ALM307 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 7th alarm in past

-

ALM308 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 8th alarm in past

-

ALM309 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 9th alarm in past

-

ALM310 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 10th alarm in past

-

ALM311 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 11th alarm in past

-

ALM312 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 12th alarm in past

-

ALM313 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 13th alarm in past

-

ALM314 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 14th alarm in past

-

ALM315 Alarm occurrence time (date, hour) in alarm history: 15th alarm in past

-

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

POS1 to POS255, POS1001 to POS1255

Point table/position data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ALM260 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8 ALM280

Date and time of alarm occurrence: 2020 / 5 / 15 15:30:20 (Binary Coded Decimal)

ALM300 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

b7 to b0b15 to b8

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1681

16

Point table (speed) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. SPD1 to SPD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier SPD1001 to SPD1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (acceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. ACT1 to ACT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier ACT1001 to ACT1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (deceleration time constant) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DCT1 to DCT255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier DCT1001 to DCT1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (dwell) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. DWL1 to DWL255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier DWL1001 to DWL1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

SPD1 to SPD255, SPD1001 to SPD1255

Point table/speed data No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ACT1 to ACT255, ACT1001 to ACT1255

Point table/acceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

DCT1 to DCT255, DCT1001 to DCT1255

Point table/deceleration time constant No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255

Point table/dwell No. 1 to No. 255 -

82 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Point table (auxiliary function) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. AUX1 to AUX255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier AUX1001 to AUX1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Point table (M code) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. MCD1 to MCD255: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier MCD1001 to MCD1255: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255

Point table/auxiliary function No. 1 to No. 255 -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

MCD1 to MCD255, MCD1001 to MCD1255

Point table/M code No. 1 to No. 255 -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1683

16

Machine diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

*1 While the servo amplifier is estimating the corresponding machine status in the machine diagnosis, do not write data to the parameters of the servo amplifier from another GOT. Doing so may cause the servo amplifier to malfunction.

*2 When MD2 indicates that the servo amplifier does not complete the machine diagnosis (is estimating or warning of the machine status), do not monitor MD3 to MD6 (friction states) and MD7 to MD10 (vibration/oscillation states). To start monitoring those devices upon the estimation completion, set [Trigger] in the applicable object settings.

*3 The commands assigned to MD12 to MD21 are not supported by MR-JET-G. When the commands are used, the read values will be indefinite.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

MD0 Machine diagnosis data: Station number -

MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment(test mode) -

MD2*1 Machine diagnosis data status -

MD3*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction

-

MD4*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction

-

MD5*2 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative direction

-

MD6*2 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in negative direction

-

MD7*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is stopped)

-

MD8*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is stopped) -

MD9*2 Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency(motor is operating)

-

MD10*2 Machine diagnosis data vibration level(motor is operating) -

MD11 Machine diagnosis data, rated speed at forward or reverse rotation torque

-

MD12 Machine diagnosis data: friction failure prediction - threshold creation progress

- *3

MD13 Machine diagnosis data: vibration failure prediction - threshold creation progress

- *3

MD14 Machine diagnosis data motor total move distance - *3

MD15 Machine diagnosis data, friction failure prediction, upper threshold at forward rotation torque, lower threshold at reverse rotation torque

- *3

MD16 Machine diagnosis data, friction failure prediction, lower threshold at forward rotation torque, upper threshold at reverse rotation torque

- *3

MD17 Machine diagnosis data: vibration failure prediction - threshold acquisition

- *3

MD18 Machine diagnosis data trouble prediction status - *3

MD19 Machine diagnosis data: Belt tension estimation value - *3

MD20 Machine diagnosis data: static friction used in failure prediction

- *3

MD21 Machine diagnosis data: Belt tension threshold estimation - *3

84 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

One-touch tuning data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

*1 Writing is not available when a negative value is set for the device value.

External input signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation -

OTS1 Error code list -

OTS2 Setting time -

OTS3 Overshoot amount -

OTS4 One-touch tuning command mode -

OTS5 Load inertia moment ratio -

OTS3000*1 Read/write permissible move distance -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI1 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI2 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The input device statuses switched on through communications (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1685

16

External input signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

External input signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DI0 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI1 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI2 Input device statuses - The input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI3 External input pin statuses - The statuses of the listed input devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the input devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of the input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0000 to 001F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The statuses of input devices switched on through communication (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0020 to 003F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication

- The input device statuses switched on through communications (input device statuses corresponding to the setting values 0040 to 005F of the following) are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

Virtual device name Name Symbol DI0 Input device statuses -

DI1 Input device statuses -

DI2 Input device statuses -

DI3 External input pin statuses -

DI4 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication -

86 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

External output signal in MR-J5-G(-RJ) and MR-J5W-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

External output signal in MR-J5D-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

External output signal in MR-JET-G ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8000 to 801F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO1 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8020 to 803F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO2 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8040 to 805F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

Virtual device name

Name Symbol Data to be read from the servo amplifier

DO0 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8000 to 801F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO1 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8020 to 803F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO2 Output device statuses - The output device statuses corresponding to the setting values 8040 to 805F of the following are read. Pr. PF91_Drive recorder Digital channel setting 1 (DRDC1)

DO4 External output pin statuses - The statuses of the listed output devices are assigned to the bits in order from bit 0 and read. For details on the output devices, refer to the following. MR-J5 User's Manual (Hardware)

Virtual device name Name Symbol DO0 Output device statuses -

DO1 Output device statuses -

DO2 Output device statuses -

DO4 External output pin statuses -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1687

16

Option unit parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PO1 to PO2: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PO1001 to PO1002: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Special parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PS1 to PS99: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PS1001 to PS1099: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PL1 to PL72: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PL1001 to PL1072: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PO1 to PO2, PO1001 to P1002

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PS1 to PS99, PS1001 to PS1099

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PL1, PL1001 Function selection L-1 **LIT1

PL2, PL1002 Linear encoder resolution setting Numerator **LIM

PL3, PL1003 Linear encoder resolution setting Denominator **LID

PL4, PL1004 Function selection L-2 *LIT2

PL5, PL1005 Position deviation error detection level LB1

PL6, PL1006 Speed deviation error detection level LB2

PL7, PL1007 Torque deviation error detection level LB3

PL8, PL1008 Function selection L-3 *LIT3

PL9, PL1009 Magnetic pole detection voltage level LPWM

PL10 to PL16, PL1010 to PL1016

For manufacturer setting -

PL17, PL1017 Mag. pole detn. - Min. pos. detn. meth. - Func. sel. LTSTS

PL18, PL1018 Mag.pole detn.-Min.pos.detn.meth.-Ident.sig.amp. IDLV

PL19 to PL72, PL1019 to PL1072

For manufacturer setting -

88 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Multi encoder parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PU1 to PU44: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PU1001 to PU1044: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier : Available : Not available

Positioning control parameters ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Use an appropriate device according to the write destination of the servo amplifier. PVS1 to PVS32: Writing data to the RAM of a servo amplifier PVS1001 to PVS1032: Writing data to the FlashROM or EEPROM of a servo amplifier For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PU1 to PU44, PU1001 to PU1044

For manufacturer setting -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

PVS1, PVS1001 Profile speed command extension setting PVC2

PVS2, PVS1002 For manufacturer setting -

PVS3, PVS1003 Maximum profile speed extension setting MPVCE

PVS4, PVS1004 For manufacturer setting -

PVS5, PVS1005 Profile acceleration PACC

PVS6, PVS1006 For manufacturer setting -

PVS7, PVS1007 Profile deceleration PDEC

PVS8, PVS1008 For manufacturer setting -

PVS9, PVS1009 Forced stop deceleration RSBDEC

PVS10, PVS1010 For manufacturer setting -

PVS11, PVS1011 Home position return speed extension setting ZRFE

PVS12, PVS1012 For manufacturer setting -

PVS13, PVS1013 Creep speed extension setting CRFE

PVS14, PVS1014 For manufacturer setting -

PVS15, PVS1015 Home position return acceleration HMACC

PVS16, PVS1016 For manufacturer setting -

PVS17, PVS1017 Home position return deceleration HMDEC

PVS18, PVS1018 For manufacturer setting -

PVS19, PVS1019 Speed reached 2 output range extension setting SA2RE

PVS20, PVS1020 Zero speed 2 level extension setting ZSP2LE

PVS21, PVS1021 Speed limit extension setting VLMTE

PVS22, PVS1022 For manufacturer setting -

PVS23, PVS1023 Speed unit conversion electronic gear numerator *VCMX

PVS24, PVS1024 Speed unit conversion electronic gear denominator *VCDV

PVS25, PVS1025 Acceleration unit conversion electronic gear nmrtr. *ACMX

PVS26, PVS1026 Acceleration unit conversion electronic gear dnmntr. *ACDV

PVS27 to PVS28, PVS1027 to PVS1028

For manufacturer setting -

PVS29, PVS1029 Acceleration limit ACCLMT

PVS30, PVS1030 For manufacturer setting -

PVS31, PVS1031 Deceleration limit DECLMT

PVS32, PVS1032 For manufacturer setting -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1689

16

Network basic parameter ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) Set [Data Type] and [Format] as shown below for the objects for which this device is set. [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN32] [Format]: [Hexadecimal] : Available : Not available

Gear failure diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Encoder communication circuit diagnosis data ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Life Diagnosis ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

NPA1 IP address setting -

NPA2 IP address -

NPA3 For manufacturer setting -

NPA4 Subnet mask -

NPA5 to NPA7 For manufacturer setting -

NPA8 Host name -

NPA9 to NPA11 For manufacturer setting -

NPA12 Communication speed -

NPA2001 to NPA2032 Host name expansion area -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

GFDS0 Backlash estimation (threshold) -

GFDS1 Backlash estimation (estimation value) -

GFDS2 Backlash estimation (estimation progress) -

GFDS3 Backlash estimation (status) -

GFDS4 Backlash error number -

GFDS5 Backlash estimation move distance -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ECCDS0 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis possibility -

ECCDS1 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis possibility -

ECCDS2 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis status -

ECCDS3 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis status -

ECCDS4 CN2 encoder communication circuit diagnosis result -

ECCDS5 CN2L encoder communication circuit diagnosis result -

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

ALD0 Cumulative power-on time -

ALD1 Number of inrush current switching times -

90 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Input signal for test operation (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the input signal for test operation (for test operation), note the following.

Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

When using the forced output of signal pin (for test operation), note the following.

Set data (for test operation) ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) : Available : Not available

Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSERVO-J5(W)-*G(-RJ), -JET-*G]) For the precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices, refer to the following. Page 1452 Precautions for virtual servo amplifier devices ([MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D], [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D])

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 -

TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 -

TMI2 For manufacturer setting -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

TMO0 Forced output from signal pin -

Precautions Description Writing a value to a virtual device using an object Numerical input cannot be used.

Use a word switch for writing.

Virtual device name

Name Symbol MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W-G

MR-JET-G MR-J5D-G

TMD0 Motor speed -

TMD1 Write acceleration/deceleration time constant -

TMD3 Move distance -

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1691

16

[FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1692 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1694 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1692 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Page 1692 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Specifications of word devices Page 1693 Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Page 1693 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices

Page 1694 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

RS Inverter status monitor Decimal 0 to 15

WS Operation command Decimal 0 to 15

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

RS R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

WS -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

92 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1693 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1694 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for SP111 to SP114. Only writing is available for SP124 and SP125.

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

A Alarm definition Decimal 0 to 7

Pr Parameter Decimal 0 to 1500

PG Program operation Decimal 0 to 89

SP Special parameter Decimal 108 to 127

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data A R/- -/- -/- -/-

Pr R/W -/- -/- -/-

PG R/W -/- -/- -/-

SP*1 R/W -/- -/- -/-

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1693

16

Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data. For details on the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The settable devices vary by inverter model. For the settable devices of each inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required.

Example) When using the FR-A700 series

Virtual device name

Reference

RS Page 1694 Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

WS Page 1695 Operation command ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Page 1696 Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

A Page 1697 Alarm definition ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Pr Page 1697 Parameter ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

PG Page 1698 Programmed operation ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

SP Page 1699 Special parameter ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Page 1700 Specifications of SP122 and SP121([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

Virtual device name Name RS0 Inverter running (RUN)

RS1 Forward rotation (STF)

RS2 Reverse rotation (STR)

RS3 Up to frequency (SU)

RS4 Overload (OL)

RS5 Instantaneous power failure (IPF)

RS6 Frequency detection (FU)

RS7 Fault occurrence (ABC1)

RS8 ABC2

RS15 Fault occurrence

94 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation command ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The settable devices vary by inverter model. For the settable devices of each inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required.

Example) When using the FR-A700 series

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multispeed operation (WS3 to WS7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used. For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the operations below. Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer link operation mode), and then operate the inverter. Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109, SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122).

*2 The initial status is invalid. The virtual device becomes operable by writing a value in the corresponding parameter shown below to change the signal. WS8: Pr.185 WS9: Pr.186 WS10: Pr.188 WS11: Pr.189 For the relationship between the parameter values and signals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

When using the operation command, note the following.

Virtual device name Name WS0 Current input selection (AU)

WS1 Forward rotation (STF)

WS2 Reverse rotation (STR)

WS3*1 Low speed operation (RL)

WS4*1 Middle speed operation (RM)

WS5*1 High speed operation (RH)

WS6*1 Second function selection (RT)

WS7*1 Output stop (MRS)

WS8*2 JOG operation (JOG)

WS9*2 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (CS)

WS10*2 Start self-holding selection (STOP)

WS11*2 Reset (RES)

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

When activating WS devices Page 1696 Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1695

16

Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) More than one WS device cannot turn on at once. Turning on one WS device turns off the other WS devices. Use SP122 or SP121 to turn on multiple WS devices simultaneously. Page 1700 Specifications of SP122 and SP121([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The following shows the specifications of WS devices.

WS device Specifications WS0 to WS7 GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (instruction code: HFA, bit length: 8 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter WS0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) WS1: Forward rotation command WS2: Reverse rotation command WS3: RL (Low-speed operation command) WS4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) WS5: RH (High-speed operation command) WS6: RT (Second function selection) WS7: MRS (Output stop)

When you turn on one of the WS0 to WS7 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Example) When you turn on WS1 WS0 and WS2 to WS7 are turned off.

WS8 to WS15 WS8 to WS11 are GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (extended) (instruction code: HF9, bit length: 16 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter WS8: JOG (Jog operation selection) WS9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) WS10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) WS11: RES (Inverter reset)

Turning on a device out of WS8 to WS11 turns off WS0 to WS15 except the one that is turned on. Example) When you turn on WS9 WS0 to WS8 and WS10 to WS15 are turned off.

Operation command b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WS0 WS1 WS2 WS3 WS4 WS5 WS6 WS7

Operation command (extended) b15 b7 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fixed to 0 WS8 WS9 WS10 WS11 Not used

96 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Alarm definition ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The settable devices vary by inverter model. For the settable devices of each inverter, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Parameter ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The virtual device numbers (Pr) used in the GOT correspond to the inverter parameter numbers. For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used When using a parameter, note the following.

Virtual device name Name A0 Second fault in past

A1 Latest fault

A2 Fourth fault in past

A3 Third fault in past

A4 Sixth fault in past

A5 Fifth fault in past

A6 Eighth fault in past

A7 Seventh fault in past

Precautions Description When creating a screen using a parameter (Pr) Specify a PG device (Programmed operation) or Pr device (Parameter).

Do not specify PG devices (PG0 to PG89) and Pr devices (Pr900 to Pr905) together on one screen.

When setting 8888 or 9999 to a parameter (Pr) of an inverter

Values 8888 and 9999 are used for particular purposes. To set these values to inverter parameters, write the following values to the GOT virtual device. To set 8888: 65520 To set 9999: 65535

When specifying Pr900 to Pr933 (Calibration parameter) or Pr934 and Pr935 (PID display)

If you specify Pr900 to Pr933 (Calibration parameter), or Pr934 and Pr935 (PID display), whether the value below must be written to SP108 (Second parameter changing) depends on the specified device number and inverter model. H00: Offset/gain H01: Analog H02: Analog value at terminal

Parameters that cannot be monitored The GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of FR-E500, FR-S500(E), FR-F500J, FR-D700, FR- F700PJ, and FR-E700 series.

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1697

16

Programmed operation ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) The virtual devices below correspond to the parameters (Pr.201 to Pr.230) of the FR-A500 series.

*1 To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70 to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8 bits, and minute or second in the lower 8 bits. Example) To set 12 minutes 35 seconds Value written to the upper 8 bits: H0C (hexadecimal value of 12) Value written to the lower 8 bits: H23 (hexadecimal value of 35) Write H0C23 (decimal value of 3017) to the device.

When using the programmed operation, note the following.

Virtual device name Name PG0 to PG9 Program set 1 (running frequency)

PG10 to PG19*1 Program set 1 (time)

PG20 to PG29 Program set 1 (rotation direction)

PG30 to PG39 Program set 2 (running frequency)

PG40 to PG49*1 Program set 2 (time)

PG50 to PG59 Program set 2 (rotation direction)

PG60 to PG69 Program set 3 (running frequency)

PG70 to PG79*1 Program set 3 (time)

PG80 to PG89 Program set 3 (rotation direction)

Precautions Description When creating a screen using the programmed operation (PG)

Specify a PG device (Programmed operation) or Pr device (Parameter). Do not specify PG devices (PG0 to PG89) and Pr devices (Pr900 to Pr905) together on one screen.

98 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Special parameter ([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) If the GOT reads or writes data from or to a virtual device (SP), the inverter's instruction code corresponding to the SP device is used for communication. For instruction details, and values to be read and written, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*1 GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below are satisfied at the same time. (Only FR-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/E700 series) Pr37 0 SP127 = 1

*2 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multispeed operation (WS3 to WS7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used. For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the operations below. Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer link operation mode), and then operate the inverter. Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109, SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122).

*3 For the specifications of SP122 and SP121, refer to the following. Page 1700 Specifications of SP122 and SP121([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO])

*4 If the GOT is connected to the PU port of the FR-A500/E500/F500 (excluding the FR-F500J), the connected inverter is in the external operation mode at power-on. To change parameters from the GOT, change the value of SP123 to 2 (PU operation mode) in advance.

Virtual device name Name Instruction code

Read Writing SP108 Second parameter changing 6CH ECH

SP109*1 Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH

SP110*1 Set frequency (RAM, EEPROM) 6EH EEH

SP111*1 Output frequency 6FH -

SP112 Output current 70H -

SP113 Output voltage 71H -

SP114 Special monitor 72H -

SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H

SP116 Faults history batch clear - F4H

Latest fault, Second fault in past 74H -

SP117 Third fault in past, Fourth fault in past 75H -

SP118 Fifth fault in past, Sixth fault in past 76H -

SP119 Seventh fault in past, Eighth fault in past 77H -

SP121*2*3 Inverter status monitor (extended) 79H F9H

Operation command (extended)

SP122*2*3 Inverter status monitor 7AH -

Operation command - FAH

SP123*4 Operation mode 7BH FBH

SP124 All parameter clear - FCH

SP125 Inverter reset - FDH

SP127 Link parameter extended setting 7FH FFH

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1699

17

Specifications of SP122 and SP121([FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO]) SP122 and SP121 are the GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's ordinary and extended operation commands. The following shows the specifications of SP122 and SP121.

SP device Specifications SP122 GOT's virtual device corresponding to the inverter's operation command (instruction code: HFA, bit length: 8 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter SP122.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP122.b1: Forward rotation command SP122.b2: Reverse rotation command SP122.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP122.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP122.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP122.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP122.b7: MRS (Output stop)

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the bits to be turned on to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP122. Example) Sending forward rotation command and RL (Low-speed operation command) simultaneously Binary: 00001010 Decimal: 10 Write 10 to SP122.

SP121 GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (extended) (instruction code: HF9, bit length: 16 bits). The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter SP121.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP121.b1: Forward rotation command SP121.b2: Reverse rotation command SP121.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP121.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP121.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP121.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP121.b7: MRS (Output stop) SP121.b8: JOG (Jog operation selection) SP121.b9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) SP121.b10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) SP121.b11: RES (Inverter reset) SP121.b12 to SP122.b15: Not used

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the device (with applicable bits on) to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP121. Example) Sending forward rotation command, RL (Low-speed operation command), and JOG (Jog operation selection) simultaneously Binary: 0000000100001010 Decimal: 266 Write 266 to SP121.

00 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[FREQROL 800]

When [Automatic Negotiation] is set to [Yes] in the GOT communication settings, the inverter parameters are reconfigured within the user-specified negotiation time. If the automatic connection fails, set the longer negotiation time with GT Designer3 or the utility.

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 800]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1702 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1703 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Functions are assigned to the SM devices by using the PLC function. Do not write data from the GOT.

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1701 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 800])

Page 1702 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800])

Specifications of word devices Page 1702 Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 800])

Page 1703 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices

Page 1703 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

RS Inverter status monitor Decimal 0 to 15

WS Operation command Decimal 0 to 15

X Input Hexadecimal 00 to 7F

Y Output Hexadecimal 00 to 7F

M Internal relay Decimal 0 to 127

TC Timer coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

TT Timer contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

CC Counter coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

CT Counter contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SC Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SS Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SM*2 Special relay Decimal 0 to 2047

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1701

17

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 800]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1703 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1703 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

RS R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

WS -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

A Alarm definition Decimal 0 to 7

Pr Parameter Decimal 0 to 1500

SP Special parameter Decimal 108 to 127

TN Timer current value Decimal 0 to 15

CN Counter current value Decimal 0 to 15

SN Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 15

D Data register Decimal 0 to 255

SD Special register Decimal 0 to 2047

02 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for SP111 to SP114 and SP117 to SP119. Only writing is available for SP124 and SP125.

Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data. For details on the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 800]) Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required. Manual of the inverter used

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data A R/- -/- -/- -/-

Pr R/W -/- -/- -/-

SP*1 R/W -/- -/- -/-

TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W -/- R/W

SD R/W R/W -/- R/W

Virtual device name

Reference

RS Page 1703 Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 800])

WS Page 1704 Operation command ([FREQROL 800])

Page 1705 Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 800])

A Page 1706 Alarm definition ([FREQROL 800])

Pr Page 1706 Parameter ([FREQROL 800])

SP Page 1707 Special parameter ([FREQROL 800])

Page 1708 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800])

Virtual device name Name RS0 RUN (Inverter running)

RS1 During forward rotation

RS2 During reverse rotation

RS3 SU (Up to frequency)

RS4 OL (Overload warning)

RS5 IPF (Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage)

RS6 FU (Output frequency detection)

RS7 ABC1 (Fault)

RS8 ABC2

RS9 Safety monitor output

RS15 Fault occurrence

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1703

17

Operation command ([FREQROL 800]) Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required. Manual of the inverter used

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the relevant setting in Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

When using the operation command, note the following.

Virtual device name Name WS0*1*2 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)

WS1 Forward rotation command

WS2 Reverse rotation command

WS3*1*2 RL (Low-speed operation command)

WS4*1*2 RM (Middle-speed operation command)

WS5*1*2 RH (High-speed operation command)

WS6*1*2 RT (Second function selection)

WS7*1*2 MRS (Output stop)

WS8*1*2*3 JOG (Jog operation selection)

WS9*1*2*3 CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start)

WS10*1*2*3 STOP (Start self-holding selection)

WS11*1*2*3 RES (Inverter reset)

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

When activating WS devices Page 1705 Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 800])

04 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Activating WS devices ([FREQROL 800]) More than one WS device cannot turn on at once. Turning on one WS device turns off the other WS devices. Use SP122 or SP121 to turn on multiple WS devices simultaneously. Page 1708 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800]) The following shows the specifications of WS devices.

WS device Specifications WS0 to WS7 GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (instruction code: HFA, bit length: 8 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter WS0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) WS1: Forward rotation command WS2: Reverse rotation command WS3: RL (Low-speed operation command) WS4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) WS5: RH (High-speed operation command) WS6: RT (Second function selection) WS7: MRS (Output stop)

When you turn on one of the WS0 to WS7 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Example) When you turn on WS1 WS0 and WS2 to WS7 are turned off.

WS8 to WS15 WS8 to WS11 are GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (extended) (instruction code: HF9, bit length: 16 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter WS8: JOG (Jog operation selection) WS9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) WS10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) WS11: RES (Inverter reset)

Turning on a device out of WS8 to WS11 turns off WS0 to WS15 except the one that is turned on. Example) When you turn on WS9 WS0 to WS8 and WS10 to WS15 are turned off.

Operation command b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WS0 WS1 WS2 WS3 WS4 WS5 WS6 WS7

Operation command (extended) b15 b7 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fixed to 0 WS8 WS9 WS10 WS11 Not used

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1705

17

Alarm definition ([FREQROL 800])

Parameter ([FREQROL 800]) The virtual device numbers (Pr) used in the GOT correspond to the inverter parameter numbers. For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used When using a parameter, note the following.

Virtual device name Name A0 Second fault in past

A1 Latest fault

A2 Fourth fault in past

A3 Third fault in past

A4 Sixth fault in past

A5 Fifth fault in past

A6 Eighth fault in past

A7 Seventh fault in past

Precautions Description When setting 8888 or 9999 to a parameter (Pr) of an inverter

Values 8888 and 9999 are used for particular purposes. To set these values to inverter parameters, write the following values to the GOT virtual device. To set 8888: 65520 To set 9999: 65535

When specifying Pr900 to Pr933 (Calibration parameter) or Pr934 and Pr935 (PID display)

If you specify Pr900 to Pr933 (Calibration parameter), or Pr934 and Pr935 (PID display), whether the value below must be written to SP108 (Second parameter changing) depends on the specified device number and inverter model. H00: Offset/gain H01: Analog H02: Analog value at terminal

06 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Special parameter ([FREQROL 800]) If the GOT reads or writes data from or to a virtual device (SP), the inverter's instruction code corresponding to the SP device is used for communication. For instruction details, and values to be read and written, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multispeed operation (WS3 to WS7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used. For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the operations below. Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer link operation mode), and then operate the inverter. Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109, SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122).

*2 For the specifications of SP122 and SP121, refer to the following. Page 1708 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800])

Virtual device name Name Instruction code

Read Writing SP108 Second parameter changing 6CH ECH

SP109 Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH

SP110 Set frequency (RAM, EEPROM) 6EH EEH

SP111 Output frequency/speed 6FH -

SP112 Output current 70H -

SP113 Output voltage 71H -

SP114 Special monitor 72H -

SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H

SP116 Faults history batch clear - F4H

Latest fault, Second fault in past 74H -

SP117 Third fault in past, Fourth fault in past 75H -

SP118 Fifth fault in past, Sixth fault in past 76H -

SP119 Seventh fault in past, Eighth fault in past 77H -

SP121*1*2 Inverter status monitor (extended) 79H F9H

Operation command (extended)

SP122*1*2 Inverter status monitor 7AH -

Operation command - FAH

SP123 Operation mode 7BH FBH

SP124 All parameter clear - FCH

SP125 Inverter reset - FDH

SP127 Link parameter extended setting 7FH FFH

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1707

17

Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800]) SP122 and SP121 are the GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's ordinary and extended operation commands. The following shows the specifications of SP122 and SP121.

SP device Specifications SP122 GOT's virtual device corresponding to the inverter's operation command (instruction code: HFA, bit length: 8 bits).

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter SP122.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP122.b1: Forward rotation command SP122.b2: Reverse rotation command SP122.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP122.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP122.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP122.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP122.b7: MRS (Output stop)

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the bits to be turned on to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP122. Example) Sending forward rotation command and RL (Low-speed operation command) simultaneously Binary: 00001010 Decimal: 10 Write 10 to SP122.

SP121 GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands (extended) (instruction code: HF9, bit length: 16 bits). The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter SP121.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP121.b1: Forward rotation command SP121.b2: Reverse rotation command SP121.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP121.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP121.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP121.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP121.b7: MRS (Output stop) SP121.b8: JOG (Jog operation selection) SP121.b9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) SP121.b10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) SP121.b11: RES (Inverter reset) SP121.b12 to SP122.b15: Not used

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the device (with applicable bits on) to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP121. Example) Sending forward rotation command, RL (Low-speed operation command), and JOG (Jog operation selection) simultaneously Binary: 0000000100001010 Decimal: 266 Write 266 to SP121.

08 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual bit devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1710 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1712 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Not available to FR-E70-NE. *3 Functions are assigned to the SM devices by using the PLC function.

Do not write data from the GOT.

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1709 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1710 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Specifications of word devices Page 1710 Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1711 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Specifications of double-word devices Page 1711 Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1712 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Specifications of virtual inverter devices

Page 1712 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

RS Inverter status monitor Decimal 0 to 15

WS Operation command Decimal 0 to 15

IOST I/O terminal monitor Decimal 0 to 127

CMD Operation command Decimal 0 to 63

X*2 Input Hexadecimal 00 to 7F

Y*2 Output Hexadecimal 00 to 7F

M*2 Internal relay Decimal 0 to 127

TC*2 Timer coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

TT*2 Timer contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

CC*2 Counter coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

CT*2 Counter contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SC*2 Retentive timer coil Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SS*2 Retentive timer contact Decimal 0 to 15 (Not usable as word data)

SM*2*3 Special relay Decimal 0 to 2047

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1709

17

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Monitoring-supported word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual word devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1711 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1712 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 Not available to FR-E70-NE.

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits)

Quad-word (64 bits)

RS R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

WS -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

IOST R/- -/- -/- -/- -/-

CMD -/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

X R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Y R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

M R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

TC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

TT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

CT R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SC R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SS R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

SM R/W -/- R/W R/W -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

A Alarm definition Decimal 0 to 7

Pr Parameter Decimal 0 to 1500

SP Special parameter Decimal 108 to 127

TN*2 Timer current value Decimal 0 to 15

CN*2 Counter current value Decimal 0 to 15

SN*2 Retentive timer current value Decimal 0 to 15

D*2 Data register Decimal 0 to 255

SD*2 Special register Decimal 0 to 2047

10 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for SP111 to SP114 and SP117 to SP119. Only writing is available for SP124 and SP125.

Monitoring-supported double-word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following table shows monitoring-supported virtual double-word devices for inverters. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1712 Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) For details on virtual inverter devices, refer to the following. Page 1712 Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 If you specify LPr900 to LPr935, the following item is displayed in the device setting dialog. [Setting items (for calibration parameters)]: [Bias/gain value], [Analog input value] Enclose the device number in parentheses when selecting [Analog input value]. Example 1) Notation when [Bias/gain value] is selected: LPr900 Example 2) Notation when [Analog input value] is selected: LPr(900) When LPr900 or LPr901 (Calibration parameter) is specified, selecting [Bias/gain value] or [Analog input value] does not affect the monitoring target.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data A R/- -/- -/- -/-

Pr R/W -/- -/- -/-

SP*1 R/W -/- -/- -/-

TN R/W R/W -/- -/-

CN R/W R/W -/- -/-

SN R/W R/W -/- -/-

D R/W R/W -/- R/W

SD R/W R/W -/- R/W

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

AL Faults history Decimal 0 to 899

LPr*2 Parameter (32-bit) Decimal 0 to 1500

OP Operation parameters Decimal 0 to 5

PV Current value monitor Decimal 1 to 143

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1711

17

Availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices ([FREQROL 800/ E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from double-word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

*1 Only reading is available for OP3. Only writing is available for OP4 and OP5.

Virtual inverter devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The following shows the correspondence between the virtual devices used in the GOT and the inverter data. For details on the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*1 The virtual device is also usable for the controller whose type is [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] or [FREQROL 800]. Use the device to maintain compatibility when you change the controller type in a project from any of the above ones to [FREQROL 800(Batch monitor)]. When you create a project, use a different device.

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of double-word data AL -/- R/- -/- -/-

LPr -/- R/W -/- -/-

OP*1 -/- R/W -/- -/-

PV -/- R/- -/- -/-

Virtual device name Reference RS*1 Page 1713 Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

WS*1 Page 1714 Operation command ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1715 Operation when turning on/off the WS devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

IOST Page 1716 I/O terminal monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

CMD Page 1718 Operation command ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1719 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1719 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

A*1 Page 1720 Alarm definition ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Pr*1 Page 1720 Parameter, parameter (32-bit) ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

SP*1 Page 1721 Special parameter ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Page 1722 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

AL Page 1723 Faults history ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

LPr Page 1720 Parameter, parameter (32-bit) ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

OP Page 1725 Operation parameter ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

PV Page 1726 Current value monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

12 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

The lists of virtual devices shown in this section explain the FR-A800 Plus series and FR-E800 series models using the following abbreviations.

Inverter status monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required. Manual of the inverter used : Available : Not available

*1 The description can be changed by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (input terminal function selection). For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

Series Abbreviation Model FR-A800 Plus series CRN FR-A80-CRN

FR-A82-CRN FR-A80-E-CRN FR-A82-E-CRN

R2R FR-A80-R2R FR-A82-R2R FR-A80-E-R2R FR-A82-E-R2R

AWH FR-A80-AWH FR-A80-E-AWH

LC FR-A80-LC FR-A80-E-LC

FR-E800 series E800 FR-E80

E FR-E80-E

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

RS0 RUN (Inverter running) *1 *1 *1

RS1 During forward rotation

RS2 During reverse rotation

RS3 SU (Up to frequency) *1

RS4 OL (Overload warning) *1

RS5 IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage)

*1

RS6 FU (Output frequency detection) *1 *1 *1

RS7 ABC1 (Fault) *1 *1 *1

RS8 ABC2 *1

RS9 Safety monitor output

RS15 Fault occurrence

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1713

17

Operation command ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) Parameter settings may have been changed in the inverter. To use the devices, check the parameters and set the parameters as required. Manual of the inverter used : Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the relevant setting in Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

When using the operation command, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

WS0*1 AU (Terminal 4 input selection) *2

WS1 Forward rotation command

WS2 Reverse rotation command

WS3*1 RL (Low-speed operation command) *2 *2 *2

WS4*1 RM (Middle-speed operation command)

*2 *2 *2

WS5*1 RH (High-speed operation command) *2 *2 *2

WS6*1 RT (Second function selection) *2

WS7*1 MRS (Output stop) *2 *2 *2

WS8*1 JOG (Jog operation selection) *2*3

WS9*1 CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start)

*2*3

WS10*1 STOP (Start self-holding selection) *2*3

WS11*1 RES (Inverter reset) *2*3 *2*3 *2

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

When activating WS devices Page 1715 Operation when turning on/off the WS devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

14 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation when turning on/off the WS devices ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) When you turn on/off one of the WS0 to WS15 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Example) When you turn on WS9 WS0 to WS8 and WS10 to WS15 are turned off. The following shows the relationship between the inverter's operation commands and WS devices.

The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter WS0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) WS1: Forward rotation command WS2: Reverse rotation command WS3: RL (Low-speed operation command) WS4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) WS5: RH (High-speed operation command) WS6: RT (Second function selection) WS7: MRS (Output stop) WS8: JOG (Jog operation selection) WS9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) WS10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) WS11: RES (Inverter reset)

Use SP122 or SP121 to control multiple WS devices simultaneously. Page 1722 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Operation command b15 b7 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WS0 WS1 WS2 WS3 WS4 WS5 WS6 WS7 WS8 WS9 WS10 WS11 Not used

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1715

17

I/O terminal monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

E800 E FR-E70-NE

IOST1 Input terminal STF/DI0 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST2 Input terminal STR/DI1 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST3 Input terminal RL *1 *1 *1

IOST4 Input terminal RM *1 *1 *1

IOST5 Input terminal RH *1 *1 *1

IOST6 Input terminal RT *1

IOST7 Input terminal AU *1

IOST8 Input terminal JOG *1

IOST9 Input terminal CS *1

IOST10 Input terminal MRS *1 *1 *1

IOST11 Input terminal STOP *1

IOST12 Input terminal RES *1 *1 *1

IOST32 Output terminal RUN *1 *1 *1

IOST33 Output terminal SU *1

IOST34 Output terminal IPF *1

IOST35 Output terminal OL *1

IOST36 Output terminal FU *1 *1 *1

IOST37 Output terminal ABC1 *1 *1 *1 *1

IOST38 Output terminal ABC2 *1

IOST39 Output terminal SO

IOST48 NET Y1 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST49 NET Y2 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST50 NET Y3 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST51 NET Y4 output *1*2 *1*2

IOST64 Option input terminal X0

IOST65 Option input terminal X1

IOST66 Option input terminal X2

IOST67 Option input terminal X3

IOST68 Option input terminal X4

IOST69 Option input terminal X5

IOST70 Option input terminal X6

IOST71 Option input terminal X7

IOST72 Option input terminal X8

IOST73 Option input terminal X9

IOST74 Option input terminal X10

IOST75 Option input terminal X11

IOST76 Option input terminal X12

IOST77 Option input terminal X13

IOST78 Option input terminal X14

IOST79 Option input terminal X15

IOST80 Option input terminal DY

IOST96 Option output terminal Y0/DO0 *1 *1 *1

IOST97 Option output terminal Y1/DO1 *1 *1 *1

IOST98 Option output terminal Y2/DO2 *1 *1 *1

IOST99 Option output terminal Y3/DO3 *1 *1 *1

IOST100 Option output terminal Y4/DO4 *1 *1 *1

IOST101 Option output terminal Y5/DO5 *1 *1 *1

IOST102 Option output terminal Y6/DO6 *1 *1 *1

16 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

*1 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 or Pr.313 to Pr.322 (output terminal function selection). For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*2 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

IOST103 Option output terminal RA1 *1 *1 *1

IOST104 Option output terminal RA2 *1 *1 *1

IOST105 Option output terminal RA3 *1 *1 *1

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

E800 E FR-E70-NE

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1717

17

Operation command ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the relevant setting in Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

*4 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

When using the operation command, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

CMD0 Stop command

CMD1 Forward rotation command

CMD2 Reverse rotation command

CMD3*1 RL terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD4*1 RM terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD5*1 RH terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD6*1 RT terminal *2

CMD7*1 AU terminal *2

CMD8*1 JOG terminal *2*3

CMD9*1 CS terminal *2*3

CMD10*1 MRS terminal *2 *2 *2

CMD11*1 STOP terminal *2*3

CMD12*1 RES terminal *2*3 *2*3 *2

CMD16 Alarm history clear

CMD24 Inverter reset

CMD32 Parameter clear

CMD33 Parameter clear (communication parameters are not cleared)

CMD34 All parameter clear

CMD35 All parameter clear (communication parameters are not cleared)

CMD48 NET X1 input *2*3*4

CMD49 NET X2 input *2*3*4

CMD50 NET X3 input *2*3*4

CMD51 NET X4 input *2*3*4

CMD52 NET X5 input *2*3*4

Precautions Description When setting a device for a bit switch Do not select [Alternate] for [Switch Action] of the bit switch.

Operation when a CMD device is turned on Page 1719 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([FREQROL 800/ E700NE(Batch monitor)]) Page 1719 Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices ([FREQROL 800/ E700NE(Batch monitor)])

18 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices ([FREQROL 800/ E700NE(Batch monitor)])

The CMD3 to CMD12 devices cannot be controlled simultaneously. When you turn on/off one of the CMD3 to CMD12 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Use OP4 to control multiple devices from CMD3 to CMD12 simultaneously. The following shows the relationship between CMD3 to CMD12 and OP4.

Example) Turning on the CMD3 (RL terminal) and CMD12 (RES terminal) devices For a hexadecimal value, write 0201. For a decimal value, write 513.

Operation when turning on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices ([FREQROL 800/ E700NE(Batch monitor)])

The CMD48 to CMD52 devices cannot be controlled simultaneously. When you turn on/off one of the CMD48 to CMD52 devices, the rest of these devices are turned off. Use OP5 to control multiple devices from CMD48 to CMD52 simultaneously. The following shows the relationship between CMD48 to CMD52 and OP5.

Example) Turning on the CMD48 (NET X1 input) and CMD52 (NET X5 input) devices For a hexadecimal value, write 0011. For a decimal value, write 17.

OP4 b15 b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CMD3 CMD4 CMD5 CMD6 CMD7 CMD8 CMD9 CMD10 CMD11 CMD12

b31 b23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

OP5 b15 b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CMD48 CMD49 CMD50 CMD51 CMD52

b31 b23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1719

17

Alarm definition ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

Parameter, parameter (32-bit) ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) The virtual device numbers (Pr and LPr) used in the GOT correspond to the inverter parameter numbers. For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used When using a parameter, note the following.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

A0 Second alarm in past

A1 Latest fault

A2 Fourth fault in past

A3 Third fault in past

A4 Sixth fault in past

A5 Fifth fault in past

A6 Eighth fault in past

A7 Seventh fault in past

Precautions Description When setting 8888 or 9999 to a parameter (Pr) of an inverter

Values 8888 and 9999 are used for particular purposes. To set these values to inverter parameters using the virtual devices, write the following values from the GOT. To set 8888: 65520 To set 9999: 65535

When setting 8888 or 9999 to a 32-bit parameter (LPr) of an inverter

Values 8888 and 9999 are used for particular purposes. To set these values to inverter parameters, write the following values to the GOT virtual device. To set 8888: 8888 To set 9999: 9999

You are recommended to set the data type to [Real] for a parameter that can accept a value with a fractional part.

When specifying a calibration parameter or PID display

If you specify Pr900 to Pr933 (Calibration parameter), or Pr934 and Pr935 (PID display), whether the value below must be written to SP108 (Second parameter changing) depends on the specified device number and inverter model. H00: Offset/gain H01: Analog H02: Analog value at terminal

20 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Special parameter ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, SP121.b1, SP121.b2, SP122.b1, and SP122.b2 can be used. For the specifications of SP122 and SP121, refer to the following. Page 1722 Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)])

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

SP108 Second parameter changing

SP109 Set frequency (RAM)

SP110 Set frequency (RAM, EEPROM)

SP111 Output frequency/speed

SP112 Output current

SP113 Output voltage

SP114 Special monitor

SP115 Special monitor selection No.

SP116 Latest fault, Second fault in past/Faults history batch clear

SP117 Third fault in past, fourth fault in past

SP118 Fifth fault in past, sixth fault in past

SP119 Seventh fault in past, Eighth fault in past

SP121*1 Inverter status monitor (extended) / Operation command (extended)

SP122*1 Inverter status monitor / Operation command

SP123 Operation mode

SP124 All parameter clear

SP125 Inverter reset

SP127 Link parameter extended setting

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1721

17

Specifications of SP122 and SP121 ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) SP122 and SP121 are the GOT's virtual devices corresponding to the inverter's operation commands. The following shows the specifications of SP122 and SP121.

SP device Specifications SP122 The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter.

Example) A800 series inverter SP122.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP122.b1: Forward rotation command SP122.b2: Reverse rotation command SP122.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP122.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP122.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP122.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP122.b7: MRS (Output stop) SP122.b8 to b15: Fixed to 0

SP122 (virtual device) is used to maintain compatibility when you change the controller type from [FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO] or [FREQROL 800] to [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]. When [FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)] is set, writing a value to SP122 clears each bit of SP122.b8 to SP122.b15.

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the bits to be turned on to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP122. Example) Sending forward rotation command and RL (Low-speed operation command) simultaneously Binary: 0000000000001010 Decimal: 10 Write 10 to SP122.

SP121 The function of each bit differs depending on the inverter. Example) A800 series inverter SP121.b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection) SP121.b1: Forward rotation command SP121.b2: Reverse rotation command SP121.b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) SP121.b4: RM (Middle-speed operation command) SP121.b5: RH (High-speed operation command) SP121.b6: RT (Second function selection) SP121.b7: MRS (Output stop) SP121.b8: JOG (Jog operation selection) SP121.b9: CS (Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start) SP121.b10: STOP (Start self-holding selection) SP121.b11: RES (Inverter reset)

To send more than one command simultaneously, convert the binary value of the device (with applicable bits on) to a decimal value, and write the decimal value to SP121. Example) Sending forward rotation command, RL (Low-speed operation command), and JOG (Jog operation selection) simultaneously Binary: 0000000100001010 Decimal: 266 Write 266 to SP121.

22 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Faults history ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

AL0 Current fault

AL1 Current warning 1

AL2 Current warning 2

AL100 Faults history 1 (symbol)

AL101 Faults history 1 (output frequency)

AL102 Faults history 1 (output current)

AL103 Faults history 1 (output voltage)

AL104 Faults history 1 (energization time)

AL105 Faults history 1 (year)

AL106 Faults history 1 (month)

AL107 Faults history 1 (day)

AL108 Faults history 1 (hour)

AL109 Faults history 1 (minute)

AL200 Faults history 2 (symbol)

AL201 Faults history 2 (output frequency)

AL202 Faults history 2 (output current)

AL203 Faults history 2 (output voltage)

AL204 Faults history 2 (energization time)

AL205 Faults history 2 (year)

AL206 Faults history 2 (month)

AL207 Faults history 2 (day)

AL208 Faults history 2 (hour)

AL209 Faults history 2 (minute)

AL300 Faults history 3 (symbol)

AL301 Faults history 3 (output frequency)

AL302 Faults history 3 (output current)

AL303 Faults history 3 (output voltage)

AL304 Faults history 3 (energization time)

AL305 Faults history 3 (year)

AL306 Faults history 3 (month)

AL307 Faults history 3 (day)

AL308 Faults history 3 (hour)

AL309 Faults history 3 (minute)

AL400 Faults history 4 (symbol)

AL401 Faults history 4 (output frequency)

AL402 Faults history 4 (output current)

AL403 Faults history 4 (output voltage)

AL404 Faults history 4 (energization time)

AL405 Faults history 4 (year)

AL406 Faults history 4 (month)

AL407 Faults history 4 (day)

AL408 Faults history 4 (hour)

AL409 Faults history 4 (minute)

AL500 Faults history 5 (symbol)

AL501 Faults history 5 (output frequency)

AL502 Faults history 5 (output current)

AL503 Faults history 5 (output voltage)

AL504 Faults history 5 (energization time)

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1723

17

AL505 Faults history 5 (year)

AL506 Faults history 5 (month)

AL507 Faults history 5 (day)

AL508 Faults history 5 (hour)

AL509 Faults history 5 (minute)

AL600 Faults history 6 (symbol)

AL601 Faults history 6 (output frequency)

AL602 Faults history 6 (output current)

AL603 Faults history 6 (output voltage)

AL604 Faults history 6 (energization time)

AL605 Faults history 6 (year)

AL606 Faults history 6 (month)

AL607 Faults history 6 (day)

AL608 Faults history 6 (hour)

AL609 Faults history 6 (minute)

AL700 Faults history 7 (symbol)

AL701 Faults history 7 (output frequency)

AL702 Faults history 7 (output current)

AL703 Faults history 7 (output voltage)

AL704 Faults history 7 (energization time)

AL705 Faults history 7 (year)

AL706 Faults history 7 (month)

AL707 Faults history 7 (day)

AL708 Faults history 7 (hour)

AL709 Faults history 7 (minute)

AL800 Faults history 8 (symbol)

AL801 Faults history 8 (output frequency)

AL802 Faults history 8 (output current)

AL803 Faults history 8 (output voltage)

AL804 Faults history 8 (energization time)

AL805 Faults history 8 (year)

AL806 Faults history 8 (month)

AL807 Faults history 8 (day)

AL808 Faults history 8 (hour)

AL809 Faults history 8 (minute)

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

24 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

Operation parameter ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

*1 When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the device cannot be used. *2 The monitor data can be changed by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

For the relationship between the parameters and terminals, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used

*3 The device is invalid for the initial state of the inverter in which a function that cannot be controlled by the GOT is set or no function is set. Change the relevant setting in Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

*4 Use an inverter having SERIAL (serial No.) "211******" or later. SERIAL (serial No.) is provided on the rating plate of the inverter.

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series FR-E700 series

FR-E70-NE

OP0 Operation frequency(RAM)

OP1 Operation frequency (EEPROM)

OP2 Operation mode

OP3 Operating status

OP4*1*2*3 - Input terminal command

b0 CMD3: RL terminal

b1 CMD4: RM terminal

b2 CMD5: RH terminal

b3 CMD6: RT terminal

b4 CMD7: AU terminal

b5 CMD8: JOG terminal

b6 CMD9: CS terminal

b7 CMD10: MRS terminal

b8 CMD11: STOP terminal

b9 CMD12: RES terminal

OP5*2 - Input terminal command (Extend) *4

b0 CMD48: NET X1 input

b1 CMD49: NET X2 input

b2 CMD50: NET X3 input

b3 CMD51: NET X4 input

b4 CMD52: NET X5 input

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1725

17

Current value monitor ([FREQROL 800/E700NE(Batch monitor)]) : Available : Not available

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE PV1 Output frequency/speed

Output frequency

PV2 Output current

PV3 Output voltage

PV5 Frequency setting value/speed setting

Frequency setting value

PV6 Speed/machine speed

Operation speed

PV7 Motor torque

PV8 Converter output voltage

PV9 Regenerative brake duty

PV10 Electronic thermal O/L relay load factor

PV11 Output current peak value

PV12 Converter output voltage peak value

PV13 Input power

PV14 Output power

PV17 Load meter

PV18 Motor excitation current

PV19 Position pulse

Analog output signal for dancer tension control

PV20 Cumulative energization time

PV22 Orientation status

Winding diameter

PV23 Actual operation time

PV24 Motor load factor

PV25 Cumulative power

PV26 Position command (lower digits)

Line speed command

PV27 Position command (upper digits)

Actual line speed

PV28 Current position (lower digits)

Dancer compensation speed

PV29 Current position (upper digits)

Winding length (upper + lower)

PV30 Droop pulse (lower digits)

Analog output signal 2 for dancer tension control

PV31 Droop pulse (upper digits)

Line speed pulse monitor

PV32 Torque command

PV33 Torque current command

PV34 Motor output

PV35 Feedback pulse

26 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

PV36 Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/negative polarity for regenerative braking torque)

PV38 Trace status

PV39 SSCNET III communication status

PV40 PLC function user monitor 1

PV41 PLC function user monitor 2

PV42 PLC function user monitor 3

PV43 Station number (RS-485 terminals)

PV44 Station number (PU)

PV45 Station number (CC-Link)

PV46 Motor temperature

PV50 Energy saving effect

PV51 Cumulative energy saving

PV52 PID set point

PV53 PID measured value

PV54 PID deviation

PV61 Motor thermal load factor

PV62 Inverter thermal load factor

PV63 Cumulative power 2

Winding length (upper)

PV64 PTC thermistor resistance

PV67 PID measured value 2

PV68 Emergency drive status

PV69 PID input pressure value

PV71 Cumulative pulse

PV72 Cumulative pulse overflow times

PV73 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option)

PV74 Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)

PV75 Multi-revolution counter

PV77 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits)

PV78 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits)

PV79 32-bit cumulative energy (lower 16 bits)

PV80 32-bit cumulative energy (upper 16 bits)

PV81 BACnet reception status

Tension command after taper compensation

PV82 BACnet token pass counter

Winding diameter compensation torque command

PV83 BACnet valid APDU counter

Inertia compensation

PV84 BACnet communication error counter

Mechanical loss compensation

PV85 BACnet terminal FM/CA output level

Terminal 1 input voltage

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1727

17

PV86 BACnet terminal AM output level

Terminal 1 input after calibration (%)

PV87 Remote output value 1

PV88 Remote output value 2

PV89 Remote output value 3

PV90 Remote output value 4

PV91 PID manipulated variable

PV92 Second PID set point

PID torque control actual tension

PV93 Second PID measured value

PID torque control manipulated tension

PV94 Second PID deviation

PV95 Second PID measured value 2

PV96 Second PID manipulated variable

PV97 Dancer main set speed (For FR-E800 and FR-E800-E, dancer main speed setting)

Winding diameter compensation speed

PV98 Control circuit temperature

Virtual device name

Name FR-A800 series

FR-A800 Plus series FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

FR-E700 series

CRN R2R AWH LC E800 E FR-E70-NE

28 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

A

[Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]

Only available to GT2104-PMBDS2.

Monitoring-supported bit devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) The following table shows monitoring-supported bit devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1729 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) The following shows whether writing/reading data to/from bit devices is available by device type. When the device type is other than the bit type, set the device No. in multiples of 16. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Monitoring-supported word devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) The following table shows monitoring-supported word devices. To check whether writing/reading data to/from each device is available, refer to the following. Page 1730 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) : Available : Not available

*1 For the devices assigned to EG devices (gateway devices) and the compatible clients, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Reference Specifications of bit devices Page 1729 Monitoring-supported bit devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11])

Page 1729 Availability of writing/reading data to/from bit devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11])

Specifications of word devices Page 1729 Monitoring-supported word devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11])

Page 1730 Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11])

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices

Access using a client

R Internal relay Decimal + hexadecimal

R(Word address)(Bit address) Notation example: R100F Word address (DEC): 000 to 999 Bit address (HEX): 0 to F

Device name Device type

Bit Byte (8 bits) Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) R R/W -/- -/- -/- -/-

Device name Device No. representation

Setting range Specifications of EG devices*1

Assignment to EG devices Access using a client DT Data register Decimal 0 to 99999

WR Internal relay Decimal 000 to 999

APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range 1729

17

Availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices ([Laser Displacement Sensor MH11]) The following shows the availability of writing/reading data to/from word devices by device type. R/W: Both read and write R/-: Read only -/W: Write only -/-: No read/write access

Device name Device type

Word (16 bits) Double-word (32 bits) Quad-word (64 bits) Bit of word data DT R/W R/W -/- R/W

WR R/W R/W -/- -/-

30 APPX Appendix 1 Settable Device Range

REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision date * Manual Number Revision Sep. 2013 SH(NA)-081197ENG-A Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.100E

Nov. 2013 SH(NA)-081197ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J Changing the icons of the supported models

Jan. 2014 SH(NA)-081197ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.108N FX3GE is supported. FR-A800 series, FR-F800 series, and sensorless servo (FR-E70EX) are supported. MELSERVO-JE is supported.

Apr. 2014 SH(NA)-081197ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.112S GT25 and GS21 have been added. Q24DHCCPU-VG is supported. Expansion of the device definition for inverters and sensorless servos is supported.

Jun. 2014 SH(NA)-081197ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.117X MELSEC iQ-R Series is supported. Communication driver (Serial (MELSEC)) is supported.

Jul. 2014 SH(NA)-081197ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.118Y MELSEC-WS connection of GS21 is supported. MELSEC-WS (WS0-CPU3) is supported.

Oct. 2014 SH(NA)-081197ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.122C GT21 is added. MR-J4-A-RJ is supported. IP Filter Setting is supported. Buffer memory

Module No. Indirect specification is supported. Bit specification is supported. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

It corresponds to CC-Link IE Controller Network via. The name of QnUDVCPU.LCPU Logging Configuration Tool is changed to CPU Module Logging

Configuration Tool.

Jan. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.126G C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) is supported. MELSEC iQ-F Series is supported. FA Transparent Function

MELSEC iQ-R Series MX Component, MX Sheet are supported. C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CW Configurator is supported. NC Configurator2 is supported.

Apr. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.130L Automatic connection with FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series for GT21 is supported. The cyclic communication with the master station of CC-Link connection (Intelligent Device station) is

supported. GT27 is added (GT2705-VTBD). GT21 is added (GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBLS).

May 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.131M Some corrections

Jun. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.134Q GT21 Robot controller connection is supported.

Jul. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.136S MELSEC iQ-R Series RnENCPU connection is supported. MELSEC iQ-R Series Device range extention (extended SRAM cassette is supported).

Oct. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-M Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.144A MELSEC iQ-R Series RnSFCPU connection is supported. MELSEC iQ-R Series R64MTCPU connection is supported. PLC CPU Device range extention (servo amplifier Device is supported). GT21 is added (GT2104-PMBD, GT2104-PMBDS). FA Transparent Function

GX Developer is supported.

1731

17

Dec. 2015 SH(NA)-081197ENG-N Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.150G Q26DHCCPU-LS is supported. Station blocking function compatible Ethernet connection Station monitoring function of the following connection

CC-Link IE controller network connection CC-Link IE field network connection MELSEC iQ-R Series Device placement method of RnMTCPU

R standard placement method is supported. FA Transparent Function

MX Component Ver 4.11M is supported.

May 2016 SH(NA)-081197ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.155M FR-A800 series (FR-A80-E, FR-A82-E, and FR-A86-E) is supported. CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1) is supported. Other station of the buffer memory is supported. FA Transparent Function

It supports via CC-Link IE controller network of GX Works3. It supports via CC-Link IE field network of GX Works2. GT21 is added (GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS).

Aug. 2016 SH(NA)-081197ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.160S MELSEC iQ-R Series Redundant Setting is supported. MELSEC iQ-R Series CC-Link IE Field Network head module is supported. MELSEC iQ-R Series compatible device is added.

Refresh register, Link direct device, CPU buffer memory access device Mitsubishi PLC (Ethernet connection) TCP/IP protocol is supported. Inverter connection is added.

FR-A800 Plus series, FR-B/B3 series GOT2000 series Ethernet communication unit is supported.

Oct. 2016 SH(NA)-081197ENG-Q Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.165X Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 connection is supported. (GT21 only) FR-F800 series (FR-F80-E and FR-F82-E) is supported. FA Transparent Function

It supports via CC-Link IE field network of GX Works3. RCPU Redundant Setting is supported. Servo axis No. switching is supported.

Jan. 2017 SH(NA)-081197ENG-R Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.170C GT2107-W is added (GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD). MR-J4-GF(-RJ) is supported.

Apr. 2017 SH(NA)-081197ENG-S Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.175H GT25 is added (GT25-W) MELSERVO JE-BF is supported

Jun. 2017 SH(NA)-081197ENG-T Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.180N GT25 is added (GT2505-V) CR800-R(R16RTCPU), CR800-D is supported. Name of the communication driver, [Ethernet(Mitsubishi Electric), Gateway] is changed. For Ethernet connection, the default value of the GOT station No. is changed to [18].

Oct. 2017 SH(NA)-081197ENG-U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.185T CNC M800/M80 is supported. MR-JE-C is supported. The use of the virtual device for manufacturer setting for MELSERVO-J4-A(-RJ), MELSERVO-JE-A by some

users is supported. FA Transparent Function

Correspondence of the following communication path for GX Works3, MT Works2, MX Component(MX Sheet) Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet Correspondence of the following communication path for GX Works2 in FXCPU Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet

Dec. 2017 SH(NA)-081197ENG-V Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1.190Y Compatible with R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU Compatible with avoiding overlapping of [GOT Port No. (Communication)]

Apr. 2018 SH(NA)-081197ENG-W Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1.195D FR-A800 series (FR-A80-GF and FR-A82-GF) is supported. MELIPC connection is supported. FA Transparent Function

Correspondence of the following communication path for GX Works3, MELSEC iQ-F Series Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet MI Configurator is supported.

Revision date * Manual Number Revision

32

Jul. 2018 SH(NA)-081197ENG-X Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.200J R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, and R120PSFCPU are supported. FR-E700 series (FR-E70-NE) is supported. FA transparent function

Between the personal computer and the GOT: USB, between the GOT and the PLC: Ethernet FR Configurator2 is supported.

Oct. 2018 SH(NA)-081197ENG-Y Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.205P CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) is supported. Serial connection to FR-A800 series (FR-A80-GF and FR-A82-GF) is supported. FA transparent function

For R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU, GX Works3 supports the following communication path. Between personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: EthernetBetween personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: CC-Link IE Controller Network Between personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: CC-Link IE Field Network Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: CC-Link IE Controller Network Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: CC-Link IE Field Network For CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU), RT ToolBox3 supports the following communication path. Between personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: Bus Between personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: Direct CPU Between personal computer and GOT: USB, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet For FR-A800 series and FR-F800 series, FR Configurator2 supports the following communication paths. Between personal computer and GOT: Ethernet, between GOT and PLC: Ethernet

Jan. 2019 SH(NA)-081197ENG-Z Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.210U Some corrections

Apr. 2019 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AA Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.215Z Specifying CPU numbers with devices is supported. Specifying module numbers with devices is supported.

Jul. 2019 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AB Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.220E CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. RCPU system monitoring via a QCPU is supported. Connection with CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2) by the Ethernet connection is

supported. FR-A800 Plus series (FR-A80-E-CRN, FR-A82-E-CRN, FR-A80-E-R2R, and FR-A82-E-R2R) is

supported.

Oct. 2019 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AC Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.225K FX5UJ is supported. Monitoring other networks using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. Specifying CPU numbers and module numbers with devices is supported by GT21 and GS21.

Jan. 2020 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AD Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.230Q FR-A800 series (FR-A80-GN and FR-A82-GN) is supported. FR-E800 series is supported. Connection to FR-A800, FR-F800, or FR-E800 series using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. Connection to an inverter through a PLC using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. FA transparent function

FR-E800 series is supported.

Apr. 2020 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AE Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.235V Motion module is supported. Reading/writing data from/to 8-bit and 64-bit devices are supported.

Jun. 2020 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AF Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.240A The company name of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD. has been changed to SHIBAURA MACHINE CO.,

LTD. Motion module (RD78GHV, RD78GHW) is supported. FR-A800 Plus series (FR-A80-AWH, FR-A80-E-AWH, FR-A80-LC, FR-A80-E-LC) is supported. MR-J5 series (MR-J5-G, MR-J5-G-RJ, MR-J5W2-G, and MR-J5W3-G) is supported.

Oct. 2020 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AG Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.245F Ring connection with the MELSEC iQ-R series using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. Connection with R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, or R120SFCPU using the CC-Link IE TSN

connection is supported. Connection with FX5U or FX5UC using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported. Connection with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (FX5-CCLGN-MS) using the Ethernet connection is

supported. The MR-JET series (MR-JET-G) is supported.

Jan. 2021 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AH Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.250L GT25 is added (GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD). GS21 is added (GS2110-WTBD-N, GS2107-WTBD-N).

Revision date * Manual Number Revision

1733

17

2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Apr. 2021 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AI Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.255R Connection with MELSEC iQ-R Series extension base unit for the redundant system is supported. Connection with MELSEC iQ-F Ethernet module (FX5-ENET, FX5-ENET/IP) is supported.

Jul. 2021 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AJ Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.260W Connection with the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is

supported. Connection with the MR-J5 series or MR-JET series using the Ethernet connection is supported. The range of virtual inverter devices has been extended. Direct CPU connection has been renamed to the direct CPU connection (serial).

Oct. 2021 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AK Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.265B MELSEC iQ-F series Motion module (FX5-40SSC-G, FX5-80SSC-G) is supported. FA transparent function

Connection with GX Works3 using the CC-Link IE TSN connection is supported.

Jan. 2022 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AL Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.270G FX3U-ENET is supported. MELSEC iQ-R series MELSECWinCPU module is supported. MR-J5(W)-B(-RJ) and MR-J5D-G4 are supported. FA transparent function

Connection with CW Configurator using the serial communication, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network is supported. FX Configurator-EN is supported.

Apr. 2022 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AM Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.275M Connection with controllers compatible with CC-Link IE TSN protocol version 2.0 using the CC-Link IE TSN

connection is supported. Connection with a PLC or MELIPC through a servo amplifier using Ethernet connection is supported. Connection with a servo amplifier (MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W2-G, MR-J5W3-G, or MR-JET-G) through a

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2) is supported. FX5S is supported.

Jul. 2022 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AN Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.280S Connection with the CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module (RJ71GN11-EIP) via Ethernet or CC-Link IE

TSN connection is supported. Connection with the Motion module (RD78G, RD78GH) operating as a master station via CC-Link IE TSN

connection is supported.

Oct. 2022 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AP Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.285X Connection with a servo amplifier (MR-J5-B(-RJ), MR-J5W2-B, or MR-J5W3-B) through a Motion

controller (R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, or R64MTCPU) or Simple Motion module (RD77MS2, RD77MS4, RD77MS8, or RD77MS16) is supported.

Jan. 2023 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AQ Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.290C The name of the communication driver for Ethernet connection to ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC has been changed.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

Revision date * Manual Number Revision

34

WARRANTY Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.

Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures,

judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as

earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from

Mitsubishi. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

(1) Gratis Warranty Term

(2) Gratis Warranty Range (a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.

If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customers expense. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.

Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.

(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.

Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

Overseas service

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. Changes in product specifications

(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.

(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal. Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.

Product application

(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for

damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

1735

1736 SH(NA)-081197ENG-AQ

Intellectual Property Rights Trademarks MELDAS, MELSEC, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, and CC-Link IE are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries. Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C#, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries. PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Oracle and JavaScript are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States and other countries. QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan, the United States, and/or other countries. Anybus is a registered trademark of HMS Industrial Networks AB. Android and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. Safari and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other countries. The iPhone trademark is used under license from AIPHONE CO., LTD. Intel and Intel Core are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Copyrights The screens (screenshots) are used in accordance with the Microsoft Corporation guideline.

SH(NA)-081197ENG-AQ(2301)MEE MODEL: GOT2000-CON1-SW1-E MODEL CODE: 1D7MJ8

Specifications subject to change without notice.

When exported from Japan, this manual does not

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GOT2000 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Connection Manual for Mitsubishi GOT2000 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Connection Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi GOT2000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Electric Connection Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.